User Manual

Version 11.2.1
Table of Contents

Copyright 103
What's New 104
VXelements 11.2.1 104
System requirements 104
Enhancements 104
Bug fixes 104
Tested software 105
Previous versions 106
VXelements 11.2.0 106
System requirements 106
VXscan-R 111
I/O Module 11.2.0 115
Polyworks inspection 115
Plugins and API 115
Bug fixes 115
Tested software 117
VXelements 11.1.1 118
Enhancements 118
Bug fixes 119
Tested software 121
VXelements 11.1.0 123
System requirements 123
Enhancements 123
Bug Fixes 126
Tested Software 127
VXelements 11.0.1 128
Enhancements 128
Bug Fixes 128
Tested Software 129
VXelements 11.0.0 130
System Requirements 130
Enhancements 131
Calibration 132
Volume Extension 132
Interface 133
Alignments 133
Entities 133
Mesh editing 134
Improve Mesh 134
Edit Mesh 135
Entity export & transfer 135
Interface 135
Features 135
Edit layout 137
Features 137
Finalize algorithm 138
Collaborative robots (FANUC) 138
Environmental compensation 138
Reference CAD model 138

2
 Interface 139
Export to I/O Module (FANUC) 139
Bug Fixes 139
Tested software 140
VXelements 10.0.4 141
Enhancements 141
Bug Fixes 142
Tested software 143
VXelements 10.0.3 144
Enhancements 144
Bug Fixes 144
Tested software 145
VXelements 10.0.2 146
Enhancements 146
Bug fixes 147
Tested software 148
VXelements 10.0.1 149
Enhancements 149
Bug fixes 150
Tested software 152
VXelements 10.0.0 152
Enhancements 153
Go!SCAN 161
C-Track 162
MetraSCAN-R 162
Bug fixes 162
Tested software 164

Safety Notice 165

Safety information 165
Safety information specific to the R-Series product line 165
Modification of products 166
Limits of operation of the products 166
General warnings and cautions 166
ACADEMIA 3D, Go!SCAN 3D, and Health Care Partner 3D scanners 166
Laser radiation 167
Calibration plate 167
Batteries (lithium ion cells) 168
Safe disposal 168
User Manual 168
General Information 170
Welcome 171
Information symbols 171
Training services 172
Contextual Help 173
To open/close the User Manual in contextual help mode 173
To find specific information 173
Search Tool 173
Help toolbar 174
Content search 174
Feedback option 174
Where to find more information 175

3
 To update the User Manual 175
System General Care 176
General use 176
Cords and cables 177
Metal and plastic parts 177
Optical parts 177
User calibration plate 177
MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R 177
Other products 178
Batteries 178
CUBE-R 178
Laser Information 181
Laser warning 181
Laser labels 181
HandySCAN 3D MAX 181
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited 182
HandySCAN BLACK 182
HandySCAN SILVER 183
HandySCAN SILVER|Elite 183
HandySCAN 700|Elite 184
HandySCAN 307|Elite 184
MetraSCAN BLACK 185
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN BLACK+, MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite 186
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD 186
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite 187
HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, HandySCAN 300, MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, MetraSCAN 750,
MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite 187

Service and Customer Care Plans 188

Standard warranty 188
Customer Care plans 188
Customer Support 188
Software update 188
Annual test, certification and calibration of the system 188
Need for service 189
Assistance 190
Show user manual 190
Keyboard shortcuts 190
Creaform Customer Portal 190
Diagnostic mode 190
Create system information file 190
Generate computer ID 191
Launch remote session 191
About VXelements 191
Send bug report 191
Customer support 191
Training services 192
Contact Us 193
Getting Started with VXelements 194
System Requirements 195

4
Software Installation 198
To install the software 198
To download files online 198
To uninstall the software 199
Product Manager 200
Product list 200
License status 200
Status symbols in the Product Manager 200
To add a product to the Product Manager 201
Automatic method (product detection) 201
Manual method 201
To activate 30-day trial license 201
To activate a product 201
To change or delete a product 202
Online Services 203
Overview 203
Online Services options 203
Disconnected services 203
To activate the Online Services 203
Activation for non-registered users 203
Activation for registered users 204
Forgot your password? 204
Online Services indicators 204
Access to support website 205
Software Updates and Licenses 206
Software update 206
Updating software using automatic download option with Online Services 206
Updating software using the Customer Portal 206
Calibration file update 207
To update the calibration file 207
License file update 208
To update the license file 208
VXmodel, VXinspect|Analysis, VXinspect|Quality Control, and VXscan-R modules 208
R-Series product licenses 208
Cloud license 208
To access the license 208
Online usage 209
Offline usage 209
Trial Licenses 210
To activate a trial license: 210
Hardware license 210
To update your hardware license 210
Software license 211
To activate, update or deactivate your software license 211
Network license 212
Network license configuration 212

Troubleshooting 214
Memory-related error messages 214
Product compatibility error messages 215
Examples 215
Product compatibility 215

5
 MetraSCAN 3D 215
C-Track 218
Products 220
Portable 3D scanners 220
Portable Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMMs) 220
Optical Coordinate Measuring Systems 221
Product Generations 222
Go!SCAN 3D Product Family 225
Go!SCAN SPARK 227
Go!SCAN SPARK Hardware and Components 228
Hardware 228
Components 229
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons 230
Smart Control 231
Go!SCAN SPARK Operating Principles 232
Go!SCAN SPARK Connection 234
Connection steps 234
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration 236
Purpose of calibration 236
To optimize the scanner calibration 236
Restore to the factory settings 237
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration 238
Automatic shutter 238
To configure the scanner 238
Purpose of configuration 239
Configuration preset 240
Default configuration 240
Go!SCAN SPARK Object Preparation 241
Instructions: 241

Go!SCAN SPARK Texture Feature 242

Texture quality 242

Go!SCAN SPARK Acquisition Rules 243

Scanning distance 243
Distance meter 243
Target or light stripes colors 243
Scanner sides LEDs colors 244
Field of view 244
Resume scan 245
Delete frames 246
Go!SCAN 3D Previous Generation 248
Go!SCAN 3D Hardware and Components 250
Go!SCAN 3D Operating Principles 253

6
Go!SCAN 3D System Connection 255
Connection steps 255
Go!SCAN 3D Calibration 257
System Configuration 259
Automatic shutter 259
To configure the scanner 259
Configuration preset 260
Go!SCAN 3D Object Preparation 261
Instructions: 261

Go!SCAN 3D Texture Feature 262

Texture license 262
Texture quality 262

Go!SCAN 3D Acquisition Rules 263

Scanning distance 263
Screen indicators 263
Positioning status 265
Field of view 265
Go!SCAN 20 266
Go!SCAN 50 266
Resume scan 266
Delete frames 268
Preview mode 268
HandySCAN 3D Product Family 269
Previous generation 270
HandySCAN 3D MAX Products 271
HandySCAN 3D MAX Laser Information 272
Laser warning 272
Laser labels 272
HandySCAN 3D MAX 272

HandySCAN 3D MAX Hardware and Components 273

Hardware 273
HandySCAN MAX Multifunction Buttons 275
Smart control options available 275
HandySCAN 3D MAX Operating Principles 277
HandySCAN 3D MAX Connection 278
Connection steps 278
HandySCAN 3D MAX Calibration 279
Purpose of calibration 279
Calibration methods 279
Real-time calibration 279
Optimal conditions 279
User calibration 280
User calibration equipment 280

7
 To perform the user calibration 280
HandySCAN 3D MAX Configuration 283
Purpose of configuration 283
Automatic shutter 283
To configure the scanner 283
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Object Preparation 284
Positioning target application and distribution 284
Target diameter 284
Example of proper and improper target distribution 284
Clip cards 285
Highly reflective or transparent objects 285
Small surfaces 285
HandySCAN 3D MAX Acquisition Rules 286
Scanning distance 286
Working volumes 286
Scale bar 286
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Products 287
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Laser Information 288
Laser warning 288
Laser labels 288
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite 288
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited 289

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Hardware and

Components 290
Hardware 290
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Multifunction
Buttons 292
Trigger button (1) light colors 292
Scanner 292
During acquisition 293
Smart control options available 293
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Operating Principles 294
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Connection 295
Connection steps 295
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Calibration 296
Purpose of calibration 296
Optimizing scanner calibration 296
Expected results 297
Restore to the factory settings 298
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Configuration 299
Purpose of configuration 299
Automatic shutter 299
To configure the scanner 299
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Object Preparation 300

8
 Positioning target application and distribution 300
Target diameter 300
Example of proper and improper target distribution 300
Clip cards 301
Highly reflective or transparent objects 301
Small surfaces 301
Acquisition Rules 302
Scanning distance 302
Scale bar 302
Scale bar detection 302
Scale bar mode stand-off distance 303
Distance meter 303
Target or laser line colors 303
Scanner LEDs colors 304
Field of view 304
Scanner orientation 304
Single laser line mode 305
HandySCAN SILVER Products 306
HandySCAN SILVER Laser Information 307
Laser warning 307
Laser labels 307
HandySCAN SILVER 307
HandySCAN SILVER|Elite 308

HandySCAN SILVER Hardware and Components 309

Hardware 309
HandySCAN SILVER Multifunction Buttons 310
Trigger button (1) light colors 310
During acquisition 311
HandySCAN SILVER Operating Principles 312
HandySCAN SILVER Connection 313
Connection steps 313
HandySCAN SILVER Calibration 314
Purpose of calibration 314
Optimizing scanner calibration 314
Expected results 315
Restore to the factory settings 316
HandySCAN SILVER Configuration 317
Purpose of configuration 317
Automatic shutter 317
To configure the scanner 317
HandySCAN SILVER Object Preparation 318
Positioning target application and distribution 318
Example of proper and improper target distribution 318
Clip cards 318
Highly reflective or transparent objects 318
Small surfaces 319

9
HandySCAN SILVER Acquisition Rules 320
Scanning distance 320
Distance meter 320
Target or laser line colors 320
Scanner LEDs colors 321
Field of view 322
Scanner orientation 322
Scanning region 322
Clipping objects 323
HandySCAN BLACK Products 324
HandySCAN BLACK Laser Information 325
Laser warning 325
Laser labels 325
HandySCAN BLACK 325

HandySCAN BLACK Hardware and Components 326

Hardware 326
Components 327
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 328
Trigger button [1] light colors 328
HandySCAN BLACK 329
HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition 329
Smart Control 330

HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles 331

HandySCAN BLACK Connection 333
Connection steps 333
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration 335
Purpose of calibration 335
Optimizing scanner calibration 335
Expected results 337
Restore to the factory settings 338
Configuration 339
Purpose of configuration 339
To configure the scanner 339
HDR mode 341
Configuration preset 341
Default configuration 342
HandySCAN BLACK Object Preparation 343
Positioning target application and distribution 343
Example of proper and improper target distribution 343
Clip cards 343
Highly reflective or transparent objects 344
Small surfaces 344
HandySCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules 345
Scanning distance 345
Distance meter 345
Target or laser line colors 345

10
 Scanner LEDs colors 346
Field of view 348
Scanner orientation 348
Scanning region 348
Clipping objects 348
HandySCAN 700 Product 350
Laser Information 351
Laser warning 351
Laser label 351
HandySCAN 700|Elite 351

HandySCAN 700|Elite Hardware and Components 352

Hardware 352
Components 353
HandySCAN 700|Elite Multifunction Buttons 354
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles 356
HandySCAN 3D Connection 358
Connection steps 358
HandySCAN 700|Elite Calibration 360
Purpose of calibration 360
To optimize the scanner calibration 360
Reset to the factory settings 361
HandySCAN 700|Elite Configuration 363
Purpose of configuration 363
To configure the scanner 363
Configuration preset 364
Default configuration 364
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation 366
Positioning targets application and distribution 366
Example of proper target distribution: 366
Clip cards 366
Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective) 366
Small surfaces 366
HandySCAN 700|Elite Acquisition Rules 367
Scanning distance 367
Distance meter 367
Field of view 368
Scanner orientation 368
Single laser line mode 369
Preview mode 369
HandySCAN 307 Products 370
Laser Information 371
Laser warning 371
Laser label 371
HandySCAN 307|Elite 371
HandySCAN 307 372

11
HandySCAN 307 Hardware and Components 373
Hardware 373
Components 374
HandySCAN 307|Elite 374
HandySCAN 307 374

HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons 375

HandySCAN 307 Operating Principles 377
HandySCAN 307 Connection 379
Connection steps 379
HandySCAN 307 Calibration 381
Purpose of calibration 381
To optimize the scanner calibration 381
Reset to the factory settings 382
HandySCAN 307 Configuration 383
Purpose of configuration 383
To configure the scanner 383
Configuration preset 384
Default configuration 384
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation 386
Positioning targets application and distribution 386
Example of proper target distribution: 386
Clip cards 386
Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective) 386
Small surfaces 386
HandySCAN 307 Acquisition Rules 387
Scanning distance 387
Distance meter 387
Field of view 388
Scanner orientation 388
Preview mode 389
HandySCAN 3D Previous Generation 390
Laser Information 391
Laser warning 391
Laser labels 391
HandySCAN 3D Hardware and Components 392
Hardware 392
Components 393
HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 394
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles 396
HandySCAN 3D Connection 398
Connection steps 398
HandySCAN 3D Calibration 400
Purpose of calibration 400

12
 To optimize the scanner calibration 400
Reset to the factory settings 401
HandySCAN 3D Configuration 403
Purpose of configuration 403
To configure the scanner 403
Configuration preset 404
Default configuration 404
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation 406
Positioning targets application and distribution 406
Example of proper target distribution: 406
Clip cards 406
Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective) 406
Small surfaces 406
HandySCAN 3D Acquisition Rules 407
Scanning distance 407
Distance meter 407
Field of view 408
Scanner orientation 408
Preview mode 409
C-Track 410
Compatibility chart 411
HandyPROBE 411
MetraSCAN 3D 411

C-Track Hardware and Components 412

Hardware and components 412
C-Track tripod 413
Other components 414
Visibility LED color codes 415
C-Track Operating Principles 417
Measurement volume 417
Positioning model 418
Target acquisition 418
Reference positioning target statuses 421
Referencing modes 421
Static mode 421
Detection statuses 423
C-Track Controller 424
Controller Components 426
Components 426
To connect the controller 427
C-Track Setup and Connection 428
To set up the C-Track 428
Handling rules 429
To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer 429
To launch the IP configurator 431
Using the USB to Ethernet adapter 431
Using the computer Ethernet port 432

13
 To restore the default network settings 432
To manually revert to default Windows settings 432
In Windows 10 / Windows 11 432

Controller Display 433

Statuses 433
Controller LED color codes 434
Menus 436
Controller Recovery 440
To perform a controller recovery 440

C-Track Setup and Connection 441

To set up the C-Track 441
Handling rules 442
To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer 442
To launch the IP configurator 444
Using the USB to Ethernet adapter 444
Using the computer Ethernet port 445
To restore the default network settings 445
To manually revert to default Windows settings 445
In Windows 10 / Windows 11 445

Environment Compensation (EC) 446

Overview 446
When to activate the EC 446
Hardware and components 447
To install the calibration bar on the tripod 447
Volume 448
To display the volume 448
To configure the EC artifact 448
To add a scale bar 449
To locate the EC artifact 449
Field of view 449
To activate the EC 450
If a C-Track calibration is required 450
If a C-Track calibration is not required 451
To deactivate the EC 452
Statuses displayed in the system panel 452
When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible 453
When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast 453

C-Track Calibration 455

General information 455
Purpose of calibration 455
Information displayed in the 3D viewer 455
When to perform the calibration 456
Recommendations 456
Expected results 456
Calibration with Quality Control products 457
Calibration 457
Calibration volume 458
To perform the calibration 458
Calibrate all 461
To calibrate all 461

14
 To reset to the factory settings 461
Calibration with R-Series products 462
Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module 462
C-Track robot calibration trajectories 463
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis 463
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis 464
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis 464
To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset) 465
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP 466
Autocalibration 466
Manual calibration 468
Calibration volume 468
To perform the calibration 468
To reset to the factory settings 471
C-Track System Configuration 472
To configure the system 472
To set parameters 472
C-Track Object Preparation 476
To prepare the object 476
To build a valid dynamic referential 476
Part setup examples 477
Number of targets 478
Target distribution 478
Volume extension 478
360° measurement 478
Volume Extension (VE) 480
Overview 480
Positioning target setup 480
Acquisition rules 481
Scaling mode configuration 483
To add a scale bar 484
Acquisition 484
Volume extension details 486
C-Track Tilt Compensation 487
C-Track rotations 487
Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees 487
Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees 488
C-Link Product 489
Overview 489
System requirements 490
C-Link typical workflow 490
C-Link Hardware and Components 491
Hardware 491
C-Link kit components 491
C-Link Connection 493
C-Link Calibration 495
To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode 495
To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D 495

15
 To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R 496
C-Link Configuration 497
To get your C-Link system running 497
To configure the IP address of the controllers 497
Recommended configuration 498
Default configuration 498
To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager 498
To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements 499
To activate the C-Link network 499
To configure the C-Link network 499

C-Link Object Preparation 501

Part preparation 501
Positioning targets 501
Environmental conditions 501
C-Link Operating Principles 503
To set up a C-Link Reference model 503
To set up a Part reference model 503
Create a Part reference model (optional) 503
Reference positioning target statuses 504
Visibility pane of the system panel 504
To probe in the C-Link mode 504
To scan in the C-Link mode 506
Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network 506
MetraSCAN 3D Product Family 507
Previous generation 508
MetraSCAN BLACK 509
MetraSCAN BLACK Laser Information 511
Laser warning 511
Laser labels 511
MetraSCAN BLACK 511
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN BLACK+, MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite 512

MetraSCAN BLACK Hardware and Components 513

Hardware 513
User calibration plate 514
Components 514
Front perspective view 514
Rear perspective views 515

MetraSCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 516

Scanner status light colors 516
MetraSCAN BLACK 516
MetraSCAN BLACK during acquisition 517
VXinspect 517
Smart Control 518
MetraSCAN BLACK Operating Principles 519
MetraSCAN BLACK Connection 520
Connection steps 520

16
MetraSCAN BLACK Calibration 522
Purpose of calibration 522
To connect the user calibration plate 523
To optimize the scanner calibration 524
Calibration setup 525
To restore to the factory settings 525
MetraSCAN BLACK Configuration 526
To configure the scanner 526
Purpose of configuration 527
HDR mode 527
Configuration preset 529
Default configuration 529
To export a session parameters file (.csp) 529
Functionalities contained in the CSP file 530
To create a scanner configuration file (.csc) 531
Functionalities contained in the CSC file 531

MetraSCAN BLACK Object Preparation 532

Transparent objects 532
Positioning target distribution 532
To prepare the object 532
To build a valid dynamic referential 532
MetraSCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules 533
Scanning distance 533
Distance meter 533
Laser line colors 533
Scanner LEDs colors 536
Scanner visibility 536
Field of view 536
Scanner orientation 536
Single laser line mode 537
Scanning region 537
Clipping objects 538
MetraSCAN 357 539
Laser Information 540
Laser warning 540
Laser labels 540
MetraSCAN 357 Hardware and Components 541
Hardware 541
User calibration plate 542
Components 542
Front view 542

MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 543

MetraSCAN 3D 543
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition 544
VXinspect 544
Smart Control 544
MetraSCAN 3D Operating Principles 545

17
MetraSCAN 3D System Connection 546
Connection steps 546
MetraSCAN 357 Calibration 548
Purpose of calibration 549
To optimize the scanner calibration 549
Calibration setup 551
Expected results 551
To restore to the factory settings 551
MetraSCAN 3D Configuration 552
To configure the scanner 552
Purpose of configuration 552
HDR mode 552
Configuration preset 554
Default configuration 554
MetraSCAN 3D Object Preparation 555
To prepare the object 555
To build a valid dynamic referential 555
MetraSCAN 357 Acquisition Rules 556
Scanning distance 556
Distance meter 556
Scanner LEDs colors 557
Scanner visibility 557
Field of view 557
Scanner orientation 557
Preview mode 558
MetraSCAN 3D Previous Generation 559
Laser Information 561
Laser warning 561
Laser labels 561
MetraSCAN 3D Hardware and Components 562
Hardware 562
Calibration plate 563
Components 564
LEDs (Light-Emitting Diode) 565

MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 566

MetraSCAN 3D 566
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition 567
VXinspect 567
Smart Control 567
MetraSCAN 3D Operating Principles 568
MetraSCAN 3D System Connection 569
Connection steps 569
MetraSCAN 3D Calibration 571
Purpose of calibration 571
To optimize the scanner calibration 571

18
 Calibration setup 573
Expected results 573
To restore to the factory settings 573
MetraSCAN 3D Configuration 574
To configure the scanner 574
Purpose of configuration 574
HDR mode 574
Configuration preset 576
Default configuration 576
MetraSCAN 3D Object Preparation 577
To prepare the object 577
To build a valid dynamic referential 577
MetraSCAN 3D Acquisition Rules 578
Proper scanning distance 578
Distance meter for MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite 578
Scanner LEDs colors 579
Scanner visibility 579
Field of view 579
Scanner orientation 579
Single laser line mode 580
Preview mode 580
HandyPROBE Next 582
HandyPROBE Next+ and 582
HandyPROBE Next 582
HandyPROBE 582
HandyPROBE Next Hardware and Components 583
Hardware 583
Components 584
Stylus 584
Action and pen buttons 584
Probe sounds 585
LED color codes 585
Battery compartment 585
To replace the batteries 586
User calibration artifact 586
Probe accessory kit 586
HandyPROBE Next Multifunction Buttons 588
588
HandyPROBE Next Operating Principles 589
Detection statuses 589
Probe tip calibration statuses 589
HandyPROBE Next Probe Communication Channel 590
To change the channel between the probe and the C-Track controller 590
To change the communication channel with the Analyze Channels function 590
To activate the new channel 590
To change the communication channel manually 590
To reset the communication channel 591

19
HandyPROBE Next System Connection 592
HandyPROBE Next probe tip setup 592
To select the right probe tip 592
Straight probe 592
Elbow probe 593
To assemble a SmartConnect probe adapter 593
HandyPROBE Next System Calibration 594
Recommendations 594
To manually add a probe tip in VXelements 595
To manually select a probe tip from the list 596
To calibrate using a cone 596
Through the system panel 596
Through the Configure menu 598
To calibrate using a sphere 599
Through the system panel 600
Through the Configure menu 602
Calibration expected results 605
In case of calibration failure 605
HandyPROBE Next System Configuration 606
To configure the system 606
To set system parameters 606
To set probing parameters 608
HandyPROBE Next Probe Association 609
From the controller 609
From VXelements 609
To reset the stylus 610
HandyPROBE Next Object Preparation 611
To prepare the object 611
To build a valid dynamic referential 611
HandyPROBE Next Acquisition Rules 612
Positioning target setting 612
LED color codes 613
Acquiring measurements 613
Probe tip orientation for plane measurement 614
Probe tip orientation for hole measurement 614
Probe tip orientation for rod measurement 615
Probe tip orientation for line measurement 616
Using extensions and elbows probe tips 617
MaxSHOT 3D Next 618
Laser Information 619
Laser warning 619
Laser labels 619
MaxSHOT Next Hardware and Components 620
Hardware 620
Components 621
MaxSHOT Next Multifunction buttons 622

20
 VXshot 622
VXshot during measurements 623
MaxSHOT Next Operating Principles 624
MaxSHOT Next System Connection 625
To connect directly to a computer 625
To connect to a C-Track controller 626
MaxSHOT Next Object Preparation 628
1. Coded targets: 628
2. Reference frame installation: 628
3. Scale bars installation: 629
Coded Targets Assignment 629
Bluetooth Shutter Button Pairing Procedure 631
MaxSHOT Next Acquisition Rules 633
Optional Accessories 638
Optical probing starter kit 638
Rigid supports for coded targets kit 638
Invar long scale bar extension kit 640
To assemble a custom 5-m Invar scale bar 640
Extension pole and accessories 642
Health Care Partner 3D 643
Hardware and Components 645
Operating Principles 647
System Connection 648
Connection steps 648
System Calibration 650
System Configuration 651
Automatic shutter 651
To configure the scanner 651
Configuration preset 652
Object Preparation 653
Instructions: 653

Acquisition Rules 654

Scanning distance 654
Screen indicators 654
Positioning status 656
Detection mode 656
Super adhesive retroreflective targets 657
Field of view 657
Resume scan 657
Delete frames 659
Preview mode 659
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D Product Family 660

21
ACADEMIA 10 661
Hardware and Components 662
Operating Principles 664
System Connection 665
Connection steps 665
System Calibration 667
ACADEMIA 10 667
ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50 667
System Configuration 669
Automatic shutter 669
To configure the scanner 669
Configuration preset 670
Object Preparation 671
Instructions: 671

Acquisition Rules 672

Scanning distance 672
ACADEMIA 10 672
ACADEMIA 20 672
ACADEMIA 50 673
Field of view 673
Screen indicators 673
Positioning status 674
Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only) 675
Super adhesive retroreflective targets 676
Resume scan 676
Delete frames 677
Preview mode 678
ACADEMIA 20 679
Hardware and Components 680
Operating Principles 683
System Connection 684
Connection steps 684
System Calibration 686
ACADEMIA 10 686
ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50 686
System Configuration 688
Automatic shutter 688
To configure the scanner 688
Configuration preset 689
Object Preparation 690
Instructions: 690

Acquisition Rules 691

22
 Scanning distance 691
ACADEMIA 10 691
ACADEMIA 20 691
ACADEMIA 50 692
Field of view 692
Screen indicators 692
Positioning status 693
Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only) 694
Super adhesive retroreflective targets 695
Resume scan 695
Delete frames 696
Preview mode 697
ACADEMIA 50 698
Hardware and Components 699
Operating Principles 701
System Connection 702
Connection steps 702
System Calibration 704
ACADEMIA 10 704
ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50 704
System Configuration 706
Automatic shutter 706
To configure the scanner 706
Configuration preset 707
Object Preparation 708
Instructions: 708

Acquisition Rules 709

Scanning distance 709
ACADEMIA 10 709
ACADEMIA 20 709
ACADEMIA 50 710
Field of view 710
Screen indicators 710
Positioning status 711
Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only) 712
Super adhesive retroreflective targets 713
Resume scan 713
Delete frames 714
Preview mode 715
R-Series Products 716
Copyright R-Series 717
What's New R-Series 718
I/O Module 11.2.1 718
Bug fixes 718
Tested software 718
I/O Module 11.2.0 718

23
 PolyWorks inspection 718
Bug fixes 719
Tested software 719
I/O Module 11.1.1 719
Bug fixes 719
Tested software 720
I/O Module 11.1.0 720
Enhancements 720
Bug fixes 720
Tested software 720
I/O Module 11.0.1 720
Bug fixes 720
Tested software 721
I/O Module 11.0.0 721
Features 721
Import from VXscan-R 721
Ethernet/IP compatibility 721
Communication 721
Actions 721
Bug Fixes 722
Test software 722
I/O Module 10.0.4 723
Bug fixes 723
Tested software 723
I/O Module 10.0.3 723
Bug fixes 723
Tested software 723
I/O Module 10.0.2 723
Bug fixes 724
Tested software 724
I/O Module 10.0.1 724
Bug fixes 724
Tested software 724
I/O Module 10.0.0 724
Bug fixes 724
Tested software 725

Safety Information 726

Safety lockout instruction 726
Standard voltage 726
CUBE-R electrical connections 727
Customer liability 728
Risk assessment 728
Operator liability 728
Warranties and limitations of liability 728
General Information 730
Welcome 731
Information symbols 731
Training services 732
R-Series Products 733
R-Series Product Generations 734

24
System General Care 736
General use 736
Cords and cables 737
Metal and plastic parts 737
Optical parts 737
User calibration plate 737
MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R 737
Other products 738
Batteries 738
CUBE-R 738
Laser Information 741
Laser warning 741
Laser labels 741
Service and Customer Care Program 742
Standard warranty 742
Customer Care plans 742
Customer Support 742
Software update 742
Annual test, certification and calibration of the system 743
What is not covered 743
Need for service 743
Assistance 744
User manual 744
Keyboard shortcuts 744
Creaform Customer Portal 744
Diagnostic mode 744
Customer Support 744
Training services 745
Online Services 746
Overview 746
Online Services options 746
Disconnected services 746
To activate the Online Services 746
Activation for non-registered users 746
Activation for registered users 747
Forgot your password? 747
Online Services indicators 747
Access to support website 748
System Requirements for R-Series 749
Minimum system requirements 749
Recommended computer specifications 750
Other considerations 750
Product Manager 751
Product list 751
License status 751
Status symbols in the Product Manager 751
To add a product to the Product Manager 752
Automatic method (product detection) 752
Manual method 752

25
 To activate 30-day trial license 752
To activate a product 752
To change or delete a product 753
Software and License Updates for R-Series 754
MetraSCAN 3D-R solution 754
CUBE-R solution 754
VXscan-R 754
R-Series I/O Module 754
Contact Us 755
MetraSCAN 3D-R Solution 756
MetraSCAN 3D-R Product Family 757
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD 758
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Laser Information 759
Laser warning 759
Laser labels 759
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD 759

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Hardware and Components 760

Hardware 760
Components 762
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles 763
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection 764
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration 767
Environment 767
When to perform the calibration 768
Calibration setup 768
Expected results 768
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories 768
Calibration modes 769
Integration 771
Execution 775
Manual 775
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration 777
To configure the scanner 777
Purpose of configuration 778
HDR mode 778
Configuration preset 780
Default configuration 780
To export a session parameter file (.csp) 781
Functionalities contained in the CSP file 781
To create a scanner configuration file (.csc) 782
Functionalities contained in the CSC file 782

MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup 783

To define prior to programming the robot sequence 783
Scanner TCP 783
Tool payload 785

26
 Tool center of gravity 785
Tool inertia at center of gravity 785
TCP, payload and inertia definitions 785
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation 789
Transparent objects 789
Positioning target distribution 789
To prepare the object 789
To build a valid dynamic referential 789
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Acquisition Rules 791
Scanning distance 791
Distance meter 791
Laser line colors 791
Scanner visibility 792
Field of view 792
Scanning technique 792
Scanner orientation 793
Clipping objects 793
Teach mode 793
Positioning Targets and Reflectors 794
Positioning targets 794
Coded targets 795
Magnetic glass protected targets 797
Optical reflectors 797
360° magnetic targets 799
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite 801
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Laser Information 802
Laser warning 802
Laser labels 802
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite 802

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Hardware and Components 803

Hardware 803
Components 806
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles 808
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection 809
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration 812
Environment 812
When to perform the calibration 813
Calibration setup 813
Expected results 813
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories 813
Calibration modes 814
Integration 816
Execution 820
Manual 820
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration 822
To configure the scanner 822

27
 Purpose of configuration 823
HDR mode 823
Configuration preset 825
Default configuration 825
To export a session parameter file (.csp) 826
Functionalities contained in the CSP file 826
To create a scanner configuration file (.csc) 827
Functionalities contained in the CSC file 827

MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup 828

To define prior to programming the robot sequence 828
Scanner TCP 828
Tool payload 830
Tool center of gravity 830
Tool inertia at center of gravity 830
TCP, payload and inertia definitions 830
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation 834
Transparent objects 834
Positioning target distribution 834
To prepare the object 834
To build a valid dynamic referential 834
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Acquisition Rules 836
Scanning distance 836
Distance meter 836
Laser line colors 836
Scanner visibility 837
Field of view 837
Scanning technique 837
Scanner orientation 838
Clipping objects 838
Teach mode 838
Positioning Targets and Reflectors 839
Positioning targets 839
Coded targets 840
Magnetic glass protected targets 842
Optical reflectors 842
360° magnetic targets 844
C-Track 846
Compatibility chart 847
HandyPROBE 847
MetraSCAN 3D 847

C-Track Hardware and Components 848

Hardware and components 848
C-Track tripod 849
Other components 850
Visibility LED color codes 851
C-Track Operating Principles 853
Measurement volume 853
Positioning model 854

28
 Target acquisition 854
Reference positioning target statuses 857
Referencing modes 857
Static mode 857
Detection statuses 859
C-Track Controller 860
Controller Components 862
Components 862
To connect the controller 863
C-Track Setup and Connection 864
To set up the C-Track 864
Handling rules 865
To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer 865
To launch the IP configurator 867
Using the USB to Ethernet adapter 867
Using the computer Ethernet port 868
To restore the default network settings 868
To manually revert to default Windows settings 868
In Windows 10 / Windows 11 868

Controller Display 869

Statuses 869
Controller LED color codes 870
Menus 872
Controller Recovery 876
To perform a controller recovery 876

C-Track Setup and Connection 877

To set up the C-Track 877
Handling rules 878
To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer 878
To launch the IP configurator 880
Using the USB to Ethernet adapter 880
Using the computer Ethernet port 881
To restore the default network settings 881
To manually revert to default Windows settings 881
In Windows 10 / Windows 11 881

Environment Compensation (EC) 882

Overview 882
When to activate the EC 882
Hardware and components 883
To install the calibration bar on the tripod 883
Volume 884
To display the volume 884
To configure the EC artifact 884
To add a scale bar 885
To locate the EC artifact 885
Field of view 885
To activate the EC 886
If a C-Track calibration is required 886
If a C-Track calibration is not required 887

29
 To deactivate the EC 888
Statuses displayed in the system panel 888
When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible 889
When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast 889

C-Track Calibration 891

General information 891
Purpose of calibration 891
Information displayed in the 3D viewer 891
When to perform the calibration 892
Recommendations 892
Expected results 892
Calibration with Quality Control products 893
Calibration 893
Calibration volume 894
To perform the calibration 894
Calibrate all 897
To calibrate all 897
To reset to the factory settings 897
Calibration with R-Series products 898
Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module 898
C-Track robot calibration trajectories 899
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis 899
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis 900
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis 900
To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset) 901
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP 902
Autocalibration 902
Manual calibration 904
Calibration volume 904
To perform the calibration 904
To reset to the factory settings 907
C-Track System Configuration 909
To configure the system 909
To set parameters 909
C-Track Object Preparation 913
To prepare the object 913
To build a valid dynamic referential 913
Part setup examples 914
Number of targets 915
Target distribution 915
Volume extension 915
360° measurement 915
Volume Extension (VE) 917
Overview 917
Positioning target setup 917
Acquisition rules 918
Scaling mode configuration 920
To add a scale bar 921
Acquisition 921
Volume extension details 923

30
C-Track Tilt Compensation 924
C-Track rotations 924
Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees 924
Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees 925
C-Link Product 926
Overview 926
System requirements 927
C-Link typical workflow 927
C-Link Hardware and Components 928
Hardware 928
C-Link kit components 928
C-Link Connection 930
C-Link Calibration 932
To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode 932
To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D 932
To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R 933
C-Link Configuration 934
To get your C-Link system running 934
To configure the IP address of the controllers 934
Recommended configuration 935
Default configuration 935
To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager 935
To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements 936
To activate the C-Link network 936
To configure the C-Link network 936

C-Link Object Preparation 938

Part preparation 938
Positioning targets 938
Environmental conditions 938
C-Link Operating Principles 940
To set up a C-Link Reference model 940
To set up a Part reference model 940
Create a Part reference model (optional) 940
Reference positioning target statuses 941
Visibility pane of the system panel 941
To probe in the C-Link mode 941
To scan in the C-Link mode 943
Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network 943
R-Series Autocalibration Kit 944
Pneumatic autocalibration kit 944
Components 944
Internal Logic 948
Asset protection 948
Operating principles 948
To calibrate the system 951
Manual autocalibration kit 952
Components 952

31
 Operating principles 954
To calibrate the system 954
HP Z6 Industrial Computer 955
Overview 955
Technical specifications 956
Software 956
R-Series I/O Module Hardware 957
Components 957
I/O Module Hardware package 957
Closer look at the I/O Module Hardware 958
View from under the I/O Module Hardware 959
Dimensions 960
Design and layout 961
To connect the I/O Module Hardware 962
Electrical Interface 962
I/O electrical pinout 963
Input/Output polarity selection 964

Previous Generation Devices 965

C-Track 966
Compatibility chart 967
HandyPROBE 967
MetraSCAN 3D 967

C-Track Hardware and Components 968

Hardware and components 968
C-Track tripod 969
Other components 970
Visibility LED color codes 971
C-Track Operating Principles 973
Measurement volume 973
Positioning model 974
Target acquisition 974
Reference positioning target statuses 977
Referencing modes 977
Static mode 977
Detection statuses 979
C-Track Controller 980
Controller Components 982
Components 982
To connect the controller 983
Controller Recovery 984
To perform a controller recovery 984

Controller Display 985

Statuses 985
Controller LED color codes 986
Menus 988

32
C-Track Setup and Connection 992
To set up the C-Track 992
Handling rules 993
To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer 993
To launch the IP configurator 995
Using the USB to Ethernet adapter 995
Using the computer Ethernet port 996
To restore the default network settings 996
To manually revert to default Windows settings 996
In Windows 10 / Windows 11 996

C-Track Calibration 997

General information 997
Purpose of calibration 997
Information displayed in the 3D viewer 997
When to perform the calibration 998
Recommendations 998
Expected results 998
Calibration with Quality Control products 999
Calibration 999
Calibration volume 1000
To perform the calibration 1000
Calibrate all 1003
To calibrate all 1003
To reset to the factory settings 1003
Calibration with R-Series products 1004
Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module 1004
C-Track robot calibration trajectories 1005
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis 1005
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis 1006
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis 1006
To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset) 1007
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP 1008
Autocalibration 1008
Manual calibration 1010
Calibration volume 1010
To perform the calibration 1010
To reset to the factory settings 1013
C-Track System Configuration 1015
To configure the system 1015
To set parameters 1015
C-Track Object Preparation 1019
To prepare the object 1019
To build a valid dynamic referential 1019
Part setup examples 1020
Number of targets 1021
Target distribution 1021
Volume extension 1021
360° measurement 1021
C-Track Tilt Compensation 1023
C-Track rotations 1023
Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees 1023

33
 Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees 1024
C-Link Product 1025
Overview 1025
System requirements 1026
C-Link typical workflow 1026
C-Link Hardware and Components 1027
Hardware 1027
C-Link kit components 1027
C-Link Connection 1029
C-Link Calibration 1031
To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode 1031
To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D 1031
To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R 1032
C-Link Configuration 1033
To get your C-Link system running 1033
To configure the IP address of the controllers 1033
Recommended configuration 1034
Default configuration 1034
To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager 1034
To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements 1035
To activate the C-Link network 1035
To configure the C-Link network 1035

C-Link Object Preparation 1037

Part preparation 1037
Positioning targets 1037
Environmental conditions 1037
C-Link Operating Principles 1039
To set up a C-Link Reference model 1039
To set up a Part reference model 1039
Create a Part reference model (optional) 1039
Reference positioning target statuses 1040
Visibility pane of the system panel 1040
To probe in the C-Link mode 1040
To scan in the C-Link mode 1042
Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network 1042
R-Series Autocalibration Kit 1043
Components 1043
Tool changer 1044
Calibration bar holder 1046
Tool rack 1047
Proximity sensors 1047
Pneumatic valve 1048
Internal Logic 1049
Control box 1049
Operating principles 1051
To calibrate the system 1053
R-Series Industrial Computer 1054

34
 Technical specifications 1054
Software 1054
R-Series I/O Module Hardware 1055
Components 1055
I/O Module Hardware package 1055
Closer look at the I/O Module Hardware 1056
View from under the I/O Module Hardware 1057
Dimensions 1057
Design and layout 1059
To connect the I/O Module Hardware 1060
Electrical Interface 1060
Electrical pinout 1061
Input/Output Polarity Selection 1062
Robot Programming 1064
Robot action/event sub-program 1064
Robot session setting sub-program 1064
Typical robot program 1065
Handshake 1065
CUBE-R Solution 1066
Safety Procedures 1067
Maintenance 1067
Operating Principles 1068
CUBE-R work cell 1068
CUBE-R rolling door and front control panel 1068
CUBE-R light curtain 1071
Safety features 1071
Laser scanners (floor sensors) 1071
Reset pictogram 1072
Operator Liability 1074
CUBE-R Lockout/Tagout Procedure 1075
Lockout procedure for CUBE-R 1075

CUBE-R Product Family 1077

CUBE-R portfolio 1077
Previous generation 1078
CUBE-R Portfolio 1079
Technical specifications 1081
Asset protection 1081
Hardware and Components 1083
Available configurations 1083
CUBE-R components 1085

Entrance 1086
Rolling door 1086
Light curtain 1089
Enclosure 1090

35
 Walls 1090
Wire mesh 1090
Safety laser scanners 1091
Robot Assembly 1093
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration kit 1096
Pneumatic calibration kit 1096
Manual calibration kit 1096

MetraSCAN 3D-R Product Family 1097

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD 1098
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Laser Information 1099
Laser warning 1099
Laser labels 1099
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD 1099

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Hardware and Components 1100

Hardware 1100
Components 1102
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles 1103
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection 1104
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration 1107
Environment 1107
When to perform the calibration 1108
Calibration setup 1108
Expected results 1108
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories 1108
Calibration modes 1109
Integration 1111
Execution 1115
Manual 1115
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration 1117
To configure the scanner 1117
Purpose of configuration 1118
HDR mode 1118
Configuration preset 1120
Default configuration 1120
To export a session parameter file (.csp) 1121
Functionalities contained in the CSP file 1121
To create a scanner configuration file (.csc) 1122
Functionalities contained in the CSC file 1122

MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup 1123

To define prior to programming the robot sequence 1123
Scanner TCP 1123
Tool payload 1125
Tool center of gravity 1125
Tool inertia at center of gravity 1125
TCP, payload and inertia definitions 1125
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation 1129

36
 Transparent objects 1129
Positioning target distribution 1129
To prepare the object 1129
To build a valid dynamic referential 1129
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Acquisition Rules 1131
Scanning distance 1131
Distance meter 1131
Laser line colors 1131
Scanner visibility 1132
Field of view 1132
Scanning technique 1132
Scanner orientation 1133
Clipping objects 1133
Teach mode 1133
Positioning Targets and Reflectors 1134
Positioning targets 1134
Coded targets 1135
Magnetic glass protected targets 1137
Optical reflectors 1137
360° magnetic targets 1139
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite 1141
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Laser Information 1142
Laser warning 1142
Laser labels 1142
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite 1142

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Hardware and Components 1143

Hardware 1143
Components 1146
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles 1148
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection 1149
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration 1152
Environment 1152
When to perform the calibration 1153
Calibration setup 1153
Expected results 1153
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories 1153
Calibration modes 1154
Integration 1156
Execution 1160
Manual 1160
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration 1162
To configure the scanner 1162
Purpose of configuration 1163
HDR mode 1163
Configuration preset 1165
Default configuration 1165
To export a session parameter file (.csp) 1166

37
 Functionalities contained in the CSP file 1166
To create a scanner configuration file (.csc) 1167
Functionalities contained in the CSC file 1167

MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation 1168

Transparent objects 1168
Positioning target distribution 1168
To prepare the object 1168
To build a valid dynamic referential 1168
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Acquisition Rules 1170
Scanning distance 1170
Distance meter 1170
Laser line colors 1170
Scanner visibility 1171
Field of view 1171
Scanning technique 1171
Scanner orientation 1172
Clipping objects 1172
Teach mode 1172
Positioning Targets and Reflectors 1173
Positioning targets 1173
Coded targets 1174
Magnetic glass protected targets 1176
Optical reflectors 1176
360° magnetic targets 1178
C-Track 1180
Compatibility chart 1181
HandyPROBE 1181
MetraSCAN 3D 1181

C-Track Hardware and Components 1182

Hardware and components 1182
C-Track tripod 1183
Other components 1184
Visibility LED color codes 1185
C-Track Operating Principles 1187
Measurement volume 1187
Positioning model 1188
Target acquisition 1188
Reference positioning target statuses 1191
Referencing modes 1191
Static mode 1191
Detection statuses 1193
C-Track Controller 1194
Controller Components 1196
Components 1196
To connect the controller 1197
Controller Display 1198
Statuses 1198

38
 Controller LED color codes 1199
Menus 1201
Environment Compensation (EC) 1205
Overview 1205
When to activate the EC 1205
Hardware and components 1206
To install the calibration bar on the tripod 1206
Volume 1207
To display the volume 1207
To configure the EC artifact 1207
To add a scale bar 1208
To locate the EC artifact 1208
Field of view 1208
To activate the EC 1209
If a C-Track calibration is required 1209
If a C-Track calibration is not required 1210
To deactivate the EC 1211
Statuses displayed in the system panel 1211
When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible 1212
When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast 1212

C-Track Calibration 1214

General information 1214
Purpose of calibration 1214
Information displayed in the 3D viewer 1214
When to perform the calibration 1215
Recommendations 1215
Expected results 1215
Calibration with Quality Control products 1216
Calibration 1216
Calibration volume 1217
To perform the calibration 1217
Calibrate all 1220
To calibrate all 1220
To reset to the factory settings 1220
Calibration with R-Series products 1221
Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module 1221
C-Track robot calibration trajectories 1222
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis 1222
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis 1223
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis 1223
To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset) 1224
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP 1225
Autocalibration 1225
Manual calibration 1227
Calibration volume 1227
To perform the calibration 1227
To reset to the factory settings 1230
C-Track System Configuration 1232
To configure the system 1232
To set parameters 1232
C-Track Object Preparation 1236

39
 To prepare the object 1236
To build a valid dynamic referential 1236
Part setup examples 1237
Number of targets 1238
Target distribution 1238
Volume extension 1238
360° measurement 1238
Volume Extension (VE) 1240
Overview 1240
Positioning target setup 1240
Acquisition rules 1241
Scaling mode configuration 1243
To add a scale bar 1244
Acquisition 1244
Volume extension details 1246
R-Series Autocalibration Kit 1247
Pneumatic autocalibration kit 1247
Components 1247
Internal Logic 1251
Asset protection 1251
Operating principles 1251
To calibrate the system 1254
Manual autocalibration kit 1255
Components 1255
Operating principles 1257
To calibrate the system 1257
HP Z6 Industrial Computer 1258
Overview 1258
Technical specifications 1259
Software 1259
Using CUBE-R 1260
Workflow with R-Series I/O Module 1260
Workflow with VXscan-R 1260
C-Track Calibration with R-Series I/O Module 1261
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration with R-Series I/O Module 1263
Automated Photogrammetry 1265
General operation 1265
Prerequisites, restrictions and rules 1265
During acquisition 1266
When to perform the automated photogrammetry 1267
Using Robot 1268
Basic Robot Manipulations 1269
Teach pendant (TP) 1270
Jog speed keys 1272
World Coordinate System (Cartesian) 1273
Tool coordinate system 1273
Coordinate System (Joint) 1274

40
 Jog keys 1275
Robot Programming for CUBE-R 1277
Programming in FANUC with the teach pendant 1277
Standard robot program for scanning trajectories 1277
Scanning Trajectory Creation 1282
How to create a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with the teach pendant 1282
How to create a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with VXscan-R 1283
How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot 1283
FANUC Programs 1285
FANUC BG Logic 1285
FANUC Check IO 1285
Other FANUC programs 1291
Handshake 1295
CUBE-R Previous Generation 1298
Overview 1298
Technical specifications 1299
Hardware and Components 1301
Door 1303
Walls 1307
Robot Assembly 1309
C-Track 1314
Compatibility chart 1315
HandyPROBE 1315
MetraSCAN 3D 1315

C-Track Hardware and Components 1316

Hardware and components 1316
C-Track tripod 1317
Other components 1318
Visibility LED color codes 1319
C-Track Operating Principles 1321
Measurement volume 1321
Positioning model 1322
Target acquisition 1322
Reference positioning target statuses 1325
Referencing modes 1325
Static mode 1325
Detection statuses 1327
C-Track Controller 1328
Controller Components 1330
Components 1330
To connect the controller 1331
Controller Display 1332
Statuses 1332

41
 Controller LED color codes 1333
Menus 1335
C-Track Calibration 1339
General information 1339
Purpose of calibration 1339
Information displayed in the 3D viewer 1339
When to perform the calibration 1340
Recommendations 1340
Expected results 1340
Calibration with Quality Control products 1341
Calibration 1341
Calibration volume 1342
To perform the calibration 1342
Calibrate all 1345
To calibrate all 1345
To reset to the factory settings 1345
Calibration with R-Series products 1346
Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module 1346
C-Track robot calibration trajectories 1347
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis 1347
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis 1348
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis 1348
To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset) 1349
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP 1350
Autocalibration 1350
Manual calibration 1352
Calibration volume 1352
To perform the calibration 1352
To reset to the factory settings 1355
C-Track System Configuration 1357
To configure the system 1357
To set parameters 1357
C-Track Object Preparation 1361
To prepare the object 1361
To build a valid dynamic referential 1361
Part setup examples 1362
Number of targets 1363
Target distribution 1363
Volume extension 1363
360° measurement 1363
R-Series Autocalibration Kit 1365
Components 1365
Tool changer 1366
Calibration bar holder 1368
Tool rack 1369
Proximity sensors 1369
Pneumatic valve 1370
Internal Logic 1371
Control box 1371
Operating principles 1373
To calibrate the system 1375

42
R-Series Industrial Computer 1376
Technical specifications 1376
Software 1376
Using CUBE-R 1377
Workflow with R-Series I/O Module 1377
Workflow with Metrolog X4 i-Robot 1377
C-Track Calibration with R-Series I/O Module 1378
R-Series I/O Module 1378
C-Track Calibration with Metrolog X4 i-Robot 1380
Metrolog X4 i-Robot 1380
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration with R-Series I/O Module 1383
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration with Metrolog X4 i-Robot 1384
Automated Photogrammetry 1387
General operation 1387
Prerequisites, restrictions, and rules 1387
During acquisition 1388
When to perform the automated photogrammetry 1390
To use the automated photogrammetry with I/O Module 1390
Using Robot 1391
Basic Robot Manipulations 1392
Teach pendant (TP) 1393
Jog speed keys 1395
World Coordinate System (Cartesian) 1396
Tool coordinate system 1396
Coordinate System (Joint) 1397
Jog keys 1398
Robot Programming 1400
FANUC BG Logic 1404
FANUC Check IO 1405
Programs 1405
User alarms 1406
Other FANUC Programs 1410
SAFETY CHECK program 1411
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration trajectory program 1411
Teach pendant programs in CUBE-R 1411
Handshake 1415
How to teach a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R 1417
How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot 1418
Software 1420
VXelements 1420
R-Series I/O Module 1420

R-Series I/O Module Overview 1421

Mode of operation 1421

43
 Communication interfaces 1422
EtherNet/IP compatibility 1424
Technical requirements 1424
Getting Started with the I/O Module interface 1426
R-Series I/O Module Interface Installation 1427
File download online 1427
R-Series I/O Module software installation 1428
R-Series I/O Module software uninstallation 1428
R-Series I/O Module software run 1428
Typical workflow using R-Series I/O Module software 1428
EtherNet/IP Configuration for FANUC 1429
16-bit configuration 1429
Controller IP configuration 1429
EtherNet/IP adapter configuration 1431
Group I/O configuration 1433
Digital I/O configuration 1435
Controller power cycle 1440
EtherNet/IP configuration 1441
Computer IP configuration 1442
I/O Module connection configuration 1443
Verification 1444
8-bit Configuration 1446
Controller IP configuration 1446
EtherNet/IP adapter configuration 1447
Group I/O configuration 1449
Digital I/O configuration 1452
Controller power cycle 1456
EtherNet/IP configuration 1457
Computer IP configuration 1458
I/O Module connection configuration 1460
Verification 1461
I/O Module Interface 1463
VXelements plug-in window 1463
Standard interface 1464
Robot programming commands 1467
Operation user interface 1467
IO Tester 1469
IO Action / Event Assignation 1470
Actions and events 1470
Assignation 1470
R-Series I/O Module Action/Event channel 1471
Actions table 1472
R-Series I/O Module status channel 1483
Auto detect targets action 1485
To use the automated photogrammetry function with I/O Module 1485
IO Error Messages 1487
Session Settings Configuration 1490
Session settings file view 1491

44
 New session settings window 1491
R-Series I/O Module file type 1492
Session setting description 1492
Session settings type 1492
Robot output 1493
General tab 1493
Scanner configurations tab 1495
Inspection tab 1495
Options 1498
IO connection parameters 1498
Action Server EIP Class: 1499
Status Server EIP Class: 1499
Connection Path: 1499
Configuration Connection Instance 1501
Consuming Connection Point 1501
Producing Connection Point 1502
Action Class 1 and Status Class 1 1503
Application parameters 1510
Inspection Software Client 1514
Automatic inspection workflow 1516
Custom inspection workflow 1516
Emailing 1519
Configurations 1521
Import 1521
Export 1521
Import from VXscan-R 1521
User Settings 1522
Import 1522
Export 1522
System Panel 1523
Visibility pane 1523
C-Track 1523
HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN 3D, and MetraSCAN 3D-R 1523
Device tabs 1523
Available information in tabs 1523
C-Track 1523
Reference parameters 1524
Scanner 1524
HandyPROBE 1525
Probes 1525
Probing parameters 1526
VXtrack 1526
CUBE-R 1526
Probe emulator pane 1526
Probe position pane 1527
Troubleshooting 1528
Memory-related error messages 1528
Product compatibility error messages 1529
Examples 1529

45
 Product compatibility 1529
MetraSCAN 3D-R 1529
C-Track 1532
VXelements Overview 1534
VXelements Interface 1535
Home page 1535
Start 1535
To activate or deactivate a product 1536
Open session 1536
Learn 1536
Interface 1537
Menu bar 1537
Configure menu 1538
Calibration journal 1538
Launch IP Configuration 1538
Probe emulator 1538
Session parameters 1538
Available options in the Configure | Session parameters menu: 1538
Reference parameters (available using a C-Track) 1539
Available options in the Configure | Reference parameters menu: 1539
Product Manager 1539
Options 1539
Help menu 1539
Toolbar 1539
Navigation panel 1540
To rename a node or element in the navigation tree 1540
Entity panel 1540
Selector control tool 1541
3D viewer 1542
3D interactive viewpoint 1542
System panel 1542
Status bar 1542
Contextual help 1543
Configuration Options 1544
VXelements 1544
Display options 1545
VXscan options 1546
VXshot options 1547
C-Track options 1547
Probing options 1548
Inspection options 1549
VXscan-R options 1550
Color map options 1551
Online Services options 1551
User experience enhancements 1552
User Experience Enhancement Program 1552
Program participation 1552
Types of data collected and how it is used to improve the overall user experience 1552
Privacy protection 1553

Mouse and Keyboard Controls 1554

Mouse navigation buttons 1554

46
 Keyboard shortcuts 1554
Contextual Menu 1555
3D viewer 1555
Navigation panel 1556
Timeline (VXscan-R) 1559
Tracked entity window (VXtrack) 1560
Display toolbar 1561
Mesh display 1561
Shading: 1561
Display as: 1561
CAD display 1561
Display as: 1562
Surface display 1562
Display as: 1562
C-Track scene 1562
Entity display 1563
Perspective view 1563
Clip view 1564
Deviation vector multiplier 1564
2D view 1564
C-track setup 1564
Lock viewpoint 1564
Scanning viewpoint 1564
Show collision envelope 1565
VXshot display 1565
Touchscreen mode (F10) 1565
Target quality indicator 1565
System Panel 1566
Visibility pane 1566
C-Track 1566
HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN 3D, and MetraSCAN 3D-R 1566
Device tabs 1566
Available information in tabs 1566
C-Track 1566
Reference parameters 1567
Scanner 1567
HandyPROBE 1568
Probes 1568
Probing parameters 1569
VXtrack 1569
CUBE-R 1569
Probe emulator pane 1569
Probe position pane 1570
File Types 1571
Calibration and license files 1571
Module-specific input and output formats 1571
Input formats 1572
Output formats 1577
General output formats 1586
.DXF export tips and parameters 1586

47
Add Entity 1588
Add Alignment 1589
References 1590
VXelements Modules 1591
VXscan Overview 1592
Technical requirements 1592
VXscan Interface 1593
Menu bar 1593
Toolbar 1593
Functions only available in the menu 1597
Contextual menu 1598
Navigation panel 1598
Scan details pane 1598
Scan parameters pane 1599
Go!SCAN 20, Go!SCAN 50, ACADEMIA 20, and ACADEMIA 50 1599
Go!SCAN SPARK 1599
HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, and HandySCAN 300 1601
HandySCAN BLACK 1603
HandySCAN MAX and HandySCAN MAX|Elite 1604
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite 1606
MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, and MetraSCAN 750 1608
MetraSCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN-R BLACK 1609
Target details pane 1611
Entities details pane 1611
Alignment details pane 1611
Details 1611
Texture parameters pane 1612
Finalize parameters pane (Go!SCAN SPARK, HandySCAN BLACK, HandySCAN MAX,
MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners only) 1613
Display toolbar 1614
3D viewer 1614
Selection tools 1614
Using VXscan 1617
Launch scan process 1617
Scan modes 1617
Scan surface 1617
Scan points 1617
Scan positioning targets 1618
Copy positioning targets 1619
System panel 1619
Guided workflows 1620
VXscan | Add Entity 1622
Add a Point 1623
Name 1623
Measurement method Mesh 1623
Measurement method Vertex selection 1623
Measurement method Scan targets 1623
Target type 1623
Measurement method Constructed 1623

48
 Entity Details 1626
Error distribution 1626
Add a Line 1627
Name 1627
Measurement method Mesh 1627
Constraining plane 1627
Measurement method Vertex selection 1627
Constraining plane 1627
Selection 1627
Measurement method Scan targets 1627
Compensation method 1628
Target type 1628
Constraining plane 1628
Measurement method Constructed 1628
Construction 1628
Entity Details 1630
Error distribution 1630
Add a Circle 1631
Name 1631
Measurement method Mesh 1631
Constraining plane 1631
Measurement method Vertex selection 1631
Constraining plane 1631
Selection 1631
Measurement method Scan targets 1631
Compensation method 1632
Target type 1632
Constraining plane 1632
Measurement method Constructed 1632
Measurement method Boundary 1633
Constraining plane 1633
Entity Details 1633
Error distribution 1633
Add a Slot 1634
Name 1634
Measurement method Mesh 1634
Constraining plane 1634
Measurement method Vertex selection 1634
Constraining plane 1634
Selection 1634
Measurement method Scan targets 1634
Compensation method 1635
Target type 1635
Constraining plane 1635
Measurement method Boundary 1635
Constraining plane 1635
Entity Details 1635
Error distribution 1636
Add a Rectangle 1637
Name 1637
Measurement method Mesh 1637

49
 Constraining plane 1637
Measurement method Vertex selection 1637
Constraining plane 1637
Selection 1637
Measurement method Scan targets 1637
Compensation method 1638
Target type 1638
Constraining plane 1638
Measurement method Boundary 1638
Constraining plane 1638
Entity Details 1638
Error distribution 1639
Add a Plane 1640
Name 1640
Measurement method Mesh 1640
Measurement method Vertex selection 1640
Selection 1640
Measurement method Scan targets 1640
Compensation method 1640
Target type 1641
Measurement method Constructed 1641
Measurement method Draw line 1643
Entity Details 1643
Error distribution 1644
Add a Cylinder 1645
Name 1645
Measurement method Mesh 1645
Measurement method Vertex selection 1645
Selection 1645
Measurement method Scan targets 1645
Compensation method 1645
Target type 1646
Entity Details 1646
Error distribution 1646
Add a Sphere 1647
Name 1647
Measurement method Mesh 1647
Measurement method Vertex selection 1647
Selection 1647
Measurement method Scan targets 1647
Compensation method 1647
Target type 1648
Entity Details 1648
Error distribution 1648
Add a Cone 1649
Name 1649
Measurement method Mesh 1649
Measurement method Vertex selection 1649
Selection 1649
Measurement method Scan targets 1649
Compensation method 1649

50
 Target type 1650
Entity Details 1650
Error distribution 1650
Add a Curve 1651
Name 1651
Measurement method Exact boundary 1651
Measurement method Free polyline 1651
Entity Details 1651
Measurement | Distance 1652
Name 1652
Measurement method Vertex selection 1652
Selection 1652
Measurement method Constructed 1652
Construction 1652
Entity Details 1652
Measurement | Caliper 1653
Name 1653
Constraining axis 1653
Point parameters 1653
Measurement | Angle 1655
Name 1655
Measurement method Constructed 1655
Construction 1655
Entity Details 1655
VXscan | Add Alignment 1656
Manual Alignment 1657
Name 1657
Alignment by constraints 1657
Manual alignment 1657
Move object 1658
VXscan Import Alignment 1659
To import alignment 1659

VXscan Point Selection Alignment 1660

To align with Point selection method 1660

VXscan Entity Based Alignment 1661

Name 1661
VXscan Surface Best Fit Alignment 1662
Item selection 1662
Pre-alignment mode 1662
Constraints 1662
Global registration 1663
Parameters 1663
VXscan Target Best Fit Alignment 1664
Target best fit 1664
Targets 1664

51
 Pre-alignment mode 1664
Edit Scan 1666
Selection tools 1666
Select target with surface 1667
Delete tools 1667
Clipping objects 1668
Optimize Scan 1669
Finalize function 1669
Finalize scan parameters 1669
Optimization modes 1669
Parameters 1671
Finalize texture function 1671
Clipping Objects 1674
Remove Background 1675
Add Clipping Plane 1676
Creation methods 1676
Use Clipping Reference 1678
Using Clip Cards 1679
How to use clip cards 1679
Clip card plane creation rules 1679
1680
Delete Frames 1681
Using a Go!SCAN SPARK scanner 1681
Using a Go!SCAN 3D, a Health Care Partner 3D or a Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanner 1681
Smart Resolution 1682
To use the function with a Go!SCAN SPARK 1682
To use the automatic process 1682
To use the scanner triggered process 1683
To use the manual process 1683
To use the template process 1683
After the scanning process 1684
Shiny surface best practices 1684
Setup 1684
During scan 1684
Post scan 1686

Manual Resolution 1687

To use the manual resolution function 1687
To clear manual resolution 1688
Merge Scans 1689
Add scan 1690
If a scan template is imported, there are some additional considerations: 1690

Scan Template 1691

To create and save a scan template 1691
New session workflow 1692

52
 Existing session workflow 1692
Scale Bar Mode 1694
To use Scale bar mode 1694

Basic Guided Workflow 1695

Go!SCAN 3D 1695
HandySCAN 3D 1695
MetraSCAN 3D 1695
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D 1695
Go!SCAN 3D 1696
HandySCAN 3D 1696
MetraSCAN 3D 1696
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D 1696
Scan parameters 1698
Scan parameters – Go!SCAN SPARK 1699
Scan parameters – Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50 1701
Scan parameters – HandySCAN 3D 1702
Scan parameters – HandySCAN BLACK 1704
Scan parameters – MetraSCAN BLACK 1706
Basic Wkflow - Scan param - MAX 1708
Scan parameters – MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 750, and MetraSCAN 350 1710
Scan parameters – Health Care Partner 3D 1711
Scan parameters – ACADEMIA 3D 1712
ACADEMIA 10 1712
ACADEMIA 20 1712
ACADEMIA 50 1713
Detect Targets 1714
Scan 1715
Go!SCAN SPARK 1715
Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50 1715
HandySCAN BLACK 1716
HandySCAN MAX 1716
HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, and HandySCAN 300 1717
MetraSCAN BLACK 1718
MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, and MetraSCAN 750 1719
Health Care Partner 3D 1719
ACADEMIA 10 and ACADEMIA 50 1719
ACADEMIA 20 1721
Optimize Volumetric Accuracy 1722
Final Options 1723
Small Part Guided Workflow 1724
Scan parameters – HandySCAN 3D and Go!SCAN SPARK 1725
Optimization modes 1726

53
Scan Targets Tips 1729
Scan Targets 1730
Scan 1731
Add Scan 1732
Add scan 1732
Align and merge scans 1732
Align and Merge Scans 1733
Item selection 1733
To align scans using the Surface best fit mode 1733
To align scans using the Global registration function 1733
Scan Finalization 1735
Final Options 1736
VXscan-R Overview 1737
Benefits 1737
Licenses 1737
VXscan-R Plan main functions 1737
VXscan-R Execute main functions 1737
Input and output formats 1738
Technical requirements 1738
Home Page 1739
Interface 1739
To import a CAD 1740
To manage the products used in a session 1740
VXscan-R Interface 1741
VXscan-R Plan 1741
Menu bar 1741
Toolbar 1741
Functions only available from the menu bar 1743
Contextual menu 1743
Import functions 1743
Export functions 1745
Navigation panel 1745
Navigation pane 1745
Scan details pane 1748
Scan parameters pane 1748
Finalize scan parameters pane 1750
Animation details pane 1751
Photogrammetry details pane 1751
3D viewer 1752
Display toolbar 1752
Selection tools 1752
Timeline 1754
System panel 1754
VXscan-R Execute 1754
Menu bar 1754
Toolbar 1754
Contextual menu 1755
Project properties 1755

54
 Timeline 1756
System panel 1756
VXscan-R plug-in for cobots 1756
Using VXscan-R 1758
VXscan-R Plan mode 1758
VXscan-R Execute mode 1758
Asset Protection 1760
VXscan-R Plan 1761
VXscan-R Plan – Offline 1762
Functions or sections available for offline programming in VXscan-R Plan 1762
Edit Info 1763
Parameters 1763
To add an image or a screenshot 1765
To rename a program 1765
To copy a program in a new part 1766
Import Fixture 1767
Align 1768
Options available in the Flip/Delete alignments pane 1768
Auto. align 1768
Check alignment 1768
Reference Alignment 1770
To perform the alignment 1770
To modify the alignment 1770
To undo the alignment 1771
Manual Alignment 1772
To perform an alignment 1772
To modify the alignment 1772
To undo the alignment 1773
Add Feature 1774
Options available in the Features sub-node of the Navigation pane 1774
Scan sweeps 1774
Options available in the Scan sweeps sub-node of the Navigation pane 1775
Surface Feature 1777
To create a surface feature 1777
To set the parameters in the Add feature pane 1778
To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane 1779
Edge Feature 1781
To create an edge feature 1781
To set the parameters in the Add feature pane 1782
To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane 1783
Manual Feature 1784
To create a manual feature 1784
To set the parameters in the Add feature pane 1785
To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane 1786

55
Jog Feature 1787
To create a jog feature 1787
To set the parameters in the Add feature pane 1788
To set the parameters in the Robot joints pane 1789
To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane 1789
Timeline Functions 1791
Timeline views 1791
To disable a sweep 1793
To finalize a sweep 1794
To finalize a transition 1794
To flip a sweep 1794
To reverse a sweep 1795
To merge a sweep 1795
To split a sweep 1795
Reorder and Finalize Path 1796
To reorder sweeps 1796
To finalize path without reordering 1797
Play a Simulation 1798
To play a simulation 1798
To pause a simulation 1798
To reset a simulation 1798
Manual Resolution in VXscan-R 1799
To use the manual resolution function 1799
To clear manual resolution 1800
Finalize Scan 1801
To finalize the scan 1801
To reset the scan 1801
VXscan-R Plan – Online 1802
Functions or sections available for online testing in VXscan-R Plan 1802
Connect to Robot 1803
Signature file 1803
Active alarms and blocking faults 1804
System Preparation 1807
R-Series scanners 1807
Number of targets 1807
Target distribution 1807
Handheld scanners with Automation Kit 1808
C-Track Calibration 1809
Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer 1809
Autocalibration with manual tool changer 1810
Purpose of calibration 1810
When to perform the calibration 1811
Recommendations 1811
Expected results 1811
Scanner Calibration 1813

56
 Calibration with R-Series scanners 1813
Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer 1813
Autocalibration with manual tool changer 1813
When to perform the calibration 1814
Recommendations 1814
Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit 1815
HandySCAN 3D scanners 1815
MetraSCAN 3D handheld scanners 1816
When to perform the calibration 1816
Recommendations 1816
Expected results 1817
Automated Photogrammetry 1818
General operation 1818
Prerequisites, restrictions and rules 1818
During acquisition 1819
When to perform the automated photogrammetry 1820
Physical Alignment 1821
Overview 1821
To create a target physical alignment 1821
To set the best fit parameters in the Physical alignment pane 1822
To create a surface physical alignment 1822
To set the best fit parameters in the Physical alignment pane 1823
Play Program 1824
Overview 1824
Interface 1825
Speed override 1826
Scanner acquisition speed table 1826

Validate 1828
Finalize Scan 1829
To finalize the scan 1829
To reset the scan 1829
Inspection 1830
Inspect Mesh 1831
Workflow if a program is already in the inspection program table 1831
Workflow if the inspection program table is empty 1831
Send to PolyWorks 1832
Compatible versions 1832
To set the PolyWorks parameters 1832
PolyWorks DataLoop 1832
Send to Metrolog 1834
To set up the inspection 1834
To trigger the inspection 1834
VXscan-R Execute 1835
Functions or sections available in VXscan-R Execute 1835
Project Properties 1836

57
Connect to Robot 1837
Signature file 1837
Active alarms and blocking faults 1838
System Preparation 1841
R-Series scanners 1841
Number of targets 1841
Target distribution 1841
Handheld scanners with Automation Kit 1842
C-Track Calibration 1843
Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer 1843
Autocalibration with manual tool changer 1844
Purpose of calibration 1844
When to perform the calibration 1845
Recommendations 1845
Expected results 1845
Scanner Calibration 1847
Calibration with R-Series scanners 1847
Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer 1847
Autocalibration with manual tool changer 1847
When to perform the calibration 1848
Recommendations 1848
Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit 1849
HandySCAN 3D scanners 1849
MetraSCAN 3D handheld scanners 1850
When to perform the calibration 1850
Recommendations 1850
Expected results 1851
Automated Photogrammetry 1852
General operation 1852
Prerequisites, restrictions and rules 1852
During acquisition 1853
When to perform the automated photogrammetry 1854
Launch Program 1855
Interface 1855
Timeline Display 1857
Inspection 1859
Edit Layout 1860
To use the tool 1860
Parameters 1861
Edit layout pane 1861
Table pane 1864
Scanner pane 1865
C-Track pane 1867
Enclosure pane 1868
Robot module pane 1869
Scanner adapter pane 1870
Scanner gripper pane 1870
Robot home pane 1871

58
 Dresspack pane 1872
Calibration trajectory pane 1872
Layout calibration pane 1872
Collision envelopes pane 1873
To change the calibration trajectory settings 1873
Locate C-Track 1873
Workflow 1873
TCP calibration 1874
Scanner calibration 1875
C-Track calibration 1877
Locate table 1879
To use the Locate table Generalized algorithm 1880
To manage layouts 1880
Calibrate layout 1882
Prerequisite 1882
To use the tool 1882
Parameters 1882
Programs 1883
Multi-Layout Support 1888
How to use multi-layout: 1888

VXscan-R Plugin for Cobots Workflows 1890

Jog Feature 1890
To use the Jog feature 1890
Manual scan 1892
To use manual scan with VXscan-R plugin 1892
VXshot Overview 1893
VXshot Interface 1894
Menu bar 1894
Toolbar 1894
Function only available from the menu bar 1895
Contextual menu 1895
Navigation panel 1895
Navigation pane 1895
Photogrammetry details pane 1895
Photogrammetry acquisition parameters pane 1896
Photogrammetry parameters pane 1896
Display bar 1896
Photogrammetry display mode 1896
Target table 1898
Image browser 1899
Photo acquisition viewer 1900
Photogrammetry Details 1904
Finalization results 1904
Various states of a model 1904
Photogrammetry Acquisition Parameters 1908
Photogrammetry Parameters 1909
To pick a manual scaling distance 1909
To build a custom scale bar 1909

59
 To delete a scale bar 1910
To load an artifact 1910
Using VXshot 1912
Using the VXshot module with the MaxSHOT Next 1912

Creating a Photogrammetry Model 1913

Target setup 1913
Reference frame installation 1913
Scale bar installation 1914
Taking photographs 1914
Tips for a successful photo session 1916
Editing a Photogrammetry Model 1917
To finalize a model 1917
To clean a photogrammetry model 1917
To add a scan 1917
MaxSHOT Next targets VS Optimize volumetric accuracyThe degree of agreement between the result of
measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume. 1918
To inspect a model 1918
Model Finalization 1919
Conditions for a successful model finalization 1919
Finalizing a model with a MaxSHOT Next for the first time 1919
VXinspect Overview 1921
VXinspect|Analysis and VXinspect|Quality Control feature comparison 1921
VXinspect|Analysis main features 1922
Intuitive creation of the inspection program 1922
Inspection process 1922
Basic dimension 1922
Report creation 1922
VXinspect|Quality Control main features 1922
Intuitive creation of the inspection program 1922
Fully integrated scanning and probing processes 1923
Multiple part inspection process 1923
Basic dimension and GD&T 1923
Report creation 1923
Input and output formats 1923
Technical requirements 1923
Home Page 1924
VXinspect|Analysis 1924
VXinspect|Quality Control 1924
VXinspect Interface 1925
Menu bar 1925
Toolbar 1925
Contextual menu 1927
Import functions 1927
Import features 1928
To import a mesh in VXinspect|Quality Control 1928
To import a mesh in VXinspect|Analysis 1928
Export functions 1929
Export features 1929

60
 To export an alignment 1929
To export nominals and measurements of geometric entities 1929
To export probed points 1929
To set the alignment used to export an entity 1930
Measurement entity type (counterpart or best fit) 1930
To set the alignment used to export probed points 1930
Navigation panel 1930
To show only the selected items in the 3D viewer 1931
To show or hide expanding panels 1931
Inspection program table 1931
3D viewer 1931
Contextual menu 1932
Shift key 1932
2D view 1932
Selection tools 1933
Display toolbar 1934
GD&T 1935
GD&T controls in VXinspect|Quality Control 1935
Concentricity control details 1935
Modifiers 1938
LMC 1938
MMC 1938
Translation 1938
Using VXinspect 1940
VXinspect|Analysis 1940
Inspect using the mesh measurement method 1940
VXinspect|Quality Control 1940
To import inspection programs (.csf) 1940
With Creaform products attached 1941
Without any Creaform products attached 1941
Using the measurement method - Mesh 1941
Using measurement method - Probing 1942
Using measurement method - Optical probing 1943
VXinspect Inspection Program Table 1944
Program table features 1944
Active part 1944
Toolbar 1944
Alignments 1945
Inspection program 1945
Measurement state 1945
Created items 1946
Assigned alignment 1946
Measurement method 1946
Item visibility 1947
Contextual menu features 1947
Dimension pane features 1947
Show in report 1947
Measurement state 1948
Dimension 1948
Tolerance 1948
Nominal 1948
Measured 1948
Deviation 1948

61
 Tendency 1948
Out of tolerance 1949
References 1950
CAD Reference 1951
Toolbar available functions 1951
Selection tools 1952
Mesh Reference 1953
Toolbar available functions 1953
Selection tools 1953
Inspection Alignment 1954
Surface Best Fit Alignment 1955
Mobile 1955
Fixed 1955
Pre-alignment mode 1955
Calculation filter parameters 1956
Constraints 1956
Best fit measurement method 1956
To perform a surface best fit with manual pre-alignment 1957
Toolbar display 1957

Point Selection Alignment 1958

Construction 1958
Selection 1958
Constraints 1958
Error distribution 1958
Entity Selection Alignment 1960
Use nominal coordinate system 1960
Construction 1960
Target Best Fit Alignment 1961
Target type 1961
Optical measurement 1961
Pre-alignment mode 1961
Calculation filter parameters 1961
RPS Alignment 1963
To add a RPS alignment 1963
Manual Alignment 1964
Name 1964
To add a manual alignment 1964
Method 1 1964
Method 2 1964

Import alignment 1965

To import alignment 1965

Datum Reference Frame - Entities 1966

To create a DRF using entities 1966

Datum Reference Frame - Targets and Entities 1967

62
 To create a DRF using targets and entities 1967
Pick constraints on CAD surface 1968

Datum Reference Frame - Targets 1970

To create a DRF using targets 1970
Pick constraints on CAD surface 1971

Inspection Entities 1973

Inspection Entities | Point 1975
Name and Datum entity label 1975
Measurement method Probe 1975
Nominal 1975
Alignment 1976
Compensation direction 1976
Nominal numerical values 1976
Calculation filter parameters 1976
Probing parameters 1976
Measurement method Edges 1976
Nominal 1976
Measurement mesh 1977
Alignment 1977
Automatic selection parameters 1977
Calculation filter parameters 1978
Measurement method Mesh 1979
Nominal 1979
Measurement mesh 1979
Alignment 1979
Nominal numerical values 1980
Automatic selection parameters 1980
Calculation filter parameters 1981
Measurement method Vertex selection 1981
Nominal 1982
Measurement mesh 1982
Nominal mesh 1982
Alignment 1982
Nominal numerical values 1982
Calculation filter parameters 1982
Measurement method Constructed 1983
Nominal 1983
Nominal numerical values 1983
Construction 1983
Construction method 1983
Measurement method Cross-section 1986
Nominal 1986
Nominal numerical values 1986
Automatic selection parameters 1986
Calculation filter parameters 1986
Measurement method Optical probing 1986
Nominal 1986
Target type 1987
Optical measurement 1987
Alignment 1987
Compensation direction 1987
Nominal numerical values 1988

63
 Automatic selection parameters 1988
Calculation filter parameters 1988
Probing parameters 1988
Dimensions 1989
Error distribution 1989
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 1991
Apply parameters to all parts 1991
Inspection Entities | Plane 1992
Name and Datum entity label 1992
Measurement method Probe 1992
Nominal 1992
Alignment 1993
Nominal numerical values 1993
Probing parameters 1993
Probed points 1994
Measurement method Mesh 1994
Nominal 1994
Measurement mesh 1995
Alignment 1995
Nominal orientation and center 1995
Nominal numerical values 1995
Automatic selection parameters 1996
Calculation filter parameters 1997
Measurement method Vertex selection 1998
Nominal 1998
Measurement mesh 1998
Alignment 1998
Selection 1999
Measurement method Constructed 1999
Nominal 1999
Alignment 2000
Nominal orientation and center 2000
Nominal numerical values 2000
Construction 2000
Measurement method Optical probing 2002
Nominal 2002
Target type 2003
Optical measurement 2003
Alignment 2003
Nominal orientation and center 2004
Automatic selection parameters 2004
Nominal numerical values 2004
Probing parameters 2004
Probed points 2005
Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane 2005
Nominal 2005
Nominal 2005
Measurement mesh 2006
Alignment 2006
Construction 2006
Dimensions 2006
Error distribution 2007
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2008
Apply parameters to all parts 2008

64
Inspection Entities | Line 2009
Name and Datum entity label 2009
Measurement method Probe 2009
Nominal 2009
Alignment 2010
Constraining plane 2010
Nominal numerical values 2010
Calculation filter parameters 2010
Probing parameters 2011
Probed points 2012
Measurement method Edges 2012
Nominal 2012
Measurement mesh 2012
Alignment 2013
Constraining plane 2013
Nominal numerical values 2013
Automatic selection parameters 2013
Calculation filter parameters 2014
Measurement method Mesh 2015
Nominal 2015
Measurement mesh 2016
Alignment 2016
Constraining plane 2016
Nominal numerical values 2016
Automatic selection parameters 2017
Calculation filter parameters 2018
Measurement method Vertex selection 2020
Nominal 2020
Measurement mesh 2020
Alignment 2020
Constraining plane 2021
Calculation filter parameters 2021
Measured points 2021
Measurement method Constructed 2022
Nominal 2022
Alignment 2022
Construction 2023
Construction method 2023
Measurement method Cross-section 2024
Nominal 2024
Alignment 2024
Nominal numerical values 2025
Automatic selection parameters 2025
Calculation filter parameters 2025
Measurement method Optical probing 2025
Nominal 2026
Target type 2026
Optical measurement 2026
Alignment 2026
Constraining plane 2027
Nominal numerical values 2027
Automatic selection parameters 2027
Constraint plane 2027
Probing parameters 2028
Probed points 2028

65
 Dimensions 2028
Error distribution 2029
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2030
Apply parameters to all parts 2030
Inspection Entities | Cylinder 2031
Name and Datum entity label 2031
Measurement method Probe 2031
Alignment 2031
Nominal orientation and center 2031
Nominal numerical values 2032
Probing parameters 2032
Probed points 2032
Measurement method Mesh 2033
Nominal 2033
Measurement mesh 2033
Alignment 2034
Nominal orientation and center 2034
Nominal numerical values 2034
Automatic selection parameters 2034
Calculation filter parameters 2035
Measurement method Vertex selection 2036
Nominal 2037
Measurement mesh 2037
Alignment 2037
Nominal dimensions 2038
Selection 2038
Measurement method Constructed 2039
Nominal 2039
Alignment 2039
Nominal orientation and center 2040
Nominal numerical values 2040
Construction 2040
Measurement method Optical probing 2040
Nominal 2040
Target type 2041
Optical measurement 2041
Alignment 2041
Nominal orientation and center 2042
Automatic selection parameters 2042
Nominal numerical values 2042
Probing parameters 2043
Probed points 2043
Dimensions 2043
Error distribution 2044
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2045
Apply parameters to all parts 2045
Inspection Entities | Circle 2046
Name and Datum entity label 2046
Measurement method Probe 2046
Nominal 2046
Alignment 2047
Constraining plane 2047
Nominal numerical values 2047

66
Calculation filter parameters 2047
Probing parameters 2048
Probed points 2049
Measurement method Edges 2049
Nominal 2049
Measurement mesh 2050
Alignment 2050
Constraining plane 2050
Nominal numerical values 2050
Automatic selection parameters 2050
Calculation filter parameters 2051
Measurement method Mesh 2052
Nominal 2052
Measurement mesh 2053
Alignment 2053
Constraining plane 2053
Nominal numerical values 2054
Automatic selection parameters 2054
Calculation filter parameters 2055
Measurement method Vertex selection 2056
Nominal 2056
Measurement mesh 2057
Alignment 2057
Constraining plane 2057
Nominal numerical values 2057
Calculation filter parameters 2057
Selection 2058
Measurement method Constructed 2058
Nominal 2058
Alignment 2059
Nominal numerical values 2059
Construction 2060
Construction method 2060
Measurement method Cross-section 2061
Nominal 2061
Alignment 2062
Nominal dimensions 2062
Nominal numerical values 2062
Automatic selection parameters 2062
Calculation filter parameters 2062
Measurement method Optical probing 2063
Nominal 2063
Target type 2063
Optical measurement 2064
Alignment 2064
Constraining plane 2064
Nominal dimensions 2064
Nominal numerical values 2064
Automatic selection parameters 2064
Constraint plane 2065
Probing parameters 2065
Probed points 2066
Measurement method Manual 2066
Alignment 2066
Nominal dimensions 2066

67
 Dimensions 2066
Error distribution 2066
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2068
Apply parameters to all parts 2068
Inspection Entities | Sphere 2069
Name and Datum entity label 2069
Measurement method Probe 2069
Nominal 2069
Alignment 2070
Nominal numerical values 2070
Probing parameters 2070
Probed points 2071
Measurement method Mesh 2071
Nominal 2071
Measurement mesh 2072
Alignment 2072
Nominal numerical values 2072
Automatic selection parameters 2072
Calculation filter parameters 2073
Measurement method Vertex selection 2074
Nominal 2074
Measurement mesh 2075
Alignment 2075
Nominal dimensions 2075
Selection 2075
Measurement method Constructed 2076
Nominal 2076
Alignment 2076
Construction 2077
Measurement method Optical probing 2077
Nominal 2077
Target type 2077
Optical measurement 2078
Alignment 2078
Nominal numerical values 2078
Automatic selection parameters 2078
Probing parameters 2078
Probed points 2079
Dimensions 2079
Error Distribution 2079
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2081
Apply parameters to all parts 2081
Inspection Entities | Slot 2082
Name and Datum entity label 2082
Measurement method Probe 2082
Nominal 2082
Alignment 2083
Constraining plane 2083
Nominal numerical values 2083
Calculation filter parameters 2084
Probing parameters 2084
Probed points 2085
Measurement method Edges 2085

68
 Nominal 2085
Measurement mesh 2086
Alignment 2086
Constraining plane 2086
Nominal numerical values 2086
Automatic selection parameters 2087
Calculation filter parameters 2087
Measurement method Mesh 2089
Nominal 2089
Measurement mesh 2089
Alignment 2090
Constraining plane 2090
Nominal numerical values 2090
Automatic selection parameters 2090
Calculation filter parameters 2092
Measurement method Vertex selection 2092
Nominal 2093
Measurement mesh 2093
Alignment 2093
Constraining plane 2093
Nominal dimensions 2094
Calculation filter parameters 2094
Measured points 2094
Measurement method Constructed 2095
Nominal 2095
Alignment 2095
Construction 2095
Measurement method Cross-section 2096
Nominal 2096
Alignment 2096
Nominal numerical values 2097
Automatic selection parameters 2097
Calculation filter parameters 2097
Measurement method Optical probing 2097
Target type 2098
Optical measurement 2099
Nominal 2099
Alignment 2099
Constraining plane 2099
Nominal numerical values 2099
Automatic selection parameters 2100
Constraint plane 2100
Probing parameters 2101
Probed points 2101
Measurement method Manual 2101
Alignment 2101
Nominal dimensions 2101
Dimensions 2102
Error distribution 2102
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2103
Apply parameters to all parts 2104
Inspection Entities | Cone 2105
Name and Datum entity label 2105
Measurement method Probe 2105

69
 Nominal 2105
Alignment 2106
Nominal numerical values 2106
Probing parameters 2106
Probed points 2107
Measurement method Mesh 2107
Nominal 2107
Measurement mesh 2108
Alignment 2108
Nominal numerical values 2108
Automatic selection parameters 2108
Calculation filter parameters 2109
Measurement method Vertex selection 2110
Nominal 2111
Measurement mesh 2111
Alignment 2111
Nominal dimensions 2111
Selection 2112
Measurement method Constructed 2112
Nominal 2112
Alignment 2113
Construction - Construction method 2113
Base and height 2113
Two points and base diameter 2114
Measurement method Optical probing 2115
Nominal 2115
Target type 2116
Optical measurement 2116
Alignment 2116
Nominal numerical values 2116
Automatic selection parameters 2116
Probing parameters 2117
Probed points 2117
Dimensions 2117
Error distribution 2118
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2119
Apply parameters to all parts 2119
Inspection Entities | Rectangle 2120
Name and Datum entity label 2120
Measurement method Probe 2120
Nominal 2120
Alignment 2121
Constraining plane 2121
Nominal numerical values 2121
Calculation filter parameters 2122
Probing parameters 2122
Probed points 2123
Measurement method Edges 2123
Nominal 2123
Measurement mesh 2124
Alignment 2124
Constraining plane 2124
Nominal numerical values 2124
Automatic selection parameters 2124

70
 Calculation filter parameters 2125
Measurement method Mesh 2126
Nominal 2126
Measurement mesh 2127
Alignment 2127
Constraining plane 2128
Nominal numerical values 2128
Automatic selection parameters 2128
Calculation filter parameters 2129
Measurement method Vertex selection 2130
Nominal 2130
Measurement mesh 2131
Alignment 2131
Constraining plane 2131
Calculation filter parameters 2132
Measured points 2132
Measurement method Constructed 2132
Nominal 2133
Alignment 2133
Construction 2134
Nominal dimensions 2134
Measurement method Cross-section 2134
Nominal 2134
Alignment 2135
Nominal dimensions 2135
Nominal numerical values 2135
Automatic selection parameters 2135
Calculation filter parameters 2136
Measurement method Optical probing 2136
Nominal 2136
Target type 2136
Optical measurement 2137
Alignment 2137
Constraining plane 2137
Nominal dimensions 2137
Nominal numerical values 2137
Automatic selection parameters 2138
Constraint plane 2138
Probing parameters 2138
Probed points 2139
Measurement method Manual 2139
Alignment 2139
Nominal dimensions 2139
Dimensions 2139
Error distribution 2140
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2141
Apply parameters to all parts 2141
Inspection Entities | Surface 2143
Name 2143
Measurement method Probe 2143
Nominal 2143
Alignment 2143
Calculation filter parameters 2144
Probing parameters 2144

71
 Probed points 2144
Measurement method Mesh 2144
Nominal 2144
Alignment 2145
Automatic selection parameters 2145
Calculation filter parameters 2145
Measurement method Vertex selection 2145
Nominal 2145
Measurement mesh 2146
Alignment 2146
Nominal dimensions 2146
Selection 2146
Measurement method Constructed 2146
Nominal 2147
Alignment 2147
Construction 2147
Calculation filter parameters 2147
Selection 2147
Measurement method Optical probing 2148
Target type 2148
Optical measurement 2148
Nominal 2148
Alignment 2148
Automatic selection parameters 2148
Calculation filter parameters 2149
Probed points 2149
Dimensions 2149
Error distribution 2149
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2150
Apply parameters to all parts 2151
Add a Slab 2152
Name and Datum entity label 2152
Alignment 2152
Plane entities - How to create a slab 2152
Dimensions 2153
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2154
Inspection Entities | 2D curve 2155
Name 2155
Measurement method Probe 2155
Alignment 2155
Constraint plane 2155
Calculation filter parameters 2155
Probing parameters 2156
Probed points 2157
Measurement method Edges 2157
Alignment 2157
Constraining plane 2157
Automatic selection parameters 2157
Calculation filter parameters 2158
Measurement method Vertex selection 2159
Measurement mesh 2159
Alignment 2159
Constraining plane 2159

72
 Calculation filter parameters 2159
Measured points 2160
Measurement method Optical probing 2160
Target type 2160
Optical measurement 2161
Alignment 2161
Constraining plane 2161
Automatic selection parameters 2161
Constraint plane 2161
Probing parameters 2162
Probed points 2162
Dimensions 2162
Error distribution 2163
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2164
Apply parameters to all parts 2164
Inspection Entities | 3D curve 2165
Name 2165
Measurement method Edges 2165
Alignment 2165
Automatic selection parameters 2165
Calculation filter parameters 2166
Dimensions 2167
Error distribution 2167
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2168
Apply parameters to all parts 2169
Inspection Entities | Cross-section 2170
Name 2170
Measurement method Mesh 2170
Nominal 2170
Alignment 2170
CAD models 2170
Creation parameters 2171
Building mode 2171
Linear 2171
Radial 2172
Multiple planes 2173
Dimensions 2173
Error distribution 2173
VXinspect Entities | Pattern 2176
Name and Datum entity label 2176
Alignment 2176
Entities 2176
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2176
Quick Entities 2178
To create quick entities: 2178

Add Comparison Points 2179

Tools | Entities | Comparison Points 2179
Name 2179
To create comparison points 2179
Measurement method Mesh 2179

73
 Nominal 2179
Import nominal points 2180
Measurement mesh 2180
Alignment 2180
Automatic selection parameters 2181
Calculation filter parameters 2181
Measurement method Edges 2182
Nominal 2182
Measurement mesh 2183
Alignment 2183
Automatic selection parameters 2183
Calculation filter parameters 2184
Points 2185
Dimensions 2185
Inspection Entities | Distance 2186
Name 2186
Measurement method Vertex selection 2186
Nominal 2186
Measurement mesh 2186
Alignment 2187
Nominal numerical values 2187
Selection 2187
Measurement method Constructed 2187
Nominal 2187
Alignment 2188
Nominal numerical values 2188
Construction 2188
Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2188
Nominal 2188
Cross-section 2189
Alignment 2189
Construction 2189
Measurement method Manual 2189
Nominal 2189
Alignment 2190
Nominal numerical values 2190
Dimensions 2190
Inspection Entities | Caliper 2191
Name 2191
Nominal 2191
Alignment 2191
Constraining axis 2191
Nominal numerical values 2192
Point parameters 2192
Dimensions 2192
Inspection Entities | Angle 2193
Name 2193
Measurement method Constructed 2193
Nominal 2193
Alignment 2193
Nominal numerical values 2194
Construction 2194

74
 Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2195
Nominal 2195
Cross-section 2195
Alignment 2195
Construction 2195
Measurement method Manual 2196
Nominal 2196
Alignment 2196
Nominal numerical values 2196
Dimensions 2197
Inspection Color map 2198
Name 2198
Measurement method - Mesh 2198
Nominal 2198
Alignment 2199
Automatic selection parameters 2199
Calculation filter parameters 2199
Measurement method - Optical probing 2199
Target type 2199
Optical measurement 2200
Nominal 2200
Alignment 2200
Automatic selection parameters 2200
Calculation filter parameters 2200
Probed points 2200
Dimensions 2201
Error distribution 2201
Apply parameters to all parts 2202
VXinspect Nominal Creation Methods 2203
Pick on CAD 2203
Fit on points 2203
Fit on CAD model 2203
Numerical values 2203
Triangle or Vertex selection 2204
VXmodel transfer 2204
Cross-section 2204
None 2205
VXinspect Measurement Methods 2206
Probe 2206
Edges and mesh 2208
Manual 2210
Constructed 2210
Cross-section 2210
Optical probing 2210
Vertex selection 2211
Mesh symmetry plane 2211
VXinspect Annotations 2212
To create annotations 2212
Entity annotations (used for geometric entities) 2212
Deviation annotations (used for data display deviation such as probed points, color maps or 2D sections) 2213
Multiple part annotations 2213

75
 Annotation functions 2214
VXinspect Probe Emulator 2215
Probe emulator panel 2215
Probe emulator configuration 2215
Using the probe emulator 2215
Probe position 2215
Add a Note 2216
Title 2216
Description 2216
Note screenshots 2216
Show note during measure 2216
Show note in report 2216
VXinspect Report Generation 2217
To generate an inspection report 2217
Project information 2217
Part/Mesh information 2218
To modify the part/mesh name 2218
Date and time 2218
Restore default 2219
Report options 2219
Menu 2219
Front page 2219
Report pages 2220
Disclaimer page 2220
Table options 2220
Font 2220
Print settings 2220
Export active part only 2221
VXmodel Overview 2222
Main features 2222
Input and output formats 2222
Technical requirements 2222
VXmodel Interface 2223
Menu bar 2223
Contextual menu 2223
Toolbar 2223
Navigation panel 2224
Mesh node 2225
Mesh details 2225
Entities node 2225
Entities details 2225
Show color map 2226
Alignments node 2226
Alignments details 2226
Details 2226
Display bar 2226
Using VXmodel 2227
Mesh editing typical workflow 2227
Send to VXmodel 2227

76
 Clean the mesh 2227
Align to origin 2228
Edit the mesh 2228
Improve the mesh 2228
Create entities 2228
Add Entity 2229
VXmodel Entities | Point 2230
Tools | Entities | Point 2230
Name 2230
Measurement method Mesh 2230
Calculation filter parameters 2230
Measurement method Vertex selection 2231
Measurement method Constructed 2231
Measurement method Cross-section 2234
Cross-section 2234
Calculation filter parameters 2234
Measurement method Numerical values 2234
Numerical parameters 2234
Entity Details 2235
Error distribution 2235
VXmodel Entities | Line 2237
Tools | Entities | Line 2237
Name 2237
Measurement method Edges 2237
Constraining plane 2237
Calculation filter parameters 2237
Measurement method Mesh 2238
Constraining plane 2238
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2238
Measurement method Vertex selection 2239
Constraining plane 2239
Selection 2239
Measurement method Constructed 2239
Construction method 2239
Measurement method Cross-section 2241
Cross section 2241
Calculation filter parameters 2241
Measurement method Numerical values 2242
Numerical parameters 2242
Parameters 2242
Entity Details 2242
Error distribution 2242
VXmodel Entities | Circle 2244
Tools | Entities | Circle 2244
Name 2244
Measurement method Edges 2244
Constraining plane 2244
Calculation filter parameters 2244
Constraints 2245
Measurement method Mesh 2245
Constraining plane 2245

77
 Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2245
Constraints 2246
Measurement method Vertex selection 2246
Constraining plane 2246
Selection 2246
Constraints 2246
Measurement method Constructed 2246
Construction method 2246
Measurement method Cross-section 2248
Cross-section 2248
Calculation filter parameters 2248
Constraints 2249
Measurement method Boundary 2249
Constraining plane 2249
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2249
Constraints 2249
Entity Details 2249
Error distribution 2249
VXmodel Entities | Slot 2251
Tools | Entities | Slot 2251
Name 2251
Measurement method Edges 2251
Constraining plane 2251
Calculation filter parameters 2251
Constraints 2252
Measurement method Mesh 2252
Constraining plane 2252
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2253
Constraints 2253
Measurement method Vertex selection 2253
Constraining plane 2253
Selection 2253
Constraints 2253
Measurement method Constructed 2254
Construction 2254
Measurement method Cross-section 2254
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2254
Constraints 2254
Measurement method Boundary 2255
Constraining plane 2255
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2255
Constraints 2255
Entity Details 2255
Error distribution 2256
VXmodel Entities | Rectangle 2257
Tools | Entities | Rectangle 2257
Name 2257
Measurement method Edges 2257
Constraining plane 2257
Calculation filter parameters 2257
Constraints 2258
Measurement method Mesh 2258
Constraining plane 2258

78
 Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2259
Constraints 2259
Measurement method Vertex selection 2259
Constraining plane 2259
Selection 2259
Constraints 2259
Measurement method Constructed 2260
Construction 2260
Measurement method Cross-section 2260
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2260
Constraints 2261
Measurement method Boundary 2261
Constraining plane 2261
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2261
Constraints 2261
Entity Details 2261
Error distribution 2262
VXmodel Entities | Curve 2264
Tools | Entities | Curve 2264
Name 2264
Measurement method Exact boundary 2264
Curve parameters 2264
Measurement method Free curve 2265
Curve parameters - Output type 2265
Measurement method Free polyline 2265
Measurement method Fit on mesh 2265
Curve parameters 2265
Measurement method Fit on boundary 2266
Curve parameters 2266
Curve edition 2267
To move a curve point: 2267
To edit the curve 3 options are available: 2268
Entity Details 2268
VXmodel Entities | Pipe centerline 2269
Tools | Entities | Pipe centerline 2269
Purpose 2269
Name 2269
To add a pipe centerline 2269
Entity Details 2270
Error distribution 2270
VXmodel Entities | Plane 2272
Tools | Entities | Plane 2272
Name 2272
Measurement method Mesh 2272
Calculation filter parameters 2272
Constraints 2273
Measurement method Vertex selection 2273
Selection 2273
Constraints 2273
Measurement method Constructed 2273
Construction method 2273
Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane 2276

79
 Construction 2276
Measurement method Draw line 2276
Parameters 2277
Entity Details 2277
Error distribution 2277
VXmodel Entities | Cylinder 2279
Tools | Entities | Cylinder 2279
Name 2279
Measurement method Mesh 2279
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2279
Constraints 2279
Measurement method Vertex selection 2280
Selection 2280
Constraints 2280
Measurement method Constructed 2280
Construction 2280
Parameters 2280
Entity Details 2281
Error distribution 2281
VXmodel Entities | Sphere 2283
Tools | Entities | Sphere 2283
Name 2283
Measurement method Mesh 2283
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2283
Constraints 2283
Measurement method Vertex selection 2284
Selection 2284
Constraints 2284
Measurement method Constructed 2284
Construction 2284
Entity Details 2284
Error distribution 2284
VXmodel Entities | Cone 2286
Tools | Entities | Cone 2286
Name 2286
Measurement method Mesh 2286
Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter 2286
Constraints 2286
Measurement method Vertex selection 2287
Selection 2287
Constraints 2287
Measurement method Constructed 2287
Construction method 2287
Parameters 2288
Entity Details 2289
Error distribution 2289
VXmodel Entities | Cross-section 2291
Tools | Entities | Cross-section 2291
Name 2291
Creation parameters - Building modes 2291
Linear 2291

80
 Radial 2292
Along Curve 2293
Multiple planes 2294
Curve parameters 2294
Entity Details 2294
VXmodel Entities | Silhouette 2296
Tools | Entities | Silhouette 2296
Purpose 2296
Name 2296
To add a silhouette 2296
Curve parameters 2297
Entity Details 2297
VXmodel Measurement | Distance 2298
Tools | Measurement | Distance 2298
Name 2298
Measurement method Vertex selection 2298
Selection 2298
Measurement method Constructed 2298
Construction 2298
Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2299
Construction 2299
Entity Details 2299
VXmodel Measurement | Angle 2300
Tools | Measurement | Angle 2300
Name 2300
Measurement method Constructed 2300
Construction 2300
Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2301
Construction 2301
Entity Details 2302
VXmodel Measurement | Caliper 2303
Name 2303
Constraining axis 2303
Point parameters 2303
Add Surface 2305
Auto surface 2306
Tools | Add surface | Auto surface 2306
Purpose 2306
To create an auto surface 2306
Entity Details 2307
Manual surface 2308
Purpose 2308
Entity Details 2308
Mouse controls 2308
To create a patch network 2309
Tips 2310
How to resolve a 3-sided patch 2310
How to resolve a 5-sided patch 2312

81
Single patch 2314
Tools | Add surface | Single patch 2314
Purpose 2314
To create a single patch 2314
Add Alignment 2316
Manual Alignment 2317
Tools | Alignment | Manual Alignment 2317
Name 2317
Alignment by constraint 2317
Manual alignment 2317
Move object 2318
Details 2318
Import Alignment 2319
Name 2319
To import alignment 2319
Details 2319
Point Selection 2320
Name 2320
Nominal 2320
Manual 2320
Details 2320
Entity Based 2321
Tools | Alignment | Entity based 2321
Name 2321
Construction 2321
Details 2321
Best Fit 2322
Tools | Alignment | Best fit 2322
Name 2322
Surface best fit 2322
Item selection 2322
Parameters 2322
Pre-alignment mode 2322
Constraints 2322
Global registration 2323
Parameters 2323
Clean Mesh 2324
Tools | Clean mesh 2324
Purpose 2324
To clean mesh(es) 2324
Cleaning options 2324
Isolated patches 2324
Self-intersections 2325
Spikes 2325
Small holes 2326
Singular vertices 2326
Creased edges 2327
Narrow triangles 2328

82
 Outcropping triangles 2328
Narrow bridges 2328
Non-manifold triangles 2328
Parameters 2329
Selection Tools 2330
Tools | Selection 2330
To make a selection 2330
Selection tools 2330
Selection modes 2331
Rectangle 2332
Tools | Selection | Rectangle 2332

Free Form 2333

Tools | Selection | Free-form 2333

Brush 2334
Tools | Selection | Brush 2334

Connect 2335
Tools | Selection | Connect 2335

Sudden Change 2336

Tools | Selection | Sudden change 2336

Similar Curvature 2337

Tools | Selection | Similar curvature 2337

Similar Normal 2338

Tools | Selection | Similar normal 2338

Isolated Patches 2339

Tools | Selection | Isolated patches 2339

Curvature Selection 2340

Tools | Selection | Curvature selection 2340

Triangle Picking 2341

Tools | Selection | Triangle picking 2341

Boundary Selection 2342

Tools | Selection | Boundary selection 2342

Select through 2343

Tools | Selection | Select through 2343

Select Backface 2344

Tools | Selection | Select backface 2344

Selection Modes 2345

Select all 2345
Clear selection 2345
Invert selection 2345
Tools | Selection | Invert selection 2345

83
Grow Selection 2346
Tools | Selection | Grow selection 2346

Shrink Selection 2347

Tools | Selection | Shrink selection 2347

Improve 2348
Tools | Improve mesh 2348

Improve | Fill Holes | Whole 2349

Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes 2349
Whole mode 2349
Purpose 2349
To fill holes 2349
Improve | Fill Holes | Partial 2351
Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes 2351
Partial mode 2351
Purpose 2351
To fill holes 2351
Improve | Fill Holes | Bridge 2353
Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes 2353
Bridge mode 2353
Purpose 2353
To fill holes 2353
Improve | Decimate 2355
Tools | Improve mesh | Decimate 2355
Purpose 2355
To decimate 2355
Improve | Remesh 2356
Purpose 2356
To remesh 2356
Improve | Edit Boundary 2357
Tools | Improve mesh | Edit boundary 2357
Purpose 2357
Boundary selection modes 2357
To edit using Multiple and Partial mode 2357
To edit using Fit to entity mode 2358
Improve | Smooth Mesh 2359
Tools | Improve mesh | Smooth mesh 2359
Purpose 2359
To smooth the mesh 2359
Improve | Defeature 2360
Purpose 2360
To remove features 2360
Improve | Remove Spike 2361
Tools | Improve mesh | Remove spike 2361
Purpose 2361

84
 To remove spikes 2361
Improve | Sandpaper 2362
Tools | Improve mesh | Sandpaper 2362
Purpose 2362
To use sandpaper 2362
Edit 2363
Tools | Shell Offset Mesh 2364
Tools | Edit mesh | Shell/Offset mesh 2364
Shell 2364
Offset mesh 2364
To create a shell or offset a mesh 2364
Tools | Extend Boundary 2366
Tools | Edit mesh | Extend boundary 2366
To extend a boundary 2366
Tools | Cut Mesh 2368
Tools | Edit mesh | Cut mesh 2368
Purpose 2368
To cut a mesh 2368
Tools | Mirror Mesh 2369
Purpose 2369
To mirror a mesh 2369
Tools | Flip Fix Normals 2370
Tools | Edit mesh | Flip/Fix normals 2370
Purpose 2370
To flip or fix normals 2370
Tools Flatten 2371
Purpose 2371
To flatten a mesh 2371
Tools | Scale 2372
Tools | Edit mesh | Scale 2372
Purpose 2372
To scale a mesh 2372
Tools | Extrude Boundary 2373
Tools | Edit mesh | Extrude boundary 2373
Purpose 2373
To extrude a boundary 2373
Edit | Cut Mesh by Curve 2375
Tools | Edit mesh | Cut mesh by curve 2375
Purpose 2375
Mouse controls 2375
To cut the mesh 2376
Tools | Watertight Remesh 2377
Tools | Edit mesh | Watertight remesh 2377
Purpose 2377

85
 To remesh 2377
Tools | Sculpt 2378
Tools | Edit mesh | Sculpt 2378
Purpose 2378
To add features 2378
Boolean operation 2379
Tools | Edit mesh | Boolean operation 2379
How to create a mesh from a Boolean operation between two meshes: 2379

Compare 2380
Tools | Compare 2380
Deviation annotations 2380
Error distribution 2380
Combine 2383
Tools | Combine 2383
To combine meshes 2383
Parameters available for meshes with texture 2383
Merge 2385
Tools | Merge 2385
To merge meshes 2385
Parameters available for meshes with texture 2385
Texture 2387
Properties 2389
VXprobe Overview 2390
Input and output formats 2390
Technical requirements 2390
VXprobe Interface 2391
Menu bar 2391
Configure menu 2391
Toolbar 2391
Contextual menu 2393
Import functions 2394
System panel 2394
Stylus communication signal quality 2394
Signal quality status 2395
Battery level status 2395
Connected device information 2395
Using VXprobe 2396
VXprobe | Add Entity 2397
Inspection Entities | Point 2398
Name and Datum entity label 2398
Measurement method Probe 2398
Nominal 2398
Alignment 2399
Compensation direction 2399
Nominal numerical values 2399

86
 Calculation filter parameters 2399
Probing parameters 2399
Measurement method Edges 2399
Nominal 2399
Measurement mesh 2400
Alignment 2400
Automatic selection parameters 2400
Calculation filter parameters 2401
Measurement method Mesh 2402
Nominal 2402
Measurement mesh 2402
Alignment 2402
Nominal numerical values 2403
Automatic selection parameters 2403
Calculation filter parameters 2404
Measurement method Vertex selection 2404
Nominal 2405
Measurement mesh 2405
Nominal mesh 2405
Alignment 2405
Nominal numerical values 2405
Calculation filter parameters 2405
Measurement method Constructed 2406
Nominal 2406
Nominal numerical values 2406
Construction 2406
Construction method 2406
Measurement method Cross-section 2409
Nominal 2409
Nominal numerical values 2409
Automatic selection parameters 2409
Calculation filter parameters 2409
Measurement method Optical probing 2409
Nominal 2409
Target type 2410
Optical measurement 2410
Alignment 2410
Compensation direction 2410
Nominal numerical values 2411
Automatic selection parameters 2411
Calculation filter parameters 2411
Probing parameters 2411
Dimensions 2412
Error distribution 2412
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2414
Apply parameters to all parts 2414
Inspection Entities | Plane 2415
Name and Datum entity label 2415
Measurement method Probe 2415
Nominal 2415
Alignment 2416
Nominal numerical values 2416
Probing parameters 2416
Probed points 2417

87
 Measurement method Mesh 2417
Nominal 2417
Measurement mesh 2418
Alignment 2418
Nominal orientation and center 2418
Nominal numerical values 2418
Automatic selection parameters 2419
Calculation filter parameters 2420
Measurement method Vertex selection 2421
Nominal 2421
Measurement mesh 2421
Alignment 2421
Selection 2422
Measurement method Constructed 2422
Nominal 2422
Alignment 2423
Nominal orientation and center 2423
Nominal numerical values 2423
Construction 2423
Measurement method Optical probing 2425
Nominal 2425
Target type 2426
Optical measurement 2426
Alignment 2426
Nominal orientation and center 2427
Automatic selection parameters 2427
Nominal numerical values 2427
Probing parameters 2427
Probed points 2428
Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane 2428
Nominal 2428
Nominal 2428
Measurement mesh 2429
Alignment 2429
Construction 2429
Dimensions 2429
Error distribution 2430
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2431
Apply parameters to all parts 2431
Inspection Entities | Line 2432
Name and Datum entity label 2432
Measurement method Probe 2432
Nominal 2432
Alignment 2433
Constraining plane 2433
Nominal numerical values 2433
Calculation filter parameters 2433
Probing parameters 2434
Probed points 2435
Measurement method Edges 2435
Nominal 2435
Measurement mesh 2435
Alignment 2436
Constraining plane 2436

88
 Nominal numerical values 2436
Automatic selection parameters 2436
Calculation filter parameters 2437
Measurement method Mesh 2438
Nominal 2438
Measurement mesh 2439
Alignment 2439
Constraining plane 2439
Nominal numerical values 2439
Automatic selection parameters 2440
Calculation filter parameters 2441
Measurement method Vertex selection 2443
Nominal 2443
Measurement mesh 2443
Alignment 2443
Constraining plane 2444
Calculation filter parameters 2444
Measured points 2444
Measurement method Constructed 2445
Nominal 2445
Alignment 2445
Construction 2446
Construction method 2446
Measurement method Cross-section 2447
Nominal 2447
Alignment 2447
Nominal numerical values 2448
Automatic selection parameters 2448
Calculation filter parameters 2448
Measurement method Optical probing 2448
Nominal 2449
Target type 2449
Optical measurement 2449
Alignment 2449
Constraining plane 2450
Nominal numerical values 2450
Automatic selection parameters 2450
Constraint plane 2450
Probing parameters 2451
Probed points 2451
Dimensions 2451
Error distribution 2452
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2453
Apply parameters to all parts 2453
Inspection Entities | Cylinder 2454
Name and Datum entity label 2454
Measurement method Probe 2454
Alignment 2454
Nominal orientation and center 2454
Nominal numerical values 2455
Probing parameters 2455
Probed points 2455
Measurement method Mesh 2456
Nominal 2456

89
 Measurement mesh 2456
Alignment 2457
Nominal orientation and center 2457
Nominal numerical values 2457
Automatic selection parameters 2457
Calculation filter parameters 2458
Measurement method Vertex selection 2459
Nominal 2460
Measurement mesh 2460
Alignment 2460
Nominal dimensions 2461
Selection 2461
Measurement method Constructed 2462
Nominal 2462
Alignment 2462
Nominal orientation and center 2463
Nominal numerical values 2463
Construction 2463
Measurement method Optical probing 2463
Nominal 2463
Target type 2464
Optical measurement 2464
Alignment 2464
Nominal orientation and center 2465
Automatic selection parameters 2465
Nominal numerical values 2465
Probing parameters 2466
Probed points 2466
Dimensions 2466
Error distribution 2467
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2468
Apply parameters to all parts 2468
Inspection Entities | Circle 2469
Name and Datum entity label 2469
Measurement method Probe 2469
Nominal 2469
Alignment 2470
Constraining plane 2470
Nominal numerical values 2470
Calculation filter parameters 2470
Probing parameters 2471
Probed points 2472
Measurement method Edges 2472
Nominal 2472
Measurement mesh 2473
Alignment 2473
Constraining plane 2473
Nominal numerical values 2473
Automatic selection parameters 2473
Calculation filter parameters 2474
Measurement method Mesh 2475
Nominal 2475
Measurement mesh 2476
Alignment 2476

90
 Constraining plane 2476
Nominal numerical values 2477
Automatic selection parameters 2477
Calculation filter parameters 2478
Measurement method Vertex selection 2479
Nominal 2479
Measurement mesh 2480
Alignment 2480
Constraining plane 2480
Nominal numerical values 2480
Calculation filter parameters 2480
Selection 2481
Measurement method Constructed 2481
Nominal 2481
Alignment 2482
Nominal numerical values 2482
Construction 2483
Construction method 2483
Measurement method Cross-section 2484
Nominal 2484
Alignment 2485
Nominal dimensions 2485
Nominal numerical values 2485
Automatic selection parameters 2485
Calculation filter parameters 2485
Measurement method Optical probing 2486
Nominal 2486
Target type 2486
Optical measurement 2487
Alignment 2487
Constraining plane 2487
Nominal dimensions 2487
Nominal numerical values 2487
Automatic selection parameters 2487
Constraint plane 2488
Probing parameters 2488
Probed points 2489
Measurement method Manual 2489
Alignment 2489
Nominal dimensions 2489
Dimensions 2489
Error distribution 2489
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2491
Apply parameters to all parts 2491
Inspection Entities | Sphere 2492
Name and Datum entity label 2492
Measurement method Probe 2492
Nominal 2492
Alignment 2493
Nominal numerical values 2493
Probing parameters 2493
Probed points 2494
Measurement method Mesh 2494
Nominal 2494

91
 Measurement mesh 2495
Alignment 2495
Nominal numerical values 2495
Automatic selection parameters 2495
Calculation filter parameters 2496
Measurement method Vertex selection 2497
Nominal 2497
Measurement mesh 2498
Alignment 2498
Nominal dimensions 2498
Selection 2498
Measurement method Constructed 2499
Nominal 2499
Alignment 2499
Construction 2500
Measurement method Optical probing 2500
Nominal 2500
Target type 2500
Optical measurement 2501
Alignment 2501
Nominal numerical values 2501
Automatic selection parameters 2501
Probing parameters 2501
Probed points 2502
Dimensions 2502
Error Distribution 2502
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2504
Apply parameters to all parts 2504
Inspection Entities | Slot 2505
Name and Datum entity label 2505
Measurement method Probe 2505
Nominal 2505
Alignment 2506
Constraining plane 2506
Nominal numerical values 2506
Calculation filter parameters 2507
Probing parameters 2507
Probed points 2508
Measurement method Edges 2508
Nominal 2508
Measurement mesh 2509
Alignment 2509
Constraining plane 2509
Nominal numerical values 2509
Automatic selection parameters 2510
Calculation filter parameters 2510
Measurement method Mesh 2512
Nominal 2512
Measurement mesh 2512
Alignment 2513
Constraining plane 2513
Nominal numerical values 2513
Automatic selection parameters 2513
Calculation filter parameters 2515

92
 Measurement method Vertex selection 2515
Nominal 2516
Measurement mesh 2516
Alignment 2516
Constraining plane 2516
Nominal dimensions 2517
Calculation filter parameters 2517
Measured points 2517
Measurement method Constructed 2518
Nominal 2518
Alignment 2518
Construction 2518
Measurement method Cross-section 2519
Nominal 2519
Alignment 2519
Nominal numerical values 2520
Automatic selection parameters 2520
Calculation filter parameters 2520
Measurement method Optical probing 2520
Target type 2521
Optical measurement 2522
Nominal 2522
Alignment 2522
Constraining plane 2522
Nominal numerical values 2522
Automatic selection parameters 2523
Constraint plane 2523
Probing parameters 2524
Probed points 2524
Measurement method Manual 2524
Alignment 2524
Nominal dimensions 2524
Dimensions 2525
Error distribution 2525
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2526
Apply parameters to all parts 2527
Inspection Entities | Cone 2528
Name and Datum entity label 2528
Measurement method Probe 2528
Nominal 2528
Alignment 2529
Nominal numerical values 2529
Probing parameters 2529
Probed points 2530
Measurement method Mesh 2530
Nominal 2530
Measurement mesh 2531
Alignment 2531
Nominal numerical values 2531
Automatic selection parameters 2531
Calculation filter parameters 2532
Measurement method Vertex selection 2533
Nominal 2534
Measurement mesh 2534

93
 Alignment 2534
Nominal dimensions 2534
Selection 2535
Measurement method Constructed 2535
Nominal 2535
Alignment 2536
Construction - Construction method 2536
Base and height 2536
Two points and base diameter 2537
Measurement method Optical probing 2538
Nominal 2538
Target type 2539
Optical measurement 2539
Alignment 2539
Nominal numerical values 2539
Automatic selection parameters 2539
Probing parameters 2540
Probed points 2540
Dimensions 2540
Error distribution 2541
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2542
Apply parameters to all parts 2542
Inspection Entities | Rectangle 2543
Name and Datum entity label 2543
Measurement method Probe 2543
Nominal 2543
Alignment 2544
Constraining plane 2544
Nominal numerical values 2544
Calculation filter parameters 2545
Probing parameters 2545
Probed points 2546
Measurement method Edges 2546
Nominal 2546
Measurement mesh 2547
Alignment 2547
Constraining plane 2547
Nominal numerical values 2547
Automatic selection parameters 2547
Calculation filter parameters 2548
Measurement method Mesh 2549
Nominal 2549
Measurement mesh 2550
Alignment 2550
Constraining plane 2551
Nominal numerical values 2551
Automatic selection parameters 2551
Calculation filter parameters 2552
Measurement method Vertex selection 2553
Nominal 2553
Measurement mesh 2554
Alignment 2554
Constraining plane 2554
Calculation filter parameters 2555

94
 Measured points 2555
Measurement method Constructed 2555
Nominal 2556
Alignment 2556
Construction 2557
Nominal dimensions 2557
Measurement method Cross-section 2557
Nominal 2557
Alignment 2558
Nominal dimensions 2558
Nominal numerical values 2558
Automatic selection parameters 2558
Calculation filter parameters 2559
Measurement method Optical probing 2559
Nominal 2559
Target type 2559
Optical measurement 2560
Alignment 2560
Constraining plane 2560
Nominal dimensions 2560
Nominal numerical values 2560
Automatic selection parameters 2561
Constraint plane 2561
Probing parameters 2561
Probed points 2562
Measurement method Manual 2562
Alignment 2562
Nominal dimensions 2562
Dimensions 2562
Error distribution 2563
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2564
Apply parameters to all parts 2564
Inspection Entities | Surface 2566
Name 2566
Measurement method Probe 2566
Nominal 2566
Alignment 2566
Calculation filter parameters 2567
Probing parameters 2567
Probed points 2567
Measurement method Mesh 2567
Nominal 2567
Alignment 2568
Automatic selection parameters 2568
Calculation filter parameters 2568
Measurement method Vertex selection 2568
Nominal 2568
Measurement mesh 2569
Alignment 2569
Nominal dimensions 2569
Selection 2569
Measurement method Constructed 2569
Nominal 2570
Alignment 2570

95
 Construction 2570
Calculation filter parameters 2570
Selection 2570
Measurement method Optical probing 2571
Target type 2571
Optical measurement 2571
Nominal 2571
Alignment 2571
Automatic selection parameters 2571
Calculation filter parameters 2572
Probed points 2572
Dimensions 2572
Error distribution 2572
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2573
Apply parameters to all parts 2574
Add a Slab 2575
Name and Datum entity label 2575
Alignment 2575
Plane entities - How to create a slab 2575
Dimensions 2576
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2577
Inspection Entities | 2D curve 2578
Name 2578
Measurement method Probe 2578
Alignment 2578
Constraint plane 2578
Calculation filter parameters 2578
Probing parameters 2579
Probed points 2580
Measurement method Edges 2580
Alignment 2580
Constraining plane 2580
Automatic selection parameters 2580
Calculation filter parameters 2581
Measurement method Vertex selection 2582
Measurement mesh 2582
Alignment 2582
Constraining plane 2582
Calculation filter parameters 2582
Measured points 2583
Measurement method Optical probing 2583
Target type 2583
Optical measurement 2584
Alignment 2584
Constraining plane 2584
Automatic selection parameters 2584
Constraint plane 2584
Probing parameters 2585
Probed points 2585
Dimensions 2585
Error distribution 2586
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only) 2587
Apply parameters to all parts 2587

96
Quick Entities 2588
To create quick entities: 2588

Inspection Entities | Distance 2589

Name 2589
Measurement method Vertex selection 2589
Nominal 2589
Measurement mesh 2589
Alignment 2590
Nominal numerical values 2590
Selection 2590
Measurement method Constructed 2590
Nominal 2590
Alignment 2591
Nominal numerical values 2591
Construction 2591
Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2591
Nominal 2591
Cross-section 2592
Alignment 2592
Construction 2592
Measurement method Manual 2592
Nominal 2592
Alignment 2593
Nominal numerical values 2593
Dimensions 2593
Inspection Entities | Angle 2594
Name 2594
Measurement method Constructed 2594
Nominal 2594
Alignment 2594
Nominal numerical values 2595
Construction 2595
Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section) 2596
Nominal 2596
Cross-section 2596
Alignment 2596
Construction 2596
Measurement method Manual 2597
Nominal 2597
Alignment 2597
Nominal numerical values 2597
Dimensions 2598
Inspection Alignment 2599
Surface Best Fit Alignment 2600
Mobile 2600
Fixed 2600
Pre-alignment mode 2600
Calculation filter parameters 2601
Constraints 2601
Best fit measurement method 2601
To perform a surface best fit with manual pre-alignment 2602

97
 Toolbar display 2602

Point Selection Alignment 2603

Construction 2603
Selection 2603
Constraints 2603
Error distribution 2603
Entity Selection Alignment 2605
Use nominal coordinate system 2605
Construction 2605
Target Best Fit Alignment 2606
Target type 2606
Optical measurement 2606
Pre-alignment mode 2606
Calculation filter parameters 2606
RPS Alignment 2608
To add a RPS alignment 2608
Manual Alignment 2609
Name 2609
To add a manual alignment 2609
Method 1 2609
Method 2 2609

Import alignment 2610

To import alignment 2610

VXprobe | Using VXelements with a Metrology Software 2611

To use the HandyPROBE with metrology software: 2611

VXtrack Overview 2612

VXtrack Interface 2613
Menu bar 2613
Toolbar 2613
Contextual menu 2613
Navigation panel 2613
To show only the selected items in the 3D viewer 2614

Using VXtrack 2614

Setup 2614
Tracking model 2614
Tracking sequence 2615
Data acquisition 2615
Positioning Model 2616
To create a positioning model 2616
Target acquisition 2616
Reference positioning target statuses 2617
Tracking Models 2619
To detect a tracking model 2619
To add a tracking model 2620

98
 To view a tracking model 2620
To edit a tracking model 2620
To edit the tracking model parameters 2622
To save a tracking model 2623
To view model positions 2623
Tracking Sequences 2624
To create a tracking sequence 2624
To configure the tracking sequence parameters 2624
Limit acquisition number 2624
Stop after limit is reached (only available if the Limit acquisition number check box is selected) 2624
Trigger 2625
Polarity 2625
Acquisition rate 2625
Filtering 2625
Sampling rate* 2626
To copy a tracking sequence 2626
To edit a tracking sequence 2626
To track a model in a sequence 2626
To track a model relatively to another one (add relation) 2627
Data Acquisition 2628
Unmatched targets 2628
To view a tracking sequence 2628
To record a tracking sequence 2630
To export a tracking sequence 2630
Smart Control 2631
VXelements Smart Control 2632
Options 2632
VXinspect Smart Control 2635
General options 2635
Specific to HandyPROBE Next 2635
Quick measure 2635
Quick add entity mode 2636

Multifunction Buttons 2638

Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons 2639
Smart Control 2640
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 2641
Trigger button [1] light colors 2641
HandySCAN BLACK 2642
HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition 2642
Smart Control 2643

HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons 2644

HandySCAN 700|Elite Multifunction Buttons 2646
MetraSCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons 2648
Scanner status light colors 2648
MetraSCAN BLACK 2648
MetraSCAN BLACK during acquisition 2649

99
 VXinspect 2649
Smart Control 2650
MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons 2651
MetraSCAN 3D 2651
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition 2652
VXinspect 2652
Smart Control 2652
HandyPROBE Next Multifunction Buttons 2653
2653
MaxSHOT Next Multifunction buttons 2654
VXshot 2654
VXshot during measurements 2655
HandySCAN MAX Multifunction Buttons 2656
Smart control options available 2656
3D Display Control 2658
To activate the mouse behavior 2658
Accessories 2659
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand 2660
Main features 2661
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Installation 2662
C-Track Self-Power Kit Setup and Use 2665
Components 2665
To use the C-Track Self-Power Kit 2665
To swap the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries 2666
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation Overview 2668
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand 2669
Hardware included with Creaform's C- Track Shop- Floor StandStand designed by
Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part
to be inspected. 2669
Hardware included with the C-Track Self-Power Kit 2671

C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Installation 2672

Controller 2672
C-Track 2672
C-Track Self-Power Kit 2673
Using the C-Track Self-Power Kit 2674
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation 2675
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation Accessories Installation 2676
TV support 2676
Recommended TV mount types 2677
Desktop CPU bracket 2677
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation Cable Management 2679

100
 P-Clamps instructions 2680
Power bar installation 2680
Illustration of the recommended installation: 2681
Front access door 2681
If your system is connected with a C-Link : 2681
If your system is connected without a C-Link : 2682

C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Storage Instructions 2683

To store inside Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation 2683
Storage steps 2684
Removal steps 2687
To install on the docking station 2687
To prepare the docking station 2688
To place the C-TrackShop-Floor Stand on the docking station 2688
To remove from the docking station 2689

Creaform Portable Workstation 2690

Component 2690
Solution for HandySCAN 3D and Go!SCAN 3D 2691
Solution for MetraSCAN 3D 2692
Weight and dimensions 2693
Set-up 2693
Connection 2695
Scanner calibration 2696
Legacy Field Pack 2698
Components 2698
Set up 2700
Workstation 2700
Protective case contents 2701
Connection 2701
AC power 2702
DC power 2702
Creaform battery 2702
Status of LEDs and buzzer 2703
To lengthen the battery lifetime (± 5 years): 2703
Car battery 2703
Scanner 2704
Charging the wireless tablet 2704
Mounting and unmounting the computer to the protective case 2704
Mounting 2705
Unmounting 2705
Computer installation 2706
Positioning Targets and Reflectors 2708
Positioning targets 2708
Coded targets 2709
Magnetic glass protected targets 2711
Optical reflectors 2711
360° magnetic targets 2713
Clip Cards 2715
Batteries 2716
Battery requirements 2716
To connect the battery 2717

101
 To connect the C-Track Self-Power Kit to the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand 2717
To replace the HandyPROBE Next batteries 2717
To swap the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries 2717
To recharge the battery 2717
Charger indicators 2718
Battery charge time 2718
To recharge the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries 2718
Automation Kit 2719
Using the Automation Kit 2720
Automation Kit Components 2720
Glossary 2722

102
Copyright
© Creaform Inc., [2012-2024]. All rights reserved.
No part of the contents of this User Manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the written permission of Creaform.
Creaform takes no responsibility if errors or inaccuracies were to appear in this document.
VXelements and its logo, as well as VXscan- R, VXscan- R Plan, VXscan- R Execute, VXprobe, VXshot,
VXscan, VXtrack, VXmodel and VXinspect modules and the Go!SCAN 3D, Health Care Partner 3D,
HandySCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D, HandyPROBE, C-Track and MaxSHOT 3D are trademarks of Creaform
Inc.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
It is totally forbidden to reproduce, duplicate, disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, sell, transfer or
assign, in any manner the scanner, the software and the system.

VXelements 11.2.1
Last modified in July 2024

103
What's New
VXelements 11.2.1

System requirements

l NVIDIA drivers 536.25 and up

Enhancements
VXelements

l Creaform raw mesh (.crm) file type now available.

VXscan

Go!SCAN SPARK

l Texture finalization parameters: New Automatic (Express) projection that reduces finalize time
by 10x compared to the regular Automatic (High Quality) projection. Intended for big scans
where texture is too large, or it is not possible to finalize with Automatic (High Quality).

VXmodel

l New mesh import/export file format: Creaform Raw Mesh (.crm)

VXinspect

l New mesh import/export file format: Creaform Mesh (.crm)

Bug fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue with the 3D viewer while locking the view after a zoom in.

VXscan

l Fixed an issue while using the Go!SCAN SPARK at high resolution on the finalization step.

l Fixed crash while finalizing specific scan with hole with the HandySCAN 700|Elite.

l Fixed an issue with the framerate of the HandySCAN 3D MAX in far mode.

104
VXinspect

l Fixed a crash that occurs when using the up/down arrows in the error distribution of color
maps.

l Fixed the display distance clearing itself while changing orientation.

VXmodel

l Fixed the cross-section area and length values displaying only 1 decimal.

VXscan-R

l Fixed RAM memory leak when running a loop of scan with a load session.

l Fixed a bug where the layout was not kept in the browse list after importing it.

R-Series / I/O Module

l Fixed RAM memory leak when running a loop of scan with a load session.

l Fixed triangle model not using active alignments.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2024 IR1
Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.2
Geomagic Control X 2024.2.0
Geomagic Design X 2024.2.0

VXprobe

Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0
Geomagic Control X 2024.2.0
Geomagic Design X 2024.2.0

Entities transfer

Software Version
SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP4.0
Solid Edge 2023 2210

105
 Software Version
Inventor 2023.4.2
Fusion 360 2.0.19215

VXscan-R

Software Version
PolyWorks 2024 IR1
PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2
Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF5

I/O Module

Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2024 IR1
PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2
Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF5

Metrolog i-Robot

Software Version
i-Robot V20 SP1 HF5
CUBE-R post install 5/16/2024
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

Previous versions

VXelements 11.2.0

System requirements

l NVIDIA drivers 536.25 and up

VXelements

l Creaform raw mesh (.crm) file type now available.

106
VXscan

l Faster session opening and Finalize scan for sessions containing large amounts of scan data

l New mesh import/export file format: Creaform Raw Mesh (.crm)

l When option Optimize volumetric accuracy is enabled (available for HandySCAN BLACK, MAX
and Silver series, and Go!SCAN Spark), user is now asked to finalize the scan before executing
the following actions:

n Export positioning targets

n Export scan template with positioning targets

n Reset scan while keeping current positioning targets

n Add scan using current positioning targets

n Alignment by surface or target best-fit

n Merge scans

New scanner: HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite

l Faster acquisition, thanks to a greater number of laser lines and a greater depth of field

l Automatic shutter

l Enhanced surface algorithm with surface density indicator

l Flex Volume:

n Standard: For best scan quality

n Far: For faster surface coverage with lower target density at a greater stand-off distance

l 2 models:

n HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite, Available with or without the Accu+ kit

n HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited (with Accu+ kit)

107
 l The optional Accu+ kit for improved volumetric accuracy

n New Scale bar acquisition mode for optimized acquisition workflow

n Precise positioning model creation by integrated photogrammetry

n Color indicator for target and scale bar detection quality

n A target list table, listing all targets with deviation values and go/no go status

n Target viewpoint: Visual representation of the scanner positions at which a target has
been seen

l Compatible accessories:

n 6mm and 3mm positioning targets

n 6mm 360° magnetic targets

n Clip cards

New scanner: HandySCAN SILVER and HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

Revamped version of the SILVER series

l Two models:

l HandySCAN SILVER|Elite (14 blue lasers lines + 1 extra line)

l HandySCAN SILVER (14 blues laser lines)

l Compatible accessories:

l 6mm and 3mm positioning targets

l 6mm 360° magnetic targets

l Clip cards

HandySCAN MAX|Elite

l Improved detection and live reconstruction of 360° magnetic targets while scanning

l Reduced floating surface noise when scanning in Far mode

108
 l New target status (gray) to identify targets which detection quality information is unknown,
which occurs when targets have been:

n Imported via a positioning target file or a scan template

n Kept when doing a Reset scan or a Add scan

n Used in an Alignment by surface or Targets best fit, or when merging scans

n Recovered though automatic data recovery

l Added support for 500 mm scale bars with the HandySCAN MAX|Elite. The specifications of the
HandySCAN MAX|Elite are equivalent to the HandySCAN MAX while using the 500 mm bar.

Accessories

l Clip cards can now be used with HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK.

Go!SCAN SPARK

l When scanning with Targets only mode and with Optimize volumetric accuracy enabled, user is
now asked to finalize the scan before executing the following actions:

l Exporting positioning targets

l Exporting a scan template with positioning targets

l Resetting a scan while keeping current positioning targets

l Adding a scan using current positioning targets

l Alignment by Surface best fit or Target best fit

l Merging scans

MetraSCAN, HandyPROBE, and C-Track

l New product: MetraSCAN BLACK+, HandyPROBE Next+ and C-Track+

l New Volume Extension accuracy specification

109
 l Two models:

l MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite, HandyPROBE Next+|Elite, and C-Track+|Elite

l MetraSCAN BLACK+, HandyPROBE Next+, and C-Track+

l New C-Track setup assistance tools

n Visual representation of the optimal working volume based on observed

positioning targets

n Visual feedback (deviation whiskers) on positioning targets deviation

n A target table listing all targets with deviation values

n Not available for:

o
MetraSCAN BLACK+, HandyPROBE Next+, and C-Track+
o
MetraSCAN 357/750/350, HandyPROBE Next, and C- Track of 3rd
generation

l Customizable device tracking threshold

n New VXscan option for MetraSCAN: Customizable scanner visibility threshold

n New C-track option: Customizable minimum targets threshold

l New accessories: 12mm 360° magnetic targets: Reusable magnetic artifact with glass
protected targets, visible from all angles

l Automatically detected as positioning artefact and for data cleanup

VXmodel

l New mesh import/export file format: Creaform Raw Mesh (.crm)

l New, more efficient Watertight remesh algorithm

110
VXinspect

l Improved scan workflow

l New Edges comparison points entity:

n To create annotations showing the deviation on the edge of a part, which can be
displayed inside a table in the report and in the 3D viewer.

n Can only be extracted from mesh, with Edges measurement method, using a CAD
model for the nominal.

n Available in VXinspect|Quality Control and VXinspect|Analysis.

l Enhancements to Mesh comparison points entity:

n Possibility to edit individual CP nominal value and parameters

n Manual selection of data used via Measure selected

n Snap annotation on measurement

n Import of CP nominal value from a .txt or a .csv file

n Export of CP nominal and measurement values to .csv files

VXscan-R
New products: MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite+ with C-Track+|Elite

l New Volume Extension accuracy specification.

l Two models:

n MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD with C-Track+|Elite

n MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite with C-Track+

l New C-Track setup assistance tools:

n Visual representation of the optimal working volume based on observed positioning

targets

111
 n Visual feedback (deviation whiskers) on positioning targets deviation

n A target table listing all targets with deviation values

l Customizable device tracking threshold

n New VXscan option for MetraSCAN: Customizable scanner visibility threshold, from
53% to 100% (73% by default)

n New C-track option: Customizable minimum targets threshold, from 4 to 40 targets (7

targets by default)

l Mobile C-track

l The result of a Locate C-Track can now be applied to multiple sessions.

l New message informing the user of the success or failure of the Locate C- track
computation

l New supported robots: Kuka KR

l Supported functions:

l Scan trajectory generation in VXscan-R plan

l Calibration trajectory generation in Edit layout

l Trajectory export with Export to I/O Module

l Robot models:

l Kuka KR 8 R1420 arc HW

l Kuka KR 8 R1440-2 arc HW

l Kuka KR 8 R1640-2

l Kuka KR 8 R2010

l Kuka KR 8 R2010-2

l Kuka KR 8 R2100 arc HW

112
 l Kuka KR 8 R2100-2 arc HW

l Kuka KR 12 R1810

l Kuka KR 12 R1810-2

l Kuka KR 20 R3100

l New product: Automation Kit

l Turnkey cell intended for handheld scanner mounted on a collaborative robot, with a
robot base and a fixed worktable built with Vention parts

l 3 versions:

l CRX-5iA with the HandySCAN 3D

l CRX-10iA/L with the MetraSCAN 3D

l CRX-10iA/L with the HandySCAN 3D (For demo units)

l Comes with new official layouts, one for each version

l Automated calibration:

l HandySCAN calibration is supported.

l MetraSCAN calibration will be available in a future release.

l C-Track calibration must be performed manually by the operator.

l Hand-held scanner support

l HandySCAN and MetraSCAN can now be used in VXscan-R.

l Compatible with:

l Official and custom layouts, with all robot types listed in Edit layout

l VXscan-R plugin for collaborative robots

l Export to I/O Module functions

113
 l New physical alignment workflow adapted to HandySCAN.

l Automated calibration:

l HandySCAN calibration is supported.

l MetraSCAN calibration will be available in a future release.

l Supported HandySCAN models:

l HandySCAN BLACK+|ELITE (Standard Flex Volume only, and does not support
Accu+ Kit)

l HandySCAN BLACK|ELITE

l HandySCAN SILVER|ELITE and HandySCAN SILVER

l Supported MetraSCAN models:

l MetraSCAN BLACK

l MetraSCAN BLACK|ELITE

l MetraSCAN BLACK+|ELITE (NEW)

l Comes with official HandySCAN and MetraSCAN grippers, compatible with FANUC CRX
robots (adapter required for other type of robots)

l Polyworks inspection

l Automatic piece name retrieval from Polyworks Dataloop after inspection

l Dataloop options are now saved with VXscan-R common options, independently of
working session.

l New option to clean up disk space at a defined frequency via Polyworks Dataloop

114
I/O Module 11.2.0

Polyworks inspection

l Polyworks workspace is now defined in Session settings. This allows different workspaces to be
used, if desired.

l Dataloop: New option to clean up disk space at a defined frequency via Polyworks Dataloop.

Plugins and API

l Interface improvements:

l Display of VXelements tree view in left panel.

l Possible to select clipping objects in tree view, for edition or deletion.

l Possible to select and edit clipping planes in 3D viewer.

l Positioning targets and positioning artifacts (clip cards, scale bars, and 360 magnetic
targets) are now listed by category under the Positioning node of the tree view, like in
VXelements.

l New C-Track setup assistance tools support.

Bug fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue which prevented performing Volumetric Extension with a scale bar.

l Fixed an issue related to the NVIDIA driver causing a problem with the 3D viewer.

l Fixed an issue preventing the use of the live laser calibration - HandySCAN MAX.

l Fixed an issue with surface acquisition using the Far working volume for the HandySCAN MAX.

l Fixed a bug where the resolution parameters would not be available after opening a session
with VXscan and VXmodel data.

l Fixed a bug with the “delete surface with targets” that could cause a crash.

115
VXinspect

l Fixed an issue that could cause a crash when the HandyPROBE was visible in the C- Track
working volume.

l Fixed a bug that could cause a crash on a cylinder creation.

l Fixed an issue where the points on cross-sections would not be extracted when they should
have been.

l Fixed an issue when replacing a mesh in VXinspect|Analysis that caused the software module to
malfunction.

l Fixed a bug where the deviation annotations would all overlap.

l Fixed an unwanted behavior when moving comparison points in a group.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue with the Fill hole function using the Partial method.

l Fixed a bug where, in specific situations, slots would not be transferred to SolidWorks.

l Fixed an issue where cross-section entities could disappear when creating a distance with the
Pick vertex method.

l Fixed an issue where the deviation vector of a circle created on a cross- section could be
inverted.

l Fixed a bug where Edit boundary with an existing entity could delete part of the mesh.

l Fixed an issue with the direct transfer of cone entities.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue where a CAD could still be selected even while hidden.

l Fixed an issue in Calibrate layout where the rotating table would not be straight after
adjustments.

l Fixed a bug that could cause a crash in VXscan-R after an inspection was done in PolyWorks.

116
 l Fixed a bug where a pop-up window would be displayed when starting a C-Track calibration
with EC activated.

l Fixed an issue that was hindering the performance of simulated visibility of the MetraSCAN.

R-Series / I/O Module

l Fixed an issue that would prevent opening the options window.

l Fixed an issue where there was no fault feedback due to missing licenses.

l Fixed a bug where a PolyWorks inspection would be performed even when it should not have
been.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.2

Geomagic Control X 2024.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2024.1.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0

Geomagic Control X 2024.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2024.1.0

Entities transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP4.0

Solid Edge 2023 2210

117
 Software Version

Inventor 2023.4.2

Fusion 360 2.0.18477

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0

PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2

Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF2

I/O Module

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0

PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2

Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF2

(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

Metrolog i-Robot

Software Version

i-Robot V20 SP1 HF3

CUBE-R post install 3/15/2024

(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

VXelements 11.1.1

Enhancements
VXelements

l Better visualization of Point entity in 3D viewer (VXscan, VXinspect, VXmodel, VXprobe)

118
VXscan

l Clipping plane edition in 3D viewer

l More effective GPU computation while scanning with HandySCAN BLACK, HandySCAN MAX
and Go!SCAN SPARK

HandySCAN 3D

l HandySCAN MAX:

n Improved offline laser calibration

l HandySCAN BLACK:

n New firmware improving USB communication stability (should reduce unwanted

disconnections)

VXmodel

l Edit boundary function improved with more gradual effect of curve tension value on the
boundary curvature.

Plug-in

l Import scan is no longer available.

l Merge scan is no longer available.

Bug fixes
VXelements

l HandySCAN MAX

n Fixed unwanted behavior creating unnecessary floating surfaces (noise) when scanning.

n Fixed a visual glitch where the laser line would be significantly reduced with the Far
working volume.

119
 l C-Track

n Fixed a bug where the red boxes were not displayed properly when calibrating C-Track.

n Fixed an issue where a new alignment would be referred to the "Initial alignment" when
it should not have been.

l Go!SCAN SPARK

n Fixed an issue with the Resume scan function that could cause a crash.

n Fixed an issue with the scanner calibration window related to an NVIDIA driver update.

n Fixed an issue that could cause missing data when using the Merge scans function.

n Fixed a bug where importing a mesh from a session file would not be in the proper
alignment.

n Fixed an issue where the positioning targets would not be automatically filled when
using Smart resolution.

VXinspect

l Fixed a bug where modifying automatic selection would erase the selection.

l Fixed an issue where the "normal error" was inverted in a specific situation.

l Fixed a bug where Detect target would not work after an alignment was made.

l Fixed an issue with the bottom panel where it was not working as intended.

l Fixed a bug where the software could get stuck in the "updating part" process while probing.

l Fixed an issue where the error distribution would not be calculated properly when datum circles
were extracted from a cross-section.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue where planes created from an alignment vector were not parallel when they
should have been.

120
 l Fixed an issue where the deviation vector of a circle would be wrongly inverted when created
from a cross-section.

l Fixed an issue where entities could be transferred to Fusion 360 in the wrong alignment.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue preventing the recovery of the EC (Environmental compensation) properly and
continuing the robot trajectories.

l Fixed a bug where the clipping object as well as the manual resolution would not be exported
to I/O Module.

l Fixed an issue with the edition of multiple features at once.

l Fixed an issue where the robot could get disconnected if a calibration was launched too quickly
after a scan.

l Fixed an issue preventing the photogrammetry from starting if the joint limit was less than 360
degrees for the rotary table.

R-Series / I/O Module

l Fixed an issue that could cause a crash when doing a surface best-fit for a clipping reference.

l Fixed an issue where a wrong "id number" would be created for the part when sent to
Polyworks.

l Fixed an issue with the status for "Calibration request" when the system status is at "Calibration
too old".

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR8.1

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.3.0

121
 Software Version

Geomagic Design X 2023.3.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR8.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.3.0

Geomagic Design X 2023.3.0

Entities transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP4.0

Solid Edge 2023 2210

Inventor 2023.4.1

Fusion 360 2.0.17453

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR7

PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2

Metrolog V18 SP2 HF2

I/O Module

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2023 IR8.1

PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2

i-Robot V20 GA HF2

(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

122
VXelements 11.1.0

System requirements

l NVIDIA driver version 525.57+

l HCP scanners must use a computer that supports AVX instructions.

Enhancements
VXelements

l Enhanced Perspective view for large part scanning in 3D viewer.

VXscan

l New acquisition method to improve frame rate. Intended for HandySCAN BLACK, HandySCAN
700|Elite, HandySCAN 307|Elite, and Go!SCAN SPARK.
l Improved display of scanned surface to optimize frame rate and reduce the amount of noise
and isolated patches. When the average frame rate drops below a defined threshold, surface
display switches from triangles to splats. Triangles are then reconstructed upon trigger off.
Frame rate thresholds are: 45 FPS for HandySCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN BLACK and 12 FPS for
Go!SCAN SPARK.
l HandySCAN MAX, a new scanner designed for large part scanning is now supported.

l Enhanced algorithm for Go!SCAN that reduces duplicated surfaces.

l Improved performance for HCP and ACADEMIA 10 scanners. (Requires AVX instructions.)

l MetraSCAN 3D sensor calibration will fail in the calibration result is great than 0.200.

l Ghost targets are now filtered live while executing a Volume Extension (VE) for a C- Track
positioning model.

VXmodel

l Optimized 3D viewer frame rate, especially when displaying many meshes or entities.

l New check box in Auto surface to disable small holes filling.

l When using Cut mesh, a new check box named Keep all isolated patches allows either excluding
or including isolated patches in the cut.

123
VXinspect|Quality Control

l The cursor format for selection in the viewer has been standardized for all functions (crosshair
format).
l Comparison points (CP) now available to create:

n A new entity which groups measurement points sharing the same parameters and
tolerance
n CP are handled as a group and cannot be edited individually.

n Can be displayed in a table in inspection report.

n Only available to measure a group of points on a mesh surface with a CAD as a

reference.

VXinspect|Analysis

l The cursor format for selection in the viewer has been standardized for all functions (crosshair
format).
l Comparison points (CP) now available to create:

n A new entity which groups measurement points sharing the same parameters and
tolerance
n CP are handled as a group and cannot be edited individually.

n Can be displayed in a table in inspection report.

n Only available to measure a group of points on a mesh surface with a CAD as a

reference.

l New automatic analysis:

n New automatic function to simplify the basic inspection of a part and the creation of a
report.
n Only launched when a mesh from VXscan or VXmodel is sent to VXinspect|Analysis and
has a CAD reference associated to it.
n Runs a mesh and CAD surface best- fit alignment, and creates color maps and
snapshots.

l Multi-mesh analysis now allows multiple meshes in the same session, allowing multiple parts

124
 inspection and comparison. Each part has their own inspection, and entities cannot be
duplicated from one part to another.

VXscan-R

l Surface is now displayed by splats instead of triangles to optimize frame rate and reduce the
amount of noise and isolated patches during acquisition.
l New robots supported:

n UR10e

n CRX5iA

n UR5e

l Rotary table and robot base are now available in the collision configuration menu.

l New tool to align objects in the layout for non-Fanuc robots.

l Polyworks|DataLoop now supported.

l Export to I/O Module automatically exports the scan template and is now available for
UR robots.
l VXscan-R plug-in now has an update indicator. New version must be updated manually.

VXscan-R Execute

l Edit info has new options:

n Automatically save the referential after photogrammetry.

n Allow overwriting session's positioning model in Execute mode.

I/O Module

l Polyworks|DataLoop now supported.

l Log files now automatically saved to file. Includes management settings.

125
Bug Fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue creating a finalization problem when using Manual resolution.

l Fixed an issue where VXelements menu toolbar is occasionally shown and crashes when used.

l Fixed a random crash when optimizing volumetric accuracy with HandySCAN 307.

l Fixed an issue where the zoom may reverse when pushing Zoom in button.

VXinspect

l Fixed a display issue where points were displayed even if hidden (Multi-Part projects).

l Fixed a problem where a random crash would occur when selecting a specific inspection item in
the tree node.

l Fixed a problem where a random crash would occur when replacing a mesh.

l Fixed a problem where it was not possible to accept DRF if some points were in opposite
direction.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue where entity transfer would remain stuck at 33% when transferring specific cross-
sections to Fusion360.

l Fixed an issue where a random crash would occur when exporting surfaces as CAD model.

l Fixed an issue where a random crash would occur when filling holes.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue when uploading the calibration plate collision model.

l Fixed a problem where manual scanner calibration would not start.

l Fixed a problem where objects were not located at the right place after the locate table step.

126
I/O Module

l Fixed an issue where the software would crash after a New Session.

l Fixed an issue where the Robot LanIp was unavailable in the list.

l Fixed a problem where no message asking to save the project was displayed when closing
PolyWorks.

Tested Software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023 IR3.1

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.2.0

Geomagic Design X 2023.2.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023 IR3.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.2.0

Geomagic Design X 2023.2.0

Entities transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP1.0

Solid Edge 2023

Inventor 2023.3

Fusion 360 2.0.16265

127
VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023

Metrolog V18 SP2 HF3

I/O Module

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023 IR2

Metrolog V19 HF5

(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

VXelements 11.0.1

Enhancements
VXscan-R

l New CAD with coordinates for the CUBE-R mounting table

l Edit layout - New warning if there aren't enough points to create a valid C-Track trajectory

Bug Fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue where canceling a calibration after a "calibrate all" could cause a crash.

l Fixed an issue with the home page automatic scanner recognition that would not work properly
after a scanner disconnection/reconnection.

l Fixed a bug where Measure selected would not be available in VXprobe.

l Fixed an issue where deactivating a product from the Product Manager could cause a crash.

128
VXinspect

l Fixed an issue where it was impossible to save a session after adding a cross-section.

l Fixed a bug where it was impossible to create an entity on a cross-section without a nominal.

l Fixed an issue where the nominal value of entities would not match the proper alignment.

l Fixed a bug where the project and part information would not have the correct names.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue when deleting a specific curve from a silhouette cross-section could cause a
crash.

l Fixed a crash that could occur when creating a silhouette cross-section.

l Fixed an issue where the Sandpaper tool would not work after an NVIDIA update to v535.98.

l Fixed a bug where a Delete curve would not delete the correct curve.

l Fixed an issue when canceling a Decimate from the progress bar could cause a crash.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an error in VXscan-R Execute when there was a mismatch between the active scanner
model and the scanner model from an imported session.

l Fixed an issue in Edit layout where a collision envelope could be imported using the wrong
alignment.

Tested Software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023 IR2

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2023.1.0

129
VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023 IR2

Geomagic Control X 2023.2.0

Geomagic Design X 2023.2.0

Entities transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP1.0

Solid Edge 2023

Inventor 2023.3

Fusion 360 2.0.16265

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023

Metrolog V18 SP2 HF3

VXelements 11.0.0

System Requirements

l Raised minimum graphics card requirements for all latest generation scanners using GPU
computing (HandySCAN BLACK, HandySCAN 307/700 Elite, MetraSCAN BLACK, Go!SCAN
SPARK and peel 3).

l A Pascal graphics card with Compute Capability 6.1 or higher is now required.

l Specifically, the HP ZBook G3 is no longer compatible with the latest scanner generations.

l Note that this does not affect the official minimum recommended version which is already
higher.

130
Enhancements
VXelements

l Auto-detection for C-Track & MetraSCAN 3D

l The device list now has a scroll bar and shows at maximum of 5 products at a time.

l Added license activation information to System Information File.

l New button "Module Selector" allows switching from one module to another.

l Updated HASP drivers installed by VXelements.

l Updated CoreTechnologie's CAD engine to 2022 SP.

l Multi-instances improvements (primary instance on module launch instead of software launch)

l Now able to open STL and OBJ files directly with VXelements.

VXscan

l Adjusted zoom according to scanning area.

l Manual pre-alignment for Target best fit.

l Added System Analysis for HandySCAN 3Dand Go!SCAN SPARK.

l Send scan button.

l Small part workflow adjustment.

Go!SCAN SPARK

l Decreased lag in the 3D viewer by setting a frame limit to the flow graph.

l Decreased GPU usage and increased frame rate by removing unnecessary calculations.

131
C-Track

Calibration

l The calibration process has been modified:

l Previously:

n The user had to accept or cancel the result.

l Now:

n If the calibration succeeds, the calibration is automatically accepted and saved

in the C-Track.

n If the calibration fails, the calibration is automatically rejected and not saved in
the C-Track.

l New calibration error messages have been implemented to help users troubleshoot calibration
problems.

l Errors will be more specific to target the proper component:

n Calibration bar problem

n C-Track problem

n Environment change (temperature)

n Software error

Volume Extension

l The scaling mode default parameter has been changed from NONE to C-Track calibration bar.

l The maximum pitch and roll threshold value allowed during the Volume Extension acquisition
has been modified from 10° to 20°.

132
 l The Reference details table available from the C-Track scene will show results only from an
original Volume Extension acquisition. Adding targets to the model using "Manually detect
targets" will remove content values.

VXmodel

Interface

l Possible to import multiple meshes from different session files at the same time.

l Improved triangle selection display on very large meshes (about 30m long).

l Improved clip view to handle triangle selection on the visible mesh with Flood fill selection tool.

l Mesh changes color (yellow) when the mouse is over an unselected mesh in the 3D viewer or in
the Navigation panel.

l Added the possibility to select a mesh directly in the 3D viewer.

l Right-clicking a mesh in the 3D viewer opens the contextual menu.

Alignments

l Added the Move object alignment mode.

l Improved Apply alignment tool.

l Improved point selection alignment manual mode.

l It is now possible to select the fixed or mobile mesh.

Entities

l Added the entity manipulation in the 3D viewer.

l For cylinders, cones, and planes.

133
 l Cross-sections:

l New initial plane creation for cross-sections with point and a rotation axis in radial
construction mode (rotation axis should be selected to enable this initial plane creation
type).

l Now possible to delete curves in the entity detail drop-down panel.

l Pipe Centerline:

l Added pipe centerline extension length.

l Added circles in pipe centerlines (only available in the exported entity).

l New construction methods:

l Point by line-circle intersection

l Point by line-cylinder intersection

l Circle by sphere-plane intersection

l Now possible to use VXmodel entities as collision envelopes in VXscan-R.

l Collision elements coming from VXmodel can now be used in Edit layout as an element
of the layout.

Mesh editing

l Added Keep only edit tool (with cut, copy, delete).

l Added Boolean operations (Subtract, Union, Intersection).

Improve Mesh

l Possible to select multiple meshes and use Decimate edit tool or Apply alignment tool.

l Enhanced Smooth mesh tool.

134
Edit Mesh

l New Watertight remesh tool:

l Enables selection tool to apply the Watertight remesh algorithm on selected triangles.

l Cancel is now a lot quicker.

l Fixed a bug where some meshes would not be watertight when using the old
watertight remesh tool.

Entity export & transfer

l Added mesh and entity transfer to Fusion 360.

VXinspect

Interface

l New Module Selector button

l Renamed VXinspectVXinspect|Analysis.

l Renamed VXinspect|Elite to VXinspect|Quality Control.

l Added Entity Type in report header.

l New location for the 2D View button. It is in the Display toolbar, which is at the bottom of the
3D viewer.

l New panel location option in the Configure | Options | Inspection menu

l Now possible to hide dropdown panels in the entity creation node.

l Copy/Cut/Delete have been removed from Unassigned Data.

l New number of digits after the decimal option for VXinspect/VXprobe

Features

l New Slab entity

l New creation interface for Cross-sections

135
 l New Inspect multiple meshes option allows inspecting multiple meshes in multiple parts.

l 3 new construction methods (Line/Circle - Line/Cylinder - Sphere/Plane)

l New option to apply parameters to all parts

l New Quick entity creation method

l New option for mesh editing: Keep only selected triangles

l New construction method for initial plane in radial cross-sections

l New shading option for Color Map display (saved in snapshots)

l Disclaimer page in report is now optional and can be removed.

l Add scan replaced by Add mesh. It is still Add scan in VXscan.

l Mesh changes color (yellow) when mouse is over an unselected mesh in the 3D viewer or the
Navigation panel.

VXprobe

l Completely redesigned with complete set of inspection tools for probing.

VXshot

l Basic entities and basic alignments have been removed.

VXscan-R

l Additional FANUC robots supported:

l CRX-25iA

l M-10iD/8L

l M-10iD/10L

l M-10iD/12

l M-20iD/12L

l M-710iC/12L (already supported in 9.1.4Lts)

136
 l Universal Robot UR10 supported in Edit layout and VXscan-R Plan for the trajectory simulation
only.

Edit layout

l Additional components available:

l MetraSCAN 3D-R adapter

l TCP position

l Dresspack

l Scanner model

l New alignment tool for every component and collision envelope.

l Possible to modify robot joints limits.

l Possible to add collision checks for the robot joints and MetraSCAN 3D-R adapter.

l Updated interface:

l Reordered the steps to take into account a typical workflow.

l Layout calibration is now available from Edit layout.

l Possible to save any time during the process.

l Possible to update layout poses after layout calibration (C-Track, calibration plate, and table).

l Possible to create collision envelopes:

l From a scan performed in VXscan-R

l From entities created in VXmodel (Send to VXscan-R, Send to VXmodel)

Features

l New surface feature algorithm.

l Selection tools (Rectangle, Free-form and Clear selection) available for multiple selections (Edge
and Surface features).

137
 l Possible to change the point order of a manual feature.

l A Home button is available in the Robot joints menu.

Finalize algorithm

l Optimized finalize algorithm to deactivate only the unreachable sections of the sweeps.

l Robot speed adjusted to take manual resolution into account.

Collaborative robots (FANUC)

l New VXscan-R plugin available for CRX robots to utilize collaborative functionality of grabbing
the robot to:

l Generate jog feature

l Perform manual scan

l Delete triangles and Keep only buttons available in the toolbar.

l Possible to do a volume extension for layout with mobile C-Track and without a rotary table.

Environmental compensation

l Possible to test the table position in the Edit info menu.

l Possible to display the environmental compensation volume in the viewer display options.

Reference CAD model

l Possible to start a new session without a CAD model.

l Multiple CADs can be imported from the VXscan-R home page.

l Possible to align the CAD to the fixture by using the Move CAD feature.

l Decimate fixture available to help reduced the reorder and finalize, the load session, and the
collision check duration time.

138
Interface

l Simulated visibility for the C-Track and the scanner available while not connected to the robot.

l Possible to activate the MetraSCAN 3D-R scanning viewpoint.

Export to I/O Module (FANUC)

l Export the scan trajectory with all necessary files for I/O Module.

l Export the C-Track and scanner calibration trajectory.

Bug Fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue preventing the creation of a diagnostic session with a MetraSCAN.

l Fixed an issue that could cause a crash when finalizing a scan with Manual smart resolution
zone.

l Fixed an issue where a crash could occur when merging scans together.

l Fixed an unwanted behavior where exported entities were referenced to the initial alignment
instead of the active alignment.

l Fixed an issue causing lag in the 3D viewer while scanning.

l Fixed an issued that could cause a crash while creating a circle by vertex selection (Entity
Creation).

VXinspect

l Fixed an issue when selecting a point's nominal with 2 CADs in the session.

l Fixed a bug where the cross- section's annotations value would disappear if the error
distribution was changed.

l Fixed an issue where the front page of the report would not appear.

l Fixed a bug where Measure all would not start on the correct entity.

l Fixed an issue where the Dimensions tab could be empty for cone entities.

139
 l Fixed an issue where there could be differences between the size of entities in snapshot and in
the report.

l Fixed an unwanted behavior where Pick on CAD could select on hidden CAD models.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue in the Point selection alignment where points could be picked on hidden scans.

l Fixed an issue with the calculation of "narrow bridges" when using the Clean mesh function.

l Fixed a bug that could cause a crash when using the Surface best-fit alignment.

l Fixed an issue with the Defeature function when there were isolated patches in the triangles
selection.

l Fixed a bug where VXmodel's toolbar would be visible after deleting a mesh.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue when launching a calibration from the home page while an VXscan-R Execute
session is open.

l Fix an issue where the targets and C-Track would not be positioned correctly if the C-Track was
not referenced when starting photogrammetry.

l Fixed an issue where the laser line would lag in the 3D viewer during scan simulation.

l Fixed an unwanted behavior where the space bar would start a VXscan-R simulation when in
VXinspect.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

140
VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023

Geomagic Control X 2023.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

Entities transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2023 SP1.0

Solid Edge 2023

Inventor 2023.2.1

Fusion 360 2.0.16009

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2023

Metrolog V18 SP2 HF3

VXelements 10.0.4

Enhancements
HandySCAN

l Support for the HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Limited

VXmodel

l Merge: Best-fit alignment is now faster with large mesh that contains many isolated patches.

141
Bug Fixes
General

l Fixed license expiring in 30 days prompt immediately after checking license out from cloud.

Go!SCAN

l Fixed the texture resolution (DPI) being reset to default when reopening a session.

l Fixed a bug preventing to finalize texture with Automatic projection in a specific situation.

MetraSCAN 3D

l Fixed the “camera firmware update” message appearing during scan or when finalizing.

l Fixed a possible crash when closing VXelements (specific to MetraSCAN sessions).

VXinspect

l Fixed GD&T not being calculated on patterns if the entities were selected in the viewer during
creation.
l Fixed positioning targets not being displayed when measuring with the Optical Measurement
method.
l Fixed a crash on Move CAD if entities or alignments are present in the inspection program.

l Fixed a crash when creating multiple color maps using different alignments with Auto-Preview
on.

VXmodel

l Fixed diameter constraint not working when building a circle via vertex selection and choosing a
constraining plane.
l Fixed an issue with the Decimate function on patches that have been combined after a Cut by
curve.

VXscan-R

l Fixed a bug that allowed the possibility for the robot to start moving after closing a warning
pop-up, if the fault has already been reset.
l Fixed a crash when changing the scanner type.

142
 l Fixed a crash in Reorder & Finalize.

l Fixed an issue where there was no collision warning message right after an import CAD.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR8.1

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.0.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR8.1

Geomagic Control X 2023.0.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

Entity transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2021 SP3

Solid Edge 2023

Inventor 2023.2.1

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR8.1

Metrolog V18 SP2 HF3

143
VXelements 10.0.3

Enhancements
General

l Product manager and licensing

l Now possible to resume work after cloud license reconnection

l Support tools

l Windows build number and BIOS version included in Information about operating
system section.

MetraSCAN 3D

l Warning: Calibration plate firmware update (for calibration plates with PSoC 3 chips)

HandyPROBE

l Warning: Firmware update for HandyPROBE G4 and G3 (fixes bug 32963 and supports probes
with PSoC 3 chips)

VXscan-R

l Allow multi- layout: New option that allows using a validated session with another layout
without needing to finalize the trajectory with the new layout (disabled by default).
l VXscan-R API

l New function for disabling toolbar and system panel in VXscan-R Execute

Bug Fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue in VXelements Viewer when importing a mesh from a VXmodel session.

l Fixed an issue where a sound would emit from the HandySCAN BLACK when plugging it in.

l Fixed a crash that could occur after changing scan parameters.

l Fixed an issue preventing associating a Probe using a Gen 4 HandyPROBE.

144
 l Fixed an issue where the MetraSCAN 3D calibration plate detection would be lost during
calibration.
l Various minor bug fixes

VXinspect

l Fixed an issue when creating a circle pattern with a specific GD&T callout from datum with an
MMB.
l Fixed an issue with probe compensation direction when using a created coordinate system.

l Fixed a bug where datum callout would not be available after deletion.

l Fixed an issue where the pattern annotation could not be hidden.

l Fixed annotation positioning to prevent them obscuring the color scale.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue that could cause a crash when launching mesh editing without a mesh selected.

l Fixed a bug when exporting a silhouette cross-section to partner software.

l Fixed an issue with the manual surface tools.

l Fixed an issue where the Apply button would be grayed out in the Decimate function.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue when importing a fixture with a specific CAD model that would cause a crash.

l Fixed an occasional issue where scan data could be missing due to Synchronizing status.

l Fixed an issue where the alignment value would not reset properly.

l Fixed an issue when changing the shutter speed of a Jog feature while connected to the robot.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR6.1

145
 Software Version

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2022.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR6

Geomagic Control X 2022.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

Entity transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2021 SP3

Solid Edge 2023

Inventor 2023.1

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR6.1

Metrolog V18 SP1 HF2

VXelements 10.0.2

Enhancements
MetraSCAN 3D & C-Track

l Warning: Automatic calibration plate firmware update for MetraSCAN BLACK, MetraSCAN
BLACK|Elite and MetraSCAN BLACK | Elite HD

146
 l More robust management of MetraSCAN 3D and C-Track shutter time, which should reduce the
occurrence of scanner disconnections
l Controller not found status replaced by more specific statuses to help with troubleshooting.

Bug fixes
VXelements

l Fixed a delay in the Home page caused by the cloud license while connected to the Internet.

l Fixed a crash with the HandySCAN BLACK that occurred when starting a new scan after having
copied the targets.
l Fixed an issue with the Merge scan function where scan data would disappear in a specific
situation.
l Fixed an issue with scanner disconnection that could cause a crash.

l Fixed a bug where merging scans that could cause a crash.

VXinspect

l Fixed an issue where the wrong alignment was active when creating a Note entity.

l Fixed an issue with the Circle form value.

l Fixed an issue where GD&T would not be calculated in specific circumstances.

l Fixed an unwanted behavior where annotations in snapshots would move from part to part.

l Fixed an issue where the wrong language would be in the report title.

VXmodel

l Fixed an occasional crash when filling holes in VXmodel.

l Fixed a crash that would sometimes occur when launching the Clean mesh function.

l Fixed an unwanted issue where DXF file would be exported in inches only.

l Fixed an occasional crash when using the direct transfer to Inventor.

l Fixed an issue in the Compare tool where the color map could be hidden after an Invert
selection.

147
 l Fixed a crash that would occur when loading a session in VXmodel.

l Fixed an issue where the Pipe centerline length was incorrectly displayed.

l Fixed an issue with the Surface best-fit alignment while using a constraint.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue in the Execute in simulation mode where the post-scan action would not work.

l Fixed a memory leak that would make the creation of a new session impossible.

l Fixed an issue where the scan would not be correctly sent to VXinspect.

l Fixed an incorrect calibration trajectory creation with the CRX10iA.

l Fixed a bug when editing a surface or edge feature after replacing a CAD.

l Fixed an issue where Smart Resolution was not applied properly when a manual resolution
template was also defined.
l Fixed an issue with the auto-detect target when there was no rotary table where a message
would display the active referential would be cleared even if there was no active referential.
l Fixed an issue where it would be impossible to start a calibration after the number of desired
scans has been reached.

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR4

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2022.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR4

148
 Software Version

Geomagic Control X 2022.1.0

Geomagic Design X 2022.0.0

Entity transfer

Software Version

SOLIDWORKS 2021 SP3

Solid Edge 2022

Inventor 2023

VXscan-R

Software Version

PolyWorks 2022 IR4

Metrolog V18 GA HF4

VXelements 10.0.1

Enhancements
VXelements - VXscan

l More efficient RAM management to improve Finalize Scan performance, especially when
performing serial scans over a long period.

Sensors

l MetraSCAN 3D

o
More robust management of scanner shutter time which should reduce the occurrence
of scanner disconnections.

149
 o
Improvements to Entity-Based Alignment:

o
Only becomes available when sessions contain at least two scans.
o
Not possible to use entities derived from the origin.

o
When resuming a scan that has been previously aligned, initial alignment is temporally
activated during acquisition so that data can be added to the initial.

l C-Track

l Warning: HandyPROBE firmware update.

Plugins and API

l When importing a scan template through VXelements API, only scanner parameters are now
imported.

VXscan-R

l Collaborative robots: New Locate C-track function to be able to know the C-Track position after
it has been moved.

Bug fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue with the "zoom in" function while scanning

l Fixed a visual issue where the mesh would become distorted after a while in manual alignment

l Fixed an issue where the delete frame expando would close when pressing Ctrl

l Fixed a bug where a reset scan would change the zoom

l Fixed an issue where the entity details displayed the wrong values

l Fixed an issue where the distance meter would not show in configuration mode

150
 l Fixed an issue where it was not possible to continue the same scan after an alignment
(MetraSCAN)

l Fixed some issues in the Product manager regarding the Cloud licensing

l Fixed an issue where it was not possible to save a session after a Best-fit alignment in VXscan

VXinspect

l Fixed an issue where the resolution would change after a stop scan

l Fixed a visual error where a warning message would not show up completely

l Fixed a bug where the + value of a circle created on a cross-section would not be displayed

l Fixed an issue where an update was missing for MMB on a datum

l Fixed a crash caused by a duplicate feature without a nominal value

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue where constraint in VXmodel would not be "perfect" when transferring to
SOLIDWORKS (e.g., a 90-degree angle that would be 89.999 degrees in SOLIDWORKS).

l Fixed a random crash when re-opening a session containing a manual NURBS surface

l Fixed an issue when using Duplicate on a constructed entity

VXscan-R

l Fixed a random crash that could occur when connecting to the robot

l Fixed a crash that could occur after an Inspect mesh

l Fixed an issue where the manual resolution zone would not show properly in the 3D viewer

l Fixed an issue when creating a manual feature and editing the normal angle value

l Fixed an unwanted behavior with the asset protection message when no turn table is used

l Fixed an issue that would "un-finalize" feature if the acquisition mode was changed

l Fixed an issue where the scan alignment was lost after a session was reopened

151
 l Fixed a bug when clicking the start button when asked to finalize a path would make
VXelements "not responding"

Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2022 IR2

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.0

Geomagic Control X 2022.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2020.0.4

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2022 IR2

Geomagic Control X 2022.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2020.0.4

Entity transfer

Software Version

Solidworks 2021 SP3

Solid Edge 2022

Inventor 2023

VXscan-R

Software Version

Polyworks 2022 IR2

Metrolog V18 HF1

VXelements 10.0.0

152
Enhancements
VXelements Viewer

l VXinspect

l Added Report, Snapshot and Note functions.

VXelements

l VXmodel, VXinspect & VXscan-R licenses

o 30-day trial available upon VXelements installation

o Cloud-based licensing

o Automatic updates in the background

o License statuses are visible in modules' respective home pages.

l Sensor management

o Product activation/deactivation via VXelements home page now possible.

o Automatic activation of connected scanner (Go!SCAN SPARK, HandySCAN 3D and

MaxSHOT 3D only)
o Product Manager no longer available from Windows start menu (still available through
VXelements)

l Sessions

o Optimized Save session to reduce session opening time

l Interface redesign

o Main display options moved to Display toolbar in the 3D viewer.

o Remaining display options moved to VXelements Configure | Options.

153
 l CADs

o Import CAD available without license

o Now possible to import and use multiple CAD models. The CAD models can be
imported all at once (multi-select).
o New Move CAD function relocates a CAD model according to the coordinate system.

o Selected CAD models are displayed in blue in the 3D viewer.

l Entities (VXscan, VXmodel and VXinspect)

o New toolbar for Measurement method

o Cross-sections:

o Now possible to create a Cross-section on a specific part of the CAD reference

using a delimited plane.
o Now displayed in blue.

o Better repeatability of 2D curves points extraction

o Enhanced display of Planes created by Draw line in Perspective view

VXscan

l Alignments for Go!SCAN and HandySCAN 3D

o New alignment modes: Manual, Entity based, Surface best fit, and Target best fit

o Alignments are independent from each other

o Manual reordering in Navigation pane by drag and drop

o Alignment edition (via right-click in Navigation panel)

o Enhancements to Target best fit alignment tool:

o Independent of the Merge scans function

154
 o Table of matched targets

o Ability to select matched targets in 3D viewer

l Alignments for MetraSCAN 3D

o New framework for Entity based and Surface best fit alignments (listed under VXscan
node)
o No change to Manual, Imported and Point selection alignments (listed under VXprobe
node)

l Basic Entities

o Drag and drop manual reordering in Navigation panel

o Additional contextual menu (right-click) options in Navigation tree and 3D viewer, such
as Edit, Fit to screen, Group, and Duplicate to.
o Enhanced Scan targets measurement method

o Measurement:

o New Caliper tool

o New Measure button in toolbar for Distance, Angle and Caliper

l Import scan

o Now possible to import multiple scans at a time (multi-select sessions)

l Merge Scans

o New interface and enhanced workflow:

o Scans must be aligned prior to launching the function and selecting scans to
merge

155
 o Scan parameters and Finalize parameters are now available in Merge
expanding window.

l Surface reconstruction

o Smart resolution quality improvements:

o Enhanced surface quality with fine multi-resolution

o Surface noise reduced.

o Cleaner surface with greater uniformity

l Finalize scan

o New Watertight option in Custom mode (HandySCAN Black Elite, Go!SCAN SPARK and
MetraSCAN Black Elite only)

l Mesh

o Mesh Properties available from contextual menu (right-click) in Navigation panel

VXmodel

l CAD

o Now possible to use multiple CAD models in Compare and Best fit alignment tool

l Mesh

o Mesh properties now available in VXinspect

o Now possible to import multiple meshes at the same time (mesh multi-select)

o Manual reordering of meshes in Navigation panel (drag and drop)

o Now possible to perform bulk operations on multiple meshes (Delete, Duplicate, Direct
transfer, Clean, Merge, and Combine)

156
 o Uniform appearance of colored meshes in Combine and Merge tools

o New plane offset control in 3D viewer for Mirror mesh tool

l Entities

o New Duplicate to | VXinspect function

l Annotations

o New VXelements option to automatically position Annotations close to 3D viewer

border in Compare tool (activated by default)

VXinspect

l General

o NIST Certification

l CAD

o Multiple CAD models can be used to create an inspection program.

o New Move CAD function to relocate a CAD model according to the coordinates
systems

l Mesh

o Mesh Properties available from contextual menu (right-click) in Navigation panel

o New Move CAD function to relocate a CAD model according to the coordinates
systems

l Entities

o Datum entity label moved to dropdown adjacent entity's Name.

o Note:

157
 o New Note entity to add comments and pictures in inspection program

o Can be shown in report and during inspection to guide the user.

o Pattern:

o New interface

o Slot pattern now possible.

o Now possible to use entities of different diameters.

o Now possible to mix entities irrespective of their Measurement method.

o Any eligible entities selected in the Navigation panel prior to creating a new
Pattern are now automatically selected for inclusion in the Pattern upon start
of Pattern creation.
o Automatic callout computation during auto-preview

o No longer possible to construct an entity in Pattern creation window.

l Nominal

o New toolbar for nominal selection

o Nominal values now can be edited directly in dimension panel. Editable cells are
identified by a yellow triangle in upper-right corner (such as nominals, measurements,
and tolerances).

l GD&T

o Now possible to use either ASME Y14.5 or ISO GPS for the GD&T standard.

o New option to use either Simultaneous requirements or Separated requirements (with

ASME standard only)
o New Total runout tolerance for Planes, Cylinders and Cones

158
 l Multiple entity edition

o Multi-edition of automatic selection parameters

l Annotations

o New VXinspect option to automatically create an Annotation when creating an entity

(activated by default)
o New VXinspect option to automatically position Annotations close to 3D viewer border
(activated by default)
o Enhanced annotations layout

VXscan-R

l General

o Reduced session opening time (up to 2X faster for large sessions)

l Interface

o Now possible to display the Timeline in a separate window (in Extended view only)

l Layouts

o 3 new generic layouts provided in Configure | Options | VXscan-R:

o CUBE-R M-20iD with mesh and light curtain

o CUBE-R M-20iD with light curtains

o CUBE-R M-20iD with rolling door

o Warning: A personalized layout (.cuber file) must be used to connect to a robot using
one of the CUBE-R M-20iD generic layouts.
o New Import layout button in Configure | Options | VXscan-R

159
l Collaborative robots

o CRX 10iA/L and CRX 10iA support

o Cell without turntable:

o An Auto-detect targets is performed instead of automated photogrammetry.

o Finalize Path computation time improved (computation time now similar to a

cell with a turntable).

l CAD

o Features can be created using more than one CAD model.

o When adding or removing a CAD model, features are no longer transformed in Manual
feature.
o When replacing a CAD model:

o Features are no longer transformed in Manual feature.

o User must reselect the CAD entities used to create the Surface features and
Edge features.

o After moving a CAD model using the new Move CAD function:

o Surface features and Edge features are automatically updated.

o Manual features and Jog features must be edited manually.

l Fixture

o CAD Fixture entities can now be used for Virtual alignment and Physical alignment by
targets (not available for Fixture created by mesh).

160
 l Features

o Manual features

o Now possible to move a way-point in edition mode.

o New clipping reference (cylinder as a polyline)

o MetraSCAN 3D visibility

o Now possible to disregard MetraSCAN visibility in Finalize path computation.

o Concurrent edition of multiple features now possible.

o Only common parameters of selected features are displayed in the edition

mode.
o Edited parameters are displayed in blue in the order to be easily recognizable.

o Scanner parameters can now be edited when connected to robot.

l Execute mesh inspection

o Now possible to combine multiple Execute mesh inspection actions.

l Cycle time

o In Execute mode, Stop scan and Finalize scan are executed while the robot is returning
home.

Sensors

Go!SCAN

l Acquisition

o Improved frame rate

o Improved optimization of computer resource usage

o Optimized image management to filter date

161
 l Tracking

o Improved tracking using less than 4 targets

o Now Iess likely to duplicate targets

l Texture

o Improved texture quality

C-Track

l Positioning targets

o New positioning target color status (yellow) to highlight filtered targets (such as
damaged targets, dirty targets, or targets seen as too high incident angle)
o Enhanced ghost targets filtering during Auto-detect targets

o More robust Detect targets from template

MetraSCAN-R

l MetraSCAN 750-R no longer supported.

Bug fixes
VXelements

l Fixed an issue while using EC where it was possible to select targets from a the MaxSHOT's
scalebar coded target.
l Fixed an issue where it was possible to launch VXelements before the help was downloaded.

l Fixed a crash that would occur with Add scan while using the HandySCAN BLACK.

l Fixed a crash in the Merge scan function.

l Fixed an issue where the HandySCAN BLACK would produce an unwanted sound.

l Fixed an issue in Merge scan while using MetraSCAN where targets would be duplicated when
they should not.

162
VXinspect

l Fixed a crash in Pattern creation when adding a composite GD&T callout.

l Fixed an issue where the annotation for Distance, Caliper, and Angle would change location
from part to part.
l Fixed an issue that would result in snapshots being a bit different from part to part.

l Fixed a bug with the automatic pre-alignment where it would not converge properly.

l Fixed a bug where constraints could be lost in the RPS alignment when adding/removing entity.

l Fixed the Min/Max results of 2D curves

l Removed some VXinspectVXinspect that were available in VXelements Viewer.

l Fixed an issue where the reports front page snapshot would not show on the front page.

VXmodel

l Fixed an issue where it was not possible to delete an entity after an entity-based alignment.

l Fixed an issue where the Calculation filter parameters drop-down panel would be empty when
creating an entity using vertex selection.
l Fixed a crash when picking points in Cross-section creation using the along curve sub-method.

l Fixed an issue in Manual surface creation where double- clicks would sometimes not work
properly.

VXscan-R

l Fixed an issue where it was not possible to start a C-Track calibration properly when the status
was Calibration too old.
l Fixed a bug where the Remove isolated patches value was not saved.

l Fixed an issue with the scanner parameters where the presets values were not applied correctly.

l Fixed a bug where the photogrammetry would start using a starting model when it should not
have.
l Fixed an issue when editing a point's position using the interactive wheel would not refresh if
the limit was reached.

163
Tested software
VXscan

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2021 IR9

Geomagic Wrap 2021.2.1

Geomagic Control X 2022.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2020.0.4

VXprobe

Software Version

PolyWorks MS 2021 IR9

Geomagic Control X 2022.0.1

Geomagic Design X 2020.0.4

Entity transfer

Software Version

Solidworks 2021 SP3

Solid Edge 2020

Inventor 2020

VXscan-R

Software Version

Polyworks MS 2021 IR9

Metrolog V17 HSP1 HF1

164
Safety Notice

Creaform products are not intended to be used by children or persons with

disabilities otherwise properly trained. No special knowledge about measuring
systems in general or Creaform in particular is required.

Read this User Manual before using Creaform technology.

Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Safety information
Safety notes are presented throughout the User Manual as signal words. A symbol composed of an
equilateral triangle surrounding an exclamation mark in specified safety colors precedes the signal
words.

DANGER: Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.

WARNING: Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION: Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury.

Safety information specific to the R-Series product line

For safety information regarding the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution and the CUBE-R solution, see the Safety
information section.

165
Modification of products

l Any alteration or modification of the product may pose a danger to the user, and is therefore
prohibited.

l Do not introduce foreign objects into the device.

l Only use the device with the original power supply provided.

l Any modification of the product by the user is not recommended and any consequences will
not be covered by Customer Support services or product warranty.

Limits of operation of the products

l Always use the device in a clean and dry environment.

l Avoid direct lighting on the optical parts.

l Do not immerse the device.

l Always store the devices following these conditions:

o
Storage temperature: 5 to 55 °C
o
Operation temperature: 5 to 40 °C
o
Humidity: 10 to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

WARNING: Never open any component of a Creaform technology.

General warnings and cautions

Some general safety notes are listed in this section and repeated in the manual.

ACADEMIA 3D, Go!SCAN 3D, and Health Care Partner 3D scanners

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain

visual images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include
symptoms such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking

166
 or shaking of arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of
awareness. Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you
experience any of these symptoms while using this product.

Laser radiation

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal

protective equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Calibration plate

The main label reads:

CAUTION
HANDLE WITH CARE
The calibration plate is a crucial part of the system. Damaged plate may prevent calibration optimization and affect scan results.
ALWAYS LEAVE IN ITS CASE
DO NOT TOUCH TARGETS

167
 DO NOT SCRATCH
DO NOT HEAT OR STORE IN HOT ENVIRONMENTS
CALIBRATION PLATE USAGE
Lay calibration plate's case on flat surface
Open the case cover
Calibrate following user manual instructions carefully
Close cover and store in scanner case immediately after use

A smaller label (to the right) reads:

Use with scanner XXX (XXX being the scanner serial number)

Batteries (lithium ion cells)

WARNING: Lithium ion cells are not hazardous under normal circumstances. In
case of fire or rupture, see the manufacturer’s safety procedure.

Safe disposal
Dispose of the product appropriately in accordance with the national regulations in force in your
country.
Contact Customer Support for any product specific treatment and waste management information.

User Manual
A copy of the User Manual is also available:
Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Resources | Customer documents section of the Customer Portal.

2. In Category drop-down list, select User Manual.

3. Select the desired language in the Language drop-down.

4. Click Search and select the relevant User Manual to download it.

168
169
General Information
This section contains general topics:
Welcome
Contextual help
System general care
Laser information
Service and customer care program
Assistance
Contact us

170
Welcome

IMPORTANT: Read the manual carefully before use and keep for future reference.

Pay attention to text associated with warning symbols. For details, see the Safety
Notice section.

This manual provides information concerning the software, including all modules (VXscan, VXscan-R,
VXprobe, VXshot, VXtrack, VXmodel and VXinspect). It also presents Creaform devices such as Portable
3D Scanners, the Portable Coordinate Measuring Machine, the Optical Coordinate Measuring System.
It is the user's responsibility to download the latest software version, calibration and configuration
files and documentation when available.
The Contents tab, available through the sidebar, presents the table of contents. To access a topic, click its
title.
To search for a particular topic or specific information in Help, use the Search box at the upper-right
corner of the window.

Information symbols

Note: Information or explanation given for a better understanding.

Tips: Useful information or advice.

ATTENTION: Information given to prevent a potential problem.

Example: Idea or fact used to explain a notion.

This manual follows the International System of Units (SI). Unless otherwise specified, length units are
expressed in millimeters and angle in degrees.
The convention used for the colors of coordinate systems axes is as follows: red=X, green=Y, blue=Z.

171
Training services

Creaform products are not intended to be used by children or persons with

disabilities otherwise properly trained. No special knowledge about measuring
systems in general or Creaform in particular is required.

Creaform offers a wide range of e-learning courses for both hardware and software. Please consult
Creaform's e-learning portal to sign up and start learning right away.
Creaform Campus offers a complete training package including theory, written exercises, hands- on
practice and manuals.
The trainers are highly qualified application specialists who have been certified following a rigorous
internal training program. They use the measurement devices and software they teach on a daily basis.
Creaform training sessions cover a wide array of metrology- related topics and can take place at a
Creaform office, on your premises, or at any other venue of your choice.
If you need to get training, visit Creaform's website.

172
Contextual Help
The contextual help provides immediate assistance and information about the software's main features.
In addition to the contextual help based on the software interface, the Contents tab allows navigating in
books and topics to find information about Creaform devices and accessories.

IMPORTANT: Read the manual carefully before use and keep for future reference.

To open/close the User Manual in contextual help mode

l
Click located at the upper-right corner of the interface or

l Select Help | Show user manual in the menu bar or

l Press F1

To find specific information

Click to access the whole help content.

Search Tool
In the search tool, enter terms separated by spaces. The results will match all the terms in the query.
Searches are case insensitive and will match exact terms and variations.

1. Enter your query in the Search box in the upper-right corner.

2. Click to see the search results.

Quotation marks can be used around a group of words to get an exact match. Use
the filters to narrow the search results.

173
Help toolbar

To open the Printer dialog to send the opened topic to the printer.

To open the previous page as it appears in the table of contents.

To open the next page as it appears in the table of contents.

To navigate to the topic previously opened.

To navigate forward to the topic previously opened.

Content search
The Contents tab allows exploring and navigating to find specific information.

1. Browse in books or entries by clicking them to expand or collapse.

2. Click a topic to display its content.

Feedback option
Located at the bottom of each page, this option is for giving comments on the content.
Yes: Click to indicate the page content was helpful. It is possible to send feedback to the Technical
Writing team through a hyperlink.
No: Click to mention the page content was not helpful. It is possible to specify the reason(s) why the
content was not useful and to send feedback to the Technical Writing team through a hyperlink.
If content was not helpful

1. Select the check boxes (reasons) that apply.

2. Click the hyperlink. An email template containing the reason(s) indicated and the path of
the page will open.

3. Provide comments to help the Technical Writing team enhance or clarify the page content.

4. Click Send.

174
Where to find more information
To access other language versions of the User Manual:
HTML5 format

1. Go to Configure | Options.

2. In the VXelements tab, select the desired language in the Software language drop-down.

3. Click OK.

4. Close the software and restart it. The user interface and contextual help will be in the
language selected.

PDF format

1. Go to the Resources | Customer documents section of the Customer Portal.

2. In Category drop-down list, select User Manual.

3. Select the desired language in the Language drop-down.

4. Click Search and select the relevant User Manual to download it.

To update the User Manual

A link will be displayed at the lower-right corner of the interface when a new version is available.

175
System General Care
Creaform products are made of optical precision parts and must be handled with care to avoid
damaging their internal components and calibration system. They must be carried in their protective
case at all times and must be stored in a dry, dust- free and room temperature environment. We
recommend keeping all devices and accessories in the protective case when not in use.
Prior to starting a project, make sure the working environment is clutter-free and that cables are placed
safely.
Always store the devices following these conditions:

l Storage temperature: 5 to 55°C

l Operation temperature: 5 to 40°C

l Humidity: 10 to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

WARNING: Never open any component of a Creaform technology.

General use

l Always use the device in a clean and dry environment.

l Avoid direct lighting on the optical parts.

l Avoid any discharge (water, oil, etc.) onto the device.1

l Do not immerse the device.

l Do not drop the device and protect it against shocks.

l Do not introduce foreign bodies into the device.

l Leave the protective caps on unused connectors.

1Creaform systems are rated IP50 (per ANSI/IEC 60529- 2004 - Degrees of
Protection Provided by Enclosures – IP Code). Therefore, ingress of dust is not
entirely prevented, but it must not enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with the
satisfactory operation of the equipment. The systems are not protected from
liquids. Always operate in an environment suited to this IP rating.

176
Cords and cables

l Do not fold cables with a curve radius less than 5 cm.

l While scanning, hold the cable with your free hand or place it over your shoulder.

l Do not allow the cables to get caught on objects while moving around.

l If any cable become twisted, take a few moments to unplug and untwist the cable.

l Do not crush cables. For example, do not step on them.

l Only use the device with the original power supply provided.

Metal and plastic parts

To clean the device, use a soft cotton cloth with a small amount of water or a soapy solution.

Do not use solvent to clean the device.

Optical parts

l Spray dry air to remove any particles that may scratch the objectives and lights.

l Clean the objectives and lights with a damp cloth such as a non-abrasive optical towel or a
microfiber cloth.

This also applies to the glass-protected reflectors of the HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN

3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R, user calibration artifact and optical probing accessories.

User calibration plate

The user calibration plate should remain in the protective case.

MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R

Do not put any objects on the case.

177
 l Spray dry air to remove any particles that may scratch the plate.

l Clean the plate with a damp cloth such as a non-abrasive optical towel or a microfiber cloth.

Other products
Do not put any objects on the case except the custom foam insert. Do not touch the retroreflective
targets. If even a single target is damaged, the entire user calibration plate must be replaced.
To clean dirty retroreflective targets:

1. Identify any targets that may be dusty or dirty.

2. Soak a cotton swab in a diluted soap solution (never use alcohol).

3. Gently dab the targets and dry them by covering them with a microfiber towel or tissue
(never rub the targets).

Batteries

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

For details, see the Batteries section.

CUBE-R

Do not use Ammonia-based cleaning products to clean the rolling door and the
side windows located in the partitions (walls).

Components
3rd party

ATI Tool changer

l See the maintenance section of the ATI manual for the QC-11 tool changer (www.ati-ia.com).

178
FANUC robot and positioner

l See the maintenance section of the FANUC manual for M-20i robots.
(https://www.fanuc.com).

ASSA ABLOY door

l See the maintenance section of the ASSA ABLOY manual for the RP300 door
(https://www.assaabloyentrance.us).

IDEC safety laser scanners

l See the maintenance section of the IDEC manual for the SE2L safety laser scanners
(https://us.idec.com/Safety-Components/Safety-Laser-Scanner/SE2L-Series/c/SE2L_
Series).

179
Air supply
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar)

l Filter minimum: 40 microns

l Flow maximum: Negligible

l Connector for pneumatic air tubing pipe hose 6 mm (OD)

l Flexible 6 mm pipe diameter provided (customer must connect to it)

l Customer must provide manometer and regulator on their connection line

Cables

l Minimum dynamic bend radius: Cables attached to or running through the robot must have a
bend radius 60 mm or greater at any point in the robot's motion.

180
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

HandySCAN 3D MAX

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Individual laser projector: 450nm / avg. < 84 mW / < 2.31 mJ
2.2 ms / 37.5 Hz max / C6: 2.6
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

181
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 64 mW / < 1.76 mJ
2.2 ms / 37.5 Hz max / C6: 2.7
Laser 3: 450nm / avg < 14.7 mW / < 0.16 mJ
2.2 ms / 98 Hz max / C6: 2.3
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3, as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

HandySCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

182
HandySCAN SILVER

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 4.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 4.8
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 4
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

183
HandySCAN 700|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. <81.9 mW / < 2.7 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.2
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 21 mW / < 0.34 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 2.54
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

HandySCAN 307|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. <81.9 mW / < 2.7 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.2
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

184
MetraSCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

185
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN BLACK+, MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 4.0
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014

Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 121.8 mW / < 4.02 mJ

8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.25

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

186
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 123mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, HandySCAN 300, MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350,
MetraSCAN 750, MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

187
Service and Customer Care Plans

Read the following terms and conditions before using this product.

Standard warranty
For specific information about the product warranty, refer to Creaform's Terms and Conditions of Sale
document or contact Sales Support.

Customer Care plans

Different maintenance plans are offered.

For details, visit the website or contact Customer Support.

For details on what is included in the Customer Care plan purchased, see the contract or contact Sales
Support.

Customer Support
Our team of highly qualified technical product specialist will assist with even the most complex projects
and will provide advice, tips and tricks on how to fully take advantage of Creaform technology.
Customer Support available 24/5.

Software update
Each year, Creaform releases software updates. The customer is responsible for installing it. Creaform is
not liable for any device malfunction due to the installation of software on non- certified Creaform
computers. For details, see the System Requirements section.

Annual test, certification and calibration of the system

It is recommended to contact Customer Support to perform annual maintenance on the system. A
technical product specialist will explain the procedure and provide a RMA number (Return Merchandise
Authorization), confirming where to send the product (Creafom has several repair centers worldwide).
Complete the checklist to determine which part should be sent to Creaform. Follow the instructions

188
given by Customer Support and consult the checklist prior to shipping.

Need for service

Contact Customer Support to schedule service.

189
Assistance
Options and support information are available under the Help menu.

Show user manual

Should you have any questions or concerns regarding the software or any other Creaform technology,
see the User Manual (Help | Show user manual). Information on the software version is available:
Help | About VXelements.
To troubleshoot a problem, it is recommended to look at the training notes and the User Manual.

Keyboard shortcuts
See the Mouse and Keyboard Controls section.

Creaform Customer Portal

See the Creaform Online Services section.

Diagnostic mode
This function is made available for Customer Support. It gathers information on the customer's active
products in the event a system issue needs to be resolved. It is accessible from the Help | Diagnostic
mode after receiving the activation key from Customer Support.

Create system information file

Creates a .TXT file that Customer Support may need to solve certain issues.
To create a system information file:

1. Click Help | Create system information file.

2. Select a location for the file.

3. Click Save.

190
Generate computer ID
Creates a .TXT file that identifies the computer in use. Customer Support uses this ID when creating trial
licenses.
To create computer ID file:

1. Click Help | Generate computer ID.

2. Select a location for the file.

3. Click Save.

Launch remote session

Customer support may ask for remote session access. To launch a remote session:

About VXelements
Shows information about version number and installed components for VXelements

Send bug report

Helps send bug information to Creaform Customer Support
To send a bug report:

1. Click Help | Send bug report.

2. Fill out the form.

3. Click Send.

Customer support
If the issues are not solved, contact Customer Support (available during business hours for customers
with a valid maintenance plan).

191
Training services
Creaform Campus offers a complete training package including theory, written exercises, hands- on
practice and manuals.
The trainers are highly qualified application specialists who have been certified following a rigorous
internal training program. They use the measurement devices and software they teach on a daily basis.
Creaform training sessions cover a wide array of metrology- related topics and can take place at a
Creaform office, on your premises, or at any other venue of your choice.
If you need to get training, visit Creaform's website.

192
Contact Us
Visit our website or, for support, visit the Customer Portal.
It is possible to send feedback about the help and software translation by email to Creaform Technical
Writing.
For information on Creaform's worldwide offices, visit our website.

193
Getting Started with VXelements
This section provides a general overview of necessary information about using the software.
System requirements
Software installation
Product Manager
Online Services
Software updates and licenses
Troubleshooting

194
System Requirements

For R-Series, see the System Requirements for R-Series section.

All Creaform supplied computers meet the minimum system requirements. Non- Creaform
supplied computers must be approved by Creaform Customer Support before purchase. No
certification or compatibility guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers
than Creaform.

Minimum requirements Recommended specifications

Intel Core™ i7 (6+ cores) - 2.5 GHz or Intel Core™ i7 (8 cores) - 2.5 GHz or
Processor 1
more more
Operating system
2
Windows 10 / Windows 11 (64-bit) 3 4

NVIDIA Quadro RTX A5000 16 GB,

Graphics card 5 6 GB, OpenGL 4.5 and higher
OpenGL 4.5 and higher 6
Memory 32 GB 64 GB
Solid-state drive (SSD) with at least 200
Hard drive 1 TB SSD
GB of free space
Display 1920 x 1080
Connecting ports 1x USB 3.0+ 2x USB 3.0+
Microsoft Excel 7 Excel 2016+

1 Processor must support AVX2 instructions.

2 32-bit OS not supported.

3 Windows 10 version 1909+ or Windows 11.

4 .NET Microsoft Framework version: 4.7.2

5 GPU memory requirements are proportional to the amount of data collected in a single-
scan session. Scanning large parts with higher resolution may exceed the minimum specs
and require merging scans.
6 Required NVIDIA driver version: 536.25+. Only NVIDIA based graphics cards with CUDA
compute capabilities 6.1 or higher are supported. For more information, visit NVIDIA's
capability reference page.
7 Microsoft Excel® is required to export XLS reports in VXinspect.

195
For optimal performance, it is recommended to use the laptop while connected to
its power supply. Computer batteries are designed based on air transport
regulation which limit their maximum power. This might limit the scanner
performance and the ability to scan at high resolution when using the battery.

System performance improves with a more powerful computer.

196
197
Software Installation

Computers supplied by Creaform come with preinstalled software. To install it to

another computer, see the System Requirements section and follow the
instructions in this page.

To install the software

To make sure you install the latest version, use the Online Services.

1. Download the software installation file.

2. Double-click the .exe file.

3. Click Next and Install to install all available features.

4. Click Finish to finalize the software installation.

5. Follow instructions and make sure the software license is activated.

To download files online

Products and up-to-date software files can be retrieved on the Customer Portal. Request access by
clicking New user and then filling out the form.

1. Log into the Customer Portal.

2. Click My Products tab.

3. Selected the desired software version from the down-down menu. The latest version is
selected by default.

4. Click the Download icon under Software for one of the products and then save the
installer.

5. Launch the installer and follow the instructions.

198
To uninstall the software
To uninstall the software, use the Programs and Features option in the Windows Control panel.

1. In the Start Menu, click Control Panel.

2. Go to Programs and Features.

3. Select the software from the list and click Uninstall.

4. Follow the instructions to complete the process.

199
Product Manager
The Product Manager manages the calibration and license files of the products. It is available through:

1. Configure | Product Manager or

2. Windows Start menu: VXelements Product Manager

The Product Manager lists all the products installed on the computer. More than 1 product can be
installed on a computer, although only 1 can be active per session.
For a C-Link network, only the main C-Track is activated in the Product Manager.
If changes are made in the Product Manager while the software is running, a new session must be
created.

Product list
The Product Manager table gives several information about installed products as well as the active
products.

License status
The device's table row shows the product license status and other information relating to the product.

Status symbols in the Product Manager

Customer Care Plan
Status symbol License status Calibration date
expiration date
Customer Care Plan is active The license file is up The calibration file is
Up to date
for the product. to date. up to date.
Customer Care Plan is The license file is
Invalid N/A
expired for the product. not valid.
Download latest Download latest
Download N/A
license file now. calibration file now.
Customer Care Plan Calibration file not
Not found License not found.
information not found. found.

The name of the product is displayed, in the Product column, if the serial number is found on the
website. If the Product Manager is offline or if the serial number of a product cannot be found on the
website, N/A is displayed.

200
To add a product to the Product Manager

Automatic method (product detection)

Products will be detected and selected by the software when connected to the computer. After the initial
connection, the license and calibration files will be downloaded when connected to the Online Services.
Those products added will then appear in the Product Manager.

This method applies only for Go!SCAN 3D and HandySCAN 3D scanners.

Manual method
To manually add a product to the Product Manager

1. Click the Add new product link.

2. Enter the product serial number.

3. Click Browse and select its calibration file (.cst).

4. Click Browse and select its license file (.clf).

The calibration and license files can also be downloaded from the Customer Portal.

To activate 30-day trial license

1. From the Product Manager window, click Activate trial license.

2. Enter trial license activation key at prompt.

3. Click OK.

The trial license expires after 30 days. For continued issues with a licensing and
product activation, please consult Customer Portal.

To activate a product
Select the product to use from the Installed products and click Activate.

201
To change or delete a product

1. Select the product from the Products list.

2. Click Change to change either the calibration file or the license file of the product.

3. Click Delete to remove the product from the Products list.

Click to force refreshing information for the current product.

202
Online Services

Overview
Online Services link the software with the Customer Portal. They provide access to product information,
such as Customer Care plan expiration dates, license expiration dates, last calibration dates. They ensure
that the license files and software version installed on the computer are up to date.
Once the Online Services are activated, simple symbols are displayed in the Product Manager to provide
useful visual feedback giving specific information about applicable products.

An active internet connection is required to use these services.

Online Services options

Online Services options are located in the software general options (Configure | Options | Online
Services).

Disconnected services
When the Online Services option is not activated, cloud license is not available. Also, the Product
Manager is not connected to the Customer Portal. Therefore, it only includes the license and calibration
files that were previously installed on the computer. Products must be managed through the Customer
Portal. It is also possible to set how frequently the software checks for available updates.

To activate the Online Services

Activation for non-registered users

1. Click the Register for Online Services link available in the software options.

2. A web page opens and a request form is loaded.

3. Fill out the form and once it is completed, a registration approval email is sent within the
next 24 hours.

203
Activation for registered users

1. Enter email address and password used at registration.

2. Check the Remember Password box (optional).

3. Click OK.

Forgot your password?

1. Click the Forgot your password? link in the Online Services options to be redirected to the
Customer Portal.

2. Click Forgot your password or need to change your password? in the login dialog.

3. Enter your user name and click Reset/Change my password to receive an email with the link
to change your password.

Online Services indicators

At the top right of the main window, a small indicator gives general information on products:
Indicator Description
Not connected to the Online Services.
No log- in information has been provided and/or the online services have not been
enabled with the check box in the options. Clicking this icon will open the Options
window.

Not connected to the Internet.

A software update is available. Click this icon to download the new version.

Most recent calibration and/or license file(s) is/are available. At least 1 of the connected
sensors (license and/or calibration file) is not up to date. Click this icon to open the
Product Manager.

The software is connected to Online Services and the software version, as well as all
license and calibration files are up to date.

204
Access to support website
Once the Online Services are activated, the Customer Portal can be launched directly from the software
(Help | Creaform Customer Portal).

205
Software Updates and Licenses
The Customer Portal gives access to updates.

To carry out an update, the computer must be connected to the Internet.

Software update
Software should be updated each time a service release or a new version is available. All updates come
as a new software installer.

Updating software using automatic download option with Online Services

1. Click at the top right of the screen.

2. A new update available message will appear.

3. Click Yes to download and install the update.

Updating software using the Customer Portal

Products and up-to-date software files can be retrieved on the Customer Portal. Request access by
clicking New user and then filling out the form.

1. Log into the Customer Portal.

2. Click My Products tab.

3. Selected the desired software version from the down-down menu. The latest version is
selected by default.

4. Click the Download icon under Software for one of the products and then save the
installer.

5. Launch the installer and follow the instructions.

To access to software updates, Creaform systems and products must be under

active Customer Care plan.

206
Calibration file update
Each time a product is factory calibrated, a new calibration file is created. The latest version is available
online (or on the USB stick provided with a new scanner). Since that file is related to the product
calibration process, it does not have to be changed after a software update.

To update the calibration file

Automatic method

1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to the Online Services.

2. Click next to the calibration file to update.

Manual method

1. Connect to the Customer Portal.

2. Find the product by entering its serial number in the text field and clicking Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the product's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration column.

5. Access to the Product Manager to change the calibration file.

207
License file update
License files are linked to the software version. They must be updated for each new version only (not for
service releases). License files loaded for previous versions will be displayed as Invalid version.
A 90- day license is provided with every new scanner. After that period, a user license is issued.
Subsequently, updates are required to continue using the software.

To update the license file

Automatic method

1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to Online Services.

2. Click next to the license file to update.

Manual method

1. Make sure to download and install the latest available version of the software.

2. In the Customer Portal, find the product by entering its serial number in the text field and
click Apply.

3. Click the arrow in the License tab.

4. Access to the Product Manager to change the license file.

The license expiration date appears in the Device Bar located above the menu bar.

VXmodel, VXinspect|Analysis, VXinspect|Quality Control, and VXscan-R modules

These modules are only available if a license has been purchased.

R-Series product licenses

For details on R-Series product licenses, see the Software and License Updates for R-Series section.

Cloud license

To access the license

Cloud licenses are hosted on a server in the cloud and can be accessed from anywhere via an Internet
connection.
Connect to the Online services in the software to access the cloud licenses.

208
A login may only be in use once at a time in the cloud server; each user must have their own login.

Online usage
The number of cloud licenses currently available is displayed in the module's Home page. If a license is
available, select a mesh or CAD file and click the arrow to open the software module.
A license will be in use as long as the session is opened. Cloud license currently in use will appear at the
top of the Home page.
When the session is closed, the license becomes automatically available on the server.
If the connection to the server is interrupted during use, there is a 10 minutes timeout before the session
is locked and must be saved.
The application will attempt to reconnect in the meantime. A warning appears halfway through the
timeout in case action needs to be taken to reconnect.

Offline usage
The license can be used for up to 30 days without internet access.
How to check out a license for offline use:

1. Select the module for which you'd like to check out a license. For example:
VXmodel.

2. Click Check out license to work offline.

3. Click Release license to return the license to the server before the end of the 30-day period.

4. Click Renew license to keep the license for another 30 days.

The license becomes automatically available on the server at the end of the check
out period.

Each module's license must be checked out individually.

VXscan, VXshot, VXprobe, and VXtrack do not use cloud licenses and will not have
Check out a license to work offline displayed when selected.

A connection to the server is required to use these options.

209
Trial Licenses
30-day software trial licenses are available for VXelements' modules.

To activate a trial license:

Automatic method

1. From the Home screen, select the module to be used.

2. Open a session or a mesh file (if applies) and click .

3. Click Activate trial in the dialog box. The 30-day trial license will be activated.

Other method

1. Access to the Product Manager.

2. Click Activate trial license.

3. Enter the activation key provided by Creaform.

Hardware license
Some customers purchased their software with a hardware license. To run the software, the hardware
license must remain plugged into one of the computer's USB ports during the entire process.

To update your hardware license

Automatic method

1. In the Product Manager, make sure to be connected to the Online Services.

2. Make sure that the dongle is connected to the computer. If not, the product will not
appear in the list (dongle only).

3. Select the product line of hardware license to update.

4. Click Update.

Manual method

1. Before starting, make sure to have the dongle serial number ready.

2. Go to the Customer Portal and log onto your customer account.

3. Find the product using its unique hardware serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the License tab to download the executable .cku file for the
corresponding hardware.

210
 5. Connect the hardware to your computer.

6. Double-click the executable file to update the hardware license.

A message should appear informing that the update has been successfully completed.

Software license
Some customers purchased their software with a software license. The license must be activated in the
Product Manager.

To activate, update or deactivate your software license

Activate: Click Activate to activate the license at first use.

Update: Click Update whenever a new version has been released or if the license is about to expire.
Deactivate: Click Deactivate to deactivate a license from one computer and to reactivate it on another.

211
Network license
Some customers purchased their software with a Network license. The network license must remain
plugged into one of the computer's USB ports during the entire process.

Network license configuration

The following steps describe the complete setup of the network license:

1. Driver installation on the host machine

2. Installation of the software on user computer

3. Network configuration on user computer

Section 1: Driver installation on the host machine

If the software is installed on the host machine, Section 2 replaces steps 1 to 4, since the drivers are
automatically installed with the software.

1. Download the files here:

l for Windows

l for Linux

2. Extract the files (unzip or untar).

3. Install the file:

l for Windows: Double click the install.bat file.

l for Linux: Run the Install file as root.

4. Windows only: There will be 2 operations. Click OK after each.

5. Open a web browser and make sure the page http://localhost:1947/_int_/devices.html

is loading.

6. Connect the network dongle and make sure it appears in the above browser page.

212
Section 2: Installation of the software on user computer

All the files required to use Creaform products can be retrieved on https://cp.creaform3d.com.
If you do not have an account yet, request one using the form.

1. Log in your account on the support portal.

2. Click Products.

3. Find your product serial number assigned to the network dongle.

4. Click the download icon under the software section.

5. Launch the installer.

6. Finish the installation with default parameters.

Or for silent installation of the software:

5. Launch the Windows PowerShell as Administrator.

6. Start-Process -FilePath [INSTALLERPATH] -Verb runAs -ArgumentList '/s','/v"/qn"'

Section 3: Network configuration on user computer

1. Open a web browser and go to the page http://localhost:1947/_int_/config.html

2. Go to Access to Remote License Managers.

3. Check all 3 options:

l Allow Access to Remote Licenses

l Broadcast Search for Remote Licenses

l Aggressive Search for Remote Licenses

4. Verify the IP address of the host machine (where the dongle is connected).

5. Enter this IP address in the Remote License Search Parameters field.

6. Click Submit.

7. Make sure the network dongle is detected (http://localhost:1947/_int_/devices.html)

l Those changes are saved under C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Aladdin

Shared\HASP\hasplm.ini

8. Copy the updated file to each user computer.

213
Troubleshooting

It is recommended to contact Customer Support upon encountering a problem.

They will be best suited to help with troubleshooting of any kind, and may log bug
information for tracking and development.

This section provides solutions to common error messages encountered in VXelements.

Memory-related error messages

Located at the bottom right side of the screen, the memory allocation status bars display the system
memory (RAM) and graphics processing unit (GPU) memory usage. During scanning, try to maintain the
GPU use under 70%, as subsequent processing steps require additional memory.
As explained in the System Requirements, due to some constraints in Windows, there is a limit to the
amount of memory that can be allocated to a single program. If the limit is exceeded, the software will
display an error message.

Error message Solution

A GPU error occurred. Surface could not be
reconstructed but scan data has not been Save the session. Close the software and reopen the
lost. Save the session and reopen it to recover session to recover scan data.
data.

1. Select and delete unwanted areas of the

Critical GPU memory. Surface could not be
scan to free up memory to continue
reconstructed but scan data has not been
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the surface scanning with the current resolution.
resolution and apply to recover data.
2. If the first solution does not work,
decrease resolution (i.e. increase triangle

Out of GPU memory. Surface could not be size value) under the Scan Parameters.
reconstructed but scan data has not been Select and delete unwanted areas of the
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the surface
resolution and apply to recover data. scan. Increase resolution (i.e. decrease
triangle size value) to the original value.

214
 Error message Solution

1. Decrease resolution (i.e. increase

triangle size value) under the Scan
parameters.
Texture was not generated as it would be too
large to fit inside video memory. Reduce scan 2. If the first solution doesn't work, change
resolution or use another projection.
projection type. Note that in None
projection type, maximum image size is
4 GB.

Product compatibility error messages

Mixing third (G3) and fourth generation (G4) of MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R, or HandyPROBE
systems with the C-Track and the controller is not possible.

Examples
If a G3 C-Track and a MetraSCAN BLACK are connected, a message will appear to
inform that the current C-Track is not compatible with the scanner.
If trying to use a G3 stylus with a G4 controller, a message will appear on the
controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

Product compatibility
G3 C-Track is compatible with MetraSCAN 350, MetraSCAN 750, MetraSCAN 357, and MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite products.
G4 C-Track is compatible with MetraSCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN-R BLACK products.
For details, see C-Track compatibility chart section.

MetraSCAN 3D
If the MetraSCAN 3D is not detected by the software (“Disconnected”)
Scanner Status

First, check the status of the scanner on the controller screen (menu “3.0 Scanner” of the controller) and the number
of devices (menu “5.2 Nb of devices” of the controller).

215
 l This scanner should have 2 devices detected (cameras).

l If a C-Track is also connected to the controller, the total should be 4 devices.

l If a C-Track and MaxSHOT Next are also connected to the controller, the total should be 5

devices.

“Disconnected” Status + All Devices:

l Make sure the scanner physically connected is the one activated in the Product Manager.

l Make sure the latest calibration (.cst) file has been uploaded in the Product Manager (a new file is created

after each factory calibration.)

l Try a clean step-by-step setup as follows:

l Turn off the controller, unplug the power source from the controller and Ethernet cable from the

computer and close the software.

l Plug back the controller power source.

l Turn on the controller.

l Wait until the C-Track status is Warming, Calibration too old or Ready.

l Plug the Ethernet cable back to the computer.

l Launch the software.

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try a controller recovery.

“Disconnected” Status + Missing Devices:

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try to connect the scanner to another port behind the controller.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try to restart the computer.

l If possible, try another cable for the scanner.

216
“Ready” Status:

l Make sure the C-Track is properly detected and ready to use (or calibrate).

l Try to restart the computer.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try a complete restart of the controller (shut down controller and unplug the power supply for 5 seconds).

l Try to uninstall and install the software (make sure the latest version available is being installed).

l Try a controller recovery.

217
If the MetraSCAN 3D is detected, but not properly connected (any error message on scanner,
but not “Disconnected”)

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a clean step-by-step setup as follows:

l Turn off the controller, unplug the power source from the controller and Ethernet cable from the

computer and close the software.

l Plug back the controller power source.

l Turn on the controller.

l Wait until the C-Track status is Warming, Calibration too old or Ready.

l Plug the Ethernet cable back to the computer.

l Launch the software.

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try to connect the scanner to another port behind the controller.

l Try to uninstall and install the software (make sure the latest version available is being installed).

l Try a controller recovery.

C-Track
If the C- Track is not detected by the software (any error message except “Not Found” and
“Warming”)

l Make sure the cables on the C-Track are correctly plugged (3 cables).

l Try to shut down the controller, unplug the power source, unplug or plug the C-Track cables, plug back

the power and restart the controller.

If the C-Track or MetraSCAN 3D license is not working

218
 l Try to connect to the Online Services (in the Product Manager) and update the license by clicking the

Download icon.

l Try to download the license file (.clf) from the Creaform Customer Portal (https://cp.creaform3d.com/)

and click Change in the Product Manager to select the downloaded license file.

l Try to manually copy the downloaded license file (.clf) from the software installation folder (ex: C:\Program

Files\Creaform\VXelements\License).

l If the problem remains, contact the Customer Support team ([email protected]) to request

a new license.

If the Volume extension acquisition process finalization fails

Make sure:

l To calibrate the C-Track first.

l The number of positioning targets is sufficient and well spread in the volume. A minimum of 10 targets

must be detected as part of the targets model, so, likely more than 10 targets will need to be part of the

setup.

l The positioning targets are not damaged or dirty.

l To keep a good standoff distance from the targets. (Start approximately 2.5m from the part.)

l The C-Track displacement is at least at 0.5 meters.

l Not to change the C-Track orientation by more that ± 10° from the initial C-Track orientation (i.e. the pitch

and roll of the C-Track when you pressed the VE button).

l The temperature is stable and remains within ± 2° Celsius.

If the C-Track calibration bar is not registered when using the Volume extension function

l There is no calibration bar registered.

l Calibrate the C-Track to register the calibration bar.

219
Products

Pay attention to text associated with warning symbols. For details, see the Safety
Notice section.

Creaform 3D metrology technologies meet the specific needs of a wide range of applications.

Portable 3D scanners

Go!SCAN 3D

l Go!SCAN SPARK

HandySCAN 3D

l HandySCAN MAX

l HandySCAN BLACK|Elite

l HandySCAN SILVER

l HandySCAN BLACK

l HandySCAN 700|Elite

l HandySCAN 307

MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN BLACK

l MetraSCAN 357

Health Care Partner 3D

Creaform ACADEMIA 3D

l ACADEMIA 10

l ACADEMIA 20

l ACADEMIA 50

Portable Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMMs)

HandyPROBE Next

220
C-Track

Optical Coordinate Measuring Systems

MaxSHOT Next
C-Track

221
Product Generations
Go!SCAN 3D

Product Generation Model

G3 Go!SCAN SPARK

Go!SCAN 20
G2
Go!SCAN 50

HandySCAN 3D

Product Generation Model

HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite
G3
HandySCAN 700|Elite
HandySCAN 307|Elite

HandySCAN 700
G2
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 300

222
C-Track

Product Generation Model

C-Track
G4
C-Track|Elite

C-Track
G3
C-Track|Elite

MetraSCAN 3D

Product Generation Model

MetraSCAN BLACK
G4
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite

MetraSCAN 357
G3 MetraSCAN 750
MetraSCAN 350

223
HandyPROBE

Product Generation Model

G4 HandyPROBE Next

G3 HandyPROBE Next

MaxSHOT 3D

Product Generation Model

MaxSHOT Next
G2
MaxSHOT Next|Elite

224
Go!SCAN 3D Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

The Go!SCAN 3D product line offers portable 3D scanning experience, providing fast and reliable
measurements. These handheld 3D scanners allow capturing 3D data in full color.
The Go!SCAN 3D self-positioning scanners provide a fast measurement rate, and do not require manual
data post- processing. They can be used for a wide range of applications, helping professionals
throughout the entire product development process.

Go!SCAN SPARK

225
Previous generation

Go!SCAN 50 Go!SCAN 20

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

226
Go!SCAN SPARK

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

Go!SCAN SPARK

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

227
Go!SCAN SPARK Hardware and
Components
Hardware

1. USB key (license and calibration files)

2. Power supply

3. USB 3.0 cable

228
 4. Positioning targets

5. Go!SCAN SPARK

6. User calibration plate*

7. Calibration certificate*

*The user calibration plate and the calibration certificate are located under the foam insert in the
protective case.

Components

1. Geometry tracking camera

2. White light projector

3. Color camera

4. Hand strap

229
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has a set of 3 buttons on each side. Either set can be used to access functions in scan mode
and out of scan mode. Buttons 1 and 2 are used to adjust zoom and to navigate in the Smart Control.
Button 3 (trigger) is used to accept a function or message.

Scanner status light colors

Color Scanner status

Recording
Ready for acquisition
Connected

Go!SCAN SPARK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Start or Exit scan
3 Trigger - Open or Close Smart Control mode
mode

230
Go!SCAN SPARK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Enable/disable
1+2 - - -
high resolution
Start or Stop
3 Trigger Stop scan mode Open or Close Smart Control mode
projector

Smart Control

Smart Control remotely accesses key functions during scanning such as Calibration, Configuration, and
Reset scan.

Button Function
1 Navigate up
2 Navigate down
3 Select

231
Go!SCAN SPARK Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning
The scanner requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light stripe pattern
on the object. The pattern distortion on the object is recorded by 3 digital cameras: 1 camera is placed
near the top of the scanner, 1 in the middle and the other one near the bottom of the scanner.
Acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is used to build the
surface with real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and positioning
targets, to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee
accuracy. The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

232
Texture positioning
The scanner acquires and detects the object's texture with its digital color camera.

233
Go!SCAN SPARK Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the scanner.

234
5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

It is recommended to use the cable computer

support to prevent any disconnection issues
caused by yanking the cable.
Connect the support to the Ethernet port and
loop the USB cable before plugging it in.

Make sure the loop goes under the USB

connection on the computer to relieve stress.

235
Go!SCAN SPARK Calibration

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to 14 positions as
indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets of the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter. Position the scanner at approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Aim at the center of the target pattern and normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner
away from the plate, matching the scanner shadow in the 3D viewer. Once 10
measurements are taken, take 4 measurements at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting
the scanner towards the right, left, top and bottom of the plate.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

236
 Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

To review previous calibration results or when the last calibration was performed, a
calibration journal is available through Configure | Calibration journal |
Visualize.

Restore to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This action cannot
be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

237
Go!SCAN SPARK Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter option allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection. It
works well if the light pattern is entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial
approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrasting colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to and at a stand-off distance from the object (~40 cm)
and press the trigger button.

l A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the striped light pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts that have a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part surface until the Scanner
parameters have been optimized message disappears.

The striped light pattern must lie only on the part

surface. If the part is smaller than the light pattern size,
the slider Scanning area % can be used to reduce the
size of the pattern.

238
Distance meter [1] colors

Scanner
Color Action
position
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

White light stripe pattern [2] colors

Color Status Description

The cameras do not or weakly perceive the reflection of the light.

Underexposed The software lacks enough information to calculate and build a
mesh.

The light stripes appear as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done under ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the light is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Light stripes are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for an optimal detection of the light stripes.

239
The cameras' shutter speed according to the surface type should be set before scanning.
Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process,
through the system panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 1 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish, otherwise the scanning results will be
affected.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan 1 part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

240
Go!SCAN SPARK Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Go!SCAN SPARK is an intelligent scanner that self-positions itself based on the object geometry. No
positioning targets are required for objects featuring sufficient geometry information. In the case of flat
or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 100 mm to 200 mm from each other.

l For flat surfaces, make sure to have at least 3 targets within the projection of the light stripe
pattern.

The use of a turntable can be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

241
Go!SCAN SPARK Texture Feature
Texture quality
The texture quality depends of several factors and can vary depending on the work environment. For
higher texture quality, follow these tips and tricks:

l Make sure to scan from the recommended scanning stand-off distance.

l In the case of blurriness, restart the acquisition and scan over the same area at the proper
scanning distance.

l The more triangles are scanned, the better the texture details are. Higher resolution provides
better texture quality.

For details, see the Texture node in the VXscan Interface section.

242
Go!SCAN SPARK Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While digitizing, the white light stripes projected on the object are displayed in different colors to
indicate the distance between the scanner and the surface of the object.
Targets placed on the object or the environment also act as distance meters (white targets are acquired
but not detected at that time and gray targets provide a view from behind).
This feature can be deactivated in the Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be
indicated by a meter on the left side of the screen.

Target or light stripes colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

243
LEDs on the sides of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

Scanner sides LEDs colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated for when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in
front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or, if using targets, redistributing
them differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired. The scanner field of view goes from 25 to 70 cm (~10
to 28 in).

244
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~40 cm).

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost. Click the surface to choose the area
where to resume the scan. If the selected area contains sufficient positioning information, the area will
turn green. A scanner shadow will appear showing where to point the scanner in this area to resume the
scanning process.

245
If the selected area does not contain enough positioning information, the area will become red and
another region must be selected.

Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in red in
the 3D viewer.

246
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frame groups using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple groups of frames must be
deleted.
For more information, see the Delete Frames section.

247
Go!SCAN 3D Previous Generation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

The Go!SCAN 3D product line offers portable 3D scanning experience, providing fast and reliable
measurements. These handheld 3D scanners allow capturing 3D data in full color.
The Go!SCAN 3D self-positioning scanners provide a fast measurement rate, and do not require manual
data post- processing. They can be used for a wide range of applications, helping professionals
throughout the entire product development process.

Go!SCAN 50

248
Go!SCAN 20

249
Go!SCAN 3D Hardware and Components
The scanner features 2 digital cameras and 1 digital color camera, each surrounded by a set of 4 white
LEDs, and a white light pattern projector.

1. Top camera

2. White LEDs

3. Bottom camera

4. White light projector

5. Color camera

6. Trigger

The scanner and all the necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a custom
foam insert. The user calibration plate is located under the foam.

250
1. VXelements software installer

2. USB cable

3. Positioning targets

4. Power supply

251
5. Go!SCAN 3D

6. 3D scanning turntable (provided with Go!SCAN 20 only)

7. 15 triangular references (provided with Go!SCAN 20 only)

252
Go!SCAN 3D Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning

Go!SCAN 3D requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light pattern on
the object. The pattern distortion on the object is recorded by the 2 digital cameras: 1 camera is placed
on top of the scanner and the other one is placed on the bottom right-hand side when facing the
scanner. The acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is
used to build the surface with real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and Navigation tree,
to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee accuracy.
The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

253
Texture positioning
The scanner acquires and detects the object texture with its digital color camera (bottom left-hand
camera when facing the scanner).

254
Go!SCAN 3D System Connection
Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into a wall outlet or a power bar.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Plug the USB cable into 1 of the computer's USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 ports.

4. Finally, plug the USB cable connector into the scanner.

255
To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

256
Go!SCAN 3D Calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. The calibration
uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 10 positions.
To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter.

3. Position the scanner at approximately 20 cm (8 in) from the center of the user calibration
plate, at a perpendicular angle.

4. Press the trigger button and slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the
white square with the green square in the center. Once the first measurement is taken, lock
your arm and gradually move the scanner upwards for subsequent measurements. Ten
(10) measurements are required for calibration.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

There are 4 zones to look at:

l Top zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner from left to right to center the red bar.

l Left zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner up and down to adjust the red bar.

l Right zone: Try to center the red indicator with the green area by moving your scanner closer
or away from the user calibration plate. The red bar goes up each time a measurement is
successfully taken. The green area will also change position with each measurement. This zone
indicates the scanner's height.

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

257
The Calibration details window, on the right side of the screen, indicates the factory calibration date
and the last user calibration date.
The factory settings can be restored through the Product Manager.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated. Make sure that:

l There are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate. Falsely detecting a positioning
target will cause calibration failure.

l There are no targets near the user calibration plate.

l The user calibration plate targets are in perfect condition. Damaged targets will cause an
optimization failure message.

l If possible, to leave the user calibration plate in the case.

258
System Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter feature allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its cameras' shutter speed for better surface detection. Carried out in
real time, the Automatic shutter mode optimizes scanning parameters. It works well if the light pattern is
entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrast colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

If the scanner does not detect the object to scan, or for parts with different colors and/or reflection
properties, we recommend manually adjusting the cameras' shutter speed. This will provide optimal
surface detection. The configuration parameters can be modified at all times, even without stopping the
acquisition process.

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to the object and at a stand-off distance of ~40 cm from it,
and press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the light pattern is as yellow as possible. This slider controls the exposure
displayed in milliseconds.

b. For parts with a uniform color / texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part's surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Four statuses (colors) are used to set optimal shutter speed:

259
 l No detection (black): No surface is detected.

l Underexposed (gray): The cameras hardly perceive the light pattern reflection. There is not
enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a mesh from the surface.
The shutter speed should be increased.

l Optimal (yellow): The reflection of the light pattern is clean and defined. The surface
calculation is made under ideal circumstances.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the light pattern is so intense the cameras are dazzled. The
pattern is not clearly defined and may lead to a wrong reconstruction of the surface or an
unusual amount of noise in the data. The shutter speed should be decreased.

The configuration can be modified during the scan so different strategies can be used for scanning
multicolor parts. In the case of low contrast, a compromise can be reached between the different colors,
which still provides good light pattern detection. However, in the case of high contrast, it is
recommended to scan 1 section of the object, to change the configuration and to complete the scan. No
need to stop scanning to access the Configuration dialog.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

260
Go!SCAN 3D Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Go!SCAN 3D is an intelligent scanner self- positioning itself based on the object geometry. No
positioning targets are required for objects featuring sufficient geometry information. In the case of flat
or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 20 mm and 100 mm from each other.

The Go!SCAN 20 scanner is used for smaller detailed objects. The use of a turntable
could be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For better scan results,
apply positioning targets around the object.

261
Go!SCAN 3D Texture Feature
Texture license
The Texture license must be purchased at time of order and is not mandatory. It allows visualizing the
scan texture (such as color). Each Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50 scanner comes with a digital color
camera even though the Texture license has been purchased or not. In the case the Texture license is not
required and has not been purchased, the scanned object texture will not be visible on the screen.
The license can be purchased upon request later on.

Texture quality
The texture quality depends of several factors and can vary depending on the work environment. For
higher texture quality, follow these tips and tricks:

l Make sure to scan from the recommended scanning distance.

l In the case of blurry effect, restart the acquisition and scan over the same area with the proper
scanning distance.

l The more triangles are scanned, the better the texture details are. Higher resolution provides
better texture quality.

For details, see also the texture node content in the VXscan Interface section.

262
Go!SCAN 3D Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

l The scanner stand-off distance is 40 cm (~16 in).

l Its field of view goes from 30 to 55 cm (~12 to 22 in).

Screen indicators
While scanning, a distance meter is displayed on the left side of the screen, showing the distance
between the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the
scanner.
Distance meter

263
 l Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

l Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

l Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

LEDs indicators:

1. Blue LED to indicate the scanner is running.

2. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

3. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

4. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

When the scanner loses tracking, the 2 red LEDs light up.

264
Positioning status
This feature provides indications on positioning issues and tips to solve the problem.

Status indicator Tips

Not enough visible data.

l Change the scanner angle or adjust the distance from the object.

l Adjust the shutter speed.

Frame impossible to
position.
l Aim the scanner at the last positioned frame or go back to any of
the previously captured targets.

Lack of recognizable
features.

l Apply 1 or a few targets.

Position ambiguity.

l Put 1 or a few targets close to the ambiguity spots to

differentiate one from another.

Shape slippage indicators

Arrows show which sliding directions are causing the positioning problems.

l Yellow arrow: Positioning is still acceptable but has a slight ambiguity.

l Red arrow: Unacceptable positioning.

Field of view

265
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, respect a certain stand-off distance. Any
data out of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.

Go!SCAN 20

When scanning from the proper stand-off distance, Go!SCAN 20 projects a smaller light pattern. This
scanner provides better surface resolution and accuracy, resulting in a much more detailed capture.
For optimal field of view, stand-off distance should be 380 mm. Working distance should be between
330 mm and 430 mm.

Go!SCAN 50

When scanning from the proper stand- off distance, this scanner projects a larger light pattern and
features a better depth of field, while providing a better working distance.
For optimal field of view, stand-off distance should be 400 mm. Working distance should be between
300 mm and 550 mm.

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost because it allows choosing where to
resume the scan. It also enables moving the surface around and selecting a different area.

266
Another option is to click the surface to decide the area where to resume the scan. To resume the
scanning process, point the scanner on this area. If the area selected does not contain enough
positioning information, the rectangle will become red and a warning message will be displayed.

267
Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

This function corrects positioning errors, when the object geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous. It can be used during the scanning process or during post-processing.
In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in yellow
in the 3D viewer.
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frames using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple frames must be deleted.
When used for post-processing, surface reconstruction will be required after deleting the frames.
The frames included in the selected area will appear in red.

This function is available with Go!SCAN and Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners.

For more information, see the Delete Frames section.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

268
HandySCAN 3D Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The scanner self-
positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement repeatability
and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real geometry and
allows easy visualization of surface defects.

HandySCAN MAX HandySCAN MAX|Elite

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite HandySCAN BLACK

269
 HandySCAN SILVER HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

HandySCAN 700|Elite HandySCAN 307|Elite HandySCAN 307

Previous generation

HandySCAN 700 HandySCAN 300

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

270
HandySCAN 3D MAX Products

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

HandySCAN MAX and HandySCAN MAX|Elite

271
HandySCAN 3D MAX Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

HandySCAN 3D MAX

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Individual laser projector: 450nm / avg. < 84 mW / < 2.31 mJ
2.2 ms / 37.5 Hz max / C6: 2.6
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

272
HandySCAN 3D MAX Hardware and
Components
Hardware

273
 HandySCAN MAX HandySCAN MAX|Elite

l HandySCAN 3D MAX scanner l HandySCAN MAX|Elite scanner

l 1 x case l 1 x case

l 1 x 24V power supply l 1 x 24V power supply

l 1 x 16 m USB 3.0 cable l 1 x 16 m USB 3.0 cable

l 2 x positioning target boxes l 2 x positioning target boxes

l 1 x 500 mm scale bar l 2 x 1000 mm scale bars

l 4 x scale bar supports l 4 x scale bar supports

l 2 x targeted foldable white panels l 2 x targeted foldable white panels

l 6 clip cards l 6 clip cards

l 1 x calibration certificate l 1 x calibration certificate

274
HandySCAN MAX Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode.
The trigger button is the central button (1) used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to
start, pause, or stop the acquisition process.

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Start / Pause Start / Exit scan
1 Scan -
acquisition mode
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Smart control Enter smart control - Exit smart control
Enable / Disable high
5 High resolution - Touchscreen mode (F10)
resolution mode

Smart control options available

Use the Up (2) and Down (3) arrows to navigate the Smart Control options, and Trigger (1) to accept.

275
 Before scanning While scanning After scanning
Predefined view
Fit to screen
Show / hide inspection items
Predefined view Finalize
Fit to screen Send to
Working Volume (Near / Fit to screen (
Standard /Far) Show / hide inspection items VXinspect|Analysis
Show / hide inspection items Auto . Adjust
Reset Scan VXinspect|Quality Control,
HandySCAN 3D MAX Touchscreen (F10) VXmodel)
calibration Full screen mode (F11) HandySCAN 3D MAX calibration
Auto . Adjust Reset Viewpoint Scan mode (Targets / Surface)
Scan mode (Targets / Surface) Exit Use clipping reference
Touchscreen (F10) Save session
Full screen mode (F11) Exit Reset scan
Touchscreen (F10)
Full screen mode (F11)
Exit

276
HandySCAN 3D MAX Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D MAX scanner uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images
into 3D measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

277
HandySCAN 3D MAX Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the scanner.

5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

278
HandySCAN 3D MAX Calibration
Purpose of calibration

Changes in the environment may affect the calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. An annual factory calibration is recommended to keep the scanner at its
highest accuracy.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will show a message asking to update
the calibration file. See Software Updates and Licenses for more information.

Calibration methods

The HandySCAN 3D MAX does not require a user calibration before scanning as:

l The scale bars are used to scale the positioning model.

l The part surface is used to continuously adjust the lasers during acquisition.

Real-time calibration

Real time calibration means the scanner calibrates itself while scanning.

l The lasers are continuously calibrated during the scan.

l The stereo/scanner cameras are adjusted during the finalization of the scan.

Optimal conditions
Optimal conditions for complete real-time calibration:

l It must be possible to scan scale bars from multiple angles. Optimize volumetric accuracy option
must be used when finalizing the scan.
l The part surfaces must allow for good laser optimization.

The real-time calibration is done by default; there is no option to disable this

function.

279
User calibration

This method allows to calibrate the scanner outside of the scan mode.
It is recommended when:

l It is not possible to include a scale bar in the scan setup.

l It is difficult for the scanner to see the targets and laser lines.

l The scanner is subject to external factors such as vibrations, small impacts, high temperature
changes. etc.

User calibration equipment

HandySCAN MAX HandySCAN MAX|Elite
2 targeted foldable white panels of 1.25 m x 0.38 m
1 scale bar of 500 mm 1 scale bar of 1000 mm

To perform the user calibration

1. Place the targeted foldable white panels on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects
nearby, about 100 mm apart. Thus, the plates will for a roughly 1 m x 1 m square.

2. Place 1 scale bar between the 2 plates.

3. Click to activate the calibration.

4. Position the scanner approximately 1.2 m from the plate.

5. Press the trigger button to start.

1. Then, follow the next steps:

1. At first, the scanner needs to see the full-scale bar. Being

farther away will help.

2. Secondly, the scanner needs to see the bar at different

distances:

Far: 1200 mm to 1600 mm

Middle: 800 mm to 1200 mm
Near: 400 mm to 800 mm
Once the black circle is inside the green zone, the progression
will go up. Once a distance is completed, the next one will
appear.

280
 3. Start the acquisition. Two dots will be seen on the surface.
Slowly move the scanner around each end of the scale bars,
matching the markers shown in the viewer. When the
viewpoint is acquired, the surface will fill in.

6. Click Yes to save the calibration.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure the white panels used for calibration are well disposed on a plane surface.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

281
To review previous calibration results or when the last calibration was performed, a
calibration journal is available through Configure | Calibration journal |
Visualize.

282
HandySCAN 3D MAX Configuration
Purpose of configuration

Each surface has different reflection properties so it is important to adjust the configuration parameters
for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras' shutter times should be set according to the
surface type before scanning.

Automatic shutter

By default, the scanner parameter is set to Automatic shutter option. It allows the scanner to
automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection, regardless the
surface color. Clear the check box in the System panel to enable manual shutter adjustment.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~ 900 mm) and
press the trigger button.

l A distance meter on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part's surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

283
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Object
Preparation
Positioning target application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning.

High reflective targets must be used. They must be affixed randomly with a minimum distance of 150
mm between them. Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be applied to a flat
surface, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Target diameter
Depending of the working volume, both 6 mm or 12 mm can be used with the HandySCAN BLACK|Elite.
Near: Use 6 mm high reflective targets..
Standard: Use 6 mm or 12 mm high reflective targets.
Far: Use 12 mm high reflective targets.

Example of proper and improper target distribution

284
Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Highly reflective or transparent objects

In rare cases where data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or highly reflective
surface finishes, the object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and its environment should not move relative to one another.

285
HandySCAN 3D MAX Acquisition Rules
Scanning distance

The HandySCAN 3D MAX offers a large measurement volume. It allows fast acquisition of large surface
with a flexible stand-off distance.

HandySCAN 3D MAX HandySCAN MAX|Elite

Working volumes

Three working volume are available.

Working volume* Recommended stand-off distance Targets

Near 400 mm to 600 mm 6 mm
Standard 600 mm to 1300 mm 6 mm or 12 mm
Far 1300 mm to 2200 mm 12 mm

* Only standard working volume is available with the HandySCAN MAX.

Scale bar

The scale bar is detected during the scan. It is equipped with 12 mm targets and a QR code which
contain the scale bar information. During the scan, both ends of the scale bar must be seen as the QR
code square.

QR code has not been read yet.

QR code has been read (no visible square).
The line on the scale represents the visibility state of the bar.

Missing viewpoints.
Scale bar properly seen.

286
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Products

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite, HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and

HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited

287
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Laser
Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Laser 3: 450nm / avg < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 3.7

288
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 64 mW / < 1.76 mJ
2.2 ms / 37.5 Hz max / C6: 2.7
Laser 3: 450nm / avg < 14.7 mW / < 0.16 mJ
2.2 ms / 98 Hz max / C6: 2.3
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3, as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

289
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Hardware and
Components
Hardware

HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite and

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite Accu+ Kit*
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited

l HandySCAN
BLACK|Elite scanner

l 1 x case
l HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite or
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite
l 1 x rugged case
l 1 x 24 V power
Limited scanner l 2 x 1000 mm scale
supply
l 1 x case bars
l 1 x 8 m USB 3.0
l 1 x 24 V power supply
l 4 x magnetic
cable
supports
l 2 x positioning
l 1 x 8 m USB 3.0 cable
l 2 x high reflective
target boxes l 2 x positioning target boxes
positioning target
l 1 x user calibration l 1 x user calibration plate
boxes
plate l 1 x calibration certificate
l 1 x calibration
certificate

290
* The Accu+ Kit is an option available only with the HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite or
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Limited.

291
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Multifunction
Buttons
The scanner has buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode.
The trigger button is the central button (1) used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to
start, pause, or stop the acquisition process.

Trigger button (1) light colors

Color Scanner status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

Scanner

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Open / Exit scan mode -
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed -
speed decrease
Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed -
speed increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6* Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

292
During acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start / Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed -
speed decrease
Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed -
speed increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6 Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

* This feature allows toggling between the full laser grid and a 15% size grid.

Smart control options available

Use the Up (2) and Down (3) arrows to navigate the Smart Control options, and Trigger (1) to accept.

293
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Operating
Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN BLACK|Elite scanner uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images
into 3D measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

294
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the scanner.

5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

295
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Calibration
Acceptance Test
Creaform performs an acceptance test as per ASME B89.4.22, ISO 10360 and VDI/VDE 2634 standards
(depending on the product and generation) before the delivery of the system to certify that it meets the
specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment outside the scope and timing of
the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
As a reference, ISO 10360 standard recommends performing a reverification test periodically to validate that the
system complies with specified requirements. Creaform recommends performing this reverification annually,
however, the customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends performing an interim check between periodic verifications to
demonstrate the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. Notwithstanding the
standard used to deliver the acceptance test certificate, Creaform still recommends following this approach. The
customer must consider the interim check results on known artifacts to assess if a reverification test needs to be
executed at one of the Creaform service centers.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to 15 positions as
indicated by the scanner's shadow in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will show a message asking to update
the calibration file. Best practice suggests calibrating whenever environment
conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

Optimizing scanner calibration

296
 1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use Smart Control to launch calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements
at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and
bottom of the plate.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

Although it is possible to scan under sunlight, calibration might not be possible to

complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below 0.035 mm.

297
This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets' positions. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy1
specification using the user calibration plate's diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the

scanner. If the value is still above after recalibration, contact CreaformCustomer
Support for further investigation.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

Restore to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This action cannot
be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

298
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Configuration
Purpose of configuration

Each surface has different reflection properties so it is important to adjust the configuration parameters
for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras' shutter times should be set according to the
surface type before scanning.

Automatic shutter

By default, the scanner parameter is set to Automatic shutter option. It allows the scanner to
automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection, regardless the
surface color. Clear the check box in the System panel to enable manual shutter adjustment.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~ 300 mm) and
press the trigger button.

l A distance meter on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part's surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

299
HandySCAN BLACK|Elite and
HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite Object
Preparation
Positioning target application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning.

High reflective targets must be used. They must be affixed randomly with a minimum distance of 20 mm
between them. Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be applied to a flat
surface, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Target diameter
Depending of the working volume, both 3 mm or 6 mm can be used with the scanner.
Standard: Use 3 or 6 mm normal or high reflective targets.
Far: Use 6 mm normal or high reflective targets.

Example of proper and improper target distribution

300
Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Highly reflective or transparent objects

In rare cases where data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or highly reflective
surface finishes, the object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and its environment should not move relative to one another.

301
Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
The HandySCAN BLACK|Elite offers a large measurement volume.
It allows fast acquisition of large surface with a flexible stand-off distance.

Recommended stand-off
Working volume* Targets
distance
Standard 200 mm to 450 mm 3 mm or 6 mm
Far 300 mm to 750 mm 6 mm

* Only standard working volume is available with the HandySCAN BLACK|Elite.

Scale bar
The scale bar is detected during the scan using the Scale bar mode. It is equipped with 12 mm targets
and a QR code which contain the scale bar information. During the acquisition, both ends of the scale
bar must be seen as the QR code square.

Scale bar detection

QR code has not been read yet.
QR code has been read (no visible square).
The line on the scale represents the visibility state of the bar.

Missing viewpoints.
Scale bar properly seen.

302
Scale bar mode stand-off distance

l Scale bar required

l For target acquisition only

l 6 mm high reflective targets required

l Recommended stand-off distance: 200 mm to 1500 mm

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. Targets placed on the object or the environment
also act as distance meters (white targets are not detected). This feature can be deactivated in the
Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the
screen.

Target or laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

In Scan positioning targets mode, the distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the targets.

303
 In Scan surface mode, the laser line distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the surface.

LEDs on top of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

Scanner LEDs colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated to alert the user when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the
scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets
differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be lower with
greater angles of incidence.

304
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Single laser line mode

In this mode, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras to acquire information. It
allows capturing deeper data than with laser crosses and eases acquisition in areas harder to reach
(pockets and/or holes).
Single laser line mode is only available with the Standard working volume.

305
HandySCAN SILVER Products

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

HandySCAN SILVER and HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

306
HandySCAN SILVER Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

HandySCAN SILVER

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 4.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

307
HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 4.8
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 4
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

308
HandySCAN SILVER Hardware and
Components
Hardware

HandySCAN SILVER HandySCAN SILVER|Elite

l HandySCAN SILVER scanner l HandySCAN SILVER|Elite scanner

l 1 x case l 1 x case

l 1 x 24V power supply l 1 x 24V power supply

l 1 x 16 m USB 3.0 cable l 1 x 16 m USB 3.0 cable

l 2 x positioning target boxes l 2 x positioning target boxes

l 1 x user calibration plate l 1 x user calibration plate

l 1 x calibration certificate l 1 x calibration certificate

309
HandySCAN SILVER Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode.
The trigger button is the central button (1) used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to
start, pause, or stop the acquisition process.

Trigger button (1) light colors

Color Scanner status

Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Open or Exit scan
1 Trigger - -
mode
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed -
speed decrease
Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed -
speed increase
Toggle High
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6 Smart Control resolution enabled /
mode mode
disabled

310
During acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed -
speed decrease
Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed -
speed increase
Toggle High
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
6 Smart Control resolution enabled /
mode mode
disabled

* It allows toggling between the full laser grid and a 15% size grid.

Smart Control feature is available during the whole scan process and is designed to remotely access key
functions. Use the Up (2) and Down (3) arrows to navigate the Smart Control options, and Trigger (1) to
accept.

311
HandySCAN SILVER Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN SILVER scanner uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images into
3D measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

Surface acquisition: Real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

312
HandySCAN SILVER Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the scanner.

5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

313
HandySCAN SILVER Calibration

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. An annual factory calibration is recommended to keep the scanner at its
highest accuracy.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will show a message asking to update
the calibration file. See Software Updates and Licenses for more information.

Optimizing scanner calibration

1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.Alternatively, use Smart Control to launch calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements
at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and
bottom of the plate.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

314
 Although it is possible to scan under sunlight, calibration might not be possible to
complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below:

l 0.043 mm (HandySCAN SILVER)

l 0.035 mm (HandySCAN SILVER|Elite)

This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets' positions. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy1
specification using the user calibration plate's diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the

scanner. If the value is still above after recalibration, contact CreaformCustomer
Support for further investigation.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

315
Restore to the factory settings
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This action cannot
be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

316
HandySCAN SILVER Configuration
Purpose of configuration

Each surface has different reflection properties so it is important to adjust the configuration parameters
for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras' shutter times should be set according to the
surface type before scanning.

Automatic shutter

By default, the scanner parameter is set to Automatic shutter option. It allows the scanner to
automatically adjust its camera shutter speed while scanning for better surface detection, regardless the
surface color. Clear the check box in the System panel to enable manual shutter adjustment.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distance from the object (~300 mm) and
press the trigger button.

l A distance meter on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter time, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part's surface. If the part is smaller
than the laser grid pattern size, the slider Scanning area % can be
used to reduce the size of the pattern.

317
HandySCAN SILVER Object Preparation
Positioning target application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surfaces, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied to a flat surface, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper and improper target distribution

Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Highly reflective or transparent objects

In rare cases where data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or highly reflective
surface finishes, the object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

318
Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and its environment should not move relative to one another.

319
HandySCAN SILVER Acquisition Rules
Scanning distance

The HandySCAN SILVER offers a significant measurement volume. It allows fast acquisition of surface
with a flexible stand-off distance.

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. Targets placed on the object or the environment
also act as distance meters (white targets are not detected). This feature can be deactivated in the
Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the
screen.

Target or laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

320
 In Scan positioning targets mode, the distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the targets.

In Scan surface mode, the laser line distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the surface.

LEDs on top of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

Scanner LEDs colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated to alert the user when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the

321
scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets
differently.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be lower with
greater angles of incidence.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Scanning region
Select the Automatic scanning area check box in the System panel to automatically reduce the scanning
region size when the frame rate goes below 40 FPS. This allows maintaining an optimal acquisition frame

322
rate.

Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

323
HandySCAN BLACK Products

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

HandySCAN BLACK

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

324
HandySCAN BLACK Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

HandySCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 2.9
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

325
HandySCAN BLACK Hardware and
Components
Hardware

1. USB key (license and calibration files)

2. Power supply

3. USB 3.0 cable

4. Positioning targets

5. HandySCAN BLACK

326
 6. User calibration plate*

7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

8. Calibration certificate*

*The user calibration plate and the calibration certificate are located under the foam insert in the
protective case.

Components

1. Blue LEDs

2. Camera

3. Laser

327
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has 6 buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is the central button used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to start,
pause, or stop the acquisition process. Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to
navigate in the Smart Control.

Trigger button [1] light colors

Color Scanner status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

328
HandySCAN BLACK
Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed Decrease shutter speed -
decrease
Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed Increase shutter speed -
increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6* Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed Decrease shutter speed -
decrease
Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed Increase shutter speed -
increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6 Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

329
Smart Control
Smart Control is available during the whole scan process and is designed to remotely access key
functions such as Calibration, Configuration and Reset scan.

Scan mode Out of Scan mode

Button Scan mode Out of Scan mode More ...

1 More ... More ... Select

2 Navigate up
Finalize Increase resolution

3 Navigate down
Reset scan Decrease resolution

4 Full screen -
Calibration
*
5 -
Scanning area Auto. adjust
Enable / Disable high
6 Exit Exit
resolution

* This feature allows toggling between the full laser grid and a 15% size grid.

330
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images into 3D
measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

331
HandySCAN 700 pictured

332
HandySCAN BLACK Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee its physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any device.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the scanner.

333
5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

It is recommended to use the cable computer

support to prevent any disconnection issues
caused by yanking the cable.
Connect the support to the Ethernet port and
loop the USB cable before plugging it in.

Make sure the loop goes under the USB

connection on the computer to relieve stress.

334
HandySCAN BLACK Calibration
Acceptance Test
Creaform performs an acceptance test as per ASME B89.4.22, ISO 10360 and VDI/VDE 2634 standards
(depending on the product and generation) before the delivery of the system to certify that it meets the
specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment outside the scope and timing of
the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
As a reference, ISO 10360 standard recommends performing a reverification test periodically to validate that the
system complies with specified requirements. Creaform recommends performing this reverification annually,
however, the customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends performing an interim check between periodic verifications to
demonstrate the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. Notwithstanding the
standard used to deliver the acceptance test certificate, Creaform still recommends following this approach. The
customer must consider the interim check results on known artifacts to assess if a reverification test needs to be
executed at one of the Creaform service centers.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to 15 positions as
indicated by the scanner's shadow in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the user calibration
plate.

The calibration file is stored on the scanner. If the calibration file is newer on the
scanner, upon starting a new scan session, it will show a message asking to update
the calibration file. Best practice suggests calibrating whenever environment
conditions change, even if the update has been processed.

Optimizing scanner calibration

1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.Alternatively, use Smart Control to launch calibration.

335
2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Aim at the bar code for the first measurement, then at the center of the target pattern and
normal to the plate. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the scanner
shadow in the 3D viewer. Once eleven (11) measurements are taken, take 4 measurements
at an angle from the plate by slightly tilting the scanner towards the right, left, top and
bottom of the plate.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

Although it is possible to scan under sunlight, calibration might not be possible to

complete under direct sunlight as it can create expansion of the plate. Use a
canopy for faster calibration.

336
Expected results
According to the scanner used, the calibration value should be below 0.043 mm.
This value can be defined as the RMS error of the targets' positions. It represents the scanner stability
over time and should not vary by much. A higher value cannot be directly linked to a less accurate unit,
as long as it is within the limit value. The limit value is calculated based on the volumetric accuracy1
specification using the user calibration plate's diagonal length.

If the value obtained is above said values, it is recommended to recalibrate the

scanner. If the value is still above after recalibration, contact Creaform Customer
Support for further investigation.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

337
Restore to the factory settings
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This action cannot
be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

338
 Configuration

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines. The cameras' shutter times should be set
according to the surface type before scanning. Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times,
even without stopping the acquisition process, through the system panel located on the right side of the
3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distancefrom the object (~30 cm) and
press the trigger button.

l A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts having a uniform color/texture, click the Auto.adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicularly to the part surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part's surface.If the part
is smaller than the laser grid pattern size, the slider
Scanning area % can be used to reduce the size of the
pattern.

339
Distance meter [1] colors

Colors Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern [2] colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

340
HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

341
Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish to avoid affecting scan results. We
recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

342
HandySCAN BLACK Object Preparation
Positioning target application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surfaces, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied to a flat surface, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper and improper target distribution

Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

343
Highly reflective or transparent objects

In rare cases where data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or highly reflective
surface finishes, the object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and its environment should not move relative to one another.

344
HandySCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. Targets placed on the object or the environment
also act as distance meters (white targets are not detected). This feature can be deactivated in the
Display panel under General Display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the
screen.

Target or laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

345
 In Scan positioning targets mode, the distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the targets.

In Scan surface mode, the laser line distance meter is based on the distance
between the scanner and the surface.

LEDs on top of the scanner also indicate the distance from the object.

Scanner LEDs colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can
be activated to alert the user when tracking is lost. If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the

346
scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets
differently.

347
Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be lower with
greater angles of incidence.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Scanning region
Select the Automatic scanning area check box in the System panel to automatically reduce the scanning
region size when the frame rate goes below 40 FPS. This allows maintaining an optimal acquisition frame
rate.

Clipping objects

348
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

349
HandySCAN 700 Product

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The HandySCAN 3D
scanner self-positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement
repeatability and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real
geometry and allows easy visualization of surface defects.

HandySCAN 700|Elite

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

350
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser label

HandySCAN 700|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. <81.9 mW / < 2.7 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.2
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 21 mW / < 0.34 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 2.54
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

351
HandySCAN 700|Elite Hardware and
Components
Hardware

1. Software installer

2. Power supply

3. USB 3.0 cable

352
 4. Positioning targets

5. Scanner

6. User calibration plate

7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

Components

1. Blue LEDs

2. Camera

3. Laser

4. Camera

353
HandySCAN 700|Elite Multifunction
Buttons

HandySCAN 700|Elite

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Open or Exit scan
4 Trigger - -
mode

354
HandySCAN 700|Elite during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross /
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line

355
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images into 3D
measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

356
HandySCAN 700 pictured

357
HandySCAN 3D Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any devices.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Connect the USB cable to one of the USB 3 ports on the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB cable to the scanner.

358
5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

359
HandySCAN 700|Elite Calibration

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration.
Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend
doing so each time the scanner is used. An annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the
scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and
consists in bringing the scanner to 14 positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch configuration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions shown in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an
angle from it.

l For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red
indicator on the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it
goes up each time a measurement is successfully taken.

l For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to
match the red indicator on the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in
the green rectangle. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle

360
 in the middle of the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be
aligned with the green indicators.

5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration otherwise,

the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

Reset to the factory settings

361
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

362
HandySCAN 700|Elite Configuration

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines.The laser power and the cameras shutter speed
according to the surface type should be set before scanning.Configuration parameters can be accessed
at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the system panel located on the
right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch
configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to and at a stand-off of (~30 cm) from the object and
press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts that have a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button
and hold the scanner perpendicular to the part surface until the Optimizing
scanner parameters message disappears.

363
Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non- reflective surface. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.

364
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish to avoid affecting scan results. We
recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

365
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation
Positioning targets application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surface, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper target distribution:

Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective)

For better results, any shiny, black, transparent or reflective (like mirrors or metallic surfaces) object may
need to be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and/or its environment should not be moved.

366
HandySCAN 700|Elite Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, a meter displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs at the top of the scanner.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

367
LED indicators
Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

In Scan positioning targets and Scan surface modes, the distance meter is based on
the average of the distance between the scanner and the targets.

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object, either because the cameras can no
longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and
pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets differently.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be better with
greater angles of incidence.
Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser line.

368
HandySCAN 700 pictured

Single laser line mode

To capture data, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras. This mode allows
capturing deeper data than previously.
This method is only used for surfaces not acquired with laser crosses mode.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

369
HandySCAN 307 Products

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The HandySCAN 3D
scanner self-positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement
repeatability and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real
geometry and allows easy visualization of surface defects.

HandySCAN 307|Elite HandySCAN 307

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

370
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser label

HandySCAN 307|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. <81.9 mW / < 2.7 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.2
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

371
HandySCAN 307

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

372
HandySCAN 307 Hardware and
Components
Hardware

1. Software installer

2. Power supply

3. USB 3.0 cable

373
 4. Positioning targets

5. Scanner

6. User calibration plate

7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

Components

HandySCAN 307|Elite HandySCAN 307

1. Blue LEDs 1. Red LEDs

2. Camera 2. Camera

3. Laser 3. Laser

4. Camera 4. Camera

374
HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 307|Elite and HandySCAN 307

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Open or Exit scan
4 Trigger - -
mode

375
HandySCAN 307|Elite and HandySCAN 307 during acquisition
Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross /
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode Single line (HandySCAN
307|Elite only)

376
HandySCAN 307 Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images into 3D
measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

HandySCAN 307 pictured

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

377
HandySCAN 307 pictured

378
HandySCAN 307 Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any devices.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Connect the USB cable to one of the USB 3 ports on the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB cable to the scanner.

379
5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

380
HandySCAN 307 Calibration

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time the scanner is used. An annual
factory calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses
a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 14 positions
represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the user calibration plate's positioning targets.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch configuration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions shown in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an
angle from it.

l For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red
indicator on the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it
goes up each time a measurement is successfully taken.

l For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to
match the red indicator on the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in
the green rectangle. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle
in the middle of the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be
aligned with the green indicators.

5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

381
 Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration otherwise,

the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

Reset to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This action cannot
be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

382
HandySCAN 307 Configuration

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines.The laser intensity and the cameras' shutter speed
should be set according to the surface type before scanning. Configuration parameters can be accessed
at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the system panel located on the
right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch
configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to and at a stand-off of (~30 cm) from the object and
press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts that have a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button
and hold the scanner perpendicular to the part surface until the Optimizing
scanner parameters message disappears.

383
Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non- reflective surfaces.A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.

384
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish to avoid affecting scan results. We
recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

385
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation
Positioning targets application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surface, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper target distribution:

Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective)

For better results, any shiny, black, transparent or reflective (like mirrors or metallic surfaces) object may
need to be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and/or its environment should not be moved.

386
HandySCAN 307 Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, a meter displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs at the top of the scanner.

HandySCAN 307 pictured

387
LED indicators
Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

In Scan positioning targets and Scan surface modes, the distance meter is based on
the average of the distance between the scanner and the targets.

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object, either because the cameras can no
longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and
pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets differently.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be better with
greater angles of incidence.
Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser line.

388
HandySCAN 307 pictured

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

389
HandySCAN 3D Previous Generation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandySCAN 3D portable laser scanners use triangulation and binocular vision. The HandySCAN 3D
scanner self-positions itself to a unique dynamic referencing system which ensures high measurement
repeatability and accuracy. The resulting 3D scan is perfectly scaled to be representative of the real
geometry and allows easy visualization of surface defects.

HandySCAN 700 HandySCAN 300

390
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

391
HandySCAN 3D Hardware and
Components
Hardware

1. Software installer

2. Power supply

3. USB 3.0 cable

392
 4. Positioning targets

5. Scanner

6. User calibration plate

7. Target scraper (to remove targets)

Components

1. Red LEDs

2. Camera

3. Laser

4. Camera

393
HandySCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 300

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Open or Exit scan
4 Trigger - -
mode

HandySCAN 300 during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom

394
Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode -

395
HandySCAN 3D Operating Principles
Self-positioning 3D laser scanner
The HandySCAN 3D uses integrated photogrammetry algorithms to convert 2D images into 3D
measurements. It does not require an external positioning system, since the part positioning is
determined by triangulation (in real time). The triangulation feature provides the scanner's position in
volume and space.
The reference is related to the object, on which positioning targets are fixed. It is possible to move the
object during data acquisition.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

Surface acquisition: real-time surface rendering

The surface generation is automatic. The laser projected on the object is deformed depending of its
shape. While scanning, the cameras record the shape and proceed to calculation.

396
HandySCAN 700 pictured

397
HandySCAN 3D Connection
The scanner must be connected according to the following procedure to guarantee physical integrity
and to avoid damaging any devices.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Connect the USB cable to one of the USB 3 ports on the computer.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB cable to the scanner.

398
5. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

399
HandySCAN 3D Calibration

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration.
Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the initial measuring characteristics. We recommend
doing so each time the scanner is used. An annual factory calibration is also recommended to keep the
scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and
consists in bringing the scanner to 14 positions represented by the 3 green indicators (3D viewer).

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the user calibration
plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the System panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch configuration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a flat, stable surface with no reflective objects nearby.
Position the scanner approximately 15 cm (6 in) from the plate.

3. Press the trigger button to start.

4. Slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the positions shown in the viewer.
Once 10 measurements are taken perpendicular to the plate, take 4 measurements at an
angle from it.

l For the first 10 measurements, stay normal to the plate. Try to maintain the red
indicator on the top and left bars as centered as possible. As for the right bar, it
goes up each time a measurement is successfully taken.

l For the last 4 measurements, move the scanner at an angle from the plate to
match the red indicator on the top, left and right bars as centered as possible in
the green rectangle. The blue circle indicator must be aligned on the green circle

400
 in the middle of the user calibration plate as well the blue circle's cross must be
aligned with the green indicators.

5. Click OK to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

It is important to position the scanner lengthwise during the calibration otherwise,

the optimization will not work.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

Reset to the factory settings

401
It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager. This cannot be
undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize properly.

402
HandySCAN 3D Configuration

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for optimal detection of the laser lines. The laser power and the cameras' shutter speed
according to the surface type should be set before scanning. Configuration parameters can be accessed
at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process, through the system panel located on the
right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the System panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control (top button) to launch
configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to and at a stand-off of (~30 cm) from the object and
press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts that have a uniform color or texture, click the Auto. adjust button
and hold the scanner perpendicular to the part surface until the Optimizing
scanner parameters message disappears.

403
Laser grid pattern colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.60 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces. A flat black
surface usually requires a higher shutter value.

404
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish to avoid affecting scan results. We
recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

405
HandySCAN 3D Object Preparation
Positioning targets application and distribution

Each object must be prepared prior to scanning. Reflective targets must be affixed randomly with a
minimum distance of 20 mm (0.75 in) between them. For low curvature surface, the distance between
each target can reach 100 mm (4 in). Targets enable the system to position itself in space and must be
applied on flat surfaces, keeping at least 3 mm from the edges on every side.

Example of proper target distribution:

Clip cards

Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each clip card has positioning
targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip Cards
section.

Shiny objects (or black, transparent, reflective)

For better results, any shiny, black, transparent or reflective (like mirrors or metallic surfaces) object may
need to be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Small surfaces

It may be harder to achieve proper target distribution on small surfaces or objects. It is recommended to
distribute targets on a surface (preferably black or dark and matte) and to place the object on this
surface. While scanning, the object and/or its environment should not be moved.

406
HandySCAN 3D Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, a meter displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs at the top of the scanner.

HandySCAN 700 pictured

407
LED indicators
Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

In Scan positioning targets and Scan surface modes, the distance meter is based on
the average of the distance between the scanner and the targets.

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object, either because the cameras can no
longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, we recommend repositioning the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and
pressing the trigger again, or redistributing targets differently.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. However, the accuracy of the positioning model will be better with
greater angles of incidence.
Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser line.

408
Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

409
C-Track

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The C-Track is a dual-camera optical sensor providing high-accuracy measurements. This device is used
with the HandyPROBE, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R for production line purposes, such as
in the automotive, aerospace and manufacturing industries.
C-Track+ C-Track C-Track Third generation (G3)

410
Compatibility chart

HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE Next
Next+
G4 G3 G4

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN MetraSCAN MetraSCAN-R
MetraSCAN 3D
3D+ 3D-R BLACK+|Elite
MetraSCAN- MetraSCAN-R
BLACK 357 BLACK+
R BLACK BLACK+|Elite

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

411
C-Track Hardware and Components

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

Hardware and components

The C-Track includes 2 digital cameras surrounded by a set of LEDs. Lighting sensors enable measuring
reflectors in a specific volume of use (9.1 m3 or 16.6 m3 for C-Track and C-Track|Elite).

1. Tripod - 1 unit

2. Cables:

l USB 3.0 power cable - 1 unit

l Ethernet cable - 1 unit

3. Calibration bar - 1 unit

412
 4. Power supply and power cable - 1 unit each

5. Controller - 1 unit

6. C-Track - 1 unit

7. Dynamic referencing accessory kit - 1 unit

8. USB 3.0 to Ethernet adapter - 1 unit

9. Software installer USB key - 1 unit

10. Calibration certificate (under the case foam insert) - 1 unit

C-Track tripod

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The tripod adjusts the C-Track to multiple heights and angles.

To set up the C-Track on the tripod, see the Setup section.

413
Other components

1. Dynamic referencing accessory kit

2. Calibration bar

3. Dynamic referencing kit

4. Controller

5. USB to Ethernet adapter

6. Ethernet cable

7. Power supply

8. USB power cable

414
Visibility LED color codes

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Blue Red Yellow White

LED Off Green Yellow Red
(blink) (blink) (blink) (blink)

1 No power Power on - - - - - -

No power or
Stylus not
21 VXelements is Stylus seen - - - - -
seen
not started

Scanner
No power or
Scanner detection Scanner not
31 VXelements is - - - -
seen not at seen
not started
100%

C-Track ready Waiting

Not
4 (stable - - - Warming Blooming for QR
operating
temperature) code

Few targets Referential

Referential
5 No referential2 seen (not below - - - -
seen
optimal) 4 targets

1 If there is no stylus or scanner activated, LED #2 will mimic LED #3 behavior and

vice versa.
2 The minimum threshold 4 targets.

The target threshold (T) for LED #5 to be green is set according to this formula:

415
The absolute maximum is set to 8.

Examples

l If there are 4 targets in the reference, the LED turns green when 4 targets
are seen. It turns red otherwise.

l If there are 8 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 5 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 targets are seen and red otherwise.

l If there are 12 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 6 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 or 5 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

l If there are 40 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 8 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 to 7 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

416
C-Track Operating Principles
The C- Track cameras acquire the positioning targets simultaneously, which enables the software to
determine the reference targets position as well as its environment through triangulation.

Measurement volume

Flexibility volume: 16.6 m3

Accuracy volume: 9.1 m3

417
Positioning model
To reference the C-Track in space and to obtain accurate measurements, it is necessary to create a
positioning model with targets. The positioning model should cover the volume of the part to be
scanned or probed as much as possible.
To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).

Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel. The C-Track will
show the target count after the target acquisition process.

The last action performed sets the default action.

418
 Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

Swivel targets cannot be rotated when using this

Auto-detect targets method.

All previously acquired targets will be

discarded.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
Rectangle
Manually detect targets
l
Free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to import a positioning target model. The

dynamic referential is automatically activated.
Import C-Track
positioning targets 2. Select an existing positioning target model file
(.txt).

3. Click Open.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

419
Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

420
Reference positioning target statuses
The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

Referencing modes

The part can only be moved if the targets are placed on it.

Dynamic mode
Take measurements while moving the C-Track.

l A minimum of 4 visible targets is required (at least 8 are recommended). Set minimum value in
Configuration Options.

l Useful in a work environment exposed to vibrations.

l Eliminates potential handling errors.

l Makes it possible to move the C-Track and part quickly.

Hybrid mode
Allows the C-Track to continue taking accurate measurements when less than 4 targets are seen in the
reference model. At least one target must always be visible.

Static mode

Only available if the Allow measurements outside recommended conditions check

box is selected.

Allows moving the C-Track between measurements without having to continuously see the targets.

421
l Retrieve the C-Track position after moving to update the actual position.

l Make sure that enough targets belonging to the reference are visible when retrieving.

422
Detection statuses
The C-Track is connected and ready to be used.

The C-Track is not connected or not ready to be used. For details,

refer to the Troubleshooting section.

The C-Track is dazzled or too many targets are seen.

Positioning model is referenced. At least 4 targets must be seen.

Not referenced. Less than 4 targets seen. No target is detected.

423
C-Track Controller

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The controller provides information about all systems connected to it:

l C-Track

l HandyPROBE stylus

l MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

l MaxSHOT 3D

It enables to:

l Associate the stylus

l Set language and contrast

l Reinitialize the controller

l Track the status of all systems through the LEDs, etc.

The controller uses an Ethernet protocol to communicate with the computer that can be set up through
the IP Configurator tool.

Components
Connection

424
Display
Recovery procedure

425
Controller Components

Components
G4, G4+ controller

Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button: To go back to the

main menu.

4. Next button: To browse through

the menus.

5. OK button: To explore the sub-

menus.

6. LED statuses

Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT 3D)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Power supply

9. Device USB ports and cable

retainers

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

426
G3 controller (the front features the same characteristics as the G4, G4+)
Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT Next)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Main power supply

9. Hardware USB ports

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

To connect the controller

See C-Track Setup and Connection.

427
C-Track Setup and Connection

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up the C-Track

1. Take the tripod out of the case and unfold it.

2. Adjust the feet to the required height.

3. Turn the swivel in the desired direction.

4. Check the locking of the different tightening elements:

l Extensions of each foot.

l Swivel on the tripod.

l Locking screw for moving the swivel.

Tighten locks before each use and check the tightening of the snap-
on coupling bracket to make sure the tripod is stable.

5. Carefully take the sensor out of the case and install it on the tripod.

1. 3 mm Allen key

2. Socket wrench clip

428
 If needed, the C-Track may also be used without the tripod.

Handling rules

Use the tripod or the C-Track/tripod connection area to lift the system.

Avoid lifting the C-Track by holding the main structure.

To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer

Make sure that the devices are connected before turning ON the controller and
that the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the devices.

When connecting the cables:

429
 l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connectors.

1. Connect the power cable to the C-Track.

2. Connect the USB cables to the C-Track. Make sure to plug the USB connector vertically
into the C-Track instead of horizontally.

3. Connect the other end of the USB cables in any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

4. Connect the other end of the power cable in the controller.

430
 5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the controller and the computer.

6. Connect the controller power supply in an electrical outlet.

7. Turn the controller ON.

8. Wait for the controller to display READY before proceeding to calibration.

Lift the cable retainers to safely unplug the cables from the C-Track and controller.

To launch the IP configurator

The IP Configurator tool is used to configure network settings allowing communication between the
computer and the controller through an Ethernet protocol.

IP Configurator requires computer administrator rights to be run.

Using the USB to Ethernet adapter

Launch the IP Configurator each time the USB to Ethernet adapter is plugged into a
new USB port.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable into the USB to Ethernet adapter.

2. Insert the USB to Ethernet adapter into the computer USB port.

3. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

l The IP Configurator will browse for the USB to Ethernet adapter provided and automatically
selects the relevant network connection.

l The default IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

4. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings. A message box will
appear, confirming the connection was successful.

431
After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

Using the computer Ethernet port

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer Ethernet port.

2. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

3. If no adapter is detected, a warning message will appear (this is the normal behavior). Click
Ignore to move to the next step.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

4. Select the proper Ethernet network in the Connection drop-down menu. The default
IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

5. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings.

6. A warning message will appear. Click Yes to move to the next step. A message will appear
confirming the connection was successful.

After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

To restore the default network settings

Click Revert to original connection settings.

To manually revert to default Windows settings

In Windows 10 / Windows 11
Go to Microsoft Support for the procedure.

432
Controller Display

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Statuses
The controller status is displayed on the LCD panel.
Use the Menus button to browse through the menus, the OK button to explore the sub-menus, and the
Back button to go back to the previous menu.
The LEDs indicate the statuses of the system interactions with its components.
See Components section for more information.

433
Controller LED color codes

The C-Track
is connected
to the
The C-Track No image
controller, The C-Track The C-Track is is warming detected
the is NOT
synchronizing up to its by the
C-Track calibration connected
with the operating cameras.
date is still to the
controller. temperature Calibration
valid and controller.
range. is too old.
the system
is ready to
be used.

The
controller is
The
NOT The C-Track is
controller is
plugged in plugged in synchronizing
the the with the
Sync - -
computer computer controller
and and/or and the
VXelements
is running. VXelements computer.
is NOT
running.

The blinking
LED
confirms
data
Data transmission - - - -
between the
controller
and the
devices.
The probe
The probe is
is NOT
activated
activated
and
HandyPROBE and/or NOT - - -
associated
associated
with the
with the
controller.
controller.

434
 The scanner
The scanner is NOT
is connected
Scanner connected - - -
to the
controller. to the
controller.

The
accessory is
Accessory connected - - - -
to the
controller.

435
Menus
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the C-Track connected to the controller.

Ready: The C-Track is initialized and ready for measurement.
No C-Track: The C-Track is not detected by the controller.
[X] (Cause): The C-Track is detected, but not yet operational.

l Analysis: The C-Track is analyzing.

l Calib. too old: The calibration is outdated and must be carried out
again.
1 C-TRACK
l Too cold/warm: The C-Track is operating outside the recommended
temperature range.

The controller may become hot by prolonged use

especially in high temperature.

l Unstable temp.: The temperature has changed and must stabilize

before resuming the measurement.

Displays the current frame rate of the C-Track.

l 58.0/58.0/58.0

C-TRACK/FPS l C-Track controller processing rate FPS / C-Track left camera

1.1 (Frame Per
Second) FPS / C-Track right camera FPS.

l It should be near 58 frames per second for the HandyPROBE and 58

frames per second for the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R.

436
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the HandyPROBE connected to the controller.

Probe activated: The HandyPROBE is activated and ready for measurement.
Click probe button: The HandyPROBE is not yet activated and a button on the
2 PROBE probe should be pressed to activate it.

When first activating the HandyPROBE with a new

controller, it must be associated with the controller (see
2.2 Probe/Assoc.).

2.1 PROBE/BATT. Shows the stylus battery level.

Allows manually associating HandyPROBE stylus to the controller.

[OK] to associate: Press the OK button to launch the association process.
2.2 PROBE/ASSOC.
Press probe buttons: Press and hold the 2 outer buttons of the HandyPROBE
to pair the device. When releasing them, a beep will be emitted to confirm the
association has worked.

Allows controller to scan available frequency for stylus communication.

[OK] to analyze: Press the OK button to launch the analysis process.

l Goes to menu 2.4 automatically after analysis is completed.

l The channel with the larger absolute value should be chosen by

default.

Probe/Analyze
2.3 A value of - 78 dB shows less interference than a value of -
Channels
60 dB.

Default channel for HandyPROBE

Default channel Channel range

G3 4 1-12

G4 16 1-16

437
# Menu Contents

Selects a communication channel manually.

PROBE/CHAN
l A probe association is required afterwards.
2.4
NEL

It is always best to use the proposed channel.

Shows the status of the scanner connected to the controller.

Ready: The scanner is connected and ready to use.

3 SCANNER Disconnected: No scanner currently connected.

Scanning: The scan is currently in progress.
Stopping: The scan is currently stopping.

RESET Allows resetting the servers without rebooting the controller.

4
SERVERS
Press the OK button to reset the servers.
5 OPTIONS

#SFW Displays the current VXelements software version installed on the controller. It
5.1
VERSION should match the VXelements version installed on the computer.

Displays the current camera count for devices detected by the controller (sum
of all cameras mounted per device connected).
Device connected to the controller Camera count

C-Track 2
5.2 NB DEVICES
HandyPROBE 0

MetraSCAN 3D 2

MetraSCAN 3D-R 4

MaxSHOT Next 1

5.3 LANGUAGE Changes the controller display language (English or French).

Displays the controller current IP address.

l It is recommended to keep the default settings (200.200.200.2).

5.4 IP ADDRESS
l With a C-Link network, the IP addresses must be changed. For details,
see the C-Link Configuration section.

LCD
5.5 Indicates the contrast of the LCD panel on a scale of 1 to 5.
CONTRAST

438
# Menu Contents
HDW VERSION
5.6 Displays the current hardware version installed on the controller.

439
Controller Recovery

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This function allows creating a USB key which can be used when a recovery is required. This manual
process will update the controller’s software to be the same as the VXelements version. For details, see
the controller recovery procedure.

A controller recovery should be the last solution tried when there seems to be an
issue with a C- Track, HandyPROBE stylus, MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D- R or
MaxSHOT Next (remote). During this process, a clean version of VXelements will be
reinstalled on the controller to make it up and running.

To perform a controller recovery

1. Plug an empty USB flash drive into the computer.

2. Open VXelements with a C-Track activated in the Product Manager.

3. Go to Configure | C-Track | Create recovery key.

4. In VXelements – Create Recovery Key dialog box, select the USB flash drive plugged (step
1).

5. Accept the formatting process. A message will appear indicating that the content will be
deleted.

6. Exit VXelements and unplug the USB flash drive.

7. Plug the USB flash drive in one of the top ports behind the controller and start the
controller (if not already done).

8. A message asking if a controller recovery is required appears on the LCD panel. Press the
OK button. The controller will display Process on the LCD screen.

9. Unplug the USB flash drive when asked or after the reboot of the controller.

440
C-Track Setup and Connection

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up the C-Track

1. Take the tripod out of the case and unfold it.

2. Adjust the feet to the required height.

3. Turn the swivel in the desired direction.

4. Check the locking of the different tightening elements:

l Extensions of each foot.

l Swivel on the tripod.

l Locking screw for moving the swivel.

Tighten locks before each use and check the tightening of the snap-
on coupling bracket to make sure the tripod is stable.

5. Carefully take the sensor out of the case and install it on the tripod.

1. 3 mm Allen key

2. Socket wrench clip

441
 If needed, the C-Track may also be used without the tripod.

Handling rules

Use the tripod or the C-Track/tripod connection area to lift the system.

Avoid lifting the C-Track by holding the main structure.

To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer

Make sure that the devices are connected before turning ON the controller and
that the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the devices.

When connecting the cables:

442
 l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connectors.

1. Connect the power cable to the C-Track.

2. Connect the USB cables to the C-Track. Make sure to plug the USB connector vertically
into the C-Track instead of horizontally.

3. Connect the other end of the USB cables in any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

4. Connect the other end of the power cable in the controller.

443
 5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the controller and the computer.

6. Connect the controller power supply in an electrical outlet.

7. Turn the controller ON.

8. Wait for the controller to display READY before proceeding to calibration.

Lift the cable retainers to safely unplug the cables from the C-Track and controller.

To launch the IP configurator

The IP Configurator tool is used to configure network settings allowing communication between the
computer and the controller through an Ethernet protocol.

IP Configurator requires computer administrator rights to be run.

Using the USB to Ethernet adapter

Launch the IP Configurator each time the USB to Ethernet adapter is plugged into a
new USB port.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable into the USB to Ethernet adapter.

2. Insert the USB to Ethernet adapter into the computer USB port.

3. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

l The IP Configurator will browse for the USB to Ethernet adapter provided and automatically
selects the relevant network connection.

l The default IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

4. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings. A message box will
appear, confirming the connection was successful.

444
After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

Using the computer Ethernet port

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer Ethernet port.

2. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

3. If no adapter is detected, a warning message will appear (this is the normal behavior). Click
Ignore to move to the next step.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

4. Select the proper Ethernet network in the Connection drop-down menu. The default
IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

5. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings.

6. A warning message will appear. Click Yes to move to the next step. A message will appear
confirming the connection was successful.

After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

To restore the default network settings

Click Revert to original connection settings.

To manually revert to default Windows settings

In Windows 10 / Windows 11
Go to Microsoft Support for the procedure.

445
Environment Compensation (EC)

Tools | Environment compensation

Overview
The Environment compensation (EC) function applies only to the C-Track and C-Track|Elite (generation 3
and up).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect, VXscan-R modules, and in partner plug-ins.
The EC works in conjunction with the thermal and gravity compensation models by measuring the C-
Track reference artifact many times per second. It adjusts internal parameters to compensate in order to
maintain volumetric performance in unstable environments.
The EC function enhances the system stabilization in shop- floor environment by maintaining the
performance of the system and it can also allow to bypass the warming time.

l To use the EC, the C-Track calibration must be valid (still up-to-date, device not
shocked, etc.)

l The EC does not replace the C-Track calibration step when it is required.

l The EC function is not activated by default.

When to activate the EC

The EC must be used only when the C-Track calibration is not required.

This function performs very well in any uncontrolled environment (e.g. temperature shifts) such as in a
shop-floor area.
There are no significant benefits of using the EC in a controlled room environment such as a laboratory.
Controlled room environment (lab)

446
 l The use of the EC is not required

l It will not add significant benefits unless the C-Track or the environment are not as
stable as expected.

Uncontrolled room environment (shop-floor area)

l The use of the EC is recommended

l It will help to keep the system within the specifications in unstable environments.

Hardware and components

1. EC light tripod

2. Calibration bar clamp

To install the calibration bar on the tripod

1. Press both sides of the clamp to insert the bar.

2. Place the calibration bar QR code facing the exterior.

447
Volume

The EC volume measures approximately 9 m3.

It is located along the Z axis from 2000 to 3500 mm.

To display the volume

Select Show C-Track volume and Show environment compensation volume in the C-Track scene pane of
the Display panel.

To configure the EC artifact

These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

C-Track calibration bar:

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bar:

l This option will use a MaxSHOT 3D scale bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Automated Quality Control products or custom applications.

448
 To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required to add the MaxSHOT 3D scale

bar. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

To locate the EC artifact

1. In the Display panel, open the C-Track Scene pane.

2. Select Show environment compensation volume option.

Field of view

l The bar is seen by the C-Track.

l Within the volume limit.

l Good orientation of the bar.

449
 l The bar is not seen by the C-Track.

l Too close of the volume limit.

l Bad orientation of the bar.

To correct the orientation, use the corrections arrows. They show the correction
direction to apply to the calibration bar from the C-Track point of view, regardless
of the bar orientation.

l Yellow arrows: near the target pose.

l Red arrows: too far from the target pose.

To activate the EC

If a C-Track calibration is required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Wait for C-Track warm-up completion (15 to 20 minutes).

4. Perform a C-Track calibration.

5. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

6. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. A pop-up message will appear to show the selection made in the interface
(MaxSHOT 3D or C-Track). Ensure to validate the information displayed against set
configuration parameters.

450
 7. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

8. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

9. The system is ready to use.

If a C-Track calibration is not required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

4. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. It can be activated as soon as the Analyzing phase is done, and Warming phase is
shown on the controller display panel. About 2 minutes are required.

Activating the EC function skips the warm-up time and the C-Track calibration only
if the calibration is not required.

5. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

The allowed bar orientation is along the C-Track X or Y axis.

6. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

7. The system is ready to use.

451
To deactivate the EC

l It is not recommended to deactivate the EC after it has been started. However in

such a case, a message is displayed indicating that the system will continue to
operate but it will use the last manual C-Track calibration performed.

l The C-Track will return to the calibration state it was in before the activation of the
EC.

Click to deactivate the EC.

Statuses displayed in the system panel

Artifact status Condition Result

l Seen by the C-Track

l Located within the EC

l Compensation process is
Artifact visible volume
running
l Oriented with good
angle

452
 Artifact status Condition Result

l Compensation process is
paused

l Last compensation is used

l Not seen by the C-
l Temperature and orientation
Track
changes monitored:
Artifact non
l Not located within the
visible l The temperature may
EC volume
not change by more
l Not oriented with good
than 0.5°C
angle
l The C-Track angle
changed by more
than 2.5°

l Compensation process is
Artifact is paused
moving
l Moving too fast
l Last compensation is used

The C-Track calibration is compensated only when the artifact is visible and the EC
ready conditions are met at the same time.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible

l The temperature change is monitored.

l The C-Track orientation change within ± 45° is monitored.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast

l The temperature and the C-Track orientation will be monitored.

453
EC status Condition

l Artifact is visible (see artifact statuses).

Analyzing
l Analyzing for Environment compensation.

Ready l EC analysis completed and ready to be used.

l EC analysis is not running when VE is activated.

Paused
l The last compensation is used.

l Artifact is not visible. Show the EC artifact.

Waiting for Not visible and the temperature changed by

environment more than 0.5°.
compensation

Not visible and the C-Track angle change by

more than 2.5°.

454
C-Track Calibration

General information
While performing a C-Track calibration with the calibration bar, VXelements adjusts many internal C-
Track parameters to optimize its performance.
A thermal and gravity compensation model is used to maintain the system within specifications
according to the C-Track orientation and the temperature changes.
The thermal compensation model is only activated after the warm-up time completion as the C-Track
internal components temperature must be stable.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

Information displayed in the 3D viewer

1. Front view

2. Top view

3. Progress indicator

455
When to perform the calibration
The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

l After the C-Track has been placed back in its case and carried to another location (not
applicable to the CUBE-R).

l After the C-Track has traveled by car or by plane.

l After the system has been shipped to a customer location.

Skipping this step will impair the system performance.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will

456
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Calibration with Quality Control products

Calibration

457
Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

For the Calibrate all workflow, click here.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

458
3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

The orientation of the C-Track cannot be changed after having started the
calibration process. Otherwise, the tolerance is exceeded and a message appears
asking to reposition the C-Track. It will be impossible to continue the calibration,
the C-Track will need to be placed back to the initial position to complete the
calibration process.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(*.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

459
 l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy1 is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

460
Calibrate all
The Calibrate all function allows you to calibrate the C-Track and all devices connected to it, one after
the other.

l Only devices connected and ready to be used will be part of the Calibrate all
process.

l The C-Track calibration is strongly recommended. It should be done first and cannot
be skipped if the C-Track is not valid anymore.

l To be detected, the HandyPROBE must be activated prior to starting its calibration

process.

l The HandyPROBE or scanner calibration can be skipped during the process using
the Next or Previous button.

To calibrate all

1. Click .

2. The calibration workflow window will open.

3. Click in the progress bar to calibrate the C-Track first.

4. Calibrate the C-Track.

5. Click for the next step.

6. Click the calibration button displayed in the progress bar to calibrate the next device.

7. Calibrate the device selected.

8. Click for the next step.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for each device displayed in the progress bar.

10. Click Accept.

To Reset the calibration or Suspend the calibration, click the corresponding button.

To reset to the factory settings

It is possible to reset the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

461
 1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

Calibration with R-Series products

Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

1. Integration (VXelements and R-Series I/O Module interfaces)

This mode teaches the C-Track calibration trajectory in the robot teach pendant. The C-Track calibration
teaching process can be done through VXelements software or I/O Module interface.

2. Execution (R-Series I/O Module interface)

This mode executes the calibration program using R- Series I/O Module interface. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant.

462
 3. Manual (VXelements interface)

This mode manually calibrates the C- Track using VXelements in the same way as in the standard
MetraSCAN 3D handheld applications.

C-Track robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration process of the C-Track in R-Series applications differs from its manual calibration.
It requires to reach 113 calibration bar positions in a smaller volume than that of the manual calibration
and following 3 ordered sub-trajectories:

1. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

2. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis

3. 49 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face up (toward the C-Track’s -Y axis) or down (toward the C-Track’s +Y axis).

463
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis
The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face left (toward the C-Track’s -X axis) or right (toward the C-Track’s +Z axis).

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

The 45° targets must face the C-Track.

The flat targets:

l Must face down (toward the C-Track +Y axis) for positions below the C-Track baseline Y > 0

l Must face up (toward the C-Track -Y axis) for positions above the C-Track baseline Y < 0

464
Either configuration can be selected for positions aligned to the C-Track baseline (Y = 0). An angle θ can
be added to the bar orientation given that all targets fit within the approved zone (defined in green).
This will help minimize occlusion of the targets.

To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset)

Three robot calibration trajectory options are available. The trajectories will all be the same but the
distance (Z offset) from the C-Track can be configured. These distances are in relation to the center of
the calibration zone.

l 2600 mm

l 3100 mm

l 3600 mm

465
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The C-Track calibration bar TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate
system. The center of this coordinate system is a translation of the robot flange coordinate system. It is
located along the bar axis (Z+ orientation), the middle of the QR code define the Z origin and the normal
of the QR code define the -Y.
Define the TCP using the applicable annex of the Calibration certificate. Use the values as is without any
modification.

Autocalibration

l A scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) is required for autocalibration. This file is
available on the Customer Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.
l If you fail to provide the file needed, a message error will be displayed in the
interface (Command Window) or by the third-party software.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process using the relevant program.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

466
3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process. The ends of the calibration bar need to be positioned onto the yellow
squares. The orientation of the bar also needs to be changed following the visual
indication. A position is validated when the squares at the ends of the calibration bar turn
green. The progress indicator will increase.

The pose is skipped if the bar is not seen within 2 seconds of the C- Track
calibration - Accept action execution. This will trigger a warning message after
the calibration, which must be controlled by an operator.

4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

467
Manual calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

468
Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

469
When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

470
To reset to the factory settings

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

It is possible to restore the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

471
C-Track System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | Options | C-Track (or click in the system panel).

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated.

To set parameters
C-Track volume
This function allows changing the working volume.

l 16.6 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

472
Environment compensation
Modes

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT scale bar

For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Volume extension
This function allows configuring a scaling reference bar (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale
bar) with the VE function.
Scaling modes

l None

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT 3D scale bars

It is also possible to add or remove a scale bar.

For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions

Select to allow measurements even if the conditions are not ideal if:

l the operating temperature has not been reached

l the analysis period is not completed

l the temperature varies more than 10°C from the temperature recorded at calibration time.

When selected:

l Enable C-Track functions

l C-Track status bar turns yellow to show this state

l Allows the use of the Static referencing mode

473
This check box should not be selected unless the consequences it will have on
measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.

474
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The QR code sticker applied to the middle of the C- Track calibration bar contains all the relevant
information.

l Select the check box to allow the C-Track to detect the code and extract the information
needed (serial number and lengths).

This is a mandatory step in the calibration process. The reading will be impossible if
the QR code sticker is dirty or damaged.

l If the check box is cleared and the Calibration bar drop-down in the system panel does not
display the right serial number, click Add... and browse to choose the right bar's calibration bar
file (*.sbcf). Otherwise, select the *.sbcf manually right after launching the calibration process.

Play sound when volume extension is lost

This option is enabled by default.

The sound of the C-Track volume extension function is activated.

A beep is emitted when the C-Track cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
To disable this function, clear the check box.

Use original calibration data

See To reset to the factory settings.

Calibration expiration (days)

The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated. The default value is 5 days.

475
C-Track Object Preparation
The adequate target positioning is an element to guarantee accuracy of the measurement.

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

476
Part setup examples
Small parts

Medium parts

Large parts

477
Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated. See Tilt Compensation section.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

Volume extension

l Start to acquire data in the middle of the total volume of the part.

l Move to get a good overlapping of the part.

360° measurement
To perform a 360° inspection without a MaxSHOT Next, it is recommended to:

1. Put the targets on the part using enough swivel targets.

2. Move the C-Track.

3. Swivel the targets.

The base of the targets should not move and the targets should
remain in contact with their bases.

478
4. Detect the targets on the other side of the part.

5. Remove the swivel targets and do not swivel them back.

The rotation axis of these targets is designed in their very middle. Rotating the
targets back and forth could cause unwanted uncertainty.

479
Volume Extension (VE)

Tools | Volume extension

Overview
The Volume extension (VE) function allows continuously acquiring targets while moving the C-Track
around or along the part using the photogrammetry concept. This will generate a better positioning
target model accuracy than the basic detection methods (Auto-detect targets and Manually detect
targets functions).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect modules, and in partner plug-ins (C-Track and C-Track|Elite
generation 3 and up).

It is recommended to calibrate the C-Track before using the VE function for it to

work properly and achieve a certain level of accuracy.

Positioning target setup

The setup must follow the same approach as before:

l Spread sufficient positioning targets all around the part to cover X, Y and Z directions (≥ 6 in
each frame).

l Distribute favoring the volume extension (≥ 6 overlapping targets between frames).

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

480
 Scaling reference bars, (C-Track calibration bars, or MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can
be used to enhance the volumetric performance of the VE.)

The use of coded targets is still allowed (if already in place for fixed setups), but it
will not generate any volumetric performance benefits.

Acquisition rules

Make sure to apply the C-Track handling rules shown previously.

l It is mandatory to continue tracking the targets while moving the C-Track.

l Aim at the center of the part while moving around it.

l Move the C-Track along or around the part with a minimum displacement of 0.5 m.

l Keep a good standoff distance from the targets.

l When performing VE on a shiny part, some unwanted data (misidentified as targets) might be
acquired. This might have no impact or it could also entirely prevent the operation. To minimize
this behavior, ensure acquiring targets by positioning the C- Track at a slight angle to the
surface and as far from it as possible.

l The ambient temperature must not vary by more than ±2°C during the acquisition process.

l The Pitch and Roll angles cannot be inclined by more than ±10°. The current position at VE start
defines the reference angles for the threshold calculation.

l All positioning targets must be seen at different positions and angles.

l If the scaling mode is C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT scale bar, at least 1 scaling reference
bar must be seen during the VE acquisition to scale the model using a scaling reference bar.

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

481
l Rotation using the tripod pivot will lead to VE fail.

l The EC function will be paused during VE acquisition (if previously activated).

482
Scaling mode configuration
These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

None (no scaling reference bar):

l This option will use the C-Track calibration performed previously.

l Better positioning target model accuracy will be achieved using the previously performed C-
Track calibration (higher than with the Auto- detect targets and Manually detect targets
functions).

l For use in a controlled environment. Also suitable for demonstration purposes.

C-Track calibration bar:

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar is seen during
the acquisition process.

l If a C-Track calibration has not been performed previously, an error message will appear.

l In this case, the VE will be stopped.

l Calibrating the C-Track will fix the issue.

l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bars:

l This option will use the MaxSHOT 3D scale bars as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar(s) is(are) seen
during the acquisition process.

l Up to 4 MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can be added and configured.

483
 l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Automated Quality Control products or custom
applications.

To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required for each MaxSHOT 3D scale bar
to be added. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

8. Repeat the process to add more bars.

To remove a scale bar from the window, select it and click Remove.

Acquisition

1. Place the C-Track in front of the part.

2. If a scaling reference bar is used, place it so the C-Track sees it during the VE acquisition
process.

3. To start the acquisition, click in the system panel or go to Tools | Volume extension.

4. Move the C-Track along the part. The tracking status and target count (all targets seen by
the C-Track cameras) are displayed in the system panel.

484
 Click Cancel to cancel the VE at any time. The previous state will be restored.

If a positioning target model exists, a warning message will notify that the newly
acquired model will replace the existing one. The previous model will be lost.

If the tracking is lost

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to return to a previously known position to resume the acquisition process.

If the C-Track Pitch and Roll angles are inclined by more than ±10°

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to move back within the angle range to resume the acquisition process.

If the scaling mode is set to C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar and no scaling
reference bar is detected during the VE acquisition

l A warning message will appear.

l The VE will be performed as if the None scaling mode had been set.

5. Click Finalize to stop the acquisition. Target count at the end of the process will be
different than the total count shown during the acquisition.

l If the acquisition passes: A progress window appears showing the acquisition

completion level. No confirmation message will be displayed at the end. Dynamic

485
 tracking is activated and the model is ready to use.

l If the acquisition fails: An error message appears. Click Retry to reattempt the
acquisition or Cancel to exit the VE acquisition mode and return to the previous
state.

Volume extension details

To view the information related to the acquisition performed and the bars seen, select Positioning under
the scene1 node in the Navigation pane. The details appear in the Reference details pane.
Details displayed depend on the scaling mode set and the number of scaling reference bars used and
seen during the acquisition process.

Detail Description
Reference source Reference model acquisition method.
Target count Number of positioning targets included in the final model.
Coded target count Number of coded targets included in the final model.
3D uncertainty: Mean uncertainty on the measured position of targets
3D uncertainty
(standard deviation).

Evaluation of the difference between the scaled measured lengths and

the reference lengths.
The table shows the global scaling deviation and all the scaling
distances for each bar used.
The global scaling represents the highest absolute value of all the
scaling distances.
Scaling deviation*

If 2 bars were configured and 1 bar was seen

during the acquisition process, the Reference
details pane shows information relative to the bar
seen. The other information will be replaced by
N/A and will not be taken into account for the
calculation.

* This detail will not appear if the None scaling mode is set.

1Option which allows displaying different elements in the 3D viewer depending on the device connected.

486
C-Track Tilt Compensation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This feature compensates for the angles of inclination of the C-Track during measurement.

C-Track rotations
The accuracy of the C-Track takes Pitch and Roll into consideration.

Pitch Roll

Rotation around the X-axis of the C-Track Rotation around the Z-axis of the C-Track

Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees

The tilt compensation is active, as long as the C- Track remains within - 45 to +45 degrees during
measurement.

When exceeding these angles during measurement, the C-Track status switches to
Roll out of range in the system panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be
inaccurate.

487
Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees
The C-Track must be calibrated using the needed angle. The tilt compensation will be active if the C-
Track remains within ±2 degrees from the angle used during the calibration process.

When exceeding ±2 degrees, the C-Track status switches to Roll out of range in the system
panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be inaccurate.

488
C-Link Product

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Overview
The C-Link function allows networking up to 4 C-Track sensors to position a HandyPROBE system or to
scan with a compatible scanner. The synchronization is applied to each C-Track controller to allow the
measurement on all sensors simultaneously.
Using the C-Link functionality does not affect the individual performance of each device used in the
network.
The communication between C-Track controllers and the computer is provided by an Ethernet TCP/IP
switch.

489
System requirements
The C-Link function requires same requirements as VXelements.

C-Link typical workflow

Step Description
Connection
1
l Connect the equipment

Hardware configuration
2
l Configure the IP address of the controllers

Software configuration

l Activate the products through the Product Manager

3
l Enable the C-Link network

l Configure the C-Link network in VXelements

Calibrate

4 l C-Tracks

l Other devices (HandyPROBE Next, MetraSCAN 3D).

Prepare the working environment

5 l Prepare the part

l Put the positioning targets on the part

Acquire data

6 l Acquisition of the positioning model

l Part measurement

490
C-Link Hardware and Components

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Hardware

C-Link kit components

All components are provided in a carrying case.

1. Ethernet and C-Link cables

l 2 X 10 m Ethernet cables

l 2 X 20 m Ethernet cables

l 3 X 10 m C-Link cables

2. Power supply 5V and power supply adapter kit

491
3. 5-port 10/100 Ethernet switch

4. Connection diagram

492
C-Link Connection

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

To connect a C-Track
See C-Track Setup and Connection.
Connection diagram

1. Laptop with
VXelements

2. Ethernet
switch

3. C-Track
controller

4. Ethernet
cable

5. C-Link cable

A. For 3rd C-Track

B. For 4th C-Track

To connect the hardware

Back of the controller 1. Ethernet port

2. Ethernet cable

3. Ethernet switch

4. C-Link In port and external trigger (4 pins

cable)

5. C-Link Out port (six pins cable)

493
Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

The computer and all the controllers must be connected to the Ethernet switch. The Ethernet cables can
be connected to the Ethernet switch in any port and in any order.

1. Plug an Ethernet cable from the computer into the any available Ethernet switch port.

2. Plug a USB cable form the first C-Track to its controller (primary).

3. Plug an Ethernet cable from the first controller into any available Ethernet switch port.

4. Connect the controller power supply to an electrical source and then to the first controller.

5. Repeat step 2 to 4 for each C-Track of the C-Link network.

6. Link the C-Track primary controller to the first secondary controller by plugging a C-Link
cable from the primary controller C-Link Out port to the first secondary controller C-Link In
port.

7. If required, link the first secondary controller to the second secondary controller by
plugging a C-Link cable from the first secondary controller C-Link Out port to the second
secondary C-Link In port and so on for a third secondary controller.

8. Power ON all the C-Track controllers.

494
C-Link Calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Handle the scale bar carefully as it is fragile.

l Do not touch reflective targets as the damaged targets are not recognized by the C-
Track.

l During the set-up, make sure that no light or sun is pointing directly at the cameras.

l Make sure everything else is plugged in before starting the controller.

To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode

C- Tracks are calibrated as usual but using the same calibration bar. Files are available online on
Creaform Customer Portal and are provided with the C-Tracks.

1. Choose the calibration bar.

2. Select the check box depending on how many C-Tracks will be calibrated.

3. Set a calibration volume.

4. Calibrate the C-Tracks in order from the primary to the secondaries.

The calibrations are done sequentially. Once the calibration is accepted, the calibration interface will
automatically move on to the next C-Track.

All C-Tracks must have the same model but can be calibrated using different
volumes.

To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The HandyPROBE Next stylus is by default associated to the primary C-Track.

495
The HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the
C-Link network.
The HandyPROBE must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.
The MetraSCAN 3D and the artifact must remain visible to the C-Track throughout the entire calibration
process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R

The MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the C-Link network.
The user calibration plate must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

496
C-Link Configuration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Make sure to leave a 10-cm gap around and on top of the controller to allow for
proper air circulation and heat flow.

l Do not stack the controllers one of top of the other.

To get your C-Link system running

1. Set up each C-Track (do not connect the controller to the computer).

2. Follow the connection diagram.

3. Set the IP address of the computer to 200.200.200.1 using the IP Configurator.

4. Configure the IP address of each controller.

5. Configure in the Product Manager.

6. Enable and configure the C-Link network.

One port should remain available on each controller. Use the provided hub when
needed.

To configure the IP address of the controllers

1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

497
 1. On the first secondary controller, use the Next button (4), select menu 5 (Options) and
press OK button.

2. Use the Next button and select menu 5.4 (IP address) and press OK button.

3. Press Next button until the last digit of the IP address is blinking.

4. Press OK button to change the last digit.

5. Press the Next button once to reach the arrow sign.

6. Press OK button to confirm the IP address.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each secondary controller, making sure that each controller has a
unique IP address.

Recommended configuration
Controller IP address
#1 (primary) 200.200.200.2 (default setting)
#2 200.200.200.3
#3 200.200.200.4
#4 200.200.200.5

Remember those settings. They must match the configuration of VXelements.

Default configuration

l Controller # 1 (primary): 200.200.200.2

l Controller # 2: 200.200.200.3

l Controller # 3: 200.200.200.4

l Controller # 4: 200.200.200.5

To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager

498
 1. Open the VXelements Product Manager (Configure | Product manager).

2. Select the active product from the list or add a new one.

l The primary C-Track must be set as Active.

l Other C-Tracks in the network must appear under the Installed list.

l If used, the MetraSCAN 3D and MaxSHOT Next must appear in the Active list.

Only 1 C-Track must be activated as the primary C-Track (we recommend the C-Track associated with
the controller having the IP address 200.200.200.2 for the MetraSCAN 3D and 200.200.200.5 for the
MetraSCAN 3D- R). Other C- Tracks must be included in the Product Manager but should not be
activated.
Other products, like MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R or MaxSHOT Next, must be activated.

To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements

To activate the C-Link network

1. Go to Configure | Options | C-Track menu.

2. Select the Use C-Link box in the C-Track dialog box (or click in the system panel).

3. Select the Activate C-Link network check box.

4. Configure the C-Link network.

To configure the C-Link network

1. Enter the serial number of the primary C-Track along with its IP address.

2. Select the Active check box to indicate that the C-Track is to be part of the C-Link network.
To remove a C-Track, right-click the C-Track to delete and select Remove selected C-Track.

3. Specify the C-Track serial number of the secondary C-Track.

4. Click OK.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each secondary C-Track to be added to the C-Link network (if
applicable).

6. Click OK.

499
 l The primary C- Track should not be changed once a configuration is applied.
Otherwise, you will need to open the Product Manager, delete the previous primary
C-Track and create a new entry adding the configuration and license files.

l The IP address must be consistent.

l When a C-Link network configuration is executed from the VXelements - C-Track

Configuration dialog box (C-Link tab), the information is saved in the primary C-
Track’s configuration file. Activating the same controller as the primary in
subsequent uses of the C- Link functionality will prevent from running the
configuration again.

Once all C-Tracks are configured in the controllers and VXelements, the C-Track status will be displayed.
The primary C-Track status is similar to a standard C-Track; secondary C-Tracks should be Not referenced
until a C-Link Reference model is selected or imported.

500
C-Link Object Preparation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The same concept for the C-Track is applied to the C-Link setup.

Part preparation

1. Clean the part.

2. Determine the best parameters to set in relation of the part color.

Positioning targets

1. Use coded, swivel or high reflective targets.

2. Place the positioning targets on the part or around it (above, under, right, left, in front or
behind).

3. Make a suitable target setup to be able to acquire all the targets with the primary C-Track
on a single non-stop 360° acquisition pattern.

Environmental conditions

1. Check that light conditions are appropriate.

2. Make sure the temperature is stable.

501
For details, see the C-Track section.

502
C-Link Operating Principles

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up a C-Link Reference model

A C-Link Reference model is created by selecting a positioning model using:

l The MaxSHOT Next

l The primary C-Track to perform a volumetric extension (Auto-detect targets, Manually detect
targets and Detect targets from template)

l The Volume extension (VE) function.

Once the C-Track is part of the reference model, it is automatically detected (green).
Upon creation of a C-Link Reference model, the reference status switches to the dynamic mode, giving
the information of the C-Link Reference model for each C-Track.

Click to select targets for a new C-Link Reference model.

The DEC function is not available with the C-Link functionality.

To set up a Part reference model

The C-Link function requires a C-Link reference model. If the object to scan is not suited to be probed or
scanned as a C-Link reference model, its own Part Reference model should be used.

Click to select targets for a new Part reference model.

Create a Part reference model (optional)

Once the C-Link reference model is created, it is possible to create a Part reference model (optional).

503
 l Each C-Track will map the new targets against the C-Link reference model.

l It avoids recreating a C-Link reference every time a new part needs to be inspected while using
a fixture.

If so, use the wanted detect targets mode to acquire targets.

Once created, the Part reference model will be displayed separately from others C-Track status. The part
can then move in the C-Link volume as it is no longer attached to the C-Link reference model.

Reference positioning target statuses

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active C-Link reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active Part reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.

The target is not seen the by C-Track and is part of the C-Link reference model.

The target is not seen by the C-Track and is part of the Part reference model.

Visibility pane of the system panel

l The number of targets seen in real time by the primary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen in real time by the first secondary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen by each C-Track on the total amount of targets in the reference
model.

To probe in the C-Link mode

With a C-Link network, the HandyPROBE Next stylus can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the HandyPROBE Next stylus. The
stylus status is displayed in the system panel.

504
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.

505
To scan in the C-Link mode
With a C-Link network, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN
3D-R.
The scanner status is displayed in the system panel.
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.
The number of targets detected are displayed in the Status window.

Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network

The data acquisition is carried out by one C-Track at the time.
VXelements automatically selects the appropriate C-Track based on the stylus or scanner position and
orientation in the C-Link network volume.
The Z-Best concept is applied: the closest C-Track, which has the better Z position, is used to track the
activated device. The same concept is also applied to the MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R.
Controller not found
When VXelements cannot find the controller, make sure that its IP address and the computer are
properly configured.
A controller reboot might be required after an IP change. Otherwise, look at the Ethernet connections
and make sure the switch and controller are powered on.
Not referenced
This status shows up when there is no C-Link Reference model or if the C-Track does not see enough
targets and does not recognize the current C-Link Reference model.
Not synchronized
The controllers need a few minutes to synchronize themselves.
If the status remains, check the USB cable connections and the hub connections between the controllers.
It can also appear as a transition state when cameras are connected or disconnected during the
controller boots (not recommended).

Troubleshooting tips can be useful. To display them, click the C-Track status bar,
then the Troubleshooting tips pane in the VXelements dialog box.

506
MetraSCAN 3D Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

l MetraSCAN 3D system mixes between third (G3) and fourth generations (G4) are
not possible.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l MetraSCAN 3D G4 scanners are paired with a specific G4 C-Track system and

cannot be mixed anymore.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN 3D is a handheld 3D optical CMM device.

The MetraSCAN 3D scanners:

l Make it possible to extend the measurement volume with no accuracy loss.

l Allow a total freedom of movement, which translates into increased productivity and quality.

MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite MetraSCAN BLACK

507
 MetraSCAN 357

Previous generation

MetraSCAN 750 MetraSCAN 350

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

508
MetraSCAN BLACK

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

l MetraSCAN 3D pairs with a C-Track and the generation of C-Track and MetraSCAN
3D must match.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN BLACK is a handheld 3D optical CMM device.

MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite

MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite

MetraSCAN BLACK+

MetraSCAN BLACK

The MetraSCAN BLACK scanners:

l Make it possible to extend the measurement volume with no accuracy loss.

l Allow a total freedom of movement, which translates into increased productivity and quality.

509
Four models are available:

l MetraSCAN BLACK with 7 lasers crosses.

l MetraSCAN BLACK+ with 30 laser lines and an extra line for confined areas.

l MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite with 15 laser crosses and an extra line for confined areas.

l MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite with 30 laser lines and an extra line for confined areas.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

510
MetraSCAN BLACK Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

MetraSCAN BLACK

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 78 mW / < 2.57 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

511
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN BLACK+, MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2: 450nm / avg. < 123 mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Laser 3: 450nm / avg. < 20 mW / < 0.32 mJ
8.5 ms / 62.5 Hz max / C6: 4.0
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

512
MetraSCAN BLACK Hardware and
Components
Hardware

The MetraSCAN BLACK and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a
custom foam insert.

1. User calibration plate USB 3.0 cable and power supply

2. MetraSCAN BLACK

3. User calibration plate

4. MetraSCAN BLACK USB 3.0 and power cable

5. USB key (license and calibration files)

513
User calibration plate

The user calibration plate is used to calibrate the MetraSCAN BLACK and must be handled with care. It
must be plugged into the C-Track controller or into an electrical outlet if the controller is not near the
computer (in this case, the USB 3.0 cable would be plugged directly in the computer).

Components

The MetraSCAN BLACK includes a laser, 2 cameras, and retroreflective targets to locate its 3D space
position with the C-Track.

Front perspective view

1. Trigger

2. Cameras

514
 3. Single line projector

4. Laser grid projectors

5. Retroreflective targets

Rear perspective views

1. Main handle 1. Stand-off distance meter display

2. Bottom handle 2. Multifunction buttons

3. LED power indicator

Do not touch the scanner retroreflective targets. Do not manipulate the

MetraSCAN BLACK using the tubular structure. Use the bottom handle to pass the
scanner from one hand to the other.

515
MetraSCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises 6 buttons having different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is located in the front of the scanner handle. It is mainly used to Start, Pause, or Stop the
acquisition process. It is also used to toggle between the single laser line mode and laser cross mode
(option only available with MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite). Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter
and to navigate in the Smart Control.

Located below the arrow down button [6], a light indicates the scanner status.

Scanner status light colors

Color Status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

MetraSCAN BLACK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
Toggle Zoom / Shutter Enable / disable high
3 Toggle -
mode resolution
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed

516
 Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

MetraSCAN BLACK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
Toggle Zoom / Shutter Enable / disable high
3 Toggle -
mode resolution
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6* Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

* This feature is available only with MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite.

VXinspect

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Measure all Measure selected
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
3 Toggle - Measure all Measure selected
4 Cancel - Clear all Clear selected
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

517
Smart Control

Smart Control is a tool designed to remotely access key functions during the whole scan process such as
Calibration, Configuration, and Reset scan.

Button Function
2 Select
3 Enable / disable high resolution
5 Navigate up
6 Navigate down

518
MetraSCAN BLACK Operating Principles
Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the scanner's positioning target pattern.
The software determines the scanner's position in space through triangulation.
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN BLACK,
although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is accomplished through observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As
the laser sweeps over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

519
MetraSCAN BLACK Connection
The MetraSCAN 3D is used with a controller making the link between the scanner, the C-Track and the
computer. For details on how to connect the C-Track to the controller, see the C-Track Setup and
Connection section.

Connection steps

Make sure the controller is turned off before connecting the MetraSCAN BLACK.
Follow the procedure to guarantee the scanner physical integrity and to avoid
damaging any device.

1. Plug the USB 3.0 cable in any of the controller's 4 bottom slots.

2. Plug the power cable in the controller's designated MetraSCAN 3D slot.

When connecting the cable:

l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connector.

3. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable into the scanner.

4. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

520
5. Once everything is properly connected, press the power button to turn on the controller.

6. For the first connection only, run the IP Configurator program located in Windows Start
menu.

For disconnection, the inverse order is recommended (start by unplugging cables

from the scanner).

Make sure the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the cables.

521
MetraSCAN BLACK Calibration
Acceptance Test
Creaform performs an acceptance test as per ASME B89.4.22, ISO 10360 and VDI/VDE 2634 standards
(depending on the product and generation) before the delivery of the system to certify that it meets the
specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment outside the scope and timing of
the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
As a reference, ISO 10360 standard recommends performing a reverification test periodically to validate that the
system complies with specified requirements. Creaform recommends performing this reverification annually,
however, the customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends performing an interim check between periodic verifications to
demonstrate the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. Notwithstanding the
standard used to deliver the acceptance test certificate, Creaform still recommends following this approach. The
customer must consider the interim check results on known artifacts to assess if a reverification test needs to be
executed at one of the Creaform service centers.

Calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner or use Calibrate all to
launch the C-Track and scanner calibration workflow.

If using the Environment Compensation (EC), make sure to perform the scanner
calibration with the C-Track calibration bar1 in the field of view during the whole
calibration process.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to multiple positions as
indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the retroreflective targets of the user calibration
plate.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

522
To connect the user calibration plate

1. Plug the power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply cable to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer or the controller.

4. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable to the user calibration plate.

5. Connect the power cable to the user calibration plate.

523
To optimize the scanner calibration

In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

1. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near.

2. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration. Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch calibration.

3. Adjust the position of the plate relative to C-Track by placing the plate in the square
shown in the 3D viewer.

4. Click Accept or the Validate button on the scanner to launch the calibration.

5. Press the trigger button to start.

6. Move the scanner over the plate to match the scanner shadow in the 3D viewer.

7. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

524
Calibration setup
The Calibration setup pane is located in the system panel on the right of the screen during calibration. It
allows the user to specify his position (blue figure) relative to the calibration plate. This will modify the
calibration views in the 3D viewer for a more intuitive calibration.

To restore to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager.This manipulation
cannot be undone and should only be used when the scanner calibration process fails to optimize
properly.

525
MetraSCAN BLACK Configuration

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.Alternatively, use the Smart Control to launch configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicularly at a stand-off distancefrom the object (~30 cm) and
press the trigger button.

l A distance meter [1] on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the laser grid pattern [2] is as yellow as possible.

b. For parts having a uniform color / texture, click the Auto.adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicularly to the part's surface until the Optimizing
parameters message disappears.

Laser lines must lie only on the part's surface.If the part is smaller than the laser
grid pattern size, the Scanning area % slider can be used to reduce the size of the
pattern.

Distance meter (1) colors

Color Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern (2) colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

526
 Color Status Description

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the configuration
parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines.Set the cameras' shutter speed according to the
surface type before scanning.
Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process,
through the system panel located on the right side of the 3D viewer or through the Smart Control.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

527
High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

528
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default value is 0.15 ms and is usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces.Even darker
surfaces can be acquired with the default value.
Using the Auto. adjust feature will ensure setting the proper shutter value. Best practice suggests setting
the shutter speed value based on the surface color and finish to avoid affecting scan results. We
recommend using a canopy when scanning under direct sunlight.
When scanning multi- shaded parts with low contrast between the different colors, a single shutter
setting can be used. If the contrast is high, it is recommended to scan one part of the object, change the
shutter value, and finish the scan.

To export a session parameters file (.csp)

Session parameters (e.g. resolution) cannot be loaded during the scanning process.

Session parameters can be exported as a CSP file through VXelements (File | Export | Scan template).

529
Functionalities contained in the CSP file
Scanner parameters

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value with its activation and deactivation state

l Laser mode

l Scanning area

l High resolution multiplier

Scan parameters

l Resolution

l Smart resolution

l Remove isolated patches threshold

Finalize scan parameters

l Optimize surface mode

l Fill positioning targets

l Optimize accuracy of boundaries

l Smooth boundaries

l Smooth mesh

l Reduce noise

l Sharpen edges

l Optimize edges

l Auto decimate

l Auto.fill holes

530
Clipping objects

l C-Track referencing mode

l Target count

For quality control applications, the Auto.fill holes parameter should be set to 0.

For details on the functionalities, see the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters sections.

To create a scanner configuration file (.csc)

In VXelements:

l Right-click the Configuration preset box in the Scanner configuration window, or

l Click the Save preset link under the Configuration preset box in the Scanner parameters pane of
the connected device tab (system panel).

The CSC file can be retrieved in the VXelementsConfiguration folder (installation directory: C:\Program
Files\Creaform\VXelements\Configuration\MetraScanBlackElite).

Functionalities contained in the CSC file

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value

l Laser mode

The scanner configuration data can be loaded at any time, even when scanning.

531
MetraSCAN BLACK Object Preparation
Transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or glass, the
object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Positioning target distribution

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

532
MetraSCAN BLACK Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the surface of the object. This feature can be deactivated in the
Display panel under General display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the
screen.

Laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

533
LEDs on each side of the handle also indicate the distance from the object.

534
535
Scanner LEDs colors
Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can be
activated to alert the user when tracking is lost.

During acquisition, look at the computer screen to ensure both cameras see the
lasers.

Scanner visibility
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN BLACK,
although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of
the scanner is displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane and must remain as
close to 100% as possible.

Field of view
The Field of View is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

536
Single laser line mode
In this mode, to capture data, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras. This mode
allows capturing deeper data than laser cross mode. The single line mode is available only with the
MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite.

Scanning region
Selecting the Automatic scanning area check box in the system panel will automatically reduce the
scanning region size when the frame rate goes below 45 frames per second (FPS) to maintain an optimal
acquisition frame rate.

537
Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

538
MetraSCAN 357

The MetraSCAN 357 is a handheld 3D optical CMM device.

The MetraSCAN 3D scanner:

l Makes it possible to extend the measurement volume with no accuracy loss.

l Allows a total freedom of movement, which translates into increased productivity and quality.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

539
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

540
MetraSCAN 357 Hardware and Components

Hardware

The MetraSCAN 357 and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a
custom foam insert.

1. MetraSCAN 357 USB 3.0 and power cable

2. MetraSCAN 357

3. User calibration plate

4. User calibration plate USB 3.0 cable

5. USB key (license and calibration files)

541
User calibration plate

The user calibration plate is used to calibrate the MetraSCAN 357 and must be handled with care.

Components

The MetraSCAN 357 includes a laser, 2 cameras, and retroreflective targets to locate its 3D space
position with the C-Track.

Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Retroreflective targets

Do not touch the scanner retroreflective targets. Do not manipulate the

MetraSCAN 357 using tubular structure, always use the bottom handle.

542
MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has 6 buttons that have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The trigger
button is located in the front of the scanner handle. It is mainly used to Start, Pause, or Stop the
acquisition process. Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to navigate in the Smart
Control.

Located below the arrow down button [6], a light indicates the scanner status.
Scanner status light colors

Color Status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

MetraSCAN 3D

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Start scan mode -
Toggle between zoom
2 Toggle - -
and shutter mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

543
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Change laser mode (7
Start, stop scan
1 Trigger Stop scan mode laser cross /1 single
acquisition
line)*
Toggle Zoom / Shutter
2 Toggle - -
mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

* This feature is available only with MetraSCAN 750.

VXinspect

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Measure all Measure selected
2 Toggle - Measure all Measure selected
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - Clear all Clear selected
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

Smart Control

Smart Control is a tool designed to remotely access key functions during the entire scan process.

Button Function
3 Select
5 Navigate up
6 Navigate down

544
MetraSCAN 3D Operating Principles
Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the scanner's positioning target pattern.
The software determines the scanner's position in space through triangulation.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is accomplished through observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As
the laser sweeps over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

545
MetraSCAN 3D System Connection
The MetraSCAN 3D is used with a controller making the link between the scanner, the C-Track and the
computer. For details on how to connect the C-Track to the controller, see the C-Track Setup and
Connection section.

Connection steps

Make sure the controller is turned off before connecting the MetraSCAN 3D.
Follow the procedure to guarantee the scanner's physical integrity and to avoid
damaging any device.

1. Plug the USB 3.0 cable into any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

2. Plug the power cable into the designated MetraSCAN 3D power slot of the controller.

3. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable into the scanner.

4. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

5. Once everything is properly connected, press the power button to turn on the controller.

546
6. For the first connection only, run the IP Configurator program located in Windows
Startmenu.

547
MetraSCAN 357 Calibration

Acceptance Test
Creaform performs an acceptance test as per ASME B89.4.22, ISO 10360 and VDI/VDE 2634 standards
(depending on the product and generation) before the delivery of the system to certify that it meets the
specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment outside the scope and timing of
the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
As a reference, ISO 10360 standard recommends performing a reverification test periodically to validate that the
system complies with specified requirements. Creaform recommends performing this reverification annually,
however, the customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends performing an interim check between periodic verifications to
demonstrate the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. Notwithstanding the
standard used to deliver the acceptance test certificate, Creaform still recommends following this approach. The
customer must consider the interim check results on known artifacts to assess if a reverification test needs to be
executed at one of the Creaform service centers.

Calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

If using the Environment Compensation (EC), make sure to perform the scanner
calibration with the C-Track calibration bar1 in the field of view during the whole
calibration process.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

548
Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to multiple positions as
indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid any damage, never touch the positioning targets on the calibration plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near.

2. Connect the USB cable of the plate to the controller or the computer.

3. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

4. Adjust the position of the plate relative to C-Track by placing the artifact in the square
shown on the screen.

5. Click Accept or the Validate button on the scanner to launch the calibration.

6. Hold the scanner trigger to start the acquisition.

7. Move the scanner over the plate to match the positions described in the 3D viewer.

549
8. Once completed, click OK to accept the optimization.

550
Calibration setup
The calibration setup is located in the system panel on the right of the screen during calibration. It allows
specifying its position relative to the calibration plate. This will modify the calibration views in the 3D
viewer for a more intuitive calibration. If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before
concluding a scanner is decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration plate.

l The calibration plate orientation must be slightly different (tilted) than the C-Track orientation
to prevent ghost target detection in the 3D viewer.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another and ideally be below
0.110 mm.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

To restore to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager.

551
MetraSCAN 3D Configuration

To configure the scanner

Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the trigger button.
Three situations can occur:

l Underexposed (gray): The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras.
There is not enough information gathered by the software to compute and build a mesh.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser lines
are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface reconstruction or an unusual
amount of noise in the data.

l Reliable (yellow): The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface computation is done
in ideal circumstances.

In the Scanner parameters pane, adjust the Shutter slider to obtain as much yellow as possible.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

552
High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

553
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default laser power values are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces.
A flat, black surface usually requires a shutter speed of approximately 6 ms.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when moving the scanner quickly.

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode (for the MetraSCAN 750) or to
change the shutter speed (for the MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite). This is possible during scanning.

554
MetraSCAN 3D Object Preparation

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

555
MetraSCAN 357 Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, a meter displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between the
scanner and the object.

The distance meter is also represented by LEDs on each side of the handle.

556
Scanner LEDs colors
Color Scanner position Action
Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

A gray meter indicates that the scanner is not acquiring data.

l Be sure that nothing prevents the MetraSCAN 3D from being tracked by the C-
Track.

l Be sure to aim the scanner towards a surface.

The MetraSCAN 3D scanner loses tracking when it's too close or too far from the object, either because
the cameras can no longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes
inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, reposition the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and press the trigger
again or try redistributing the targets differently.

Scanner visibility
The C-Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN 357, although
full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the
scanner is displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired. For better surface results and to ensure optimal field
of view, a certain stand-off distance must be respected (~30 cm).

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle. The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both
cameras detect the same portions of the laser grid pattern.

557
Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

558
MetraSCAN 3D Previous Generation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The MetraSCAN 3D is a handheld 3D optical CMM device.

MetraSCAN 750 MetraSCAN 350

The MetraSCAN 3D scanners:

l make it possible to extend the measurement volume with no accuracy loss.

l allow total freedom of movement, which translates into increased productivity and quality.

559
Two models are available:

l MetraSCAN 350 with 3 lasers crosses;

l MetraSCAN 750 with 7 laser crosses and an extra line for confined areas.

Both models offer the same accuracy.

560
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

561
MetraSCAN 3D Hardware and Components

Hardware

The MetraSCAN 3D and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a
custom foam insert.

1. MetraSCAN 3D USB 3.0 & Power Cable - 1 unit

2. Calibration plate USB cable - 1 unit

3. MetraSCAN 3D - 1 unit

4. Calibration plate - 1 unit

562
Calibration plate

The calibration plate is used to calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D and must be handled with care.

563
Components

The MetraSCAN 3D includes a laser, 2 cameras and retroreflective targets to locate its 3D space position
with the C-Track.
Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Glass-protected retroreflective targets

Rear view

1. Mounting interface

2. Bottom handle

The C-Track must see a minimum of 5 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN 3D, although
full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Do not touch the scanner's retroreflective targets. Do not manipulate the

MetraSCAN 3D using tubular structure, always use the rear mounting interface and
the bottom handle.

564
LEDs (Light-Emitting Diode)

Off Blue Dark blue /Light blue Red /Yellow Green

Scanner not Scanner
1 - - -
connected connected
The scanner is too far The scanner is too close The scanner is
Not
2 - from the object: move to the object: move at the correct
scanning
forward backward distance

565
MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has 6 buttons that have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The trigger
button is located in the front of the scanner handle. It is mainly used to Start, Pause, or Stop the
acquisition process. Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to navigate in the Smart
Control.

Located below the arrow down button [6], a light indicates the scanner status.
Scanner status light colors

Color Status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

MetraSCAN 3D

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Start scan mode -
Toggle between zoom
2 Toggle - -
and shutter mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

566
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Change laser mode (7
Start, stop scan
1 Trigger Stop scan mode laser cross /1 single
acquisition
line)*
Toggle Zoom / Shutter
2 Toggle - -
mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

* This feature is available only with MetraSCAN 750.

VXinspect

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Measure all Measure selected
2 Toggle - Measure all Measure selected
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - Clear all Clear selected
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

Smart Control

Smart Control is a tool designed to remotely access key functions during the entire scan process.

Button Function
3 Select
5 Navigate up
6 Navigate down

567
MetraSCAN 3D Operating Principles
Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the scanner's positioning target pattern.
The software determines the scanner's position in space through triangulation.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is accomplished through observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As
the laser sweeps over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

568
MetraSCAN 3D System Connection
The MetraSCAN 3D is used with a controller making the link between the scanner, the C-Track and the
computer. For details on how to connect the C-Track to the controller, see the C-Track Setup and
Connection section.

Connection steps

Make sure the controller is turned off before connecting the MetraSCAN 3D.
Follow the procedure to guarantee the scanner's physical integrity and to avoid
damaging any device.

1. Plug the USB 3.0 cable into any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

2. Plug the power cable into the designated MetraSCAN 3D power slot of the controller.

3. Connect the other extremity of the USB 3.0 cable into the scanner.

4. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

5. Once everything is properly connected, press the power button to turn on the controller.

569
6. For the first connection only, run the IP Configurator program located in Windows
Startmenu.

570
MetraSCAN 3D Calibration

Calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

If using the Environment Compensation (EC), make sure to perform the scanner
calibration with the C-Track calibration bar1 in the field of view during the whole
calibration process.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration maintains the initial
measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. An annual factory
calibration is also recommended to keep the scanner at its highest accuracy. The calibration uses a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to multiple positions as
indicated by the shadow of the scanner in the 3D viewer.

To avoid damage, never touch the positioning targets on the calibration plate.

To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective objects nearby.

2. Connect the plate's USB cable to the controller or the computer.

3. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

4. Adjust the position of the plate relative to C-Track by placing the artifact in the square
shown on the screen.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

571
5. Click Accept or the Validate button on the scanner to launch the calibration.

6. Hold the scanner's trigger to start the acquisition.

7. Move the scanner over the plate to match the positions described in the 3D viewer.

8. Once completed, click OK to accept the optimization.

572
Calibration setup
The calibration setup is located in the system panel on the right of the screen during calibration. It allows
specifying its position relative to the calibration plate. This will modify the calibration views in the 3D
viewer for a more intuitive calibration. If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before
concluding a scanner is decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration plate.

l The calibration plate orientation must be slightly different (tilted) than the C-Track orientation
to prevent ghost target detection in the 3D viewer.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another and ideally be below
0.110 mm.
If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked before concluding the scanner is
decalibrated:

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l Verify that the positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an
Optimization failed message.

If all these steps fail to resolve the calibration failure, contact Creaform Customer Support for further
assistance.

To restore to the factory settings

It is possible to restore the scanner to the factory settings via the Product Manager.

573
MetraSCAN 3D Configuration

To configure the scanner

Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and press the trigger button.
Three situations can occur:

l Underexposed (gray): The reflection of the laser is not or is weakly perceived by the cameras.
There is not enough information gathered by the software to compute and build a mesh.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the laser is so intense that the cameras are dazzled. Laser lines
are not clearly defined and may lead to an improper surface reconstruction or an unusual
amount of noise in the data.

l Reliable (yellow): The laser is reflected as a clean and defined line. Surface computation is done
in ideal circumstances.

In the Scanner parameters pane, adjust the Shutter slider to obtain as much yellow as possible.

Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

574
High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

575
Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default laser power values are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surfaces.
A flat, black surface usually requires a shutter speed of approximately 6 ms.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when moving the scanner quickly.

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode (for the MetraSCAN 750) or to
change the shutter speed (for the MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite). This is possible during scanning.

576
MetraSCAN 3D Object Preparation

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

577
MetraSCAN 3D Acquisition Rules

Proper scanning distance

For better scan accuracy, follow the scanner distance indicated below.

While digitizing, a meter displayed on the left-hand side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the scanner.

Distance meter for MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite

The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the scanner.

578
Scanner LEDs colors
Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

A gray meter indicates that the scanner is not acquiring data.

l Be sure that nothing prevents the MetraSCAN 3D from being tracked by the C-
Track.

l Be sure to aim the scanner towards a surface.

The MetraSCAN 3D scanner loses tracking when it is too close or too far from the object, either because
the cameras can no longer detect the retroreflective targets or because target distribution becomes
inappropriate.
If tracking is lost, reposition the scanner in front of a previously scanned surface and press the trigger
again or try redistributing the targets differently.

Scanner visibility
The C-Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN 3D, although
full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the
scanner is displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired. For better surface results and to ensure optimal field
of view, a certain stand-off distance must be respected.

Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.

579
It is possible to scan at an angle. Cameras must be aligned so both cameras can detect the same laser
line.

Single laser line mode

To capture data, the laser line does not have to be detected by both cameras. This mode, which is
available only with the MetraSCAN 750, allows capturing deeper data than with laser cross mode.

Preview mode

580
The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

581
HandyPROBE Next

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

l HandyPROBE system mixes between generations are not possible.

Example: If trying to use a G3 stylus with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

HandyPROBE Next+ and HandyPROBE

HandyPROBE Next

The HandyPROBE Next is an arm-free touch probing system that acquires data points and provides
high-accuracy measurements. This device communicates wirelessly with VXelements.
It is used for quality control, reverse engineering purposes, such as in the automotive, aerospace and
manufacturing industries.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

582
HandyPROBE Next Hardware and
Components
Hardware

The HandyPROBE Next and all necessary hardware fit into a protective case with foam insert.

1. HandyPROBE Next stylus - 1 unit

2. HandyPROBE Next user calibration artifact - 1 unit

3. Probe accessory kit - 1 unit

583
Components

Stylus
The stylus comes with glass-protected reflectors that are positioned during factory calibration. They are
used with the C-Track to determine the probe position and orientation. The probe tip type can be
customized.
Each side of the stylus is equipped with rubber pads to avoid damage while using the device.

1. Main
interface

2. Battery
compartment

3. Rubber pads

4. Action
buttons

5. Right pen
button

6. Left pen
button

7. Glass
protected
targets

8. Smartconnect
probe
adapter and
probe tips

9. Speaker

10. Visibility LED

Action and pen buttons

584
 1. Validate

2. Up arrow

3. Down arrow

4. Trigger

5. Cancel

6. Right pen
button

7. Left pen
button

Probe sounds
Sound Meaning
Short beep Acquisition validated
Short beep followed by a
Acquisition failed
lower short beep
Two beeps or more Multipoint acquisition
Low intensity Battery charge level lower than 60%

LED color codes

Color Meaning
OFF The stylus is not activated or sleeping.

The stylus is detected by the C-Track.

The stylus is not detected by the C-Track.

Good point: The point is correctly measured.

Bad point: The point is not measured.

Battery compartment
The HandyPROBE Next stylus requires 2 AA alkaline or AA NiMH batteries (1.2 V - 1.5 V).

585
To replace the batteries
For details, see the Batteries section.

User calibration artifact

High-accuracy cone and sphere for calibrating the geometry relationship between the probe tip center
and the HandyPROBE stylus coordinate system.

Cone artifact Sphere assembly

The sphere adapter provided with the system has a diameter of 25.4 mm (1 inch).
Place the sphere adapter on the magnetic base of the cone artifact to obtain the assembly.

Probe accessory kit

586
The kit contains additional accessories to be used with the HandyPROBE Next stylus.

Accessory Purpose
Probe extension
Used to extend the reach of a probe.

Probe tip
Usually made of stainless (body) and ruby (red sphere). The
sphere will be used to acquire data point on the part.

SmartConnect probe
adapter
Allows mounting and positioning the probe tip with high
precision on the HandyPROBE Next stylus.

SmartConnect probe
adapter tool
Used to lock in place the SmartConnect probe adapter.

Probe tip tool

Used to lock in place the probe tip, the probe extension and the
SmartConnect probe adapter together.

587
HandyPROBE Next Multifunction Buttons

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

Open Smart Control Start 3D display
1 Validate Accept feature*
window control
2 Up arrow Zoom in Fast zoom in -
3 Down arrow Zoom out Fast zoom out -
Measure all
4 Trigger Take measurement* Measure selected
Start multishot mode*

Delete the last probed Accept and stop the

5 Cancel -
point measurement
Right pen
6
button Can emulate the behavior of any of the 5 multifunction buttons located on
Left pen the stylus handle.
7
button

* While probing.

588
HandyPROBE Next Operating Principles
The C-Track cameras simultaneously acquire the position and orientation of the HandyPROBE stylus and
the positioning targets model of the part.

Detection statuses

The Visibility pane for the HandyPROBE Next will appear only when it is
connected to the controller.

Probe detected: The HandyPROBE Next is detected.

No probe detected: The HandyPROBE Next is not detected.

Probe tip calibration statuses

Probe calibrated: The probe tip is calibrated.

Probe not calibrated: The probe tip is not calibrated.

589
HandyPROBE Next Probe Communication
Channel

To change the channel between the probe and the C-Track controller
Channel switching can help when the Wi- Fi or another radio protocol disrupts the communication
between the devices.
Changing to a more efficient channel should improve the communication.

To change the communication channel with the Analyze Channels function

This function allows automatically detecting the most efficient communication channel and also shows
its decibel noise.

To activate the new channel

1. Press the Menus button of the controller to open the 2. Probe menu.

2. Press OK to open the 2.3. Probe/Analyze Channels menu. After a few seconds, the channel
with the lowest noise will be displayed on the controller LCD panel.

3. Press OK to activate the new channel for the controller and the probe.

4. A message asking to associate the probe will be displayed.

The decibel noise is a negative value and the cleanest channel has the lowest value
(highest absolute).

To change the communication channel manually

The controller LCD panel displays the noise level of each channel in order to change to a more efficient
channel.

1. Press the Menus button of the controller to open the 2. PROBE menu.

2. Press OK to open the 2.4. Probe/Channel menu.

3. Choose the channel using the Next button.

590
 4. Press OK to activate the new channel for the controller and the probe.

5. A message asking to associate the probe will be displayed.

The decibel noise is a negative value and the cleanest channel has the lowest value
(highest absolute).

To reset the communication channel

If the controller and the probe channels differ, causing miscommunication, reset the channel on both
devices. In this case, reset the probe to the default channel (4 or F) manually.

1. Press and hold buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 simultaneously for 1 second. Once released, the probe
LED will flash green 3 times.

2. Launch Probe association from the controller or VXelements.

3. Quick press buttons 2 and 3 simultaneously to associate the stylus.

The controller channel is reset only after the probe association process.

591
HandyPROBE Next System Connection

HandyPROBE Next probe tip setup

The SmartConnect probe adapter allows mounting and positioning the probe tip on the HandyPROBE
stylus with high precision.
The probe tip calibration is recalled each time the smart probe adapter is reinserted.

To select the right probe tip

The SmartConnect probe adapter repositioning system allows removing and replacing
the probe tip without losing its calibration. For details, see the assembly section.

Straight probe
The straight probe tip configuration is the regular probe assembly. It is very rigid.

592
 A probe tip extension can be added in order to get more probing reach. It is
commonly used area not reachable by a short straight probe tip.

l The longer the probe is, the less precise the probing will be.

l The assembly with an extension might bend more easily.

Elbow probe
An elbow probe tip is used for area that is not easily reachable with a straight probe.
Most of the time, an extension is required with this probe tip.

l The longer the probe is, the less precise the probing will be.

l The whole assembly might bend more easily.

To assemble a SmartConnect probe adapter

1. Choose a SmartConnect probe adapter.

2. Select the probe extension if needed.

3. Select the probe tip.

4. Using the stylus tool, screw parts to create the desired assembly.

l The HandyPROBE stylus is fragile. It is highly recommended to hold the probe tip
gently and carefully.

l Make sure the probe tip, extensions and elbows are tightened.

593
HandyPROBE Next System Calibration
Acceptance Test
Creaform performs an acceptance test as per ASME B89.4.22, ISO 10360 and VDI/VDE 2634 standards
(depending on the product and generation) before the delivery of the system to certify that it meets the
specifications. Creaform does not guarantee the performance of its equipment outside the scope and timing of
the aforementioned test since the equipment is outside its control or supervision.
Reverification Test
As a reference, ISO 10360 standard recommends performing a reverification test periodically to validate that the
system complies with specified requirements. Creaform recommends performing this reverification annually,
however, the customer has the responsibility to determine the frequency of this test.
Interim Check
The ISO 10360 standard recommends performing an interim check between periodic verifications to
demonstrate the probability that the system complies with specified requirements. Notwithstanding the
standard used to deliver the acceptance test certificate, Creaform still recommends following this approach. The
customer must consider the interim check results on known artifacts to assess if a reverification test needs to be
executed at one of the Creaform service centers.

HandyPROBE Next calibration minimizes any measurement uncertainty by ensuring device accuracy.
Thus, this mandatory process enables errors or uncertainties to stay within manufacturer specification. It
consists of determining the position of the probe tip center related to the stylus. Prior to using a probe
tip, calibrate it with the cone or sphere artifact provided.

The calibration of a probe tip should be performed periodically before any work
session.

In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

Recommendations

l C-Track cameras should not be placed directly facing the sun.

l Calibration should be done in actual measurement conditions.

l Calibration must be done in a stable temperature environment (±2°C).

l Probe calibration must be done after each C-Track calibration.

594
 l Make sure the probe tip, extensions and elbows are tightened.

l Do not apply pressure on the probe tip while using it.

To manually add a probe tip in VXelements

This process is mandatory before calibrating the probe tip.

This option is only available if the Automatically detect connected probe tip
check box is cleared.

1. Right-click the probe list and select Add. The probing expanding panel on the right should
be active.

2. Add the probe name and diameter in the window (Configure | Probes | Add).

Through the system panel

1. Make sure the stylus is connected to the controller by pressing any button on the stylus.

2. Make sure the Probes panel is expanded.

3. Right-click the gray area in the Probe name section.

4. Select Add.

5. Name the probe.

6. Specify the probe diameter.

7. Select the probe tip type (straight or elbow).

8. Click OK.

Through the Configure menu

1. Make sure the stylus is connected to the controller by pressing any button on the stylus.

2. Add the probe name and diameter in the window (Configure | Probes | Add).

3. Select Add.

4. Name the probe.

5. Specify the probe diameter.

595
 6. Select the probe tip type (straight or elbow).

7. Click OK.

Right-click the probe list and select Remove or Edit to delete a probe or change its
parameters.

To manually select a probe tip from the list

l Double-click the desired probe tip in the probe list or

l Go to Configure | Probes, click the probe name and choose Activate.

To calibrate using a cone

There are advantages to use a cone to calibrate:

l Obtains an accurate calibration result value.

l The probe tip is more stable in the cone.

l It is the easiest way to perform a calibration.

l Do not apply pressure on the probe tip while calibrating (or while probing).

l The point probe tip cannot be calibrated using the cone artifact as it will break its
end.

Through the system panel

1. Place the user calibration artifact in front of the C-Track on a stable surface, with no
reflective objects nearby.

2. Select the Probe tab.

3. In the Probes section, select the probe tip.

4. Click .

596
5. Adjust the position of the artifact relative to the C-Track by placing it in the square shown
on the screen.

6. Place the probe tip in the center of the cone.

7. Press Start in the 3D viewer or press the Trigger or Validate button on the probe.

8. While the probe tip lays in the cone, move the stylus to match the target positions shown
in red in the 3D viewer.

9. When the stylus is correctly positioned, the target position color will turn to green.

Make sure to always keep the probe tip in contact with the cone to ensure proper
calibration.

597
 10. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Once all positions have been acquired, the system calculates the probe tip position to determine
whether it is properly calibrated or not.

Through the Configure menu

1. Place the user calibration artifact in front of the C-Track on a stable surface, with no
reflective objects nearby.

2. In the Configure | Calibrate HandyPROBE with cone menu, select Calibrate with cone.

It is also possible to start the calibration by selecting the probe through the
Configure | Probes menu.

3. Adjust the position of the artifact relative to the C-Track by placing it in the square shown
on the screen.

4. Place the probe tip in the center of the cone making sure that the inner surface of the cone
is clean.

5. Press Start in the 3D viewer or press the Trigger or Validate button on the probe.

6. While the probe tip lays in the cone, move the stylus to match the required positions
shown in red in the 3D viewer.

7. When the stylus is correctly positioned, the required position color will turn to green.

8. Monitor the progress indicator at the bottom of the window. It increases each time a
required position is completed.

9. Follow steps 6 to 8 until all required positions are completed.

598
 Make sure to always keep the probe tip in contact with the cone to ensure proper
calibration.

10. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Once all positions have been acquired, the system calculates the probe tip position to determine
whether it is properly calibrated or not.

To calibrate using a sphere

This calibration mode is also used for straight probes but is the only mode available for elbow and
point tip probes.
A sphere artifact provides an accurate calibration result value.

l Do not apply pressure on the probe tip while calibrating (or while probing).

l The probe tip might slip on the sphere surface while acquiring the point.

599
Through the system panel

1. Place the user calibration artifact in front of the C-Track on a stable surface, with no
reflective objects nearby.

2. Select the Probe tab.

3. In the Probes section, select the probe tip (straight or elbow probe).

Straight probe Elbow probe

4. Click available through the drop-down arrow next to .

5. Enter approximate probe dimensions (length) and set probe orientation if required (right
side of the screen).

6. Click OK.

7. Adjust the position of the sphere relative to the C-Track by placing the artifact in the
square shown on the screen.

600
 8. Press Start, or press the probe Trigger button.

Make sure the probe tip is in contact with the sphere while taking points to ensure
proper calibration.

Using elbow probe tip extensions will put weight on the probe tip. The longer the
extension is, bigger is the force applied on the assembly (which will bend more
easily).

9. Probe 5 points distributed on the sphere with the HandyPROBE in the position shown in
the 3D viewer. The progress meter in the 3D viewer indicates the number of points taken.
For each point, there will be 2 beeps:

l First beep signifies the trigger button was clicked;

l Second beep confirms the validity of the acquisition.

Vertical

601
Tilted to the left

Tilted to the right

Tilted forward

Tilted backward

10. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Once all positions have been acquired, the system calculates the probe tip position to determine
whether it is properly calibrated or not.

Through the Configure menu

1. Place the user calibration artifact in front of the C-Track on a stable surface, with no
reflective objects nearby.

2. In the Configure | Calibrate HandyPROBE with sphere menu, select Calibrate with
sphere.

It is also possible to start the calibration by selecting the probe through the
Configure | Probes menu.

602
3. Enter approximate probe dimensions and probe orientation.

4. Click OK.

5. Adjust the position of the sphere relative to the C-Track by placing the artifact in the
square shown on the screen.

6. Press Start, or press the probe Trigger button.

Make sure the probe tip is in contact with the sphere while taking points to ensure
proper calibration.

603
 7. Probe 5 points distributed on the sphere with the HandyPROBE in the position shown in
the 3D viewer. It is recommended to probe 4 points at the equator and 1 on top of the
sphere. For each point, there will be 2 beeps:

l First beep signifies the trigger button was clicked;

l Second beep confirms the validity of the acquisition.

Vertical

Tilted to the
left

Tilted to the
right

Tilted
forward

604
Tilted
backward

8. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Once all positions have been acquired, the system calculates the probe tip position to determine
whether it is properly calibrated or not.

Calibration expected results

The calibration results of a probe tip should be consistent from one calibration to the other. They should
typically follow this formula:
Calibration value (mm) = 3x10-5 x L* (mm) + 0.016
*L: Probe tip extension length

In case of calibration failure

1. Make sure the probe is correctly screwed onto the SmartConnect probe adapter.

2. Try again, making sure the probe does not come out of the bottom of the cone.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

605
HandyPROBE Next System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | C-Track | Configuration menu, select the HandyPROBE tab in the C-

Track Configuration dialog box or click in the system panel.

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated. See
the Product Manager section for activation information.

To set system parameters

Automatically detect connected probe tip
Select the check box to enable the automatic detection of the SmartConnect probe adapter.

l When a new probe tip is detected, the Probe management window shows up.

l When an already known tip is detected, the probe tip is automatically selected.

l VXelements will callback all associated parameters such as name, probe tip diameter,
configuration and calibration.

Clear this check box to disable the automatic detection of the SmartConnect probe adapter.

l Manually select the probe tips in the Probe management window.

l VXelements will call back all associated parameters such as name, probe tip diameter,
configuration, and calibration based on the probe tip selected.

l It is impossible to remove an activated probe from the list.

l Disabling the SmartConnect probe adapter allows manually adding a probe tip.

606
Probing tolerance

For most accurate measurement, the probing tolerance must always be set at Tight.

Adjust the slider to control the tolerance of probe movements during measurement.
The default value is Tight. It can be loosened to allow easier measurement, especially with long probes.
In this case, the accuracy will be reduced.

Pen button associations

Set the behavior of the 2 pen buttons (left and right) to emulate any of the 5 action buttons.

The Trigger button behavior is set by default.

Sphere calibration
In the Sphere calibration box, type or select the diameter of the sphere to use for probe calibration.
By default, the HandyPROBE Next comes with a 25,4 mm diameter sphere.

The unit displayed depends on the unit that was set in VXelements.

Enable probe sounds

Select to enable the system sounds when taking measurement.

Sound Meaning

Short beep Acquisition validated

Short beep followed by a lower short beep Acquisition failed

Two beeps or more Multipoint acquisition

Low intensity beep Batteries lower than 60%

Enable visibility status

Select to enable the visibility LED on the probe.

607
 Turning this option off will increase battery life.

Visibility status duration(s): Set the time after which the probe will go in sleep mode (battery saving
mode).

Update probe firmware

Make sure to update the probe firmware to take advantage of the latest stylus
functionalities.

1. Click the Update probe firmware link.

2. Follow the procedure displayed in the VXelements - Probe firmware update dialog box.

The HandyPROBE LED will flash if:

l A parameter changes in the C-Track Configuration dialog box or the system panel.

l The OK or Apply button is clicked.

To set probing parameters

These parameters are available through the system panel.
Multishot mode: Launch this mode by holding the trigger while measuring.

l Distance: Takes points every time the probe moves from the set distance.

l Frequency: Takes points at the set frequency.

Distance: Set the distance of the multishot mode.

Frequency: Set the frequency of the multishot mode.

608
HandyPROBE Next Probe Association
To use a stylus with a system, the stylus must be associated with the controller. It might also be needed
in case of miscommunication between the stylus and the controller.

From the controller

1. Click the Next button on the controller.

2. Go to the 2.2. Probe/Assoc. menu.

3. Press the OK button on the controller.

4. Quick press buttons 2 and 3 simultaneously on the stylus.

5. The probe will emit a beep to confirm the association.

If the association is not possible, try to reset the stylus.

From VXelements

1. In the Configure menu, select Associate probe.

2. Quick press buttons 2 and 3 simultaneously on the stylus.

3. The probe will emit a beep to confirm the association.

609
 If the association is not possible, try to reset the stylus.

To reset the stylus

To hard reset the stylus, press and hold buttons 1, 2 and 3 for 3 seconds.

l This operation will remove the stylus power for few seconds.

l The green LED will light up and flash 3 times.

l A short beep will be emitted.

610
HandyPROBE Next Object Preparation

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

611
HandyPROBE Next Acquisition Rules

Positioning target setting

The positioning targets must face the C-Track as much as possible. Angles up to 30 ° define the working
range.

For angles greater than 30 °, the stylus will not be detected.

612
LED color codes

Color Meaning
OFF The stylus is not activated or sleeping.

The stylus is detected by the C-Track.

The stylus is not detected by the C-Track.

Good point: The point is correctly measured.

Bad point: The point is not measured.

Acquiring measurements
The HandyPROBE Next is always facing the C-Track so that the targets are well recognized. The C-Track
takes the stylus orientation into account during the acquisition measurements.
The default settings make VXprobe automatically compensate the probe tip radius according to the
stylus orientation.

A. Probed feature without

compensation

B. Probed feature with

compensation

C. Compensation direction

D. Surface normal direction

The first point acquired is the most important because it defines the plane orientation and the
compensation orientation for the probe tip diameter.

613
 A. Probed feature without
compensation

B. Probed feature with

compensation

Probe tip orientation for plane measurement

General acquisition rules must be applied for proper compensation:

l For a proper orientation detection, ensure that the probe is pointing towards the surface to
acquire and that Ɵ is greater than 5 degrees.

l To have a preview of the fitted plane, probe at least 3 points.

A. Probed plane

B. Compensated
plane

For details, see the Add a Plane section.

Probe tip orientation for hole measurement

General acquisition rules must be applied for proper compensation:

l For a proper orientation detection, Ɵ must not be under 5 degrees.

l To have a preview of the fitted circle, probe at least 3 points. For a cylinder, 7 points must be
probed.

614
 A. Compensated hole diameter

B. Probed hole diameter

Probe tip orientation for rod measurement

General acquisition rules must be applied for proper compensation:

l For a proper orientation detection, Ɵ must not be under 5 degrees.

l To have a preview of the fitted circle, probe at least 3 points. For a cylinder, 7 points must be
probed.

615
 A. Probed rod diameter

B. Compensated rod diameter

Probe tip orientation for line measurement

Define a constraining plane by probing a plane or using an existing one.

l For a proper orientation detection, Ɵ must not be under 5 degrees.

l Probe 2 points that will be projected on the constraining plane.

l The first probed point to the second probed point defines the line direction.

616
 A. Compensated line

B. Probed line

For details, see the Add a Line section.

Using extensions and elbows probe tips

l Longer extensions mean that more flexion can occur when putting weight on the probe.

l When using an elbow probe, make sure it is tight enough to maintain the correct angle
throughout its use.

The HandyPROBE stylus is fragile. It is highly recommended to hold the probe tip
gently and carefully.

617
MaxSHOT 3D Next

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The MaxSHOT Next is an optical coordinate measuring system which can generate high accuracy
positioning models based on a series of photographs. The MaxSHOT Next can be used with the
HandySCAN 3D, the HandyPROBE and the MetraSCAN 3D, adding accuracy and photogrammetry
speed, especially for larger objects.
It can also be used as a stand-alone device for optical probing measurements.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

618
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

619
MaxSHOT Next Hardware and
Components
The MaxSHOT Next, with all necessary hardware, fits into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a
custom foam insert.

Hardware

1. Reference frame with QR code - 1 unit

2. Scale bars with QR code - 2 units

3. VXelements software - 1 unit

4. USB 3.0 connecting cables (8 meters and 16 meters) - 1 unit

5. Box of 210 coded targets 8-12 mm, magnetic (#31-#240) - 1 unit

6. MaxSHOT Next - 1 unit

7. Scale bar supports - 4 units

8. Cable management accessories - 1 unit

9. Box of positioning targets (non-coded) - 1 unit

10. Power supply - 1 unit

620
Components

The MaxSHOT Next features an HD digital camera surrounded by a series of LEDs. A green or red laser
projection allows instant feedback on the quality status of each photo taken. The smart control
multifunction buttons allow the user to easily capture images and also activate some features of VXshot.

Coded targets

Coded targets are used for the image association. The standard kit includes 210 unique coded targets.

Scale bar

Two scale bars are included in the standard kit. Each scale bar has 1 coded target and 1 QR code that
contains the bar's technical specifications.

Reference frame

The 3 coded-target reference frame provides the MaxSHOT Next with a known geometry and sets the
global coordinate system. A QR code supplies information on the reference frame's technical
specifications.

621
MaxSHOT Next Multifunction buttons

Located under the Validate [2] and Cancel [3] buttons, a LED indicator shows the device status.
LED indicator
Color Status

Camera is on stand-by and the cables are properly connected.

Camera is recording (during the photo acquisition).
Camera ready, once the Start photo acquisition has been launched.

Smart Control

VXshot

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Start photo acquisition -
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - -
window
3 Cancel - Clean bad targets/pictures -

622
 Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click
4 Toggle - - -

5 Arrow up Zoom in Fast zoom in -

6 Arrow down Zoom out Fast zoom out -

VXshot during measurements

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

Trigger/
1 Bluetooth Take picture -
shutter*

2 Validate - Open Smart Control -

3 Cancel Delete last picture Stop photo acquisition -

Show faulty status (by
4 Toggle - -
importance)
5 Arrow up Zoom in Fast zoom in -

6 Arrow down Zoom out Fast zoom out -

*Tapping Play/Pause, Next track, Previous track, Volume up and/or Volume down
on a computer keyboard (or any key bound to these functions) also emulates the
shutter button.

623
MaxSHOT Next Operating Principles

The photogrammetric video camera MaxSHOT Next uses the VXshot module.
The reflectors applied on the object are rebuilt in 3D. The scale bars provided in the measurement
volume allow for model scaling.
The camera uses a laser projection system allowing the user to get instant feedback on the status of
each image taken.
The high accuracy positioning model generated with the VXshot module determines the scanner
position in the measurement volume. It can be used in VXelements with other Creaform technologies:
HandySCAN 3D, HandyPROBE,MetraSCAN 3D and Go!SCAN 3D.
The MaxSHOT Next can also be used as a stand-alone device for optical probing measurements.

624
MaxSHOT Next System Connection

To connect directly to a computer

1. Plug the power supply into an electrical source.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB 3.0 cable.

3. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

4. Connect the other extremities of the power supply and the USB 3.0 cable to the MaxSHOT
Next.

625
 5. Secure the cables by fixing them with the clamp or with the Ethernet cable holder.

6. In Configure | MaxSHOT Next, check Use camera with C-Track controller option.

To connect to a C-Track controller

1. Connect the power cable behind the C-Track controller to the Accessory port.

2. Connect the USB 3.0 cable behind the C-Track controller to the USB 3.0 port.

3. Connect the other extremities of the power cable and the USB 3.0 cable to the MaxSHOT
Next.

626
4. Using the Ethernet cable, connect the computer to the C-Track controller.

5. In the Home page , launch VXshot .

627
MaxSHOT Next Object Preparation
A 3-step preparation of the scene and the object is required prior to building the photogrammetry
session:

1. Coded targets:

l Add 1 coded target every 2 or 3 feet (60-90 cm).

l For each picture that will be taken, make sure that

a minimum of 4 coded targets are always visible.

l Ensure proper triangulation by avoiding the

placement of coded targets in straight horizontal
or vertical lines.

l Make sure the coded targets are laid out in a way

that will create a target overlap between pictures.

l If needed, place the coded targets in the

surrounding environment around the object.

l Coded targets should rest on flat surfaces to

prevent the magnetic holders from bending.

2. Reference frame installation:

l Use 1 reference frame per photogrammetry

model.

l The frame can be placed anywhere on the part.

l The reference frame is used as a starting point for

picture acquisition.

l It will provide the XYZ origin orientation and

position in the model.

l The QR code provides technical information for

the reference frame.

628
3. Scale bars installation:

l Install the scale bars in the scene, near or on the

object:

Object with a length between 2-5 meters; install

1 or 2 Creaform scale bars.

Object with a length between 5-10 meters; install

the 5-meter long scale bar (Invar Long Scale Bars
Extension Kit - optional).

If using Invar Long Scale Bars,

it is strongly recommended
to use the Creaform scale
bars too. This allows
comparing the scaling results
of all scale bars and verifies
no errors were introduced
during the Invar Scale Bar's
definition step.

l Make sure that scale bars are stable and affixed

securely.

l The scale bars must be handled carefully to avoid

any shocks.

l Make sure scale bars are part of the

photogrammetry model and are not isolated far
away from the scene.

l The QR code provides technical information on

the scale bars.

Coded Targets Assignment

No. Assignment
1-7 Creaform reserved

629
8-10 Reference frame
11-14 Reference scale bar
15-18 Invar Long Scale Bar (Brunson)
19 C-Trackclip (Also called MaxSHOT 3D kit)
20-29 Creaform reserved
31-240 Coded target box (base kit)
241-447 Coded target box (extended kit)

630
Bluetooth Shutter Button Pairing
Procedure

When using the telescopic extension pole, it is possible to pair the MaxSHOT Next with a Bluetooth
shutter button in order to ease the image acquisition process.

1. In Windows 10 / Windows 11, go to: Settings | Devices | Bluetooth and turn the
Bluetooth option ON.

2. Press and hold the small pairing button on the back of the shutter button for 3 seconds.

3. A green LED will start blinking on the front of the shutter button.

4. In Windows 10 / Windows 11 (Settings | Devices | Bluetooth), select Satechi Shutter

Button.

5. Place the shutter button on the mount provided with the kit.

6. Start acquiring pictures with the MaxSHOT Next.

The Satechi Bluetooth shutter button is Windows 10 / Windows 11 ready.

631
Tapping Play/Pause, Next track, Previous track, Volume up and/or Volume down on
a computer keyboard (or any key bound to these functions) also emulates the
shutter button.

632
MaxSHOT Next Acquisition Rules
Prepare the object and the scene properly before launching the photogrammetric model creation
process.

1. In VXelements Home page, select VXshot .

2. Go to the Photogrammetry acquisition parameters in the Navigation panel.

3. Under Laser projected frame, select Feedback to activate the camera's red and green laser
feedback.

4. Click Start acquisition .

5. On the camera, press and hold the Trigger button to start acquiring photos .

6. The reference frame MUST be seen in the first 3 pictures:

l Aim at the reference frame (all 3 coded targets must be visible).

l Sufficient triangulation angle (30°-45°) to the frame normal vector is

recommended.

633
7. Make sure to have proper stand-off distance and sufficient overlap transition
between pictures.

Incorrect overlap of targets Correct overlap of targets

8. Ensure convergence by minimizing triangulation uncertainty by shooting from obtuse

rather than acute angles.

634
 9. While 30° visibility and 4 observations meets the minimum conditions for a targets, it is
optimal to have 6 or more observations and 60°-90° visibility.

10. To stop the photo acquisition process:

l
Press and hold the Cancel button on the camera or

l Press the space bar on the keyboard.

11. Click to finalize the photogrammetric model.

635
 12. Click to clean the photogrammetric model of bad targets and bad images.

13. Click to finalize the photogrammetric model again.

A summary of the project (general information) is available in the Photogrammetry details pane.
Laser feedback

Indicator Icon Status Description

Good distribution

Status of the distribution of targets in

the image. It will notify the user if the
Spread Poor distribution targets are too concentrated in a small
area of the image.
Incorrect
distribution

Sufficient # of targets

Number of coded and non-coded

Target count Poor # of targets targets required to get a good image in
the model.

Insufficient # of targets

Good target overlap

Targets overlapping with the rest of the

model. This indicator will inform if the
Overlap Poor target overlap image has enough shared targets
connected to the other previously
taken images.

Incorrect target overlap

636
 Indicator Icon Status Description

Distinct image

Duplicated image When this indicator turns yellow, the

Point of view
laser will blink, warning that a similar
distinctiveness
image was previously taken.
*This indicator will never turn red
as it is not a problem to take
- similar images. However it should
not improve the photogrammetric
model.

Correct distance

The camera stand-off distance from the

scene.

Distance meter l Min distance: 1.500 m

Too close (step back)
l Max distance: 4.500 m

Too far (step forward)

For details, see the Creating a Photogrammetry Model section.

637
Optional Accessories
Combine optional accessories with the MaxSHOT Next for flexibility and ease- of- use during the
photogrammetric model creation.

Optical probing starter kit

This kit provides specialized optical probing accessories for measurements with the MaxSHOT Next and
the C-Track.

Overview Accessories Qty. Description

Glass-protected
magnetic reflector-12 10 Target for measuring 3D deviation.
mm

Hole positioning SBR- Half-spherical target for radial

8
1.5-12 mm location.

Edge location TCR-12 Target for locating edges and

4
mm surfaces.

Hole positioning SBR- Half-spherical target for radial

2
0.5-6 mm location.

Rigid plastic case with protective

Carrying case 1
foam.

Rigid supports for coded targets kit

This kit provides target accessories for an easy optical measurement of uneven surfaces.

638
 Accessories Qty. Description
Support plates 20 Flat steel plate to fix coded targets.
Angled steel plate to fix coded
Angled plates 10
targets.
Magnets to fix the plates on the
Small magnets 50
object.
Rigid plastic case with protective
Carrying case 1
foam.

639
Invar long scale bar extension kit

Accessories Qty.
Invar extension rod - 1 meter 4
Invar extension rod - 0.5 meter 2
Extension connecting screws 4
Target mounts 4
Swivel targets 4
Coded target clips 4
Scale bar supports 4
Carrying case 1

To assemble a custom 5-m Invar scale bar

1. Install scale bar supports on the Invar extension rods to prevent them from rolling or sagging. These
scale bar supports can be fitted on many positions along the extension rods.
2. Assemble all the extension rods together end-to-end by inserting extension connecting screws in the
3/8" x 24 internal threads located at each extremity of the extension rods.
3. Fix a 25-mm target mount on each end of the rod assembly and make sure to completely insert the
swivel targets in them.
4. Fix a coded target clip on each target mount as shown in the image.

640
641
Extension pole and accessories
Overview Accessories Qty. Description
3.3-meter-long
(130 in.)
professional
extension pole
for camera
mounting.
This extension
Telescopic extension pole 1 pole can be
mounted on the
MaxSHOT Next
for hard- to-
reach
photographic
views.

Multi-angle
Adapter 1
camera adapter.

Bluetooth remote control* Bluetooth

* Windows 10 / Windows 11 ready
remote
controller which
1
* Tapping Play/Pause, Next track, Previous track, Volume up emulates the
and/or Volume down on a computer keyboard (or any key shutter button
bound to these functions) also emulates the shutter button.
of the camera.

642
Health Care Partner 3D

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

Highly accurate, portable and intuitive, the Health Care Partner 3D scanner is a perfect alternative to
traditional body measurement techniques. The precision and speed of this self-positioning, handheld 3D
scanner are fully adapted to the medical field.

The Health Care Partner 3D scanner projects a white light fixed pattern onto the surface to scan. The
distortion of such pattern allows the positioning of the surface and the acquisition of its 3D data, which
is made over the entire light pattern. The positioning can also be achieved through the detection of
retroreflective targets placed on or around the surface, each target being surrounded by a minimal free
surface of 15 mm. This technique is used for most accurate results or when the part does not provide
sufficient geometry information.

The positioning is thus totally contact- free since the scanner relies on shape recognition and
retroreflective targets to locate scanned data in the 3D space. Combining retroreflective targets with
geometry information is a technique called intelligent hybrid positioning.

643
644
Hardware and Components
The Health Care Partner 3D scanner features a USB camera surrounded by a set of 4 white LEDs and a
white light pattern projector.

1. Set of 4 LEDs

2. White light pattern projector

3. Trigger

4. Camera

The scanner and all the necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a custom
foam insert. The user calibration plate is located under the foam.

645
1. Software installer

2. USB cable

3. Positioning targets

4. Health Care Partner 3D scanner

5. Power supply

646
Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning
The scanner requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light pattern on the
object. The pattern's distortion on the object is recorded by 1 digital camera. The camera is at the top of
the scanner. The acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is
used to build the surface using real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and positioning
targets, to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee
accuracy. The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

647
System Connection
Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into a wall outlet or a power bar.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Plug the USB cable into 1 of the computer's USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 ports.

4. Finally, plug the USB cable connector into the scanner.

648
To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

649
System Calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. The calibration
uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 10 positions.
To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter.

3. Position the scanner at approximately 20 cm (8 in) from the center of the user calibration
plate, at a perpendicular angle.

4. Press the trigger button and slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the
white square with the green square in the center. Once the first measurement is taken, lock
your arm and gradually move the scanner upwards for subsequent measurements. Ten
(10) measurements are required for calibration.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

There is 1 zone to look at:

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If all these steps fail, contact Customer Support.

650
System Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter feature allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its cameras' shutter speed for better surface detection. Carried out in
real time, the Automatic shutter mode optimizes scanning parameters. It works well if the light pattern is
entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrast colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

If the scanner does not detect the object to scan, or for parts with different colors and/or reflection
properties, we recommend manually adjusting the cameras' shutter speed. This will provide optimal
surface detection. The configuration parameters can be modified at all times, even without stopping the
acquisition process.

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to the object and at a stand-off distance of ~40 cm from it,
and press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the light pattern is as yellow as possible. This slider controls the exposure
displayed in milliseconds.

b. For parts with a uniform color / texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part's surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Four statuses (colors) are used to set optimal shutter speed:

651
 l No detection (black): No surface is detected.

l Underexposed (gray): The cameras hardly perceive the light pattern reflection. There is not
enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a mesh from the surface.
The shutter speed should be increased.

l Optimal (yellow): The reflection of the light pattern is clean and defined. The surface
calculation is made under ideal circumstances.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the light pattern is so intense the cameras are dazzled. The
pattern is not clearly defined and may lead to a wrong reconstruction of the surface or an
unusual amount of noise in the data. The shutter speed should be decreased.

The configuration can be modified during the scan so different strategies can be used for scanning
multicolor parts. In the case of low contrast, a compromise can be reached between the different colors,
which still provides good light pattern detection. However, in the case of high contrast, it is
recommended to scan 1 section of the object, to change the configuration and to complete the scan. No
need to stop scanning to access the Configuration dialog.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

652
Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Health Care Partner 3D is an intelligent scanner self-positioning itself based on the object geometry. In
the case of flat or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.
For optimal scan results, it is also recommended to add white powder on more complex surfaces.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 20 mm and 100 mm from each other.

The use of a turntable could be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

653
Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

l The scanner stand-off distance is 40 cm (~16 in).

l Its field of view goes from 30 to 55 cm (~12 to 22 in).

HCP scanner

Screen indicators
While scanning, a distance meter is displayed on the left side of the screen, showing the distance
between the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the
scanner.
Distance meter

654
 l Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

l Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

l Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

LEDs indicators:

1. Blue LED to indicate the scanner is running.

2. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

3. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

4. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

When the scanner loses tracking, the 2 red LEDs light up.

655
Positioning status
This feature provides indications on positioning issues and tips to solve the problem.

Status indicator Tips

Not enough visible data.

l Change the scanner angle or adjust the distance from the object.

l Adjust the shutter speed.

Frame impossible to
position.
l Aim the scanner at the last positioned frame or go back to any of
the previously captured targets.

Lack of recognizable
features.

l Apply 1 or a few targets.

Position ambiguity.

l Put 1 or a few targets close to the ambiguity spots to

differentiate one from another.

Shape slippage indicators

Arrows show which sliding directions are causing the positioning problems.

l Yellow arrow: Positioning is still acceptable but has a slight ambiguity.

l Red arrow: Unacceptable positioning.

Detection mode

656
The Detection mode scanner parameter allows selecting a mode in the drop-down menu according to
the part surface finish. This mode can be changed while scanning.

l Uniform surface: Default mode used with uniform color and geometrical texture.

l Textured surface: Mode used with non-uniform color or geometrical texture.

l Automatic: Mode adapting to the surface depending on its color and geometrical texture.

Super adhesive retroreflective targets

The super adhesive targets are suited to use with the scanner. They are hypoallergenic, safe and made of
a plaster type adhesive. They provide good adhesion to both skin and fabric.

There must be a minimum of 15 mm around each target.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, respect a certain stand-off distance. Any
data out of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost because it allows choosing where to
resume the scan. It also enables moving the surface around and selecting a different area.

657
Another option is to click the surface to decide the area where to resume the scan. To resume the
scanning process, point the scanner on this area. If the area selected does not contain enough
positioning information, the rectangle will become red and a warning message will be displayed.

658
Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

This function corrects positioning errors, when the object geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous. It can be used during the scanning process or during post-processing.
In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in yellow
in the 3D viewer.
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frames using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple frames must be deleted.
When used for post-processing, surface reconstruction will be required after deleting the frames.
The frames included in the selected area will appear in red.

This function is available with Go!SCAN and Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners.

For details, see the Delete Frames section.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

659
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

Creaform ACADEMIA 3D easy- to- use professional- grade 3D scanners represent the perfect ally for
teachers to put the power of 3D digitization into their students' hands.
Used for a wide variety of engineering applications, such as product development, reverse engineering
and inspection, Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners project a white light fixed pattern onto the surface to
scan. The distortion of such pattern allows the positioning of the surface and the acquisition of its 3D
data, which is made over the entire light pattern.
To generate optimized polygonal mesh models, the scanners use a software platform called VXelements.

ACADEMIA 10 ACADEMIA 20 ACADEMIA 50

660
ACADEMIA 10

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

ACADEMIA 10

661
Hardware and Components
The ACADEMIA 10 features a digital camera surrounded by a set of four white LEDs and a white light
pattern projector.

1. Set of 4 LEDs

2. White light pattern projector

3. Trigger

4. Camera

The scanner and all the necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a custom
foam insert. The user calibration plate is located under the foam.

662
1. VXelements software installer

2. USB cable

3. Positioning targets

4. ACADEMIA 10

5. Power supply

663
Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning
The scanner requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light pattern on the
object. The pattern's distortion on the object is recorded by 1 digital camera. The camera is at the top of
the scanner. The acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is
used to build the surface using real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and positioning
targets, to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee
accuracy. The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

664
System Connection

All Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners connect the same way.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into a wall outlet or a power bar.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Plug the USB cable into 1 of the computer's USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 ports.

4. Finally, plug the USB cable connector into the scanner.

665
To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

666
System Calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. The calibration
uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 10 positions.
To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter.

3. Position the scanner at approximately 20 cm (8 in) from the center of the user calibration
plate, at a perpendicular angle.

4. Press the trigger button and slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the
white square with the green square in the center. Once the first measurement is taken, lock
your arm and gradually move the scanner upwards for subsequent measurements. Ten
(10) measurements are required for calibration.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

ACADEMIA 10
There is 1 zone to look at:

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50

There are 4 zones to look at:

667
 l Top zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner from left to right to center the red bar.

l Left zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner up and down to adjust the red bar.

l Right zone: Try to center the red indicator with the green area by moving your scanner closer
or away from the user calibration plate. The red bar goes up each time a measurement is
successfully taken. The green area will also change position with each measurement. This zone
indicates the scanner's height.

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If all these steps fail, contact Customer Support.

668
System Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter feature allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its cameras' shutter speed for better surface detection. Carried out in
real time, the Automatic shutter mode optimizes scanning parameters. It works well if the light pattern is
entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrast colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

If the scanner does not detect the object to scan, or for parts with different colors and/or reflection
properties, we recommend manually adjusting the cameras' shutter speed. This will provide optimal
surface detection. The configuration parameters can be modified at all times, even without stopping the
acquisition process.

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to the object and at a stand-off distance of ~40 cm from it,
and press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the light pattern is as yellow as possible. This slider controls the exposure
displayed in milliseconds.

b. For parts with a uniform color / texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part's surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Four statuses (colors) are used to set optimal shutter speed:

669
 l No detection (black): No surface is detected.

l Underexposed (gray): The cameras hardly perceive the light pattern reflection. There is not
enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a mesh from the surface.
The shutter speed should be increased.

l Optimal (yellow): The reflection of the light pattern is clean and defined. The surface
calculation is made under ideal circumstances.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the light pattern is so intense the cameras are dazzled. The
pattern is not clearly defined and may lead to a wrong reconstruction of the surface or an
unusual amount of noise in the data. The shutter speed should be decreased.

The configuration can be modified during the scan so different strategies can be used for scanning
multicolor parts. In the case of low contrast, a compromise can be reached between the different colors,
which still provides good light pattern detection. However, in the case of high contrast, it is
recommended to scan 1 section of the object, to change the configuration and to complete the scan. No
need to stop scanning to access the Configuration dialog.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

670
Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners self-position themselves based on the object geometry. In the case of
flat or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.
For optimal scan results, it is also recommended to add white powder on more complex surfaces.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 20 mm and 100 mm from each other.

The use of a turntable could be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

671
Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

l The scanner stand-off distance is between 38 cm (~15 in) and 40 cm (~16 in).

l Its field of view goes from 30 to 55 cm (~12 to 22 in).

ACADEMIA 10

ACADEMIA 20

672
ACADEMIA 50

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, respect a certain stand-off distance. Any
data out of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.

Screen indicators
While scanning, a distance meter is displayed on the left side of the screen, showing the distance
between the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the
scanner.
Distance meter

673
 l Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

l Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

l Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

LEDs indicators:

1. Blue LED to indicate the scanner is running.

2. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

3. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

4. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

When the scanner loses tracking, the 2 red LEDs light up.

Positioning status
This feature provides indications on positioning issues and tips to solve the problem.

674
 Status indicator Tips

Not enough visible data.

l Change the scanner angle or adjust the distance from the object.

l Adjust the shutter speed.

Frame impossible to
position.
l Aim the scanner at the last positioned frame or go back to any of
the previously captured targets.

Lack of recognizable
features.

l Apply 1 or a few targets.

Position ambiguity.

l Put 1 or a few targets close to the ambiguity spots to

differentiate one from another.

Shape slippage indicators

Arrows show which sliding directions are causing the positioning problems.

l Yellow arrow: Positioning is still acceptable but has a slight ambiguity.

l Red arrow: Unacceptable positioning.

Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only)

The Detection mode scanner parameter allows selecting a mode in the drop-down menu according to
the part surface finish. This mode can be changed while scanning.

675
 l Uniform surface: Default mode used with uniform color and geometrical texture.

l Textured surface: Mode used with non-uniform color or geometrical texture.

l Automatic: Mode adapting to the surface depending on its color and geometrical texture.

Super adhesive retroreflective targets

The super adhesive targets are suited to use with the scanner. They are hypoallergenic, safe and made of
a plaster type adhesive. They provide good adhesion to both skin and fabric.

There must be a minimum of 15 mm around each target.

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost because it allows choosing where to
resume the scan. It also enables moving the surface around and selecting a different area.

676
Another option is to click the surface to decide the area where to resume the scan. To resume the
scanning process, point the scanner on this area. If the area selected does not contain enough
positioning information, the rectangle will become red and a warning message will be displayed.

Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

This function corrects positioning errors, when the object geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous. It can be used during the scanning process or during post-processing.

677
In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in yellow
in the 3D viewer.
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frames using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple frames must be deleted.
When used for post-processing, surface reconstruction will be required after deleting the frames.
The frames included in the selected area will appear in red.

This function is available with Go!SCAN and Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners.

For more information, see the Delete Frames section.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

678
ACADEMIA 20

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

ACADEMIA 20

679
Hardware and Components
The scanner features 2 digital cameras and 1 digital color camera, each surrounded by a set of 4 white
LEDs, and a white light pattern projector.

1. Top camera

2. White LEDs

3. Bottom camera

4. White light projector

5. Color camera

6. Trigger

The scanner and all the necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a custom
foam insert. The user calibration plate is located under the foam.

680
1. VXelements software installer

2. USB cable

3. Positioning targets

681
4. Power supply

5. ACADEMIA 20

6. 15 triangular references

7. 3D scanning turntable (if purchased as an option)

682
Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning
The scanner requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light pattern on the
object. The pattern's distortion on the object is recorded by 1 digital camera. The camera is at the top of
the scanner. The acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is
used to build the surface using real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and positioning
targets, to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee
accuracy. The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

683
System Connection

All Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners connect the same way.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into a wall outlet or a power bar.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Plug the USB cable into 1 of the computer's USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 ports.

4. Finally, plug the USB cable connector into the scanner.

684
To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

685
System Calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. The calibration
uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 10 positions.
To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter.

3. Position the scanner at approximately 20 cm (8 in) from the center of the user calibration
plate, at a perpendicular angle.

4. Press the trigger button and slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the
white square with the green square in the center. Once the first measurement is taken, lock
your arm and gradually move the scanner upwards for subsequent measurements. Ten
(10) measurements are required for calibration.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

ACADEMIA 10
There is 1 zone to look at:

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50

There are 4 zones to look at:

686
 l Top zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner from left to right to center the red bar.

l Left zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner up and down to adjust the red bar.

l Right zone: Try to center the red indicator with the green area by moving your scanner closer
or away from the user calibration plate. The red bar goes up each time a measurement is
successfully taken. The green area will also change position with each measurement. This zone
indicates the scanner's height.

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If all these steps fail, contact Customer Support.

687
System Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter feature allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its cameras' shutter speed for better surface detection. Carried out in
real time, the Automatic shutter mode optimizes scanning parameters. It works well if the light pattern is
entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrast colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

If the scanner does not detect the object to scan, or for parts with different colors and/or reflection
properties, we recommend manually adjusting the cameras' shutter speed. This will provide optimal
surface detection. The configuration parameters can be modified at all times, even without stopping the
acquisition process.

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to the object and at a stand-off distance of ~40 cm from it,
and press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the light pattern is as yellow as possible. This slider controls the exposure
displayed in milliseconds.

b. For parts with a uniform color / texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part's surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Four statuses (colors) are used to set optimal shutter speed:

688
 l No detection (black): No surface is detected.

l Underexposed (gray): The cameras hardly perceive the light pattern reflection. There is not
enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a mesh from the surface.
The shutter speed should be increased.

l Optimal (yellow): The reflection of the light pattern is clean and defined. The surface
calculation is made under ideal circumstances.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the light pattern is so intense the cameras are dazzled. The
pattern is not clearly defined and may lead to a wrong reconstruction of the surface or an
unusual amount of noise in the data. The shutter speed should be decreased.

The configuration can be modified during the scan so different strategies can be used for scanning
multicolor parts. In the case of low contrast, a compromise can be reached between the different colors,
which still provides good light pattern detection. However, in the case of high contrast, it is
recommended to scan 1 section of the object, to change the configuration and to complete the scan. No
need to stop scanning to access the Configuration dialog.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

689
Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners self-position themselves based on the object geometry. In the case of
flat or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.
For optimal scan results, it is also recommended to add white powder on more complex surfaces.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 20 mm and 100 mm from each other.

The use of a turntable could be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

690
Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

l The scanner stand-off distance is between 38 cm (~15 in) and 40 cm (~16 in).

l Its field of view goes from 30 to 55 cm (~12 to 22 in).

ACADEMIA 10

ACADEMIA 20

691
ACADEMIA 50

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, respect a certain stand-off distance. Any
data out of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.

Screen indicators
While scanning, a distance meter is displayed on the left side of the screen, showing the distance
between the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the
scanner.
Distance meter

692
 l Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

l Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

l Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

LEDs indicators:

1. Blue LED to indicate the scanner is running.

2. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

3. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

4. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

When the scanner loses tracking, the 2 red LEDs light up.

Positioning status
This feature provides indications on positioning issues and tips to solve the problem.

693
 Status indicator Tips

Not enough visible data.

l Change the scanner angle or adjust the distance from the object.

l Adjust the shutter speed.

Frame impossible to
position.
l Aim the scanner at the last positioned frame or go back to any of
the previously captured targets.

Lack of recognizable
features.

l Apply 1 or a few targets.

Position ambiguity.

l Put 1 or a few targets close to the ambiguity spots to

differentiate one from another.

Shape slippage indicators

Arrows show which sliding directions are causing the positioning problems.

l Yellow arrow: Positioning is still acceptable but has a slight ambiguity.

l Red arrow: Unacceptable positioning.

Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only)

The Detection mode scanner parameter allows selecting a mode in the drop-down menu according to
the part surface finish. This mode can be changed while scanning.

694
 l Uniform surface: Default mode used with uniform color and geometrical texture.

l Textured surface: Mode used with non-uniform color or geometrical texture.

l Automatic: Mode adapting to the surface depending on its color and geometrical texture.

Super adhesive retroreflective targets

The super adhesive targets are suited to use with the scanner. They are hypoallergenic, safe and made of
a plaster type adhesive. They provide good adhesion to both skin and fabric.

There must be a minimum of 15 mm around each target.

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost because it allows choosing where to
resume the scan. It also enables moving the surface around and selecting a different area.

695
Another option is to click the surface to decide the area where to resume the scan. To resume the
scanning process, point the scanner on this area. If the area selected does not contain enough
positioning information, the rectangle will become red and a warning message will be displayed.

Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

This function corrects positioning errors, when the object geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous. It can be used during the scanning process or during post-processing.

696
In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in yellow
in the 3D viewer.
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frames using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple frames must be deleted.
When used for post-processing, surface reconstruction will be required after deleting the frames.
The frames included in the selected area will appear in red.

This function is available with Go!SCAN and Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners.

For more information, see the Delete Frames section.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

697
ACADEMIA 50

CAUTION: Some people may experience a seizure when exposed to certain visual
images, including flashing lights or patterns. These seizures may include symptoms
such as lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of
arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness.
Immediately stop using the scanner and consult a doctor if you experience any of
these symptoms while using this product.

ACADEMIA 50

698
Hardware and Components
The ACADEMIA 50 features two digital cameras and one digital color camera, each surrounded by a set
of four white LEDs, and a white light pattern projector.

1. Top camera

2. White LEDs

3. Color camera

4. White light projector

5. Bottom camera

6. Trigger

The scanner and all the necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case equipped with a custom
foam insert. The user calibration plate is located under the foam.

699
1. VXelements software installer

2. USB cable

3. Positioning targets

4. Power supply

5. ACADEMIA 50

700
Operating Principles
Geometry-based positioning
The scanner requires geometry in order to position itself. The projector emits a white light pattern on the
object. The pattern's distortion on the object is recorded by 1 digital camera. The camera is at the top of
the scanner. The acquisition is made over the entire light pattern. The geometry information collected is
used to build the surface using real-time positioning.

Intelligent hybrid positioning

The scanner detects positioning targets on and around the object. Intelligent hybrid positioning
combines the positioning targets provided with the geometry information in order to provide more
accurate results. This feature always uses all the information available, the geometry and positioning
targets, to provide positioning. It does so while ensuring that sufficient data is available to guarantee
accuracy. The built-in intelligence also prevents the acquisition of inaccurately positioned frames.

701
System Connection

All Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners connect the same way.

Connection steps

1. Plug the power supply into a wall outlet or a power bar.

2. Connect the power supply to the USB cable.

3. Plug the USB cable into 1 of the computer's USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 ports.

4. Finally, plug the USB cable connector into the scanner.

702
To disconnect the scanner:

1. Unplug the power and the USB cables from the scanner.

2. Follow the desired sequence afterwards.

703
System Calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Optimizing the calibration allows getting back to the
initial measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so each time you use the scanner. The calibration
uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the scanner to 10 positions.
To optimize the scanner calibration

1. Click in the system panel or access the application through Configure | Scanner |
Calibration.

2. Place the user calibration plate on a stable plane surface, with no reflective object near the
latter.

3. Position the scanner at approximately 20 cm (8 in) from the center of the user calibration
plate, at a perpendicular angle.

4. Press the trigger button and slowly move the scanner away from the plate, matching the
white square with the green square in the center. Once the first measurement is taken, lock
your arm and gradually move the scanner upwards for subsequent measurements. Ten
(10) measurements are required for calibration.

5. Click Yes to accept the optimization.

Best practice suggests performing calibration with the plate inside the case.

ACADEMIA 10
There is 1 zone to look at:

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

ACADEMIA 20 and ACADEMIA 50

There are 4 zones to look at:

704
 l Top zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner from left to right to center the red bar.

l Left zone: Try to maintain the top red indicator as centered as possible in the green area. Move
your scanner up and down to adjust the red bar.

l Right zone: Try to center the red indicator with the green area by moving your scanner closer
or away from the user calibration plate. The red bar goes up each time a measurement is
successfully taken. The green area will also change position with each measurement. This zone
indicates the scanner's height.

l Center zone: Try to match the white square with the green square. The green square's size
changes indicating the distance required between the scanner and the user calibration plate.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If all these steps fail, contact Customer Support.

705
System Configuration

Automatic shutter
Since reflection properties differ from one surface to another, the Automatic shutter feature allows the
scanner to automatically adjust its cameras' shutter speed for better surface detection. Carried out in
real time, the Automatic shutter mode optimizes scanning parameters. It works well if the light pattern is
entirely contained within the object, otherwise it can be used as an initial approximation tool.
It is recommended to use Automatic shutter while scanning mostly monochromatic and reflective
objects. Otherwise, the check box should be cleared when 2 contrast colors or distinct reflection
properties appear in the same field of view.

To configure the scanner

If the scanner does not detect the object to scan, or for parts with different colors and/or reflection
properties, we recommend manually adjusting the cameras' shutter speed. This will provide optimal
surface detection. The configuration parameters can be modified at all times, even without stopping the
acquisition process.

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Hold the scanner perpendicular to the object and at a stand-off distance of ~40 cm from it,
and press the trigger button.

3. To adjust the shutter speed, 2 options are available:

a. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel
so the light pattern is as yellow as possible. This slider controls the exposure
displayed in milliseconds.

b. For parts with a uniform color / texture, click the Auto. adjust button and
hold the scanner perpendicular to the part's surface until the Optimizing
Parameters message disappears.

Four statuses (colors) are used to set optimal shutter speed:

706
 l No detection (black): No surface is detected.

l Underexposed (gray): The cameras hardly perceive the light pattern reflection. There is not
enough information gathered by the software to calculate and build a mesh from the surface.
The shutter speed should be increased.

l Optimal (yellow): The reflection of the light pattern is clean and defined. The surface
calculation is made under ideal circumstances.

l Saturated (red): The reflection of the light pattern is so intense the cameras are dazzled. The
pattern is not clearly defined and may lead to a wrong reconstruction of the surface or an
unusual amount of noise in the data. The shutter speed should be decreased.

The configuration can be modified during the scan so different strategies can be used for scanning
multicolor parts. In the case of low contrast, a compromise can be reached between the different colors,
which still provides good light pattern detection. However, in the case of high contrast, it is
recommended to scan 1 section of the object, to change the configuration and to complete the scan. No
need to stop scanning to access the Configuration dialog.

Configuration preset
Use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To create a preset based on the current shutter value:

l Right-click in the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

It is also possible to create a preset based on the current shutter value

through the system panel by clicking the Save preset link in the connected
device tab.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To activate a preset: Click the preset.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

707
Object Preparation
In order to provide better scan results, the object to scan must be prepared following some simple steps.
Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners self-position themselves based on the object geometry. In the case of
flat or shiny surfaces, positioning targets will provide better scan results.
For optimal scan results, it is also recommended to add white powder on more complex surfaces.

Instructions:

l The object must be clean and free of dirt.

l In the case of a shiny surface, first add powder to the object.

l For both powdered and flat surface objects lacking geometry, apply positioning targets with a
distance of 20 mm and 100 mm from each other.

The use of a turntable could be useful to scan as it allows rotating the object. For
better scan results, apply positioning targets around the object.

708
Acquisition Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

l The scanner stand-off distance is between 38 cm (~15 in) and 40 cm (~16 in).

l Its field of view goes from 30 to 55 cm (~12 to 22 in).

ACADEMIA 10

ACADEMIA 20

709
ACADEMIA 50

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, respect a certain stand-off distance. Any
data out of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.

Screen indicators
While scanning, a distance meter is displayed on the left side of the screen, showing the distance
between the scanner and the object. The distance meter is also represented by 3 LEDs on top of the
scanner.
Distance meter

710
 l Red / Yellow LEDs to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

l Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

l Dark Blue / Light Blue LEDs to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

LEDs indicators:

1. Blue LED to indicate the scanner is running.

2. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too close to the object: move backward.

3. Green LED to indicate the scanner is at the correct distance.

4. Red LED to indicate the scanner is too far from the object: move forward.

When the scanner loses tracking, the 2 red LEDs light up.

Positioning status
This feature provides indications on positioning issues and tips to solve the problem.

711
 Status indicator Tips

Not enough visible data.

l Change the scanner angle or adjust the distance from the object.

l Adjust the shutter speed.

Frame impossible to
position.
l Aim the scanner at the last positioned frame or go back to any of
the previously captured targets.

Lack of recognizable
features.

l Apply 1 or a few targets.

Position ambiguity.

l Put 1 or a few targets close to the ambiguity spots to

differentiate one from another.

Shape slippage indicators

Arrows show which sliding directions are causing the positioning problems.

l Yellow arrow: Positioning is still acceptable but has a slight ambiguity.

l Red arrow: Unacceptable positioning.

Detection mode (ACADEMIA 10 only)

The Detection mode scanner parameter allows selecting a mode in the drop-down menu according to
the part surface finish. This mode can be changed while scanning.

712
 l Uniform surface: Default mode used with uniform color and geometrical texture.

l Textured surface: Mode used with non-uniform color or geometrical texture.

l Automatic: Mode adapting to the surface depending on its color and geometrical texture.

Super adhesive retroreflective targets

The super adhesive targets are suited to use with the scanner. They are hypoallergenic, safe and made of
a plaster type adhesive. They provide good adhesion to both skin and fabric.

There must be a minimum of 15 mm around each target.

Resume scan

Click to Resume scan.

This function is very useful especially when position tracking is lost because it allows choosing where to
resume the scan. It also enables moving the surface around and selecting a different area.

713
Another option is to click the surface to decide the area where to resume the scan. To resume the
scanning process, point the scanner on this area. If the area selected does not contain enough
positioning information, the rectangle will become red and a warning message will be displayed.

Delete frames

Click to Delete frames.

This function corrects positioning errors, when the object geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous. It can be used during the scanning process or during post-processing.

714
In the Delete frames expanding panel, it is possible to delete highlighted images, to review the list of
affected frames and/or to pinpoint the incorrect ones. Frames selected from the list will appear in yellow
in the 3D viewer.
All frames will be selected when expanding the list of frames. It is possible to select (or deselect) multiple
frames using the Shift key, which might be useful when multiple frames must be deleted.
When used for post-processing, surface reconstruction will be required after deleting the frames.
The frames included in the selected area will appear in red.

This function is available with Go!SCAN and Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanners.

For more information, see the Delete Frames section.

Preview mode

The Preview mode allows decreasing calculation time and seeing the final result rapidly without
stopping the scan completely.

715
R-Series Products

Pay attention to text associated with warning symbols. For details, see the Safety
Notice section.

The R-Series product line includes:

MetraSCAN 3D-R solution
CUBE-R solution

716
Copyright R-Series
© Creaform Inc., [2002-2024]. All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this User Manual
may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission
of Creaform.
Creaform takes no responsibility if errors or inaccuracies were to appear in this document.
VXelements and its logo, as well as VXscan-R, VXscan-R Plan, VXscan-R Execute, R-Series I/O
Module, MetraSCAN 3D-R, CUBE-R, R-Series Autocalibration Kit, R-Series Industrial Computer,
and C-Track are trademarks of Creaform Inc.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
It is totally forbidden to reproduce, duplicate, dissemble, decompile, reverse engineer, sell,
transfer or assign, in any manner the scanner, the software and the system.

R-Series I/O Module version 11.2.0

Last modified in May 2024

717
What's New R-Series
I/O Module 11.2.1

Bug fixes

l Fixed RAM memory leak when running a loop of scan with a load session.

l Fixed TriangleModel not using active alignments.

l Fixed the Environment Compensation window being shown all the time.

Tested software
I/O Module

Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2024 IR1
PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2
Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF5

Metrolog i-Robot

Software Version
i-Robot V20 SP1 HF5
CUBE-R post install 5/16/2024
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

Previous versions

I/O Module 11.2.0

PolyWorks inspection

l PolyWorks workspace is now defined in Session settings. This allows different workspaces to be
used, if desired.

l Dataloop: New option to clean up disk space at a defined frequency via PolyWorks Dataloop.

718
Bug fixes

l Fixed an issue that prevented opening the options window.

l Fixed an issue where there was no fault feedback due to missing licenses.

l Fixed a bug where a PolyWorks inspection would be performed even when it should not have
been.

Tested software
I/O Module

Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2023 IR11.1 / 2024 IR0
PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2022 IR11.2
Metrolog X4 V20 SP1 HF2
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

Metrolog i-Robot

Software Version
i-Robot V20 SP1 HF3
CUBE-R post install 3/15/2024
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 11.1.1

Bug fixes

l Fixed an issue that could cause a crash when doing a surface best-fit for a clipping reference.

l Fixed an issue where a wrong "id number" would be created for the part when sent to
PolyWorks.

l Fixed an issue with the status for "Calibration request" when the system status is at "Calibration
too old".

719
Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2023 IR8.,1
PolyWorks Dataloop MS 2023 IR11.2
i-Robot V20 GA HF2
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 11.1.0

Enhancements

l Polyworks|DataLoop now supported.

l Log files now automatically saved to file. Includes management settings.

Bug fixes

l Fixed an issue where the software would crash after a New Session.

l Fixed an issue where the Robot LanIp was unavailable in the list.

l Fixed a problem where no message asking to save the project was displayed when closing
Polyworks.

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2023 IR3.1
Metrolog V19 SP1 HF4
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 11.0.1

Bug fixes

l Fixed an issue with the acceptance test where session settings were not accessible because of a
relative path.

720
 l Fixed an issue with the import template from VXscan-R if the name contained a symbol.

l Fixed an issue where it was not possible to launch a photogrammetry during the acceptance
test.

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2023 IR2
Metrolog V19 HF5
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 11.0.0

Features

Import from VXscan-R

l Allows importing the files exported from VXscan-R.

l New scanner configurations tab in the session settings configuration.

Ethernet/IP compatibility

l The Ethernet/IP Class 1 will now be compatible with major robot brands. (Requires setting new
parameters. See guide.)

Communication

l Action and parameter communication channels replace action and configuration

communication channels.

l Parameters are available for the Load configuration and Load scanner configuration actions.

Actions

l New

l Load configuration

721
 l Load scanner configuration

l Import session parameters

l Possible to select elements to import between:

n All

n Scan parameters

n Resolution template

n Clipping objects

n Positioning targets

Bug Fixes
R-Series/I/O Module

l Fixed an issue where unwanted events could be received when restarting a calibration.

l Fixed an unwanted error message when trying to delete a configuration that does not exist.

l Fixed an issue where System busy and System faulty message could be visible at the same time.

l Fixed an issue which prevented an error message which informs the user when a Load
Configuration failed.

l Fixed an issue where a Command Success OK was returned after a load session even if nothing
was loaded.

l Fixed an issue where the session setting name could differ between I/O Module and the
configuration folder.

Test software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2023
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V18 SP2 HF3
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

722
I/O Module 10.0.4

Bug fixes
R-Series/I/O Module

l Fixed a crash when switching between Show Scan Window and Use Operation UI while Run in
traybar is active.
l Fixed an issue preventing to import scan positioning target with a HandySCAN BLACK.

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2022 IR8.1
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V18 SP2 HF3
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 10.0.3

Bug fixes
R-Series/I/O Module

l Fixed a crash when using VXtrack with VXelements API.

l Fixed an issue where there was no message to inform that a graphic format was not supported.

l Fixed an issue where the cancel finalize prompt would close the scan window.

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2022 IR6.1
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V18 SP1 HF2
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 10.0.2

723
Bug fixes

l Fixed a bug where the progress bar would stay on screen when opening a session.

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks 2022 IR4
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V18 GA HF4
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 10.0.1

Bug fixes

l Fixed an where the Polyworks inspection results would not be available when they should have
been

l Fixed an issue with the auto-detect and append mode where only the added targets would be
in the referential

Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2022 IR2
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V18 HF1
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

I/O Module 10.0.0

Bug fixes

l Fixed a crash that would sometimes occur after a MetraSCAN 750-R calibration

724
Tested software
Software Version
PolyWorks MS 2021 IR9
Metrolog X4 i-Robot V17 SP1 HF3
(Metrolog drivers v01.46 for FANUC R30iA, R30iB, R30iB+)

725
Safety Information

General safety guidelines must be followed with R-Series products. More specific
notifications are included in the relevant sections of the manual.

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions could result in malfunction of or

damage to the equipment, electrical hazard, fire, injury, or death. Read all the
instructions carefully before using this product.

Safety lockout instruction

Standard voltage
CUBE-R electrical connections
Customer liability

Safety lockout instruction

For any intervention on the equipment (repair, maintenance, adjustment, etc.), it is the responsibility of
the people making the intervention to respect the LOCKOUT security standard available in the country at
the moment of the intervention OR any internal policy established on the installation site.
Content specific to CUBE-R:
The equipment targeted can be any of the following CUBE-R components such as:

l Rolling door

l Robot

Standard voltage

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

The CUBE-R has been designed to operate on 480 V, 3-phase supplied power. It is the customer's
responsibility to check this is the correct voltage configuration available on-site and to adapt it if not.

726
CUBE-R electrical connections

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

CAUTION: Cables must be connected to robot and to the door by a certified

electrician.

Customer-supplied properly rated power source, plug and cables as specified.

#1 Computer work station

HP Z6 Industrial Computer power supply (default)

l Rated voltage range: 100-127 VAC or 200-240 VAC

l Rated line frequency: 5 0-60Hz

l Current protection: 15 Amp (fuse or breaker with B characteristic or equivalent)

For the HP Z6 technical specification document, see HP's website.

#2 Robot controller

l Operating voltage: 480Vac

l Phase: 3

l Frequency: 50-60Hz

l Current protection: 5 Amp (Fuse or breaker with B or C characteristic or equivalent).

l Connector: No connector or cable provided.

#3 Rolling door

l Operating voltage: 200 - 480Vac

l Phase: 3

l Frequency: 50-60Hz

727
 l Current protection: 16 Amp (Fuse or breaker with B or C characteristic or equivalent).

l Connector: No connector or cable provided.

Customer liability

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

Risk assessment
The CUBE- R was subject to a preliminary study of risk assessment based on standard operating
conditions defined as of the study date. A final risk assessment will have to be done after the final
product implementation to comply with the standards applicable in the country where the product is
being installed as well as to cover every possible situation likely to be encountered in the final use of
the product in its environment and its installation conditions.
It should be noted that the risk assessment will also need to be updated or redone when cell-level
changes may have an impact on the risk assessment as well as on the risk reduction measures. By
"impact" we shall include the basic study parameters (number of operators, operating conditions, etc.)
as well as the adjunction, the modification or the relocation of equipment present in the cell.

Operator liability
Creaform provides a safe product which was the subject of a risk assessment.
Specific physical mechanisms and software configurations have been put in place in this regard.
It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that there is nobody and no debris inside the CUBE-R
before turning on the cell.
The CUBE-R is supplied once its operation mode has been tested and assessed as safe.
Any modifications brought to the product sold and installed by Creaform may result in security risks. In
that case, Creaform shall not be held liable.

Warranties and limitations of liability

Creaform makes no warranties, express or implied, including the warranty of fitness for a particular
purpose, merchantability, title, or against infringement, arising out of this agreement or the use of the
network by the accessing party or users. Creaform will not be responsible for any consequential,
indirect, special, or punitive damages arising out of this agreement. Other than the confidentiality

728
obligations set forth herein, accessing party or users will not be responsible for any consequential,
indirect, special or punitive damages arising out of this agreement.
Any loss or damage occurring to the Accessing Party or Users arising from the use of the Network will
be the sole responsibility of the Accessing Party or Users. Without limiting the foregoing, Creaform will
not be liable to the Accessing Party or Users for: (i) any loss or corruption of Accessing Party data
stored in or transmitted through the Network; (ii) any incorrect results obtained by using the Network;
(iii) any interruption of access or use of the Network for whatever reason; (iv) access of any Accessing
Party data by third parties; or (v) toll fraud in accessing, using or regressing the Network.

729
General Information
This section contains general topics:
Welcome
R-Series Products
R-Series Product Generations
System General Care
Laser Information
Service and Customer Care Program
Assistance
Online Services
System Requirements with R-Series
Product Manager
Software and License Updates
Contact Us

730
Welcome

IMPORTANT: Read the manual carefully before use and keep for future reference.

Pay attention to text associated with warning symbols. For details, see the Safety
Notice section.

Welcome to the R-Series Products User Manual.

To use the R-Series product line, you need to know the programming language of
the robot.

The Contents are available through the table of contents. To search a particular topic or specific
information in the manual, use the Find function available in the PDF reader software.

Information symbols

Note: Information or explanation given for a better understanding.

Tips: Useful information or advice.

ATTENTION: Information given to prevent a potential problem.

Example: Idea or fact used to explain a notion.

This manual follows the International System of Units (SI). Unless otherwise specified, length units are
expressed in millimeters and angle in degrees.
The convention used for the colors of coordinate systems axes is as follows: red=X, green=Y, blue=Z.

731
Training services

Creaform products are not intended to be used by children or persons with

disabilities otherwise properly trained. No special knowledge about measuring
systems in general or Creaform in particular is required.

Creaform Campus offers a complete training package including theory, written exercises, hands- on
practice and manuals.
The trainers are highly qualified application specialists who have been certified following a rigorous
internal training program. They use the measurement devices and software they teach on a daily basis.
Creaform training sessions cover a wide array of metrology- related topics and can take place at a
Creaform office, on your premises, or at any other venue of your choice.
If you need to get training, visit Creaform's website.

732
R-Series Products

Pay attention to text associated with warning symbols. For details, see the Safety
Notice section.

The R-Series product line includes:

MetraSCAN 3D-R solution
CUBE-R solution

733
R-Series Product Generations
MetraSCAN 3D-R solution
Product Generation Model

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD

G3, G4, G4+

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite

734
CUBE-R solution
Product Generation Model

G2 CUBE-R portfolio

CUBE-R Previous
G1
Generation

735
System General Care
Creaform products are made of optical precision parts and must be handled with care to avoid
damaging their internal components and calibration system. They must be carried in their protective
case at all times and must be stored in a dry, dust- free and room temperature environment. We
recommend keeping all devices and accessories in the protective case when not in use.
Prior to starting a project, make sure the working environment is clutter-free and that cables are placed
safely.
Always store the devices following these conditions:

l Storage temperature: 5 to 55°C

l Operation temperature: 5 to 40°C

l Humidity: 10 to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

WARNING: Never open any component of a Creaform technology.

General use

l Always use the device in a clean and dry environment.

l Avoid direct lighting on the optical parts.

l Avoid any discharge (water, oil, etc.) onto the device.1

l Do not immerse the device.

l Do not drop the device and protect it against shocks.

l Do not introduce foreign bodies into the device.

l Leave the protective caps on unused connectors.

1Creaform systems are rated IP50 (per ANSI/IEC 60529- 2004 - Degrees of
Protection Provided by Enclosures – IP Code). Therefore, ingress of dust is not
entirely prevented, but it must not enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with the
satisfactory operation of the equipment. The systems are not protected from
liquids. Always operate in an environment suited to this IP rating.

736
Cords and cables

l Do not fold cables with a curve radius less than 5 cm.

l While scanning, hold the cable with your free hand or place it over your shoulder.

l Do not allow the cables to get caught on objects while moving around.

l If any cable become twisted, take a few moments to unplug and untwist the cable.

l Do not crush cables. For example, do not step on them.

l Only use the device with the original power supply provided.

Metal and plastic parts

To clean the device, use a soft cotton cloth with a small amount of water or a soapy solution.

Do not use solvent to clean the device.

Optical parts

l Spray dry air to remove any particles that may scratch the objectives and lights.

l Clean the objectives and lights with a damp cloth such as a non-abrasive optical towel or a
microfiber cloth.

This also applies to the glass-protected reflectors of the HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN

3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R, user calibration artifact and optical probing accessories.

User calibration plate

The user calibration plate should remain in the protective case.

MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R

Do not put any objects on the case.

737
 l Spray dry air to remove any particles that may scratch the plate.

l Clean the plate with a damp cloth such as a non-abrasive optical towel or a microfiber cloth.

Other products
Do not put any objects on the case except the custom foam insert. Do not touch the retroreflective
targets. If even a single target is damaged, the entire user calibration plate must be replaced.
To clean dirty retroreflective targets:

1. Identify any targets that may be dusty or dirty.

2. Soak a cotton swab in a diluted soap solution (never use alcohol).

3. Gently dab the targets and dry them by covering them with a microfiber towel or tissue
(never rub the targets).

Batteries

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

For details, see the Batteries section.

CUBE-R

Do not use Ammonia-based cleaning products to clean the rolling door and the
side windows located in the partitions (walls).

Components
3rd party

ATI Tool changer

l See the maintenance section of the ATI manual for the QC-11 tool changer (www.ati-ia.com).

738
FANUC robot and positioner

l See the maintenance section of the FANUC manual for M-20i robots.
(https://www.fanuc.com).

ASSA ABLOY door

l See the maintenance section of the ASSA ABLOY manual for the RP300 door
(https://www.assaabloyentrance.us).

IDEC safety laser scanners

l See the maintenance section of the IDEC manual for the SE2L safety laser scanners
(https://us.idec.com/Safety-Components/Safety-Laser-Scanner/SE2L-Series/c/SE2L_
Series).

739
Air supply
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar)

l Filter minimum: 40 microns

l Flow maximum: Negligible

l Connector for pneumatic air tubing pipe hose 6 mm (OD)

l Flexible 6 mm pipe diameter provided (customer must connect to it)

l Customer must provide manometer and regulator on their connection line

Cables

l Minimum dynamic bend radius: Cables attached to or running through the robot must have a
bend radius 60 mm or greater at any point in the robot's motion.

740
Laser Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

The laser label reads:

LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1:2007
<1 mW 400-700nm
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007

741
Service and Customer Care Program

Read the following terms and conditions before using this product.

Standard warranty
Creaform standard warranty coverage period is 1 year, effective from the factory shipping date. This
includes all parts and labor costs for product problems such as material or manufacturing defects.

Customer Care plans

Different care program plans are offered.

For details, visit the website or contact Customer Support.

For details on what is included in the Customer Care plan purchased, see the contract or
contact Sales Support.

Customer Support
Our team of highly qualified technical product specialists will assist with the most complex projects and
will provide advice, tips and tricks on how to fully take advantage of the Creaform technology.
Customer Support is available 24/5. It is also possible to purchase the 24/7 Customer Support option.

Software update
Each year, Creaform releases software updates. Creaform is not liable for any device malfunction due
to the installation of software on custom application or non-certified Creaform computers. For details,
see the System Requirements section.

742
Annual test, certification and calibration of the system
It is recommended to contact Customer Support to perform annual maintenance on the system. A
technical product specialist will explain the procedure and provide a RMA number (Return Merchandise
Authorization), confirming where to send the product (Creafom has several repair centers worldwide).
Fill the checklist to determine which part should be sent to Creaform.
Customers who purchased the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution must return their system to a repair center for
maintenance purposes.
Customers who purchased the CUBE- R solution can choose to have the calibration performed in a
Creaform laboratory or on their premises (on-site).
Follow the instructions given by the Customer Support and look at the checklist prior to shipping.
The Customer Care plan allows fully taking advantage of the high accuracy equipment, consolidating the
investment by keeping the scanner calibrated and in perfect working conditions. While covered by the
Customer Care plan, the customer is invited to download free upgrades of Creaform ; these new
improved versions guarantee to remain on the technological edge. The equipment could also get
quickly serviced, and depending on the plan chosen, a loaner unit can be provided if the repair is taking
longer than expected.

What is not covered

l Components, products or items not specifically listed herein

l Unauthorized repairs performed by third parties, inaccessible products, theft

l Damage caused by conditions beyond Administrator's control such as power surge, rust,
corrosion, infestation, negligence, abuse, misuse or acts of God

Need for service

Contact Customer Support to schedule service.

743
Assistance
Options and support information are available under the Help menu in VXelements.

User manual
Should you have any questions or concerns regarding the software or any other Creaform technology,
see the User Manual (Help | Show user manual). Information on the software version is available: Help
| About VXelements.
To troubleshoot a problem, it is recommended to look at the training notes and the User Manual.

Keyboard shortcuts
See the Mouse and Keyboard Controls section.

Creaform Customer Portal

See the Creaform Online Services section.

If unsure on how to manage devices in the Product Manager or to use the Online
Services, contact Customer Support.

Diagnostic mode
This function is made available for Customer Support. It gathers information on the customer's active
products in the event a system issue needs to be resolved. It is accessible from the Help | Diagnostic
mode after receiving the activation key from Customer Support.

Customer Support
When experiencing issues after the installation and integration of the system, it is possible to consult the
Troubleshooting section. It is recommended to contact Customer Support for assistance. The feature
Create system information file, available under the Help menu, provides relevant information for
Customer Support help (.txt file).
Customer Support may ask to use Help | Launch remote session to troubleshoot issues on the
computer. It will launch TeamViewer software, allowing to share the screen with the Support specialist.

744
Contribute to product improvement by sending information on bugs using Help | Send bug report.
Customer Support is available 24/5 for customers with a valid maintenance plan. It is also possible to
purchase the 24/7 Customer Support option.

Training services
Creaform Campus offers a complete training package including theory, written exercises, hands- on
practice and manuals.
The trainers are highly qualified application specialists who have been certified following a rigorous
internal training program. They use the measurement devices and software they teach on a daily basis.
Creaform training sessions cover a wide array of metrology- related topics and can take place at a
Creaform office, on your premises, or at any other venue of your choice.
If you need to get training, visit Creaform's website.

745
Online Services

Overview
Online Services link the software with the Customer Portal. They provide access to product information,
such as Customer Care plan expiration dates, license expiration dates, last calibration dates. They ensure
that the license files and software version installed on the computer are up to date.
Once the Online Services are activated, simple symbols are displayed in the Product Manager to provide
useful visual feedback giving specific information about applicable products.

An active internet connection is required to use these services.

Online Services options

Online Services options are located in the software general options (Configure | Options | Online
Services).

Disconnected services
When the Online Services option is not activated, cloud license is not available. Also, the Product
Manager is not connected to the Customer Portal. Therefore, it only includes the license and calibration
files that were previously installed on the computer. Products must be managed through the Customer
Portal. It is also possible to set how frequently the software checks for available updates.

To activate the Online Services

Activation for non-registered users

1. Click the Register for Online Services link available in the software options.

2. A web page opens and a request form is loaded.

3. Fill out the form and once it is completed, a registration approval email is sent within the
next 24 hours.

746
Activation for registered users

1. Enter email address and password used at registration.

2. Check the Remember Password box (optional).

3. Click OK.

Forgot your password?

1. Click the Forgot your password? link in the Online Services options to be redirected to the
Customer Portal.

2. Click Forgot your password or need to change your password? in the login dialog.

3. Enter your user name and click Reset/Change my password to receive an email with the link
to change your password.

Online Services indicators

At the top right of the main window, a small indicator gives general information on products:
Indicator Description
Not connected to the Online Services.
No log- in information has been provided and/or the online services have not been
enabled with the check box in the options. Clicking this icon will open the Options
window.

Not connected to the Internet.

A software update is available. Click this icon to download the new version.

Most recent calibration and/or license file(s) is/are available. At least 1 of the connected
sensors (license and/or calibration file) is not up to date. Click this icon to open the
Product Manager.

The software is connected to Online Services and the software version, as well as all
license and calibration files are up to date.

747
Access to support website
Once the Online Services are activated, the Customer Portal can be launched directly from the software
(Help | Creaform Customer Portal).

748
System Requirements for R-Series
Computers supplied by Creaform come with software preinstalled. To install it on another computer
(supplied by Creaform or not), follow the instructions:

Minimum system requirements

All Creaform supplied computers meet the minimum system requirements. Non- Creaform
supplied computers must be approved by Creaform Customer Support before purchase. No
certification or compatibility guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers
than Creaform.

Component MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners

Processor Intel Core™ i7 (6+ cores) - 2.6 GHz or more
Operating
Windows 10 / Windows 11 (64-bit)
system
Graphics card NVIDIA Quadro RTX5000 (16GB), OpenGL 4.5 and higher
Memory 64 GB
Hard drive Solid-state drive (SSD) with at least 200 GB of free space
Display 1920 x 1080
Connecting
ports USB 3.0. (see device specifications for details)

For optimal performance, it is recommended to use a laptop connected to its

power supply. Computer batteries are designed based on air transport regulation
which limit their maximum power. This might limit the scanner performance and
the ability to scan at high resolution on battery.

System performance improves with a more powerful computer.

749
Recommended computer specifications
HP Z6 Industrial Computer (supplied by Creaform)

Component Type
Processor Intel® Xeon™ W5-3435X Processor 3.1 GHz
Operating system Windows 11 Pro for Workstation 64
Graphics card NVIDIA® RTX A5000 (24 GB)
Memory 128 GB (4x32 GB)

l 1x 1TB SSD + 1x 512 GB:

nHP Z Turbo Drive 1TB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

Hard drive nHP Z Turbo Drive 512GB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

At lease 200 GBs of free space must be available.

10x USB 3.0

3x Gigabit Ethernet ports:

l 2x Allied Telesis AT-2911T/2-901 Dual Port 1GbE NIC (C-

Connecting ports
Track and robot)

l1x Intel Ethernet I225-T1 single Port 2.5GbE PCIe NIC

(local network)

Display output 4x DisplayPort (mDP 1.4) + 2x USB-C

* For Intel I225-T1, all adapters and components must have Gigabit 1000BASE capabilities.

Other considerations
For industrial application, the use of the provided Ethernet-to-USB3 adapter is discouraged, in favor of
an additional PCI-based network interface card. When evaluating the number of required Ethernet ports,
consider whether the host computer requires access to the facility’s Local Area Network.
For use of the R-Series I/O Module, an additional Ethernet port will be required for connection to the
robot controller or to the I/O Module Hardware.

750
Product Manager
The Product Manager manages the calibration and license files of the products. It is available through:

1. Configure | Product Manager or

2. Windows Start menu: VXelements Product Manager

The Product Manager lists all the products installed on the computer. More than 1 product can be
installed on a computer, although only 1 can be active per session.
For a C-Link network, only the main C-Track is activated in the Product Manager.
If changes are made in the Product Manager while the software is running, a new session must be
created.

Product list
The Product Manager table gives several information about installed products as well as the active
products.

License status
The device's table row shows the product license status and other information relating to the product.

Status symbols in the Product Manager

Customer Care Plan
Status symbol License status Calibration date
expiration date
Customer Care Plan is active The license file is up The calibration file is
Up to date
for the product. to date. up to date.
Customer Care Plan is The license file is
Invalid N/A
expired for the product. not valid.
Download latest Download latest
Download N/A
license file now. calibration file now.
Customer Care Plan Calibration file not
Not found License not found.
information not found. found.

The name of the product is displayed, in the Product column, if the serial number is found on the
website. If the Product Manager is offline or if the serial number of a product cannot be found on the
website, N/A is displayed.

751
To add a product to the Product Manager

Automatic method (product detection)

Products will be detected and selected by the software when connected to the computer. After the initial
connection, the license and calibration files will be downloaded when connected to the Online Services.
Those products added will then appear in the Product Manager.

This method applies only for Go!SCAN 3D and HandySCAN 3D scanners.

Manual method
To manually add a product to the Product Manager

1. Click the Add new product link.

2. Enter the product serial number.

3. Click Browse and select its calibration file (.cst).

4. Click Browse and select its license file (.clf).

The calibration and license files can also be downloaded from the Customer Portal.

To activate 30-day trial license

1. From the Product Manager window, click Activate trial license.

2. Enter trial license activation key at prompt.

3. Click OK.

The trial license expires after 30 days. For continued issues with a licensing and
product activation, please consult Customer Portal.

To activate a product
Select the product to use from the Installed products and click Activate.

752
To change or delete a product

1. Select the product from the Products list.

2. Click Change to change either the calibration file or the license file of the product.

3. Click Delete to remove the product from the Products list.

Click to force refreshing information for the current product.

753
Software and License Updates for R-Series
MetraSCAN 3D-R solution

l The update will be done by an integrator or Creaform team to ensure it is functioning.

l To get the update file, contact Creaform Customer Support or go to the Customer Portal.

CUBE-R solution

l The update will be done by a field service engineer or Creaform team to ensure it is functioning.

l To get the update file, contact Creaform Customer Support or go to the Customer Portal.

VXscan-R

This module is only available if a license has been purchased.

R-Series I/O Module

R-Series I/O Module interface does not require any license key or license file.
However, it may sometimes need to be updated.

754
Contact Us
Visit our website or, for support, visit the Customer Portal.
It is possible to send feedback about the help and software translation by email to Creaform Technical
Writing.
For information on Creaform's worldwide offices, visit our website.

755
MetraSCAN 3D-R Solution

MetraSCAN 3D-R product family

Software
Robot programming

756
MetraSCAN 3D-R Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The MetraSCAN 3D- R robot- mounted optical CMM 3D scanners are designed for 3D automated
inspections of parts on production lines and shop floors. These automated inspection solutions work
with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Tracks to benefit from the C-
Link functionality (not available with the CUBE-R solution).

MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite

MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD

MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

757
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of or

damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

l MetraSCAN 3D pairs with a C-Track and the generation of C-Track and MetraSCAN
3D must match.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD are a robot-mounted optical CMM 3D scanners designed for 3D
automated inspections of small parts on production lines and shop floors.These automated inspection
solutions work with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Track systems
to benefit from C-Link functionality.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

758
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Laser
Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014

Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 121.8 mW / < 4.02 mJ

8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.25

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

759
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Hardware
and Components
Hardware

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD scanner and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective
case equipped with a custom foam insert.

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

1. USB 3.0 power cables, and a Calibration certificate

o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade USB 3.0 cable - 1 unit
o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade power and sync cable - 1 unit
o
Calibration certificate - 1 unit

2. MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD scanner - 1 unit

3. USB key (license and calibration files) - 1 unit

4. User calibration plate - 1 unit

760
 5. Miscellaneous

o
External power supply - 1 unit
o
Power cable for external power supply - 1 unit
o
Antistatic cleaning cloth - 1 unit
o
Removable bottom handle - 1 unit
o
USB 3.0 & power cables for the user calibration plate - 1 unit each

Mounting material

Mounting adapter - 1 unit1

Used to mechanically interface the scanner with the robot flange. The bolt pattern of the mounting
adapter is the same as on the flange of the robot.

1Most of the robots require a mounting adapter. If the robot information is

provided during the order process, Creaform will provide the mounting adapter.
The mounting adapter can be purchased later if needed.

User calibration plate

The artifact provided is a tool used to calibrate the scanner. It has passive targets that must be seen by
the C-Track and active targets that are seen by the scanner cameras. The scanner lasers are also used
during the calibration process.
USB key

761
The USB key provided with the system contains hardware and software files as well as the MetraSCAN
3D-R or CUBE-R user manual.

Components

The MetraSCAN- R BLACK|Elite HD device includes a laser projector, 2 cameras and glass- protected
retroreflective targets meant to reference the scanner position in 3D space when being tracked by the C-
Track. It is robot-mounted and has no physical trigger, but rather a software trigger.

Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Glass-protected retroreflective targets

4. Tool changer

5. Bracket

Side view

Do not touch the scanner targets. Do not manipulate the scanner using tubular
structure: always use the bracket and the removable bottom handle.

762
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the same patterns of retroreflective targets.
Through triangulation, the software determines the scanner position in space.
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN- R BLACK
scanners, although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is done by observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As the laser sweep
over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

763
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The scanner must be installed on the robot prior to being connected. Then, the Tool Center
Point (TCP), the tool payload, the tool center of gravity and the tool inertia at center of gravity
must be defined. For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup
section.

The information shown is very limited. For a more comprehensive installation

guide, contact Customer Support.

To install the scanner (mounting and connection)

1. If required, install the interface plate on the robot flange.

2. Route the scanner cables on the robot and through the scanner using the integrated
cable management system.

764
3. If applicable, place pneumatic tool changer cable on MetraSCAN 3D-R.

a. Route air tubes along bracket.

b. Plug in air pipes (2x; See red circle in image.)

c. Plug in sensor cable. (See red rectangle in image.)

d. Screw cable router onto bracket. (See blue rectangle in image.)

4. Plug cables into MetraSCAN 3D-R.

765
5. Connect the other end of the cables to the C-Track controller.

Make sure you have enough length in robot joints to prevent any damage to the
cables. Tie the cables to avoid any flick.

Instructions are for hollow-wrist robots. For external cable routing, please consult
robot manufacture's documentation and support.

766
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Environment
When to perform the calibration
Calibration setup
Expected results
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

Environment
Changes in the environment may affect scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or temperature
variations, thus modifying the mechanical configuration. Temperature variations should not exceed ±2
degrees Celsius during calibration.
Scanner calibration must be optimized for the most accurate results. The calibration process includes a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to multiple locations to
measure the target positions on the reference.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

767
When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Calibration setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration setup is an analysis aiming to identify the most adequate positions and orientations
relative to the user calibration plate in the robot cell environment. Make sure that:

l There are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l The user calibration plate must not be parallel to the C-Track cameras to prevent ghost target
detection in VXelements 3D viewer. A slight tilt forward will ensure the user calibration plate
orientation is correct.

l The positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an The
optimization failed message.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

A successful calibration will satisfy:

1. At least 1 target on all target sites of the scanner must be seen by the C-Track. There are
11 target sites in total.

2. 75 % of all the targets on the scanner must be seen during calibration.

MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

768
The CUBE-R has preprogrammed calibration trajectories that only require to be executed. For details,
see the System calibration with I/O Module section.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Two robot calibration trajectories are available for the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
All calibration trajectories follow the same principles as the manual calibration process:

l The scanner tool center point is coincident with the user calibration plate center.

l The distance between the scanner and the plate center point is constant.

l Every pose is a rotation in tool frame (around TCP) along 1 axis from the previous pose.

All trajectory names are retrieved from the VXelements plug-in window and match what is
available in the R-Series I/O Module interface.
Default90Degrees: This original calibration trajectory for the 90-degree mounting option can be used
only when the user calibration plate normal and robot World Z-axis (Up) are aligned.
Default0Degrees: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
Default90DegreesV2: This enhanced calibration trajectory of 55 poses is the most flexible for the 90-
degree mounting option as it has been optimized to allow calibration with different user calibration
plate orientations with respect to the robot.
Default0DegreesV2: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The V2 version of the calibration trajectories should take precedence over the
original ones, which are provided for legacy purposes.

Manual: This calibration trajectory cannot be automated. It requires human intervention.

Calibration modes

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The scanner calibration teaching process can be done through VXelements interface or I/O
Module interface.

769
In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

770
Integration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows teaching the scanner calibration trajectory with the robot teach pendant. It
uses VXelements or R-Series I/O Module.

771
To calibrate using VXelements (typical workflow)

1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select the Calibration trajectory.

4. Click Laser to start the laser projection.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Click Accept to take on the position. Once done, jog the robot to the next position.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the calibration is finished.

If the position cannot be reached, click Skip. Then, a Skipped, Occluded or Plate not
seen by scanner status will be recorded to the Trajectory status panel.

1. Jogging recommendations

Jogging frame: Select the suggested tool frame to jog the robot efficiently (on the teach pendant).
Jogging orientation: Apply a rotation around the specified axis, moving the robot according to the
provided information.

772
Calibration pose status color

Color Description
Good
Bad, but better than skipping the pose
Unacceptable

2. Action buttons

Button Action
Accept Accept the position when the position is reached.
Skip Skip the position when the position cannot be reached or if there is occultation.
Previous Go back (to the previous position).
Reset Reset all positions. Using this function, the calibration process has to be restarted.
Cancel Exit the process.

3. Trajectory status panel

This panel displays the pose status in ascending order.

Status Description
Accepted Position accepted: The scanner is well positioned and the measurement is good.
Skipped Position has been skipped.
The position of the scanner is occluded: The C- Track does not detect the user
Occluded
calibration plate or the scanner.
The scanner is not well positioned (bad orientation and/or bad standoff distance):

Bad position l The measurement cannot be done properly.

l The position will not be used for the calibration calculation.

Plate not seen

The scanner does not detect the user calibration plate.
by scanner

4. Progress indicator

A progress indicator displays the completion percentage for each position.

773
 5. Distance meter

A distance meter displays the distance between the scanner and the part.

Red/Yellow LEDs: The scanner is too close to the object: Move backward.
Green LED: The scanner is at the correct distance.
Dark blue/Light blue LEDs: The scanner is too far from the object: Move forward.
Gray LED: The scanner is not acquiring any data.

l The scanner is not tracked by the C-Track. Make sure that nothing prevents the scanner from
being seen by the C-Track.

l No surface within the scanner acquisition volume. Make sure to aim the scanner towards a
surface.

To calibrate using R-Series I/O Module (robot as leader)

This robot sub-program must be created prior to starting the calibration process:

l Start calibration

l Accept

l Skip

The sub-program should be created following the handshake concept.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Integration in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

774
 4. Launch the scanner calibration process by sending the 3D scanner calibration - Start
action.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Send the 3D scanner calibration - Accept position or 3D scanner calibration - Skip

position action and wait for the according event. Once done, jog the robot to the next
position.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the calibration is finished.

9. Once available, use the Scanner calibration result action to get the calibration result.

Execution

The Integration mode must be performed prior to the Execution mode (except for
the CUBE-R solution, where programs are previously created and only need to be
executed).

This mode allows executing the calibration program using R-Series I/O Module. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant. Refer to the Installation
manual provided with R-Series I/O Module on purchase.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Execution in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

4. Execute the robot calibration program previously created during the Integration mode.

Manual

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows manually calibrating the scanner using VXelements. In fact, this is the regular
MetraSCAN 3D calibration process. Standard MetraSCAN 3D calibration trajectory will be used.

775
1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select Manual as calibration mode.

4. Place the user calibration plate in the displayed volume.

5. Position the plate onto the red squares.

6. Change the orientation of the user calibration plate as per the visual indication. The red
squares turn to green when the plate is properly detected.

776
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and activate the
laser.

l A distance meter (1) on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel so the laser
grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

Distance meter (1) colors

Color Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern (2) colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

777
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

These functions are also available through the plug-in window.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

778
For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

779
Configuration preset
It is recommended to use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To save a configuration template:

l Right-click the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default values of the laser power are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface.
A flat black surface would require a shutter speed of a higher value.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when quickly moving the scanner.

Since it is possible to change the scanner configuration during the scan, many strategies can be adopted
for scanning multi-shaded parts:

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode. This is possible during
scanning.

780
To export a session parameter file (.csp)

Session parameters cannot be loaded during the scanning process.

Session parameters can be exported as a CSP file through VXelements (File | Export | Scan template).

Functionalities contained in the CSP file

Scanner parameters

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value with its activation and deactivation state

l Laser mode

l Scanning area

l High resolution multiplier

Scan parameters

l Resolution

l Smart resolution

l Remove isolated patches (threshold)

Finalize scan parameters

l Optimize surface mode

l Fill positioning targets

l Optimize accuracy of boundaries

l Smooth boundaries

l Reduce noise

l Sharpen edges

l Auto. decimate

l Auto. fill holes

781
Clipping objects

l C-Track referencing mode

l Target count

For quality control applications, the Auto. fill holes parameter should be set to 0.

For details on the functionalities, see the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters sections (if
the scanner is used with the CUBE-R solution) or the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters
sections (if the scanner is used with the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution).

To create a scanner configuration file (.csc)

In VXelements:

l Right-click the Configuration preset box in the Scanner configuration window, or

l Click the Save preset link under the Configuration preset box in the Scanner parameters pane of
the connected device tab (system panel).

The CSC file can be retrieved in the VXelements Configuration folder (default installation directory:
C:\ProgramFiles\Creaform\VXelements\Configuration\MetraScanRBlackElite).

Functionalities contained in the CSC file

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value

l Laser mode

The scanner configuration data can be loaded at any time, even when scanning.

782
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load
Setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To define prior to programming the robot sequence

The scanner TCP, tool payload, tool center of gravity (CoG) and tool inertia at center of gravity
(Inertia @ CoG) are in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table. They must be defined before
programming the robot sequence.

Scanner TCP
The scanner TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate system. It is a
virtual coordinate system that locates the center of the field of view of the scanner.
To easily create the robot trajectory, set the TCP in the robot controller. The TCP can be expressed using
several conventions: the values displayed in the table are in FANUC's preferred method.

Scanner offset table

Tx (mm) Ty (mm) Tz (mm) W (deg) P (deg) R (deg)

R-Series scanners 363.6 0 306 90 0 90
HandySCAN 3D with gripper -306 0.2 68.5 -90 0 90
MetraSCAN 3D with gripper -363.6 0 305.8 90 0 -90

Tx, Ty, Tz: Position of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system.
W, P, R: Orientation of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system as
Euler (Tait- Bryan) angles with extrinsic rotations (elemental rotations about the axes of the fixed
coordinate system).

l W: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system X axis.

l P: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Y axis (after having applied W).

783
l R: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Z axis (after having applied P).

784
Tool payload
Tool payload is the weight of the components mounted to the robot flange.
It must be defined by adding the weight of each component stacked from the robot flange, which are
found in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table.

Tool center of gravity

The tool center of gravity is a point where the distribution of mass is balanced around this point. It can
be determined by executing specific robot function (see the robot user manual).

The tool center of gravity is not mandatory but it may avoid some robot error code.
However, it is required for CoBOT (collaborative robot).

Tool inertia at center of gravity

The tool inertia at center of gravity is a physical tool's resistance to any change in its state of motion.

TCP, payload and inertia definitions

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK - No
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
Tool Changer
0.014 0.031 0.031 0.013
2.614 1.13 -0.02 20.83
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.143 0.316 0.316 0.133

785
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
- Pneumatic TC
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Pneumatic TC
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
(X= 370 mm, Y= -50 mm,
0.158 0.145 0.235 0.107
Z= 50 mm)

4.259 10.91 -0.93 17.39

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.611 1.479 2.396 1.091

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

- Manual TC Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Manual TC (X=
370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.154 0.145 0.234 0.106
50 mm)

4.052 10.85 -0.99 17.50

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.570 1.479 2.386 1.081

786
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

Scale bar + Clamp (X=

370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm) 0.124 0.103 0.102 0.001

0.883 37.10 -4.46 8.94

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.264 1.050 1.040 0.007

Clamp (X= 370 mm, Y= -

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm, Z= 50 mm)
0.032 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.234 36.81 -2.78 19.80
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.326 0.004 0.002 0.003

Scale bar (X= 370 mm, Y=

-50 mm, Z= 50 mm) Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.092 0.098 0.098 0.000
0.649 37.21 -5.06 5.02

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.938 0.999 0.999 0.004

HandySCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.390 0.012 0.010 0.002 0.010
3.070 1.412 6.366
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.122 0.102 0.020 0.102

787
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

HandySCAN 3D

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.996 0.010 0.008 0.001 0.009
2.994 1.888 6.861
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.102 0.082 0.010 0.092

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
2.471 0.016 0.029 0.031 0.016
.470 0.130 21.980
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.163 0.296 0.316 0.163

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.583 0.011 0.014 0.012 0.011
-1.850 0.04 2.607
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.112 0.143 0.122 0.112

788
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or glass, the
object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Positioning target distribution

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

789
790
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Acquisition
Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. This feature can be deactivated in the Display
panel under General display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the screen.

Laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

791
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can be
activated to alert the user when tracking is lost.

Scanner visibility
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the scanner, although full
detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the scanner is
displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane and must remain as close to
100% as possible.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanning technique
To have to most accurate results, it is necessary to scan at the right speed and to acquire data at
different orientations of the scanner. For details, refer to the MetraSCAN 3D-R training script.
The best possible scan result requires that the surface is scanned with the detection of the scanner as
close as possible to 100%.
Also, it is important to follow the relationship between the scan speed and the resolution. The lower the
resolution value is (in mm), the slower the scan speed has to be in order to get an optimal scan surface.

792
Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

Teach mode
Available in VXscan, this mode allows checking different acquisition parameters without starting the
scan process, saving raw data, nor using computer power.
The distance meter and scanner visibility tools are available in the Teach mode.

793
Positioning Targets and Reflectors
Several accessories are available, some are optional, others mandatory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.

Positioning targets
Size Description

3 mm black contour

6 mm black contour

8 mm black contour

10 mm black contour

12 mm black contour (the only target type applicable to the

R-Series product line)

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

794
 Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Light adhesive targets are recommended for parts that should not be damaged since they do not leave
glue on the surface.

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

l High reflectivity targets are meant to reflect light-emitting diodes (LED) on a longer distance
and are mostly used in photogrammetry.

Coded targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using the module. In
photogrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

795
 Size Description

6 mm reflector

8 mm reflector

10 mm reflector

12 mm reflector

Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Magnetic

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

796
Magnetic glass protected targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces.

Size Description

12 mm diameter

Type

Magnetic

Reflectivity

High reflective

Optical reflectors
Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces. They allow a
360° rotation when their reflector shaft is fixed on a magnetic support (0°, 45° and 90° shafts are
available).

797
Reflector type Description

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 20 mm - Ø 10 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

798
 Reflector type Description

l 90° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

Magnetic base for swivel optical reflectors, available for Ø 6 mm,

Ø 0.25 in. or Ø 10 mm pins

Recommended for R-Series products.

l Octagonal glass-protected target accessory kit

designed for automated photogrammetry and manual
C-Track movement around the part. Designed to be
mounted on fixtures.

l 12 mm, glass protected, 360° magnetic targets are

reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy
attachment to ferromagnetic surfaces.

360° magnetic targets

These dodecahedron target bases are reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy attachment to
ferromagnetic surfaces.

799
Type Description

6 mm

12 mm, glass protected

800
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of or

damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

l MetraSCAN 3D pairs with a C-Track and the generation of C-Track and MetraSCAN
3D must match.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN- R BLACK|Elite are robot- mounted optical CMM 3D scanners designed for 3D
automated inspections of parts on production lines and shop floors.These automated inspection
solutions work with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Tracksystems
to benefit from the C-Link functionality.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

801
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Laser
Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 123mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

802
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Hardware and
Components
Hardware

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite scanner and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case
equipped with a custom foam insert.

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

1. USB 3.0 and power cables, and a Calibration certificate

o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade USB 3.0 cable - 1 unit
o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade power and sync cable - 1 unit
o
Calibration certificate - 1 unit

2. MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite scanner - 1 unit

3. USB key (license and calibration files) - 1 unit

4. User calibration plate - 1 unit

803
 5. Miscellaneous

o
External power supply - 1 unit
o
Power cable for external power supply - 1 unit
o
Antistatic cleaning cloth - 1 unit
o
Removable bottom handle - 1 unit
o
USB 3.0 & power cables for the user calibration plate - 1 unit each

Mounting material
Mounting adapter - 1 unit1

Used to mechanically interface the scanner with the robot flange. The bolt pattern of the mounting
adapter is the same as on the flange of the robot.

1Most of the robots require a mounting adapter. If the robot information is

provided during the order process, Creaform will provide the mounting adapter.
The mounting adapter can be purchased later if needed.

User calibration plate

The artifact provided is a tool used to calibrate the scanner. It has passive targets that must be seen by
the C-Track and active targets that are seen by the scanner cameras. The scanner lasers are also used
during the calibration process.
USB key

804
The USB key provided with the system contains hardware and software files as well as the MetraSCAN
3D-R or CUBE-R User Manual.

805
Components

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite device includes a laser projector, 2 cameras and glass-protected
retroreflective targets meant to reference the scanner position in 3D space when being tracked by the C-
Track. It is robot-mounted and has no physical trigger, but rather a software trigger.

Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Glass-protected retroreflective targets

4. Tool changer

5. Bracket

806
Side view

Do not touch the scanner targets. Do not manipulate the scanner using tubular
structure: always use the bracket and the removable bottom handle.

807
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the same patterns of retroreflective targets.
Through triangulation, the software determines the scanner position in space.
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN- R BLACK
scanners, although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is done by observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As the laser sweep
over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

808
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The scanner must be installed on the robot prior to being connected. Then, the Tool Center
Point (TCP), the tool payload, the tool center of gravity and the tool inertia at center of gravity
must be defined. For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup
section.

The information shown is very limited. For a more comprehensive installation

guide, contact Customer Support.

To install the scanner (mounting and connection)

1. If required, install the interface plate on the robot flange.

2. Route the scanner cables on the robot and through the scanner using the integrated
cable management system.

809
3. If applicable, place pneumatic tool changer cable on MetraSCAN 3D-R.

a. Route air tubes along bracket.

b. Plug in air pipes (2x; See red circle in image.)

c. Plug in sensor cable. (See red rectangle in image.)

d. Screw cable router onto bracket. (See blue rectangle in image.)

4. Plug cables into MetraSCAN 3D-R.

810
5. Connect the other end of the cables to the C-Track controller.

Make sure you have enough length in robot joints to prevent any damage to the
cables. Tie the cables to avoid any flick.

Instructions are for hollow-wrist robots. For external cable routing, please consult
robot manufacture's documentation and support.

811
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Environment
When to perform the calibration
Calibration setup
Expected results
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

Environment
Changes in the environment may affect scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or temperature
variations, thus modifying the mechanical configuration. Temperature variations should not exceed ±2
degrees Celsius during calibration.
Scanner calibration must be optimized for the most accurate results. The calibration process includes a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to multiple locations to
measure the target positions on the reference.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

812
When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Calibration setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration setup is an analysis aiming to identify the most adequate positions and orientations
relative to the user calibration plate in the robot cell environment. Make sure that:

l There are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l The user calibration plate must not be parallel to the C-Track cameras to prevent ghost target
detection in VXelements 3D viewer. A slight tilt forward will ensure the user calibration plate
orientation is correct.

l The positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an The
optimization failed message.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

A successful calibration will satisfy:

1. At least 1 target on all target sites of the scanner must be seen by the C-Track. There are
11 target sites in total.

2. 75 % of all the targets on the scanner must be seen during calibration.

MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

813
The CUBE-R has preprogrammed calibration trajectories that only require to be executed. For details,
see the System calibration with I/O Module section.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Two robot calibration trajectories are available for the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
All calibration trajectories follow the same principles as the manual calibration process:

l The scanner tool center point is coincident with the user calibration plate center.

l The distance between the scanner and the plate center point is constant.

l Every pose is a rotation in tool frame (around TCP) along 1 axis from the previous pose.

All trajectory names are retrieved from the VXelements plug-in window and match what is
available in the R-Series I/O Module interface.
Default90Degrees: This original calibration trajectory for the 90-degree mounting option can be used
only when the user calibration plate normal and robot World Z-axis (Up) are aligned.
Default0Degrees: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
Default90DegreesV2: This enhanced calibration trajectory of 55 poses is the most flexible for the 90-
degree mounting option as it has been optimized to allow calibration with different user calibration
plate orientations with respect to the robot.
Default0DegreesV2: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The V2 version of the calibration trajectories should take precedence over the
original ones, which are provided for legacy purposes.

Manual: This calibration trajectory cannot be automated. It requires human intervention.

Calibration modes

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The scanner calibration teaching process can be done through VXelements interface or I/O
Module interface.

814
In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

815
Integration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows teaching the scanner calibration trajectory with the robot teach pendant. It
uses VXelements or R-Series I/O Module.

816
To calibrate using VXelements (typical workflow)

1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select the Calibration trajectory.

4. Click Laser to start the laser projection.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Click Accept to take on the position. Once done, jog the robot to the next position.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the calibration is finished.

If the position cannot be reached, click Skip. Then, a Skipped, Occluded or Plate not
seen by scanner status will be recorded to the Trajectory status panel.

1. Jogging recommendations

Jogging frame: Select the suggested tool frame to jog the robot efficiently (on the teach pendant).
Jogging orientation: Apply a rotation around the specified axis, moving the robot according to the
provided information.

817
Calibration pose status color

Color Description
Good
Bad, but better than skipping the pose
Unacceptable

2. Action buttons

Button Action
Accept Accept the position when the position is reached.
Skip Skip the position when the position cannot be reached or if there is occultation.
Previous Go back (to the previous position).
Reset Reset all positions. Using this function, the calibration process has to be restarted.
Cancel Exit the process.

3. Trajectory status panel

This panel displays the pose status in ascending order.

Status Description
Accepted Position accepted: The scanner is well positioned and the measurement is good.
Skipped Position has been skipped.
The position of the scanner is occluded: The C- Track does not detect the user
Occluded
calibration plate or the scanner.
The scanner is not well positioned (bad orientation and/or bad standoff distance):

Bad position l The measurement cannot be done properly.

l The position will not be used for the calibration calculation.

Plate not seen

The scanner does not detect the user calibration plate.
by scanner

4. Progress indicator

A progress indicator displays the completion percentage for each position.

818
 5. Distance meter

A distance meter displays the distance between the scanner and the part.

Red/Yellow LEDs: The scanner is too close to the object: Move backward.
Green LED: The scanner is at the correct distance.
Dark blue/Light blue LEDs: The scanner is too far from the object: Move forward.
Gray LED: The scanner is not acquiring any data.

l The scanner is not tracked by the C-Track. Make sure that nothing prevents the scanner from
being seen by the C-Track.

l No surface within the scanner acquisition volume. Make sure to aim the scanner towards a
surface.

To calibrate using R-Series I/O Module (robot as leader)

This robot sub-program must be created prior to starting the calibration process:

l Start calibration

l Accept

l Skip

The sub-program should be created following the handshake concept.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Integration in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

819
 4. Launch the scanner calibration process by sending the 3D scanner calibration - Start
action.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Send the 3D scanner calibration - Accept position or 3D scanner calibration - Skip

position action and wait for the according event. Once done, jog the robot to the next
position.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the calibration is finished.

9. Once available, use the Scanner calibration result action to get the calibration result.

Execution

The Integration mode must be performed prior to the Execution mode (except for
the CUBE-R solution, where programs are previously created and only need to be
executed).

This mode allows executing the calibration program using R-Series I/O Module. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant. Refer to the Installation
manual provided with R-Series I/O Module on purchase.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Execution in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

4. Execute the robot calibration program previously created during the Integration mode.

Manual

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows manually calibrating the scanner using VXelements. In fact, this is the regular
MetraSCAN 3D calibration process. Standard MetraSCAN 3D calibration trajectory will be used.

820
1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select Manual as calibration mode.

4. Place the user calibration plate in the displayed volume.

5. Position the plate onto the red squares.

6. Change the orientation of the user calibration plate as per the visual indication. The red
squares turn to green when the plate is properly detected.

821
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and activate the
laser.

l A distance meter (1) on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel so the laser
grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

Distance meter (1) colors

Color Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern (2) colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

822
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

These functions are also available through the plug-in window.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

823
For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

824
Configuration preset
It is recommended to use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To save a configuration template:

l Right-click the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default values of the laser power are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface.
A flat black surface would require a shutter speed of a higher value.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when quickly moving the scanner.

Since it is possible to change the scanner configuration during the scan, many strategies can be adopted
for scanning multi-shaded parts:

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode. This is possible during
scanning.

825
To export a session parameter file (.csp)

Session parameters cannot be loaded during the scanning process.

Session parameters can be exported as a CSP file through VXelements (File | Export | Scan template).

Functionalities contained in the CSP file

Scanner parameters

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value with its activation and deactivation state

l Laser mode

l Scanning area

l High resolution multiplier

Scan parameters

l Resolution

l Smart resolution

l Remove isolated patches (threshold)

Finalize scan parameters

l Optimize surface mode

l Fill positioning targets

l Optimize accuracy of boundaries

l Smooth boundaries

l Reduce noise

l Sharpen edges

l Auto. decimate

l Auto. fill holes

826
Clipping objects

l C-Track referencing mode

l Target count

For quality control applications, the Auto. fill holes parameter should be set to 0.

For details on the functionalities, see the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters sections (if
the scanner is used with the CUBE-R solution) or the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters
sections (if the scanner is used with the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution).

To create a scanner configuration file (.csc)

In VXelements:

l Right-click the Configuration preset box in the Scanner configuration window, or

l Click the Save preset link under the Configuration preset box in the Scanner parameters pane of
the connected device tab (system panel).

The CSC file can be retrieved in the VXelements Configuration folder (default installation directory:
C:\ProgramFiles\Creaform\VXelements\Configuration\MetraScanRBlackElite).

Functionalities contained in the CSC file

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value

l Laser mode

The scanner configuration data can be loaded at any time, even when scanning.

827
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load
Setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To define prior to programming the robot sequence

The scanner TCP, tool payload, tool center of gravity (CoG) and tool inertia at center of gravity
(Inertia @ CoG) are in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table. They must be defined before
programming the robot sequence.

Scanner TCP
The scanner TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate system. It is a
virtual coordinate system that locates the center of the field of view of the scanner.
To easily create the robot trajectory, set the TCP in the robot controller. The TCP can be expressed using
several conventions: the values displayed in the table are in FANUC's preferred method.

Scanner offset table

Tx (mm) Ty (mm) Tz (mm) W (deg) P (deg) R (deg)

R-Series scanners 363.6 0 306 90 0 90
HandySCAN 3D with gripper -306 0.2 68.5 -90 0 90
MetraSCAN 3D with gripper -363.6 0 305.8 90 0 -90

Tx, Ty, Tz: Position of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system.
W, P, R: Orientation of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system as
Euler (Tait- Bryan) angles with extrinsic rotations (elemental rotations about the axes of the fixed
coordinate system).

l W: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system X axis.

l P: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Y axis (after having applied W).

828
l R: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Z axis (after having applied P).

829
Tool payload
Tool payload is the weight of the components mounted to the robot flange.
It must be defined by adding the weight of each component stacked from the robot flange, which are
found in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table.

Tool center of gravity

The tool center of gravity is a point where the distribution of mass is balanced around this point. It can
be determined by executing specific robot function (see the robot user manual).

The tool center of gravity is not mandatory but it may avoid some robot error code.
However, it is required for CoBOT (collaborative robot).

Tool inertia at center of gravity

The tool inertia at center of gravity is a physical tool's resistance to any change in its state of motion.

TCP, payload and inertia definitions

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK - No
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
Tool Changer
0.014 0.031 0.031 0.013
2.614 1.13 -0.02 20.83
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.143 0.316 0.316 0.133

830
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
- Pneumatic TC
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Pneumatic TC
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
(X= 370 mm, Y= -50 mm,
0.158 0.145 0.235 0.107
Z= 50 mm)

4.259 10.91 -0.93 17.39

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.611 1.479 2.396 1.091

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

- Manual TC Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Manual TC (X=
370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.154 0.145 0.234 0.106
50 mm)

4.052 10.85 -0.99 17.50

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.570 1.479 2.386 1.081

831
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

Scale bar + Clamp (X=

370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm) 0.124 0.103 0.102 0.001

0.883 37.10 -4.46 8.94

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.264 1.050 1.040 0.007

Clamp (X= 370 mm, Y= -

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm, Z= 50 mm)
0.032 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.234 36.81 -2.78 19.80
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.326 0.004 0.002 0.003

Scale bar (X= 370 mm, Y=

-50 mm, Z= 50 mm) Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.092 0.098 0.098 0.000
0.649 37.21 -5.06 5.02

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.938 0.999 0.999 0.004

HandySCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.390 0.012 0.010 0.002 0.010
3.070 1.412 6.366
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.122 0.102 0.020 0.102

832
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

HandySCAN 3D

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.996 0.010 0.008 0.001 0.009
2.994 1.888 6.861
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.102 0.082 0.010 0.092

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
2.471 0.016 0.029 0.031 0.016
.470 0.130 21.980
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.163 0.296 0.316 0.163

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.583 0.011 0.014 0.012 0.011
-1.850 0.04 2.607
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.112 0.143 0.122 0.112

833
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or glass, the
object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Positioning target distribution

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

834
835
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Acquisition
Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. This feature can be deactivated in the Display
panel under General display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the screen.

Laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

836
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can be
activated to alert the user when tracking is lost.

Scanner visibility
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the scanner, although full
detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the scanner is
displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane and must remain as close to
100% as possible.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanning technique
To have to most accurate results, it is necessary to scan at the right speed and to acquire data at
different orientations of the scanner. For details, refer to the MetraSCAN 3D-R training script.
The best possible scan result requires that the surface is scanned with the detection of the scanner as
close as possible to 100%.
Also, it is important to follow the relationship between the scan speed and the resolution. The lower the
resolution value is (in mm), the slower the scan speed has to be in order to get an optimal scan surface.

837
Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

Teach mode
Available in VXscan, this mode allows checking different acquisition parameters without starting the
scan process, saving raw data, nor using computer power.
The distance meter and scanner visibility tools are available in the Teach mode.

838
Positioning Targets and Reflectors
Several accessories are available, some are optional, others mandatory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.

Positioning targets
Size Description

3 mm black contour

6 mm black contour

8 mm black contour

10 mm black contour

12 mm black contour (the only target type applicable to the

R-Series product line)

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

839
 Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Light adhesive targets are recommended for parts that should not be damaged since they do not leave
glue on the surface.

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

l High reflectivity targets are meant to reflect light-emitting diodes (LED) on a longer distance
and are mostly used in photogrammetry.

Coded targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using the module. In
photogrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

840
 Size Description

6 mm reflector

8 mm reflector

10 mm reflector

12 mm reflector

Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Magnetic

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

841
Magnetic glass protected targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces.

Size Description

12 mm diameter

Type

Magnetic

Reflectivity

High reflective

Optical reflectors
Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces. They allow a
360° rotation when their reflector shaft is fixed on a magnetic support (0°, 45° and 90° shafts are
available).

842
Reflector type Description

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 20 mm - Ø 10 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

843
 Reflector type Description

l 90° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

Magnetic base for swivel optical reflectors, available for Ø 6 mm,

Ø 0.25 in. or Ø 10 mm pins

Recommended for R-Series products.

l Octagonal glass-protected target accessory kit

designed for automated photogrammetry and manual
C-Track movement around the part. Designed to be
mounted on fixtures.

l 12 mm, glass protected, 360° magnetic targets are

reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy
attachment to ferromagnetic surfaces.

360° magnetic targets

These dodecahedron target bases are reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy attachment to
ferromagnetic surfaces.

844
Type Description

6 mm

12 mm, glass protected

845
C-Track

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The C-Track is a dual-camera optical sensor providing high-accuracy measurements. This device is used
with the HandyPROBE, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R for production line purposes, such as
in the automotive, aerospace and manufacturing industries.
C-Track+ C-Track C-Track Third generation (G3)

846
Compatibility chart

HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE Next
Next+
G4 G3 G4

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN MetraSCAN MetraSCAN-R
MetraSCAN 3D
3D+ 3D-R BLACK+|Elite
MetraSCAN- MetraSCAN-R
BLACK 357 BLACK+
R BLACK BLACK+|Elite

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

847
C-Track Hardware and Components

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

Hardware and components

The C-Track includes 2 digital cameras surrounded by a set of LEDs. Lighting sensors enable measuring
reflectors in a specific volume of use (9.1 m3 or 16.6 m3 for C-Track and C-Track|Elite).

1. Tripod - 1 unit

2. Cables:

l USB 3.0 power cable - 1 unit

l Ethernet cable - 1 unit

3. Calibration bar - 1 unit

848
 4. Power supply and power cable - 1 unit each

5. Controller - 1 unit

6. C-Track - 1 unit

7. Dynamic referencing accessory kit - 1 unit

8. USB 3.0 to Ethernet adapter - 1 unit

9. Software installer USB key - 1 unit

10. Calibration certificate (under the case foam insert) - 1 unit

C-Track tripod

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The tripod adjusts the C-Track to multiple heights and angles.

To set up the C-Track on the tripod, see the Setup section.

849
Other components

1. Dynamic referencing accessory kit

2. Calibration bar

3. Dynamic referencing kit

4. Controller

5. USB to Ethernet adapter

6. Ethernet cable

7. Power supply

8. USB power cable

850
Visibility LED color codes

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Blue Red Yellow White

LED Off Green Yellow Red
(blink) (blink) (blink) (blink)

1 No power Power on - - - - - -

No power or
Stylus not
21 VXelements is Stylus seen - - - - -
seen
not started

Scanner
No power or
Scanner detection Scanner not
31 VXelements is - - - -
seen not at seen
not started
100%

C-Track ready Waiting

Not
4 (stable - - - Warming Blooming for QR
operating
temperature) code

Few targets Referential

Referential
5 No referential2 seen (not below - - - -
seen
optimal) 4 targets

1 If there is no stylus or scanner activated, LED #2 will mimic LED #3 behavior and

vice versa.
2 The minimum threshold 4 targets.

The target threshold (T) for LED #5 to be green is set according to this formula:

851
The absolute maximum is set to 8.

Examples

l If there are 4 targets in the reference, the LED turns green when 4 targets
are seen. It turns red otherwise.

l If there are 8 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 5 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 targets are seen and red otherwise.

l If there are 12 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 6 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 or 5 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

l If there are 40 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 8 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 to 7 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

852
C-Track Operating Principles
The C- Track cameras acquire the positioning targets simultaneously, which enables the software to
determine the reference targets position as well as its environment through triangulation.

Measurement volume

Flexibility volume: 16.6 m3

Accuracy volume: 9.1 m3

853
Positioning model
To reference the C-Track in space and to obtain accurate measurements, it is necessary to create a
positioning model with targets. The positioning model should cover the volume of the part to be
scanned or probed as much as possible.
To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).

Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel. The C-Track will
show the target count after the target acquisition process.

The last action performed sets the default action.

854
 Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

Swivel targets cannot be rotated when using this

Auto-detect targets method.

All previously acquired targets will be

discarded.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
Rectangle
Manually detect targets
l
Free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to import a positioning target model. The

dynamic referential is automatically activated.
Import C-Track
positioning targets 2. Select an existing positioning target model file
(.txt).

3. Click Open.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

855
Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

856
Reference positioning target statuses
The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

Referencing modes

The part can only be moved if the targets are placed on it.

Dynamic mode
Take measurements while moving the C-Track.

l A minimum of 4 visible targets is required (at least 8 are recommended). Set minimum value in
Configuration Options.

l Useful in a work environment exposed to vibrations.

l Eliminates potential handling errors.

l Makes it possible to move the C-Track and part quickly.

Hybrid mode
Allows the C-Track to continue taking accurate measurements when less than 4 targets are seen in the
reference model. At least one target must always be visible.

Static mode

Only available if the Allow measurements outside recommended conditions check

box is selected.

Allows moving the C-Track between measurements without having to continuously see the targets.

857
l Retrieve the C-Track position after moving to update the actual position.

l Make sure that enough targets belonging to the reference are visible when retrieving.

858
Detection statuses
The C-Track is connected and ready to be used.

The C-Track is not connected or not ready to be used. For details,

refer to the Troubleshooting section.

The C-Track is dazzled or too many targets are seen.

Positioning model is referenced. At least 4 targets must be seen.

Not referenced. Less than 4 targets seen. No target is detected.

859
C-Track Controller

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The controller provides information about all systems connected to it:

l C-Track

l HandyPROBE stylus

l MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

l MaxSHOT 3D

It enables to:

l Associate the stylus

l Set language and contrast

l Reinitialize the controller

l Track the status of all systems through the LEDs, etc.

The controller uses an Ethernet protocol to communicate with the computer that can be set up through
the IP Configurator tool.

Components
Connection

860
Display
Recovery procedure

861
Controller Components

Components
G4, G4+ controller

Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button: To go back to the

main menu.

4. Next button: To browse through

the menus.

5. OK button: To explore the sub-

menus.

6. LED statuses

Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT 3D)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Power supply

9. Device USB ports and cable

retainers

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

862
G3 controller (the front features the same characteristics as the G4, G4+)
Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT Next)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Main power supply

9. Hardware USB ports

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

To connect the controller

See C-Track Setup and Connection.

863
C-Track Setup and Connection

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up the C-Track

1. Take the tripod out of the case and unfold it.

2. Adjust the feet to the required height.

3. Turn the swivel in the desired direction.

4. Check the locking of the different tightening elements:

l Extensions of each foot.

l Swivel on the tripod.

l Locking screw for moving the swivel.

Tighten locks before each use and check the tightening of the snap-
on coupling bracket to make sure the tripod is stable.

5. Carefully take the sensor out of the case and install it on the tripod.

1. 3 mm Allen key

2. Socket wrench clip

864
 If needed, the C-Track may also be used without the tripod.

Handling rules

Use the tripod or the C-Track/tripod connection area to lift the system.

Avoid lifting the C-Track by holding the main structure.

To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer

Make sure that the devices are connected before turning ON the controller and
that the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the devices.

When connecting the cables:

865
 l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connectors.

1. Connect the power cable to the C-Track.

2. Connect the USB cables to the C-Track. Make sure to plug the USB connector vertically
into the C-Track instead of horizontally.

3. Connect the other end of the USB cables in any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

4. Connect the other end of the power cable in the controller.

866
 5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the controller and the computer.

6. Connect the controller power supply in an electrical outlet.

7. Turn the controller ON.

8. Wait for the controller to display READY before proceeding to calibration.

Lift the cable retainers to safely unplug the cables from the C-Track and controller.

To launch the IP configurator

The IP Configurator tool is used to configure network settings allowing communication between the
computer and the controller through an Ethernet protocol.

IP Configurator requires computer administrator rights to be run.

Using the USB to Ethernet adapter

Launch the IP Configurator each time the USB to Ethernet adapter is plugged into a
new USB port.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable into the USB to Ethernet adapter.

2. Insert the USB to Ethernet adapter into the computer USB port.

3. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

l The IP Configurator will browse for the USB to Ethernet adapter provided and automatically
selects the relevant network connection.

l The default IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

4. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings. A message box will
appear, confirming the connection was successful.

867
After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

Using the computer Ethernet port

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer Ethernet port.

2. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

3. If no adapter is detected, a warning message will appear (this is the normal behavior). Click
Ignore to move to the next step.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

4. Select the proper Ethernet network in the Connection drop-down menu. The default
IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

5. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings.

6. A warning message will appear. Click Yes to move to the next step. A message will appear
confirming the connection was successful.

After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

To restore the default network settings

Click Revert to original connection settings.

To manually revert to default Windows settings

In Windows 10 / Windows 11
Go to Microsoft Support for the procedure.

868
Controller Display

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Statuses
The controller status is displayed on the LCD panel.
Use the Menus button to browse through the menus, the OK button to explore the sub-menus, and the
Back button to go back to the previous menu.
The LEDs indicate the statuses of the system interactions with its components.
See Components section for more information.

869
Controller LED color codes

The C-Track
is connected
to the
The C-Track No image
controller, The C-Track The C-Track is is warming detected
the is NOT
synchronizing up to its by the
C-Track calibration connected
with the operating cameras.
date is still to the
controller. temperature Calibration
valid and controller.
range. is too old.
the system
is ready to
be used.

The
controller is
The
NOT The C-Track is
controller is
plugged in plugged in synchronizing
the the with the
Sync - -
computer computer controller
and and/or and the
VXelements
is running. VXelements computer.
is NOT
running.

The blinking
LED
confirms
data
Data transmission - - - -
between the
controller
and the
devices.
The probe
The probe is
is NOT
activated
activated
and
HandyPROBE and/or NOT - - -
associated
associated
with the
with the
controller.
controller.

870
 The scanner
The scanner is NOT
is connected
Scanner connected - - -
to the
controller. to the
controller.

The
accessory is
Accessory connected - - - -
to the
controller.

871
Menus
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the C-Track connected to the controller.

Ready: The C-Track is initialized and ready for measurement.
No C-Track: The C-Track is not detected by the controller.
[X] (Cause): The C-Track is detected, but not yet operational.

l Analysis: The C-Track is analyzing.

l Calib. too old: The calibration is outdated and must be carried out
again.
1 C-TRACK
l Too cold/warm: The C-Track is operating outside the recommended
temperature range.

The controller may become hot by prolonged use

especially in high temperature.

l Unstable temp.: The temperature has changed and must stabilize

before resuming the measurement.

Displays the current frame rate of the C-Track.

l 58.0/58.0/58.0

C-TRACK/FPS l C-Track controller processing rate FPS / C-Track left camera

1.1 (Frame Per
Second) FPS / C-Track right camera FPS.

l It should be near 58 frames per second for the HandyPROBE and 58

frames per second for the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R.

872
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the HandyPROBE connected to the controller.

Probe activated: The HandyPROBE is activated and ready for measurement.
Click probe button: The HandyPROBE is not yet activated and a button on the
2 PROBE probe should be pressed to activate it.

When first activating the HandyPROBE with a new

controller, it must be associated with the controller (see
2.2 Probe/Assoc.).

2.1 PROBE/BATT. Shows the stylus battery level.

Allows manually associating HandyPROBE stylus to the controller.

[OK] to associate: Press the OK button to launch the association process.
2.2 PROBE/ASSOC.
Press probe buttons: Press and hold the 2 outer buttons of the HandyPROBE
to pair the device. When releasing them, a beep will be emitted to confirm the
association has worked.

Allows controller to scan available frequency for stylus communication.

[OK] to analyze: Press the OK button to launch the analysis process.

l Goes to menu 2.4 automatically after analysis is completed.

l The channel with the larger absolute value should be chosen by

default.

Probe/Analyze
2.3 A value of - 78 dB shows less interference than a value of -
Channels
60 dB.

Default channel for HandyPROBE

Default channel Channel range

G3 4 1-12

G4 16 1-16

873
# Menu Contents

Selects a communication channel manually.

PROBE/CHAN
l A probe association is required afterwards.
2.4
NEL

It is always best to use the proposed channel.

Shows the status of the scanner connected to the controller.

Ready: The scanner is connected and ready to use.

3 SCANNER Disconnected: No scanner currently connected.

Scanning: The scan is currently in progress.
Stopping: The scan is currently stopping.

RESET Allows resetting the servers without rebooting the controller.

4
SERVERS
Press the OK button to reset the servers.
5 OPTIONS

#SFW Displays the current VXelements software version installed on the controller. It
5.1
VERSION should match the VXelements version installed on the computer.

Displays the current camera count for devices detected by the controller (sum
of all cameras mounted per device connected).
Device connected to the controller Camera count

C-Track 2
5.2 NB DEVICES
HandyPROBE 0

MetraSCAN 3D 2

MetraSCAN 3D-R 4

MaxSHOT Next 1

5.3 LANGUAGE Changes the controller display language (English or French).

Displays the controller current IP address.

l It is recommended to keep the default settings (200.200.200.2).

5.4 IP ADDRESS
l With a C-Link network, the IP addresses must be changed. For details,
see the C-Link Configuration section.

LCD
5.5 Indicates the contrast of the LCD panel on a scale of 1 to 5.
CONTRAST

874
# Menu Contents
HDW VERSION
5.6 Displays the current hardware version installed on the controller.

875
Controller Recovery

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This function allows creating a USB key which can be used when a recovery is required. This manual
process will update the controller’s software to be the same as the VXelements version. For details, see
the controller recovery procedure.

A controller recovery should be the last solution tried when there seems to be an
issue with a C- Track, HandyPROBE stylus, MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D- R or
MaxSHOT Next (remote). During this process, a clean version of VXelements will be
reinstalled on the controller to make it up and running.

To perform a controller recovery

1. Plug an empty USB flash drive into the computer.

2. Open VXelements with a C-Track activated in the Product Manager.

3. Go to Configure | C-Track | Create recovery key.

4. In VXelements – Create Recovery Key dialog box, select the USB flash drive plugged (step
1).

5. Accept the formatting process. A message will appear indicating that the content will be
deleted.

6. Exit VXelements and unplug the USB flash drive.

7. Plug the USB flash drive in one of the top ports behind the controller and start the
controller (if not already done).

8. A message asking if a controller recovery is required appears on the LCD panel. Press the
OK button. The controller will display Process on the LCD screen.

9. Unplug the USB flash drive when asked or after the reboot of the controller.

876
C-Track Setup and Connection

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up the C-Track

1. Take the tripod out of the case and unfold it.

2. Adjust the feet to the required height.

3. Turn the swivel in the desired direction.

4. Check the locking of the different tightening elements:

l Extensions of each foot.

l Swivel on the tripod.

l Locking screw for moving the swivel.

Tighten locks before each use and check the tightening of the snap-
on coupling bracket to make sure the tripod is stable.

5. Carefully take the sensor out of the case and install it on the tripod.

1. 3 mm Allen key

2. Socket wrench clip

877
 If needed, the C-Track may also be used without the tripod.

Handling rules

Use the tripod or the C-Track/tripod connection area to lift the system.

Avoid lifting the C-Track by holding the main structure.

To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer

Make sure that the devices are connected before turning ON the controller and
that the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the devices.

When connecting the cables:

878
 l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connectors.

1. Connect the power cable to the C-Track.

2. Connect the USB cables to the C-Track. Make sure to plug the USB connector vertically
into the C-Track instead of horizontally.

3. Connect the other end of the USB cables in any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

4. Connect the other end of the power cable in the controller.

879
 5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the controller and the computer.

6. Connect the controller power supply in an electrical outlet.

7. Turn the controller ON.

8. Wait for the controller to display READY before proceeding to calibration.

Lift the cable retainers to safely unplug the cables from the C-Track and controller.

To launch the IP configurator

The IP Configurator tool is used to configure network settings allowing communication between the
computer and the controller through an Ethernet protocol.

IP Configurator requires computer administrator rights to be run.

Using the USB to Ethernet adapter

Launch the IP Configurator each time the USB to Ethernet adapter is plugged into a
new USB port.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable into the USB to Ethernet adapter.

2. Insert the USB to Ethernet adapter into the computer USB port.

3. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

l The IP Configurator will browse for the USB to Ethernet adapter provided and automatically
selects the relevant network connection.

l The default IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

4. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings. A message box will
appear, confirming the connection was successful.

880
After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

Using the computer Ethernet port

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer Ethernet port.

2. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

3. If no adapter is detected, a warning message will appear (this is the normal behavior). Click
Ignore to move to the next step.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

4. Select the proper Ethernet network in the Connection drop-down menu. The default
IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

5. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings.

6. A warning message will appear. Click Yes to move to the next step. A message will appear
confirming the connection was successful.

After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

To restore the default network settings

Click Revert to original connection settings.

To manually revert to default Windows settings

In Windows 10 / Windows 11
Go to Microsoft Support for the procedure.

881
Environment Compensation (EC)

Tools | Environment compensation

Overview
The Environment compensation (EC) function applies only to the C-Track and C-Track|Elite (generation 3
and up).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect, VXscan-R modules, and in partner plug-ins.
The EC works in conjunction with the thermal and gravity compensation models by measuring the C-
Track reference artifact many times per second. It adjusts internal parameters to compensate in order to
maintain volumetric performance in unstable environments.
The EC function enhances the system stabilization in shop- floor environment by maintaining the
performance of the system and it can also allow to bypass the warming time.

l To use the EC, the C-Track calibration must be valid (still up-to-date, device not
shocked, etc.)

l The EC does not replace the C-Track calibration step when it is required.

l The EC function is not activated by default.

When to activate the EC

The EC must be used only when the C-Track calibration is not required.

This function performs very well in any uncontrolled environment (e.g. temperature shifts) such as in a
shop-floor area.
There are no significant benefits of using the EC in a controlled room environment such as a laboratory.
Controlled room environment (lab)

882
 l The use of the EC is not required

l It will not add significant benefits unless the C-Track or the environment are not as
stable as expected.

Uncontrolled room environment (shop-floor area)

l The use of the EC is recommended

l It will help to keep the system within the specifications in unstable environments.

Hardware and components

1. EC light tripod

2. Calibration bar clamp

To install the calibration bar on the tripod

1. Press both sides of the clamp to insert the bar.

2. Place the calibration bar QR code facing the exterior.

883
Volume

The EC volume measures approximately 9 m3.

It is located along the Z axis from 2000 to 3500 mm.

To display the volume

Select Show C-Track volume and Show environment compensation volume in the C-Track scene pane of
the Display panel.

To configure the EC artifact

These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

C-Track calibration bar:

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bar:

l This option will use a MaxSHOT 3D scale bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Automated Quality Control products or custom applications.

884
 To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required to add the MaxSHOT 3D scale

bar. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

To locate the EC artifact

1. In the Display panel, open the C-Track Scene pane.

2. Select Show environment compensation volume option.

Field of view

l The bar is seen by the C-Track.

l Within the volume limit.

l Good orientation of the bar.

885
 l The bar is not seen by the C-Track.

l Too close of the volume limit.

l Bad orientation of the bar.

To correct the orientation, use the corrections arrows. They show the correction
direction to apply to the calibration bar from the C-Track point of view, regardless
of the bar orientation.

l Yellow arrows: near the target pose.

l Red arrows: too far from the target pose.

To activate the EC

If a C-Track calibration is required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Wait for C-Track warm-up completion (15 to 20 minutes).

4. Perform a C-Track calibration.

5. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

6. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. A pop-up message will appear to show the selection made in the interface
(MaxSHOT 3D or C-Track). Ensure to validate the information displayed against set
configuration parameters.

886
 7. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

8. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

9. The system is ready to use.

If a C-Track calibration is not required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

4. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. It can be activated as soon as the Analyzing phase is done, and Warming phase is
shown on the controller display panel. About 2 minutes are required.

Activating the EC function skips the warm-up time and the C-Track calibration only
if the calibration is not required.

5. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

The allowed bar orientation is along the C-Track X or Y axis.

6. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

7. The system is ready to use.

887
To deactivate the EC

l It is not recommended to deactivate the EC after it has been started. However in

such a case, a message is displayed indicating that the system will continue to
operate but it will use the last manual C-Track calibration performed.

l The C-Track will return to the calibration state it was in before the activation of the
EC.

Click to deactivate the EC.

Statuses displayed in the system panel

Artifact status Condition Result

l Seen by the C-Track

l Located within the EC

l Compensation process is
Artifact visible volume
running
l Oriented with good
angle

888
 Artifact status Condition Result

l Compensation process is
paused

l Last compensation is used

l Not seen by the C-
l Temperature and orientation
Track
changes monitored:
Artifact non
l Not located within the
visible l The temperature may
EC volume
not change by more
l Not oriented with good
than 0.5°C
angle
l The C-Track angle
changed by more
than 2.5°

l Compensation process is
Artifact is paused
moving
l Moving too fast
l Last compensation is used

The C-Track calibration is compensated only when the artifact is visible and the EC
ready conditions are met at the same time.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible

l The temperature change is monitored.

l The C-Track orientation change within ± 45° is monitored.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast

l The temperature and the C-Track orientation will be monitored.

889
EC status Condition

l Artifact is visible (see artifact statuses).

Analyzing
l Analyzing for Environment compensation.

Ready l EC analysis completed and ready to be used.

l EC analysis is not running when VE is activated.

Paused
l The last compensation is used.

l Artifact is not visible. Show the EC artifact.

Waiting for Not visible and the temperature changed by

environment more than 0.5°.
compensation

Not visible and the C-Track angle change by

more than 2.5°.

890
C-Track Calibration

General information
While performing a C-Track calibration with the calibration bar, VXelements adjusts many internal C-
Track parameters to optimize its performance.
A thermal and gravity compensation model is used to maintain the system within specifications
according to the C-Track orientation and the temperature changes.
The thermal compensation model is only activated after the warm-up time completion as the C-Track
internal components temperature must be stable.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

Information displayed in the 3D viewer

1. Front view

2. Top view

3. Progress indicator

891
When to perform the calibration
The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

l After the C-Track has been placed back in its case and carried to another location (not
applicable to the CUBE-R).

l After the C-Track has traveled by car or by plane.

l After the system has been shipped to a customer location.

Skipping this step will impair the system performance.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will

892
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Calibration with Quality Control products

Calibration

893
Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

For the Calibrate all workflow, click here.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

894
3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

The orientation of the C-Track cannot be changed after having started the
calibration process. Otherwise, the tolerance is exceeded and a message appears
asking to reposition the C-Track. It will be impossible to continue the calibration,
the C-Track will need to be placed back to the initial position to complete the
calibration process.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(*.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

895
 l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy1 is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

896
Calibrate all
The Calibrate all function allows you to calibrate the C-Track and all devices connected to it, one after
the other.

l Only devices connected and ready to be used will be part of the Calibrate all
process.

l The C-Track calibration is strongly recommended. It should be done first and cannot
be skipped if the C-Track is not valid anymore.

l To be detected, the HandyPROBE must be activated prior to starting its calibration

process.

l The HandyPROBE or scanner calibration can be skipped during the process using
the Next or Previous button.

To calibrate all

1. Click .

2. The calibration workflow window will open.

3. Click in the progress bar to calibrate the C-Track first.

4. Calibrate the C-Track.

5. Click for the next step.

6. Click the calibration button displayed in the progress bar to calibrate the next device.

7. Calibrate the device selected.

8. Click for the next step.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for each device displayed in the progress bar.

10. Click Accept.

To Reset the calibration or Suspend the calibration, click the corresponding button.

To reset to the factory settings

It is possible to reset the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

897
 1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

Calibration with R-Series products

Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

1. Integration (VXelements and R-Series I/O Module interfaces)

This mode teaches the C-Track calibration trajectory in the robot teach pendant. The C-Track calibration
teaching process can be done through VXelements software or I/O Module interface.

2. Execution (R-Series I/O Module interface)

This mode executes the calibration program using R- Series I/O Module interface. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant.

898
 3. Manual (VXelements interface)

This mode manually calibrates the C- Track using VXelements in the same way as in the standard
MetraSCAN 3D handheld applications.

C-Track robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration process of the C-Track in R-Series applications differs from its manual calibration.
It requires to reach 113 calibration bar positions in a smaller volume than that of the manual calibration
and following 3 ordered sub-trajectories:

1. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

2. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis

3. 49 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face up (toward the C-Track’s -Y axis) or down (toward the C-Track’s +Y axis).

899
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis
The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face left (toward the C-Track’s -X axis) or right (toward the C-Track’s +Z axis).

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

The 45° targets must face the C-Track.

The flat targets:

l Must face down (toward the C-Track +Y axis) for positions below the C-Track baseline Y > 0

l Must face up (toward the C-Track -Y axis) for positions above the C-Track baseline Y < 0

900
Either configuration can be selected for positions aligned to the C-Track baseline (Y = 0). An angle θ can
be added to the bar orientation given that all targets fit within the approved zone (defined in green).
This will help minimize occlusion of the targets.

To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset)

Three robot calibration trajectory options are available. The trajectories will all be the same but the
distance (Z offset) from the C-Track can be configured. These distances are in relation to the center of
the calibration zone.

l 2600 mm

l 3100 mm

l 3600 mm

901
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The C-Track calibration bar TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate
system. The center of this coordinate system is a translation of the robot flange coordinate system. It is
located along the bar axis (Z+ orientation), the middle of the QR code define the Z origin and the normal
of the QR code define the -Y.
Define the TCP using the applicable annex of the Calibration certificate. Use the values as is without any
modification.

Autocalibration

l A scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) is required for autocalibration. This file is
available on the Customer Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.
l If you fail to provide the file needed, a message error will be displayed in the
interface (Command Window) or by the third-party software.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process using the relevant program.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

902
3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process. The ends of the calibration bar need to be positioned onto the yellow
squares. The orientation of the bar also needs to be changed following the visual
indication. A position is validated when the squares at the ends of the calibration bar turn
green. The progress indicator will increase.

The pose is skipped if the bar is not seen within 2 seconds of the C- Track
calibration - Accept action execution. This will trigger a warning message after
the calibration, which must be controlled by an operator.

4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

903
Manual calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

904
Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

905
When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

906
To reset to the factory settings

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

It is possible to restore the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

907
908
C-Track System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | Options | C-Track (or click in the system panel).

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated.

To set parameters
C-Track volume
This function allows changing the working volume.

l 16.6 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

909
Environment compensation
Modes

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT scale bar

For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Volume extension
This function allows configuring a scaling reference bar (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale
bar) with the VE function.
Scaling modes

l None

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT 3D scale bars

It is also possible to add or remove a scale bar.

For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions

Select to allow measurements even if the conditions are not ideal if:

l the operating temperature has not been reached

l the analysis period is not completed

l the temperature varies more than 10°C from the temperature recorded at calibration time.

When selected:

l Enable C-Track functions

l C-Track status bar turns yellow to show this state

l Allows the use of the Static referencing mode

910
This check box should not be selected unless the consequences it will have on
measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.

911
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The QR code sticker applied to the middle of the C- Track calibration bar contains all the relevant
information.

l Select the check box to allow the C-Track to detect the code and extract the information
needed (serial number and lengths).

This is a mandatory step in the calibration process. The reading will be impossible if
the QR code sticker is dirty or damaged.

l If the check box is cleared and the Calibration bar drop-down in the system panel does not
display the right serial number, click Add... and browse to choose the right bar's calibration bar
file (*.sbcf). Otherwise, select the *.sbcf manually right after launching the calibration process.

Play sound when volume extension is lost

This option is enabled by default.

The sound of the C-Track volume extension function is activated.

A beep is emitted when the C-Track cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
To disable this function, clear the check box.

Use original calibration data

See To reset to the factory settings.

Calibration expiration (days)

The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated. The default value is 5 days.

912
C-Track Object Preparation
The adequate target positioning is an element to guarantee accuracy of the measurement.

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

913
Part setup examples
Small parts

Medium parts

Large parts

914
Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated. See Tilt Compensation section.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

Volume extension

l Start to acquire data in the middle of the total volume of the part.

l Move to get a good overlapping of the part.

360° measurement
To perform a 360° inspection without a MaxSHOT Next, it is recommended to:

1. Put the targets on the part using enough swivel targets.

2. Move the C-Track.

3. Swivel the targets.

The base of the targets should not move and the targets should
remain in contact with their bases.

915
4. Detect the targets on the other side of the part.

5. Remove the swivel targets and do not swivel them back.

The rotation axis of these targets is designed in their very middle. Rotating the
targets back and forth could cause unwanted uncertainty.

916
Volume Extension (VE)

Tools | Volume extension

Overview
The Volume extension (VE) function allows continuously acquiring targets while moving the C-Track
around or along the part using the photogrammetry concept. This will generate a better positioning
target model accuracy than the basic detection methods (Auto-detect targets and Manually detect
targets functions).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect modules, and in partner plug-ins (C-Track and C-Track|Elite
generation 3 and up).

It is recommended to calibrate the C-Track before using the VE function for it to

work properly and achieve a certain level of accuracy.

Positioning target setup

The setup must follow the same approach as before:

l Spread sufficient positioning targets all around the part to cover X, Y and Z directions (≥ 6 in
each frame).

l Distribute favoring the volume extension (≥ 6 overlapping targets between frames).

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

917
 Scaling reference bars, (C-Track calibration bars, or MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can
be used to enhance the volumetric performance of the VE.)

The use of coded targets is still allowed (if already in place for fixed setups), but it
will not generate any volumetric performance benefits.

Acquisition rules

Make sure to apply the C-Track handling rules shown previously.

l It is mandatory to continue tracking the targets while moving the C-Track.

l Aim at the center of the part while moving around it.

l Move the C-Track along or around the part with a minimum displacement of 0.5 m.

l Keep a good standoff distance from the targets.

l When performing VE on a shiny part, some unwanted data (misidentified as targets) might be
acquired. This might have no impact or it could also entirely prevent the operation. To minimize
this behavior, ensure acquiring targets by positioning the C- Track at a slight angle to the
surface and as far from it as possible.

l The ambient temperature must not vary by more than ±2°C during the acquisition process.

l The Pitch and Roll angles cannot be inclined by more than ±10°. The current position at VE start
defines the reference angles for the threshold calculation.

l All positioning targets must be seen at different positions and angles.

l If the scaling mode is C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT scale bar, at least 1 scaling reference
bar must be seen during the VE acquisition to scale the model using a scaling reference bar.

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

918
l Rotation using the tripod pivot will lead to VE fail.

l The EC function will be paused during VE acquisition (if previously activated).

919
Scaling mode configuration
These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

None (no scaling reference bar):

l This option will use the C-Track calibration performed previously.

l Better positioning target model accuracy will be achieved using the previously performed C-
Track calibration (higher than with the Auto- detect targets and Manually detect targets
functions).

l For use in a controlled environment. Also suitable for demonstration purposes.

C-Track calibration bar:

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar is seen during
the acquisition process.

l If a C-Track calibration has not been performed previously, an error message will appear.

l In this case, the VE will be stopped.

l Calibrating the C-Track will fix the issue.

l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bars:

l This option will use the MaxSHOT 3D scale bars as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar(s) is(are) seen
during the acquisition process.

l Up to 4 MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can be added and configured.

920
 l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Automated Quality Control products or custom
applications.

To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required for each MaxSHOT 3D scale bar
to be added. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

8. Repeat the process to add more bars.

To remove a scale bar from the window, select it and click Remove.

Acquisition

1. Place the C-Track in front of the part.

2. If a scaling reference bar is used, place it so the C-Track sees it during the VE acquisition
process.

3. To start the acquisition, click in the system panel or go to Tools | Volume extension.

4. Move the C-Track along the part. The tracking status and target count (all targets seen by
the C-Track cameras) are displayed in the system panel.

921
 Click Cancel to cancel the VE at any time. The previous state will be restored.

If a positioning target model exists, a warning message will notify that the newly
acquired model will replace the existing one. The previous model will be lost.

If the tracking is lost

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to return to a previously known position to resume the acquisition process.

If the C-Track Pitch and Roll angles are inclined by more than ±10°

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to move back within the angle range to resume the acquisition process.

If the scaling mode is set to C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar and no scaling
reference bar is detected during the VE acquisition

l A warning message will appear.

l The VE will be performed as if the None scaling mode had been set.

5. Click Finalize to stop the acquisition. Target count at the end of the process will be
different than the total count shown during the acquisition.

l If the acquisition passes: A progress window appears showing the acquisition

completion level. No confirmation message will be displayed at the end. Dynamic

922
 tracking is activated and the model is ready to use.

l If the acquisition fails: An error message appears. Click Retry to reattempt the
acquisition or Cancel to exit the VE acquisition mode and return to the previous
state.

Volume extension details

To view the information related to the acquisition performed and the bars seen, select Positioning under
the scene1 node in the Navigation pane. The details appear in the Reference details pane.
Details displayed depend on the scaling mode set and the number of scaling reference bars used and
seen during the acquisition process.

Detail Description
Reference source Reference model acquisition method.
Target count Number of positioning targets included in the final model.
Coded target count Number of coded targets included in the final model.
3D uncertainty: Mean uncertainty on the measured position of targets
3D uncertainty
(standard deviation).

Evaluation of the difference between the scaled measured lengths and

the reference lengths.
The table shows the global scaling deviation and all the scaling
distances for each bar used.
The global scaling represents the highest absolute value of all the
scaling distances.
Scaling deviation*

If 2 bars were configured and 1 bar was seen

during the acquisition process, the Reference
details pane shows information relative to the bar
seen. The other information will be replaced by
N/A and will not be taken into account for the
calculation.

* This detail will not appear if the None scaling mode is set.

1Option which allows displaying different elements in the 3D viewer depending on the device connected.

923
C-Track Tilt Compensation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This feature compensates for the angles of inclination of the C-Track during measurement.

C-Track rotations
The accuracy of the C-Track takes Pitch and Roll into consideration.

Pitch Roll

Rotation around the X-axis of the C-Track Rotation around the Z-axis of the C-Track

Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees

The tilt compensation is active, as long as the C- Track remains within - 45 to +45 degrees during
measurement.

When exceeding these angles during measurement, the C-Track status switches to
Roll out of range in the system panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be
inaccurate.

924
Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees
The C-Track must be calibrated using the needed angle. The tilt compensation will be active if the C-
Track remains within ±2 degrees from the angle used during the calibration process.

When exceeding ±2 degrees, the C-Track status switches to Roll out of range in the system
panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be inaccurate.

925
C-Link Product

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Overview
The C-Link function allows networking up to 4 C-Track sensors to position a HandyPROBE system or to
scan with a compatible scanner. The synchronization is applied to each C-Track controller to allow the
measurement on all sensors simultaneously.
Using the C-Link functionality does not affect the individual performance of each device used in the
network.
The communication between C-Track controllers and the computer is provided by an Ethernet TCP/IP
switch.

926
System requirements
The C-Link function requires same requirements as VXelements.

C-Link typical workflow

Step Description
Connection
1
l Connect the equipment

Hardware configuration
2
l Configure the IP address of the controllers

Software configuration

l Activate the products through the Product Manager

3
l Enable the C-Link network

l Configure the C-Link network in VXelements

Calibrate

4 l C-Tracks

l Other devices (HandyPROBE Next, MetraSCAN 3D).

Prepare the working environment

5 l Prepare the part

l Put the positioning targets on the part

Acquire data

6 l Acquisition of the positioning model

l Part measurement

927
C-Link Hardware and Components

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Hardware

C-Link kit components

All components are provided in a carrying case.

1. Ethernet and C-Link cables

l 2 X 10 m Ethernet cables

l 2 X 20 m Ethernet cables

l 3 X 10 m C-Link cables

2. Power supply 5V and power supply adapter kit

928
3. 5-port 10/100 Ethernet switch

4. Connection diagram

929
C-Link Connection

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

To connect a C-Track
See C-Track Setup and Connection.
Connection diagram

1. Laptop with
VXelements

2. Ethernet
switch

3. C-Track
controller

4. Ethernet
cable

5. C-Link cable

A. For 3rd C-Track

B. For 4th C-Track

To connect the hardware

Back of the controller 1. Ethernet port

2. Ethernet cable

3. Ethernet switch

4. C-Link In port and external trigger (4 pins

cable)

5. C-Link Out port (six pins cable)

930
Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

The computer and all the controllers must be connected to the Ethernet switch. The Ethernet cables can
be connected to the Ethernet switch in any port and in any order.

1. Plug an Ethernet cable from the computer into the any available Ethernet switch port.

2. Plug a USB cable form the first C-Track to its controller (primary).

3. Plug an Ethernet cable from the first controller into any available Ethernet switch port.

4. Connect the controller power supply to an electrical source and then to the first controller.

5. Repeat step 2 to 4 for each C-Track of the C-Link network.

6. Link the C-Track primary controller to the first secondary controller by plugging a C-Link
cable from the primary controller C-Link Out port to the first secondary controller C-Link In
port.

7. If required, link the first secondary controller to the second secondary controller by
plugging a C-Link cable from the first secondary controller C-Link Out port to the second
secondary C-Link In port and so on for a third secondary controller.

8. Power ON all the C-Track controllers.

931
C-Link Calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Handle the scale bar carefully as it is fragile.

l Do not touch reflective targets as the damaged targets are not recognized by the C-
Track.

l During the set-up, make sure that no light or sun is pointing directly at the cameras.

l Make sure everything else is plugged in before starting the controller.

To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode

C- Tracks are calibrated as usual but using the same calibration bar. Files are available online on
Creaform Customer Portal and are provided with the C-Tracks.

1. Choose the calibration bar.

2. Select the check box depending on how many C-Tracks will be calibrated.

3. Set a calibration volume.

4. Calibrate the C-Tracks in order from the primary to the secondaries.

The calibrations are done sequentially. Once the calibration is accepted, the calibration interface will
automatically move on to the next C-Track.

All C-Tracks must have the same model but can be calibrated using different
volumes.

To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The HandyPROBE Next stylus is by default associated to the primary C-Track.

932
The HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the
C-Link network.
The HandyPROBE must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.
The MetraSCAN 3D and the artifact must remain visible to the C-Track throughout the entire calibration
process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R

The MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the C-Link network.
The user calibration plate must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

933
C-Link Configuration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Make sure to leave a 10-cm gap around and on top of the controller to allow for
proper air circulation and heat flow.

l Do not stack the controllers one of top of the other.

To get your C-Link system running

1. Set up each C-Track (do not connect the controller to the computer).

2. Follow the connection diagram.

3. Set the IP address of the computer to 200.200.200.1 using the IP Configurator.

4. Configure the IP address of each controller.

5. Configure in the Product Manager.

6. Enable and configure the C-Link network.

One port should remain available on each controller. Use the provided hub when
needed.

To configure the IP address of the controllers

1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

934
 1. On the first secondary controller, use the Next button (4), select menu 5 (Options) and
press OK button.

2. Use the Next button and select menu 5.4 (IP address) and press OK button.

3. Press Next button until the last digit of the IP address is blinking.

4. Press OK button to change the last digit.

5. Press the Next button once to reach the arrow sign.

6. Press OK button to confirm the IP address.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each secondary controller, making sure that each controller has a
unique IP address.

Recommended configuration
Controller IP address
#1 (primary) 200.200.200.2 (default setting)
#2 200.200.200.3
#3 200.200.200.4
#4 200.200.200.5

Remember those settings. They must match the configuration of VXelements.

Default configuration

l Controller # 1 (primary): 200.200.200.2

l Controller # 2: 200.200.200.3

l Controller # 3: 200.200.200.4

l Controller # 4: 200.200.200.5

To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager

935
 1. Open the VXelements Product Manager (Configure | Product manager).

2. Select the active product from the list or add a new one.

l The primary C-Track must be set as Active.

l Other C-Tracks in the network must appear under the Installed list.

l If used, the MetraSCAN 3D and MaxSHOT Next must appear in the Active list.

Only 1 C-Track must be activated as the primary C-Track (we recommend the C-Track associated with
the controller having the IP address 200.200.200.2 for the MetraSCAN 3D and 200.200.200.5 for the
MetraSCAN 3D- R). Other C- Tracks must be included in the Product Manager but should not be
activated.
Other products, like MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R or MaxSHOT Next, must be activated.

To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements

To activate the C-Link network

1. Go to Configure | Options | C-Track menu.

2. Select the Use C-Link box in the C-Track dialog box (or click in the system panel).

3. Select the Activate C-Link network check box.

4. Configure the C-Link network.

To configure the C-Link network

1. Enter the serial number of the primary C-Track along with its IP address.

2. Select the Active check box to indicate that the C-Track is to be part of the C-Link network.
To remove a C-Track, right-click the C-Track to delete and select Remove selected C-Track.

3. Specify the C-Track serial number of the secondary C-Track.

4. Click OK.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each secondary C-Track to be added to the C-Link network (if
applicable).

6. Click OK.

936
 l The primary C- Track should not be changed once a configuration is applied.
Otherwise, you will need to open the Product Manager, delete the previous primary
C-Track and create a new entry adding the configuration and license files.

l The IP address must be consistent.

l When a C-Link network configuration is executed from the VXelements - C-Track

Configuration dialog box (C-Link tab), the information is saved in the primary C-
Track’s configuration file. Activating the same controller as the primary in
subsequent uses of the C- Link functionality will prevent from running the
configuration again.

Once all C-Tracks are configured in the controllers and VXelements, the C-Track status will be displayed.
The primary C-Track status is similar to a standard C-Track; secondary C-Tracks should be Not referenced
until a C-Link Reference model is selected or imported.

937
C-Link Object Preparation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The same concept for the C-Track is applied to the C-Link setup.

Part preparation

1. Clean the part.

2. Determine the best parameters to set in relation of the part color.

Positioning targets

1. Use coded, swivel or high reflective targets.

2. Place the positioning targets on the part or around it (above, under, right, left, in front or
behind).

3. Make a suitable target setup to be able to acquire all the targets with the primary C-Track
on a single non-stop 360° acquisition pattern.

Environmental conditions

1. Check that light conditions are appropriate.

2. Make sure the temperature is stable.

938
For details, see the C-Track section.

939
C-Link Operating Principles

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up a C-Link Reference model

A C-Link Reference model is created by selecting a positioning model using:

l The MaxSHOT Next

l The primary C-Track to perform a volumetric extension (Auto-detect targets, Manually detect
targets and Detect targets from template)

l The Volume extension (VE) function.

Once the C-Track is part of the reference model, it is automatically detected (green).
Upon creation of a C-Link Reference model, the reference status switches to the dynamic mode, giving
the information of the C-Link Reference model for each C-Track.

Click to select targets for a new C-Link Reference model.

The DEC function is not available with the C-Link functionality.

To set up a Part reference model

The C-Link function requires a C-Link reference model. If the object to scan is not suited to be probed or
scanned as a C-Link reference model, its own Part Reference model should be used.

Click to select targets for a new Part reference model.

Create a Part reference model (optional)

Once the C-Link reference model is created, it is possible to create a Part reference model (optional).

940
 l Each C-Track will map the new targets against the C-Link reference model.

l It avoids recreating a C-Link reference every time a new part needs to be inspected while using
a fixture.

If so, use the wanted detect targets mode to acquire targets.

Once created, the Part reference model will be displayed separately from others C-Track status. The part
can then move in the C-Link volume as it is no longer attached to the C-Link reference model.

Reference positioning target statuses

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active C-Link reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active Part reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.

The target is not seen the by C-Track and is part of the C-Link reference model.

The target is not seen by the C-Track and is part of the Part reference model.

Visibility pane of the system panel

l The number of targets seen in real time by the primary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen in real time by the first secondary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen by each C-Track on the total amount of targets in the reference
model.

To probe in the C-Link mode

With a C-Link network, the HandyPROBE Next stylus can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the HandyPROBE Next stylus. The
stylus status is displayed in the system panel.

941
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.

942
To scan in the C-Link mode
With a C-Link network, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN
3D-R.
The scanner status is displayed in the system panel.
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.
The number of targets detected are displayed in the Status window.

Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network

The data acquisition is carried out by one C-Track at the time.
VXelements automatically selects the appropriate C-Track based on the stylus or scanner position and
orientation in the C-Link network volume.
The Z-Best concept is applied: the closest C-Track, which has the better Z position, is used to track the
activated device. The same concept is also applied to the MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R.
Controller not found
When VXelements cannot find the controller, make sure that its IP address and the computer are
properly configured.
A controller reboot might be required after an IP change. Otherwise, look at the Ethernet connections
and make sure the switch and controller are powered on.
Not referenced
This status shows up when there is no C-Link Reference model or if the C-Track does not see enough
targets and does not recognize the current C-Link Reference model.
Not synchronized
The controllers need a few minutes to synchronize themselves.
If the status remains, check the USB cable connections and the hub connections between the controllers.
It can also appear as a transition state when cameras are connected or disconnected during the
controller boots (not recommended).

Troubleshooting tips can be useful. To display them, click the C-Track status bar,
then the Troubleshooting tips pane in the VXelements dialog box.

943
R-Series Autocalibration Kit

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

The R-Series Autocalibration Kit allows the complete and automatic calibration of the C-Track. It enables
automated steps, requiring no, or minimal, human involvement. This limits accuracy drift over time and
can ensure continuous operation (24/7).
Two solutions are available, with varying amount of human interaction needed:

l The pneumatic autocalibration kit enables the robot to pick up the calibration bar by itself.

l The manual autocalibration kit requires that someone installs the calibration artifact on the
scanner.

Pneumatic autocalibration kit

Components
Asset protection
Operating principles
To calibrate the system

Components

1. Pneumatic tool changer

a. Pneumatic master plate

b. Tool plate

944
 2. Calibration bar holder

3. Tool rack

4. Proximity sensors

5. Calibration bar

6. Pneumatic valve

7. Control box

Pneumatic tool changer

This industrial device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the robot.
Pneumatic master plate
The active half of the tool changer. It is installed on the scanner, which is mounted to the robot.
The master plate:

l Contains the locking mechanism;

l Is equipped with pass through air ports to supply air to the end of arm tooling;

l Has 2 proximity sensors to confirm its state.

Tool plate
The passive half of the tool changer. On the pneumatic solution, the calibration bar holder and C-Track
calibration bar are mounted on it.

945
Calibration bar holder
The calibration bar holder is the link between the Tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar. It must be
installed 108 mm from the QR code.

The robot should be programmed to minimize misalignment / hard contact during

tool changer coupling and uncoupling on the tool rack.

Tool rack
The tool rack is a fixture that holds the C-Track calibration bar when not in use. It contains proximity
sensors.
For a MetraSCAN 3D-R custom integration, the tool rack can be designed by the integrator.
Proximity sensors

946
The proximity sensors detect the presence of an object and convert this information into an electrical
signal. The proximity sensors have a LED that will turn on when the calibration bar is detected.
Tool rack proximity sensor

The sensor detects if the calibration bar is in or out of the tool rack.

1. Tool rack proximity sensor

Master plate proximity sensors

The sensors allow feedback of the Lock/Unlock state of the master plate.

Pneumatic valve
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar) (0.41–0.69 MPa).

l Filter minimum: 40 microns.

l Flow maximum: Negligible

Color Use

1 Brown +24V
3 Blue GND
4 Black Signal

The valve is a 2-position, spring-return, 5-way pneumatic valve.

When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is OFF, the valve is in state 12, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 2,
the tool changer is LOCKED.

947
When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is ON, the valve is in state 14, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 4,
the tool changer is UNLOCKED.

Internal Logic
Equivalent ladder representation of the internal logic used for the output to the pneumatic valve

To switch output PL04 to ON, the tool must be in rack and the unlock signal from robot controller
should be ON.

Control box
The control box is used for the protection and safety of equipment only. It allows preventing unlock
command to release the C-Track calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.
Two major types of interlocks exist:

l Failure interlocks: Continuously active and normally used to initiate equipment shutdowns and

l Permissive interlocks: Evaluate conditions to allow the starting or the continuation of actions.

Asset protection
On the CUBE-R solution, the pneumatic autocalibration kit is part of the Asset Protection option.
On top of providing a fully automatic calibration process, it also enhances the system safety checks.
Additional robotic implementations are used to evaluate the state of the calibration bar. Some actions
will not be possible when the bar is mounted on the robot (e. g., unlocking the tool) to remove risks of a
robot program mistakenly asking the robot to drop the bar during the calibration.
It also adds software safety checks when using Creaform VXscan-R module in VXelements.

Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is pneumatically driven to couple and uncouple the tool on the tool
changer. The tool changer uses air ports to provide lock and unlock pressure to the locking mechanism.

948
 Safe, reliable operation of the tool changer is dependent on a continuous supply of
compressed air at a pressure of 60 to 100 psi. It is the customer's responsibility to
halt the robot motion if the air supply pressure drops below 60 psi.1

For proper tool pick-up, it is recommended to keep a maximum distance of 1.5 mm between the master
plate and the tool plate faces.
For proper tool drop-off, it is recommended to keep a maximum distance of 1.5 mm between the tool
plate and the tool rack proximity sensor.
1 ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC-5 through QC-27, Document #9610-20-
2254-09, 36.

949
C-Track calibration process
Coupling sequence
The coupling procedure should be following the tool changer manufacturer recommendation.

The locking mechanism must be in the unlock position when attempting to couple
the tool changer. Failure to adhere to this condition may result in damage to the
unit and/or the robot.

X and Y Cocking Offset Twisting Offset

Z Offset
Offset (degrees) (degrees)21
<1.5mm ± 1 mm ±1.1° ±2°

12 Warning, illustration, and table: ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC- 5
through QC-27, Document #9610-20-2254-09, 36.
To pick up the C-Track calibration bar

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

2. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

3. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

4. Move master plate (which contains the locking mechanism) above the tool rack.

5. Align master plate and tool plate for coupling.

6. Insert the master plate slowly into the tool plate.

7. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to lock state.

8. Check locked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

9. Move robot tool changer up by 25 mm.

10. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

950
 11. Move robot away from tool rack.

Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

Uncoupling sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

2. Move robot tool changer above the tool rack.

3. Align tool plate with tool rack for uncoupling.

4. Move slowly the tool plate on the tool rack.

5. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

6. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

7. Move master plate up by 25 mm.

8. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

9. Move robot away from tool rack.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

951
Manual autocalibration kit

Components
Operating principles
To calibrate the system

Components

1. Manual tool changer

a. Manual master plate

b. Tool plate

2. Calibration bar holder

3. Calibration bar

Manual tool changer

This industrial device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the robot.
Manual master plate
The active half of the tool changer that contains the locking mechanism. The calibration bar holder and
C-Track calibration bar are mounted on it.
Tool plate
The passive half of the tool changer. On the manual solution, it is part of the scanner bracket.

952
Calibration bar holder
The calibration bar holder is the link between the tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar. It must be
installed 108 mm from the QR code.

953
Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is manipulated by an operator that will place it and lock it on the tool
plate on the robot.
To lock or unlock the master plate, hold the bar in position on the tool plate and rotate the mechanism.
It is the responsability of the operator to make sure that the calibration bar holder is firmly attached to
the scanner bracket.
C-Track calibration process
Before starting the calibration process, it is important to secure the tool holder on the scanner bracket.
To help with this step, the calibration program can include a move of the robot to an accessible position.
This position can also be programmed to be reached after the calibration, to ease the tool removal.
Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

954
HP Z6 Industrial Computer

Overview
This industrial computer (provided without a screen and keyboard) comes with VXelements. It allows the
user to store inspection session information and provides enough processing power to keep a steady
frame rate while running inspection software.

l The HP Z6 Industrial Computer can also run the R-SeriesI/O Module interface, but
this software is sold separately.

l It is possible to install it in the Creaform Computer Cabinet, also sold separately.

Creaform computer cabinet

1. HP Z6 Industrial Computer

2. Creaform computer cabinet

955
Technical specifications
Component Type
Processor Intel® Xeon™ W5-3435X Processor 3.1 GHz
Operating system Windows 11 Pro for Workstation 64
Graphics card NVIDIA® RTX A5000 (24 GB)
Memory 128 GB (4x32 GB)

l 1x 1TB SSD + 1x 512 GB:

nHP Z Turbo Drive 1TB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

Hard drive nHP Z Turbo Drive 512GB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

At lease 200 GBs of free space must be available.

10x USB 3.0

3x Gigabit Ethernet ports:

l 2x Allied Telesis AT-2911T/2-901 Dual Port 1GbE NIC (C-

Connecting ports
Track and robot)

l1x Intel Ethernet I225-T1 single Port 2.5GbE PCIe NIC

(local network)

Display output 4x DisplayPort (mDP 1.4) + 2x USB-C

* For Intel I225-T1, all adapters and components must have Gigabit 1000BASE capabilities.
This computer is supplied by Creaform, who guarantees its compatibility with our products. All questions
and specification validation requests must be sent to Customer Support. No certification or compatibility
guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers than Creaform.

Software
All software maintenance for the HP Z6 Industrial Computer is performed by Creaform through an
annual R-Series Customer plan.

956
R-Series I/O Module Hardware
This section is about the R-Series I/O Module Hardware components (I/O Module hereafter) and the way
they interact.

Components
Dimensions
Design and layout
To connect the R-Series I/O Module Hardware

Components

I/O Module Hardware package

The robot integration package consists of a software interface and an R-Series I/O Module Hardware
(physical box) allowing communications between the VXelements software and the robot controller.
Included with the I/O Module Hardware package:

l Digital I/O Module (16 inputs / 16 outputs)

l NPN / PNP logic conversion

l 120-240 V power cord

l Ethernet port

l Industrial-grade patch cable (Harting Han® Industrial Connector)

l 6m extension cable

957
 The extension cable is also used to interconnect the I/O Module Hardware inside of
the Productivity Station.

Closer look at the I/O Module Hardware

958
 1. I/O Module Hardware

2. Power supply

3. Circuit breaker

4. Electrical terminal and fuses

5. Relays

6. Ethernet switch

View from under the I/O Module Hardware

1. I/O Module Hardware connector

2. Power supply

959
 3. Ethernet cable

Dimensions

960
Design and layout

961
To connect the I/O Module Hardware

Electrical Interface
Connector interface

The I/O Module Hardware has 3 external connections identified by plates on the enclosure.

Connector
I/O Module Hardware
P4
Connector
PSU01 Power supply
ETH01 Ethernet

962
Input rating

The I/O Module Hardware is powered by an external source.

Characteristic Value
Rated Voltage 100-240VC
Frequency 50-60HZ
Maximum Current Draw < 1.50A

Output Rating

Characteristic Value
Rated Voltage 24V
Output protected to 2A
Maximum Current
total
Polarity NPN/PNP

I/O electrical pinout

This section displays the cable pinout related of the I/O patch cable. Is is terminated with a Harting
Han® Industrial Connector on the I/O Module Hardware side (R-Series IO Box in the table) and labeled
loose wires on the customer side.
A copy of the electrical schematics is available in a pocket inside the enclosure.

963
Input/Output polarity selection
The inputs and outputs offer 2 choices of connection, PNP or NPN.
Input connection

Connect jumper as shown in the picture to set Input in PNP or NPN mode.
Output connection

Connect jumper as shown in the picture to set Output in PNP or NPN mode.

964
Previous Generation Devices

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

C-Track
R-Series Autocalibration Kit
R-Series Industrial Computer
R-Series I/O Module Hardware

965
C-Track

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The C-Track is a dual-camera optical sensor providing high-accuracy measurements. This device is used
with the HandyPROBE, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R for production line purposes, such as
in the automotive, aerospace and manufacturing industries.
C-Track+ C-Track C-Track Third generation (G3)

966
Compatibility chart

HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE Next
Next+
G4 G3 G4

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN MetraSCAN MetraSCAN-R
MetraSCAN 3D
3D+ 3D-R BLACK+|Elite
MetraSCAN- MetraSCAN-R
BLACK 357 BLACK+
R BLACK BLACK+|Elite

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

967
C-Track Hardware and Components

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

Hardware and components

The C-Track includes 2 digital cameras surrounded by a set of LEDs. Lighting sensors enable measuring
reflectors in a specific volume of use (9.1 m3 or 16.6 m3 for C-Track and C-Track|Elite).

1. Tripod - 1 unit

2. Cables:

l USB 3.0 power cable - 1 unit

l Ethernet cable - 1 unit

3. Calibration bar - 1 unit

968
 4. Power supply and power cable - 1 unit each

5. Controller - 1 unit

6. C-Track - 1 unit

7. Dynamic referencing accessory kit - 1 unit

8. USB 3.0 to Ethernet adapter - 1 unit

9. Software installer USB key - 1 unit

10. Calibration certificate (under the case foam insert) - 1 unit

C-Track tripod

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The tripod adjusts the C-Track to multiple heights and angles.

To set up the C-Track on the tripod, see the Setup section.

969
Other components

1. Dynamic referencing accessory kit

2. Calibration bar

3. Dynamic referencing kit

4. Controller

5. USB to Ethernet adapter

6. Ethernet cable

7. Power supply

8. USB power cable

970
Visibility LED color codes

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Blue Red Yellow White

LED Off Green Yellow Red
(blink) (blink) (blink) (blink)

1 No power Power on - - - - - -

No power or
Stylus not
21 VXelements is Stylus seen - - - - -
seen
not started

Scanner
No power or
Scanner detection Scanner not
31 VXelements is - - - -
seen not at seen
not started
100%

C-Track ready Waiting

Not
4 (stable - - - Warming Blooming for QR
operating
temperature) code

Few targets Referential

Referential
5 No referential2 seen (not below - - - -
seen
optimal) 4 targets

1 If there is no stylus or scanner activated, LED #2 will mimic LED #3 behavior and

vice versa.
2 The minimum threshold 4 targets.

The target threshold (T) for LED #5 to be green is set according to this formula:

971
The absolute maximum is set to 8.

Examples

l If there are 4 targets in the reference, the LED turns green when 4 targets
are seen. It turns red otherwise.

l If there are 8 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 5 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 targets are seen and red otherwise.

l If there are 12 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 6 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 or 5 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

l If there are 40 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 8 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 to 7 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

972
C-Track Operating Principles
The C- Track cameras acquire the positioning targets simultaneously, which enables the software to
determine the reference targets position as well as its environment through triangulation.

Measurement volume

Flexibility volume: 16.6 m3

Accuracy volume: 9.1 m3

973
Positioning model
To reference the C-Track in space and to obtain accurate measurements, it is necessary to create a
positioning model with targets. The positioning model should cover the volume of the part to be
scanned or probed as much as possible.
To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).

Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel. The C-Track will
show the target count after the target acquisition process.

The last action performed sets the default action.

974
 Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

Swivel targets cannot be rotated when using this

Auto-detect targets method.

All previously acquired targets will be

discarded.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
Rectangle
Manually detect targets
l
Free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to import a positioning target model. The

dynamic referential is automatically activated.
Import C-Track
positioning targets 2. Select an existing positioning target model file
(.txt).

3. Click Open.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

975
Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

976
Reference positioning target statuses
The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

Referencing modes

The part can only be moved if the targets are placed on it.

Dynamic mode
Take measurements while moving the C-Track.

l A minimum of 4 visible targets is required (at least 8 are recommended). Set minimum value in
Configuration Options.

l Useful in a work environment exposed to vibrations.

l Eliminates potential handling errors.

l Makes it possible to move the C-Track and part quickly.

Hybrid mode
Allows the C-Track to continue taking accurate measurements when less than 4 targets are seen in the
reference model. At least one target must always be visible.

Static mode

Only available if the Allow measurements outside recommended conditions check

box is selected.

Allows moving the C-Track between measurements without having to continuously see the targets.

977
l Retrieve the C-Track position after moving to update the actual position.

l Make sure that enough targets belonging to the reference are visible when retrieving.

978
Detection statuses
The C-Track is connected and ready to be used.

The C-Track is not connected or not ready to be used. For details,

refer to the Troubleshooting section.

The C-Track is dazzled or too many targets are seen.

Positioning model is referenced. At least 4 targets must be seen.

Not referenced. Less than 4 targets seen. No target is detected.

979
C-Track Controller

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The controller provides information about all systems connected to it:

l C-Track

l HandyPROBE stylus

l MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

l MaxSHOT 3D

It enables to:

l Associate the stylus

l Set language and contrast

l Reinitialize the controller

l Track the status of all systems through the LEDs, etc.

The controller uses an Ethernet protocol to communicate with the computer that can be set up through
the IP Configurator tool.

Components
Connection

980
Display
Recovery procedure

981
Controller Components

Components
G4, G4+ controller

Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button: To go back to the

main menu.

4. Next button: To browse through

the menus.

5. OK button: To explore the sub-

menus.

6. LED statuses

Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT 3D)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Power supply

9. Device USB ports and cable

retainers

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

982
G3 controller (the front features the same characteristics as the G4, G4+)
Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT Next)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Main power supply

9. Hardware USB ports

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

To connect the controller

See C-Track Setup and Connection.

983
Controller Recovery

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This function allows creating a USB key which can be used when a recovery is required. This manual
process will update the controller’s software to be the same as the VXelements version. For details, see
the controller recovery procedure.

A controller recovery should be the last solution tried when there seems to be an
issue with a C- Track, HandyPROBE stylus, MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D- R or
MaxSHOT Next (remote). During this process, a clean version of VXelements will be
reinstalled on the controller to make it up and running.

To perform a controller recovery

1. Plug an empty USB flash drive into the computer.

2. Open VXelements with a C-Track activated in the Product Manager.

3. Go to Configure | C-Track | Create recovery key.

4. In VXelements – Create Recovery Key dialog box, select the USB flash drive plugged (step
1).

5. Accept the formatting process. A message will appear indicating that the content will be
deleted.

6. Exit VXelements and unplug the USB flash drive.

7. Plug the USB flash drive in one of the top ports behind the controller and start the
controller (if not already done).

8. A message asking if a controller recovery is required appears on the LCD panel. Press the
OK button. The controller will display Process on the LCD screen.

9. Unplug the USB flash drive when asked or after the reboot of the controller.

984
Controller Display

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Statuses
The controller status is displayed on the LCD panel.
Use the Menus button to browse through the menus, the OK button to explore the sub-menus, and the
Back button to go back to the previous menu.
The LEDs indicate the statuses of the system interactions with its components.
See Components section for more information.

985
Controller LED color codes

The C-Track
is connected
to the
The C-Track No image
controller, The C-Track The C-Track is is warming detected
the is NOT
synchronizing up to its by the
C-Track calibration connected
with the operating cameras.
date is still to the
controller. temperature Calibration
valid and controller.
range. is too old.
the system
is ready to
be used.

The
controller is
The
NOT The C-Track is
controller is
plugged in plugged in synchronizing
the the with the
Sync - -
computer computer controller
and and/or and the
VXelements
is running. VXelements computer.
is NOT
running.

The blinking
LED
confirms
data
Data transmission - - - -
between the
controller
and the
devices.
The probe
The probe is
is NOT
activated
activated
and
HandyPROBE and/or NOT - - -
associated
associated
with the
with the
controller.
controller.

986
 The scanner
The scanner is NOT
is connected
Scanner connected - - -
to the
controller. to the
controller.

The
accessory is
Accessory connected - - - -
to the
controller.

987
Menus
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the C-Track connected to the controller.

Ready: The C-Track is initialized and ready for measurement.
No C-Track: The C-Track is not detected by the controller.
[X] (Cause): The C-Track is detected, but not yet operational.

l Analysis: The C-Track is analyzing.

l Calib. too old: The calibration is outdated and must be carried out
again.
1 C-TRACK
l Too cold/warm: The C-Track is operating outside the recommended
temperature range.

The controller may become hot by prolonged use

especially in high temperature.

l Unstable temp.: The temperature has changed and must stabilize

before resuming the measurement.

Displays the current frame rate of the C-Track.

l 58.0/58.0/58.0

C-TRACK/FPS l C-Track controller processing rate FPS / C-Track left camera

1.1 (Frame Per
Second) FPS / C-Track right camera FPS.

l It should be near 58 frames per second for the HandyPROBE and 58

frames per second for the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R.

988
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the HandyPROBE connected to the controller.

Probe activated: The HandyPROBE is activated and ready for measurement.
Click probe button: The HandyPROBE is not yet activated and a button on the
2 PROBE probe should be pressed to activate it.

When first activating the HandyPROBE with a new

controller, it must be associated with the controller (see
2.2 Probe/Assoc.).

2.1 PROBE/BATT. Shows the stylus battery level.

Allows manually associating HandyPROBE stylus to the controller.

[OK] to associate: Press the OK button to launch the association process.
2.2 PROBE/ASSOC.
Press probe buttons: Press and hold the 2 outer buttons of the HandyPROBE
to pair the device. When releasing them, a beep will be emitted to confirm the
association has worked.

Allows controller to scan available frequency for stylus communication.

[OK] to analyze: Press the OK button to launch the analysis process.

l Goes to menu 2.4 automatically after analysis is completed.

l The channel with the larger absolute value should be chosen by

default.

Probe/Analyze
2.3 A value of - 78 dB shows less interference than a value of -
Channels
60 dB.

Default channel for HandyPROBE

Default channel Channel range

G3 4 1-12

G4 16 1-16

989
# Menu Contents

Selects a communication channel manually.

PROBE/CHAN
l A probe association is required afterwards.
2.4
NEL

It is always best to use the proposed channel.

Shows the status of the scanner connected to the controller.

Ready: The scanner is connected and ready to use.

3 SCANNER Disconnected: No scanner currently connected.

Scanning: The scan is currently in progress.
Stopping: The scan is currently stopping.

RESET Allows resetting the servers without rebooting the controller.

4
SERVERS
Press the OK button to reset the servers.
5 OPTIONS

#SFW Displays the current VXelements software version installed on the controller. It
5.1
VERSION should match the VXelements version installed on the computer.

Displays the current camera count for devices detected by the controller (sum
of all cameras mounted per device connected).
Device connected to the controller Camera count

C-Track 2
5.2 NB DEVICES
HandyPROBE 0

MetraSCAN 3D 2

MetraSCAN 3D-R 4

MaxSHOT Next 1

5.3 LANGUAGE Changes the controller display language (English or French).

Displays the controller current IP address.

l It is recommended to keep the default settings (200.200.200.2).

5.4 IP ADDRESS
l With a C-Link network, the IP addresses must be changed. For details,
see the C-Link Configuration section.

LCD
5.5 Indicates the contrast of the LCD panel on a scale of 1 to 5.
CONTRAST

990
# Menu Contents
HDW VERSION
5.6 Displays the current hardware version installed on the controller.

991
C-Track Setup and Connection

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up the C-Track

1. Take the tripod out of the case and unfold it.

2. Adjust the feet to the required height.

3. Turn the swivel in the desired direction.

4. Check the locking of the different tightening elements:

l Extensions of each foot.

l Swivel on the tripod.

l Locking screw for moving the swivel.

Tighten locks before each use and check the tightening of the snap-
on coupling bracket to make sure the tripod is stable.

5. Carefully take the sensor out of the case and install it on the tripod.

1. 3 mm Allen key

2. Socket wrench clip

992
 If needed, the C-Track may also be used without the tripod.

Handling rules

Use the tripod or the C-Track/tripod connection area to lift the system.

Avoid lifting the C-Track by holding the main structure.

To connect the C-Track and the controller to the computer

Make sure that the devices are connected before turning ON the controller and
that the controller is turned OFF before disconnecting the devices.

When connecting the cables:

993
 l Make sure the white arrow faces upward.

l Carefully align the pins and holes on the connectors.

1. Connect the power cable to the C-Track.

2. Connect the USB cables to the C-Track. Make sure to plug the USB connector vertically
into the C-Track instead of horizontally.

3. Connect the other end of the USB cables in any of the 4 bottom slots of the controller.

4. Connect the other end of the power cable in the controller.

994
 5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the controller and the computer.

6. Connect the controller power supply in an electrical outlet.

7. Turn the controller ON.

8. Wait for the controller to display READY before proceeding to calibration.

Lift the cable retainers to safely unplug the cables from the C-Track and controller.

To launch the IP configurator

The IP Configurator tool is used to configure network settings allowing communication between the
computer and the controller through an Ethernet protocol.

IP Configurator requires computer administrator rights to be run.

Using the USB to Ethernet adapter

Launch the IP Configurator each time the USB to Ethernet adapter is plugged into a
new USB port.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable into the USB to Ethernet adapter.

2. Insert the USB to Ethernet adapter into the computer USB port.

3. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

l The IP Configurator will browse for the USB to Ethernet adapter provided and automatically
selects the relevant network connection.

l The default IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

4. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings. A message box will
appear, confirming the connection was successful.

995
After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

Using the computer Ethernet port

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer Ethernet port.

2. Launch the IP Configurator:

l From VXelements: Configure | Launch IP Configurator or

l From the Windows Start Menu: Programs | VXelements | IP Configurator.

3. If no adapter is detected, a warning message will appear (this is the normal behavior). Click
Ignore to move to the next step.

In the VXelements - IP Configurator dialog box:

4. Select the proper Ethernet network in the Connection drop-down menu. The default
IP address will appear in the Client IP address field.

5. Click Use selected connection for VXelements to apply the settings.

6. A warning message will appear. Click Yes to move to the next step. A message will appear
confirming the connection was successful.

After a few seconds, the system panel will indicate that the C-Track is connected.

To restore the default network settings

Click Revert to original connection settings.

To manually revert to default Windows settings

In Windows 10 / Windows 11
Go to Microsoft Support for the procedure.

996
C-Track Calibration

General information
While performing a C-Track calibration with the calibration bar, VXelements adjusts many internal C-
Track parameters to optimize its performance.
A thermal and gravity compensation model is used to maintain the system within specifications
according to the C-Track orientation and the temperature changes.
The thermal compensation model is only activated after the warm-up time completion as the C-Track
internal components temperature must be stable.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

Information displayed in the 3D viewer

1. Front view

2. Top view

3. Progress indicator

997
When to perform the calibration
The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

l After the C-Track has been placed back in its case and carried to another location (not
applicable to the CUBE-R).

l After the C-Track has traveled by car or by plane.

l After the system has been shipped to a customer location.

Skipping this step will impair the system performance.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will

998
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Calibration with Quality Control products

Calibration

999
Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

For the Calibrate all workflow, click here.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

1000
3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

The orientation of the C-Track cannot be changed after having started the
calibration process. Otherwise, the tolerance is exceeded and a message appears
asking to reposition the C-Track. It will be impossible to continue the calibration,
the C-Track will need to be placed back to the initial position to complete the
calibration process.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(*.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

1001
 l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy1 is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1002
Calibrate all
The Calibrate all function allows you to calibrate the C-Track and all devices connected to it, one after
the other.

l Only devices connected and ready to be used will be part of the Calibrate all
process.

l The C-Track calibration is strongly recommended. It should be done first and cannot
be skipped if the C-Track is not valid anymore.

l To be detected, the HandyPROBE must be activated prior to starting its calibration

process.

l The HandyPROBE or scanner calibration can be skipped during the process using
the Next or Previous button.

To calibrate all

1. Click .

2. The calibration workflow window will open.

3. Click in the progress bar to calibrate the C-Track first.

4. Calibrate the C-Track.

5. Click for the next step.

6. Click the calibration button displayed in the progress bar to calibrate the next device.

7. Calibrate the device selected.

8. Click for the next step.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for each device displayed in the progress bar.

10. Click Accept.

To Reset the calibration or Suspend the calibration, click the corresponding button.

To reset to the factory settings

It is possible to reset the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1003
 1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

Calibration with R-Series products

Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

1. Integration (VXelements and R-Series I/O Module interfaces)

This mode teaches the C-Track calibration trajectory in the robot teach pendant. The C-Track calibration
teaching process can be done through VXelements software or I/O Module interface.

2. Execution (R-Series I/O Module interface)

This mode executes the calibration program using R- Series I/O Module interface. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant.

1004
 3. Manual (VXelements interface)

This mode manually calibrates the C- Track using VXelements in the same way as in the standard
MetraSCAN 3D handheld applications.

C-Track robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration process of the C-Track in R-Series applications differs from its manual calibration.
It requires to reach 113 calibration bar positions in a smaller volume than that of the manual calibration
and following 3 ordered sub-trajectories:

1. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

2. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis

3. 49 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face up (toward the C-Track’s -Y axis) or down (toward the C-Track’s +Y axis).

1005
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis
The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face left (toward the C-Track’s -X axis) or right (toward the C-Track’s +Z axis).

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

The 45° targets must face the C-Track.

The flat targets:

l Must face down (toward the C-Track +Y axis) for positions below the C-Track baseline Y > 0

l Must face up (toward the C-Track -Y axis) for positions above the C-Track baseline Y < 0

1006
Either configuration can be selected for positions aligned to the C-Track baseline (Y = 0). An angle θ can
be added to the bar orientation given that all targets fit within the approved zone (defined in green).
This will help minimize occlusion of the targets.

To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset)

Three robot calibration trajectory options are available. The trajectories will all be the same but the
distance (Z offset) from the C-Track can be configured. These distances are in relation to the center of
the calibration zone.

l 2600 mm

l 3100 mm

l 3600 mm

1007
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The C-Track calibration bar TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate
system. The center of this coordinate system is a translation of the robot flange coordinate system. It is
located along the bar axis (Z+ orientation), the middle of the QR code define the Z origin and the normal
of the QR code define the -Y.
Define the TCP using the applicable annex of the Calibration certificate. Use the values as is without any
modification.

Autocalibration

l A scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) is required for autocalibration. This file is
available on the Customer Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.
l If you fail to provide the file needed, a message error will be displayed in the
interface (Command Window) or by the third-party software.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process using the relevant program.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

1008
3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process. The ends of the calibration bar need to be positioned onto the yellow
squares. The orientation of the bar also needs to be changed following the visual
indication. A position is validated when the squares at the ends of the calibration bar turn
green. The progress indicator will increase.

The pose is skipped if the bar is not seen within 2 seconds of the C- Track
calibration - Accept action execution. This will trigger a warning message after
the calibration, which must be controlled by an operator.

4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

1009
Manual calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

1010
Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

1011
When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1012
To reset to the factory settings

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

It is possible to restore the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

1013
1014
C-Track System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | Options | C-Track (or click in the system panel).

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated.

To set parameters
C-Track volume
This function allows changing the working volume.

l 16.6 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

1015
Environment compensation
Modes

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT scale bar

For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Volume extension
This function allows configuring a scaling reference bar (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale
bar) with the VE function.
Scaling modes

l None

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT 3D scale bars

It is also possible to add or remove a scale bar.

For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions

Select to allow measurements even if the conditions are not ideal if:

l the operating temperature has not been reached

l the analysis period is not completed

l the temperature varies more than 10°C from the temperature recorded at calibration time.

When selected:

l Enable C-Track functions

l C-Track status bar turns yellow to show this state

l Allows the use of the Static referencing mode

1016
This check box should not be selected unless the consequences it will have on
measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.

1017
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The QR code sticker applied to the middle of the C- Track calibration bar contains all the relevant
information.

l Select the check box to allow the C-Track to detect the code and extract the information
needed (serial number and lengths).

This is a mandatory step in the calibration process. The reading will be impossible if
the QR code sticker is dirty or damaged.

l If the check box is cleared and the Calibration bar drop-down in the system panel does not
display the right serial number, click Add... and browse to choose the right bar's calibration bar
file (*.sbcf). Otherwise, select the *.sbcf manually right after launching the calibration process.

Play sound when volume extension is lost

This option is enabled by default.

The sound of the C-Track volume extension function is activated.

A beep is emitted when the C-Track cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
To disable this function, clear the check box.

Use original calibration data

See To reset to the factory settings.

Calibration expiration (days)

The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated. The default value is 5 days.

1018
C-Track Object Preparation
The adequate target positioning is an element to guarantee accuracy of the measurement.

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

1019
Part setup examples
Small parts

Medium parts

Large parts

1020
Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated. See Tilt Compensation section.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

Volume extension

l Start to acquire data in the middle of the total volume of the part.

l Move to get a good overlapping of the part.

360° measurement
To perform a 360° inspection without a MaxSHOT Next, it is recommended to:

1. Put the targets on the part using enough swivel targets.

2. Move the C-Track.

3. Swivel the targets.

The base of the targets should not move and the targets should
remain in contact with their bases.

1021
4. Detect the targets on the other side of the part.

5. Remove the swivel targets and do not swivel them back.

The rotation axis of these targets is designed in their very middle. Rotating the
targets back and forth could cause unwanted uncertainty.

1022
C-Track Tilt Compensation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This feature compensates for the angles of inclination of the C-Track during measurement.

C-Track rotations
The accuracy of the C-Track takes Pitch and Roll into consideration.

Pitch Roll

Rotation around the X-axis of the C-Track Rotation around the Z-axis of the C-Track

Tilt between -45 degrees and +45 degrees

The tilt compensation is active, as long as the C- Track remains within - 45 to +45 degrees during
measurement.

When exceeding these angles during measurement, the C-Track status switches to
Roll out of range in the system panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be
inaccurate.

1023
Tilt below -45 degrees or above +45 degrees
The C-Track must be calibrated using the needed angle. The tilt compensation will be active if the C-
Track remains within ±2 degrees from the angle used during the calibration process.

When exceeding ±2 degrees, the C-Track status switches to Roll out of range in the system
panel and it turns yellow. The acquisition might be inaccurate.

1024
C-Link Product

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Overview
The C-Link function allows networking up to 4 C-Track sensors to position a HandyPROBE system or to
scan with a compatible scanner. The synchronization is applied to each C-Track controller to allow the
measurement on all sensors simultaneously.
Using the C-Link functionality does not affect the individual performance of each device used in the
network.
The communication between C-Track controllers and the computer is provided by an Ethernet TCP/IP
switch.

1025
System requirements
The C-Link function requires same requirements as VXelements.

C-Link typical workflow

Step Description
Connection
1
l Connect the equipment

Hardware configuration
2
l Configure the IP address of the controllers

Software configuration

l Activate the products through the Product Manager

3
l Enable the C-Link network

l Configure the C-Link network in VXelements

Calibrate

4 l C-Tracks

l Other devices (HandyPROBE Next, MetraSCAN 3D).

Prepare the working environment

5 l Prepare the part

l Put the positioning targets on the part

Acquire data

6 l Acquisition of the positioning model

l Part measurement

1026
C-Link Hardware and Components

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Hardware

C-Link kit components

All components are provided in a carrying case.

1. Ethernet and C-Link cables

l 2 X 10 m Ethernet cables

l 2 X 20 m Ethernet cables

l 3 X 10 m C-Link cables

2. Power supply 5V and power supply adapter kit

1027
3. 5-port 10/100 Ethernet switch

4. Connection diagram

1028
C-Link Connection

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

To connect a C-Track
See C-Track Setup and Connection.
Connection diagram

1. Laptop with
VXelements

2. Ethernet
switch

3. C-Track
controller

4. Ethernet
cable

5. C-Link cable

A. For 3rd C-Track

B. For 4th C-Track

To connect the hardware

Back of the controller 1. Ethernet port

2. Ethernet cable

3. Ethernet switch

4. C-Link In port and external trigger (4 pins

cable)

5. C-Link Out port (six pins cable)

1029
Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

The computer and all the controllers must be connected to the Ethernet switch. The Ethernet cables can
be connected to the Ethernet switch in any port and in any order.

1. Plug an Ethernet cable from the computer into the any available Ethernet switch port.

2. Plug a USB cable form the first C-Track to its controller (primary).

3. Plug an Ethernet cable from the first controller into any available Ethernet switch port.

4. Connect the controller power supply to an electrical source and then to the first controller.

5. Repeat step 2 to 4 for each C-Track of the C-Link network.

6. Link the C-Track primary controller to the first secondary controller by plugging a C-Link
cable from the primary controller C-Link Out port to the first secondary controller C-Link In
port.

7. If required, link the first secondary controller to the second secondary controller by
plugging a C-Link cable from the first secondary controller C-Link Out port to the second
secondary C-Link In port and so on for a third secondary controller.

8. Power ON all the C-Track controllers.

1030
C-Link Calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Handle the scale bar carefully as it is fragile.

l Do not touch reflective targets as the damaged targets are not recognized by the C-
Track.

l During the set-up, make sure that no light or sun is pointing directly at the cameras.

l Make sure everything else is plugged in before starting the controller.

To calibrate a C-Track in the C-Link mode

C- Tracks are calibrated as usual but using the same calibration bar. Files are available online on
Creaform Customer Portal and are provided with the C-Tracks.

1. Choose the calibration bar.

2. Select the check box depending on how many C-Tracks will be calibrated.

3. Set a calibration volume.

4. Calibrate the C-Tracks in order from the primary to the secondaries.

The calibrations are done sequentially. Once the calibration is accepted, the calibration interface will
automatically move on to the next C-Track.

All C-Tracks must have the same model but can be calibrated using different
volumes.

To calibrate the HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The HandyPROBE Next stylus is by default associated to the primary C-Track.

1031
The HandyPROBE and MetraSCAN 3D calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the
C-Link network.
The HandyPROBE must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.
The MetraSCAN 3D and the artifact must remain visible to the C-Track throughout the entire calibration
process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

To calibrate the MetraSCAN 3D-R

The MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration can only be performed on the primary C-Track of the C-Link network.
The user calibration plate must face the C-Track during the entire calibration process.

Do not continuously dazzle a C-Track during calibration.

1032
C-Link Configuration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

l Make sure to leave a 10-cm gap around and on top of the controller to allow for
proper air circulation and heat flow.

l Do not stack the controllers one of top of the other.

To get your C-Link system running

1. Set up each C-Track (do not connect the controller to the computer).

2. Follow the connection diagram.

3. Set the IP address of the computer to 200.200.200.1 using the IP Configurator.

4. Configure the IP address of each controller.

5. Configure in the Product Manager.

6. Enable and configure the C-Link network.

One port should remain available on each controller. Use the provided hub when
needed.

To configure the IP address of the controllers

1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button

4. Next button

5. OK button

6. LEDs statuses

1033
 1. On the first secondary controller, use the Next button (4), select menu 5 (Options) and
press OK button.

2. Use the Next button and select menu 5.4 (IP address) and press OK button.

3. Press Next button until the last digit of the IP address is blinking.

4. Press OK button to change the last digit.

5. Press the Next button once to reach the arrow sign.

6. Press OK button to confirm the IP address.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each secondary controller, making sure that each controller has a
unique IP address.

Recommended configuration
Controller IP address
#1 (primary) 200.200.200.2 (default setting)
#2 200.200.200.3
#3 200.200.200.4
#4 200.200.200.5

Remember those settings. They must match the configuration of VXelements.

Default configuration

l Controller # 1 (primary): 200.200.200.2

l Controller # 2: 200.200.200.3

l Controller # 3: 200.200.200.4

l Controller # 4: 200.200.200.5

To configure the C-Link network in the Product Manager

1034
 1. Open the VXelements Product Manager (Configure | Product manager).

2. Select the active product from the list or add a new one.

l The primary C-Track must be set as Active.

l Other C-Tracks in the network must appear under the Installed list.

l If used, the MetraSCAN 3D and MaxSHOT Next must appear in the Active list.

Only 1 C-Track must be activated as the primary C-Track (we recommend the C-Track associated with
the controller having the IP address 200.200.200.2 for the MetraSCAN 3D and 200.200.200.5 for the
MetraSCAN 3D- R). Other C- Tracks must be included in the Product Manager but should not be
activated.
Other products, like MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R or MaxSHOT Next, must be activated.

To activate and configure the C-Link network in VXelements

To activate the C-Link network

1. Go to Configure | Options | C-Track menu.

2. Select the Use C-Link box in the C-Track dialog box (or click in the system panel).

3. Select the Activate C-Link network check box.

4. Configure the C-Link network.

To configure the C-Link network

1. Enter the serial number of the primary C-Track along with its IP address.

2. Select the Active check box to indicate that the C-Track is to be part of the C-Link network.
To remove a C-Track, right-click the C-Track to delete and select Remove selected C-Track.

3. Specify the C-Track serial number of the secondary C-Track.

4. Click OK.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each secondary C-Track to be added to the C-Link network (if
applicable).

6. Click OK.

1035
 l The primary C- Track should not be changed once a configuration is applied.
Otherwise, you will need to open the Product Manager, delete the previous primary
C-Track and create a new entry adding the configuration and license files.

l The IP address must be consistent.

l When a C-Link network configuration is executed from the VXelements - C-Track

Configuration dialog box (C-Link tab), the information is saved in the primary C-
Track’s configuration file. Activating the same controller as the primary in
subsequent uses of the C- Link functionality will prevent from running the
configuration again.

Once all C-Tracks are configured in the controllers and VXelements, the C-Track status will be displayed.
The primary C-Track status is similar to a standard C-Track; secondary C-Tracks should be Not referenced
until a C-Link Reference model is selected or imported.

1036
C-Link Object Preparation

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The same concept for the C-Track is applied to the C-Link setup.

Part preparation

1. Clean the part.

2. Determine the best parameters to set in relation of the part color.

Positioning targets

1. Use coded, swivel or high reflective targets.

2. Place the positioning targets on the part or around it (above, under, right, left, in front or
behind).

3. Make a suitable target setup to be able to acquire all the targets with the primary C-Track
on a single non-stop 360° acquisition pattern.

Environmental conditions

1. Check that light conditions are appropriate.

2. Make sure the temperature is stable.

1037
For details, see the C-Track section.

1038
C-Link Operating Principles

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

To set up a C-Link Reference model

A C-Link Reference model is created by selecting a positioning model using:

l The MaxSHOT Next

l The primary C-Track to perform a volumetric extension (Auto-detect targets, Manually detect
targets and Detect targets from template)

l The Volume extension (VE) function.

Once the C-Track is part of the reference model, it is automatically detected (green).
Upon creation of a C-Link Reference model, the reference status switches to the dynamic mode, giving
the information of the C-Link Reference model for each C-Track.

Click to select targets for a new C-Link Reference model.

The DEC function is not available with the C-Link functionality.

To set up a Part reference model

The C-Link function requires a C-Link reference model. If the object to scan is not suited to be probed or
scanned as a C-Link reference model, its own Part Reference model should be used.

Click to select targets for a new Part reference model.

Create a Part reference model (optional)

Once the C-Link reference model is created, it is possible to create a Part reference model (optional).

1039
 l Each C-Track will map the new targets against the C-Link reference model.

l It avoids recreating a C-Link reference every time a new part needs to be inspected while using
a fixture.

If so, use the wanted detect targets mode to acquire targets.

Once created, the Part reference model will be displayed separately from others C-Track status. The part
can then move in the C-Link volume as it is no longer attached to the C-Link reference model.

Reference positioning target statuses

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active C-Link reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active Part reference model.

The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.

The target is not seen the by C-Track and is part of the C-Link reference model.

The target is not seen by the C-Track and is part of the Part reference model.

Visibility pane of the system panel

l The number of targets seen in real time by the primary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen in real time by the first secondary C-Track.

l The number of targets seen by each C-Track on the total amount of targets in the reference
model.

To probe in the C-Link mode

With a C-Link network, the HandyPROBE Next stylus can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the HandyPROBE Next stylus. The
stylus status is displayed in the system panel.

1040
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.

1041
To scan in the C-Link mode
With a C-Link network, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R can be seen by multiple C-Tracks.
However, data acquisition is carried out by the C-Track closest to the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN
3D-R.
The scanner status is displayed in the system panel.
The data acquired and the number of targets detected are displayed in the Probe Status window.
The number of targets detected are displayed in the Status window.

Specific C-Track statuses for C-Link network

The data acquisition is carried out by one C-Track at the time.
VXelements automatically selects the appropriate C-Track based on the stylus or scanner position and
orientation in the C-Link network volume.
The Z-Best concept is applied: the closest C-Track, which has the better Z position, is used to track the
activated device. The same concept is also applied to the MetraSCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D-R.
Controller not found
When VXelements cannot find the controller, make sure that its IP address and the computer are
properly configured.
A controller reboot might be required after an IP change. Otherwise, look at the Ethernet connections
and make sure the switch and controller are powered on.
Not referenced
This status shows up when there is no C-Link Reference model or if the C-Track does not see enough
targets and does not recognize the current C-Link Reference model.
Not synchronized
The controllers need a few minutes to synchronize themselves.
If the status remains, check the USB cable connections and the hub connections between the controllers.
It can also appear as a transition state when cameras are connected or disconnected during the
controller boots (not recommended).

Troubleshooting tips can be useful. To display them, click the C-Track status bar,
then the Troubleshooting tips pane in the VXelements dialog box.

1042
R-Series Autocalibration Kit
The R-Series Autocalibration Kit allows the complete and automatic calibration of the C-Track. It enables
automated steps, requiring no human involvement. This limits accuracy drift over time and ensures
continuous operation (24/7).

Components

1. Tool changer

2. Calibration bar holder

3. Tool rack

4. Proximity sensors

5. Calibration bar

6. Pneumatic valve

1043
 7. Control box

Tool changer
This industrial pneumatic device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the
robot.

Components

1. Tool plate

2. Master plate

Tool plate

1044
 The half of the tool changer on which the calibration bar holder and the C-Track calibration bar are
mounted.
Master plate

The half of the tool changer that is mounted on a robot.

The master plate:

l Contains the locking mechanism;

l Is equipped with pass through air ports to supply air to the end of arm tooling.

Master plate adapter

The master plate adapter is the link between the master plate and the robot scanner bracket.

Example of a master plate adapter mounted on a linear scanner bracket1

1A 0-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

1045
 Example of a master plate adapter mounted on an angular scanner bracket1

Calibration bar holder

The calibration bar holder is the link between the Tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar.

1A 90-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

1046
 The robot should be programmed to minimize misalignment/hard contact during
tool changer coupling and uncoupling on the tool rack.

Tool rack
The tool rack is a fixture that holds the C-Track calibration bar when not in use. It contains proximity
sensors.
For a MetraSCAN 3D-R custom integration, the tool rack can be designed by the integrator.

Proximity sensors
The proximity sensors detect the presence of an object and convert this information into an electrical
signal:

l Allow the user to get lock and unlock state (2 master plate proximity sensors).

l Detect if the calibration bar is in or out of the tool rack (tool rack proximity sensor).

1047
 1. Proximity sensors

The 2 proximity sensors have a LED that will turn on when the calibration bar is detected.

Master plate proximity sensor (lock downside and unlock upside)

Pneumatic valve
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar) (0.41–0.69 MPa).

l Filter minimum: 40 microns.

l Flow maximum: Negligible

Color Use

1 Brown +24V

1048
 3 Blue GND
4 Black Signal

The valve is a 2-position, spring-return, 5-way pneumatic valve.

When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is OFF, the valve is in state 12, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 2,
the tool changer is LOCKED.
When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is ON, the valve is in state 14, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 4,
the tool changer is UNLOCKED.

Internal Logic
Here is an equivalent ladder representation of the internal logic used for the output to the pneumatic
valve.

To switch output PL04 to ON, the tool must be in rack and the unlock signal from robot controller
should be ON.

Control box
The control box is used for the protection and safety of equipment only. It allows preventing unlock
command to release the C-Track calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.
Two major types of interlocks exist:

l Failure interlocks: Continuously active and normally used to initiate equipment shutdowns
and

1049
l Permissive interlocks: Evaluate conditions to allow the starting or the continuation of
actions.

1050
Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is pneumatically driven to couple and uncouple the tool on the tool
changer. The tool changer uses air ports to provide lock and unlock pressure to the locking mechanism.

Safe, reliable operation of the tool changer is dependent on a continuous supply of

compressed air at a pressure of 60 to 100 psi. It is the customer's responsibility to
halt the robot motion if the air supply pressure drops below 60 psi. (This
information is taken from an external source: http://www.ati-ia.com/index.aspx).

For proper tool pick-up, it is recommended to keep a minimum distance (1.5 mm) between the master
plate and the tool plate faces.
For proper tool drop-off, it is recommended to keep a minimum distance (1.5 mm) between the tool
plate and the tool rack proximity sensor.
1 ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC-5 through QC-27, Document #9610-20-
2254-09, 36.
C-Track calibration process

Coupling sequence
The coupling procedure should be following the tool changer manufacturer recommendation.

The locking mechanism must be in the unlock position when attempting to couple
the tool changer. Failure to adhere to this condition may result in damage to the
unit and/or the robot. (See the ATI manual for the QC-11 tool changer:
http://www.ati-ia.com/index.aspx).

X and Y Cocking Offset Twisting Offset

Z Offset
Offset (degrees) (degrees)21
<1.5mm ± 1 mm ±1.1° ±2°

12 Warning, illustration, and table: ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC- 5
through QC-27, Document #9610-20-2254-09, 36.

1051
To pick up the C-Track calibration bar

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

2. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

3. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

4. Move master plate (which contains the locking mechanism) above the tool rack.

5. Align master plate and tool plate for coupling.

6. Insert the master plate slowly into the tool plate.

7. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to lock state.

8. Check locked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

9. Move robot tool changer up by 25 mm.

10. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

11. Move robot away from tool rack.

Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

Uncoupling sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

1052
 2. Move robot tool changer above the tool rack.

3. Align tool plate with tool rack for uncoupling.

4. Move slowly the tool plate on the tool rack.

5. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

6. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

7. Move master plate up by 25 mm.

8. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

9. Move robot away from tool rack.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

1053
R-Series Industrial Computer

This standalone rackmount computer (provided without a screen and keyboard) comes with
VXelements. It allows the user to store inspection session information.

The Industrial Computer can also run the R-Series I/O Module interface, but this
software has to be purchased separately.

Technical specifications

Components Type
Processor Intel® Core™ i7 6700 Processor 3.4 GHz
Operating System Windows 10 64 bit
Graphics Card NVIDIA® Quadro P1000
Memory 64 GB
Hard Drive 1 TB SSD

USB 3.0
Connecting ports
3X Gigabit Ethernet ports
Display Output 4x DisplayPort (mDP 1.4)

This computer is supplied by Creaform, who guarantees its compatibility with our products. All questions
and specification validation requests must be sent to Customer Support. No certification or compatibility
guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers than Creaform.

Software

All software maintenance for the Industrial Computer is performed by Creaform through an annual R-
Series Customer plan.

1054
R-Series I/O Module Hardware
This section is about the R-Series I/O Module Hardware components and the way they interact.

Components
Dimensions
Design and layout
To connect the I/O Module Hardware

Components

I/O Module Hardware package

The robot integration package consists of a software interface and an R-Series I/O Module Hardware
(physical box) allowing communications between VXelements software and the robot controller.
Included with the I/O Module Hardware package:

l Digital I/O Module (16 inputs / 16 outputs)

l NPN / PNP logic conversion

l 120-240 V power cord

l Ethernet port

l Industrial-grade patch cable (Harting Han® Industrial Connector)

1055
Closer look at the I/O Module Hardware

1. I/O Module Hardware

2. Power supply

3. Circuit breaker

4. Electrical terminal and fuses

1056
 5. Relays

6. Ethernet switch

View from under the I/O Module Hardware

1. I/O Module Hardware connector

2. Power supply

3. Ethernet cable

Dimensions

1057
1058
Design and layout

1059
To connect the I/O Module Hardware

Electrical Interface
Connector Interface

The I/O Module Hardware has 3 external connections identified by plates on the enclosure.

Connector
I/O Module Hardware
P4
connector
PSU01 Power supply
ETH01 Ethernet

1060
Input Rating

The I/O Module Hardware is powered by an external source.

Characteristic Value
Rated voltage 100-240VC
Frequency 50-60HZ
Maximum current draw < 1.50A

Output Rating

Characteristic Value
Rated voltage 24V
Output protected to 2A
Maximum current
total
Polarity NPN/PNP

Electrical pinout
This section displays the cable pinout related of the I/O patch cable. Is is terminated with a Harting
Han® Industrial Connector on the I/O Module Hardware side (R-Series IO Box in the following table)
and labeled loose wires on the customer side. A copy of the Electrical Schematics is available in a
pocket inside the enclosure.

1061
Input/Output Polarity Selection
The inputs and outputs offer 2 choices of connection, PNP or NPN.

Input connection

Connect jumper as shown in the picture to set Input in PNP or NPN mode.

1062
Output connection

Connect jumper as shown in the picture to set Output in PNP or NPN mode.

1063
Robot Programming

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

All the examples provided apply to a FANUC robot.

It is essential to program the robot adequately to ensure proper communication between the robot and
R-SeriesI/O Module.

Robot action/event sub-program

1. Send the Action value needed from the robot program by activating a byte on the robot
output 0 to 7 on port 0 (R-Series I/O Module input).

2. Wait for an Event completion value confirmation. It will be returned to robot via the digital
input (R-Series I/O Module output).

l We recommend using a sub-program for action / event IO command. The sub-

programs can be called from the main scanning program.

l Action and event are configured to work on R-Series I/O Module port 0.

l *If using pulse output, use a pulse of 1 sec.

Make sure the I/O group used for programming matches the I/O group configured
for the actions in the robot controller.

Robot session setting sub-program

1. Send the Session Setting configuration value needed from the robot program by activating
a byte on the robot output 0 to 7 on port 1 (R-Series I/O Module input).

1064
 2. Wait for a command completion value confirmation. It will be returned to robot via the
digital input (R-Series I/O Module output).

l We recommend using a sub-program for session settings IO command. The sub

programs can be called from the main scanning program.

l Session settings are configured to work on I/O Module port 1.

l *If using pulse output, use a pulse of 1 sec.

Make sure that the I/O group used for programming matches the one configured
for the session settings in the robot controller.

Typical robot program

1. Move robot to home position.

2. Set all robot configuration such as tool frame (TCP), robot frame, registries, etc.

3. Call Start Scan with laser OFF.

4. Move robot to first position.

5. Activate Laser.

6. Move robot along scanning trajectory.

7. Deactivate Laser.

8. Move robot to subsequent position.

9. Repeat until the scan is finished.

10. Call Stop Scan.

11. Move robot to home position.

Handshake
To ensure proper communication between the robot and R-Series I/O Module, we highly recommend
using a security handshake structure.

1065
CUBE-R Solution

Safety procedures
CUBE-R product family
Software

1066
Safety Procedures

DANGER: Do not stand on the positioner or on the robot. Use of the positioner
enables a 360-degree rotation of the part, giving rise to potential collision and
injury risks.

Maintenance

WARNING: Do not control the door with the main remote control while being
alone in the CUBE-R. Someone always has to remain outside the CUBE-R in case of
a power failure.

Only one person can enter the cell at a time because there is only one enabling device available.
See the Operating Principles, Operator Liability and Lockout Procedure sections.
For details on the software safety options available, see FANUC website
(https://www.fanuc.eu/uk/en/robots/accessories/safety).

1067
Operating Principles
l CUBE-R work cell

l CUBE-R rolling door and front control panel

l CUBE-R light curtain

l Safety laser scanners (floor sensors)

CUBE-R work cell

For operation safety, the CUBE-R is anchored on the concrete floor.
The CUBE-R will only start when:

l there is no fault signaled by the entrance:

l the rolling door is completely closed

l the light curtain is not obstructed

l there is nothing in the working environment

CUBE-R rolling door and front control panel

Safety message written on the rolling door:
SWITCH OFF the main power supply before opening the control box1 or before doing
any maintenance or repairs on this door. Activation of this door which performing such
activities could result in serious or fatal injury. Never put your hands near the top roll
of this door unless the power is shut off.

1Safety interlocks that serve the protection and safety of equipment. The control box allows preventing the unlock command to release the C-Track
calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.

1068
Front control panel

The front control panel on the right-hand side of the CUBE-R includes 5 buttons, 2 of which are
related to the robot controller:

1. Red button: Emergency stop for the CUBE-R cell;

2. Up button: Performs actions on the door and the robot;

3. Down button: Performs actions on the door and the robot;

4. Green button: Deported start button from the robot controller;

5. Blue button: Deported reset button from the robot controller.

The rolling door installed on the CUBE-R is controlled by 3 buttons:

l Emergency stop

l Up arrow

l Down arrow

The emergency stop (red) button performs the following actions on the door and robot:

1069
 l Stops the door when the door is in movement;

l Stops the other buttons from performing an action on the door;

l Opens the door automatically when the robot is in movement;

l Applies the robot brakes when it is in motion;

l Prevents the other buttons from performing an action on the door and robot.

The up arrow button performs the following actions on the door and robot:

l Pressing the button once while the robot is in motion will stop the robot but will not open the
door;

l Pressing the button a second time once the robot is stopped will open the door if the
emergency stop button is not activated.

The down arrow button performs the following actions on the door:

l Pressing the down button once will close the door if the door is open and the emergency
button is not activated.

The door installed on the CUBE-R is linked to safety measures. Some safety measures are
included with the door and are installed on or around the door. Refer to the ASSA ABLOY
documentation for more information. The other safety measures are active when the door is
opened or closed.

When the door is opened, it is not possible to start the robot in automatic
mode.

When the door is opened, and the floor sensors are activated because
someone or something is inside, it is not possible to close the door.

The door comes with a control system. Refer to the ASSA ABLOY documentation for more
information on the door control system and the safety features included with the door.
Door power supply

The standard power supply for the door is 480V. The power supply for this door does not
require a transformer with 480V.

1070
CUBE-R light curtain
Front control panel

The front control panel on the right-hand side of the CUBE-R features 4 active buttons, 3 of
which are related to the robot controller.

1. Red button: Emergency stop for the CUBE-R cell;

2. Black button: Deported pause button from the robot controller;

3. Green button: Deported start button from the robot controller;

4. Blue button: Deported reset button from the robot controller.

The light curtain installed on the CUBE-R is linked to safety mechanisms: when the light curtain
is obstructed, it is not possible to start the robot in autocalibration.

Safety features

Laser scanners (floor sensors)

The CUBE-R has 2 SE2L Series safety laser scanners used to detect specific zones. When an
object or a person breaks the laser plane emitted by the floor sensors, safety mechanisms are
activated.

1071
 l If the robot is in movement, the change to the off state of the sensor will stop the robot.

l If the robot is not in movement, the change to the off state of the sensor will prevent the door
from closing and the robot from being started in automatic mode.

l When a person or object is inside the cell, detected by the floor sensors, the speed override of
the robot is limited to 50% of the maximum speed. This situation is common when the robot
controller is in manual mode and a person is required to enter the cell for robot programming.
When the person steps outside of the cell and is no longer detected by the sensors, the
jogging speed is no longer limited.

l In manual mode, it is only possible to execute a robot program at 50% override.

l In manual mode, the angular speed of the positioner is limited to 10 deg./sec. max.

l In automatic mode, the angular speed of the positioner is 80 deg./sec. max.

The safety laser scanners are configured for the CUBE-R environment. For safety,
the protection zone should not be modified.

Reset pictogram
For CUBE-R installations not equipped with floor sensors a fault reset must be performed after the
operator validates the cell is free of obstacles. A pictogram located on the CUBE-R control panel shows
the steps to be followed by the operator to reset the fault.

1. The operator must visually inspect the working environment of the robot to ensure
proper operating conditions. The working environment of the robot must be free of
users, objects, or any other obstacles in the cell.

1072
2. If the working environment of the robot is free of any obstacles, the operator can press
the RESET button on the front control panel.

1073
Operator Liability
Creaform provides a safe product which was the subject of a risk assessment.
Specific physical mechanisms and software configurations have been put in place in this regard.
It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that there is nobody and no debris inside the CUBE-R
before turning on the cell.
The CUBE-R is supplied once its operation mode has been tested and assessed as safe.
Any modifications brought to the product sold and installed by Creaform may result in security risks. In
that case, Creaform shall not be held liable.

1074
CUBE-R Lockout/Tagout Procedure

To interacted with the CUBE-R hardware (repairs, maintenance, manual adjustments, etc.), it is the responsibility of
the operator to respect the Lockout safety and security standards, laws, policies and/or regulations in effect in their
legal jurisdictions and/or at the organization at which the CUBE-R is installed. The following procedure is for a
standard CUBE-R installation. Consult your organization's own lockout/tagout guidelines or procedures before
proceeding.

Lockout procedure for CUBE-R

1. Press the E-Stop button the robot controller while the robot is in a controlled stopped
state.

2. Turn the robot controller switch counter-clockwise to the off position and push the metal
tab in to reveal the lockout/tagout slot on the switch. A lock can now be install the lock on
the robot controller.

1075
3. The white junction box can facilitate more lockout points. After the robot is placed in an
controlled E-Stop state and the robot controller is switched off, turn the knob on the
junction box to OFF and pull the red tab outward to reveal the lockout/tagout slot on the
knob. A lock can now be installed on the junction box.

4. Reverse this procedure to reactivate the system after completing the inaction with the
CUBE-R hardware.

1076
CUBE-R Product Family
Overview
The CUBE-R is a complete turnkey 3D scanning coordinate measuring machine (CMM) developed by
Creaform for an efficient quality control in the production and manufacturing process. This measuring
room allows the off-line inspection of parts ranging up to 3 m (10 ft).
Whereas mechanical measuring machines capture data in a point-based or linear manner, 3D scanning
CMMs provide full-field deviations of the 3D actual coordinates and the CAD data.

CUBE-R portfolio

1077
Previous generation

1078
CUBE-R Portfolio
Technical specifications
Asset protection
Hardware and components
Using the CUBE-R

The CUBE-R portfolio includes 16 different configurations, which depend on the solution purchased.
They vary according to their enclosure and their entrance types, the kind of tool changer used, if the
Asset protection option is selected, etc.

CUBE-R with walls and rolling door

Front view with Asset protection option Top view with Asset protection option

1079
CUBE-R with walls and light curtain

Front view with Asset protection option Top view with Asset protection option

CUBE-R with wire mesh and light curtain

Front view with Asset protection option Top view with Asset protection option

CUBE-R module (no walls or curtains)

1080
 Front view with Asset protection option Top view with Asset protection option

Technical specifications
CUBE-R with CUBE-R with wire CUBE-R module (no
CUBE-R with walls
Feature walls and rolling mesh and light
and light curtain walls or curtains)
door curtain
4.1 m x 4.1 m x 3.1
Dimensions 4.9 m x 4.1 m x 3.1 m 5.5 m x 4.4 m x 3.1 m Custom
m
Max. part
Up to 3 m Up to 3 m Up to 3 m Up to 3 m
size
Max.
500 kg or 1500 kg 500 kg or 1500 kg 500 kg or 1500 kg 500 kg or 1500 kg
payload
Automated
7 7 7 7
axes
Rolling door with
Entry Light curtain Light curtain Custom
safety
Opening
3.1 m 3.1 m 3.1 m Custom
width
Floor
mounting or
fixing
required
Manual, pallet Manual, pallet truck, Manual, pallet truck,
Loading
truck, forklift forklift truck, bridge forklift truck, bridge Custom
concept
truck crane crane

Asset protection

1081
The Asset protection option comes with additional hardware for fully automated pneumatic calibration of
the system and physical and software (in VXscan-R) enhanced safety.

1082
Hardware and Components
The core of the CUBE-R 3D scanning coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a MetraSCAN-R
BLACK scanner.
The complete solution can use [%=Modules.VXscan-R%] and I/O Module software from Creaform,
PolyWorks, and TP language from FANUC.
Before being executed, all robot programs should be tested according to the robot manufacturer
recommendations for robot programming. See FANUC robot manual for more information. After
acquiring the data, scanning results are represented using free-form, unstructured three-dimensional
data, in the form of a triangle mesh. The actual data is compared with the nominal data and displayed in
a report.

Available configurations

l Only 4 of the 16 configurations offered are shown below. Contact Creaform for
details on the other configurations available.

l The numbers in the images refer to items indicated in the CUBE-R components
section.

Walls with rolling door

1083
Walls with light curtain

Wire mesh with light curtain

1084
CUBE-R module

CUBE-R components
The CUBE-R can be divided into 7 main sections:

1. Entrance

2. Enclosure (including front control panel and safety laser scanners)

3. Robot assembly

4. C-Track

5. MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanner

6. R-Series Autocalibration Kit

7. HP Z6 Industrial Computer

1085
Entrance
The CUBE-R offers 2 entrance options:
Rolling door
Light curtain

Rolling door
The rolling door used with the CUBE-R is from ASSA ABLOY. Its curtain contains 3 transparent PVC
panels, making it possible to see the process inside the cell. The motor which is mounted on the right-
hand side when facing the CUBE-R, is installed with its casing facing downwards. The door is controlled
by a panel located to the right. On this panel, it is possible to open and close the door as well as start
and stop the robot. The door also has a control system supplied by the manufacturer. It can be used as a
secondary control device and is used to modify the door settings if required. To open and close the door
manually, a handle supplied by ASSA ABLOY is available.

The door is installed with the correct settings already configured and they should
not be changed.

The door also has safety features that stop both the door and the robot when necessary. These features
are described in the Operating principles section of this document. See the door documentation for
the maximum opening and closing speeds and times.

1086
 1. Transparent PVC panels x 3

2. Drive unit and casing

3. Front control panel

A. Pre-running photocell
B. Stationary photocell

A. Pre-running photocell

1087
B. Stationary photocell

There are 2 photocells installed inside the door rails. They are used to check that the rolling door path is
clear and that the door can be closed in a safe way.
The pre-running cell is installed just below the door base and will follow the door in the way down. If the
beam is interrupted while the door is closing, the movement of the door will immediately stop, reverse
the movement and finally stop in the open configuration.
The stationary photocell is located approximately at an height of 300 mm from the ground, if it detects
an obstacle, the door will not close.

See the ASSA ABLOY manual for the door operation.

1088
Light curtain
The light curtain is an optical safety system that ensures nothing or no one enters the CUBE-R while the
robot is moving. If anything interferes with the light curtain, the robot will automatically stop.
A presence is detected by the light being emitted on one side of the curtain, but not reaching the
photosensors on the other side.
This type of entrance also features an emergency stop button.

1089
Enclosure

CUBE-R configurations featuring enclosures come with safety laser scanners.

The CUBE-R offers 2 enclosure options:

Walls
The 3 remaining sides of the CUBE-R are walls. The walls are installed to prevent entry in the robot work
environment. Each side wall consists of 4 individual panels, for a total of 12 panels, which are assembled.
A total of 4 panels are transparent PVC windows, which can be positioned as desired around the CUBE-R
during installation. The CUBE-R can be set up anywhere on the shop floor, the position of its window will
allow to make the scanning process visible.

Wire mesh
This fully see- through protective enclosure features a light curtain that prevents entry (object or
person) in the robot work environment. The CUBE-R can be set up anywhere on the shop floor.

1090
Safety laser scanners

Floor sensors can detect small objects that are at least 50 mm.

1091
Safety laser scanner 1 is installed at the bottom of the right wall or wire mesh when facing the CUBE-R
(just after entering the work cell). Safety laser scanner 2 is fixed on the bottom of the left side wall or
wire mesh near the entrance.

The C-Track is elevated (top of the left wall when facing the CUBE-R).

1092
Robot Assembly
The robot assembly includes the items related to the robot in the CUBE- R. The robot and support
structure is the structure onto which the robot and positioner are installed. The Mounting Plate is used
to place the part in the CUBE-R and the system calibration assembly is the location of the required items
for the C- Track and the MetraSCAN- R BLACK automatic calibration. For details, see the R- Series
Autocalibration Kit section.

1. FANUC positioner and cover

2. Mounting plate

3. MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration kit

4. R-Series Autocalibration Kit

5. MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanner

6. FANUC robot

7. Robot support structure and cover

1093
FANUC positioner and cover

The positioner is the robotic axis that allows the rotary table to be controlled and turned by the robot
controller. This in turn allows the positioning of the part in relation with the robot. It is covered for
protection, safety and aesthetics.

Mounting plate

The mounting plate is the platform that holds the fixture and the part on the rotary table. Its threaded
holes allows the installation of part fixtures, loaded by different methods, depending on your CUBE-R
configuration.

Rotary table specifications

Item Specification

1500 kg payload 1-axis servo

Model
positioner (Compact type)

Table length 1597 mm

Table width 797 mm
Distance between
100 mm
holes (length)
Distance between
100 mm
holes (height)
740° (-370° - +370°) 12.9 rad (-6.45
Motion range
rad - +6.45 rad)
Maximum operation
90°/sec 1.57 rad/sec
speed
Max. load capacity 1500 kg
Allowable load
200 kgf•m 1960 N•m
moment
Allowable bending
720 kgf•m 7056 N•m
moment
Allowable load
7 000 kgf•cm2•s 686 kg•m2
inertia

1094
 For full technical specifications, refer to the official document available upon
request.

Robot

The robot assembly contains a FANUC robot (M-20iD/25) and a FANUC single axis compact positioner
with a payload of 500 or 1500 kg.

Robot controller

The robot controller (R30-iB Plus) is located inside the structure. It is accessible by a panel on the left
side. The CUBE-R control box is also located in that area.

Teach pendant
The teach pendant is connected to the controller and the cable is routed inside the panels of the CUBE-R
on the right side (when facing the CUBE-R). All the FANUC programs required for the use of the CUBE-R
are programmed and launched by the teach pendant, except when used with VXscan-R.

1095
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration kit
The MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration kit comes in 2 types:

Pneumatic calibration kit

The pneumatic calibration kit is part of the Asset Protection option, and allows the robot to
automatically position the calibration plate by using the scanner bracket and a pin on the swing arm. It
can go through the scanner calibration process without any human interaction. To do so, a control box
with proximity sensors enable the management of the position of the swing arm.

Manual calibration kit

The manual option is a simpler solution that requires an operator to pick the calibration plate from its
storing location, and place it on the mounting plate, before starting the calibration.
Built- in robot programs on the robot controller will manage the position of the swing arm, or the
position of the rotary axis, when a calibration is requested.

1096
MetraSCAN 3D-R Product Family

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The MetraSCAN 3D- R robot- mounted optical CMM 3D scanners are designed for 3D automated
inspections of parts on production lines and shop floors. These automated inspection solutions work
with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Tracks to benefit from the C-
Link functionality (not available with the CUBE-R solution).

MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite

MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD

MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

1097
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of or

damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

l MetraSCAN 3D pairs with a C-Track and the generation of C-Track and MetraSCAN
3D must match.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD are a robot-mounted optical CMM 3D scanners designed for 3D
automated inspections of small parts on production lines and shop floors.These automated inspection
solutions work with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Track systems
to benefit from C-Link functionality.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

1098
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Laser
Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014

Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 121.8 mW / < 4.02 mJ

8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.25

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

1099
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Hardware
and Components
Hardware

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD scanner and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective
case equipped with a custom foam insert.

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

1. USB 3.0 power cables, and a Calibration certificate

o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade USB 3.0 cable - 1 unit
o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade power and sync cable - 1 unit
o
Calibration certificate - 1 unit

2. MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD scanner - 1 unit

3. USB key (license and calibration files) - 1 unit

4. User calibration plate - 1 unit

1100
 5. Miscellaneous

o
External power supply - 1 unit
o
Power cable for external power supply - 1 unit
o
Antistatic cleaning cloth - 1 unit
o
Removable bottom handle - 1 unit
o
USB 3.0 & power cables for the user calibration plate - 1 unit each

Mounting material

Mounting adapter - 1 unit1

Used to mechanically interface the scanner with the robot flange. The bolt pattern of the mounting
adapter is the same as on the flange of the robot.

1Most of the robots require a mounting adapter. If the robot information is

provided during the order process, Creaform will provide the mounting adapter.
The mounting adapter can be purchased later if needed.

User calibration plate

The artifact provided is a tool used to calibrate the scanner. It has passive targets that must be seen by
the C-Track and active targets that are seen by the scanner cameras. The scanner lasers are also used
during the calibration process.
USB key

1101
The USB key provided with the system contains hardware and software files as well as the MetraSCAN
3D-R or CUBE-R user manual.

Components

The MetraSCAN- R BLACK|Elite HD device includes a laser projector, 2 cameras and glass- protected
retroreflective targets meant to reference the scanner position in 3D space when being tracked by the C-
Track. It is robot-mounted and has no physical trigger, but rather a software trigger.

Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Glass-protected retroreflective targets

4. Tool changer

5. Bracket

Side view

Do not touch the scanner targets. Do not manipulate the scanner using tubular
structure: always use the bracket and the removable bottom handle.

1102
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the same patterns of retroreflective targets.
Through triangulation, the software determines the scanner position in space.
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN- R BLACK
scanners, although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is done by observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As the laser sweep
over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

1103
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The scanner must be installed on the robot prior to being connected. Then, the Tool Center
Point (TCP), the tool payload, the tool center of gravity and the tool inertia at center of gravity
must be defined. For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup
section.

The information shown is very limited. For a more comprehensive installation

guide, contact Customer Support.

To install the scanner (mounting and connection)

1. If required, install the interface plate on the robot flange.

2. Route the scanner cables on the robot and through the scanner using the integrated
cable management system.

1104
3. If applicable, place pneumatic tool changer cable on MetraSCAN 3D-R.

a. Route air tubes along bracket.

b. Plug in air pipes (2x; See red circle in image.)

c. Plug in sensor cable. (See red rectangle in image.)

d. Screw cable router onto bracket. (See blue rectangle in image.)

4. Plug cables into MetraSCAN 3D-R.

1105
5. Connect the other end of the cables to the C-Track controller.

Make sure you have enough length in robot joints to prevent any damage to the
cables. Tie the cables to avoid any flick.

Instructions are for hollow-wrist robots. For external cable routing, please consult
robot manufacture's documentation and support.

1106
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Environment
When to perform the calibration
Calibration setup
Expected results
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

Environment
Changes in the environment may affect scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or temperature
variations, thus modifying the mechanical configuration. Temperature variations should not exceed ±2
degrees Celsius during calibration.
Scanner calibration must be optimized for the most accurate results. The calibration process includes a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to multiple locations to
measure the target positions on the reference.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

1107
When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Calibration setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration setup is an analysis aiming to identify the most adequate positions and orientations
relative to the user calibration plate in the robot cell environment. Make sure that:

l There are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l The user calibration plate must not be parallel to the C-Track cameras to prevent ghost target
detection in VXelements 3D viewer. A slight tilt forward will ensure the user calibration plate
orientation is correct.

l The positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an The
optimization failed message.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

A successful calibration will satisfy:

1. At least 1 target on all target sites of the scanner must be seen by the C-Track. There are
11 target sites in total.

2. 75 % of all the targets on the scanner must be seen during calibration.

MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

1108
The CUBE-R has preprogrammed calibration trajectories that only require to be executed. For details,
see the System calibration with I/O Module section.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Two robot calibration trajectories are available for the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
All calibration trajectories follow the same principles as the manual calibration process:

l The scanner tool center point is coincident with the user calibration plate center.

l The distance between the scanner and the plate center point is constant.

l Every pose is a rotation in tool frame (around TCP) along 1 axis from the previous pose.

All trajectory names are retrieved from the VXelements plug-in window and match what is
available in the R-Series I/O Module interface.
Default90Degrees: This original calibration trajectory for the 90-degree mounting option can be used
only when the user calibration plate normal and robot World Z-axis (Up) are aligned.
Default0Degrees: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
Default90DegreesV2: This enhanced calibration trajectory of 55 poses is the most flexible for the 90-
degree mounting option as it has been optimized to allow calibration with different user calibration
plate orientations with respect to the robot.
Default0DegreesV2: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The V2 version of the calibration trajectories should take precedence over the
original ones, which are provided for legacy purposes.

Manual: This calibration trajectory cannot be automated. It requires human intervention.

Calibration modes

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The scanner calibration teaching process can be done through VXelements interface or I/O
Module interface.

1109
In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

1110
Integration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows teaching the scanner calibration trajectory with the robot teach pendant. It
uses VXelements or R-Series I/O Module.

1111
To calibrate using VXelements (typical workflow)

1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select the Calibration trajectory.

4. Click Laser to start the laser projection.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Click Accept to take on the position. Once done, jog the robot to the next position.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the calibration is finished.

If the position cannot be reached, click Skip. Then, a Skipped, Occluded or Plate not
seen by scanner status will be recorded to the Trajectory status panel.

1. Jogging recommendations

Jogging frame: Select the suggested tool frame to jog the robot efficiently (on the teach pendant).
Jogging orientation: Apply a rotation around the specified axis, moving the robot according to the
provided information.

1112
Calibration pose status color

Color Description
Good
Bad, but better than skipping the pose
Unacceptable

2. Action buttons

Button Action
Accept Accept the position when the position is reached.
Skip Skip the position when the position cannot be reached or if there is occultation.
Previous Go back (to the previous position).
Reset Reset all positions. Using this function, the calibration process has to be restarted.
Cancel Exit the process.

3. Trajectory status panel

This panel displays the pose status in ascending order.

Status Description
Accepted Position accepted: The scanner is well positioned and the measurement is good.
Skipped Position has been skipped.
The position of the scanner is occluded: The C- Track does not detect the user
Occluded
calibration plate or the scanner.
The scanner is not well positioned (bad orientation and/or bad standoff distance):

Bad position l The measurement cannot be done properly.

l The position will not be used for the calibration calculation.

Plate not seen

The scanner does not detect the user calibration plate.
by scanner

4. Progress indicator

A progress indicator displays the completion percentage for each position.

1113
 5. Distance meter

A distance meter displays the distance between the scanner and the part.

Red/Yellow LEDs: The scanner is too close to the object: Move backward.
Green LED: The scanner is at the correct distance.
Dark blue/Light blue LEDs: The scanner is too far from the object: Move forward.
Gray LED: The scanner is not acquiring any data.

l The scanner is not tracked by the C-Track. Make sure that nothing prevents the scanner from
being seen by the C-Track.

l No surface within the scanner acquisition volume. Make sure to aim the scanner towards a
surface.

To calibrate using R-Series I/O Module (robot as leader)

This robot sub-program must be created prior to starting the calibration process:

l Start calibration

l Accept

l Skip

The sub-program should be created following the handshake concept.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Integration in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

1114
 4. Launch the scanner calibration process by sending the 3D scanner calibration - Start
action.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Send the 3D scanner calibration - Accept position or 3D scanner calibration - Skip

position action and wait for the according event. Once done, jog the robot to the next
position.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the calibration is finished.

9. Once available, use the Scanner calibration result action to get the calibration result.

Execution

The Integration mode must be performed prior to the Execution mode (except for
the CUBE-R solution, where programs are previously created and only need to be
executed).

This mode allows executing the calibration program using R-Series I/O Module. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant. Refer to the Installation
manual provided with R-Series I/O Module on purchase.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Execution in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

4. Execute the robot calibration program previously created during the Integration mode.

Manual

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows manually calibrating the scanner using VXelements. In fact, this is the regular
MetraSCAN 3D calibration process. Standard MetraSCAN 3D calibration trajectory will be used.

1115
1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select Manual as calibration mode.

4. Place the user calibration plate in the displayed volume.

5. Position the plate onto the red squares.

6. Change the orientation of the user calibration plate as per the visual indication. The red
squares turn to green when the plate is properly detected.

1116
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and activate the
laser.

l A distance meter (1) on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel so the laser
grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

Distance meter (1) colors

Color Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern (2) colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

1117
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

These functions are also available through the plug-in window.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

1118
For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

1119
Configuration preset
It is recommended to use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To save a configuration template:

l Right-click the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default values of the laser power are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface.
A flat black surface would require a shutter speed of a higher value.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when quickly moving the scanner.

Since it is possible to change the scanner configuration during the scan, many strategies can be adopted
for scanning multi-shaded parts:

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode. This is possible during
scanning.

1120
To export a session parameter file (.csp)

Session parameters cannot be loaded during the scanning process.

Session parameters can be exported as a CSP file through VXelements (File | Export | Scan template).

Functionalities contained in the CSP file

Scanner parameters

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value with its activation and deactivation state

l Laser mode

l Scanning area

l High resolution multiplier

Scan parameters

l Resolution

l Smart resolution

l Remove isolated patches (threshold)

Finalize scan parameters

l Optimize surface mode

l Fill positioning targets

l Optimize accuracy of boundaries

l Smooth boundaries

l Reduce noise

l Sharpen edges

l Auto. decimate

l Auto. fill holes

1121
Clipping objects

l C-Track referencing mode

l Target count

For quality control applications, the Auto. fill holes parameter should be set to 0.

For details on the functionalities, see the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters sections (if
the scanner is used with the CUBE-R solution) or the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters
sections (if the scanner is used with the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution).

To create a scanner configuration file (.csc)

In VXelements:

l Right-click the Configuration preset box in the Scanner configuration window, or

l Click the Save preset link under the Configuration preset box in the Scanner parameters pane of
the connected device tab (system panel).

The CSC file can be retrieved in the VXelements Configuration folder (default installation directory:
C:\ProgramFiles\Creaform\VXelements\Configuration\MetraScanRBlackElite).

Functionalities contained in the CSC file

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value

l Laser mode

The scanner configuration data can be loaded at any time, even when scanning.

1122
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load
Setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To define prior to programming the robot sequence

The scanner TCP, tool payload, tool center of gravity (CoG) and tool inertia at center of gravity
(Inertia @ CoG) are in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table. They must be defined before
programming the robot sequence.

Scanner TCP
The scanner TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate system. It is a
virtual coordinate system that locates the center of the field of view of the scanner.
To easily create the robot trajectory, set the TCP in the robot controller. The TCP can be expressed using
several conventions: the values displayed in the table are in FANUC's preferred method.

Scanner offset table

Tx (mm) Ty (mm) Tz (mm) W (deg) P (deg) R (deg)

R-Series scanners 363.6 0 306 90 0 90
HandySCAN 3D with gripper -306 0.2 68.5 -90 0 90
MetraSCAN 3D with gripper -363.6 0 305.8 90 0 -90

Tx, Ty, Tz: Position of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system.
W, P, R: Orientation of the tool coordinate system, expressed in the robot flange coordinate system as
Euler (Tait- Bryan) angles with extrinsic rotations (elemental rotations about the axes of the fixed
coordinate system).

l W: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system X axis.

l P: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Y axis (after having applied W).

1123
l R: Rotation around the robot flange coordinate system Z axis (after having applied P).

1124
Tool payload
Tool payload is the weight of the components mounted to the robot flange.
It must be defined by adding the weight of each component stacked from the robot flange, which are
found in the TCP, payload and inertia definitions table.

Tool center of gravity

The tool center of gravity is a point where the distribution of mass is balanced around this point. It can
be determined by executing specific robot function (see the robot user manual).

The tool center of gravity is not mandatory but it may avoid some robot error code.
However, it is required for CoBOT (collaborative robot).

Tool inertia at center of gravity

The tool inertia at center of gravity is a physical tool's resistance to any change in its state of motion.

TCP, payload and inertia definitions

Values defined apply to all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK - No
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
Tool Changer
0.014 0.031 0.031 0.013
2.614 1.13 -0.02 20.83
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.143 0.316 0.316 0.133

1125
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
- Pneumatic TC
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Pneumatic TC
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
(X= 370 mm, Y= -50 mm,
0.158 0.145 0.235 0.107
Z= 50 mm)

4.259 10.91 -0.93 17.39

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.611 1.479 2.396 1.091

MetraSCAN-R BLACK only

- Manual TC Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.015 0.032 0.034 0.015
2.907 1.75 0.00 20.29
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.153 0.326 0.347 0.153

MetraSCAN-R BLACK +
Scale bar - Manual TC (X=
370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.154 0.145 0.234 0.106
50 mm)

4.052 10.85 -0.99 17.50

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.570 1.479 2.386 1.081

1126
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

Scale bar + Clamp (X=

370 mm, Y= -50 mm, Z= Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm) 0.124 0.103 0.102 0.001

0.883 37.10 -4.46 8.94

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
1.264 1.050 1.040 0.007

Clamp (X= 370 mm, Y= -

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
50 mm, Z= 50 mm)
0.032 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.234 36.81 -2.78 19.80
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.326 0.004 0.002 0.003

Scale bar (X= 370 mm, Y=

-50 mm, Z= 50 mm) Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.092 0.098 0.098 0.000
0.649 37.21 -5.06 5.02

Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.938 0.999 0.999 0.004

HandySCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.390 0.012 0.010 0.002 0.010
3.070 1.412 6.366
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.122 0.102 0.020 0.102

1127
 Inertia @
Robot CoG position (cm) Inertia @ CoG
Payloa
Item
d (kg) Face Plate X axis Y axis Z axis
X Y Z
Z axis

HandySCAN 3D

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
0.996 0.010 0.008 0.001 0.009
2.994 1.888 6.861
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.102 0.082 0.010 0.092

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper
Kg-m2 Kg-m2
2.471 0.016 0.029 0.031 0.016
.470 0.130 21.980
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.163 0.296 0.316 0.163

MetraSCAN 3D with
gripper

Kg-m2 Kg-m2
1.583 0.011 0.014 0.012 0.011
-1.850 0.04 2.607
Kgf-cm-s2 Kgf-cm-s2
0.112 0.143 0.122 0.112

1128
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or glass, the
object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Positioning target distribution

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

1129
1130
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite HD Acquisition
Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. This feature can be deactivated in the Display
panel under General display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the screen.

Laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

1131
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can be
activated to alert the user when tracking is lost.

Scanner visibility
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the scanner, although full
detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the scanner is
displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane and must remain as close to
100% as possible.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanning technique
To have to most accurate results, it is necessary to scan at the right speed and to acquire data at
different orientations of the scanner. For details, refer to the MetraSCAN 3D-R training script.
The best possible scan result requires that the surface is scanned with the detection of the scanner as
close as possible to 100%.
Also, it is important to follow the relationship between the scan speed and the resolution. The lower the
resolution value is (in mm), the slower the scan speed has to be in order to get an optimal scan surface.

1132
Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

Teach mode
Available in VXscan, this mode allows checking different acquisition parameters without starting the
scan process, saving raw data, nor using computer power.
The distance meter and scanner visibility tools are available in the Teach mode.

1133
Positioning Targets and Reflectors
Several accessories are available, some are optional, others mandatory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.

Positioning targets
Size Description

3 mm black contour

6 mm black contour

8 mm black contour

10 mm black contour

12 mm black contour (the only target type applicable to the

R-Series product line)

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

1134
 Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Light adhesive targets are recommended for parts that should not be damaged since they do not leave
glue on the surface.

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

l High reflectivity targets are meant to reflect light-emitting diodes (LED) on a longer distance
and are mostly used in photogrammetry.

Coded targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using the module. In
photogrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

1135
 Size Description

6 mm reflector

8 mm reflector

10 mm reflector

12 mm reflector

Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Magnetic

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

1136
Magnetic glass protected targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces.

Size Description

12 mm diameter

Type

Magnetic

Reflectivity

High reflective

Optical reflectors
Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces. They allow a
360° rotation when their reflector shaft is fixed on a magnetic support (0°, 45° and 90° shafts are
available).

1137
Reflector type Description

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 20 mm - Ø 10 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

1138
 Reflector type Description

l 90° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

Magnetic base for swivel optical reflectors, available for Ø 6 mm,

Ø 0.25 in. or Ø 10 mm pins

Recommended for R-Series products.

l Octagonal glass-protected target accessory kit

designed for automated photogrammetry and manual
C-Track movement around the part. Designed to be
mounted on fixtures.

l 12 mm, glass protected, 360° magnetic targets are

reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy
attachment to ferromagnetic surfaces.

360° magnetic targets

These dodecahedron target bases are reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy attachment to
ferromagnetic surfaces.

1139
Type Description

6 mm

12 mm, glass protected

1140
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of or

damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

l MetraSCAN 3D pairs with a C-Track and the generation of C-Track and MetraSCAN
3D must match.
Example: If trying to use a G3 scanner with a G4 controller, a message will appear on
the controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

l For details, see Compatibility chart section.

The MetraSCAN- R BLACK|Elite are robot- mounted optical CMM 3D scanners designed for 3D
automated inspections of parts on production lines and shop floors.These automated inspection
solutions work with the C-Track dual-camera sensor and can be networked with 2 to 4 C-Tracksystems
to benefit from the C-Link functionality.

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

1141
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Laser
Information
Laser warning

CAUTION: Class 2M laser product. Safe to use without personal protective

equipment and not harmful for short exposure time.

l Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; prolonged staring into the
beam (direct or reflected) can damage the retina.

l Electrostatic discharges could disconnect the device.

l The use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Read this entire User Manual before using your Creaform technology.
Disregarding any of the rules and care recommendations mentioned in this guide could void the
warranty.

Laser labels

MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite, MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite

The laser label reads:

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT / IEC 60825-1:2014
Laser 1&2&3: 450nm / avg. < 123mW / < 4.06 mJ
8.5 ms / 30.3 Hz max / C6: 3.8
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for conformance with IEC 60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019

1142
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Hardware and
Components
Hardware

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite scanner and all necessary hardware fit into 1 ergonomic protective case
equipped with a custom foam insert.

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

1. USB 3.0 and power cables, and a Calibration certificate

o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade USB 3.0 cable - 1 unit
o
16-meter-long high flex robotic grade power and sync cable - 1 unit
o
Calibration certificate - 1 unit

2. MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite scanner - 1 unit

3. USB key (license and calibration files) - 1 unit

4. User calibration plate - 1 unit

1143
 5. Miscellaneous

o
External power supply - 1 unit
o
Power cable for external power supply - 1 unit
o
Antistatic cleaning cloth - 1 unit
o
Removable bottom handle - 1 unit
o
USB 3.0 & power cables for the user calibration plate - 1 unit each

Mounting material
Mounting adapter - 1 unit1

Used to mechanically interface the scanner with the robot flange. The bolt pattern of the mounting
adapter is the same as on the flange of the robot.

1Most of the robots require a mounting adapter. If the robot information is

provided during the order process, Creaform will provide the mounting adapter.
The mounting adapter can be purchased later if needed.

User calibration plate

The artifact provided is a tool used to calibrate the scanner. It has passive targets that must be seen by
the C-Track and active targets that are seen by the scanner cameras. The scanner lasers are also used
during the calibration process.
USB key

1144
The USB key provided with the system contains hardware and software files as well as the MetraSCAN
3D-R or CUBE-R User Manual.

1145
Components

The MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite device includes a laser projector, 2 cameras and glass-protected
retroreflective targets meant to reference the scanner position in 3D space when being tracked by the C-
Track. It is robot-mounted and has no physical trigger, but rather a software trigger.

Front view

1. Laser projector

2. Cameras

3. Glass-protected retroreflective targets

4. Tool changer

5. Bracket

1146
Side view

Do not touch the scanner targets. Do not manipulate the scanner using tubular
structure: always use the bracket and the removable bottom handle.

1147
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Operating Principles

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Triangulation
The C-Track cameras see the same patterns of retroreflective targets.
Through triangulation, the software determines the scanner position in space.
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the MetraSCAN- R BLACK
scanners, although full detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected.

Surface acquisition
The surface acquisition is done by observing the laser lines projected on the surface. As the laser sweep
over the surface, data is recorded depending on the triangulated position.

1148
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Connection

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The scanner must be installed on the robot prior to being connected. Then, the Tool Center
Point (TCP), the tool payload, the tool center of gravity and the tool inertia at center of gravity
must be defined. For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Robot Tool and Load Setup
section.

The information shown is very limited. For a more comprehensive installation

guide, contact Customer Support.

To install the scanner (mounting and connection)

1. If required, install the interface plate on the robot flange.

2. Route the scanner cables on the robot and through the scanner using the integrated
cable management system.

1149
3. If applicable, place pneumatic tool changer cable on MetraSCAN 3D-R.

a. Route air tubes along bracket.

b. Plug in air pipes (2x; See red circle in image.)

c. Plug in sensor cable. (See red rectangle in image.)

d. Screw cable router onto bracket. (See blue rectangle in image.)

4. Plug cables into MetraSCAN 3D-R.

1150
5. Connect the other end of the cables to the C-Track controller.

Make sure you have enough length in robot joints to prevent any damage to the
cables. Tie the cables to avoid any flick.

Instructions are for hollow-wrist robots. For external cable routing, please consult
robot manufacture's documentation and support.

1151
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Environment
When to perform the calibration
Calibration setup
Expected results
MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

Environment
Changes in the environment may affect scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or temperature
variations, thus modifying the mechanical configuration. Temperature variations should not exceed ±2
degrees Celsius during calibration.
Scanner calibration must be optimized for the most accurate results. The calibration process includes a
known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists of bringing the scanner to multiple locations to
measure the target positions on the reference.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

1152
When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Calibration setup

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration setup is an analysis aiming to identify the most adequate positions and orientations
relative to the user calibration plate in the robot cell environment. Make sure that:

l There are no reflective objects near the user calibration plate.

l The user calibration plate must not be parallel to the C-Track cameras to prevent ghost target
detection in VXelements 3D viewer. A slight tilt forward will ensure the user calibration plate
orientation is correct.

l The positioning targets are in good condition; a damaged target will produce an The
optimization failed message.

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

A successful calibration will satisfy:

1. At least 1 target on all target sites of the scanner must be seen by the C-Track. There are
11 target sites in total.

2. 75 % of all the targets on the scanner must be seen during calibration.

MetraSCAN-R BLACK robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

1153
The CUBE-R has preprogrammed calibration trajectories that only require to be executed. For details,
see the System calibration with I/O Module section.

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Two robot calibration trajectories are available for the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
All calibration trajectories follow the same principles as the manual calibration process:

l The scanner tool center point is coincident with the user calibration plate center.

l The distance between the scanner and the plate center point is constant.

l Every pose is a rotation in tool frame (around TCP) along 1 axis from the previous pose.

All trajectory names are retrieved from the VXelements plug-in window and match what is
available in the R-Series I/O Module interface.
Default90Degrees: This original calibration trajectory for the 90-degree mounting option can be used
only when the user calibration plate normal and robot World Z-axis (Up) are aligned.
Default0Degrees: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.
Default90DegreesV2: This enhanced calibration trajectory of 55 poses is the most flexible for the 90-
degree mounting option as it has been optimized to allow calibration with different user calibration
plate orientations with respect to the robot.
Default0DegreesV2: This original calibration trajectory is intended to be used with the MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite, not with the MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

The V2 version of the calibration trajectories should take precedence over the
original ones, which are provided for legacy purposes.

Manual: This calibration trajectory cannot be automated. It requires human intervention.

Calibration modes

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

The scanner calibration teaching process can be done through VXelements interface or I/O
Module interface.

1154
In a C-Link setup, ensure the user calibration plate is placed in front of the
primary C-Track before starting the calibration process. A warning message
will pop up as a reminder.

1155
Integration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows teaching the scanner calibration trajectory with the robot teach pendant. It
uses VXelements or R-Series I/O Module.

1156
To calibrate using VXelements (typical workflow)

1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select the Calibration trajectory.

4. Click Laser to start the laser projection.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Click Accept to take on the position. Once done, jog the robot to the next position.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the calibration is finished.

If the position cannot be reached, click Skip. Then, a Skipped, Occluded or Plate not
seen by scanner status will be recorded to the Trajectory status panel.

1. Jogging recommendations

Jogging frame: Select the suggested tool frame to jog the robot efficiently (on the teach pendant).
Jogging orientation: Apply a rotation around the specified axis, moving the robot according to the
provided information.

1157
Calibration pose status color

Color Description
Good
Bad, but better than skipping the pose
Unacceptable

2. Action buttons

Button Action
Accept Accept the position when the position is reached.
Skip Skip the position when the position cannot be reached or if there is occultation.
Previous Go back (to the previous position).
Reset Reset all positions. Using this function, the calibration process has to be restarted.
Cancel Exit the process.

3. Trajectory status panel

This panel displays the pose status in ascending order.

Status Description
Accepted Position accepted: The scanner is well positioned and the measurement is good.
Skipped Position has been skipped.
The position of the scanner is occluded: The C- Track does not detect the user
Occluded
calibration plate or the scanner.
The scanner is not well positioned (bad orientation and/or bad standoff distance):

Bad position l The measurement cannot be done properly.

l The position will not be used for the calibration calculation.

Plate not seen

The scanner does not detect the user calibration plate.
by scanner

4. Progress indicator

A progress indicator displays the completion percentage for each position.

1158
 5. Distance meter

A distance meter displays the distance between the scanner and the part.

Red/Yellow LEDs: The scanner is too close to the object: Move backward.
Green LED: The scanner is at the correct distance.
Dark blue/Light blue LEDs: The scanner is too far from the object: Move forward.
Gray LED: The scanner is not acquiring any data.

l The scanner is not tracked by the C-Track. Make sure that nothing prevents the scanner from
being seen by the C-Track.

l No surface within the scanner acquisition volume. Make sure to aim the scanner towards a
surface.

To calibrate using R-Series I/O Module (robot as leader)

This robot sub-program must be created prior to starting the calibration process:

l Start calibration

l Accept

l Skip

The sub-program should be created following the handshake concept.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Integration in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

1159
 4. Launch the scanner calibration process by sending the 3D scanner calibration - Start
action.

5. Locate the user calibration plate within the recommended zone.

6. Move robot to the first required calibration position.

7. Send the 3D scanner calibration - Accept position or 3D scanner calibration - Skip

position action and wait for the according event. Once done, jog the robot to the next
position.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the calibration is finished.

9. Once available, use the Scanner calibration result action to get the calibration result.

Execution

The Integration mode must be performed prior to the Execution mode (except for
the CUBE-R solution, where programs are previously created and only need to be
executed).

This mode allows executing the calibration program using R-Series I/O Module. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant. Refer to the Installation
manual provided with R-Series I/O Module on purchase.

1. Open R-Series I/O Module.

2. Select a trajectory in the Scanner calibration trajectory drop-down menu (Tools | Options).

3. Select Execution in the Scanner / C-Track calibration mode drop-down menu.

4. Execute the robot calibration program previously created during the Integration mode.

Manual

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

This mode allows manually calibrating the scanner using VXelements. In fact, this is the regular
MetraSCAN 3D calibration process. Standard MetraSCAN 3D calibration trajectory will be used.

1160
1. Open VXelements.

2. Click to launch the calibration.

3. Select Manual as calibration mode.

4. Place the user calibration plate in the displayed volume.

5. Position the plate onto the red squares.

6. Change the orientation of the user calibration plate as per the visual indication. The red
squares turn to green when the plate is properly detected.

1161
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

To configure the scanner

1. Click in the system panel or access the configuration dialog box through Configure |
Scanner | Configuration.

2. Position the scanner at the nominal distance from the object (~30 cm) and activate the
laser.

l A distance meter (1) on the left side of the screen indicates the distance between
the scanner and the object.

3. Adjust the shutter slider value under Scanner parameters in the system panel so the laser
grid pattern (2) is as yellow as possible.

Distance meter (1) colors

Color Scanner position Action

Too close Move backward
Correct -
Too far Move forward

Laser grid pattern (2) colors

Color Status Description

The cameras are not or are only weakly perceiving the reflection
Underexposed of the lasers. The software is not gathering enough information
to calculate and build a mesh.

The lasers are seen as clean and defined lines. Surface

Optimal
calculation is done in ideal circumstances.

The reflection of the lasers is so intense that the cameras are

dazzled. Laser lines are not clearly defined and may lead to an
Saturated
improper surface reconstruction or an unusual amount of noise
in the data.

1162
Purpose of configuration
Since each surface has different reflection properties, it is important to adjust the parameters for optimal
detection of the laser lines.
It is important to configure the laser power and cameras' shutter speed based on the type of surface to
be scanned. This is controlled through a single parameter available in the Scanner Configuration dialog
box.
Parameters should be configured before scanning. They can always be accessed, even without stopping
the acquisition process.

These functions are also available through the plug-in window.

HDR mode
In this mode, the scanner alternates between 2 shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts:

l Primary shutter: for darker surfaces.

l Second shutter: for pale or white surface finishes.

High contrast mode uses predefined shutter values.

1163
For fine tuning, use Custom mode. When activated, a secondary shutter slider appears. Its value is
lower than the value of the primary shutter.

This mode can impact the frame rate, but it allows scanning in a single step.

1164
Configuration preset
It is recommended to use a configuration template when scanning similar objects.

l To save a configuration template:

l Right-click the gray window under Configuration preset and click Save preset, or

l Click the Save preset link.

l To delete or rename a preset: Right-click the preset and click Delete or Rename.

l To save a preset as default: Right-click the preset and Set as default.

l To reset the default configuration: Click (Factory defaults).

Default configuration
The default values of the laser power are usually appropriate for pale, non-reflective surface.
A flat black surface would require a shutter speed of a higher value.

Try to keep the shutter value near its default value, as higher values affect the
acquisition speed, especially when quickly moving the scanner.

Since it is possible to change the scanner configuration during the scan, many strategies can be adopted
for scanning multi-shaded parts:

l If the contrast is low, a compromise can be reached between the different colors and still get a
good result on the laser lines detection.

l If the contrast is high, it is recommended to use the HDR mode. This is possible during
scanning.

1165
To export a session parameter file (.csp)

Session parameters cannot be loaded during the scanning process.

Session parameters can be exported as a CSP file through VXelements (File | Export | Scan template).

Functionalities contained in the CSP file

Scanner parameters

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value with its activation and deactivation state

l Laser mode

l Scanning area

l High resolution multiplier

Scan parameters

l Resolution

l Smart resolution

l Remove isolated patches (threshold)

Finalize scan parameters

l Optimize surface mode

l Fill positioning targets

l Optimize accuracy of boundaries

l Smooth boundaries

l Reduce noise

l Sharpen edges

l Auto. decimate

l Auto. fill holes

1166
Clipping objects

l C-Track referencing mode

l Target count

For quality control applications, the Auto. fill holes parameter should be set to 0.

For details on the functionalities, see the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters sections (if
the scanner is used with the CUBE-R solution) or the Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters
sections (if the scanner is used with the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution).

To create a scanner configuration file (.csc)

In VXelements:

l Right-click the Configuration preset box in the Scanner configuration window, or

l Click the Save preset link under the Configuration preset box in the Scanner parameters pane of
the connected device tab (system panel).

The CSC file can be retrieved in the VXelements Configuration folder (default installation directory:
C:\ProgramFiles\Creaform\VXelements\Configuration\MetraScanRBlackElite).

Functionalities contained in the CSC file

l Global shutter

l HDR secondary shutter value

l Laser mode

The scanner configuration data can be loaded at any time, even when scanning.

1167
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Object Preparation

The process is the same for all MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners.

Transparent objects

In the rare cases where the data acquisition is not optimal, such as with transparent objects or glass, the
object can be covered with white powder to obtain a matte finish.

Positioning target distribution

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

1168
1169
MetraSCAN-R BLACK|Elite Acquisition
Rules

Scanning distance
For better scan accuracy, follow this scanner stand-off distance:

Distance meter
While scanning, the laser lines projected on the object are displayed in different colors to indicate the
distance between the scanner and the object's surface. This feature can be deactivated in the Display
panel under General display. Distance will then be indicated by a meter on the left side of the screen.

Laser line colors

Color Scanner position Action
too close move backward
correct -
too far move forward

1170
The scanner loses tracking when too close or too far from the object. An audible warning option can be
activated to alert the user when tracking is lost.

Scanner visibility
The C- Track must see a minimum of 9 retroreflective targets to position the scanner, although full
detection and accuracy are achieved when at least 15 targets are detected. The visibility of the scanner is
displayed as a percentage in the system panel under the visibility pane and must remain as close to
100% as possible.

Field of view
The Field of view is the image scope the scanner can acquire during the scanning process. Any data out
of the scanner's field of view will not be acquired.
For better surface results and to ensure optimal field of view, a certain stand-off distance must be
respected (~30 cm).

Scanning technique
To have to most accurate results, it is necessary to scan at the right speed and to acquire data at
different orientations of the scanner. For details, refer to the MetraSCAN 3D-R training script.
The best possible scan result requires that the surface is scanned with the detection of the scanner as
close as possible to 100%.
Also, it is important to follow the relationship between the scan speed and the resolution. The lower the
resolution value is (in mm), the slower the scan speed has to be in order to get an optimal scan surface.

1171
Scanner orientation
While scanning, the scanner must be as perpendicular as possible to the surface.
It is possible to scan at an angle.
The scanner should be positioned with respect to the part so that both cameras detect the same
portions of the laser grid pattern. Thus, scanning from a corner of a part with each camera pointing to a
different side of the part is not recommended.

Clipping objects
Clipping objects can be created prior to scan to prevent unwanted data acquisition:

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

Teach mode
Available in VXscan, this mode allows checking different acquisition parameters without starting the
scan process, saving raw data, nor using computer power.
The distance meter and scanner visibility tools are available in the Teach mode.

1172
Positioning Targets and Reflectors
Several accessories are available, some are optional, others mandatory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.

Positioning targets
Size Description

3 mm black contour

6 mm black contour

8 mm black contour

10 mm black contour

12 mm black contour (the only target type applicable to the

R-Series product line)

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

1173
 Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Light adhesive targets are recommended for parts that should not be damaged since they do not leave
glue on the surface.

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

l High reflectivity targets are meant to reflect light-emitting diodes (LED) on a longer distance
and are mostly used in photogrammetry.

Coded targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using the module. In
photogrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

1174
 Size Description

6 mm reflector

8 mm reflector

10 mm reflector

12 mm reflector

Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Magnetic

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

1175
Magnetic glass protected targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces.

Size Description

12 mm diameter

Type

Magnetic

Reflectivity

High reflective

Optical reflectors
Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces. They allow a
360° rotation when their reflector shaft is fixed on a magnetic support (0°, 45° and 90° shafts are
available).

1176
Reflector type Description

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 20 mm - Ø 10 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

1177
 Reflector type Description

l 90° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

Magnetic base for swivel optical reflectors, available for Ø 6 mm,

Ø 0.25 in. or Ø 10 mm pins

Recommended for R-Series products.

l Octagonal glass-protected target accessory kit

designed for automated photogrammetry and manual
C-Track movement around the part. Designed to be
mounted on fixtures.

l 12 mm, glass protected, 360° magnetic targets are

reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy
attachment to ferromagnetic surfaces.

360° magnetic targets

These dodecahedron target bases are reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy attachment to
ferromagnetic surfaces.

1178
Type Description

6 mm

12 mm, glass protected

1179
C-Track

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The C-Track is a dual-camera optical sensor providing high-accuracy measurements. This device is used
with the HandyPROBE, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R for production line purposes, such as
in the automotive, aerospace and manufacturing industries.
C-Track+ C-Track C-Track Third generation (G3)

1180
Compatibility chart

HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE Next
Next+
G4 G3 G4

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN MetraSCAN MetraSCAN-R
MetraSCAN 3D
3D+ 3D-R BLACK+|Elite
MetraSCAN- MetraSCAN-R
BLACK 357 BLACK+
R BLACK BLACK+|Elite

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

1181
C-Track Hardware and Components

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

Hardware and components

The C-Track includes 2 digital cameras surrounded by a set of LEDs. Lighting sensors enable measuring
reflectors in a specific volume of use (9.1 m3 or 16.6 m3 for C-Track and C-Track|Elite).

1. Tripod - 1 unit

2. Cables:

l USB 3.0 power cable - 1 unit

l Ethernet cable - 1 unit

3. Calibration bar - 1 unit

1182
 4. Power supply and power cable - 1 unit each

5. Controller - 1 unit

6. C-Track - 1 unit

7. Dynamic referencing accessory kit - 1 unit

8. USB 3.0 to Ethernet adapter - 1 unit

9. Software installer USB key - 1 unit

10. Calibration certificate (under the case foam insert) - 1 unit

C-Track tripod

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The tripod adjusts the C-Track to multiple heights and angles.

To set up the C-Track on the tripod, see the Setup section.

1183
Other components

1. Dynamic referencing accessory kit

2. Calibration bar

3. Dynamic referencing kit

4. Controller

5. USB to Ethernet adapter

6. Ethernet cable

7. Power supply

8. USB power cable

1184
Visibility LED color codes

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Blue Red Yellow White

LED Off Green Yellow Red
(blink) (blink) (blink) (blink)

1 No power Power on - - - - - -

No power or
Stylus not
21 VXelements is Stylus seen - - - - -
seen
not started

Scanner
No power or
Scanner detection Scanner not
31 VXelements is - - - -
seen not at seen
not started
100%

C-Track ready Waiting

Not
4 (stable - - - Warming Blooming for QR
operating
temperature) code

Few targets Referential

Referential
5 No referential2 seen (not below - - - -
seen
optimal) 4 targets

1 If there is no stylus or scanner activated, LED #2 will mimic LED #3 behavior and

vice versa.
2 The minimum threshold 4 targets.

The target threshold (T) for LED #5 to be green is set according to this formula:

1185
The absolute maximum is set to 8.

Examples

l If there are 4 targets in the reference, the LED turns green when 4 targets
are seen. It turns red otherwise.

l If there are 8 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 5 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 targets are seen and red otherwise.

l If there are 12 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 6 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 or 5 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

l If there are 40 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 8 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 to 7 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

1186
C-Track Operating Principles
The C- Track cameras acquire the positioning targets simultaneously, which enables the software to
determine the reference targets position as well as its environment through triangulation.

Measurement volume

Flexibility volume: 16.6 m3

Accuracy volume: 9.1 m3

1187
Positioning model
To reference the C-Track in space and to obtain accurate measurements, it is necessary to create a
positioning model with targets. The positioning model should cover the volume of the part to be
scanned or probed as much as possible.
To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).

Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel. The C-Track will
show the target count after the target acquisition process.

The last action performed sets the default action.

1188
 Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

Swivel targets cannot be rotated when using this

Auto-detect targets method.

All previously acquired targets will be

discarded.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
Rectangle
Manually detect targets
l
Free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to import a positioning target model. The

dynamic referential is automatically activated.
Import C-Track
positioning targets 2. Select an existing positioning target model file
(.txt).

3. Click Open.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1189
Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

1190
Reference positioning target statuses
The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

Referencing modes

The part can only be moved if the targets are placed on it.

Dynamic mode
Take measurements while moving the C-Track.

l A minimum of 4 visible targets is required (at least 8 are recommended). Set minimum value in
Configuration Options.

l Useful in a work environment exposed to vibrations.

l Eliminates potential handling errors.

l Makes it possible to move the C-Track and part quickly.

Hybrid mode
Allows the C-Track to continue taking accurate measurements when less than 4 targets are seen in the
reference model. At least one target must always be visible.

Static mode

Only available if the Allow measurements outside recommended conditions check

box is selected.

Allows moving the C-Track between measurements without having to continuously see the targets.

1191
l Retrieve the C-Track position after moving to update the actual position.

l Make sure that enough targets belonging to the reference are visible when retrieving.

1192
Detection statuses
The C-Track is connected and ready to be used.

The C-Track is not connected or not ready to be used. For details,

refer to the Troubleshooting section.

The C-Track is dazzled or too many targets are seen.

Positioning model is referenced. At least 4 targets must be seen.

Not referenced. Less than 4 targets seen. No target is detected.

1193
C-Track Controller

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The controller provides information about all systems connected to it:

l C-Track

l HandyPROBE stylus

l MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

l MaxSHOT 3D

It enables to:

l Associate the stylus

l Set language and contrast

l Reinitialize the controller

l Track the status of all systems through the LEDs, etc.

The controller uses an Ethernet protocol to communicate with the computer that can be set up through
the IP Configurator tool.

Components
Connection

1194
Display
Recovery procedure

1195
Controller Components

Components
G4, G4+ controller

Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button: To go back to the

main menu.

4. Next button: To browse through

the menus.

5. OK button: To explore the sub-

menus.

6. LED statuses

Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT 3D)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Power supply

9. Device USB ports and cable

retainers

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

1196
G3 controller (the front features the same characteristics as the G4, G4+)
Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT Next)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Main power supply

9. Hardware USB ports

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

To connect the controller

See C-Track Setup and Connection.

1197
Controller Display

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Statuses
The controller status is displayed on the LCD panel.
Use the Menus button to browse through the menus, the OK button to explore the sub-menus, and the
Back button to go back to the previous menu.
The LEDs indicate the statuses of the system interactions with its components.
See Components section for more information.

1198
Controller LED color codes

The C-Track
is connected
to the
The C-Track No image
controller, The C-Track The C-Track is is warming detected
the is NOT
synchronizing up to its by the
C-Track calibration connected
with the operating cameras.
date is still to the
controller. temperature Calibration
valid and controller.
range. is too old.
the system
is ready to
be used.

The
controller is
The
NOT The C-Track is
controller is
plugged in plugged in synchronizing
the the with the
Sync - -
computer computer controller
and and/or and the
VXelements
is running. VXelements computer.
is NOT
running.

The blinking
LED
confirms
data
Data transmission - - - -
between the
controller
and the
devices.
The probe
The probe is
is NOT
activated
activated
and
HandyPROBE and/or NOT - - -
associated
associated
with the
with the
controller.
controller.

1199
 The scanner
The scanner is NOT
is connected
Scanner connected - - -
to the
controller. to the
controller.

The
accessory is
Accessory connected - - - -
to the
controller.

1200
Menus
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the C-Track connected to the controller.

Ready: The C-Track is initialized and ready for measurement.
No C-Track: The C-Track is not detected by the controller.
[X] (Cause): The C-Track is detected, but not yet operational.

l Analysis: The C-Track is analyzing.

l Calib. too old: The calibration is outdated and must be carried out
again.
1 C-TRACK
l Too cold/warm: The C-Track is operating outside the recommended
temperature range.

The controller may become hot by prolonged use

especially in high temperature.

l Unstable temp.: The temperature has changed and must stabilize

before resuming the measurement.

Displays the current frame rate of the C-Track.

l 58.0/58.0/58.0

C-TRACK/FPS l C-Track controller processing rate FPS / C-Track left camera

1.1 (Frame Per
Second) FPS / C-Track right camera FPS.

l It should be near 58 frames per second for the HandyPROBE and 58

frames per second for the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R.

1201
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the HandyPROBE connected to the controller.

Probe activated: The HandyPROBE is activated and ready for measurement.
Click probe button: The HandyPROBE is not yet activated and a button on the
2 PROBE probe should be pressed to activate it.

When first activating the HandyPROBE with a new

controller, it must be associated with the controller (see
2.2 Probe/Assoc.).

2.1 PROBE/BATT. Shows the stylus battery level.

Allows manually associating HandyPROBE stylus to the controller.

[OK] to associate: Press the OK button to launch the association process.
2.2 PROBE/ASSOC.
Press probe buttons: Press and hold the 2 outer buttons of the HandyPROBE
to pair the device. When releasing them, a beep will be emitted to confirm the
association has worked.

Allows controller to scan available frequency for stylus communication.

[OK] to analyze: Press the OK button to launch the analysis process.

l Goes to menu 2.4 automatically after analysis is completed.

l The channel with the larger absolute value should be chosen by

default.

Probe/Analyze
2.3 A value of - 78 dB shows less interference than a value of -
Channels
60 dB.

Default channel for HandyPROBE

Default channel Channel range

G3 4 1-12

G4 16 1-16

1202
# Menu Contents

Selects a communication channel manually.

PROBE/CHAN
l A probe association is required afterwards.
2.4
NEL

It is always best to use the proposed channel.

Shows the status of the scanner connected to the controller.

Ready: The scanner is connected and ready to use.

3 SCANNER Disconnected: No scanner currently connected.

Scanning: The scan is currently in progress.
Stopping: The scan is currently stopping.

RESET Allows resetting the servers without rebooting the controller.

4
SERVERS
Press the OK button to reset the servers.
5 OPTIONS

#SFW Displays the current VXelements software version installed on the controller. It
5.1
VERSION should match the VXelements version installed on the computer.

Displays the current camera count for devices detected by the controller (sum
of all cameras mounted per device connected).
Device connected to the controller Camera count

C-Track 2
5.2 NB DEVICES
HandyPROBE 0

MetraSCAN 3D 2

MetraSCAN 3D-R 4

MaxSHOT Next 1

5.3 LANGUAGE Changes the controller display language (English or French).

Displays the controller current IP address.

l It is recommended to keep the default settings (200.200.200.2).

5.4 IP ADDRESS
l With a C-Link network, the IP addresses must be changed. For details,
see the C-Link Configuration section.

LCD
5.5 Indicates the contrast of the LCD panel on a scale of 1 to 5.
CONTRAST

1203
# Menu Contents
HDW VERSION
5.6 Displays the current hardware version installed on the controller.

1204
Environment Compensation (EC)

Tools | Environment compensation

Overview
The Environment compensation (EC) function applies only to the C-Track and C-Track|Elite (generation 3
and up).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect, VXscan-R modules, and in partner plug-ins.
The EC works in conjunction with the thermal and gravity compensation models by measuring the C-
Track reference artifact many times per second. It adjusts internal parameters to compensate in order to
maintain volumetric performance in unstable environments.
The EC function enhances the system stabilization in shop- floor environment by maintaining the
performance of the system and it can also allow to bypass the warming time.

l To use the EC, the C-Track calibration must be valid (still up-to-date, device not
shocked, etc.)

l The EC does not replace the C-Track calibration step when it is required.

l The EC function is not activated by default.

When to activate the EC

The EC must be used only when the C-Track calibration is not required.

This function performs very well in any uncontrolled environment (e.g. temperature shifts) such as in a
shop-floor area.
There are no significant benefits of using the EC in a controlled room environment such as a laboratory.
Controlled room environment (lab)

1205
 l The use of the EC is not required

l It will not add significant benefits unless the C-Track or the environment are not as
stable as expected.

Uncontrolled room environment (shop-floor area)

l The use of the EC is recommended

l It will help to keep the system within the specifications in unstable environments.

Hardware and components

1. EC light tripod

2. Calibration bar clamp

To install the calibration bar on the tripod

1. Press both sides of the clamp to insert the bar.

2. Place the calibration bar QR code facing the exterior.

1206
Volume

The EC volume measures approximately 9 m3.

It is located along the Z axis from 2000 to 3500 mm.

To display the volume

Select Show C-Track volume and Show environment compensation volume in the C-Track scene pane of
the Display panel.

To configure the EC artifact

These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

C-Track calibration bar:

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bar:

l This option will use a MaxSHOT 3D scale bar as the EC artifact.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the EC artifact is seen during the
acquisition process.

l Typically used with Automated Quality Control products or custom applications.

1207
 To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required to add the MaxSHOT 3D scale

bar. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

To locate the EC artifact

1. In the Display panel, open the C-Track Scene pane.

2. Select Show environment compensation volume option.

Field of view

l The bar is seen by the C-Track.

l Within the volume limit.

l Good orientation of the bar.

1208
 l The bar is not seen by the C-Track.

l Too close of the volume limit.

l Bad orientation of the bar.

To correct the orientation, use the corrections arrows. They show the correction
direction to apply to the calibration bar from the C-Track point of view, regardless
of the bar orientation.

l Yellow arrows: near the target pose.

l Red arrows: too far from the target pose.

To activate the EC

If a C-Track calibration is required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Wait for C-Track warm-up completion (15 to 20 minutes).

4. Perform a C-Track calibration.

5. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

6. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. A pop-up message will appear to show the selection made in the interface
(MaxSHOT 3D or C-Track). Ensure to validate the information displayed against set
configuration parameters.

1209
 7. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

8. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

9. The system is ready to use.

If a C-Track calibration is not required

1. Connect the system (C-Track, HandyPROBE and/or scanner).

2. Start the C-Track controller.

3. Configure the EC artifact (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar).

4. In the system panel, click (or go to Tools | Environment compensation) to activate

the EC. It can be activated as soon as the Analyzing phase is done, and Warming phase is
shown on the controller display panel. About 2 minutes are required.

Activating the EC function skips the warm-up time and the C-Track calibration only
if the calibration is not required.

5. Place the EC artifact in front of the C-Track to start the analyzing process.

The allowed bar orientation is along the C-Track X or Y axis.

6. If required, perform the HandyPROBE or MetraSCAN 3D calibration, making sure the C-

Track reference artifact remains visible during all the process.

7. The system is ready to use.

1210
To deactivate the EC

l It is not recommended to deactivate the EC after it has been started. However in

such a case, a message is displayed indicating that the system will continue to
operate but it will use the last manual C-Track calibration performed.

l The C-Track will return to the calibration state it was in before the activation of the
EC.

Click to deactivate the EC.

Statuses displayed in the system panel

Artifact status Condition Result

l Seen by the C-Track

l Located within the EC

l Compensation process is
Artifact visible volume
running
l Oriented with good
angle

1211
 Artifact status Condition Result

l Compensation process is
paused

l Last compensation is used

l Not seen by the C-
l Temperature and orientation
Track
changes monitored:
Artifact non
l Not located within the
visible l The temperature may
EC volume
not change by more
l Not oriented with good
than 0.5°C
angle
l The C-Track angle
changed by more
than 2.5°

l Compensation process is
Artifact is paused
moving
l Moving too fast
l Last compensation is used

The C-Track calibration is compensated only when the artifact is visible and the EC
ready conditions are met at the same time.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is visible

l The temperature change is monitored.

l The C-Track orientation change within ± 45° is monitored.

When the EC is activated and the artifact is not visible or is moving too fast

l The temperature and the C-Track orientation will be monitored.

1212
EC status Condition

l Artifact is visible (see artifact statuses).

Analyzing
l Analyzing for Environment compensation.

Ready l EC analysis completed and ready to be used.

l EC analysis is not running when VE is activated.

Paused
l The last compensation is used.

l Artifact is not visible. Show the EC artifact.

Waiting for Not visible and the temperature changed by

environment more than 0.5°.
compensation

Not visible and the C-Track angle change by

more than 2.5°.

1213
C-Track Calibration

General information
While performing a C-Track calibration with the calibration bar, VXelements adjusts many internal C-
Track parameters to optimize its performance.
A thermal and gravity compensation model is used to maintain the system within specifications
according to the C-Track orientation and the temperature changes.
The thermal compensation model is only activated after the warm-up time completion as the C-Track
internal components temperature must be stable.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

Information displayed in the 3D viewer

1. Front view

2. Top view

3. Progress indicator

1214
When to perform the calibration
The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

l After the C-Track has been placed back in its case and carried to another location (not
applicable to the CUBE-R).

l After the C-Track has traveled by car or by plane.

l After the system has been shipped to a customer location.

Skipping this step will impair the system performance.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will

1215
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Calibration with Quality Control products

Calibration

1216
Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

For the Calibrate all workflow, click here.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

1217
3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

The orientation of the C-Track cannot be changed after having started the
calibration process. Otherwise, the tolerance is exceeded and a message appears
asking to reposition the C-Track. It will be impossible to continue the calibration,
the C-Track will need to be placed back to the initial position to complete the
calibration process.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(*.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

1218
 l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy1 is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1219
Calibrate all
The Calibrate all function allows you to calibrate the C-Track and all devices connected to it, one after
the other.

l Only devices connected and ready to be used will be part of the Calibrate all
process.

l The C-Track calibration is strongly recommended. It should be done first and cannot
be skipped if the C-Track is not valid anymore.

l To be detected, the HandyPROBE must be activated prior to starting its calibration

process.

l The HandyPROBE or scanner calibration can be skipped during the process using
the Next or Previous button.

To calibrate all

1. Click .

2. The calibration workflow window will open.

3. Click in the progress bar to calibrate the C-Track first.

4. Calibrate the C-Track.

5. Click for the next step.

6. Click the calibration button displayed in the progress bar to calibrate the next device.

7. Calibrate the device selected.

8. Click for the next step.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for each device displayed in the progress bar.

10. Click Accept.

To Reset the calibration or Suspend the calibration, click the corresponding button.

To reset to the factory settings

It is possible to reset the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1220
 1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

Calibration with R-Series products

Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

1. Integration (VXelements and R-Series I/O Module interfaces)

This mode teaches the C-Track calibration trajectory in the robot teach pendant. The C-Track calibration
teaching process can be done through VXelements software or I/O Module interface.

2. Execution (R-Series I/O Module interface)

This mode executes the calibration program using R- Series I/O Module interface. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant.

1221
 3. Manual (VXelements interface)

This mode manually calibrates the C- Track using VXelements in the same way as in the standard
MetraSCAN 3D handheld applications.

C-Track robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration process of the C-Track in R-Series applications differs from its manual calibration.
It requires to reach 113 calibration bar positions in a smaller volume than that of the manual calibration
and following 3 ordered sub-trajectories:

1. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

2. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis

3. 49 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face up (toward the C-Track’s -Y axis) or down (toward the C-Track’s +Y axis).

1222
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis
The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face left (toward the C-Track’s -X axis) or right (toward the C-Track’s +Z axis).

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

The 45° targets must face the C-Track.

The flat targets:

l Must face down (toward the C-Track +Y axis) for positions below the C-Track baseline Y > 0

l Must face up (toward the C-Track -Y axis) for positions above the C-Track baseline Y < 0

1223
Either configuration can be selected for positions aligned to the C-Track baseline (Y = 0). An angle θ can
be added to the bar orientation given that all targets fit within the approved zone (defined in green).
This will help minimize occlusion of the targets.

To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset)

Three robot calibration trajectory options are available. The trajectories will all be the same but the
distance (Z offset) from the C-Track can be configured. These distances are in relation to the center of
the calibration zone.

l 2600 mm

l 3100 mm

l 3600 mm

1224
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The C-Track calibration bar TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate
system. The center of this coordinate system is a translation of the robot flange coordinate system. It is
located along the bar axis (Z+ orientation), the middle of the QR code define the Z origin and the normal
of the QR code define the -Y.
Define the TCP using the applicable annex of the Calibration certificate. Use the values as is without any
modification.

Autocalibration

l A scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) is required for autocalibration. This file is
available on the Customer Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.
l If you fail to provide the file needed, a message error will be displayed in the
interface (Command Window) or by the third-party software.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process using the relevant program.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

1225
3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process. The ends of the calibration bar need to be positioned onto the yellow
squares. The orientation of the bar also needs to be changed following the visual
indication. A position is validated when the squares at the ends of the calibration bar turn
green. The progress indicator will increase.

The pose is skipped if the bar is not seen within 2 seconds of the C- Track
calibration - Accept action execution. This will trigger a warning message after
the calibration, which must be controlled by an operator.

4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

1226
Manual calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

1227
Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

1228
When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1229
To reset to the factory settings

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

It is possible to restore the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

1230
1231
C-Track System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | Options | C-Track (or click in the system panel).

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated.

To set parameters
C-Track volume
This function allows changing the working volume.

l 16.6 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

1232
Environment compensation
Modes

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT scale bar

For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Volume extension
This function allows configuring a scaling reference bar (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale
bar) with the VE function.
Scaling modes

l None

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT 3D scale bars

It is also possible to add or remove a scale bar.

For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions

Select to allow measurements even if the conditions are not ideal if:

l the operating temperature has not been reached

l the analysis period is not completed

l the temperature varies more than 10°C from the temperature recorded at calibration time.

When selected:

l Enable C-Track functions

l C-Track status bar turns yellow to show this state

l Allows the use of the Static referencing mode

1233
This check box should not be selected unless the consequences it will have on
measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.

1234
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The QR code sticker applied to the middle of the C- Track calibration bar contains all the relevant
information.

l Select the check box to allow the C-Track to detect the code and extract the information
needed (serial number and lengths).

This is a mandatory step in the calibration process. The reading will be impossible if
the QR code sticker is dirty or damaged.

l If the check box is cleared and the Calibration bar drop-down in the system panel does not
display the right serial number, click Add... and browse to choose the right bar's calibration bar
file (*.sbcf). Otherwise, select the *.sbcf manually right after launching the calibration process.

Play sound when volume extension is lost

This option is enabled by default.

The sound of the C-Track volume extension function is activated.

A beep is emitted when the C-Track cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
To disable this function, clear the check box.

Use original calibration data

See To reset to the factory settings.

Calibration expiration (days)

The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated. The default value is 5 days.

1235
C-Track Object Preparation
The adequate target positioning is an element to guarantee accuracy of the measurement.

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

1236
Part setup examples
Small parts

Medium parts

Large parts

1237
Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated. See Tilt Compensation section.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

Volume extension

l Start to acquire data in the middle of the total volume of the part.

l Move to get a good overlapping of the part.

360° measurement
To perform a 360° inspection without a MaxSHOT Next, it is recommended to:

1. Put the targets on the part using enough swivel targets.

2. Move the C-Track.

3. Swivel the targets.

The base of the targets should not move and the targets should
remain in contact with their bases.

1238
4. Detect the targets on the other side of the part.

5. Remove the swivel targets and do not swivel them back.

The rotation axis of these targets is designed in their very middle. Rotating the
targets back and forth could cause unwanted uncertainty.

1239
Volume Extension (VE)

Tools | Volume extension

Overview
The Volume extension (VE) function allows continuously acquiring targets while moving the C-Track
around or along the part using the photogrammetry concept. This will generate a better positioning
target model accuracy than the basic detection methods (Auto-detect targets and Manually detect
targets functions).
It is available in VXprobe, VXscan, VXinspect modules, and in partner plug-ins (C-Track and C-Track|Elite
generation 3 and up).

It is recommended to calibrate the C-Track before using the VE function for it to

work properly and achieve a certain level of accuracy.

Positioning target setup

The setup must follow the same approach as before:

l Spread sufficient positioning targets all around the part to cover X, Y and Z directions (≥ 6 in
each frame).

l Distribute favoring the volume extension (≥ 6 overlapping targets between frames).

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

1240
 Scaling reference bars, (C-Track calibration bars, or MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can
be used to enhance the volumetric performance of the VE.)

The use of coded targets is still allowed (if already in place for fixed setups), but it
will not generate any volumetric performance benefits.

Acquisition rules

Make sure to apply the C-Track handling rules shown previously.

l It is mandatory to continue tracking the targets while moving the C-Track.

l Aim at the center of the part while moving around it.

l Move the C-Track along or around the part with a minimum displacement of 0.5 m.

l Keep a good standoff distance from the targets.

l When performing VE on a shiny part, some unwanted data (misidentified as targets) might be
acquired. This might have no impact or it could also entirely prevent the operation. To minimize
this behavior, ensure acquiring targets by positioning the C- Track at a slight angle to the
surface and as far from it as possible.

l The ambient temperature must not vary by more than ±2°C during the acquisition process.

l The Pitch and Roll angles cannot be inclined by more than ±10°. The current position at VE start
defines the reference angles for the threshold calculation.

l All positioning targets must be seen at different positions and angles.

l If the scaling mode is C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT scale bar, at least 1 scaling reference
bar must be seen during the VE acquisition to scale the model using a scaling reference bar.

l A minimum of 10 unique targets total must be detected during acquisition.

1241
l Rotation using the tripod pivot will lead to VE fail.

l The EC function will be paused during VE acquisition (if previously activated).

1242
Scaling mode configuration
These modes are available in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track

| Configuration) or of the system panel ( ).

None (no scaling reference bar):

l This option will use the C-Track calibration performed previously.

l Better positioning target model accuracy will be achieved using the previously performed C-
Track calibration (higher than with the Auto- detect targets and Manually detect targets
functions).

l For use in a controlled environment. Also suitable for demonstration purposes.

C-Track calibration bar:

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

l This option will use the C-Track calibration bar as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar is seen during
the acquisition process.

l If a C-Track calibration has not been performed previously, an error message will appear.

l In this case, the VE will be stopped.

l Calibrating the C-Track will fix the issue.

l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Quality Control products.

MaxSHOT 3D scale bars:

l This option will use the MaxSHOT 3D scale bars as a scaling reference.

l Optimal positioning model accuracy will be achieved as the scaling reference bar(s) is(are) seen
during the acquisition process.

l Up to 4 MaxSHOT 3D scale bars can be added and configured.

1243
 l For use in a harsh environment. Suitable for Automated Quality Control products or custom
applications.

To add a scale bar

A photogrammetry artifact (.caf) file is required for each MaxSHOT 3D scale bar
to be added. They are available on Creaform Customer Portal.

Through the Customer Portal

1. Go to the Products tab.

2. Enter the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar's serial number in the Serial Number field and click
Apply.

3. Select the check box next to the scale bar's serial number.

4. Click the arrow in the Calibration section to download the .caf file.

Through VXelements

5. Click Add... in the C-Track tab of the C-Track Configuration window (Configure | C-Track
| Configuration).

6. Select the .caf file in the VXelements - Import artifact dialog box.

7. Click Open. The scale bar number will be added in the window.

8. Repeat the process to add more bars.

To remove a scale bar from the window, select it and click Remove.

Acquisition

1. Place the C-Track in front of the part.

2. If a scaling reference bar is used, place it so the C-Track sees it during the VE acquisition
process.

3. To start the acquisition, click in the system panel or go to Tools | Volume extension.

4. Move the C-Track along the part. The tracking status and target count (all targets seen by
the C-Track cameras) are displayed in the system panel.

1244
 Click Cancel to cancel the VE at any time. The previous state will be restored.

If a positioning target model exists, a warning message will notify that the newly
acquired model will replace the existing one. The previous model will be lost.

If the tracking is lost

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to return to a previously known position to resume the acquisition process.

If the C-Track Pitch and Roll angles are inclined by more than ±10°

l A sound will be emitted. To deactivate the sound, clear the check box in the C-Track tab of the
C-Track Configuration window.

l The VE status pane will turn red.

l It is possible to move back within the angle range to resume the acquisition process.

If the scaling mode is set to C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale bar and no scaling
reference bar is detected during the VE acquisition

l A warning message will appear.

l The VE will be performed as if the None scaling mode had been set.

5. Click Finalize to stop the acquisition. Target count at the end of the process will be
different than the total count shown during the acquisition.

l If the acquisition passes: A progress window appears showing the acquisition

completion level. No confirmation message will be displayed at the end. Dynamic

1245
 tracking is activated and the model is ready to use.

l If the acquisition fails: An error message appears. Click Retry to reattempt the
acquisition or Cancel to exit the VE acquisition mode and return to the previous
state.

Volume extension details

To view the information related to the acquisition performed and the bars seen, select Positioning under
the scene1 node in the Navigation pane. The details appear in the Reference details pane.
Details displayed depend on the scaling mode set and the number of scaling reference bars used and
seen during the acquisition process.

Detail Description
Reference source Reference model acquisition method.
Target count Number of positioning targets included in the final model.
Coded target count Number of coded targets included in the final model.
3D uncertainty: Mean uncertainty on the measured position of targets
3D uncertainty
(standard deviation).

Evaluation of the difference between the scaled measured lengths and

the reference lengths.
The table shows the global scaling deviation and all the scaling
distances for each bar used.
The global scaling represents the highest absolute value of all the
scaling distances.
Scaling deviation*

If 2 bars were configured and 1 bar was seen

during the acquisition process, the Reference
details pane shows information relative to the bar
seen. The other information will be replaced by
N/A and will not be taken into account for the
calculation.

* This detail will not appear if the None scaling mode is set.

1Option which allows displaying different elements in the 3D viewer depending on the device connected.

1246
R-Series Autocalibration Kit

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

The R-Series Autocalibration Kit allows the complete and automatic calibration of the C-Track. It enables
automated steps, requiring no, or minimal, human involvement. This limits accuracy drift over time and
can ensure continuous operation (24/7).
Two solutions are available, with varying amount of human interaction needed:

l The pneumatic autocalibration kit enables the robot to pick up the calibration bar by itself.

l The manual autocalibration kit requires that someone installs the calibration artifact on the
scanner.

Pneumatic autocalibration kit

Components
Asset protection
Operating principles
To calibrate the system

Components

1. Pneumatic tool changer

a. Pneumatic master plate

b. Tool plate

1247
 2. Calibration bar holder

3. Tool rack

4. Proximity sensors

5. Calibration bar

6. Pneumatic valve

7. Control box

Pneumatic tool changer

This industrial device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the robot.
Pneumatic master plate
The active half of the tool changer. It is installed on the scanner, which is mounted to the robot.
The master plate:

l Contains the locking mechanism;

l Is equipped with pass through air ports to supply air to the end of arm tooling;

l Has 2 proximity sensors to confirm its state.

Tool plate
The passive half of the tool changer. On the pneumatic solution, the calibration bar holder and C-Track
calibration bar are mounted on it.

1248
Calibration bar holder
The calibration bar holder is the link between the Tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar. It must be
installed 108 mm from the QR code.

The robot should be programmed to minimize misalignment / hard contact during

tool changer coupling and uncoupling on the tool rack.

Tool rack
The tool rack is a fixture that holds the C-Track calibration bar when not in use. It contains proximity
sensors.
For a MetraSCAN 3D-R custom integration, the tool rack can be designed by the integrator.
Proximity sensors

1249
The proximity sensors detect the presence of an object and convert this information into an electrical
signal. The proximity sensors have a LED that will turn on when the calibration bar is detected.
Tool rack proximity sensor

The sensor detects if the calibration bar is in or out of the tool rack.

1. Tool rack proximity sensor

Master plate proximity sensors

The sensors allow feedback of the Lock/Unlock state of the master plate.

Pneumatic valve
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar) (0.41–0.69 MPa).

l Filter minimum: 40 microns.

l Flow maximum: Negligible

Color Use

1 Brown +24V
3 Blue GND
4 Black Signal

The valve is a 2-position, spring-return, 5-way pneumatic valve.

When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is OFF, the valve is in state 12, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 2,
the tool changer is LOCKED.

1250
When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is ON, the valve is in state 14, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 4,
the tool changer is UNLOCKED.

Internal Logic
Equivalent ladder representation of the internal logic used for the output to the pneumatic valve

To switch output PL04 to ON, the tool must be in rack and the unlock signal from robot controller
should be ON.

Control box
The control box is used for the protection and safety of equipment only. It allows preventing unlock
command to release the C-Track calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.
Two major types of interlocks exist:

l Failure interlocks: Continuously active and normally used to initiate equipment shutdowns and

l Permissive interlocks: Evaluate conditions to allow the starting or the continuation of actions.

Asset protection
On the CUBE-R solution, the pneumatic autocalibration kit is part of the Asset Protection option.
On top of providing a fully automatic calibration process, it also enhances the system safety checks.
Additional robotic implementations are used to evaluate the state of the calibration bar. Some actions
will not be possible when the bar is mounted on the robot (e. g., unlocking the tool) to remove risks of a
robot program mistakenly asking the robot to drop the bar during the calibration.
It also adds software safety checks when using Creaform VXscan-R module in VXelements.

Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is pneumatically driven to couple and uncouple the tool on the tool
changer. The tool changer uses air ports to provide lock and unlock pressure to the locking mechanism.

1251
 Safe, reliable operation of the tool changer is dependent on a continuous supply of
compressed air at a pressure of 60 to 100 psi. It is the customer's responsibility to
halt the robot motion if the air supply pressure drops below 60 psi.1

For proper tool pick-up, it is recommended to keep a maximum distance of 1.5 mm between the master
plate and the tool plate faces.
For proper tool drop-off, it is recommended to keep a maximum distance of 1.5 mm between the tool
plate and the tool rack proximity sensor.
1 ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC-5 through QC-27, Document #9610-20-
2254-09, 36.

1252
C-Track calibration process
Coupling sequence
The coupling procedure should be following the tool changer manufacturer recommendation.

The locking mechanism must be in the unlock position when attempting to couple
the tool changer. Failure to adhere to this condition may result in damage to the
unit and/or the robot.

X and Y Cocking Offset Twisting Offset

Z Offset
Offset (degrees) (degrees)21
<1.5mm ± 1 mm ±1.1° ±2°

12 Warning, illustration, and table: ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC- 5
through QC-27, Document #9610-20-2254-09, 36.
To pick up the C-Track calibration bar

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

2. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

3. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

4. Move master plate (which contains the locking mechanism) above the tool rack.

5. Align master plate and tool plate for coupling.

6. Insert the master plate slowly into the tool plate.

7. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to lock state.

8. Check locked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

9. Move robot tool changer up by 25 mm.

10. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

1253
 11. Move robot away from tool rack.

Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

Uncoupling sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

2. Move robot tool changer above the tool rack.

3. Align tool plate with tool rack for uncoupling.

4. Move slowly the tool plate on the tool rack.

5. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

6. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

7. Move master plate up by 25 mm.

8. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

9. Move robot away from tool rack.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

1254
Manual autocalibration kit

Components
Operating principles
To calibrate the system

Components

1. Manual tool changer

a. Manual master plate

b. Tool plate

2. Calibration bar holder

3. Calibration bar

Manual tool changer

This industrial device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the robot.
Manual master plate
The active half of the tool changer that contains the locking mechanism. The calibration bar holder and
C-Track calibration bar are mounted on it.
Tool plate
The passive half of the tool changer. On the manual solution, it is part of the scanner bracket.

1255
Calibration bar holder
The calibration bar holder is the link between the tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar. It must be
installed 108 mm from the QR code.

1256
Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is manipulated by an operator that will place it and lock it on the tool
plate on the robot.
To lock or unlock the master plate, hold the bar in position on the tool plate and rotate the mechanism.
It is the responsability of the operator to make sure that the calibration bar holder is firmly attached to
the scanner bracket.
C-Track calibration process
Before starting the calibration process, it is important to secure the tool holder on the scanner bracket.
To help with this step, the calibration program can include a move of the robot to an accessible position.
This position can also be programmed to be reached after the calibration, to ease the tool removal.
Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

1257
HP Z6 Industrial Computer

Overview
This industrial computer (provided without a screen and keyboard) comes with VXelements. It allows the
user to store inspection session information and provides enough processing power to keep a steady
frame rate while running inspection software.

l The HP Z6 Industrial Computer can also run the R-SeriesI/O Module interface, but
this software is sold separately.

l It is possible to install it in the Creaform Computer Cabinet, also sold separately.

Creaform computer cabinet

1. HP Z6 Industrial Computer

2. Creaform computer cabinet

1258
Technical specifications
Component Type
Processor Intel® Xeon™ W5-3435X Processor 3.1 GHz
Operating system Windows 11 Pro for Workstation 64
Graphics card NVIDIA® RTX A5000 (24 GB)
Memory 128 GB (4x32 GB)

l 1x 1TB SSD + 1x 512 GB:

nHP Z Turbo Drive 1TB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

Hard drive nHP Z Turbo Drive 512GB PCIe 2280 TLC M.2 SSD

At lease 200 GBs of free space must be available.

10x USB 3.0

3x Gigabit Ethernet ports:

l 2x Allied Telesis AT-2911T/2-901 Dual Port 1GbE NIC (C-

Connecting ports
Track and robot)

l1x Intel Ethernet I225-T1 single Port 2.5GbE PCIe NIC

(local network)

Display output 4x DisplayPort (mDP 1.4) + 2x USB-C

* For Intel I225-T1, all adapters and components must have Gigabit 1000BASE capabilities.
This computer is supplied by Creaform, who guarantees its compatibility with our products. All questions
and specification validation requests must be sent to Customer Support. No certification or compatibility
guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers than Creaform.

Software
All software maintenance for the HP Z6 Industrial Computer is performed by Creaform through an
annual R-Series Customer plan.

1259
Using CUBE-R
Workflow with R-Series I/O Module
Workflow with VXscan-R

Workflow with R-Series I/O Module

1. Calibrate all systems

C-Track

MetraSCAN-R BLACK

2. Configure scanner

3. Set up the part

4. Perform automated photogrammetry

5. Create I/O Module configurations

6. Create robot program

7. Scan

8. Inspect data

Workflow with VXscan-R

See the System Preparation page of the User Manual (VXscan-R section).

1260
C-Track Calibration with R-Series I/O
Module
The C-Track calibration trajectory is predefined for the CUBE-R.

The calibration trajectory requires that nothing be present on the rotary table
before starting any compensation process. Neglecting this will likely result in a
collision between the hardware and the item on the table.

The C-Track calibration trajectory is specifically programmed for the CUBE-R environment and should
never be changed.

All calibration programs come preloaded in the robot controller. They must be executed as
provided by Creaform.
From the robot’s Teach Pendant:

1. Select CALIB_CTRACK robot program.

The robot will start moving.

2. The R-Series Autocalibration Kit calibration artifact gets attached to the scanner on the
robot.

l The pneumatic solution picks it up automatically.

l The manual solution brings the robot to an accessible position for an operator to
install the calibration artifact.

1261
3. The robot will execute the calibration poses.
4. The R-Series Autocalibration Kit calibration artifact gets detached from the scanner on the
robot.

l The pneumatic solution drops it off automatically.

l The manual solution brings the robot to an accessible position for an operator to
uninstall the calibration artifact.

5. The calibration result should remain constant over time.

1262
MetraSCAN- R BLACK Calibration with R-
Series I/O Module

The calibration trajectory requires that nothing be present on the rotary table
before starting any compensation process. Neglecting this will likely result in a
collision between the hardware and the item on the table.

All calibration programs come preloaded in the robot controller. They must be executed as
provided by Creaform.
From the robot’s Teach Pendant:

1. Select CALIB_SCANNER robot program.

The robot will start moving.

2. The robot will prepare the CUBE-R for calibration.

l The pneumatic solution brings the calibration plate in position automatically.

l The manual solution rotates the rotary table in position for an operator to install
the calibration plate onto it.

3. The robot will execute the calibration poses.

4. The robot undoes the calibration setup.

1263
 l The pneumatic solution brings the calibration plate back to its storing position.

l The manual solution rotates the table back to its home position after the operator
has removed the calibration plate from it.

5. The calibration result should remain constant over time.

1264
Automated Photogrammetry

This function allows acquiring target positions on the fixture and part installed in the CUBE-R.

VXscan-R Plan: The photogrammetry generated in VXscan-R Plan will be used in both VXscan-R Plan
and VXscan-R Execute. Save the session with the photogrammetry while in VXscan-R Plan.

VXscan-R Execute: VXscan-R Execute generates a new working session using the photogrammetry
taken from the VXscan-R Plan session file. When performing photogrammetry in VXscan-R Execute, the
photogrammetry is kept until a new VXscan-R Execute session is created. To save photogrammetry

performed in VXscan-R Execute, click (Save as) and create a new session file or select the VXscan-
R Plan session file to overwrite the VXscan-R Plan session file (Warning: This cannot be undone.)

General operation
The acquisition principle is based entirely on the C-Track stereo acquisition of the model. The C-Track
acquires target positions while the model is rotating on 360 degrees.

Prerequisites, restrictions and rules

The C-Track must be calibrated prior to launching the photogrammetry.
Target model must contain enough targets distributed in the 3D volume to guarantee a good
overlap between pictures during acquisition.

l At least 10 to 12 targets must remain visible at any time during the acquisition phase.

l No static target (not part of the target model) is allowed.

l Any static target moving by more than 0.5mm and/or having its normal moved by
more than 5 degrees during the acquisition will be considered in the referential.
Targets that are static (outside the referential model), will be ignored automatically.

1265
 Any data from the session will be cleared and the previous targets will be cleared
upon launching automated photogrammetry.

During acquisition
Only targets seen by both cameras at the same time will be considered in the new model.
A bundle adjustment is performed at the end of the acquisition.

1266
When to perform the automated photogrammetry

l When the fixture was removed and reinstalled on the rotary table.

l When an event may have distorted the target model or the fixture:

l Temperature variation

l Heavy part payload

l Collision while loading the part

1267
Using Robot

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

Basic robot manipulations

Robot programming for CUBE-R
Scanning trajectory creation
FANUC programs

1268
Basic Robot Manipulations
Industrial robots are mostly made with 6-motorized rotation axes:

l Axes are counted from the robot base.

l Axes allow to reach almost any position + orientation (called “pose” in robotics) inside working
range.

l For a given pose, there are several possible axis configurations, especially because some axes
can rotate more than 360°.

Axis Range of motion (example)

1 +/-170°

1269
 Axis Range of motion (example)
2 +160° to -100°
3 +273° to -185°
4 +/-200°
5 +/- 120°
6 +/- 270°
7* +/- 370°

* Axis 7 applies to the rotary table.

FANUC robots are controlled by a teach pendant.

Teach pendant (TP)

1270
1. On|Off Switch

2. SHIFT Key

3. RESET Key

4. COORD (coordinate) Key

5. Emergency Stop Button

6. Jog keys

7. Jog speed keys

You can find more information on the teach pendant keys in the CUBE-R operator
training script.

1271
Tasks that can be controlled on the robot with the TP

l Switch between auto and manual mode

l Emergency stop

l SHIFT to jog the robot in manual mode

l RESET to clear all alarms

l Choose the jogging method:

l Axis specific

l Joint

l Cartesian

l WORLD

l TOOL

l Set the robot override speed (in %)

Jog speed keys

The jog speed keys are used to set the override of the current set maximum robot speed.

1. Increase the speed override

2. Decrease the speed override

If the robot or the tool is very close to any part of the environment, set the override
speed to a low value to avoid collisions when jogging the robot to a safe location.

1272
World Coordinate System (Cartesian)

WORLD

The world coordinate system (WCS) is located at the intersection of axes 1 and 2.
By default, the WCS and the base frame (RCS in i-Robot) are identical.
The parameters seen in the TP are: X, Y, Z, W, P, R.
The parameters in i-Robot are: X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz.
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, hold down the COORD key on the TP until WORLD appears
on the screen.

Tool coordinate system

1273
 1. TCP with tool

2. TCP without tool

The tool coordinate system is located on the flange of the robot if no tool is activated.
By default, MetraSCAN 3D- R is activated as a tool. The TCP of the activated tool is accordingly
transformed by 6 parameters (x, y, z, w, p, r).
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, press the COORD key on the TP until TOOL appears on the
screen.

Coordinate System (Joint)

The joint coordinate system is not really a coordinate system.

In the joint movement configuration, the axes can be moved independently from each other.
The axes are A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 and A7.
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, press the COORD key on the TP until JOINT appears on the
screen.

More information on the WCS, TCS and Coordinate System (Joint) is available in
the CUBE-R operator training script.

1274
Jog keys

1. Jogging (A1–A6)

2. External axis (rotary table) – A7

3. Translation in cartesian jogging

4. Rotation in cartesian jogging

1275
The jog keys are used to move the robot and the rotary table while the system is in manual mode.
To jog the robot manually

1. Switch the teach pendant into manual mode.

2. Switch the robot controller in manual mode.

3. Press the enabling device on the back of the TP and keep it pressed.

4. Press SHIFT and RESET.

5. Press SHIFT together with the relevant JOG KEY.

1276
Robot Programming for CUBE-R

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

Programming in FANUC with the teach pendant

For details, see the FANUC Programs section.

Standard robot program for scanning trajectories

The table is a template for a typical scanning program. Take it as a starting point to create an adapted
version for the use case.

The speeds and robot movement types are only to be used as an example.

For details, see the How to create a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with the teach
pendant section.

Step Command Explanation

CALL SET_ANGULAR_SPEED(5, 50, Assigning registers to desired angular speeds (R[6] to
1
100,150,200) R[10]).
CALL SET_LINEAR_SPEED Assigning registers to desired linear speeds ( R[11] to
2
(20,50,200,350,400) R[15]).
CALL SET_JOINT_SPEED Assigning registers to desired joint speeds (R[16] to R
3
(10,15,20,40) [20]).
Assigning registers to desired time speeds (R[21] to R
4 CALL SET_TIME_SPEED(.3,.7,1,1.5,3)
[25]).
5 R[26]=100 Assigning register to desired acceleration.

1277
Step Command Explanation

Creating UTOOL for scanner.

l This TCP value will always be the same for the

CUBE-R.

l The Xs represent the TCP values which are

CALL CREATE_UTOOL
6 unique to the installation. They are
(2,1,XXX.X,X,XXX.XXX,XX,X,XX)
configured during commissioning.

For details, see TCP, payload

and inertia definitions.

7 UTOOL_NUM=1 Setting UTOOL for scanner.

Setting payload for scanner.

l This TCP value will always be the same for the

CUBE-R.
8 PAYLOAD[1]

For details, see TCP, payload

and inertia definitions.

CALL CREATE_UFRAME
9 Creating UFRAME for current task.
(2,1,0,0,0,0,0,0)
10 UFRAME_NUM=1 Setting UFRAME for current task.
Call a check IO program that will validate that the IO
11 CALL CHECK221102
are in the correct state for scanning.
J P[...] 5% CNT100 TB
12 Home position taught above the part.
30.00sec,POINT_LOGIC
13 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_ON Calling the TRIGGER_ON robot program.

Calling the TRIGGER_OFF robot program.

14 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_OFF This command sent to VXelements will pause the scan
and close the lasers.
Close to the first location on the part that is not
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
15 directly on the part. Not turning on the lasers directly
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
on the part will increase scan quality.

1278
Step Command Explanation

Calling the TRIGGER_ON robot program.

16 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_ON This command sent to VXelements will initiate the
scan.
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
17 Robot position for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
... All the required positions for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
18 Robot position for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC

Calling the STOPSCAN robot program.

19 IF R[1]=1,CALL STOPSCAN This command sent to VXelements will stop the scan,
close the lasers and initiate data processing.
J P[...] 20% CNT100 TB Same home position taught above the part that is
20
30.00sec,POINT_LOGIC taught in step 12.

1279
Registers reserved for Creaform
Data registers (R)
# Description
R[1] Used to activate (1) / deactivate (0) communication with I/O Module
R[2] Used to toggle between EtherNet/IP (EIP) (0) and IO Digital (2)
R[3] Used to offset to toggle between EIP and IO digital (Actions)
R[4] Used to offset to toggle between EIP and IO digital (Configs)
R[5] Used to store last group input number (GIN) from handshake
R[6-25] Used to facilitate speed definition in programs
R[26] Used to define accelerations in programs
R[27] Used as an iterator for FOR loops
R[28-33] Used to test different conditions in the CHECK_SIGNALS program
R[34-39] Used to manage the UFRAME of the calibration plate
R[44-49] Used to manage the UTOOL of the calibrated TCP
R[40] Used by the Acceptance test to increment the Retry step
R[41] Used for the number of loops of each test
R[42] Used to activate / deactivate the static mode during CUBE-RAcceptance test acquisition
R[43] Used to store the actual override value
R[200] For internal use only

Position registers (PR)

# Description
PR[1] Used everywhere to define UTOOLs and UFRAMEs
PR[2] Used during commissioning to save the PICKTOOL and PLACETOOL arm positions

String registers (SR)

# Description
SR[10] Used by VXscan-R
SR[11] Used by VXscan-R

Flags (F)
# Description
F[1] Used to toggle between the PICKBAR and the PLACEBAR commands.

1280
 Flags (F)
# Description
Used to temporarily deactivate the check between the Arm deployed and Arm stowed
F[2]
signals during the SWING_ARM process.
Used to temporarily deactivate the check between the Locked and Unlocked signal
F[3]
during the LOCK/UNLOCK process
F[4-6] For internal use only.
F[7] Used to distinguish different CUBE-R configurations
F[60] Used by VXscan-R

Inputs and outputs reserved for Creaform

For Creaform use only. Do not alter or delete.

For details on digital inputs (DIs) and digital outputs (DOs), see the Programs part of the
FANUC Programs section.

GI/GO Number DI Number DO Number Assignation

GI/GO[1] 1-16 1-16 ETHERNET/IP.
GI/GO[2] 17-32 17-32 ETHERNET/IP .
- 33 - UNLOCKED signal.
- 34 - LOCKED signal.
- 35 - TOOL IN RACK.
- 36 - ARM STOWED.
- 37 - ARM DEPLOYED.
- 38 - PRESSURE OK.
- 39 - DOOR REQUEST.
- - 33 UNLOCK.
- - 35 PROGRAM RUNNING.

1281
Scanning Trajectory Creation

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

How to create a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with the teach pendant

How to create a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with VXscan-R

How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot

How to create a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with the teach pendant
To teach a scanning trajectory, many components have to be set up.

It is also assumed that the programmer will always maintain safe operations.

Steps and procedures that must be executed once:

l the setup of the CUBE-R is completed;

l the size of the part is validated inside the cell; and

l the software is installed and running.

1. Determine the resolution and shutter of the system. See the MetraSCAN-R BLACK
System Configuration section.

2. Once the system is setup, it is recommended to find an appropriate home position and
teach it.

3. Start a VXelements session and start a scanning session.

During the trajectory programming, the operator should look at the VXelements window to make sure
the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at an appropriate position in relation to the part and the C-Track. Also, this
method will provide the programmer with continuous feedback to validate that each section of the part
is scanned and the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at the correct distance in relation to the part.
During the teaching of the trajectory, the good scanning techniques must be maintained. Also, the
programmer should be careful to scan each section of the part only once while maintaining the correct
scanning technique and minimize the time the MetraSCAN 3D- R is spent in the air not scanning.
Observing these principles will help reduce cycle time.

The robot speed should be adjusted according to the chosen resolution.

1282
 It is also recommended to test the scanning trajectory in automatic mode at full
scanning speeds at the different times during the teaching process. Robot behavior
may vary from manual to automatic mode. This test will also be useful in validating
that the shutter and resolution settings are correct.

Refer to the CUBE-R programmer training script for more information.

How to create a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with VXscan-R

For details, see the Offline programming section.

How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot

To teach a scanning trajectory, many components have to be set up.

It is also assumed that the programmer will always maintain safe operations.

Steps and procedures must be executed once:

l the CUBE-R setup is completed;

l the size of the part is validated inside the cell;

l the software is installed and running; and

l the CAD of the part and of the CUBE-R are loaded in i-Robot.

During the trajectory programming, the operator should look at the VXelements window to make sure
the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at an appropriate position in relation to the part and the C-Track. Also, this
method will provide the programmer with continuous feedback to validate that each section of the part
is scanned and the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at the correct distance in relation to the part.
During the teaching of the trajectory, the good scanning techniques must be maintained. Also, the
programmer should be careful to scan each section of the part only once while maintaining the correct
scanning technique and minimize the time the MetraSCAN 3D- R is spent in the air not scanning.
Observing these principles will help reduce cycle time.

1283
Refer to the CUBE-R programmer training script to know how to create the basic
scanning program in i-Robot.

1284
FANUC Programs

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

These programs can vary depending on the installation.

FANUC BG Logic
FANUC Check IO
Other FANUC programs
Handshake

FANUC BG Logic
FANUC Background Logic (BG Logic) programs:

l Use ladder logic in program form;

l Are used instead of a PLC in the CUBE-R;

l Run continuously in the background to monitor the signals of the proxy sensors and floor
sensors.

FANUC Check IO
User alarms

l It is possible to set the user alarms in Warning, Pause or Abort.

l However, no matter what the configuration is, it is possible to reset in the manual
mode.

1285
 l Resetting the user alarm after it went off, while the conditions are still in error state,
will not trigger it again if the enabling device is pressed and held onto.

User alarms are used in a loop called BG Logic in the controller. These alarms can be triggered at any
moment since BG Logic is constantly scanning in the background while the robot controller is on. When
the system meets one of the conditions laid out in the programs, a fault is flagged and is displayed in the
dialog box at the top of the teach pendant.

User alarms
Message on teach
Issue description Condition description
pendant

1286
 User alarms
If the bar is not in the tool rack and the tool changer is
unlocked or the tool changer is not locked.
RACK SIGNAL (1)
Triggered to prevent the tool changer from locking (the
bar could fall or loosen in the tool changer).
Ualarm1: Tool rack If the bar is not in the tool rack and the calibration swing
signal mismatch
arm is not stowed away or the calibration swing arm is
unfolded.
RACK SIGNAL (2)
Triggered to prevent the calibration swing arm from
unfolding (there could be a collision between the
calibration bar1 and the swing arm) .

If the bar is not in the tool rack and the unlock tool
changer command has be sent.
Triggered to avoid a programming or a handling error
Ualarm2: Unlock UNLOCK REQUEST that would make the bar fall (if mounted on the robot)
signal mismatch SIGNAL
when we unlock the tool changer. In practice, this
cannot happen because there is a relay that prevents the
user from unlocking the tool changer if the bar is not in
the tool rack.

If the unlock tool changer command has been sent and

the tool changer air pressure level is not too low and the
tool changer is not unlocked or the tool changer is
locked and flag[3] is off.
Triggered if the user has sent the unlock tool changer
Ualarm3 : Unlocked UNLOCK REQUEST
signal mismatch SIGNAL (2) command and that it is not executed correctly. We only
check this condition to see if there is enough air supply
for the moment. Also, Flag [3] is used to prevent the
alarm going off during the transition between the
locked and the unlocked states because both possible
signals could be on or off for a split second.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1287
 User alarms
This alarm is deactivated for the manual CUBE- R
calibration.
This alarm is triggered if the tool changer is at the
Ualarm4: Locked LOCKED REQUEST unlocked position and the unlock request is not active.
signal mismatch SIGNAL This could happen if the tool changer was faulty or if
compressed air was not available.
Triggered if the Unlock signal DI 33 is on and the unlock
command is off.

The calibration arm is not detected.

CALIBRATION ARM Triggered if the position of the calibration arm is
Ualarm 5: Calib arm
UNKNOWN unknown Di 36 Arm stowed DI 37 Arm Deploy to avoid
signal mismatch
POSITION SIGNAL
any collision between the robot and the calibration arm,
can be a faulty or maladjusted sensor.

If the calibration swing arm is stowed away and the

calibration swing arm is unfolded.
Ualarm6: Arm
CALIBRATION ARMS Triggered when the signals are saying the calibration
stowed signal
SIGNALS (1)
mismatch swing arm is stowed away and unfolded at the same
time. If the alarm is triggered, a proximity sensor
probably needs to be fixed.

If the calibration swing arm is not stowed away and the

calibration swing arm is folded and flag[2] is off.
Triggered if the calibration swing arm is located
Ualarm7: Arm between the folded and unfolded positions. This signal
CALIBRATION ARMS
deployed signal combination is allowed when the robot is moving, with
SIGNALS (2)
mismatch the use of Flag[2] in the condition.
This situation could indicate that the stowing movement
does not accomplish its purpose, and there could be a
collision.

If the bar is not in the tool rack and the tool changer air
pressure level is too low.
Triggered if the tool changer air pressure level is too low
Ualarm8: Air pressure
PRESSURE SIGNAL and if the bar is not in the tool rack (i.e., it is mounted on
signal mismatch
the robot). This alarm allows scanning or calibrating the
scanner without air pressure, it is only going to block the
C-Track calibration.

1288
 User alarms
If (R[2]<>0 and R[2]<>2), there is I/O Module failure or
no power.
Triggered if the Registry 2 number is not 0 (for EIP) or 2
(for I/O Module Hardware).
Ualarm9:
IO MODULE PORT Creaform has slightly modified the CUBE- R robot
Communication port
SELECTION
signal mismatch programs so that they can apply to non- CUBE- R,
MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite applications that use I/O Module
Hardware.
Registry 2 is used to toggle between EtherNet/IP (EIP)
and I/O Module Hardware.
Ualarm10 : Robot ROBOT POSITION Proper to VXscan-R, the alarm is triggered if the robot
joint mismatch NOT RECOGNIZED position is not what VXscan-R expected.

The R-Series I/O Module configuration with Ethernet/IP is only available for robots
with Ethernet/IP, class 1 communications and requires 32 Dingital in (DI) and 32
Digital Out (DO) available in the configuration. This communication protocol can
make sure of Grouped Inputs/Outputs (GI, GO).

Robot Brand Controller Model Version

Firmware version V7.3+ with:

R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter
R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and
FANUC or
derivatives)
R860 - Advanced EIP (Ethernet/IP)
Adapter
CB3 V3.2.18654+
UR
E-Series Any version
Kuka KR C4 With Ethernet/IP option
ABB IRC5 With Ethernet/IP option
NX100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX100 With Ethernet/IP option
Yaskawa/Motoman FS100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX200 With Ethernet/IP option
YRC 1000 With Ethernet/IP option

1289
Programs
There are IO programs in the robot controller that are responsible for validating the safety logic of the
CUBE-R before the rest of the program can be executed. For example, if the proxy signal detects the
swing arm is near the rotary table, then the scanning trajectory will not start.
The following robot programs must be present in the robot controller:

l CHECK_SIGNALS

l CHECK010101

l CHECK011101

l CHECK101101

l CHECK221012

l CHECK221101

l CHECK221102

l CHECK221222

l CHECK221101

These are conditions that are programmed in the Teach Pendant to protect the tool from damages.
Contrarily to the User alarms, these programs are called and are not continuously being checked in the
background. Upon being called, if the conditions are not met the robot will be stopped.
They are directly linked to CHECK_ SIGNALS, and the conditions are set by how it is called by the
program. The table below explains the interactions that the CHECK_ SIGNALS has with the different
digital inputs.
The programs impacted by these conditions are “PICK_BAR”, “PLACE_BAR”, PICK_TOOL”, “PLACE_TOOL”,
“SWING_ARM” and “SWITCH_TOOL”.
It uses a series of 6 digits that each represents a digital input from DI 33 to DI 38, respectively from left
to right. Calling for CHECK_SIGNAL will verify the DI match the conditions of the call, and if they all do,
no fault will be raised. If at least one of the states do not match, the program will raise the matching
faults.

l To match a 1 state, a DI needs to be On;

l To match a 0 state it needs to be Off;

l Calling for a 2 will ignore the state of the DI.

1290
 CHECK_SIGNAL Teach Pendant operator fault messages
Message on Teach
Affected DI Solution
Pendant
UNLOCKED SIGNAL Checks if Tool changer sensor works properly in the
MISMATCH unlocked state.
33
PROGRAM IS
ABORTED If unlocked DI 33=On and DI 34=Off.

LOCKED SIGNAL Checks if Tool changer sensor works properly in the locked
MISMATCH state.
34
PROGRAM IS
ABORTED If locked DI 33=Off and DI 34=On.

Checks if the calibration bar is on its rack and the sensor

SCALEBAR IN RACK detects it properly on DI 35.
SIGNAL MISMATCH
35
PROGRAM IS l DI 35=On if tool is on rack
ABORTED
l DI 35=Off if no tool detected

ARM IS STOWED Checks if the calibration arm sensor works properly in the
SIGNAL MISMATCH stowed state.
36
PROGRAM IS
ABORTED If stowed, DI 36=On and DI 37=Off.

ARM IS DEPLOYED Checks if the calibration arm sensor works properly in the
SIGNAL MISMATCH deployed state.
37
PROGRAM IS
ABORTED If deployed, DI 36=Off and DI 37=On.

Check if air pressure sensor works properly.

LOW AIR PRESSURE
MISMATCH
38 l DI 38=On if air pressure is OK
PROGRAM IS
ABORTED
l DI 38=Off if no air pressure or signal from sensor

BAD IO PORT
No communication with I/O box next the robot controller,
R[] PROGRAM IS
possible electrical protection, or power fail.
ABORTED

Other FANUC programs

SAFETY CHECK program
There is a safety check program called SAFETY_ CHECK. This program runs continuously in the
background. This program polls the different signals related to the proximity switches in the CUBE-R.
When 2 signals trigger a conflict, a user alarm is triggered, and the robot is stopped.
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration trajectory program

1291
The SWING_ ARM and SWITCH_ TOOL programs installed on the controller were modified during
commissioning to function only on the CUBE- R they are on. The different calibration programs or
workflows will call each of them in turn to make sure the robot picks up the calibration bar and moves
the calibration plate safely.
Teach pendant programs in CUBE-R

For Creaform use only. Do not alter or delete.

The programs highlighted in bold will be useful for a programmer.

ACCEPTCTRACK Accepts the position of the calibration bar for C-Track calibration.
Accepts the scanner position over the calibration plate during
ACCEPTSCANNER
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration.
Sends the Auto detect targets action to the VXelements plug-in
AUTODETECTARGETS
window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
CALIB_CTRACK C-Track calibration program.
CALIB_FAILED Called to inform the operator if the calibration fails.
CALIB_SCANNER MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration program.
CHECK_IO Verifies then sets registers and group I/O values.
Used to validate digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors. A
CHECK_SIGNAL
STOP is called depending on the program and signal states.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors that the tool is locked on the
CHECK010101
robot tool changer.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool signal mismatch;
CHECK011101
tool on rack and tool changer lock.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if the robot can bring
CHECK101101
the tool on the tool rack.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if there is no tool on
CHECK221012
the MetraSCAN 3D-R bracket then deploys the arm.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if the tool is on the
CHECK221101
rack, arm is stowed, and air pressure is adequate.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool is on the rack,
CHECK221102
arm is stowed and not deploy.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool is on the tool
CHECK221222
rack.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if arm is stowed and air
CHECK222101
pressure is adequate.

1292
 Sends the check system ready to the VXelements plug-in window
CHECKSYSTEMREADYS
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
CREATE_UFRAME Creates a uframe (#PR, #UFRAME, X, Y, Z, W, P, R).
CREATE_UTOOL Create a utool frame (#PR, #UTOOL, X, Y, Z, W, P, R).
Sends the Export targets action to the VXelements plug-in window
EXPORTTARGETS
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to get the calibration results to the VXelements
GET_CALIB_RESULT
plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Handshake program for communication between robot and I/O
HANDSHAKE
Module.
IMPORT_TARGET_AND_ Sends the Import targets and align action to the VXelements plug-in
ALIGN window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Loads the I/O Module configuration setting with the associated
LOADCONFIG(1 to 20)
number.
Sends the Load VXelements session action to the VXelements plug-
LOADSESSION
in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
LOCK_TOOL Called to lock the calibration bar on the tool changer.
MAIN_PROG Basis of a scan program without trajectories.
Sends a message to the operator that the scale bar is not in the rack
MISSING_TOOL and stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals
from CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends the action to activate the multiline laser mode (Laser Mode –
MULTILINE Multi Line) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Sends the New Scan action used in parallelization scanning to the
NEWSCAN
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to start a new session (New Session) to the
NEWSESSION
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action of optimize the target positioning model (Optimize
OPTIMIZEPOSMODEL Positioning Model) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-
SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to optimize the scan surface mesh (Optimize
OPTIMIZESURFACE Surface) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
PHOTO_FAILED Called to inform the operator if the photogrammetry fails.
PHOTOGRAMMETRY Executes the photogrammetry of the target model.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PICKARM
SWING_ARM program to deploy the calibration plate support arm.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PICKTOOL SWITCH_TOOL program to make the robot pick the calibration bar
with tool the changer.

1293
 Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PLACEARM SWING_ARM program to make the robot pick the calibration bar
with tool the changer.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PLACETOOL SWITCH_TOOL program to make the robot place the calibration bar
on his rack.
Sends the Reset scan action to the VXelements plug-in window
RESETSCAN
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Verifies conditions related to DI 33 through 38. If conflicting signals
SAFETY_CHECK
occur, a user alarm is triggered.
Sends the Save scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
SAVESCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the Save VXelements session action to save the session to the
SAVESESSION
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
SCAN_PROG_TEMPLATE Template for a standard scan program without trajectory.
SET_ANGULAR_SPEED Sets the registers 6 to 10 to assign the robot angular speed.
SET_LINEAR_SPEED Sets the registers 11 to 15 to assign the robot linear speed.
SET_TIME_SPEED Sets the registers 21 to 25 to assign the robot time speed.
SHIP_POS Moves the robot in shipping position.
Sends the action to open the scan window (Show Scan Window) to
SHOWSCANWINDOW
the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to activate the single line laser mode (Laser Mode –
SINGLELINE Single Line) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Called to skip the C-Track calibration position in a calibration
SKIPTRACK
program.
Skips the scanner position over the calibration plate during
SKIPSCANNER
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration.
Sends the action to start the C-Track calibration (C-Track Calibration
STARTCALIBRATIONCTRACK – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Sends the action to start the MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration (3D
STARTCALIBRATIONSCANNER Scanner Calibration – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to start the photogrammetry (C-Track
STARTPHOTO Photogrammetry – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window using
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the Start scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
STARTSCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.

1294
 Sends a message to the operator that the arm is deployed and stops
STOP_ARM_IS_DEPLOYED further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R
sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the arm is stowed and stops
STOP_ARM_IS_STOWED further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R
sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator and stops further actions. This
STOP_EXECUTION occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors do not
match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that there is a locked signal and
STOP_LOCKED stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the air pressure is low and
STOP_LOW_AIR_PRESSURE stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the tool is in the tool rack and
STOP_TOOL_IN_RACK stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that there is an unlocked signal
STOP_UNLOCKED and stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals
from CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the photogrammetry has
STOPPHOTO
failed. Then the program is aborted.
Sends the Stop scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
STOPSCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and deploys
SWING_ARM
or stows the calibration plate support arm.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors then picks
SWITCH_TOOL or places the calibration bar on the tool rack. The pick or place
depends on the digital input signals of the CUBE-R sensors.
Sends the action to turn off the lasers (Trigger OFF) to the
TRIGGEROFF
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to turn on the lasers (Trigger ON) to the
TRIGGERON
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors then sends
UNLOCK_TOOL the unlock tool signal to release the C-Track calibration bar from the
tool changer.

Handshake
The handshake program is used for communicating with VXelements. All commands sent to VXelements
use Handshake as a subprogram. Each command is comprised of the group, the action that is sent and
the event that is returned. A user will not interact directly with the Handshake program when

1295
programming a scanning trajectory but will use other programs which sole purpose is to call the
handshake program with specific parameters.
The robot programs require a handshake strategy for the scanning process to function correctly. The
main goal behind a handshake is to ensure the commands related to the Creaform system are well
executed before moving on to the next action. For example, executing a scan properly requires the
completion of the Start scan command before the robot begins its movements for the scan trajectory.
Overview of action and event exchanges between the robot controller and Creaform’s
R-Series I/O Module

A good handshake consists of 3 main components:

l Verification: the states are returned to neutral (or 0). If the values were not returned to idle, the
same command could be sent a second time, which could cause problems with the data
acquisition.

l Validation: the event received from the system is the event associated with the action sent. This
validates the interaction with the Creaform system.

l Robot action: a robot action is performed based on the event sent to the robot. For example,
after the robot sends the Start scan action, the Scan started event will be received from I/O
Module, allowing the robot to start the scan trajectory.

1296
Error management is also something that can be incorporated into the handshake. For example, if the
connection is cut between the robot and the system, the robot can have programmed way points to
ease an automatic return to the home position.
Pseudo-Code example of Handshake
Step Description

I/O MODULE PORT SELECTION

l IO Port values are selected

1
l This section validates that the correct ports are configured and selected

l Robot alarm is activated if ports are incorrect

ENSURE INPUTS/OUTPUTS ARE OFF

l All input and output values are at 0

2
l Robot alarm is activated if ports values are not 0

l Robot alarm is activated if ports are incorrect

3 SET TIMEOUTS VALUES

CREATE ROBOT PROGRAM THAT MANAGES VXELEMENTS STATUS

l Auto-detect fail

l Scanner calibration or C-Track calibration fail

4 l Photogrammetry fail

l System ready

l System busy

l Etc.

CREATE ROBOT ACTIONS BASED ON VXELEMENTS STATUS (to recover from error)

5 l Way point during scan trajectory

l Finish calibration faster without calibration commands

6 SET ROBOT OUTPUT BYTE TO 0

1297
CUBE-R Previous Generation
Overview
Technical specifications
Hardware and components
Using the CUBE-R

Overview

The CUBE-R is a complete turnkey 3D scanning coordinate measuring machine (CMM) developed by
Creaform for an efficient quality control in the production and manufacturing process. This measuring
room allows the off-line inspection of parts ranging up to 3 m (10 ft).

1298
Whereas mechanical measuring machines capture data in a point-based or linear manner, 3D scanning
CMMs provide full-field deviations of the 3D actual coordinates and the CAD data.

Technical specifications
Dimensions 4.1 m x 4.1 m x 3.1 m
Max. part size Up to 3 m
Max. part weight Up to 1 000 kg
Positioner load 1 500 kg
Mounting plate weight 120 kg
Positioner support weight 90 kg
Usable load (for fixture and
1 300 kg
part)
Automated axes 7
Entry Rolling door with safety
Opening width 3.1 m
Floor mounting or fixing Required

1299
 Transport cart, pallet truck, forklift truck

Loading concept The customer can use the method of his choice
to load and unload the CUBE-R.

1300
Hardware and Components
The core of the CUBE-R 3D scanning coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is the MetraSCAN-R
BLACK|Eliter.
The complete solution can use i-Robot X4 from Metrologic or PolyWorks, I/O Module and TP language
from FANUC.
Before being executed, all robot programs should be tested according to the robot manufacturer
recommendations for robot programming. See FANUC robot manual for more information. After
acquiring the data, scanning results are represented using free-form, unstructured three-dimensional
data, in the form of a triangle mesh. The actual data is compared with the nominal data and displayed in
a report.

CUBE-R Components
The CUBE-R can be divided into 8 main sections:

1. Door

2. Walls (including front control panel and safety laser scanners)

3. Robot assembly

4. C-Track

1301
5. MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite scanner (No longer supported. Last version is VXelements 9.1.2)

6. R-Series Autocalibration Kit

7. Industrial Computer (default option)

8. Productivity Station (can be purchased as an option)

1302
Door
The door used with the CUBE-R is from ASSA ABLOY. Its curtain contains 3 transparent PVC panels,
making it possible to see the process inside the cell. The motor which is mounted on the right-hand side
when facing the CUBE-R, is installed with its casing facing downwards. The door is controlled by a panel
located to the right. On this panel, it is possible to open and close the door as well as start and stop the
robot. The door also has a control system supplied by the manufacturer. It can be used as a secondary
control device and is used to modify the door settings if required. To open and close the door manually,
a handle supplied by ASSA ABLOY is available.

The door is installed with the correct settings already configured and they should
not be changed.

The door also has safety features that stop both the door and the robot when necessary. These features
are described in the Operating principles section of this document. Refer to the door documentation
for the maximum opening and closing speeds and times.

1. Transparent PVC panels x 3

1303
 2. Drive unit and casing

3. Front control panel

A. Pre-running photocell
B. Stationary photocell

1304
There are 2 photocells installed inside the door rails. They are used to check that the rolling door path is
clear and that the door can be closed in a safe way.
The pre-running cell is installed just below the door base and will follow the door in the way down. If the
beam is interrupted while the door is closing, the movement of the door will immediately stop, reverse
the movement and finally stop in the open configuration.
The stationary photocell is located approximately at an height of 300 mm from the ground, if it detects
an obstacle, the door will not close.

Refer to the ASSA ABLOY manual for the door operation.

A. Pre-running photocell

B. Stationary photocell

1305
1306
Walls
The 3 remaining sides of the CUBE-R are walls. The walls are installed to prevent entry in the robot work
environment. Each side wall consists of 4 individual panels, for a total of 12 panels, which are assembled.
Two sides have windows that are composed of transparent PVC panels. One side is not see-through. The
3 sides are interchangeable; therefore, it is possible to decide which sides will have the windows before
installation. The CUBE-R can be installed anywhere on the shop floor and it will be possible to view the
scanning process.

1307
Safety laser scanners (floor sensors)

Floor scanners can detect small objects that are at least 50 mm.

Floor scanner 1 is installed at the bottom of the right wall when facing the CUBE-R (just after entering
the work cell). Floor scanner 2 is fixed on the bottom of the left side wall near the door.

The C-Track is elevated (top of the left wall when facing the CUBE-R).

1308
Robot Assembly
The robot assembly comprises the items related to the robot in the CUBE-R. The robot and support
structure is the structure onto which the robot and positioner are installed. The Mounting Plate is used
to place the part in the CUBE-R and the system calibration assembly is the location of the required items
for the C- Track and the MetraSCAN- R BLACK automatic calibration. For details, see the R- Series
Autocalibration Kit section.

1309
 1. FANUC positioner and cover

2. Positioner structure for mounting plate

3. Mounting plate

4. User calibration plate

5. Swing arm

6. Swing arm slot for robot manipulation

7. Rotary mechanism for swing arm

8. C-Track calibration bar1 with tool changer adapter

9. Tool rack

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1310
 10. MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite scanner (No longer supported: Last version is VXelements9.1.2)

11. FANUC M20-iA robot

12. Robot support structure and cover

FANUC positioner and cover

Positioner structure for mounting plate

The positioner structure is fixed to the robot positioner. It is designed to hold the mounting plate and it
comprises 4 conical pins on which the mounting plate will be installed.

1311
Mounting plate

The mounting plate is the removable platform that holds the fixture and the part. Four holes are located
underneath it to place onto 4 conical pins of the positioner structure. These 4 pins are installed on a
structure that is fixed to the robot positioner. The holes and the pins have a specific pattern. Therefore,
the mounting plate can only be installed on the robot positioner a certain way.

See the images for the pattern.

Be careful when installing the part on the mounting plate.

Robot

The robot assembly contains a M20iA FANUC robot and a FANUC single axis compact positioner with a
payload of 1 500 kg.

1312
Robot controller

The robot controller (R30-iB Plus) is located inside the structure. It is accessible by a panel on the left
side. The CUBE-R control box is also located in that area.

Teach pendant

The teach pendant is connected to the controller and the cable is routed inside the panels of the CUBE-R
on the right side (when facing the CUBE-R). All of the FANUC programs that are required for the use of
the CUBE-R are programmed and launched with the teach pendant.

1313
C-Track

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The C-Track is a dual-camera optical sensor providing high-accuracy measurements. This device is used
with the HandyPROBE, the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R for production line purposes, such as
in the automotive, aerospace and manufacturing industries.
C-Track+ C-Track C-Track Third generation (G3)

1314
Compatibility chart

HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE
HandyPROBE Next
Next+
G4 G3 G4

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN MetraSCAN MetraSCAN-R
MetraSCAN 3D
3D+ 3D-R BLACK+|Elite
MetraSCAN- MetraSCAN-R
BLACK 357 BLACK+
R BLACK BLACK+|Elite

C-Track+

C-Track G4

C-Track and C-
Track|Elite G3

For technical specifications, see www.creaform3d.com.

1315
C-Track Hardware and Components

Contents may vary according to the solution purchased.

Hardware and components

The C-Track includes 2 digital cameras surrounded by a set of LEDs. Lighting sensors enable measuring
reflectors in a specific volume of use (9.1 m3 or 16.6 m3 for C-Track and C-Track|Elite).

1. Tripod - 1 unit

2. Cables:

l USB 3.0 power cable - 1 unit

l Ethernet cable - 1 unit

3. Calibration bar - 1 unit

1316
 4. Power supply and power cable - 1 unit each

5. Controller - 1 unit

6. C-Track - 1 unit

7. Dynamic referencing accessory kit - 1 unit

8. USB 3.0 to Ethernet adapter - 1 unit

9. Software installer USB key - 1 unit

10. Calibration certificate (under the case foam insert) - 1 unit

C-Track tripod

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The tripod adjusts the C-Track to multiple heights and angles.

To set up the C-Track on the tripod, see the Setup section.

1317
Other components

1. Dynamic referencing accessory kit

2. Calibration bar

3. Dynamic referencing kit

4. Controller

5. USB to Ethernet adapter

6. Ethernet cable

7. Power supply

8. USB power cable

1318
Visibility LED color codes

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Blue Red Yellow White

LED Off Green Yellow Red
(blink) (blink) (blink) (blink)

1 No power Power on - - - - - -

No power or
Stylus not
21 VXelements is Stylus seen - - - - -
seen
not started

Scanner
No power or
Scanner detection Scanner not
31 VXelements is - - - -
seen not at seen
not started
100%

C-Track ready Waiting

Not
4 (stable - - - Warming Blooming for QR
operating
temperature) code

Few targets Referential

Referential
5 No referential2 seen (not below - - - -
seen
optimal) 4 targets

1 If there is no stylus or scanner activated, LED #2 will mimic LED #3 behavior and

vice versa.
2 The minimum threshold 4 targets.

The target threshold (T) for LED #5 to be green is set according to this formula:

1319
The absolute maximum is set to 8.

Examples

l If there are 4 targets in the reference, the LED turns green when 4 targets
are seen. It turns red otherwise.

l If there are 8 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 5 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 targets are seen and red otherwise.

l If there are 12 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 6 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 or 5 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

l If there are 40 targets in the reference, the LED turns green if 8 or more
targets are seen. It turns orange if 4 to 7 targets are seen and red
otherwise.

1320
C-Track Operating Principles
The C- Track cameras acquire the positioning targets simultaneously, which enables the software to
determine the reference targets position as well as its environment through triangulation.

Measurement volume

Flexibility volume: 16.6 m3

Accuracy volume: 9.1 m3

1321
Positioning model
To reference the C-Track in space and to obtain accurate measurements, it is necessary to create a
positioning model with targets. The positioning model should cover the volume of the part to be
scanned or probed as much as possible.
To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).

Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel. The C-Track will
show the target count after the target acquisition process.

The last action performed sets the default action.

1322
 Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

Swivel targets cannot be rotated when using this

Auto-detect targets method.

All previously acquired targets will be

discarded.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
Rectangle
Manually detect targets
l
Free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to import a positioning target model. The

dynamic referential is automatically activated.
Import C-Track
positioning targets 2. Select an existing positioning target model file
(.txt).

3. Click Open.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1323
Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

1324
Reference positioning target statuses
The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

Referencing modes

The part can only be moved if the targets are placed on it.

Dynamic mode
Take measurements while moving the C-Track.

l A minimum of 4 visible targets is required (at least 8 are recommended). Set minimum value in
Configuration Options.

l Useful in a work environment exposed to vibrations.

l Eliminates potential handling errors.

l Makes it possible to move the C-Track and part quickly.

Hybrid mode
Allows the C-Track to continue taking accurate measurements when less than 4 targets are seen in the
reference model. At least one target must always be visible.

Static mode

Only available if the Allow measurements outside recommended conditions check

box is selected.

Allows moving the C-Track between measurements without having to continuously see the targets.

1325
l Retrieve the C-Track position after moving to update the actual position.

l Make sure that enough targets belonging to the reference are visible when retrieving.

1326
Detection statuses
The C-Track is connected and ready to be used.

The C-Track is not connected or not ready to be used. For details,

refer to the Troubleshooting section.

The C-Track is dazzled or too many targets are seen.

Positioning model is referenced. At least 4 targets must be seen.

Not referenced. Less than 4 targets seen. No target is detected.

1327
C-Track Controller

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

The controller provides information about all systems connected to it:

l C-Track

l HandyPROBE stylus

l MetraSCAN 3D

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

l MaxSHOT 3D

It enables to:

l Associate the stylus

l Set language and contrast

l Reinitialize the controller

l Track the status of all systems through the LEDs, etc.

The controller uses an Ethernet protocol to communicate with the computer that can be set up through
the IP Configurator tool.

Components
Connection

1328
Display
Recovery procedure

1329
Controller Components

Components
G4, G4+ controller

Front of the controller 1. Power button

2. LCD panel

3. Back button: To go back to the

main menu.

4. Next button: To browse through

the menus.

5. OK button: To explore the sub-

menus.

6. LED statuses

Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT 3D)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Power supply

9. Device USB ports and cable

retainers

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

1330
G3 controller (the front features the same characteristics as the G4, G4+)
Back of the controller 1. C-Link and external trigger

2. C-Link out

3. C-Track power

4. Scanner power

5. Accessory power (MaxSHOT Next)

6. Ethernet port

7. Recovery key USB ports1

8. Main power supply

9. Hardware USB ports

1Only for recovery keys. Do not connect any other USB device to recovery key USB

ports.

To connect the controller

See C-Track Setup and Connection.

1331
Controller Display

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Statuses
The controller status is displayed on the LCD panel.
Use the Menus button to browse through the menus, the OK button to explore the sub-menus, and the
Back button to go back to the previous menu.
The LEDs indicate the statuses of the system interactions with its components.
See Components section for more information.

1332
Controller LED color codes

The C-Track
is connected
to the
The C-Track No image
controller, The C-Track The C-Track is is warming detected
the is NOT
synchronizing up to its by the
C-Track calibration connected
with the operating cameras.
date is still to the
controller. temperature Calibration
valid and controller.
range. is too old.
the system
is ready to
be used.

The
controller is
The
NOT The C-Track is
controller is
plugged in plugged in synchronizing
the the with the
Sync - -
computer computer controller
and and/or and the
VXelements
is running. VXelements computer.
is NOT
running.

The blinking
LED
confirms
data
Data transmission - - - -
between the
controller
and the
devices.
The probe
The probe is
is NOT
activated
activated
and
HandyPROBE and/or NOT - - -
associated
associated
with the
with the
controller.
controller.

1333
 The scanner
The scanner is NOT
is connected
Scanner connected - - -
to the
controller. to the
controller.

The
accessory is
Accessory connected - - - -
to the
controller.

1334
Menus
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the C-Track connected to the controller.

Ready: The C-Track is initialized and ready for measurement.
No C-Track: The C-Track is not detected by the controller.
[X] (Cause): The C-Track is detected, but not yet operational.

l Analysis: The C-Track is analyzing.

l Calib. too old: The calibration is outdated and must be carried out
again.
1 C-TRACK
l Too cold/warm: The C-Track is operating outside the recommended
temperature range.

The controller may become hot by prolonged use

especially in high temperature.

l Unstable temp.: The temperature has changed and must stabilize

before resuming the measurement.

Displays the current frame rate of the C-Track.

l 58.0/58.0/58.0

C-TRACK/FPS l C-Track controller processing rate FPS / C-Track left camera

1.1 (Frame Per
Second) FPS / C-Track right camera FPS.

l It should be near 58 frames per second for the HandyPROBE and 58

frames per second for the MetraSCAN 3D or the MetraSCAN 3D-R.

1335
# Menu Contents

Shows the status of the HandyPROBE connected to the controller.

Probe activated: The HandyPROBE is activated and ready for measurement.
Click probe button: The HandyPROBE is not yet activated and a button on the
2 PROBE probe should be pressed to activate it.

When first activating the HandyPROBE with a new

controller, it must be associated with the controller (see
2.2 Probe/Assoc.).

2.1 PROBE/BATT. Shows the stylus battery level.

Allows manually associating HandyPROBE stylus to the controller.

[OK] to associate: Press the OK button to launch the association process.
2.2 PROBE/ASSOC.
Press probe buttons: Press and hold the 2 outer buttons of the HandyPROBE
to pair the device. When releasing them, a beep will be emitted to confirm the
association has worked.

Allows controller to scan available frequency for stylus communication.

[OK] to analyze: Press the OK button to launch the analysis process.

l Goes to menu 2.4 automatically after analysis is completed.

l The channel with the larger absolute value should be chosen by

default.

Probe/Analyze
2.3 A value of - 78 dB shows less interference than a value of -
Channels
60 dB.

Default channel for HandyPROBE

Default channel Channel range

G3 4 1-12

G4 16 1-16

1336
# Menu Contents

Selects a communication channel manually.

PROBE/CHAN
l A probe association is required afterwards.
2.4
NEL

It is always best to use the proposed channel.

Shows the status of the scanner connected to the controller.

Ready: The scanner is connected and ready to use.

3 SCANNER Disconnected: No scanner currently connected.

Scanning: The scan is currently in progress.
Stopping: The scan is currently stopping.

RESET Allows resetting the servers without rebooting the controller.

4
SERVERS
Press the OK button to reset the servers.
5 OPTIONS

#SFW Displays the current VXelements software version installed on the controller. It
5.1
VERSION should match the VXelements version installed on the computer.

Displays the current camera count for devices detected by the controller (sum
of all cameras mounted per device connected).
Device connected to the controller Camera count

C-Track 2
5.2 NB DEVICES
HandyPROBE 0

MetraSCAN 3D 2

MetraSCAN 3D-R 4

MaxSHOT Next 1

5.3 LANGUAGE Changes the controller display language (English or French).

Displays the controller current IP address.

l It is recommended to keep the default settings (200.200.200.2).

5.4 IP ADDRESS
l With a C-Link network, the IP addresses must be changed. For details,
see the C-Link Configuration section.

LCD
5.5 Indicates the contrast of the LCD panel on a scale of 1 to 5.
CONTRAST

1337
# Menu Contents
HDW VERSION
5.6 Displays the current hardware version installed on the controller.

1338
C-Track Calibration

General information
While performing a C-Track calibration with the calibration bar, VXelements adjusts many internal C-
Track parameters to optimize its performance.
A thermal and gravity compensation model is used to maintain the system within specifications
according to the C-Track orientation and the temperature changes.
The thermal compensation model is only activated after the warm-up time completion as the C-Track
internal components temperature must be stable.

Purpose of calibration
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

Information displayed in the 3D viewer

1. Front view

2. Top view

3. Progress indicator

1339
When to perform the calibration
The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

l After the C-Track has been placed back in its case and carried to another location (not
applicable to the CUBE-R).

l After the C-Track has traveled by car or by plane.

l After the system has been shipped to a customer location.

Skipping this step will impair the system performance.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will

1340
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

Calibration with Quality Control products

Calibration

1341
Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

For the Calibrate all workflow, click here.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

1342
3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

The orientation of the C-Track cannot be changed after having started the
calibration process. Otherwise, the tolerance is exceeded and a message appears
asking to reposition the C-Track. It will be impossible to continue the calibration,
the C-Track will need to be placed back to the initial position to complete the
calibration process.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(*.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

1343
 l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy1 is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1344
Calibrate all
The Calibrate all function allows you to calibrate the C-Track and all devices connected to it, one after
the other.

l Only devices connected and ready to be used will be part of the Calibrate all
process.

l The C-Track calibration is strongly recommended. It should be done first and cannot
be skipped if the C-Track is not valid anymore.

l To be detected, the HandyPROBE must be activated prior to starting its calibration

process.

l The HandyPROBE or scanner calibration can be skipped during the process using
the Next or Previous button.

To calibrate all

1. Click .

2. The calibration workflow window will open.

3. Click in the progress bar to calibrate the C-Track first.

4. Calibrate the C-Track.

5. Click for the next step.

6. Click the calibration button displayed in the progress bar to calibrate the next device.

7. Calibrate the device selected.

8. Click for the next step.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for each device displayed in the progress bar.

10. Click Accept.

To Reset the calibration or Suspend the calibration, click the corresponding button.

To reset to the factory settings

It is possible to reset the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1345
 1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

Calibration with R-Series products

Possible calibration modes with VXelements and R-Series I/O Module

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

1. Integration (VXelements and R-Series I/O Module interfaces)

This mode teaches the C-Track calibration trajectory in the robot teach pendant. The C-Track calibration
teaching process can be done through VXelements software or I/O Module interface.

2. Execution (R-Series I/O Module interface)

This mode executes the calibration program using R- Series I/O Module interface. The calibration
program previously created is played from the robot teach pendant.

1346
 3. Manual (VXelements interface)

This mode manually calibrates the C- Track using VXelements in the same way as in the standard
MetraSCAN 3D handheld applications.

C-Track robot calibration trajectories

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The calibration process of the C-Track in R-Series applications differs from its manual calibration.
It requires to reach 113 calibration bar positions in a smaller volume than that of the manual calibration
and following 3 ordered sub-trajectories:

1. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

2. 32 bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis

3. 49 bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Y axis

The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face up (toward the C-Track’s -Y axis) or down (toward the C-Track’s +Y axis).

1347
Bar positions aligned to the C-Track X axis
The 6 flat targets must face the C-Track.
The 45° targets can face left (toward the C-Track’s -X axis) or right (toward the C-Track’s +Z axis).

Bar positions aligned to the C-Track Z axis

The 45° targets must face the C-Track.

The flat targets:

l Must face down (toward the C-Track +Y axis) for positions below the C-Track baseline Y > 0

l Must face up (toward the C-Track -Y axis) for positions above the C-Track baseline Y < 0

1348
Either configuration can be selected for positions aligned to the C-Track baseline (Y = 0). An angle θ can
be added to the bar orientation given that all targets fit within the approved zone (defined in green).
This will help minimize occlusion of the targets.

To configure the distance from the C-Track (Z offset)

Three robot calibration trajectory options are available. The trajectories will all be the same but the
distance (Z offset) from the C-Track can be configured. These distances are in relation to the center of
the calibration zone.

l 2600 mm

l 3100 mm

l 3600 mm

1349
To define the C-Track calibration bar TCP

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The C-Track calibration bar TCP is the point defined with regard to the mechanical interface coordinate
system. The center of this coordinate system is a translation of the robot flange coordinate system. It is
located along the bar axis (Z+ orientation), the middle of the QR code define the Z origin and the normal
of the QR code define the -Y.
Define the TCP using the applicable annex of the Calibration certificate. Use the values as is without any
modification.

Autocalibration

l A scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) is required for autocalibration. This file is
available on the Customer Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.
l If you fail to provide the file needed, a message error will be displayed in the
interface (Command Window) or by the third-party software.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process using the relevant program.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

1350
3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process. The ends of the calibration bar need to be positioned onto the yellow
squares. The orientation of the bar also needs to be changed following the visual
indication. A position is validated when the squares at the ends of the calibration bar turn
green. The progress indicator will increase.

The pose is skipped if the bar is not seen within 2 seconds of the C- Track
calibration - Accept action execution. This will trigger a warning message after
the calibration, which must be controlled by an operator.

4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

1351
Manual calibration

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

Calibration volume

l Position the C-Track in an open space.

l Make sure that no targets other than the ones from the bar are visible.
Small or shiny metal can be detected as targets.

l Check the calibration date on the Calibration Certificate. It is

recommended to renew the calibration bar certification each year.

To perform the calibration

The calibration bar is made of plane reflectors (XY plane) and reflectors inclined at
45 ° (Z axis). Make sure the calibration bar targets are perpendicular to the C-Track
during the process.

1. Make sure to connect devices properly.

2. Turn on the C-Track controller. The LCD screen will display Analyzing and Warming
statuses.

1352
Wait for the system temperature to stabilize in its new environment (about 15- 30 minutes) before
proceeding to calibration. If the calibration is outdated, the Calibration too old status will be displayed.

3. Click in the system panel or Configure | C-Track | Calibrate C-Track to launch the
calibration.

4. To use the QR code to detect the calibration bar, select Use QR code to detect the
calibration bar option in Configure | C-Track | Configuration. Otherwise, click Add in the
C-Track pane of the system panel and browse to manually select the calibration bar file
(.sbcf).

5. Position the calibration bar to read the QR code.

l Hold the calibration bar vertically in front of the volume.

l Make sure the QR code is visible.

l The middle top LED of the C-Track will flash white.

6. Place the calibration bar in the displayed volume.

7. Follow the 4 acquisition sequences that cover the 3 measurement volume axes by
positioning and orienting the ends of the bar onto the red squares displayed in both
sections of the 3D viewer. Make sure the QR code sticker is facing the C-Track and change
the orientation of the bar as per the visual indications.

l Vertical (Y axis)

l Horizontal (X axis)

l Depth: 2 orientations (Z axis)

1353
When vertical and horizontal acquisition sequences are done, place the bar perpendicular to the sensor
with a 30° angle so that the Z axis side of the bar is facing the C-Track.

The red squares turn to green when the calibration bar is properly detected.

VXelements will:

l Calculate and update the sensor volumetric parameters, ensuring the system volumetric
accuracy is optimal.

l Indicate whether the calibration results succeed or fail.

8. Click OK to save the calibration.

1354
To reset to the factory settings

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

It is possible to restore the C-Track CST file to the factory settings.

1. Go to Configure | C-Track | Configuration

2. Select Use original calibration data.

This manipulation cannot be undone. It is useful when the C-Track calibration

process fails.

1355
1356
C-Track System Configuration

To configure the system

1. In the Configure | Options | C-Track (or click in the system panel).

2. Set the parameters.

The C-Track Configuration dialog box is available when a C-Track is activated.

To set parameters
C-Track volume
This function allows changing the working volume.

l 16.6 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m3: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

1357
Environment compensation
Modes

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT scale bar

For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Volume extension
This function allows configuring a scaling reference bar (C-Track calibration bar or MaxSHOT 3D scale
bar) with the VE function.
Scaling modes

l None

l C-Track calibration bar

l MaxSHOT 3D scale bars

It is also possible to add or remove a scale bar.

For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions

Select to allow measurements even if the conditions are not ideal if:

l the operating temperature has not been reached

l the analysis period is not completed

l the temperature varies more than 10°C from the temperature recorded at calibration time.

When selected:

l Enable C-Track functions

l C-Track status bar turns yellow to show this state

l Allows the use of the Static referencing mode

1358
This check box should not be selected unless the consequences it will have on
measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.

1359
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar

This does not apply to the CUBE-R solution.

The QR code sticker applied to the middle of the C- Track calibration bar contains all the relevant
information.

l Select the check box to allow the C-Track to detect the code and extract the information
needed (serial number and lengths).

This is a mandatory step in the calibration process. The reading will be impossible if
the QR code sticker is dirty or damaged.

l If the check box is cleared and the Calibration bar drop-down in the system panel does not
display the right serial number, click Add... and browse to choose the right bar's calibration bar
file (*.sbcf). Otherwise, select the *.sbcf manually right after launching the calibration process.

Play sound when volume extension is lost

This option is enabled by default.

The sound of the C-Track volume extension function is activated.

A beep is emitted when the C-Track cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
To disable this function, clear the check box.

Use original calibration data

See To reset to the factory settings.

Calibration expiration (days)

The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated. The default value is 5 days.

1360
C-Track Object Preparation
The adequate target positioning is an element to guarantee accuracy of the measurement.

To prepare the object

1. Place the positioning targets all around and or on the part to build a valid dynamic
referential (above, under, right, left, in front, behind). Make sure to place and fix targets on
a clean surface.

Do not align positioning targets, make sure to place them on the same rigid object
(avoid any movement).

2. Save the reference system to continue the inspection within the same reference frame.

To build a valid dynamic referential

1. Use enough positioning targets avoiding symmetry.

2. Distribute targets in the volume.

3. For volume extension, use good overlapping.

1361
Part setup examples
Small parts

Medium parts

Large parts

1362
Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated. See Tilt Compensation section.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

Volume extension

l Start to acquire data in the middle of the total volume of the part.

l Move to get a good overlapping of the part.

360° measurement
To perform a 360° inspection without a MaxSHOT Next, it is recommended to:

1. Put the targets on the part using enough swivel targets.

2. Move the C-Track.

3. Swivel the targets.

The base of the targets should not move and the targets should
remain in contact with their bases.

1363
4. Detect the targets on the other side of the part.

5. Remove the swivel targets and do not swivel them back.

The rotation axis of these targets is designed in their very middle. Rotating the
targets back and forth could cause unwanted uncertainty.

1364
R-Series Autocalibration Kit
The R-Series Autocalibration Kit allows the complete and automatic calibration of the C-Track. It enables
automated steps, requiring no human involvement. This limits accuracy drift over time and ensures
continuous operation (24/7).

Components

1. Tool changer

2. Calibration bar holder

3. Tool rack

4. Proximity sensors

5. Calibration bar

6. Pneumatic valve

1365
 7. Control box

Tool changer
This industrial pneumatic device allows adding or removing the C-Track calibration bar on or from the
robot.

Components

1. Tool plate

2. Master plate

Tool plate

1366
 The half of the tool changer on which the calibration bar holder and the C-Track calibration bar are
mounted.
Master plate

The half of the tool changer that is mounted on a robot.

The master plate:

l Contains the locking mechanism;

l Is equipped with pass through air ports to supply air to the end of arm tooling.

Master plate adapter

The master plate adapter is the link between the master plate and the robot scanner bracket.

Example of a master plate adapter mounted on a linear scanner bracket1

1A 0-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

1367
 Example of a master plate adapter mounted on an angular scanner bracket1

Calibration bar holder

The calibration bar holder is the link between the Tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar.

1A 90-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

1368
 The robot should be programmed to minimize misalignment/hard contact during
tool changer coupling and uncoupling on the tool rack.

Tool rack
The tool rack is a fixture that holds the C-Track calibration bar when not in use. It contains proximity
sensors.
For a MetraSCAN 3D-R custom integration, the tool rack can be designed by the integrator.

Proximity sensors
The proximity sensors detect the presence of an object and convert this information into an electrical
signal:

l Allow the user to get lock and unlock state (2 master plate proximity sensors).

l Detect if the calibration bar is in or out of the tool rack (tool rack proximity sensor).

1369
 1. Proximity sensors

The 2 proximity sensors have a LED that will turn on when the calibration bar is detected.

Master plate proximity sensor (lock downside and unlock upside)

Pneumatic valve
Proper operation of the locking mechanism requires a constant supply of clean, dry, non-lubricated air,
with the following conditions:

l Pressure range: 60-100 psi (4.1–6.9 Bar) (0.41–0.69 MPa).

l Filter minimum: 40 microns.

l Flow maximum: Negligible

Color Use

1 Brown +24V

1370
 3 Blue GND
4 Black Signal

The valve is a 2-position, spring-return, 5-way pneumatic valve.

When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is OFF, the valve is in state 12, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 2,
the tool changer is LOCKED.
When the UNLOCK signal (PL04) is ON, the valve is in state 14, air pressure from port 1 is fed to port 4,
the tool changer is UNLOCKED.

Internal Logic
Here is an equivalent ladder representation of the internal logic used for the output to the pneumatic
valve.

To switch output PL04 to ON, the tool must be in rack and the unlock signal from robot controller
should be ON.

Control box
The control box is used for the protection and safety of equipment only. It allows preventing unlock
command to release the C-Track calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.
Two major types of interlocks exist:

l Failure interlocks: Continuously active and normally used to initiate equipment shutdowns
and

1371
l Permissive interlocks: Evaluate conditions to allow the starting or the continuation of
actions.

1372
Operating principles
The master locking mechanism is pneumatically driven to couple and uncouple the tool on the tool
changer. The tool changer uses air ports to provide lock and unlock pressure to the locking mechanism.

Safe, reliable operation of the tool changer is dependent on a continuous supply of

compressed air at a pressure of 60 to 100 psi. It is the customer's responsibility to
halt the robot motion if the air supply pressure drops below 60 psi. (This
information is taken from an external source: http://www.ati-ia.com/index.aspx).

For proper tool pick-up, it is recommended to keep a minimum distance (1.5 mm) between the master
plate and the tool plate faces.
For proper tool drop-off, it is recommended to keep a minimum distance (1.5 mm) between the tool
plate and the tool rack proximity sensor.
1 ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC-5 through QC-27, Document #9610-20-
2254-09, 36.
C-Track calibration process

Coupling sequence
The coupling procedure should be following the tool changer manufacturer recommendation.

The locking mechanism must be in the unlock position when attempting to couple
the tool changer. Failure to adhere to this condition may result in damage to the
unit and/or the robot. (See the ATI manual for the QC-11 tool changer:
http://www.ati-ia.com/index.aspx).

X and Y Cocking Offset Twisting Offset

Z Offset
Offset (degrees) (degrees)21
<1.5mm ± 1 mm ±1.1° ±2°

12 Warning, illustration, and table: ATI Industrial Automation, Manual, Robotic Tool Changer, QC- 5
through QC-27, Document #9610-20-2254-09, 36.

1373
To pick up the C-Track calibration bar

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

2. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

3. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

4. Move master plate (which contains the locking mechanism) above the tool rack.

5. Align master plate and tool plate for coupling.

6. Insert the master plate slowly into the tool plate.

7. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to lock state.

8. Check locked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

9. Move robot tool changer up by 25 mm.

10. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

11. Move robot away from tool rack.

Calibration sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Set C-Track calibration I/O signal in the robot program to start state.

2. Move bar to first calibration position.

3. Send C-Track Calibration - Accept or C-Track Calibration - Skip actions.

4. Repeat these steps until calibration is over.

If a calibration position cannot be reached, skip command must be used, otherwise

calibration process will abort.

Uncoupling sequence
Operating the robot with C-Track calibration bar during calibration

1. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
absence.

1374
 2. Move robot tool changer above the tool rack.

3. Align tool plate with tool rack for uncoupling.

4. Move slowly the tool plate on the tool rack.

5. Set master plate I/O signal in the robot program to unlock state.

6. Check unlocked state I/O signal from master plate proximity sensor.

7. Move master plate up by 25 mm.

8. Check tool in rack state I/O signal from tool rack proximity sensor to detect tool plate
presence.

9. Move robot away from tool rack.

These procedures are displayed for general purposes. The CUBE-R calibration
programs are done accordingly.

To calibrate the system

See the C-Track Calibration section.

1375
R-Series Industrial Computer

This standalone rackmount computer (provided without a screen and keyboard) comes with
VXelements. It allows the user to store inspection session information.

The Industrial Computer can also run the R-Series I/O Module interface, but this
software has to be purchased separately.

Technical specifications

Components Type
Processor Intel® Core™ i7 6700 Processor 3.4 GHz
Operating System Windows 10 64 bit
Graphics Card NVIDIA® Quadro P1000
Memory 64 GB
Hard Drive 1 TB SSD

USB 3.0
Connecting ports
3X Gigabit Ethernet ports
Display Output 4x DisplayPort (mDP 1.4)

This computer is supplied by Creaform, who guarantees its compatibility with our products. All questions
and specification validation requests must be sent to Customer Support. No certification or compatibility
guarantee is given for computers provided by other suppliers than Creaform.

Software

All software maintenance for the Industrial Computer is performed by Creaform through an annual R-
Series Customer plan.

1376
Using CUBE-R
Workflow with R-Series I/O Module
Workflow with Metrolog X4 i-Robot

Workflow with R-Series I/O Module

1. Calibrate all systems

C-Track

MetraSCAN-R BLACK

2. Configure scanner

3. Set up the part

4. Perform automated photogrammetry

5. Create I/O Module configurations

6. Create robot program

7. Scan

8. Inspect data

Workflow with Metrolog X4 i-Robot

1. Calibrate all systems

l C-Track

l MetraSCAN-R BLACK

2. Configure scanner

3. Configure optical profiles (refer to the Metrolog X4 i-Robot manual)

4. Create robot program (refer to the Metrolog X4 i-Robot manual)

5. Scan

6. Inspect data (refer to the Metrolog X4 i-Robot manual)

1377
C-Track Calibration with R-Series I/O
Module
In the CUBE-R environment the C-Track can be calibrated using:

l R-Series I/O Module

l Metrolog X4 i-Robot

R-Series I/O Module

C-Track calibration trajectory program

The C-Track calibration trajectory is predefined for the CUBE-R.

The calibration trajectory requires that the R-Series Mounting Plate is removed
from the positioner before starting any compensation process. This is because
there will be a mechanical interference between the calibration bar1 for the C-
Track and the Mounting Plate.

The C-Track calibration trajectory is specifically programmed for the CUBE-R environment and should
never be changed.

All calibration programs come preloaded in the robot controller. They must be executed as
provided by Creaform.

From the robot’s Teach Pendant:

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1378
1. Select CALIB_CTRACK robot program.

The robot will start moving.

2. The robot will move to the R-Series Autocalibration Kit to pickup the calibration
artifact.

3. The robot will execute the calibration poses.

4. The robot will move to the R-Series Autocalibration Kit to place the calibration
artifact back in the tool rack.
5. The calibration result should remain constant over time.

1379
C-Track Calibration with Metrolog X4 i-
Robot
In the CUBE-R environment the C-Track can be calibrated using:

l R-Series I/O Module

l Metrolog X4 i-Robot

Metrolog X4 i-Robot

C-Track calibration trajectory program

The C-Track calibration trajectory is predefined for the CUBE-R.

The calibration trajectory requires that the R-Series Mounting Plate is removed
from the positioner before starting any compensation process. This is because
there will be a mechanical interference between the calibration bar1 for the C-
Track and the Mounting Plate.

The C-Track calibration trajectory is specifically programmed for the CUBE-R environment and should
never be changed.
All calibration programs are provided with the Post-Install package of Metrolog X4 i-Robot. They must
be executed as-provided by Metrologic and Creaform.

1. Start Metrolog X4 i-Robot.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1380
2. Load CUBE-R Workcell. It is located by default in the
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Metrologic Group\X4\Demo\Cube-R folder.

3. Go to Measuring Device | Compensation process.

4. Go to Program | Mode | Run or click Play from the program.

5. An Operator Instructions window will open.

6. Select first option: C-Track 2600.

1381
 The robot will start moving.

7. The robot will move to the R-Series Autocalibration Kit to pickup the calibration
artifact.
8. The robot will execute the calibration poses.
9. The robot will move to the R-Series Autocalibration Kit to place the calibration
artifact back in the tool rack.
10. The calibration result should remain constant over time.

1382
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration with R-
Series I/O Module
All calibration programs come preloaded in the robot controller. They must be executed as
provided by Creaform.
From the robot’s Teach Pendant:

1. Select CALIB_SCANNER robot program.

The robot will start moving.

2. The robot will prepare the CUBE-R for calibration.

l The pneumatic solution brings the calibration plate in position automatically.

l The manual solution rotates the rotary table in position for an operator to install
the calibration plate onto it.

3. The robot will execute the calibration poses.

4. The robot undoes the calibration setup.

l The pneumatic solution brings the calibration plate back to its storing position.

l The manual solution rotates the table back to its home position after the operator
has removed the calibration plate from it.

5. The calibration result should remain constant over time.

1383
MetraSCAN-R BLACK Calibration with
Metrolog X4 i-Robot
In the CUBE-R environment the MetraSCAN 3D-R can be calibrated using 2 pieces of software:

l R-Series I/O Module

l Metrolog X4 i-Robot

The R-Series Mounting Plate must be removed from the environment before
starting any compensation process.

Metrolog X4 i-Robot

1. Start Metrolog X4 i-Robot.

2. Load CUBE-R Workcell. It is located by default in the

C:\Users\Public\Documents\Metrologic Group\X4\Demo\Cube-R folder.

1384
3. Go to Measuring Device | Compensation process.

4. Go to Program | Mode | Run or click Play from the program.

5. An Operator Instructions window will open.

6. Select MetraSCAN Default 90° V2.

1385
 The calibration programs must be executed as-provided by Metrologic and
Creaform.

The robot will start moving.

7. The robot will place the MetraSCAN-R BLACK calibration artifact arm in the field of
view.

8. The robot will execute the calibration poses.

9. The robot will place the MetraSCAN-R BLACK calibration artifact arm back in its
rest position.
10. The calibration result will appear:

l If the value is below 0.110, the system is ready for use.

1386
Automated Photogrammetry

General operation

l The acquisition principle is based entirely on the C-Track stereo acquisition of the model.

l The C-Track acquires target positions on the fixture and part while the rotary table is turning
360 degrees. Target models will be optimized and sent directly to the API.

l The volumetric accuracy1 for the CUBE-R is 0.078 mm with the automated photogrammetry.

An acceptance test will be performed at the end of each CUBE-R installation.

l The MetraSCAN 3D-R does not have a volumetric accuracy specification.

It MUST be benchmarked for every installation on customer sites if requested.

l C-Link can be used with the automated photogrammetry.

Prerequisites, restrictions, and rules

The C-Track must be calibrated prior to launching the photogrammetry.
Target model must contain enough targets distributed in the 3D volume to guarantee a good
overlap between pictures during acquisition.

1The degree of agreement between the result of a measurement and a true value.

1387
 l At least 10 to 12 targets must remain visible at any time during the acquisition phase.

l No static target (not part of the target model) is allowed.

l Any static target moving by more than 0.5mm and/or having its normal moved by
more than 5 degrees during the acquisition will be considered in the referential.
Targets that are static (outside the referential model), will be ignored automatically.

l A 360-degree rotation is mandatory, no partial acquisition is allowed.

During acquisition
Only targets seen by both cameras at the same time will be considered in the new model.
Targets with visibility angle bigger than 30 degrees (multiple points of view combined) AND
total number of observations per target is bigger than 10 will be considered in the new model.
A minimum displacement of 90 mm and/or 2 degrees of a target must be observed to be
considered in the new model.
Maximum speed is set at 2 rpm for the CUBE-R (for parts of 3 meters or less), tangential speed
cannot exceed 314 mm/sec (for parts bigger than 3 meters).
Low temperature variation during data acquisition (less than 0.5°C, the acquisition will take
only 30 seconds)
No coded targets allowed
A bundle adjustment is performed at the end of the acquisition.
When a starting model is used (to reevaluate a model):

l Starting model must contain targets acquired previously on 360 degrees

l The photogrammetry function best fits the starting model with the targets detected at the
beginning of the acquisition.

l Any target measured outside of a radial distance of 5 mm from a nominal one will not
be used during the best fit process.

1388
 l At the end, a final best fit will be calculated. Any target measured outside of a radial distance of
5 mm from a nominal one will be considered a new target and will be added to the model.

l Nominal targets not seen during the acquisition will be deleted from the tracking
model and existing targets within the tolerance will have their positions updated to
correct for any deviation from the starting model.

l The original transformation (translation and rotation) calculated from the starting model will be
applied to the new model.

The image shows a part (2) installed on a positioner (3) which makes a 360-degree turn to allow target
acquisition by the robot (1).

1. FANUC M-20iA robot

2. CAD part

3. Positioner

1389
When to perform the automated photogrammetry

l When the fixture was removed and reinstalled on the rotary table.

l When an event may have distorted the target model or the fixture:

l Temperature variation

l Heavy part payload

l Collision while loading the part

To use the automated photogrammetry with I/O Module

For details, see the To use the automated photogrammetry function with I/O Module section.

1390
Using Robot

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

Basic robot manipulations

Robot programming for CUBE-R
FANUC BG logic
FANUC Check IO
Other FANUC Programs

1391
Basic Robot Manipulations
Industrial robots are mostly made with 6-motorized rotation axes:

l Axes are counted from the robot base.

l Axes allow to reach almost any position + orientation (called “pose” in robotics) inside working
range.

l For a given pose, there are several possible axis configurations, especially because some axes
can rotate more than 360°.

Axis Range of motion (example)

1 +/-170°

1392
 Axis Range of motion (example)
2 +160° to -100°
3 +273° to -185°
4 +/-200°
5 +/- 120°
6 +/- 270°
7* +/- 370°

* Axis 7 applies to the rotary table.

FANUC robots are controlled by a teach pendant.

Teach pendant (TP)

1393
1. On|Off Switch

2. SHIFT Key

3. RESET Key

4. COORD (coordinate) Key

5. Emergency Stop Button

6. Jog keys

7. Jog speed keys

You can find more information on the teach pendant keys in the CUBE-R operator
training script.

1394
Tasks that can be controlled on the robot with the TP

l Switch between auto and manual mode

l Emergency stop

l SHIFT to jog the robot in manual mode

l RESET to clear all alarms

l Choose the jogging method:

l Axis specific

l Joint

l Cartesian

l WORLD

l TOOL

l Set the robot override speed (in %)

Jog speed keys

The jog speed keys are used to set the override of the current set maximum robot speed.

1. Increase the speed override

2. Decrease the speed override

If the robot or the tool is very close to any part of the environment, set the override
speed to a low value to avoid collisions when jogging the robot to a safe location.

1395
World Coordinate System (Cartesian)

WORLD

The world coordinate system (WCS) is located at the intersection of axes 1 and 2.
By default, the WCS and the base frame (RCS in i-Robot) are identical.
The parameters seen in the TP are: X, Y, Z, W, P, R.
The parameters in i-Robot are: X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz.
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, hold down the COORD key on the TP until WORLD appears
on the screen.

Tool coordinate system

1396
 1. TCP with tool

2. TCP without tool

The tool coordinate system is located on the flange of the robot if no tool is activated.
By default, MetraSCAN 3D- R is activated as a tool. The TCP of the activated tool is accordingly
transformed by 6 parameters (x, y, z, w, p, r).
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, press the COORD key on the TP until TOOL appears on the
screen.

Coordinate System (Joint)

The joint coordinate system is not really a coordinate system.

In the joint movement configuration, the axes can be moved independently from each other.
The axes are A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 and A7.
To jog the robot in this coordinate system, press the COORD key on the TP until JOINT appears on the
screen.

More information on the WCS, TCS and Coordinate System (Joint) is available in
the CUBE-R operator training script.

1397
Jog keys

1. Jogging (A1–A6)

2. External axis (rotary table) – A7

3. Translation in cartesian jogging

4. Rotation in cartesian jogging

1398
The jog keys are used to move the robot and the rotary table while the system is in manual mode.
To jog the robot manually

1. Switch the teach pendant into manual mode.

2. Switch the robot controller in manual mode.

3. Press the enabling device on the back of the TP and keep it pressed.

4. Press SHIFT and RESET.

5. Press SHIFT together with the relevant JOG KEY.

1399
Robot Programming

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

Programming in FANUC with the TP

Digital Input (DI)/Digital Output (DO) Assignation

Programming in FANUC with the TP

l FANUC BG Logic

l FANUC Check IO

l Other FANUC Programs

Here is a standard robot program for teaching scanning trajectories. For details, see the How
to teach a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R section.

The speeds and robot movement types are only present to be used as an example.

Step Command Explanation

CALL SET_ANGULAR_SPEED(5, 50, Assigning registers to desired angular speeds (R[6] to
1
100,150,200) R[10]).
CALL SET_LINEAR_SPEED Assigning registers to desired linear speeds ( R[11] to
2
(20,50,200,350,400) R[15]).
CALL SET_JOINT_SPEED Assigning registers to desired joint speeds (R[16] to R
3
(10,15,20,40) [20]).
Assigning registers to desired time speeds (R[21] to R
4 CALL SET_TIME_SPEED(.3,.7,1,1.5,3)
[25]).
5 R[26]=100 Assigning register to desired acceleration.

1400
Step Command Explanation

Creating UTOOL for scanner.

l This TCP value will always be the same for the

CUBE-R.

l The Xs represent the TCP values which are

CALL CREATE_UTOOL
6 unique to the installation. They are
(2,1,XXX.X,X,XXX.XXX,XX,X,XX)
configured during commissioning.

For details, see TCP, payload

and inertia definitions.

7 UTOOL_NUM=1 Setting UTOOL for scanner.

Setting payload for scanner.

l This TCP value will always be the same for the

CUBE-R.
8 PAYLOAD[1]

For details, see TCP, payload

and inertia definitions.

CALL CREATE_UFRAME
9 Creating UFRAME for current task.
(2,1,0,0,0,0,0,0)
10 UFRAME_NUM=1 Setting UFRAME for current task.
Call a check IO program that will validate that the IO
11 CALL CHECK221102
are in the correct state for scanning.
J P[...] 5% CNT100 TB
12 Home position taught above the part.
30.00sec,POINT_LOGIC
13 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_ON Calling the TRIGGER_ON robot program.

Calling the TRIGGER_OFF robot program.

14 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_OFF This command sent to VXelements will pause the scan
and close the lasers.
Close to the first location on the part that is not
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
15 directly on the part. Not turning on the lasers directly
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
on the part will increase scan quality.

1401
 Step Command Explanation

Calling the TRIGGER_ON robot program.

16 IF R[1]=1,CALL TRIGGER_ON This command sent to VXelements will initiate the
scan.
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
17 Robot position for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
... All the required positions for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC
J P[...] 5.0sec CNT100 TB
18 Robot position for the scanning trajectory.
.50sec,POINT_LOGIC

Calling the STOPSCAN robot program.

19 IF R[1]=1,CALL STOPSCAN This command sent to VXelements will stop the scan,
close the lasers and initiate data processing.
J P[...] 20% CNT100 TB Same home position taught above the part that is
20
30.00sec,POINT_LOGIC taught in step 12.

Registers reserved for Creaform

Data registers (R)
# Description
R[1] I/O Module communication activation (R[1]=1) / deactivation (R[1]=0)
R[2] EtherNet/IP (R[2]=0) or IO Digital (R[2]=1)
R[3] Offset to toggle between EIP and IO digital (Actions)
R[4] Offset to toggle between EIP and IO digital (Configs)
R[5] Register used to store last group input from handshake
R[6-25] Registers used to facilitate speed definition in programs
R[26] Register used to define accelerations in programs
R[27] Iterator - FOR loops
R[28-33] Registers used to test different conditions in the CHECK_SIGNALS program
R[200] C-Link (only for the R&D AQC work cell)

Position registers (PR)

# Description
PR[1] Used everywhere to define UTOOLs and UFRAMEs

1402
 String registers (SR)
# Description
--- None at the moment

Flags (F)
# Description
F[1] Flag used to toggle between the PICKBAR and the PLACEBAR commands.
Flag used to temporarily deactivate the check between the Arm deployed and Arm
F[2]
stowed signals during the SWING_ARM process.
Flag used to temporarily deactivate the check between the Locked and Unlocked signal
F[3]
during the LOCK/UNLOCK process,

Digital input (DI)/Digital output (DO) assignation

For Creaform use only. Do not alter or delete.

DI Number DO Number Assignation

33 - Tool changer signal UNLOCKED.
34 - Tool changer signal LOCKED.
35 - Tool rack presence sensor TOOL IN RACK.
36 - Calibration arms position sensor ARM IS STOWED.
37 - Calibration arms position sensor ARM IS DEPLOYED.
38 - Air pressure signal PRESSURE OK.
39 - DOOR REQUEST.
- 33 Tool changer signal out, ACTION LOCK UNLOCK.
- 35 Signal out for PROGRAM RUNNING.

1403
FANUC BG Logic

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

FANUC background logic (BG) programs:

l Use ladder logic in program form;

l Are used instead of a PLC in the CUBE-R;

l Run continuously in the background to monitor the signals of the proxy sensors and floor
sensors.

1404
FANUC Check IO

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

The R-Series I/O Module configuration with Ethernet/IP is only available for robots
with Ethernet/IP, class 1 communications and requires 32 Dingital in (DI) and 32
Digital Out (DO) available in the configuration. This communication protocol can
make sure of Grouped Inputs/Outputs (GI, GO).

Robot Brand Controller Model Version

Firmware version V7.3+ with:

R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter
R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and
FANUC or
derivatives)
R860 - Advanced EIP (Ethernet/IP)
Adapter
CB3 V3.2.18654+
UR
E-Series Any version
Kuka KR C4 With Ethernet/IP option
ABB IRC5 With Ethernet/IP option
NX100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX100 With Ethernet/IP option
Yaskawa/Motoman FS100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX200 With Ethernet/IP option
YRC 1000 With Ethernet/IP option

Programs
User alarms

Programs
There are IO programs in the robot controller that are responsible for validating the safety logic of the
CUBE-R before the rest of the program can be executed. For example, if the proxy signal detects the
swing arm is near the rotary table, then the scanning trajectory will not start.
The following robot programs must be present in the robot controller:

1405
 l CHECK_SIGNALS

l CHECK010101

l CHECK011101

l CHECK101101

l CHECK221012

l CHECK221101

l CHECK221102

l CHECK221222

l CHECK221101

User alarms
It is possible to set the User Alarms in Warning, Pause or Abort.
However, no matter what the configuration is, it is possible to reset in the manual mode.
When the user alarm goes off the first time, reset the system and the alarm will not go off again.

I/O
I/O Status
Number
1 ! RACK SIGNAL ;
IF (THE BAR IS NOT IN THE TOOL RACK AND (THE TOOL CHANGER IS UNLOCKED OR THE
2
TOOL CHANGER IS NOT LOCKED)) THEN ;
3 UALM[1];
4 ENDIF ;
IF (THE BAR IS NOT IN THE TOOL RACK AND (THE CALIBRATION SWING ARM IS NOT
5
STOWED AWAY OR THE CALIBRATION SWING ARM IS UNFOLDED)) THEN ;
6 UALM[1];
7 ENDIF ;
8 !UNLOCK REQUEST SIGNAL ;
IF (THE BAR IS NOT IN THE TOOL RACK AND THE UNLOCK TOOL CHANGER COMMAND
9
HAS BE SENT) THEN ;

1406
 I/O
I/O Status
Number
10 UALM[2];
11 ENDIF ;
IF (THE UNLOCK TOOL CHANGER COMMAND HAS BEEN SENT AND THE TOOL CHANGER
AIR PRESSURE LEVEL IS NOT TOO LOW AND (LE THE TOOL CHANGER IS NOT UNLOCKED
12
OR THE TOOL CHANGER IS LOCKED) AND F[3]=OFF (SEE THIS CONDITION BELOW))
THEN ;
13 UALM[3] ;
14 ENDIF ;
15 !CALIBRATION ARMS SIGNALS ;
IF (THE CALIBRATION SWING ARM IS STOWED AWAY AND THE CALIBRATION SWING
16
ARM IS UNFOLDED) THEN ;
17 UALM[4] ;
18 ENDIF ;
IF (THE CALIBRATION SWING ARM IS NOT STOWED AWAY AND THE CALIBRATION
19
SWING ARM IS FOLDED AND F[2]=OFF (SEE THIS CONDITION BELOW)) THEN ;
20 UALM[5] ;
21 ENDIF ;
22 !PRESSURE SIGNAL ;
IF (THE BAR IS NOT IN THE TOOL RACK AND AND THE TOOL CHANGER AIR PRESSURE
23
LEVEL IS TOO LOW) THEN ;
24 UALM[6] ;
25 ENDIF ;
22 !IO MODULE PORT SELECTION ;
23 IF (R[2]<>0 AND R[2]<>2) (SEE THIS CONDITION BELOW) THEN ;
24 UALM[7] ;
25 ENDIF ;

USER ALARM NOTES:

UALM[1]: This alarm is triggered to prevent the bar from being mounted on the robot and:
1- to prevent the tool changer from locking (the bar could fall or loosen in the tool changer)
2- to prevent the calibration swing arm from unfolding (there could be a collision between the bar and
the calibration swing arm)

1407
UALM[2]: This alarm is triggered to avoid a programming or an handling error that would make the bar
fall (if mounted on the robot) when we unlock the tool changer. In practice, this cannot happen because
there is a relay that prevents the tool changer from being unlocked if the bar is not in the tool rack.
UALM[3]: This alarm goes off if the unlock tool changer command has been sent and that it is not
executed correctly. We only check this condition to see if there is enough air supply for the moment.
Also, Flag[3] is used to prevent the alarm going off during the transition between the locked and the
unlocked states because it is possible that both possible signals be on or off for a split second.
UALM[4]: This signal combination should never happen because the calibration swing arm cannot be
stowed away and unfolded at the same time. However if it happens a proximity sensor probably needs
to be fixed.
UALM[5]: This signal combination is only allowed when the robot is moving the calibration swing arm. It
is the reason why we use Flag 2 in the condition. Also, the calibration swing arm can never be stowed
away or folded at the same time. This situation could mean that the calibration swing arm is located
somewhere between the 2 positions, for example if the return mechanism does not work anymore, and
there could be a collision.
UALM[6]: The robot is stopped if the tool changer air pressure level is too low and if the bar is not in the
tool rack (i.e. it is mounted on the robot). This allows scanning or calibrating the scanner without air
pressure: it is only the C-Track calibration that will not be done.
UALM[7]: Creaform has slightly modified the CUBE-R robot programs so that they can apply to non-
CUBE-R and MetraSCAN 750 applications that use I/O Module Hardware. Registry 2 is used to toggle
between EtherNet/IP (EIP) and I/O Module Hardware. If the registry number is not 0 (for EIP) or 2 (for
I/O Module Hardware), the alarm goes off.

The R-Series I/O Module configuration with Ethernet/IP is only available for robots
with Ethernet/IP, class 1 communications and requires 32 Dingital in (DI) and 32
Digital Out (DO) available in the configuration. This communication protocol can
make sure of Grouped Inputs/Outputs (GI, GO).

Robot Brand Controller Model Version

Firmware version V7.3+ with:

R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter
R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and
FANUC or
derivatives)
R860 - Advanced EIP (Ethernet/IP)
Adapter
CB3 V3.2.18654+
UR
E-Series Any version
Kuka KR C4 With Ethernet/IP option

1408
 ABB IRC5 With Ethernet/IP option
NX100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX100 With Ethernet/IP option
Yaskawa/Motoman FS100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX200 With Ethernet/IP option
YRC 1000 With Ethernet/IP option

1409
Other FANUC Programs

This does not apply to the MetraSCAN 3D-R solution.

These programs can vary depending on the installation.

The R-Series I/O Module configuration with Ethernet/IP is only available for robots
with Ethernet/IP, class 1 communications and requires 32 Dingital in (DI) and 32
Digital Out (DO) available in the configuration. This communication protocol can
make sure of Grouped Inputs/Outputs (GI, GO).

Robot Brand Controller Model Version

Firmware version V7.3+ with:

R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter
R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and
FANUC or
derivatives)
R860 - Advanced EIP (Ethernet/IP)
Adapter
CB3 V3.2.18654+
UR
E-Series Any version
Kuka KR C4 With Ethernet/IP option
ABB IRC5 With Ethernet/IP option
NX100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX100 With Ethernet/IP option
Yaskawa/Motoman FS100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX200 With Ethernet/IP option
YRC 1000 With Ethernet/IP option

SAFETY CHECK program

MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration trajectory program
Teach pendant programs in CUBE-R
Handshake

How to teach a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R

How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot

1410
SAFETY CHECK program
There is a safety check program called SAFETY_ CHECK. This program runs continuously in the
background. This program polls the different signals related to the proximity switches in the CUBE-R.
When 2 signals trigger a conflict, a user alarm is triggered, and the robot is stopped.

MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration trajectory program

The SWING_ ARM and SWITCH_ TOOL programs installed on the controller were modified during
commissioning to function only on the CUBE- R they are on. The different calibration programs or
workflows will call each of them in turn to make sure the robot picks up the calibration bar and moves
the calibration plate safely.

Teach pendant programs in CUBE-R

For Creaform use only. Do not alter or delete.

The programs highlighted in bold will be useful for a programmer.

ACCEPTCTRACK Accepts the position of the calibration bar for C-Track calibration.
Accepts the scanner position over the calibration plate during
ACCEPTSCANNER
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration.
Sends the Auto detect targets action to the VXelements plug-in
AUTODETECTARGETS
window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
CALIB_CTRACK C-Track calibration program.
CALIB_FAILED Called to inform the operator if the calibration fails.
CALIB_SCANNER MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration program.
CHECK_IO Verifies then sets registers and group I/O values.
Used to validate digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors. A
CHECK_SIGNAL
STOP is called depending on the program and signal states.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors that the tool is locked on the
CHECK010101
robot tool changer.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool signal mismatch;
CHECK011101
tool on rack and tool changer lock.

1411
 Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if the robot can bring
CHECK101101
the tool on the tool rack.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if there is no tool on
CHECK221012
the MetraSCAN 3D-R bracket then deploys the arm.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if the tool is on the
CHECK221101
rack, arm is stowed, and air pressure is adequate.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool is on the rack,
CHECK221102
arm is stowed and not deploy.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if tool is on the tool
CHECK221222
rack.
Signals check from CUBE-R sensors to verify if arm is stowed and air
CHECK222101
pressure is adequate.
Sends the check system ready to the VXelements plug-in window
CHECKSYSTEMREADYS
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
CREATE_UFRAME Creates a uframe (#PR, #UFRAME, X, Y, Z, W, P, R).
CREATE_UTOOL Create a utool frame (#PR, #UTOOL, X, Y, Z, W, P, R).
Sends the Export targets action to the VXelements plug-in window
EXPORTTARGETS
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to get the calibration results to the VXelements
GET_CALIB_RESULT
plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Handshake program for communication between robot and I/O
HANDSHAKE
Module.
IMPORT_TARGET_AND_ Sends the Import targets and align action to the VXelements plug-in
ALIGN window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Loads the I/O Module configuration setting with the associated
LOADCONFIG(1 to 20)
number.
Sends the Load VXelements session action to the VXelements plug-
LOADSESSION
in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
LOCK_TOOL Called to lock the calibration bar on the tool changer.
MAIN_PROG Basis of a scan program without trajectories.
Sends a message to the operator that the scale bar is not in the rack
MISSING_TOOL and stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals
from CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends the action to activate the multiline laser mode (Laser Mode –
MULTILINE Multi Line) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Sends the New Scan action used in parallelization scanning to the
NEWSCAN
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to start a new session (New Session) to the
NEWSESSION
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.

1412
 Sends the action of optimize the target positioning model (Optimize
OPTIMIZEPOSMODEL Positioning Model) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-
SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to optimize the scan surface mesh (Optimize
OPTIMIZESURFACE Surface) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
PHOTO_FAILED Called to inform the operator if the photogrammetry fails.
PHOTOGRAMMETRY Executes the photogrammetry of the target model.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PICKARM
SWING_ARM program to deploy the calibration plate support arm.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PICKTOOL SWITCH_TOOL program to make the robot pick the calibration bar
with tool the changer.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PLACEARM SWING_ARM program to make the robot pick the calibration bar
with tool the changer.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and calls the
PLACETOOL SWITCH_TOOL program to make the robot place the calibration bar
on his rack.
Sends the Reset scan action to the VXelements plug-in window
RESETSCAN
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Verifies conditions related to DI 33 through 38. If conflicting signals
SAFETY_CHECK
occur, a user alarm is triggered.
Sends the Save scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
SAVESCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the Save VXelements session action to save the session to the
SAVESESSION
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
SCAN_PROG_TEMPLATE Template for a standard scan program without trajectory.
SET_ANGULAR_SPEED Sets the registers 6 to 10 to assign the robot angular speed.
SET_LINEAR_SPEED Sets the registers 11 to 15 to assign the robot linear speed.
SET_TIME_SPEED Sets the registers 21 to 25 to assign the robot time speed.
SHIP_POS Moves the robot in shipping position.
Sends the action to open the scan window (Show Scan Window) to
SHOWSCANWINDOW
the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to activate the single line laser mode (Laser Mode –
SINGLELINE Single Line) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Called to skip the C-Track calibration position in a calibration
SKIPTRACK
program.
Skips the scanner position over the calibration plate during
SKIPSCANNER
MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration.

1413
 Sends the action to start the C-Track calibration (C-Track Calibration
STARTCALIBRATIONCTRACK – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O
Module.
Sends the action to start the MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration (3D
STARTCALIBRATIONSCANNER Scanner Calibration – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window
using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the action to start the photogrammetry (C-Track
STARTPHOTO Photogrammetry – Start) to the VXelements plug-in window using
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends the Start scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
STARTSCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Sends a message to the operator that the arm is deployed and stops
STOP_ARM_IS_DEPLOYED further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R
sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the arm is stowed and stops
STOP_ARM_IS_STOWED further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R
sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator and stops further actions. This
STOP_EXECUTION occurs if digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors do not
match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that there is a locked signal and
STOP_LOCKED stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the air pressure is low and
STOP_LOW_AIR_PRESSURE stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the tool is in the tool rack and
STOP_TOOL_IN_RACK stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals from
CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that there is an unlocked signal
STOP_UNLOCKED and stops further actions. This occurs if digital input (DI) signals
from CUBE-R sensors do not match with expected states.
Sends a message to the operator that the photogrammetry has
STOPPHOTO
failed. Then the program is aborted.
Sends the Stop scan action to the VXelements plug-in window using
STOPSCAN
R-SeriesI/O Module.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors and deploys
SWING_ARM
or stows the calibration plate support arm.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors then picks
SWITCH_TOOL or places the calibration bar on the tool rack. The pick or place
depends on the digital input signals of the CUBE-R sensors.
Sends the action to turn off the lasers (Trigger OFF) to the
TRIGGEROFF
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.

1414
 Sends the action to turn on the lasers (Trigger ON) to the
TRIGGERON
VXelements plug-in window using R-SeriesI/O Module.
Validates digital input (DI) signals from CUBE-R sensors then sends
UNLOCK_TOOL the unlock tool signal to release the C-Track calibration bar from the
tool changer.

Handshake
The handshake program is used for communicating with VXelements. All commands sent to VXelements
use Handshake as a subprogram. Each command is comprised of the group, the action that is sent and
the event that is returned. A user will not interact directly with the Handshake program when
programming a scanning trajectory but will use other programs which sole purpose is to call the
handshake program with specific parameters.
The robot programs require a handshake strategy for the scanning process to function correctly. The
main goal behind a handshake is to ensure the commands related to the Creaform system are well
executed before moving on to the next action. For example, executing a scan properly requires the
completion of the Start scan command before the robot begins its movements for the scan trajectory.
Overview of action and event exchanges between the robot controller and Creaform’s
R-Series I/O Module

A good handshake consists of 3 main components:

1415
 l Verification: the states are returned to neutral (or 0). If the values were not returned to idle, the
same command could be sent a second time, which could cause problems with the data
acquisition.

l Validation: the event received from the system is the event associated with the action sent. This
validates the interaction with the Creaform system.

l Robot action: a robot action is performed based on the event sent to the robot. For example,
after the robot sends the Start scan action, the Scan started event will be received from I/O
Module, allowing the robot to start the scan trajectory.

Error management is also something that can be incorporated into the handshake. For example, if the
connection is cut between the robot and the system, the robot can have programmed way points to
ease an automatic return to the home position.
Pseudo-Code example of Handshake
Step Description

I/O MODULE PORT SELECTION

l IO Port values are selected

1
l This section validates that the correct ports are configured and selected

l Robot alarm is activated if ports are incorrect

ENSURE INPUTS/OUTPUTS ARE OFF

l All input and output values are at 0

2
l Robot alarm is activated if ports values are not 0

l Robot alarm is activated if ports are incorrect

3 SET TIMEOUTS VALUES

1416
 Step Description

CREATE ROBOT PROGRAM THAT MANAGES VXELEMENTS STATUS

l Auto-detect fail

l Scanner calibration or C-Track calibration fail

4 l Photogrammetry fail

l System ready

l System busy

l Etc.

CREATE ROBOT ACTIONS BASED ON VXELEMENTS STATUS (to recover from error)

5 l Way point during scan trajectory

l Finish calibration faster without calibration commands

6 SET ROBOT OUTPUT BYTE TO 0

How to teach a FANUC scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R

To teach a scanning trajectory, many components have to be set up.

It is also assumed that the programmer will always maintain safe operations.

Steps and procedures that must be executed once:

l the setup of the CUBE-R is completed;

l the size of the part is validated inside the cell; and

l the software is installed and running.

1. Determine the resolution and shutter of the system. See the MetraSCAN 750-R|Elite
System Configuration section.

2. Once the system is setup, it is recommended to find an appropriate home position and
teach it.

3. Start a VXelements session and start a scanning session.

1417
During the trajectory programming, the operator should look at the VXelements window to make sure
the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at an appropriate position in relation to the part and the C-Track. Also, this
method will provide the programmer with continuous feedback to validate that each section of the part
is scanned and the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at the correct distance in relation to the part.
During the teaching of the trajectory, the good scanning techniques must be maintained. Also, the
programmer should be careful to scan each section of the part only once while maintaining the correct
scanning technique and minimize the time the MetraSCAN 3D- R is spent in the air not scanning.
Observing these principles will help reduce cycle time.

Depending on the resolution that is chosen, the robot speed should be adjusted
accordingly.

It is also recommended to test the scanning trajectory in automatic mode at full

scanning speeds at the different times during the teaching process. Robot behavior
may vary from manual to automatic mode. This test will also be useful in validating
that the shutter and resolution settings are correct.

Refer to the CUBE-R programmer training script for more information.

How to teach a scanning trajectory in the CUBE-R with i-Robot

To teach a scanning trajectory, many components have to be set up.

It is also assumed that the programmer will always maintain safe operations.

Steps and procedures must be executed once:

l the CUBE-Rsetup is completed;

l the size of the part is validated inside the cell; and

l the software is installed and running.

l the CAD of the part and of the CUBE-R are loaded in i-Robot.

During the trajectory programming, the operator should look at the VXelements window to make sure
the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at an appropriate position in relation to the part and the C-Track. Also, this

1418
method will provide the programmer with continuous feedback to validate that each section of the part
is scanned and the MetraSCAN 3D-R is at the correct distance in relation to the part.
During the teaching of the trajectory, the good scanning techniques must be maintained. Also, the
programmer should be careful to scan each section of the part only once while maintaining the correct
scanning technique and minimize the time the MetraSCAN 3D- R is spent in the air not scanning.
Observing these principles will help reduce cycle time.

Refer to the CUBE-R programmer training script to know how to create the basic
scanning program in i-Robot.

1419
Software

Options may vary according to the solution purchased.

Depending on the R-Series product purchased, several software solutions may be required:

l R-Series I/O Module interface

l VXelements

l VXscan-R module (For details, see the VXscan-R section)

These software solutions are compatible with i-Robot and PolyWorks and are available on the Customer
Portal (Go to http://support.creaform3d.com/en/default.aspx)..

System requirements for R-Series

VXelements
VXelements combines the essential tools needed for the data acquisition process into an all-in-one
user-friendly environment.

R-Series I/O Module

It is also possible to communicate with the robot controller through the R-Series I/O Module interface.
To install the R-Series I/O Module interface

1420
R-Series I/O Module Overview
R-Series I/O Module is an input / output communication interface allowing communication between
VXelements and robot controllers.

Mode of operation
I/O Module uses an integer-based messaging system. Communication is handled in a Request-Reply
fashion. The robot controller requests an action to be executed by the I/O Module and a reply will be
generated to that request.
This is done through 2 communication channels:

l Actions and events

l Parameter and reply

A total of 4 values are exchanged between the robot controller and I/O Module:

l An Action message sent from the controller

l An Event message sent to the controller

l A parameter sent from the controller

l A reply sent to the controller

Typical communication on one channel

1421
Possible values are limited to a specific range of positive integers due to the maximum number of binary
digits (bits) associated with the message, composed of 8 or 16 bits for Ethernet/IP communication and 8
bits for I/O Module Hardware communication.
Translation between bits value and decimal representation is done using pure binary to decimal
unsigned conversion (without 2-complement)

Communication interfaces
Communication from the host computer is handled using a dedicated network. The computer must have
adequate number of Ethernet adapters (ex.: 1 for C- Track communication, 1 for I/O Module
communication and optionally 1 for the local area network).

Connection options available:

EtherNet/IP

The R-Series I/O Module configuration with Ethernet/IP is only available for robots
with Ethernet/IP, class 1 communications and requires 32 Dingital in (DI) and 32
Digital Out (DO) available in the configuration. This communication protocol can
make sure of Grouped Inputs/Outputs (GI, GO).

Robot Brand Controller Model Version

1422
 Firmware version V7.3+ with:
R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter
R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and
FANUC or
derivatives)
R860 - Advanced EIP (Ethernet/IP)
Adapter
CB3 V3.2.18654+
UR
E-Series Any version
Kuka KR C4 With Ethernet/IP option
ABB IRC5 With Ethernet/IP option
NX100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX100 With Ethernet/IP option
Yaskawa/Motoman FS100 With Ethernet/IP option
DX200 With Ethernet/IP option
YRC 1000 With Ethernet/IP option

1. EtherNet/IP: Communication protocol allowing communication between VXelements

plug-in window and robot controllers through an EtherNet/IP connection. EtherNet/IP
communication can only be used with supported robot controllers. Message length can be
8 or 16 bits, allowing to support 255 or 65535 different configurations respectively.

1423
EtherNet/IP compatibility
EtherNet/IP is available for FANUC industrial robot controllers in adapter mode.
Compatibility with following FANUC controller models has been validated:

R-30i family (R-30iA, iB and

Firmware version 7.4+
derivatives)
Must be validated on a case-per-case basis. Contact your Creaform
R-J3iB
representative for details
R-J2, R-J3 Not supported

In all cases, FANUC option packages R784 Ethernet/IP Adapter or R860 Advanced EIP (EtherNet/IP)
Adapter Package is mandatory.

Technical requirements
The I/O Module has these system requirements and has standard requirements for installation and
use.

1424
Refer to the proper installation procedure for the specific device. The installation
procedure described in this manual is for the FANUC robots (R-30i family
controller).

1425
Getting Started with the I/O Module
interface
This section provides a general overview of the information required to use I/O Module interface.
R-Series I/O Module overview
System requirements
Software installation
Product Manager
Creaform Online Services
Software and license updates

1426
 R-Series I/O Module Interface Installation

R-Series I/O Module interface is only available in English.

Computers supplied by Creaform come with a preinstalled R-Series I/O Module

interface. To install it to another computer, see the System Requirements
section and the instructions provided later in this page.

To make sure you install the latest version, use the Online Services.

File download online

Products and up-to-date software files can be retrieved on the Customer Portal. Request access by
clicking New user and then filling out the form.

1. Log into the Customer Portal.

2. Click My Products tab.

3. Selected the desired software version from the down-down menu. The latest version is
selected by default.

4. Click the Download icon under Software for one of the products and then save the
installer.

5. Launch the installer and follow the instructions.

l Make sure to download and install the complete package of VXelements and R-
Series I/O Module software.

l The solution installer for the R-Series I/O Module can be retrieved from its entry in
the Product page.

l VXelements installers can be retrieved from the scanner or tracker entry.

l Note that VXelements build number should be equal or higher than the R-Series I/O
Module build number to ensure software compatibility.

1427
R-Series I/O Module software installation

1. Download the software installation file.

2. Double-click the *.exe file.

3. Click Next and select Destination Directory, if needed.

4. Click Next and Install to finalize the software installation.

R-Series I/O Module software uninstallation

To uninstall the software, use the Programs and Features option in the Windows Control panel.

1. In the Start Menu, click Control Panel.

2. Go to Programs and Features.

3. Select the software from the list and click Uninstall.

4. Follow the instructions to complete the process.

R-Series I/O Module software run

l Run R-Series I/O Module from the shortcut on the desktop or from the Windows Start menu.

Typical workflow using R-Series I/O Module software

1. Configure R-Series I/O Module connection parameters.

2. Configure Application parameters.

3. Configure Inspection software client.

4. Configure session settings.

1428
EtherNet/IP Configuration for FANUC
Communication between the host computer and the robot controller is done through the EtherNet/IP™
protocol using an Ethernet cable connecting the two or through a network switch.
Message length is configured to 16 bits long messages, allowing to support 65 535 different
configurations respectively.
Port 2 (CD38B) is optimized for Ethernet I/O protocols such as EtherNet/IP. The preferred setup is to
connect port 1 (CD38A) to your local network to access the robot and to connect port 2 (CD38B) to an
isolated network for use by EtherNet/IP. Use of an Ethernet switch is possible.

8-bit configuration (not recommended)

16-bit configuration

Controller IP configuration
EtherNet/IP adapter configuration
Group I/O configuration
Digital I/O configuration
Controller power cycle
EtherNet/IP configuration
Computer IP configuration
I/O Module connection configuration
Verification

Controller IP configuration
Retrieve the IP address of the port used for the connection:

1. Press MENU.

2. Select SETUP.

3. Select Host Comm from the second page.

1429
4. Select TCP/IP.

5. Press [F3], DETAIL.

6. Toggle to the correct port (port #1 or port #2) by pressing [F3], PORT.

7. Note the address in the second field. This address will be used to configure the computer's
IP address.

1430
EtherNet/IP adapter configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

4. Move the cursor to select an available connection.

l Make sure TYP is set to ADP.

l Make sure the Status is OFFLINE.

1431
5. Press F4, CONFIG.

The example uses Connection 1, but any available connection can be selected.

6. Type the value and press Enter. Set the following:

l Input size (words):

l 4

l Output size (words):

l 2

1432
Group I/O configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Select 5 Group.

4. Select a group not currently in use:

l GO/GI [x] for actions and events

l GO/GI [y] for session configuration

1433
 5. Move the cursor to the I/O signal to configure.

6. To setup input and output, press [F3], IN/OUT to toggle between both

7. To add a comment Press [F4], DETAIL.

8. Press Enter to open Alpha input menu..

9. Press the appropriate function keys to type the comment.

10. Press Enter to exit Alpha input menu.

11. Press PREV to return to the I/O Analog In/Out Monitor screen.

12. Set Outputs & Inputs: (Press [F3], IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.)

(16-bit)

l GI[x]

l RACK: 89 (EtherNet/IP Rack) move the cursor to RACK, type the value, and press Enter.
Follow these steps for each group.

l SLOT: Same as selected previously - move the cursor to SLOT, type the value, and press
Enter. Follow these steps for each group.

l START PT: 1 - move the cursor to START PT, type the value, and press Enter. The
starting point can be any number up to and including 32766. Follow these steps for
each group.

l NUM PTS: 16 - move the cursor to NUM PTS, type the value, and press Enter. Follow
these steps for each group.

1434
 l GI[y]

l RACK: 89 (EtherNet/IP Rack)

l SLOT: Same as selected previously

l START PTS: 17

l NUM PTS: 16

Digital I/O configuration

1435
 1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press [F1], [TYPE].

4. Select 3 Digital.

5. Press [F2], CONFIG.

GI/GO setup

6. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

7. Configure IN:

1436
(16-bit)

l Range:

l [x to x+31]

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 1

8. Press [F3] IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

9. Configure OUT:

(16-bit)

l Range:

l [x to x+31]

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 1

1437
Status bits setup

10. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

11. Configure IN:

l Range:

l [x to x+31]

l Ex: [49 to (49+31)] because 33-48 is already in use in, for example, a
CUBE-R.

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 33

1438
 12. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

l No OUT to configure for status bits.

Status bits currently used (in order)

l Heartbeat

l Tracker ready

l Scanner ready

l System busy

l System faulty

l System ready

l Calibration required

l Inspection result available

l Error in cycle

l EC Started

l EC Waiting

l EC Visible

1439
Controller power cycle

1. Press FCTN.

2. Select NEXT.

3. Select CYCLE POWER.

4. Select YES, and press Enter.

1440
EtherNet/IP configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

4. Move the cursor to the connection used in the configuration.

5. Move cursor to the Enable column.

1441
 6. Press [F4], TRUE to activate the connection.

7. The value in the Enable column must switch to TRUE for the connection.

Computer IP configuration

1. Select Start, then select Settings | Network & Internet.

2. Choose Ethernet adapter used for robot communication.

3. Double-click the icon or right-click and select Properties.

4. Under the Networking tab, select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).

1442
 5. Under the General tab, select Use the following IP address.

6. Enter the same IP address than the one on the robot controller, except for the last number.

7. Enter 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.

I/O Module connection configuration

1. In Tools | Options | IO Connection Parameters, select:

l Robot IP address: Type the value noted from the robot controller earlier (from the
SETUP Host Comm menu).

1443
 l Lan IP address: Select the value set in Windows.

l EtherNet/IP parameters: Set the parameters.

2. Close the Options menu.

l IO device should be connected to the robot controller (IO device status should
switch to green).

Verification

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

1444
l Connection selected previously should have RUNNING status.

1445
8-bit Configuration

Controller IP configuration
EtherNet/IP adapter configuration
Group I/O configuration
Digital I/O configuration
Controller power cycle
EtherNet/IP configuration
Computer IP configuration
I/O Module connection configuration
Verification

Controller IP configuration
Retrieve the IP address of the port used for the connection:

1. Press MENU.

2. Select SETUP.

3. Select Host Comm from the second page.

4. Select TCP/IP.

5. Press [F3], DETAIL.

1446
 6. Toggle to the correct port (port #1 or port #2) by pressing [F3], PORT.

7. Note the address in the second field. This address will be used to configure the computer's
IP address.

EtherNet/IP adapter configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

1447
4. Move the cursor to select an available connection.

l Make sure TYP is set to ADP.

l Make sure the Status is OFFLINE.

5. Press F4, CONFIG.

The example uses Connection 1, but any available connection can be selected.

1448
 6. Type the value and press Enter. Set the following:

l Input size (words):

l 1

l Output size (words):

l 1

Group I/O configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Select 5 Group.

1449
 4. Select a group not currently in use:

l GO/GI [x] for actions and events

l GO/GI [y] for session configuration

5. Move the cursor to the I/O signal to configure.

6. To setup input and output, press [F3], IN/OUT to toggle between both.

7. To add a comment Press [F4], DETAIL.

8. Press Enter to open Alpha input menu.

9. Press the appropriate function keys to type the comment.

10. Press Enter to exit Alpha input menu.

11. Press PREV to return to the I/O Analog In/Out Monitor screen.

12. Set Inputs & Outputs: Press [F3], IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

1450
8-bit

l GO[x]

l RACK: 89 (EtherNet/IP Rack) - move the cursor to RACK, type the value, and press Enter.
Follow these steps for each group.

l SLOT: Same as selected previously - move the cursor to SLOT, type the value, and press
Enter. Follow these steps for each group.

l START PT: 1 - move the cursor to START PT, type the value, and press Enter. The starting
point can be any number up to and including 32766. Follow these steps for each group.

l NUM PTS: 8 - move the cursor to NUM PTS, type the value, and press Enter. Follow
these steps for each group.

l GO[y]

l RACK: 89 (EtherNet/IP Rack)

l SLOT: Same as selected previously

l START PT: 9

l NUM PTS: 8

1451
Digital I/O configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press [F1], [TYPE].

4. Select 3 Digital.

5. Press [F2], CONFIG.

1452
GI/GO setup

6. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

7. Configure IN:

8 bit

l Range:

l [x to x+15]

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 1

1453
8 bit

l Range:

l [x to x+15]

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 1

Status bits setup

1454
 8. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

9. Configure IN:

l Range:

l [x to x+31]

l Ex: [49 to (49+31)] because 33-48 is already in use in, for example, the
CUBE-R

l Rack: 89 (EIP Rack)

l Slot: Same as selected previously

l Start: 33

10. Press [F3], IN/OUT then IN/OUT to toggle between Input and Output.

l No OUT to configure for status bits.

Status bits currently used (in order)

l Heartbeat

l Tracker ready

l Scanner ready

1455
 l System busy

l System faulty

l System ready

l Calibration required

l Inspection result available

l Error in cycle

l EC Started

l EC Waiting

l EC Visible

Controller power cycle

1. Press FCTN.

2. Select NEXT.

3. Select CYCLE POWER.

1456
 4. Select YES, and press Enter.

EtherNet/IP configuration

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

1457
 4. Move the cursor to the connection used in the configuration.

5. Move cursor to the Enable column.

6. Press [F4], TRUE to activate the connection.

7. The value in the Enable column must switch to TRUE for the connection.

Computer IP configuration

1458
1. Select Start, then select Settings | Network & Internet.

2. Choose Ethernet adapter used for robot communication.

3. Double-click the icon or right-click and select Properties.

4. Under the Networking tab, select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).

5. Under the General tab, select Use the following IP address.

6. Enter the same IP address than the one on the robot controller, except for the last number.

7. Enter 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.

1459
I/O Module connection configuration

1. In Tools | Options | IO Connection Parameters, select:

l Robot IP address: Type the value noted from the robot controller earlier (from the
SETUP Host Comm menu).

l Lan IP address: Select the value set in Windows.

1460
 2. Close the Options menu.

l IO device should be connected to the robot controller (IO device status should
switch to green).

Verification

1. Press MENU.

2. Select I/O.

3. Press F1, [TYPE], and select EtherNet/IP.

1461
l Connection selected previously should have RUNNING status.

1462
I/O Module Interface
Standard interface
Operation user interface

This application is optimized for a resolution of 1920 X 1080 with text resolution of
100%. To see the menus properly, update the Windows display settings.

VXelements plug-in window

VXelements plug-in window opens at the same time as the R-Series I/O Module
interface. It displays information on the controller, the reference and the stylus
statuses. It also contains a list of the probes and the probing parameters.

1463
Standard interface
This interface is displayed when the Use operation UI option is not selected in the View menu:

1464
Menu bar

Menu Action

Closes VXelements plug-in window, R-Series I/O Module

interface and the Inspection software client for
PolyWorks|Inspector.
File | Exit
Wait until everything is closed properly. It
may take several seconds.

View | Show scan Displays the scan window.

window
View | Use operation UI Shows multiple information about the scanning process.
Tools | IO tester See IO tester section.
Tools | IO action/event See IO Actions/Events Assignation section.
assignation
Tools | Session settings See Session Settings Configuration section.
configuration
Tools | Options See Options section.
Tools | Configurations See Configurations section.
Tools | User settings See User settings section.
Help | About... Displays the application version.

Current session settings

Current session settings represent all the parameters for the actual measurement session (target files,
scanning parameter files, output files and inspection program to be run).
To get a description of these settings and to select them, go to the Session Settings Configuration
section.

1465
Status
This section displays the current connection status for the different devices of the system:

Device Description
C-Track Device has been detected and is ready to use.
3D scanner Device has been detected and is ready to use.
IO device Device has been detected and is ready to use.

All actions require all device statuses to be Ready.

Command window
This section displays various useful information about device statuses and actions and events:

1466
Robot programming commands

Three commands are required for robot programming:

1. Start scan: This command allows the MetraSCAN 3D-R to start scanning.

2. Trigger ON: Activates the laser.

3. Stop scan: Stop the scanning process, closes the laser, and begins data processing.

The robot program structure is displayed in the R-Series Operation user interface.

Operation user interface

This interface is displayed when the Use operation UI option is selected in the View menu:

1467
 Function Action
1- Cycle settings Displays the parameters loaded for the scan.
2- Scan list Displays the scan number or ID and the inspection result.

Displays the percentage of successful inspections.

3- Inspection passed ( )
Manually pauses the scanning process. Scanning will resume
4- Pause scan ( ) ( ) if is pressed again.
5- Messages Displays various messages about equipment status and
actions and events.

1468
IO Tester
The simulator is accessible through Tools | IO tester. It can be used to reproduce robot output signals
to test scanner actions / events and session settings management.

See the IO Actions/Events Assignation section to know which byte is associated

with a specific action.

To simulate an action or configuration sent by the robot, enter a value that is

integer-based and within the specified range [0-65535] for extended memory
mode (default) in the text box of the relevant section. Hit Enter or click Send to
simulate the action.

1469
IO Action / Event Assignation
This section allows assigning byte numbers to specific actions and events with the I/O Module. To
access it, go to Tools | IO actions/events assignation.

Not all actions are compatible with all product configurations. It is the user's
responsibility to ensure appropriate actions are called at appropriate moments.

Actions and events

Assignation
R-Series I/O Module Action/Event channel
Actions table
R-Series I/O Module status channel
Auto detect targets action
To use the automated photogrammetry function with I/O Module

Actions and events

l Actions: Commands sent by the robot to I/O Module. They are displayed in blue in the I/O
Module interface.

l Events: Signal sent back by I/O Module to confirm the outcome of a specific action. They are
displayed in red in the I/O Module interface.

Assignation
The process of linking a value to a specific action or event.

Modify byte value assignation manually with keyboard in the cells. It is not possible
to assign more than one action to a byte.

1470
 l Robot controller outputs or actions are R-Series I/O Module inputs and VXelements
plug-in window associated actions.

l Robot controller inputs or events are R-Series I/O Module outputs and VXelements
plug-in window associated actions.

R-Series I/O Module Action/Event channel

All actions are met with a generic reply. For each action, 1 of 3 events will be returned based on the
context, process, and device.

1471
 Name Description

Success (OK) The system executed the action and returned a success of the process.

Success (NOK) The system executed the action but returned a failure of the process.

The system is not able to execute requested action, normally because

Failed
VXelements is not available. (Exceptions listed in table).

All other fields are reserved for future or internal use.

Actions table
Actions Description
Clears the scan settings, starts the scan and displays the scan
window (if the Show scan window option has been selected).
A 10-second timeout will return a Failed event value if the action
is not successful.

Start scan
Start scan – Success (OK)
Occurs when a scan is successfully started.
Start scan – Success (NOK)
Occurs when a scan was already started.
Activates the scanner software trigger.
Trigger on – Success (OK)
Trigger ON Trigger is now on.
Trigger on – Success (NOK)
Trigger is off.
Deactivates the scanner software trigger.
Trigger off – Success (OK)
Trigger OFF Trigger is off.
Trigger off – Success (NOK)
Trigger is on.

1472
Actions Description
Stops the scan, deactivates scanner software trigger, and hides
the scan window. Can only be called after a Start scan.
Stop scan – Success (OK)
Stop scan
Occurs when scan has been stopped.
Stop scan – Success (NOK)
Occurs when scan has not been stopped (scan is active).
(Available with HandySCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN- R BLACK
generation scanners only)
Stops the scan without running the Finalize step automatically.
The unfinalized session can be saved using the Save session
Stop scan without action and finalized separately.
finalize
Stop scan without finalize – Success (OK)
Occurs when scan has been stopped without finalization.
Stop scan without finalize – Success (NOK)
Occurs when scan has not been stopped (Scan remains active.)
Saves the scan with output scan file name set with session
settings. If scan exists, it overwrites or append date and time (set
with session settings). Scan file is saved with format set in
parameters.
Make sure to have a scan available inside VXelements plug-in
window.
Save scan – Success (OK)
Save scan Occurs when scan has been saved.
Save scan – Success (NOK)
Occurs when scan has not been saved. (.STL has not been written,
or no valid options programmed.)
When the Success (OK) event is triggered, and
PolyWorks|Inspector is enabled, an internal message is sent to
PolyWorks|Inspector programs that initiate the inspection on the
current scan data.

1473
Actions Description
Returns the inspection result in PolyWorks.
This action should only be requested when the Inspection result
available status bit is ON.
Inspection result – Success (OK)
Occurs when the automated inspection is finished and the part passed
Inspection result the controls.

Inspection result – Success (NOK)

Occurs when the automated inspection is finished and the part failed
the controls.

Inspection result – Failed

No inspection in queue or ready to read.

Resets the scan. If scan is started, scan will be stopped.

Positioning targets are not deleted.
Reset scan – Success (OK)
Reset scan
Scan has been reset.
Reset scan – Success (NOK)
Scan has not been reset.
Starts the 3D scanner calibration and shows the calibration
window.
A 10-second timeout will return a Failed event value if the action
is not successful.

3D scanner calibration –
Start 3D scanner calibration – Success (OK)
Occurs when the scanner calibration starts correctly.
3D scanner calibration – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the scanner calibration plate is not visible by the C-
Track or not connected (USB or power supply).

1474
Actions Description
Allows the calibration to accept the current position.
3D scanner calibration - Accept position – Success (OK)
3D scanner calibration – Occurs when position has been accepted, stepCount is now +1.
Accept position 3D scanner calibration - Accept position – Success (NOK)
Occurs when position has not been accepted. No feedback from
API. Timeout 5 seconds.
Allows the calibration to skip the current position.
3D scanner calibration - Skip position – Success (OK)

3D scanner calibration – Occurs when position has been skipped, stepCount is now +1.
Skip position
3D scanner calibration - Skip position – Success (NOK)
Occurs when position has not been skipped. No feedback from
API. Timeout 5 seconds.
Gets the calibration status (Success (NOK)) or Success (NOK)) and
prints the calibration value in the Command window of the main
interface.
Scanner calibration result – Success (OK)
Occurs when the scanner calibration is completed with success.
Scanner calibration
result Scanner calibration result – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the scanner calibration is completed with failure or
the calibration plate was not detected or connected upon start.
Scanner calibration result – Failed
VXelements not available or no calibration has been execute or there is
no history.

Clears the session settings, positioning targets, scan and reload

all settings.
New session – Success (OK)
New session
Occurs when new session has been created.
New session – Success (NOK)
Occurs when new session has not been created.

1475
Actions Description
Saves the current VXelements session to the session file name
from the current session settings.
Save VXelements session – Success (OK)
Save VXelements
session Occurs when session has been saved.
Save VXelements session – Success (NOK)
Occurs when session has not been saved. (.CSF has not been
written, or no valid options programmed.)
Loads a pre-saved VXelements session with the session file name
from the current session settings.
Load VXelements session – Success (OK)
Load VXelements
session Occurs when session has been loaded.
Load VXelements session – Success (NOK)
Occurs when session has not been loaded. (.CSF has not been
written, or no valid options programmed.)
Loads the VXelements session parameter file (.csp). The robot
output of the session configuration must be used as a parameter
with the load configuration action.
Load configuration – Success (OK)
Load configuration
Occurs when configuration has been loaded.
Load configuration – Success (NOK)
Occurs when loading configuration is not possible; the
configuration value is unavailable.

1476
Actions Description
Loads the scanner configuration (.csc). The ID of the scanner
configuration must be used as a parameter with the load scanner
configuration action.
Load configuration – Success (OK)
Load scanner
configuration Occurs when scanner configuration has been loaded.
Load configuration – Success (NOK)
Occurs when loading scanner configuration is not possible; the
configuration value is unavailable.
Performs auto-detection and update of a positioning model. A
starting model can be used and supplemented by the targets
currently seen in the environment. The output will be a new
model.
Set Minimum number of detected targets in Tools | Options.

Auto detect targets – Success (OK)

Auto detect targets
Occurs when the Auto detect targets action has succeeded and
reached the minimum number of detected targets parameter.
Auto detect targets – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the Auto detect targets action has failed (either
the environment is unstable, targets are not visible, or the
minimum number of detected targets parameter has not been
reached).

1477
Actions Description
Performs auto- detection and adds targets to an existing
positioning model. A starting model must be used. The output
will be a new model.

Auto detect targets and append – Success (OK)

Occurs when the Auto detect targets and append action has
succeeded and reached the minimum number of detected
Auto detect targets and
append targets parameter. The result will be applied as the current
positioning model. The final model must have more targets than
the initial model. The result will be applied as the current
positioning model.
Auto detect targets and append – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the Auto detect targets and append action has
failed. Either did not met minimum targets requirement or final
model doesn't have more targets than initial model.
Exports the positioning targets using the positioning targets path
in the actual session settings.
Export positioning targets – Success (OK)
Export positioning
targets Positioning targets have been saved.

Export positioning targets – Success (NOK)

Positioning targets have not been saved (.TXT has not been written, or
no valid options programmed.)

Starts the C- Track calibration and displays the calibration

window.
A 10-second timeout will return a Failed event value if the action
is not successful.
C-Track calibration –
Start C-Track calibration - Start – Success (OK)
Occurs when calibration has started.
C-Track calibration - Start – Success (NOK)
Occurs when calibration has not started.

1478
Actions Description
Allows the calibration to accept the position (only executed when
the C-Track calibration bar is visible).
C-Track calibration - Accept – Success (OK)
C-Track calibration –
Accept Occurs when position has been accepted, stepCount is now +1.
C-Track calibration - Accept – Success (NOK)
Occurs when position has not been accepted. No feedback from
API. Timeout 5 seconds.
Allows the calibration to skip the position.
C-Track calibration - Skip – Success (OK)

C-Track calibration – Occurs when position has been skipped, stepCount is now +1.
Skip
C-Track calibration - Skip – Success (NOK)
Occurs when position has not been skipped. No feedback from
API. Timeout 5 seconds.
Gets the calibration status (Success (OK) or Success (NOK)) and prints
the calibration value in the Command window of the main interface.

C-Track calibration result - Success (OK)

Occurs when the C-Track calibration is completed with success.
C-Track calibration
result C-Track calibration result – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the C-Track calibration is completed with failure.
C-Track calibration result – Failed
VXelements not available or no calibration has been execute or there is
no history.

1479
Actions Description
Starts the C-Track photogrammetry process. In C-Link, uses the
primary C-Track only.
A 10-second timeout will return a Failed event value if the action is not
successful.
C-Track
photogrammetry - Start C-Track photogrammetry - Start – Success (OK)
Occurs when the photogrammetry has started.
C-Track photogrammetry - Start – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the photogrammetry has not started.
Stops the C- Track photogrammetry process. Gets the results Success
(OK) or Success (NOK).

C-Track photogrammetry – Stop – Success (OK)

C-Track
photogrammetry - Stop Occurs when the C-Track photogrammetry is completed with
success.
C-Track photogrammetry – Stop – Success (NOK)
Occurs when the C-Track photogrammetry is completed with
failure.
Clears the C-Track dynamic reference model. This will clear the
triangle model, but not all data acquired by the scanner. To limit
memory consumption, use the Reset scan action where
applicable.

Clear C-Track Clear C-Track positioning – Success (OK)

positioning
Positioning targets are now 0 and currently in sensor mode.
Clear C-Track positioning – Success (NOK)
Positioning targets > 0 and currently in dynamic mode.

1480
Actions Description
Loads the nominal of a model with positioning targets from a file
and align on them.

Import targets and align – Success (OK)

Import targets and align Occurs when the alignment process and target detection process have
completed. The result will be applied as the current positioning model.

Import targets and align – Success (NOK)

Occurs when the alignment process and target detection process have
completed and was not successful at aligning the targets.

Allows:

l Resetting VXelementsAPIImplementation.exe

l Resetting PolyWorks

l Restoring the internal flag values to 0

l Clearing the command queue

l Clearing the active configuration (back to factory defaults)

Reset system Reset system – Success (OK)

Occurs when VXelements or PolyWorks (if active) has
reconnected properly.
Reset system – Success (NOK)
Occurs when VXelements or PolyWorks (if active) has not
reconnected properly.
Reset system – Failed
Should never occur. Will always try to execute internal
ResetSystem.

1481
Actions Description
Start the tracking of the environment compensation.

It is recommended to start each scan cycle with

the artifact visible (ECArtifactVisible = ON) and
wait for ECStarted = ON and ECWaiting = OFF
before starting the scan (if the artifact needs to be
Start environment measured before scanning).
compensation

Start environment compensation – Success (OK)

EC has been started.
Start environment compensation – Success (NOK)
EC has not been started.
Stop the tracking of the environment compensation.
Stop environment compensation – Success (OK)
Stop environment
compensation EC has been stopped.
Stop environment compensation – Success (NOK)
EC has not been stopped.
User defined 01
User defined 02
User defined 03
User defined 04
User defined 05
Actions and events available for future use.
User defined 06
User defined 07
User defined 08
User defined 09
User defined 10

1482
R-Series I/O Module status channel
Ethernet/IP communication includes an output channel of status bits. These signals are to be used by
robot programs to validate the state of the system, most notably prior to starting a cycle.
They can also be used by the robot or mapped to a PLC to monitor the state of individual components
and to notify personnel in case of unexpected value.
The status bits are broadcasted on the Ethernet/IP protocol only as 8 bytes of information. Each bit is a
specific signal.
All other fields are reserved for future or internal use.

Index Name Description

Provides a Heartbeat periodic signal generated by the software

to indicate normal operation.
0 HeartBeat This signal is expected to toggle ON/OFF periodically at a
frequency of 1 Hz (Period of 1 sec) when I/O Module is opened
[FF1]

Occurs when the system is displaying one of these statuses:

1 TrackerReady
l Tracker is connected

l Tracker is ready

Occurs when the system is displaying this status:

2 ScannerReady
l Scanner is connected

Occurs when the system is displaying one of these statuses:

l Warming

l Synchronizing
3 SystemBusy
l VXscan.IsScanningStarted

l VXscan.Calibration.IsCalibrationStarted

l Tracker.Calibration.IsCalibrationStarted

1483
Index Name Description

Occurs when the system is displaying one of these statuses:

l NotSynchronized

l TempOutOfRange
4 SystemFaulty
l Damaged

l SensorMode (differing from the Sensor mode and

NotReferenced).

Occurs when the scanner and tracker (if applicable) are all
5 SystemReady
ready. Checks that VXelements is ready to scan.

System calibration required

Occurs when the system is displaying one of these statuses:

l CalibRequiredTooCold

l CalibRequiredTooHot
6 CalibrationRequired
l CalibRequired

l CalibTooOld

This status bit can be used to trigger a calibration request to

the cycle sequencing logic or personnel.

Occurs when a new inspection result has been queued from the
7 InspectionResultAvailable Inspection Client. Indicates that sending Get inspection
result action will return the latest inspection result.

Indicates VXelementsAPI encountered an error during the scan

8 ErrorInScanningCycle
cycle.

9 ECStarted The Environment Compensation is running. Tracking can

be valid or invalid.
The Environment Compensation tracking is invalid. Data
10 ECWaiting acquisition is halted until the scale bar is seen by the C-
Track.

11 ECVisible The scale bar is visible by the C-Track and fits within the
EC volume.

1484
Auto detect targets action
The Auto detect targets action is a feature of the I/O Module interface. It can allow to detect all
visible targets and use them as dynamic referential.

Some rules apply:

l Environment must be stable for C-Track(s)

l Targets must be visible and stable during 1 second (stability check)

l In a C-Link configuration, unit C-Tracks must be already referenced to acquire new

targets

l Make sure to only see good targets (MetraSCAN 3D-R must be hidden from C-
Tracks)

It is expected for this action call to report Success OK or Success NOK based on these rules.

To use the automated photogrammetry function with I/O Module

Actions related to the automated photogrammetry exist in I/O Module:

1. C-Track photogrammetry – Start

*
2. C-Track photogrammetry – Stop
*It is expected for this action call to report Success OK or Success NOK based on the Volume Extension
rules.
At the end of the process, if the result is Success OK, the target model is sent directly to the VXelements
plug-in window and used by the C-Track in Dynamic mode.

To keep this model, export it with the Export positioning targets action (byte 66 by default).

1485
C-Track starting model

A starting model can also be used to reevaluate an existing model.

This is an optional function to be used in case an existing model acquired previously with the Automated
photogrammetry has to be remeasured.

1. Click Configuration .

2. Add the previous positioning model in the C-Track starting model field.

The starting model will be used as a reference model and calculated with the new model acquired.

For details, refer to the CUBE-R programmer training script.

1486
IO Error Messages
Message Explanation/Suggestion

*.* VXelements Standard Error (popups) Any standard errorout

from VXelements. Example: GPU
of memory.

An error has occurred processing the Generic error when Email_Enabled is true, and
email module. cannot send an automatic email.

An installation of VXelements was not VXelements either not installed or installation not
found on the computer. VXelements recognize. If VXelements is installed, uninstalled
must be installed before it can be used and then reinstall VXelements.
as an external application.
Happens when the calibration has failed. Return
C-Track {0} Calibration Failed value from the API.
Clears the C-Track dynamic reference model. This
will clear the triangle model, but not all data
Clear C-Track positioning acquired by the scanner. To limit memory
consumption, use the Reset scan action where
applicable.
Unlikely error message that indicates a
configuration name has not been found configuration that was just created is not recognize.
Happens when the Export pos. Targets is called but
Export positioning targets - Invalid path the field is empty or directory does not exists.
Confirm desired target.
If the current smpt parameters are wrong and the
Fail to send email. application has failed to send an email with the Test
email button.
If archive scan is active and file path is empty during
the archiving or if the current move of the STL file
Failed to archive file. failed for security reasons or space or anything file
move related.
Happens when an exception occurs during export
Failed to export configurations. of configuration
Happens when an exception occurs during export
Failed to export user settings. of user settings
Happens when an exception occurs during import
Failed to import configurations. of configuration
Happens when an exception occurs during import
Failed to import user settings. of user settings
Failed to write to an IPC Port: The pipe VXelementsAPI has most likely frozen, closed or
is being closed crashed. Restart and try again.
Legacy error message, because "point scan" is
Point scan is not supported by this discontinued and is converted to Pos.Targets
scanner options at runtime.

1487
 Message Explanation/Suggestion
Positioning targets scan is not Happens with MetraSCAN 3D when ScanMode is set
supported by this scanner to Positioning Targets.
Happens when VXelements and R-Series I/O
R-Series I/O Module and VXelements Module are not using the same version. Confirm
api versions mismatch versions are paired.
Resets the scan. If scan is started, scan will be
Reset scan stopped. Positioning targets are not deleted.
Happens when a StartScan command has been
Scan could not start correctly piped to VXelements but the scan has not
been started for unknown reasons.
Surface scan is not supported by this Legacy error message unlikely to occur with current
scanner generation scanners.
Happens when the pos. Targets file does not exists
Target model not found on the disk or the network path is unreachable.
The positioning target model cannot be Positioning targets cannot be executed.
optimized
The surface cannot be optimized. Surface optimization cannot be executed.
A communication error with VXelements occurred.
VXelementsCommunicationError Please verify that VXelements is running.

1488
1489
Session Settings Configuration
Session settings are groups of parameters for the actual measurement session. These settings are
loaded by the robot programs using the I/O Module configurations.
There are 2 types of session settings:
Cycle settings: Used to apply parameters that will remain for the full scan cycle of a part. Can only be
loaded prior to the Start scan action.
Scan settings: Only contain parameters that affect the scanner. Can be loaded at any moment before,
during or after a scan.
The settings currently loaded will fill the Current session settings shown in the main window of the I/O
Module interface.
To access this window, go to Tools | Session settings configuration.

It is highly recommended to execute the Reset scan action prior to loading a

Cycle settings configuration.

1490
Session settings file view

Option Description
Allows filtering and displaying only the files that contain the characters entered
Name filter
in the search zone.

Add The New session settings window opens and allows adding a configuration.

A pop-up window appears allowing to delete the selected configuration.

Remove
This action is irreversible.

Duplicate Duplicate current entry into a new entity.

New session settings window

This pop-up window appears when clicking Add.

1. Enter a new session settings file name.

2. Click OK to have access to the fields on the right side of the screen (grayed out until a new
session settings file name is entered).

1491
R-Series I/O Module file type
Extension Description
Stands for Input Output Setting Identification. This file contains specific setting
*.iosid configuration made in R-Series I/O Module, such as target file for .stl, .txt, .csc.,
.csp, etc.

The .iosid file is generated for each configuration created in the default folder:
C:\ProgramData\Creaform\IO Interface\Configurations. This location can be
changed in Tools | Options | Session Settings Path.

Session setting description

Option Description
Session setting
file name This section displays the name of the session setting file.

Description This section displays the description of the session setting file.

Session settings type

Scan settings (default option): Select to display the relevant General tab option.
Cycle settings: Select to display the General and Inspection tab options.

1492
Robot output

To get a description of these settings and to select them, see the Robot Programming section (for
MetraSCAN 3D-R solution).
To get a description of these settings and to select them, see the Robot Programming for CUBE-R
section (for CUBE-R solution).

The arrows allow jumping from one byte to the other, skipping the ones that are
already assigned.

General tab
Display when the Scan settings option is selected

1493
 Parameter Description
Scanner If the file name is blank or invalid, the scanner keeps the same settings.
configuration Otherwise, the scanner configuration file (.csc) file will be loaded.
file

Display when the Cycle settings option is selected

Parameter Description

Positioning The target file (.txt) will be loaded and the referencing mode will be changed to
target file Dynamic. If the file name is blank or invalid, the current target file stays active
(import) (sensor referencing mode if already in sensor mode).
Positioning The target file (.txt) to export when exporting the targets using the
target file Export positioning targets action.
(export)

1494
 Parameter Description

VXelements If the file name is blank or invalid, the current scanning parameters stay
session active. Otherwise, the session parameters file (.csp) will be loaded.
parameter file Choose which parameters to import from the session file by checking
their respective boxes.
Scanner If the file name is blank or invalid, the scanner keeps the same settings.
configuration Otherwise, the scanner configuration file (.csc) file will be loaded.
file
If the file name is blank or invalid, an open file dialog will pop up to
Output scan file select a folder and define a file. Otherwise, the scan file (.stl) will be saved
at this location with the specified file format in the parameters.
If the file name is blank or invalid, an open file dialog will pop up to
VXelements select a folder and define a file on the Load session or the Save session
session file action. Otherwise, the VXelements session file (.csf) will be loaded or
saved at this location.
Define the scan mode to use:

Scan mode l Surface

l Positioning targets

C-Track starting Allows selecting the target file (*.txt) to use. See the To use the
model automated photogrammetry function with I/O Module section.

Scanner configurations tab

Assign a numerical ID and input the file path for the configuration file(s).

Inspection tab
Define the parameters that will be sent to the inspection software client to process the automated
inspection. For example, for PolyWorks plugin, this parameter is the IMinspect project name.

1495
 Parameter Description
Indicate the name of the Inspector project to open from the Workspace. If left
Inspection
project name blank, an error will prompt that it cannot open the project. This error will occur
after saving the scan.
Automatically Select this check box to prompt I/O Module to close the PolyWorks
close project project automatically after inspection is completed.
after inspection
This option is grayed out until the Automatically close project after inspection
Save project check box is selected.
before closing
Select this check box to prompt I/O Module to save the PolyWorks project upon
closing the inspection.
Display
PolyWorks Select this check box to display the PolyWorks interface while processing
during the inspection.
inspection

1496
 Parameter Description

Create new Select this check box to create a new piece in the inspection project
piece when the data is sent for inspection. When the check box is cleared, the
data in PolyWorks will be overwritten and no piece will be added.
This field is grayed out until the Create new piece check box is selected.
New piece
template name Indicate the chosen template to be executed on the new piece. When the Create
(optional)
new piece check box is cleared, the default template is used.

Disable Select this check box to prevent using the automatic inspection
automatic parameters. A macro will be required to proceed to the inspection. If the
inspection Custom inspection macro absolute path is left blank, automatic
inspection is enabled by default.
This option is grayed out until the Disable automatic inspection check box is
Custom selected.
inspection
Select this check box to create a personalized inspection. For details, see the
Custom inspection workflow section.

This field is grayed out until the Disable automatic inspection check box is
Custom
inspection selected.
macro absolute
path Indicate the path to the macro script that will be run on the inspection. If left
blank, no file location is known or otherwise specified.

Export report(s) Select this check box to export the report(s) at the end of the inspection
process (e.g. to Polyworks).
Report output Indicate the location path where the generated reports will be saved.
folder path

1497
Options
This section allows the user to define the parameters. To access it, go to Tools | Options.
R-Series I/O Module uses an integer-based messaging system to exchange the actions and parameters
values with the robot controller. The signal exchange is via the integer inputs and outputs registers of 32
bits (4 bytes).

IO connection parameters

Parameter Description
Robot IP address Robot IP address.

Computer network card IP address.

LAN IP address Network connections must be set and Ethernet

cable must be connected to the computer prior to
opening the Options page.

EtherNet/IP parameters for I/O module

The following parameters must be configured to allow communication between R-Series I/O Module
and the robot controller or other devices:

1498
General

Server Class

Action Server EIP Class:

Only Class1 is available.

Status Server EIP Class:

Only Class1 is available.
Class 1

Connection parameters:

Connection Path:
The connection path is the coded transcription of the physical link object (connection list on the
EtherNET/IP rack). It can be found in the EDS file. Every connection has a specific path defined by its
physical position on the rack.
Here’s an example of the connection path in an EDS file for FANUC and UR robots.
For FANUC robots, the EDS files can be downloaded by performing a backup of the communication
configuration:

1499
 1. Plug the USB key into the robot controller or the teach pendant.

2. Go to: Menu --> File --> UTIL --> Set device --> (Select the device) --> Backup --> Com.
Conf.
The connection path can be found in the Connection# section of the $ path line.

The connection path value must be the one on the connection is configured:

For UR robots, the connection path can be found in the Connection1 section at the $ exclusive owner
path line.

1500
Once the connection path is filled, the configuration connection instance, consuming connection point
and producing connection point are automatically filed.

Configuration Connection Instance

Also referred as configuration assembly, it is the adapter connection instance.

Consuming Connection Point

Also referred as consuming assembly (device output), it is the data consumption connection point.

1501
Producing Connection Point
Also referred as producing assembly (device input), it is the data production connection point.
Each connection point is the conversion from hexadecimal to decimal of a portion of the connection
path. If not using the connection path, the decimal value must be manually entered:

Scanner parameters

The scanner is the client device responsible for establishing a connection path to an Ethernet/IP adapter.
The EIP scanner input and EIP scanner output parameters are required.

l 4 bytes header

l Include status header. It adds 4 bytes to the message.

l Size (bytes)

l Number of bytes to transfer. It is the number of channels of the assembly.

l Offset (bytes)

l Byte address from the predefined input assembly instance.

1502
Action Class 1 and Status Class 1

Action Return Mode

Use Pulse Output: Sets the output to be pulsed instead of steady:

With pulse output

l Each output will be pulsed during the output delay parameter. If the output is already
ON and another event is triggered, I/O Module will wait until the first output is set back
to OFF after the output delay. In other words, the new event will not replace the old

1503
 one.
l This method can cause unwanted delays on quick actions that last less than the output
delay.

Without pulse output

l The output will be set at ON until R-SeriesI/O Module receives a new action on port 0
(or any byte) OR after a timeout of 60 seconds.
l This method is quicker and safer. Remember to return a new action or byte 0 after each
event reception to clear the output.

Data Block Parameters

Input blocks are for the Action and parameters change sent from the controller.

Input blocks size (bytes)

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
Action Action Parameter Parameter

Output blocks are for the event sent from the R- Series I/O Module to the controller and the
configuration (parameter) acknowledged sent to the controller. They are also for generic statues and
custom statues received sent from I/O Module to monitor the system.

Output Block size (bytes)

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Generic Generic Custom Custom
Event Event Configuration Configuration
Status Status Status Status

l Size (bytes)

l Number of bytes to transfer. It is the number of channels of the assembly.

l Offset (bytes)

l Byte address from the predefined input assembly instance.

Typical Ethernet Connection parameters for FANUC robots

A parameters page for FANUC robots will look like this:

1504
A parameters page for UR robots will look like this:

1505
1506
The parameters are defined has followed using Ethernet IP Guide from Universal robot.
Scanner Parameters
EIP Scanner Input: A total of 3840 bits (480 bytes) are available (3808 Bits + 32 bits):

1507
EIP Scanner Output: a total of 1792 bits (224 bytes) are available (1760 bits + 32 bits):

Data Block Parameters

Action Offset (Bytes): Int output register 0 (int) is bit 2304 (288 bytes):

Parameter Offset (Bytes): Int output register 1 (int) is bit 2336 (292 bytes):

1508
Event Offset (Bytes): Int input register 0 (int) is 256 (32 bytes):

Configuration Offset (Bytes): Int input register 1 (int) is 288 (36 bytes):

Generic Status Offset (Bytes): Int input register 2 (int) is 320 (40 bytes):

Generic Status Offset (Bytes): Int input register 3 (int) is 352 (44 bytes):

1509
The offset parameters must be changed to different value if a different Int output registers are use. For
example:
In Output Register 5 and 6 are used for action and parameters. Action Offset (Bytes) must be set to 308
and Parameter Offset (Bytes) must be set to 312.

Application parameters

1510
 Parameter Action
Autostart with
Windows Select to start R-Series I/O Module when Windows starts.

Select to hide R-Series I/O Module interface in the system's tray bar.

When the Run in traybar parameter is activated,

Run in traybar the application will be minimized and can be
opened back by right-clicking the notify icon in the
system tray.

Show distance Select to show or clear to hide the distance meter during acquisition
meter inside the Scanning window.
Display scan
window while Select to show the scanning window during the acquisition process.
scanning

Choose between available trajectories according to the scanner used.

In the CUBE-R environment, the CUBERV1 or the Manual trajectory
must be used depending on the tool changer solution installed. Ignore
the other trajectories available.
In custom environments, the CUBERV1 trajectory is available but not
Scanner recommended because:
calibration - It does not offer any guidance for the integration mode;
trajectory
- Going from one pose to the other might be more difficult in certain
cases.

It is prescribed to use the Default90DegreesV2 or the

Default0DegreesV2 calibration trajectories since they
both offer guidance for the integration mode.

Choose between available calibration modes:

Scanner / C-Track
calibration mode
l Execution (default)
l Integration

1511
 Parameter Action

Choose between available trajectories along the C-Track Z axis.

The section provides 4 calibration trajectory

C-Track robot dropdown menus - 1 per C-Track in C-Link up to
calibration the maximum allowed. The order is the same as the
trajectory
C-Link order set in the C-Link tab (Configure | C-
Track | Configuration). Unavailable C-Tracks are
ignored.

C-Track Allows to select the scale bar calibration file (.sbcf) to use. QR Code
calibration bar detection is deactivated when using the R-Series I/O Module.
Scan file format Defines the scan file output format.
Minimum number Sets the minimum number of detected targets to return Auto detect
of detected targets – Success (OK) event with the Auto detect targets action (by
targets default, 10).
Session settings Defines the destination folder where the .iosid files are stored.
path (*.iosid)

Select the action to be executed at the end of the inspection process:

l Do nothing – Scan file is left where specified in the Session

Action with scan Settings Configuration section.
file
l Delete scan file – Scan file is deleted permanently.
l Archive scan file – Scan file is moved to the archiving folder.

Append date and Select to append the date and time to the original scan file name per
time to scan file the format specified in the Date and time format drop-down. Clear to
name
overwrite the scan file.
Date and time Defines the date and time format for the scan archiving.
format
Archive folder Directory where scan files are archived to.
path

Log folder path Directory where the automatically created log (.txt) file is stored. It is
recommended to store the file locally.

1512
 Parameter Action
Frequency for automatic deletion of log file. Upon clearing, I/O module
creates a new backup file or overwrites the existing backup file which can be
found in the same folder as the log file.

l Never: Never cleared

l Every I/O Module launch: Cleared at every new I/O Module launch

Log file clear l Daily: Cleared at the next I/O Module launch after every day at
frequency
midnight
l Weekly: Cleared at the next I/O Module launch after every week on
Monday at midnight
l Monthly: Cleared at the next I/O Module launch after every month
on the first day of the month at midnight
l Every start scan: Cleared at every Start scan – Success OK event

1513
Inspection Software Client
R-Series I/O Module software has been compatible with InnovMetric PolyWorks | Inspector™
since the 2017 version. It requires the use of the Macro Script Control Language (MSCL), a
simple but powerful programming language that automates the workflow through commands.

For details, see the PolyWorks | Inspector User Manual.

Parameter Description

Select or clear to enable or disable the Save remaining opened

projects on PolyWorks closing option.
Enable inspection
module If the check box is selected, PolyWorks software
will launch automatically at software startup or
any time settings are applied.

1514
 Parameter Description

Select either local or a DataLoop export.

DataLoop must already be configured in

Local/DataLoop PolyWorks. See PolyWorks documentation for
more information. Click Log in / Log out to log
into DataLoop.

Specifies the path to the PolyWorks Workspace (*.pwk) files. This file
PolyWorks Workspace
Path (Local) must be compatible with the PolyWorks Metrology Suite version
installed.
Specifies the name of the PolyWorks workspace. The PolyWork workspace
PolyWorks Workspace
Name (DataLoop) must already be uploaded on the DataLoop server. See PolyWorks
documentation for more information.
DataLoop free up disk
space frequency Sets how often the free up disk space function runs.

Select to automatically save any opened PolyWorks projects when I/O

Save remaining opened Module shuts down the PolyWorks software.
projects on PolyWorks
closing If the check box is cleared, a message will appear, asking if the opened
PolyWorks projects should be saved.

Workflows

1515
Automatic inspection workflow

This workflow is valid if the Disable automatic inspection and Custom inspection
check boxes are cleared in the Inspection tab.

1. R-Series I/O Module interface raises the Save scan - Success (OK) event.
2. The specific PolyWorks workspace set in R-Series I/O Module parameters will open if not
already opened.

3. The specific PolyWorks|Inspector project set in Inspection parameter(s) will open if not
already opened.

4. PolyWorks automatic inspection parameters are used to inspect the saved scan file.

a. All parameters must be set correctly in PolyWorks options to obtain a correct

report.

b. The first Data object in the project will be replaced.

c. The auto-generated sequence is executed.

d. All features are tested to determine the inspection result. If 1 feature, caliper,
cross- section or custom measurement is out of tolerance, the inspection
result will be set to Rejected. This will lead to a Get inspection result –
Success (NOK) reply.
5. Inspection software client retrieves the inspection results.

6. R-Series I/O Module interface raises the Inspection result available output status. Result
can be queried using the Get inspection result action.

Custom inspection workflow

This workflow is valid if the Disable automatic inspection and Custom inspection
check boxes are selected in the Inspection tab.

1. R-Series I/O Module interface raises the Save scan - Success (OK) event.
2. The specific PolyWorks workspace set in R-Series I/O Module parameters will open if not
already opened.

3. The specific PolyWorks|Inspector project set in Inspection parameter(s) will open if not
already opened.

1516
4. R-Series I/O Module sends a command to run the inspection macro corresponding to the
specific IMinspect project. No automated Data object replacement will happen.

5. The client will execute a macro located in {Polyworks Workspace Path}\{Workspace name}_
Files\macro\iminspect\. No sequence is executed automatically. The inspection strategy
must be explicitly defined in the macro script.

PolyWorks Workspace Path represents the full path of the folder where the
workspace root files are stored. A workspace is composed of one XML file with the
.pwk extension and one folder with the _Files suffix. The macro must be named per
the Inspector project (will therefore match the Inspection Parameter value as well)
without any extension name.

A Workspace 1 workspace containing the Inspector Project project located in

directory D:\Documents\Polyworks must have a macro script named Inspector
Project (without extensions) saved in:
D:\Documents\Documents\PolyWorks\Workspace 1_Files\macro\iminspect

l The macro is executed with, as input argument, the scan file path. Input arguments can be
retrieve using the notation “$1” in the MSCL language which will interpolate the string to input
argument position.

l The macro will execute the PolyWorks inspection program with the scan file retrieved.

6. Inspection software client retrieves the inspection results by reading the value of the
standard Approval status field of the Piece property window.

l Alternatively, the inspection software retrieves the value of a shared variable (SHARED_
VARIABLE) stored at the workspace level. This variable is created by the inspection software and
does not need to be declared. The value of this variable must be set by the inspection macro
using the command: MACRO SHARED_VARIABLE SET_VALUE (“mInspectionResult”, VALUE)

For details, see the Macro Scripting in PolyWorks Reference Guide in the Polyworks |
InspectorHelp menu.

7. R-Series I/O Module interface raises the Inspection result available status bit.

1517
 Event Shared variable name Shared variable value (INT)
Get inspection result - mInspectionResult 1
Success (OK)
Get inspection result - mInspectionResult 0
Success (NOK)

1518
Emailing
R-Series I/O Module software can send an email automatically when the number of scans
performed goes below a certain threshold value:

l The threshold is a rate of scans performed per hour. It can be used for notification purposes
when the system is not performing as it should.

l The threshold value should be established with regard to the specific environment and reality of
each cell.

Parameter Description
Enable emailing Enable or disable the emailing module.
module
Can be used to test the settings entered for the emailing module. If
Test email settings the settings are OK and the active network is correctly configured,
the application will return a success message.
Threshold (scan/hour) Number of minimum scans per hour before sending an email.
SMTP host Sets the IP address of the host used for SMTP transactions.

Use SSL Specify whether SMTP uses Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to encrypt
the connection.
SMTP port Gets or sets the port used for SMTP transactions.
SMTP login SMTP Server username information.
SMTP password SMTP Server password information.
From Content of the From field of the email.
Click Add to input the email address of a recipient. Make sure to
To use a valid email format: if not, a warning message will appear. To
delete an email address from the drop-down list, select it and click
Remove.
Subject Subject of the email.

1519
 Parameter Description

HTML body path Content of the body. Browse to an .HTML file to select the body
content of the mail.

1520
Configurations
The tools under Tools | Configurations are used to import and export all session setting configurations.

Import

This option is used to import all session settings configurations from one location to the configured
location set inside the options. Select an .ios file to start the import of the sessions settings and replace
all your current configuration with the imported one.

Export

This option is used to export all session settings configurations under a single .ios file.

Import from VXscan-R

This options allows importing scan trajectory that was exported from VXscan-R (.zip). See Export scan
trajectory.

1521
User Settings
The tools under Tools | User settings.are used to import and export all application settings.

Import

The option is used to import all application settings from a single location. Select an .iop file to import all
settings from file. The settings will be applied immediately.

Export

The option is used to export all user settings to one file. Select an .iop file location to save all current
application settings.

1522
System Panel
The system panel contains information relating to the activated and connected devices. It is a useful tool
as it aims to quickly access functions and view the device statuses.

Prior to starting any process, make sure to set the parameters where appropriate.

Visibility pane
The Visibility pane contains sections that differ according to the connected devices.

C-Track

l Gray background: Active positioning target model is seen by the C-Track. Acquisition can be
performed.

l Red background: Active positioning target model is not seen by the C-Track. Acquisition
cannot be performed.

HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN 3D, and MetraSCAN 3D-R

l Gray background: Device is seen by the C-Track. Acquisition can be performed.

l Red background: Device is not seen by the C-Track. Acquisition cannot be performed.

Device tabs
Click a tab to display the relevant panes. Only the tabs pertaining to the connected devices appear.

Available information in tabs

C-Track

1523
 l Model and serial number

l C-Track calibration status

l Connection status

l Gray banner: Indicates that the device is correctly connected or seen by the C-Track.

l Red banner: A question sign will appear when hovering over it, indicating the device
is not correctly connected or not seen by the C-Track. Click it to open a pop-up
window showing a message detailing the status and possible solutions to the
problem.

l
Calibrate all

l
Calibration

l
Configuration

l
C-Track setup

Reference parameters

l
Environment Compensation

l
Target acquisition modes

l
Volume extension

l
Referencing modes

Scanner

1524
 l Model and serial number

l
Device status or and calibration status (if connected)

l
Scanner calibration

l
Scanner configuration

l Positioning parameters

l Scanner parameters

l High resolution multiplier

HandyPROBE

l Model and serial number

l
Calibrate all

l
Configuration

Probes

l Probe tip calibration status

l Probe tip name

l
Calibration with cone

l
Calibration with sphere

l Remove

l Add

l Edit

1525
 Probing parameters

l Multishot mode

l Distance

l Frequency

VXtrack

l Tracking

l Model positions

CUBE-R
CUBE-R programs

l Robot cell serial number

l
Automated C-Track calibration

l
Automated scanner calibration

l
Automated photogrammetry

l Calibration bar1 drop-down menu

Probe emulator pane

The Probe emulator pane contains information on the simulated stylus.
Options

l Probe diameter

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1526
Noise

l Position

l Angle

Probe position pane

This pane displays the current Cartesian position of the probe (X, Y, Z).

1527
Troubleshooting

It is recommended to contact Customer Support upon encountering a problem.

They will be best suited to help with troubleshooting of any kind, and may log bug
information for tracking and development.

Memory-related error messages

Product compatibility error messages
Product compatibility
MetraSCAN 3D-R
C-Track

Memory-related error messages

Located at the bottom right side of the screen, the memory allocation status bars display the system
memory (RAM) and graphics processing unit (GPU) memory usage. During scanning, try to maintain the
GPU use under 70%, as subsequent processing steps require additional memory.
As explained in the System Requirements, due to some constraints in Windows, there is a limit to the
amount of memory that can be allocated to a single program. If the limit is exceeded, the software will
display an error message.

Error message Solution

A GPU error occurred. Surface could not be
reconstructed but scan data has not been Save the session. Close the software and reopen the
lost. Save the session and reopen it to recover session to recover scan data.
data.

1. Select and delete unwanted areas of the

Critical GPU memory. Surface could not be
scan to free up memory to continue
reconstructed but scan data has not been
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the surface scanning with the current resolution.
resolution and apply to recover data.
2. If the first solution does not work,
decrease resolution (i.e. increase triangle

Out of GPU memory. Surface could not be size value) under the Scan Parameters.
reconstructed but scan data has not been Select and delete unwanted areas of the
lost. Stop the scan and decrease the surface
resolution and apply to recover data. scan. Increase resolution (i.e. decrease
triangle size value) to the original value.

1528
 Error message Solution

1. Decrease resolution (i.e. increase

triangle size value) under the Scan
parameters.
Texture was not generated as it would be too
large to fit inside video memory. Reduce scan 2. If the first solution doesn't work, change
resolution or use another projection.
projection type. Note that in None
projection type, maximum image size is
4 GB.

Product compatibility error messages

Mixing third (G3) and fourth generation (G4) of MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D-R, or HandyPROBE
systems with the C-Track and the controller is not possible.

Examples
If a G3 C-Track and a MetraSCAN BLACK are connected, a message will appear to
inform that the current C-Track is not compatible with the scanner.
If trying to use a G3 stylus with a G4 controller, a message will appear on the
controller LCD indicating they are not compatible.

Product compatibility
G3 C-Track is compatible with MetraSCAN 350, MetraSCAN 750, MetraSCAN 357, and MetraSCAN 750-
R|Elite products.
G4 C-Track is compatible with MetraSCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN-R BLACK products.
For details, see C-Track compatibility chart section.

MetraSCAN 3D-R
If the MetraSCAN 3D-R is not detected by the software (“Disconnected”)
Scanner Status

First, check the status of the scanner on the controller screen (menu “3.0 Scanner” of the controller) and the number
of devices (menu “5.2 Nb of devices” of the controller).

1529
 l This scanner should have 2 devices detected (cameras).

l If a C-Track is also connected to the controller, the total should be 4 devices.

l If a C-Track and MaxSHOT Next are also connected to the controller, the total should be 5

devices.

“Disconnected” Status + All Devices:

l Make sure the scanner physically connected is the one activated in the Product Manager.

l Make sure the latest calibration (.cst) file has been uploaded in the Product Manager (a new file is created

after each factory calibration.

l Try a clean step-by-step setup as follows:

l Turn off the controller, unplug the power source from the controller and Ethernet cable from the

computer and close the software.

l Plug back the controller power source.

l Turn on the controller.

l Wait until the C-Track status is Warming, Calibration too old or Ready.

l Plug the Ethernet cable back to the computer.

l Launch the software.

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try a controller recovery.

“Disconnected” Status + Missing Devices:

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try to connect the scanner to another port behind the controller.

1530
 l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try to restart the computer.

l If possible, try another cable for the scanner.

“Ready” Status:

l Make sure the C-Track is properly detected and ready to use (or calibrate).

l Try to restart the computer.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

l Try a complete restart of the controller (shut down controller and unplug the power supply for 5 seconds).

l Try to uninstall and install the software (make sure the latest version available is being installed).

l Try a controller recovery.

If the MetraSCAN 3D-R is detected, but not properly connected (any error message on scanner,
but not “Disconnected”)

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a clean step-by-step setup as follows:

l Turn off the controller, unplug the power source from the controller and Ethernet cable from the

computer and close the software.

l Plug back the controller power source.

l Turn on the controller.

l Wait until the C-Track status is Warming, Calibration too old or Ready.

l Plug the Ethernet cable back to the computer.

l Launch the software.

l Make sure that all cables are properly connected and do not seem damaged.

l Try a reset of controller (menu 4 of the controller).

1531
 l Try to connect the scanner to another port behind the controller.

l Try to uninstall and install the software (make sure the latest version available is being installed).

l Try a controller recovery.

C-Track
If the C- Track is not detected by the software (any error message except “Not Found” and
“Warming”)

l Make sure the cables on the C-Track are correctly plugged (3 cables).

l Try to shut down the controller, unplug the power source, unplug or plug the C-Track cables, plug back

the power and restart the controller.

If the C-Track or MetraSCAN 3D-R license is not working

l Try to connect to the Online Services (in the Product Manager) and update the license by clicking the

Download icon.

l Try to download the license file (.clf) from the Creaform Customer Portal (https://cp.creaform3d.com/)

and click Change in the Product Manager to select the downloaded license file.

l Try to copy manually the downloaded license file (.clf) from the software installation folder (ex: C:\Program

Files\Creaform\VXelements\License).

l
If the problem remains, contact the Customer Support team ([email protected]) to request

a new license.

If the Volume Extension acquisition process finalization fails

Make sure:

l To calibrate the C-Track first.

l The number of positioning targets is sufficient and well spread in the volume.

l The positioning targets are not damaged or dirty.

1532
 l To keep a good standoff distance from the targets.

l The C-Track displacement is at least at 0.5 meters or the rotary table completes a 360-degree revolution.

If the C-Track calibration bar is not registered when using the Volume Extension function

l There is no calibration bar registered.

l Calibrate the C-Track to register the calibration bar.

1533
VXelements Overview
VXelements is a fully integrated 3D software platform that powers the entire fleet of 3D scanning and
measurement technologies.
The multi-instance function allows scanning with the first instance, while editing or inspecting scans or
meshes with additional instances of VXelements. Intended for VXmodel, VXinspect and VXscan-R only.
This section contains information about general features and options.
Interface
Configuration options
Mouse and keyboard controls
Contextual menu
Display toolbar
System panel
File types
Add entity
Add alignment
CAD model

VXelements Viewer
New license- free viewing software allowing to open a VXelements session or import a mesh. The
following components can be displayed in the viewer, but they cannot be edited and no additional data
can be acquired:

l VXscan sessions: Scan, texture, entities, clipping objects

l VXmodel sessions: Mesh, texture, entities, CAD. Color maps can be edited.

l VXinspect sessions: Alignments, inspection program, part (scan), entities, snapshot, annotation,
CAD. Color maps can be edited and annotations can be added for data analysis. Report
creation, including report options and the possibility to import and export report templates.

l Imported meshes: Visualization in VXmodel. Meshes can be imported using the Imported mesh
function of VXelements Viewer, or by double-clicking the mesh file (.stl or .obj).

l VXshot: Photogrammetry models, target table, image browser.

The interface is similar to VXelements's, including the 3D viewer, the Navigation and the Display panels.
To download the software, visit Creaform's website.

1534
VXelements Interface
VXelements software is a 3D software platform which gathers multiple modules into a simple, user-
friendly environment.

Home page

The Home page is the startup screen displayed when launching the software. Its content may vary
depending on installed modules, licenses and equipment.

If a module is not available, this means it is not activated.

Start
Select the module needed to perform a task.

VXscan

VXscan-R

VXshot

VXinspect|Analysis

VXinspect|Quality Control

VXmodel

VXprobe

VXtrack

Other information is available depending of the module selected in the Home page:
Active products: List of products currently active.
Scanners: List of scanners that were added in the software.
C-Track: List of C-Track that were added in the Product Manager.

1535
MaxSHOT 3D: List of MaxSHOT 3D that were added in the Product Manager.
Change or add products in Product Manager: Click to change or add products using the Product
Manager.
Count of license(s) available: Number of cloud license(s) available (with VXmodel, VXinspect and VXscan-
R).

Check out license to work offline: Click to check out the cloud license. Using this function allows
working offline up to 30 days.

Make sure to click Check out the license to work offline if you anticipate
working without an Internet connection.

To activate or deactivate a product

To quickly activate a product, click one in the list. The activated product is highlighted; only one product
per category can be active at a time.
Click a highlighted product to deactivate it.

Open session
Select a session in the Recent sessions list or browse to find the suitable session:

1. Click Browse ...

2. Browse through the VXelements - Open session dialog box.

3. Select the file.

4. Click Open.

To remove a file from the list, right-click the file name and select Remove from file history.
Alternatively, to open a session, when the 3D viewer is open, drag the session from the file explorer and
drop it in the 3D viewer.

Learn
This menu allows accessing learning tools:

1536
 What's new: Useful tool to quickly know about the new features and changes added
to products and software.

E-learning: Useful link to access Online Resources on the Customer Portal.

Click E-learning Content for the training material available on the learning
management system (LMS).

Tutorials: Using examples, tutorials are useful to transfer knowledge and learn how
to perform specific tasks.

Interface

Sections featured in the software interface:

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Icon Function Menu Action

Home
- To return to the startup screen.
page

Module Click the icon to show the active modules within the current
-
selector session and select desired module to switch.

New File | New To create a new session by reinitializing the sensor and clearing
session session existing data.

To save the session (.csf).

Save File | Save

session session Save session is not a Save session as

For details, see the VXelements file types section.

File |
Import .csp, .csf, and .stl files can be opened in the
Import
3D viewer using a drag-and-drop operation.

1537
 Icon Function Menu Action

File |
Export For details, see the VXelements file types section.
Export

File(s)
update - To update license and/or calibration file(s) available.
available

Show the Help |

user Show user To open or close the User Manual.
manual manual

Configure menu

Calibration journal
The calibration journal provides information recorded by the software and relating to every past
calibration. The Configure | Calibration journal menu allows exporting a *.csv file containing session
information such as the date and time, user name, device model, serial number and session results. It is
also possible to visualize the calibration journal or to delete its history through this menu.

Launch IP Configuration
For details see To lauch the IP configurator section.

Probe emulator
For details see VXinspect Probe Emulator section.

Session parameters
The Configure | Session parameters menu allows saving and loading session parameters as well as
setting default parameters when launching the software.
Session parameters can be saved and reused as a time-saving option for scanning similar objects. Be
careful as these actions cannot be reversed.

Available options in the Configure | Session parameters menu:

Save current settings as default session parameters: To use the current parameters each time the
software is launched.

1538
 Restore current settings to default session parameters: To reload and restore all default parameters as
they were when launching the software.
Restore default session parameters to factory settings: To reset all parameters to their factory default
values.

Reference parameters (available using a C-Track)

The Configure | Reference parameters menu allows setting the target model reference that
VXelements uses by default when launching the software.

Available options in the Configure | Reference parameters menu:

Save current reference as default: To use the current target model as the default reference each time
VXelements is launched.
Clear default reference: To reset the current target reference to the factory default value (no
reference).

Product Manager
For details see Product Manager section.

Options
For details see Configuration Options section.

Help menu

See Assistance section.

Toolbar
Available toolbar functions vary depending on the selected node in the Navigation tree.

For details concerning the toolbar, see:

VXscan
VXscan-R
VXshot

1539
VXinspect
VXmodel
VXprobe
VXtrack

Navigation panel
The Navigation panel contains the Navigation tree under which nodes are listed and displayed
depending on the devices and modules purchased:
VXscan
VXscan-R
VXshot
VXinspect|Analysis
VXmodel
VXprobe
VXtrack
When CAD models are imported in a session, a new CAD model node is created under the Navigation
tree.

The visibility icon allows showing (or hiding ) the information within the 3D viewer. A grayed-
out eye icon means the object is not visible but an object related to this object (child) is visible. Selected
entities (CADs, meshes) are blue in the 3D viewer.
To toggle from 1 node to another, use Ctrl + R.
To select multiple meshes or multiple CAD models, use Ctrl + click.

To rename a node or element in the navigation tree

1. Right-click it and select Rename option or

2. Simply click it and enter the new name.

Entity panel
The Entity panel appears while creating an entity. Options and information are available depending of
the module used and the entity created:

1540
Building mode: It can be selected using the drop-down list. The selector control allows users to select,
quickly and easily, entities created in the session.
Name: This box allows giving a specific name to an entity.
Constraints: This option allows constraining the entity based on the Axis, the Orientation or the Half
angle.
Filters: This option allows rejecting points selected by mistake by using an appropriate Fitting method
and by adjusting the Distance and Angle filtering.
Parameters: This option allows setting the dimension (Height, Width, Length, etc.) by entering numerical
values in the text boxes.
Details: This section provides properties information of the active entity and also, if available, the
Standard deviation and Planarity error.
Error distribution: This section shows a color map of the error distribution between the selection done
and the entity created.
Keep constraints, filters and parameters settings: This box can be checked to keep the same
constraints, filters or settings when creating multiple entities of the same type.
Filters are threshold values beyond which points are not considered for building an entity. Filtered points
are shown in pink in the color map of the entity. These values are calculated between the existing
triangles and the entity that is currently being created.
For example, a distance filter allows rejecting all points located beyond a certain distance from the
entity. In the case of an angle filter, the normals' angles are compared against the expected normals of
the entity. In a planar selection, the filter will reject any bumps in the surface since their normal will be
deviating more than the filter value from the normals of the plane. In the example above, the rejects of
the angle filter are located on the edges of the holes and on the bases of the cylinders since they are
higher than the nominal value.
For details on the entity creation in modules:
VXscan
VXinspect|Analysis
VXmodel
VXprobe

Selector control tool

is designed to show all entities created. is designed to show all derived entities while the
others are used as a filter to show each type of entities individually.

1541
When the mouse is moved over an entity in the list, its outline appears highlighted in the 3D viewer.
Select multiple entities by clicking the desired entities while holding Ctrl.

A grayed out icon indicates that no such entity is created or, not suitable for this
selection.

3D viewer
The 3D viewer shows the session results in real- time. Depending on the node selected, it
displays the positioning targets, the scan or the mesh. The 3D viewer also contains a mouse
helper panel and the Display toolbar with various visualization options for the 3D viewer. A
right-click in the 3D viewer opens the Contextual menu. When a function requires it, the
selection mini toolbar appears in the 3D viewer.

3D interactive viewpoint
Located at the bottom left corner of the 3D viewer, the 3D interactive viewpoint
allows setting predefined views by clicking a face, an edge or a vertex of the
cube, or the X, Y or Z axis.
Rotation of the tool about the forward facing axis is possible using the blue
arrows.

System panel
Located at the right side of the 3D viewer, the system panel displays the status and the parameters of the
activated device. For details see the system panel section.

Status bar
Located at the bottom of the screen, the Status bar displays different values concerning the current state
of the software. The scanner status, displayed on the left, can take 3 values:
Ready: The scanner is ready to start the acquisition process. When the scanner is Ready, the status bar
shows the available 3D viewer controls, which depend on the 3D navigation mode defined in the Options
dialog.

1542
Recording: The scanner is currently acquiring data. When the scanner is Recording, the current frame
number is shown as well as the current configuration parameters. The current acquisition frame rate is
displayed on the right of the status bar. On the right end of the status bar is the Memory meter,
displaying the amount of memory used by the software. When this value reaches 100 %, a dialog box
notifies that the software has exceeded the amount of available memory and that resolution will have to
be reduced or unwanted data removed.
Disabled: The software is doing computation and is unable to acquire data.

Contextual help
The contextual help provides immediate assistance and information about the software's main features.
For details, see the Contextual Help section.

1543
Configuration Options
Options can be set through Configure | Options.
It is easy to toggle from one section tab to another.

Options may vary depending of the installed modules.

VXelements
Software language: The software is available in several languages. It must be restarted every time the
language setting is modified.
Color theme: Allows changing the theme or modifying the interface colors of the software.
To customize the manual resolution colors

1. Click the 3-suspension-point button next to the Color theme drop-down menu in the
VXelements tab (Configure | Options).

2. Select the Resolution color (8x to -4x) in the left side of the VXelements - Customize Colors
dialog box.

3. In the right side of the dialog box, under Selected color, click Edit and OK to customize the
manual resolution color, Restore, to go back to the previous one, and Default, to reset the
default color.

4. Repeat the steps for all the colors to customize. To reset the default colors for all interface
items, click Default all and click Close to exit the dialog box.

Length unit: Various length units are available in the software. It is recommended to use length units
comparable to object size measured. The default value is millimeters (mm).
3D navigation mode: This option defines the mouse controls depending of the software selected.
User rights (available only when using a C-Track or HandySCAN 3D): This option allows changing the
user rights. By default, it is set to Super user.

l When using a C-Track, the configuration panel (Configure | C-Track | Configuration) is

available.

l When using a HandySCAN 3D or a Go!SCAN 3D, all the scan parameters are available.

To change the user rights to User

1544
 1. Select User option in the drop-down list.

2. Enter New Password and Confirm New Password.

3. Click OK.

To come back to the Super user rights, enter password to activate Super user mode. Click Forgot your
password? if this is the case.

User rights do not allow accessing the C-Track configuration panel.

User rights only give access to the Remove Isolated Patches function with a HandySCAN 3D
or a Go!SCAN 3D.

Use project folder: The software will create a folder in My Documents. This is the default folder for
saving sessions.
Show toolbar button labels: Labels will appear in the toolbar if this option is selected.
Temporary folder: Set the location for the temporary files. It can be useful for optimizing either space
or speed of the local disk.
CAD model display tessellation tolerance (mm): Set the CAD model tessellation tolerance for the
purpose of visual presentations only. The default value is 0.050 mm.
CAD model inspection tessellation tolerance (mm): Set the CAD model tessellation tolerance for the
purpose of inspections. This is the surface that will be used to compare measured points. The default
value is 0.020 mm.
Auto preview: Select to have previews in the 3D viewer occur automatically.
Set viewer rotation center on click: Click the mouse middle button to set a point in the 3D viewer
around which the mesh will rotate.
Auto preview: The Auto preview option allows seeing the calculation of an element in real time. If this
check box remains cleared, the user will have to click Preview (in the editing window), to see the
calculation of the item before clicking OK.
Clear recent file history: Click to delete the recent file history.
Clear list of silenced message boxes: Click to delete the list of all the message boxes that were ignored
and closed.

Display options
Material glossiness: Adjust the object's glossiness in the 3D viewer.
Quick rendering while moving: Select to lighten file, allowing smooth movements when rotating the
part in the 3D viewer.

1545
Show grid in 2D view: To display the grid in the 2D view.
Show origin: To display the XYZ coordinate system origin.
Show viewpoint reference: Displays the 3D interactive viewpoint in the bottom left corner of the 3D
viewer.
Show linear scale: Display the linear scale based on the zoom level.
Annotation close to border: Moves annotations to edge of 3D viewer perhaps providing better
visibility of 3D objects.
Viewer font size: To adjust the font size of the viewer display.

VXscan options
Show "Reduced measurement rate mode": Select to display the Reduced measurement rate mode
check box in the Scanner parameters pane of the System panel. The Reduced measurement rate mode
option allows the user to use a 11 laser lines scanner (HandySCAN BLACK|Elite) as a 7 laser lines scanner
(HandySCAN BLACK) or a 7 laser lines scanner (MetraSCAN 750/HandySCAN 700) as a 3 laser lines
scanner (MetraSCAN 350/HandySCAN 300).

This function is not available for the MaxSHOT Next or the C-Track.

Enable auto- recovery while scanning: Enabled by default, this option acts as a backup by
automatically saving scan data during a session. If a session fails unexpectedly, data will be recovered
next time the software is launched, even if a computer reboot is necessary. A message asking if you want
to recover data will appear.

l By clicking No: Data will be deleted and will be impossible to recover; a new session will be
opened as usual.

l By clicking Yes: Saved data will be loaded and the scanned surface will be recovered. For raw
scan data only. If the current session contained more than 1 scan, all scan data will be
recovered. Parameters like laser power and resolution cannot be retrieved.

In the case of a saved session where the scanning went on after saving, the session will be loaded with
the recovered scan data when launching the software. The session parameters will also be loaded.
Show message when position lost: Select to have a message displayed when the position is lost
during scanning.

Click volume and Position lost volume: Use sliders to adjust the volume of the click or the
loss of position sound when using a HandySCAN BLACK.

1546
Show isolated patches: Select this option to display (red shaded) the isolated patches detected
according to the slider adjustment.
Resolution colors: To project a color on the scanned areas. It combines the data density indicator (helps
to validate the quantity of data captured on the scanned areas) and the manual resolution colors
(according to the resolution reconstruction factor that was applied). Can be set to Auto, On or Off:

l Auto: Resolution colors are always displayed when scanning and when the scan is stopped. They
are always hidden after the Finalize process, except if the Smart resolution parameter is changed
or if a new manual resolution is applied. When the Smart resolution mode is set to Off, the
resolution colors are not displayed.

l On: Resolution colors are always displayed, even after the Finalize process.

l Off: Resolution colors are never displayed.

See Color theme section to customize the manual resolution colors.

Scanner visibility threshold (MetraSCAN 3D only): Sets the minimum percentage of scanner tracking
targets that must be visible to the C- Track. Default is 73%. Min is 53%. Max is 100%. When the
percentage of visible targets is less than the set value, the scanner will not scan.

VXshot options
Show "Load artifact" button: Select to enable the Load artifact function in the
Photogrammetry parameters pane.

C-Track options
C-Track volume: See dedicated section

l 16.6 m: This option allows the C-Track to measure within all available sections of the C-Track
volume (sections 1 and 2). This is the default volume for MetraSCAN 3D-R and the only
compatible volume for CUBE-R.

l 9.1 m: This option allows the C-Track to measure within section 2 of the C-Track volume,
constraining the measurement to the first 9.1 m3.

Environment compensation: For details, see the Environment Compensation section.

Compensation mode: See dedicated section

1547
 l C-Track calibration bar: Typically used with Quality Control products.

l MaxSHOT scalebar: Used more often with Automated Quality Control or custom applications.

Volume extension: For details, see the Volume Extension section.

Scaling mode

l None:

l C-Track calibration bar: Typically used with Quality Control products.

l MaxSHOT scalebar: Used more often with Automated Quality Control or custom applications.

Allow measurements outside recommended conditions: This check box should not be selected
unless the consequences it will have on measurements are well-known. Accuracy might be impacted.
See C-Track system configuration page for more details.
Use QR code to detect the calibration bar: Default setting. Manual input of calibration bar's file
required if not selected.
Play sound when volume extension is lost: Default setting. A beep is emitted when the C-Track
cannot track at least 4 targets while acquiring the target model.
Use original calibration data: Resets the C-Track CST file to the factory settings. See To reset to the
factory settings.
Calibration expiration (days): The period after which the software considers the calibration outdated.
The default value is 5 days.
Minimum targets threshold: Sets the minimum number of targets (4-40) that need to be tracked when
using a positioning model. Targets will not be detect if the C-Track cannot see the minimum number set.
Use C-Link: Activates C-Link functionality.

Probing options
Automatically detect connected probe tip: Selecting will allow the software to detect the probe tip.
Probing tolerance: Use the slider to adjust tolerance.
Pen button associations: Choose the action for the left and right pen buttons.
Sphere calibration: Set the diameter of the calibration sphere.
Enable probe sounds: Selecting will turn on audible notifications from the probe.
Enable visibility status: Selecting will activate probe visibility status.
Visibility status duration (s): Set from 2-60 seconds.

1548
Update probe firmware: Click and follow the on-screen instructions to update probe's firmware.

Inspection options
Measure confirmation: Displays the Measure confirmation window after an entity is measured.
Configure report for printing: This check box is selected by default. It allows fitting the report in print
format in Excel.
Create annotations automatically: Creating a new entity automatically creates associated annotations.
Use default number of digits after decimal: Deselect to set custom value.

l Number of digits after decimal: Set decimal precision of measurement values (1-11).

Quick add entity:

l Mode: Determine the CAD entity enabled for selection while using the quick add.

l Edge max. distance: Set the searching distance to highlight CAD edges. The default value is 36.

l Surface max. distance: Set the searching distance to highlight CAD surfaces. The default value
is 76.

GD&T standard:

l ASME Y14.5: Select for ASME standard which uses counterpart concept. A datum entity label
must be set to display counterpart dimensions.

l ISO GPS: Select for ISO GPS standard which uses least squares concept.

GD&T requirements: (ASME Y14.5 only)

l Simultaneous requirements: Select forASME Y14.5 simultaneous GD&T requirements.

l Separate requirements: Select for ASME Y14.5 separate GD&T requirements.

Apply simultaneous requirements to callouts with no datum: Overrides exclusion of callouts with no
assigned datum. This is only available if Simultaneous requirements is selected.

When probing:

1549
 Click Accept to access the Confirm measure window.

l Click Accept to confirm the measurement, or

l Click Back to continue probing.

If the entity has already been measured, the Back button will be grayed out (not
available).

Panel location: Set location for Inspection tree and Dimensions table.

VXscan-R options
Robot IP address: Enter the IP address of the robot used for executing the program.
Workspace folder: Select the location of the workspace folder. This is where the group folders will be
saved. VXelements must be restarted every time the workspace folder is modified.
Simulation data generation: Set the amount of simulated data generated for the simulation. The Low
option is used to keep a better frame rate throughout the program, when previewing it. The High option
is used to generate a mesh that will be comparable to a real scan, when mesh quality is important.
Use designated CPUs for VXelements and inspection software (VXelements restart required): This
option allows setting aside a part of the computer processing power for PolyWorks and keeping the rest
for data acquisition in VXelements. It prevents any slowdown in the data acquisition due to the
inspection software.

l Activate this option only on the HP Z6 Industrial Computer, as other computer

configurations might not benefit from it.

l Only enhances the interaction with inspections sent to PolyWorks.

Select a layout: This option allows choosing the standard CUBE-R layout or a custom one.
Scanner model: This option allows changing the scanner model of a session. It will trigger a
reprocessing of the robot trajectories, which will require a path finalization afterwards. The model will
also be used for future sessions when no active scanner is available.

1550
 The scanner model is set up upon creation of a new session. When an active
scanner is available, its model is applied to the session. When it is not, the
parameter chosen in the Scanner model drop-down is used.

Allow "Continue anyway" button in VXscan-R Execute: If left unchecked, VXscan-R will not start the
scan until the proper referential is seen. When checked, the operator can bypass the warning and start
the scan. Operators are responsible for ensuring the path does not damage equipment or cause injury.
Allow multi-layout support: If checked, allows validating a program across multiple installations (i.e.
more than one CUBE-R). See details: Multi-layout procedure.

Color map options

This tab allows setting the color map default settings. When the Automatic values check box is
selected, the Symmetric check box is also selected. The window displays the automatic values because
the values are defined by the entity.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only available
when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the
Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: To reset the color map to its default values.

Online Services options

Connect: Select to activate the Online Services function (for details, see the Online Services section).
Check for new version: Select the frequency at which the update check will occur.
Remember password: Select to save the password.

1551
Forgot your password?: Click the link for help resetting the password.
Register for Online Services: Click the link to request an access to Support section.

User experience enhancements

Choose to whether to share or not to share anonymous usage data (computer specifications,
parameters, etc.) with Creaform. This will help improve the software stability and user experience.

User Experience Enhancement Program

Program participation
When you participate in the Creaform User Experience Enhancement Program, you help Creaform to
improve the overall user experience and software stability.
Once you provide your consent to join the program, your data will be collected and analyzed to
establish aggregated usage trends and determine crash causes, fix issues, and create solutions. The
more data we receive, the better we can build Creaform products to fit your future needs and the better
the user experience will be.
Although Creaform strongly recommends that its users participate in this program for their own and
other users’ benefit, participation remains voluntary, and you can opt out of the program at any time.
The overall system performance will not be affected by program participation.

Types of data collected and how it is used to improve the overall user experience
Creaform’s software will send data that contains software option settings, system parameters, and
computer information in real time to Google Analytics when there is an active Internet connection. If the
software is used without an Internet connection, no data will be transferred or stored on your computer.
If the software option User experience enhancements is left unchecked, then the data is only sent to
Creaform if the application crashes and you agree to send it. If the option is checked and there is an
active Internet connection, then the data is sent in real time to Google Analytics.
Data collected is used to analyze hardware and operating system trends for future release versions. Data
is also used to link crashes to potential software system parameters and option settings in order to
identify, resolve, and explain technical problems. The following data are collected:

l User location

l Software language

l Software parameters

l Product Type (NOT the serial number)

1552
 l License Type (NOT the serial number)

l Size of scanned object (resolution and number of triangles)

l Computer manufacturer

l Computer model and hardware specifications

l Video card manufacturer and driver version

l Operating system version

l Software version

l Software session user interface command sequence

Privacy protection
The Creaform User Experience Enhancement Program does not collect any personal data, nor does it
acquire any information about the model geometry and images or the usage of applications or activities
that relate to the intellectual property of your scans that would enable the reconstruction of your
scanned data.
Data collected is treated confidentially. Creaform is committed to protecting your privacy and uses
industry-standard controls to ensure the security of the collected data. The information collected is
handled in accordance with Creaform’s Privacy Policy.
You can change your participation in the program at any time by clicking Configure| Options | User
Experience Enhancements and select or clear I wish to help improve Creaform's software by sending
anonymous usage data.

1553
Mouse and Keyboard Controls

Mouse navigation buttons

Available mouse controls will be displayed depending on the module or option

selected.

The 3D model is located in the 3D viewer.

To show the mouse navigation panel, click at the bottom left corner of the 3D viewer.

To hide it, click again or .

Press Ctrl key to access more controls.
For third-party software mouse navigation controls, see the relevant documentation.

Keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are available through the Help menu (Help | Keyboard shortcuts).

1554
Contextual Menu

3D viewer
Right-click the 3D viewer to open the contextual menu.

Available options vary according to the connected devices and the active modules.

In some or all cases, the contextual menu functions are also available by clicking
View in the menu bar.

Undo/Redo viewpoint allows returning to a previous position of the 3D model. Useful

when moving the 3D model to capture an image of the 3D viewer.
Predefined view allows setting the required view the required view: X+, X-, Y+
Y- Z+ , Z- or Isometric .
C-Track views allows setting the C-Track viewpoint.
Center viewpoint allows centering the viewpoint in the 3D viewer by clicking a specific
point of the mesh.
Set viewpoint (for CAD only) allows setting a normal viewpoint of a CAD surface in the 3D
viewer.
Fit to screen brings the 3D model to the center of the 3D viewer.

Lock viewpoint allows locking the viewer in its current position. It is still possible to zoom
and rotate but the viewer will remain static while the acquisition is in progress. Useful for
acquiring data on small details. The default value is unchecked.
Lock zoom sets the zoom level while the viewer follows the movements of the scanner.
Useful when scanning small details. The default value is unchecked.
Photogrammetry display mode allows changing the shooting viewing mode. Can be set to:
l 3D view shows only the 3D view.

1555
 l Image view allows seeing a greater number of details in each image.

This mode has specific contextual menu functions:

l Fit image: Brings the image back to its actual size (after zooming).

l Quick rendering while moving: Reduces the image resolution to ease its translation
in the viewer (after zooming).

l Contrast: Shows the image contrast level. Can be set from 0% to 100% (25%
increments).

l Show target ID: Shows associated identification number for all detected targets.

l Show coded target ID: Shows associated identification number for all detected
coded targets.

l Combined view shows the Image view and the 3D view at the same time.
Capture 3D viewer image allows capturing and saving 3D viewer images from the current
session.
Optimize annotation layout: Repositions annotations for better visibility. Annotations close
to border must be disable in Configure | Options | Display options for this to function.
Show all hidden panels makes any hidden panels in the Navigation panel visible.

Right-clicking a mesh in the 3D viewer will open the entity contextual menu. See
Navigation panel for list.

Navigation panel
Right-click an item (e.g. entity, snapshot, feature, scan sweep) in the tree view of the Navigation panel to
open the contextual menu.

Available options vary depending on the item or node selected.

Activate: To activate the selected alignment.

Add coded target: To add a coded target in a model under the Tracking models node.
Add model: To choose the model to associate with the sequence.
Add model relation: To select the model whose position will be monitored relative to
another model (using the coordinate system of the model the tracking will be referenced to).
For details, see the Tracking Sequences section.

1556
Add model relation in active frame: To select the model whose position will be monitored
relative to another model (using the C-Track coordinate system). For details, see the Tracking
Sequences section.
Assign to all: To assign the selected alignment to all entities.
Clear selected: To clear the measurement of the selected items in the inspection program.

Convert to jog feature: To turn an edge, surface or manual sweep into a jog feature.
Confirm measure: Display the selected entity properties (dimensions, GD&T).

For details, see the Configuration Options section.

Copy annotations to all parts: Deviation annotations of the active part and active entity, as
well as their layout in the 3D viewer, are copied to all parts.
This process overwrites existing deviation annotations and cannot be undone.
Create angle: To measure the angle created by two intersecting entities.
Create distance: To measure the distance between two selected entities.
Delete: To delete the item. In VXscan-R, the function allows deleting 1 or several features. It
also removes all the sweeps related to the deleted features. 1
Delete selected targets: Targets that are not to be included in the model. This action will
keep the deleted targets in the table but marked as Deleted.
Disable all scan sweeps: To disable all scan sweeps created using the selected feature. For
details, see the Add Feature section.
Duplicate: To copy the selected entity and all its parameters. 1
Duplicate to: To copy selected entities from one VXelements module to another.
Edit: To select one or multiple items, right-click the selection, and Edit.

Edit color map: To edit the color map settings.

Edit features: To modify selected features in VXscan-R. Only available when multiple features
are selected. Double-clicking a single feature opens the Edit a feature window for a single
feature.
Entity annotations: To add annotation labels to any entity and display the assigned
dimensions and GD&T. 1
Enable: To add the selected scan sweep(s) in the 3D viewer and in the timeline. Enabled
sweeps will be displayed in pale yellow, unless selected (dark orange), and will be taken into
account in the robot scanning path.
Enable all scan sweeps: To enable all scan sweeps created using the selected feature. For
details, see the Add Feature section.
Export selected alignment: To export the selected alignment. For details, see the File Types
section.
Export all entities: To export all entities. For details, see the File Types section.
Export all measurements: To export measurements of all entities.
Export all nominals: To export nominals of all entities.
Export color map: To perform the export in the assigned alignment. For details, see the File
Types section.
Export mesh: To export a mesh in multiple file formats.

Export probed points: To export the probed points of the selected part.

1557
Export report: To export the inspection report of the selected part.
Export selected entities: To export the selected entities in IGES, STEP, CSV or Autodesk DXF
formats. 1
Export selected measurements: To perform the export in the assigned alignment. For
details, see the File Types section. 1
Export selected nominals: To perform the export in the assigned alignment. For details, see
the File Types section. 1
Export selected models to CSV: To export specific models from a sequence in the CSV
format (Excel).
Export to CSV: To export a sequence in the CSV format (Excel).
Finalize: To optimize the scan surface and obtain a valid mesh for export.
Finalize: To finalize the path of the selected sweeps, removing potential collisions in VXscan-
R. This differs from Reorder and finalize and Finalize path accessed from the toolbar.
Fit to screen: To zoom on an entity, multiple entities selected or a group. It only apply
translation and zoom level to the selection in the 3D viewer. 1
Go to: To move the robot from the Home position to the starting point of the selected sweep.
Group: To group multiple selected item(s). 1

Hide all entities: To hide all entities in the 3D viewer.

Inspect mesh: To send the mesh and part information to VXinspect|Quality Control.

Inspect model: To launch an inspection program for the photogrammetric model and
create a best-fit alignment and a color map.
Measure selected: To launch the measurement of the selected items in the inspection
program. The selected items that were previously measured are remeasured.
Merge: To merge two or more .stl files.
Move to: To move the selected items in the Navigation panel or in the Inspection program
table. 1
Order entities: To order the entities by type, by order of creation and by name in the Entities
node.
Order items: To order the items by type, by order of creation, and by name in the Navigation
panel or in the Inspection program table.
Permanently delete selected targets: Targets that are not to be included in the model. This
action is irreversible.
Properties: To display the mesh properties.
Remove all models: To remove all tracking models from the navigation tree.
Remove all models from sequence: To remove all the models included in the tracking
sequence.
Remove all sequences: To remove all tracking sequences from the navigation tree.
Remove model: To remove a specific tracking model from the navigation tree or a
sequence.
Remove sequence: To remove a tracking sequence from the navigation tree.
Rename: To rename the item.

In VXscan-R, it is also possible to click a feature's name to rename it.

1558
 Replace mesh: To replace the mesh of the active part. The old mesh will be deleted in
VXinspect or move in Unassigned data node in VXinspect|Quality Control. The inspection
program will automatically be recalculated.
Restore selected targets: Targets that are to be restored in the model.
Send to VXmodel: Sends a scan to VXmodell.
Send to VXscan-R as collision envelope: Adds mesh to VXscan-R session for custom
collision envelope.
Show all entities: To show all entities in the 3D viewer.
Show all hidden panels makes any hidden panels in the Navigation panel visible.
Show only selected: To show, in the 3D viewer, only the selected items (entity, group, mesh,
reference) in the Navigation panel or in the Inspection program table.1
Transfer to: To transfer the mesh to SOLIDWORKS, Inventor, Fusion 360, or Solid Edge
software. If the third-party software is closed, VXmodel will launch it and create a new part. If
the third-party software is already open, VXmodel will send the entities to the active part.
Compatible versions:
SOLIDWORKS 2015 or later
Inventor 2016 or later
Fusion 360 2022 or later
Solid Edge 2014 or later
Use collision envelope for...: To assign a collision envelope as Table, Enclosure, Robot model
or Calibration plate.

1 To make a multiple selection, hold the Ctrl key + click (or the Shift key) and
choose the items.

Timeline (VXscan-R)
Disable: To remove the selected scan sweep (s) from the 3D viewer and the timeline.
Disabled sweeps will not be taken into account in the robot scanning path. They are moved
to the end of the sweep list in the navigation tree and cannot be edited (only be enabled or
converted to a jog feature).
Finalize: To finalize the path of the selected sweeps, removing potential collisions (in
VXscan-R).
Flip: To rotate the orientation of the scanner cameras by 180 degrees around the optical
vector (Rz).
Reverse: To invert the scanning path by swapping the start and end point of the sweep.
Merge: To assemble 2 or more sweeps. The sweeps will be reordered for an optimal merge
and the resulting sweep will contain the points from the merged sweeps (in VXscan-R).
Split: To divide a sweep or a merged sweep into several segments which can be moved
around in the timeline to reorder the scanning path.
Optimize transition: To let the software try to find a solution for finalizing the transition.

1559
Tracked entity window (VXtrack)
Translation

l Group curves: Groups X, Y, Z curves in the same graph.

l X, Y, Z: Shows or hides the specified coordinate.

Rotation

l Group curves: Groups rX, rY, rZ curves in the same graph.

l rX, rY, rZ: Shows or hides the specified rotation axis.

View all: To show all tracking sequences. For details, see the Data Acquisition section.
Graph view: The active curves can be selected from the Translation and Rotation sub-
menus. For details, see the Data Acquisition section.
Table view: This view contains the position of each target. For details, see the Data
Acquisition section.

l Available contextual menu functions: Graph view, Table view, and Projection view.
Projection view: The active curves can be selected from a selection of a projection plane.
For details, see the Data Acquisition section.

l Available contextual menu functions: XY projection, ZY projection, XZ

projection, Graph view, Table view, and Projection view.

1560
Display toolbar
Located at the bottom on the 3D viewer, the Display toolbar adjusts visualizations in the 3D viewer.
Available options vary according to the connected devices and the active modules.

Mesh display
Adjusts mesh surface appearance in the 3D viewer.

Shading:

l Flat

l Smooth

Display as:

l Triangles

l Triangles and wire frame

l Point cloud

l Transparent triangles

l Wire frame

Show boundaries: Select to highlight the mesh boundaries. It is useful to identify missing triangles after
scanning.

The Display as options are only available after the Scan mode (not during the
acquisition process).

CAD display
Adjusts the appearance of a CAD model in the 3D viewer.

1561
Display as:

l Surfaces and boundaries

l Surfaces

l Boundaries

l Transparent surfaces

l Transparent surfaces and boundaries

Surface display
Adjusts the appearance of surfaces in the 3D viewer.

Display as:

l Shaded

l Shaded with boundaries

l Shaded with wire frame and boundaries

C-Track scene
Allows displaying different elements in the 3D viewer depending on the device connected.
Lock C-Track viewpoint: Select to make the C-Track external viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer. If the
part moves in relation to the C-Track, it will also move in the 3D viewer. Clear to make the part fixed in
the 3D viewer. If the part moves in relation to the C-Track, the C-Track will move in the 3D viewer.
Show C-Track: To display the C-Track CAD model.
Show C-Track volume: To display the C-Track working volume.
Show HandyPROBE: To display the HandyPROBE CAD model.
Show MetraSCAN: To display the MetraSCAN 3Dor MetraSCAN 3D-R CAD model.
Show environment compensation volume: Only available when the Environment Compensation
function is activated.

1562
Setup assistance tools: Provides real-time information about target model. C-Track setup must be
active to display. Available for C-Track (G4), C-Track|Elite, and C-Track+|Elite.

l Show target volume: Shows the optimal working volume based on the observed targets in the
3D viewer.

l Show target deviation vectors: Provides real-time feedback for each target via deviation
whiskers and a color scale. Green indicates <0.100m. Yellow to read indicates 0.100mm to
0.500mm. The Target Deviation Vector Multiplier slider will adjust the length of the whiskers.

l Show target deviation table: Displays a sortable-by-column table in the lower panel that
contains the deviation value of each target tracked by the C-Track and part of the positioning
model. Selecting a target in the table will highlight it in the 3D viewer and vice versa.

Entity display
Viewer alignment: To assign a specific alignment to the 3D viewer. It overrides the individual alignment
of each inspection item.

If the DRF alignment is selected, it displays the location of Primary, Secondary and
Tertiary datums.

Show annotations: To display annotations in the 3D viewer.

Show measured: To display the created entities in the 3D viewer.
Show measured data: To display the data (from mesh or probed points) that is used to create entities in
the 3D viewer.
Show nominal: To display nominal entities in the 3D viewer.
Display color maps with shading: Toggle shading for color maps to avoid potential distortion of
colors.

Perspective view
Displays the reference and/or the mesh in the 3D viewer with perspective.

1563
 Clip view
View parts of the 3D model by hiding a part of it in the 3D viewer. The orientation of the plane used to
hide the object is set using the current view. By default, it hides 50% of the object. Adjust using the
slider. This option can be useful to view the interior part of an object to validate the 3D model.

Deviation vector multiplier

Applies a scaling factor to the deviation vectors for better visualization. Click to reset the value.

2D view
To display a 2D view of a cross-section. Available when a 2D entity is selected.

C-track setup

Shows C-track and its observation cone in the 3D viewer. Choose from four different viewpoints:

(Top viewpoint), (Back viewpoint), (Side viewpoint), or (Isometric viewpoint). toggles

between locking and unlocking the viewpoint.

Lock viewpoint
To make the part fixed in the 3D viewer. If the part moves in relation to the C-Track, the C-Track will
move in the 3D viewer. Clear to make the C-Track external viewpoint fixed in the 3D viewer. If the part
moves in relation to the C-Track, it will also move in the 3D viewer.

Scanning viewpoint
Viewpoint follows scanner during scan.

1564
 Show collision envelope
Displays the safety zone around the robot, rotary table, and scanner in the 3D viewer. This helps prevent
collisions between devices.

VXshot display
Show all cameras: To set the view so that the camera positions are displayed at all times.
Show targets: To show all detected non-coded targets.
Show coded targets: To show all detected coded targets.
Show coded target ID: To show associated identification number for all detected coded targets.
Show accessories: To show the accessories used with the MaxSHOT 3D.

Touchscreen mode (F10)

Toggle between standard display and a display interface designed for touchscreens.

Target quality indicator

Toggle to highlight the acquired targets in the 3D viewer. Green indicates good and red indicates a
problem.
In Scale bar mode, the target indicator is split into 8 viewpoint sections.

1565
System Panel
The system panel contains information relating to the activated and connected devices. It is a useful tool
as it aims to quickly access functions and view the device statuses.

Prior to starting any process, make sure to set the parameters where appropriate.

Visibility pane
The Visibility pane contains sections that differ according to the connected devices.

C-Track

l Gray background: Active positioning target model is seen by the C-Track. Acquisition can be
performed.

l Red background: Active positioning target model is not seen by the C-Track. Acquisition
cannot be performed.

HandyPROBE, MetraSCAN 3D, and MetraSCAN 3D-R

l Gray background: Device is seen by the C-Track. Acquisition can be performed.

l Red background: Device is not seen by the C-Track. Acquisition cannot be performed.

Device tabs
Click a tab to display the relevant panes. Only the tabs pertaining to the connected devices appear.

Available information in tabs

C-Track

1566
 l Model and serial number

l C-Track calibration status

l Connection status

l Gray banner: Indicates that the device is correctly connected or seen by the C-Track.

l Red banner: A question sign will appear when hovering over it, indicating the device
is not correctly connected or not seen by the C-Track. Click it to open a pop-up
window showing a message detailing the status and possible solutions to the
problem.

l
Calibrate all

l
Calibration

l
Configuration

l
C-Track setup

Reference parameters

l
Environment Compensation

l
Target acquisition modes

l
Volume extension

l
Referencing modes

Scanner

1567
 l Model and serial number

l
Device status or and calibration status (if connected)

l
Scanner calibration

l
Scanner configuration

l Positioning parameters

l Scanner parameters

l High resolution multiplier

HandyPROBE

l Model and serial number

l
Calibrate all

l
Configuration

Probes

l Probe tip calibration status

l Probe tip name

l
Calibration with cone

l
Calibration with sphere

l Remove

l Add

l Edit

1568
 Probing parameters

l Multishot mode

l Distance

l Frequency

VXtrack

l Tracking

l Model positions

CUBE-R
CUBE-R programs

l Robot cell serial number

l
Automated C-Track calibration

l
Automated scanner calibration

l
Automated photogrammetry

l Calibration bar1 drop-down menu

Probe emulator pane

The Probe emulator pane contains information on the simulated stylus.
Options

l Probe diameter

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1569
Noise

l Position

l Angle

Probe position pane

This pane displays the current Cartesian position of the probe (X, Y, Z).

1570
File Types

Calibration and license files

Calibration files (.cst and .sbcf) and license files (.clf) are specific to each system. These files can be
managed through the Product Manager and can be retrieved on the Customer Portal.
License files are valid for specific software versions, whereas calibration files do not need to be updated
at each software update.

System type Calibration file License file

Scanner serial_number.cst serial_number.clf
C-Track serial_number.cst serial_number.clf
Scale bar serial_number.sbcf1 none

1 Stands for Scale bar calibration file. This file is required to perform C-Track calibration when QR code is not used. It
contains information related to the bar target distance.

Module-specific input and output formats

Different file types are supported or generated according to the module activated:

l
VXscan

l
VXscan-R

l
VXshot

l
VXinspect

l
VXmodel

l
VXprobe

l
VXtrack

1571
Input formats

Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function
To insert a
scan in the
current
session. The
imported
session must
Import | Import include at least
.csf x
scan one scan with
data. Scanners
from the same
category must
be used for all
scans to be
imported.
To use a mesh
as a 3D
reference to
Use clipping delete
.stl, .obj,
reference | x triangles
.csf
Import mesh outside a
defined range
around the 3D
reference.
To use a CAD
model as a 3D
reference to
Use clipping
.iges, .igs, delete
reference |
.step, .stp, x triangles
Import CAD
.csf outside a
model
defined range
around the 3D
reference.
To use a
Import | C-Track
positioning
positioning .txt x x x x x
model created
targets
with a C-Track.

1572
 Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function
To import a
positioning
model created
with a
HandySCAN
Import | 3D, a Go!SCAN
Positioning .txt x 3D or a
targets MaxSHOT
Next. The
current scan
will be reset if
importing
targets.
To use
predefined
settings made
by the user
such as
Import | Scan
.csp x resolution,
template
shutter speed,
clipping
objects, and
positioning
parameters.
To import 3D
data as
Import | Mesh in .stl, .obj,
x triangles and
VXmodel .csf, .crm
texture (.obj
files only).
To import 3D
data as
triangles.
VXinspect
does not
support
Import | Mesh in .stl, .obj,
x texture. The
VXinspect .csf, .crm
mesh is used
as a reference
mesh (nominal
mesh), or as
the mesh to
inspect.

1573
 Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function
To import
Comparison
Import nominal
.csv x points
points
nominals from
a file.
To use a
Import | Optical positioning
.txt x x
measurement model for
inspection.
To use 2D
texture data
produced with
the Go!SCAN
Import | Texture .bmp x x 3D, or apply
modified 2D
texture data to
the current
mesh.
To apply the
modified 2D
projections of
the texture to
the current
Import |
.png x x mesh. A
Snapshot
snapshot is a
planar
projection of
the saved
viewpoint.
To use a
positioning
model (coded
targets, groups
of optical
Import | Tracking reflectors or
.txt x
model positioning
targets)
created in
another
VXelements
session.

1574
 Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function

VXinspect and
VXprobe: to
use a mesh file
or CAD model
as the nominal.
VXscan- R : to
use CAD
model (s) as a
.stl, .obj, reference for
Import | .iges, .igs,
x x x x x programming.
Reference .step, .stp,
.csf, .crm VXmodel: to
use CAD
model(s) or
mesh to be
compared
(Compare
function) to
the current
mesh.
To import an
inspection
program and
the reference
model. The
Import |
.csf x links to any
Inspection
part,
measurement
and Creaform
products will
be lost.
To import a
fixture used to
.stl, .obj, prevent
.iges, .igs, collision with
Import | Fixture x
.step, .stp, the robot and
.csf, .crm simulate the
scanning
program.

1575
 Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function
To open the
complete
session which
includes the
inspection
program, the
File | Open
.csf x reference
session
model, the
part, the
measurements
and the links
to Creaform
products.
To import the
list of probes
and their
Import | Probe
.cpd x x calibration
database
information
from another
computer.
Manual
alignment >
To apply the
Import
transformation
alignment from
matrix of an
file (VXinspect) .txt x x
alignment to a
Apply alignment
new
> Import
alignment.
alignment from
file (VXmodel)
To use
predefined
parameters of
a custom scale
bar (bar name,
Photogrammetry
name and
parameters |
.csbl x length of
Import lists from
targets, of
a file
target mounts
and of
extension rods,
and coded
target ID).

1576
 Menu2 or
Extension Purpose
Function
To add a new
reference
frame. If a new
Photogrammetry reference
parameters | Add .crf x frame is added
reference frame after taking
images, the
project will be
reset.
To use
predefined
Scanner
Scanner
Configuration
configuration |
.csc x settings made
Configuration
by the user
preset
such as shutter
speed and
HDR mode.

2 Some import features are not accessible through the Menu, but directly in the
specified function.

Output formats

1577
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
Export | Export
.ls, .urp,
to I/O Module |
.script, x
Export C-Track
.dat, .src
calibration
Export | Export
to I/O Module | .ls, .urp,
Export locate .script, x
C-Track .dat, .src
trajectory
Creates files for I/O
.zip, .csc, Module. See details.
Export | Export .csp, .ls,
to I/O Module | .iosid,
x
Export scan .urp,
trajectory .script,
.dat, .src
Export | Export
.ls, .urp,
to I/O Module |
.script, x
Export scanner
.dat, .src
calibration
Export | C- To save a positioning
Track model created with a
.txt x x x x x
positioning C-Track and use it in
targets another session.
To save some targets
of a positioning
model created with a
Export | Select
HandySCAN 3D, a
positioning .txt x
Go!SCAN 3D, or a
targets
MaxSHOT Next, and
use them in another
scanning session.
To save a positioning
model created with a
Export | Scan HandySCAN 3D, a
positioning .txt x x Go!SCAN 3D, or a
targets MaxSHOT Next, and
use it in another
scanning session.
To save a positioning
Export | model created with a
Photogrammet MaxSHOT Next and
.txt x
ry positioning use it in another
targets photogrammetry
session.

1578
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save settings made
such as resolution,
shutter speed1,
Export | Scan
.csp x x clipping objects, and
template
positioning
parameters in the
active alignment.

1Unit of measurement which determines how long the shutter remains open.

1579
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save 3D data as
points, triangles and
texture (.obj files only)
for use in CAD
software, for quality
control, for 3D
printing, and other
manufacturing
applications.

.stl: Main
output
format
compatibl
e with
various
post-
.stl, .txt, processin
.obj, .zpr, g software
.wrl, .ply,
.x3dz, applicatio
Export | Mesh .x3d, .ma, x x x ns. It
.dae, .fbx, contains
.3mf,
.iges, .igs, 3D data as
.crm triangles,
but
cannot
include
texture
informati
on.

.obj : Main
output
format for
3D
texturedat
a

1580
Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n

produced
with the
Go!SCAN
3D. It
results in
3 files: an
.obj file,
which
contains
the object
geometry,
a .bmp
file, which
contains
the object
texture,
and a .mtl
file, which
holds the
rendering
propertie
s. These 3
files
cannot be
renamed
and there
should
not be
any space
in their
name.

1581
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save entities for
reverse engineering in
CAD software.

.csv files
are not
available
for curves
and
surfaces.

.dxf files
are not
Export | .iges, .igs,
All/Selected .step, .stp, x x x available
entities .csv, .dxf for
surfaces.
See
guide.

A
VXmodel
or
VXinspect
license is
required.

To save
measurements
acquired by optical
Export | Optical
.txt x probing for
measurement
measurement
extraction in the
inspection program.

1582
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save 2D texture
data produced with
the Go!SCAN 3D for
editing in third-party
Export | Texture .bmp x x software. The object
texture is saved
according to the set
projection type in the
texture parameters.
To save 2D texture
data produced with
the Go!SCAN 3D for
editing in third-party
Export |
.png x x software. The texture
Snapshot
snapshot is saved as a
planar projection of
the current viewpoint
in the 3D viewer.
To save a positioning
model (coded targets,
groups of optical
Export | reflectors or
.txt x
Tracking model positioning targets)
created with VXtrack
for use in another
tracking session.
To save a recording of
tracking models
created with VXtrack
for analysis in another
Export | software program.
Tracking .csv x The sequence is saved
sequence as a .csv (Comma
Separated Values).
Values in a .csv file are
separated by
semicolons (;).
To summarize results
.pdf, .xls,
Export | Report x of the inspection
.html, .csv
report.
To save the list of
probes and their
Export | Probe
.cpd x x calibration
database
information for use on
another computer.

1583
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save the
coordinates of probed
points and
Export | Probed information related to
.txt x
points the probe tip such as
its orientation during
probing. One text file
is saved per part.
To visualize the color
map in 3D
Manufacturing
Tools |
Format. When
Compare >
.3mf & exporting from the
Export color x
.png Compare function,
mesh and color
the color mesh is
scale
saved as a .3mf file
and the color scale is
saved as a .png file.
To save the
transformation matrix
of an alignment to
Export
.txt x x x apply it to a mesh in
alignment(s)
the current session, in
another session, or in
an inspection project.
iges, .igs,
Export selected To export nominals of
.step, .stp, x
nominals geometric entities.
.csv, .dxf

1584
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To export
measurements of
geometric entities for
reverse engineering in
CAD software.

A
measure
ment is
saved as a
counterpa
rt entity if
the entity
alignment
is a DRF
iges, .igs, alignmen
Export selected
.step, .stp, x
measurements t.
.csv, .dxf

A
measure
ment is
saved as a
best-fit
entity if
the entity
alignment
is not a
DRF
alignmen
t.

To visualize the color

Export color map in 3D
.3mf x
map Manufacturing
Format.

1585
 Menu3 or Extensio
Purpose
Function n
To save parameters of
a custom scale bar
Photogrammet
(bar name, name and
ry parameters |
.csbl x length of targets, of
Export lists
target mounts and of
from a file
extension rods, and
coded target ID).
To save Scanner
Scanner
Configuration settings
configuration |
.csc x made by the user
Configuration
such as shutter speed
preset
and HDR mode.

3 Some export features are not accessible through the Menu, but directly in the
specified function.

General output formats

Menu Extension Purpose
File | Save session as .csf To save session in native format.
View | Capture 3D viewer To save a 3D viewer image from the current
.png, .jpeg, .bmp, .gif
image session.
Configure | Calibration To save the calibration results from the current
.csv
journal | Export and previous sessions.
Help | Create system To save relevant information for Customer
.txt
information file Support help.

.DXF export tips and parameters

Steps for .dxf export:

1. Create 2D entities.

2. Change alignment for these entities to be on the XY plane. Make sure the planes' axes
are oriented correctly.

3. Select entities currently on XY plane desired for .dxf export.

1586
4. Right-click selected entities and then click Export selected entities.

5. Choose a file name and location. Click Save.

6. Repeat until all desired .dxf files are created.

1587
Add Entity
Refer to the relevant section for information on how to add basic entities:

The entities available can vary depending on the software module used.

VXscan
VXinspect
VXmodel
VXprobe

1588
Add Alignment
Refer to the relevant module for information on how to add alignments:
VXscan
VXinspect
VXmodel
VXprobe

1589
References
It is possible to import a CAD or mesh for a reference into VXelements in .igs, .iges, .stp, .stl, .obj, or .cs

file format by clicking . After importing a reference, a References node appears in the Navigation
tree.

In VXinspect, references can also be imported from a saved session. Choosing .csf
files from the Import reference dialog box will load the references from the selected
session into the active session.

CAD reference
Mesh reference

1590
VXelements Modules
VXelements gathers different modules and tools.
VXscan
VXscan-R
VXshot
VXinspect
VXmodel
VXprobe
VXtrack

1591
VXscan Overview
VXscan is the data acquisition module integrated in VXelements. It is designed to be used with Creaform
scanners and includes several features.
Interface
Using VXscan
Add entity
Add alignment
Edit scan
Optimize scan
Clipping objects
Delete frames
Smart resolution
Manual resolution
Merge scans
Add scan
Scan template
Basic guided workflow
Small part guided workflow

Technical requirements

VXscan has standard requirements for installation and usage.

1592
VXscan Interface

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar
Module navigation:

Available when scanning

Icon Function Action
with:
Click the icon to show the active modules
Module selector within the current session and select All devices
desired module to switch.
To activate scale bar mode for enhanced
Scale bar mode HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite
volumetric accuracy.

Scan To start the scanning process. All devices

▼

Stop scan To stop the scanning process. All devices

HandySCAN 3D
Scan surface To acquire the surface and output a mesh.
MetraSCAN 3D
HandySCAN 3D
Scan points To acquire the surface and output points.
MetraSCAN 3D

Scan positioning HandySCAN 3D

To acquire the positioning targets.
targets Go!SCAN SPARK
To trigger the teaching mode during robot
Teach MetraSCAN-R BLACK
programming workflow.
To apply Scan parameters related to
surface quality and accuracy of the model
and Texture parameters to get a valid Go!SCAN SPARK
mesh that can be exported as an *.stl.
Finalize
To apply Scan parameters to a scan to get HandySCAN BLACK
a valid mesh (without texture) that can be MetraSCAN BLACK
exported as an *.stl. Go!SCAN SPARK

1593
 Available when scanning
Icon Function Action
with:
To delete all acquired data in the current
Reset scan scan (parameters will not be reinitialized as All devices
in New session).
To decrease calculation time and see the MetraSCAN 3D
Preview final result rapidly without completely
stopping the scan. Go!SCAN 3D
To aim the scanner at the last frame or go
Resume scan back to a previously captured bunch of Go!SCAN 3D
targets.
To delete frames by correcting the
positioning errors, when the object
Delete frames Go!SCAN 3D
geometry is not sufficient or slightly
ambiguous.
Remove To delete triangles (and optionally targets)
All devices
background using a plane.
To create a plane using a line, vertices,
Add clipping targets or the background and delete
All devices
plane triangles (and optionally targets) outside
the plane's boundaries.
To create a 3D reference using a scan, a
Use clipping CAD model or a mesh or to delete
All devices
reference triangles outside a defined range around
the 3D reference.

Delete triangles To delete the selected triangles. All devices

To permanently delete isolated patches

Delete isolated
hidden by the Remove isolated patches All devices
patches
slider under the Scan parameters.

Keep only To delete all unselected triangles. All devices

Delete selected HandySCAN 3D

To delete the selected targets.
targets Go!SCAN 3D
To delete all natural features. This option
Delete all natural
allows removing all acquired features, Go!SCAN 3D
features
keeping on scanning the same session.

To increase the triangle resolution level HandySCAN 3D

Increase resolution
applied on selected areas. MetraSCAN 3D

To decrease the triangle resolution level HandySCAN 3D

Decrease resolution
applied on selected areas.
MetraSCAN 3D

1594
 Available when scanning
Icon Function Action
with:

Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 700
To manually change the resolution applied
Manual resolution HandySCAN BLACK
on a selected area.
HandySCAN 3D MAX
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN-R BLACK

Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 700

Clear manual To clear the selected data and prevent HandySCAN BLACK
resolution manual reconstruction.
HandySCAN 3D MAX
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN-R BLACK
scanners
To re-apply the texture recorded during
Apply texture Go!SCAN 3D
the acquisition on the mesh.
To display the 2D texture file as a bitmap
View texture Go!SCAN 3D
in a specified projection.
To edit the geometric primitive onto which
the texture is projected (available for
Move projection Go!SCAN 3D
spherical, cylindrical or cubic projection
types).

Alignments To create basic alignments. All devices

1595
 Available when scanning
Icon Function Action
with:

Basic entities To create basic entities. All devices

Measure To create measure entity. All devices

Import scan To import scan(s). All devices

Add scan To add a new scan to the session. All devices

Merge scans To merge multiple scans together. All devices

Send scan: To see available export destinations for the current scan session.

Inspect mesh in To inspect the mesh using

All devices
VXinspect|Analysis VXinspect|Analysis
Inspect mesh in
To inspect the mesh using
VXinspect|Quality All devices
VXinspect|Quality Control
Control

Send to VXmodel To send the mesh to VXmodel. All devices

To send the scan to different Creaform

Send to different
software (e.g. VXintegrity) or another All devices
software.
version of VXelements.

1596
 Available when scanning
Icon Function Action
with:

To perform a step-by-step scan process.

Basic guided
Does not apply to the All devices
workflow
R-Series product line.

Small part guided To perform a step-by-step scan process of HandySCAN BLACK

workflow small parts in multiple setups. Go!SCAN SPARK

* For details, see the Texture node section.

Functions only available in the menu

Available when
Icon Function Action
scanning with:

This tool will consider all the positioning

targets observed to optimize their position.
It becomes available if:

l A positioning target is deleted.

l The Optimize volumetric accuracy

option has not already been

Optimize performed.
volumetric
accuracy
HandySCAN 3D
Also accessible under
Positioning
parameters in the
system panel.

l A new positioning target image is

acquired.

Copy positioning To duplicate the current positioning targets

targets in a new project.

1597
Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item in
the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Navigation panel
Use the Navigation panel to switch between the components of a VXscan session and perform various
actions.
Navigation pane
Select a node to display its components in the navigation tree and to get access to its details:
Scan node
This node is created when a scan is performed or when a session with a scan in it is opened. When this
node is selected, the 3D viewer shows the final result of the scan with triangles structured as a .stl file.
Different scan modes are available depending on the connected device.
Scan status

Icon Scan status

Scanning

Empty

Target only

Not finalized

Finalized

Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Scan details pane

This pane provides information on the selected scan in the navigation tree.
Resolution: Resolution value set in the Scan parameters pane.
Estimated triangle count: Estimate of the number of triangles.
Triangle count: Total number of triangles in the scan.
Vertex count: Total number of vertices in the scan.
Target count: Total number of positioning targets detected in the scan.

1598
When using a scanner with texture acquisition, texture details are provided under the Scan details:
Resolution (DPI): Number of dots per inch (DPI) of the texture image.
Size: Current size of the bitmap image in pixels.

Scan parameters pane

The Scan parameters modify the mesh output and can be set according to the connected device.

Go!SCAN 20, Go!SCAN 50, ACADEMIA 20, and ACADEMIA 50

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on
areas with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

Go!SCAN SPARK
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.

Scan resolution must be at least 0.5 mm unless the Targets only positioning
method is active.

Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

1599
 A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2
resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Acquire texture: Select before starting to scan to capture and visualize the texture on the object.

1600
 Texture acquisition does not require to use the Targets / Geometry / Texture
positioning method.

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
For details on the Finalize function, see the Finalize function section.

HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, and HandySCAN 300

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

1601
 A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3
resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.

1602
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Optimize scan surface: Reduces the impact of outliers on the surface.

HandySCAN BLACK
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

1603
 l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
For details on the Finalize function, see the Finalize function section.

HandySCAN MAX and HandySCAN MAX|Elite

1604
Working volume: The HandySCAN MAX's working volume is equivalent to Standard. The
recommended target density, available resolutions and available target size can change with the
chosen volume. See details here.

l
(Near): Captures smaller details with best surface quality.

l
(Standard): Best for most situations: Low noise, wide stand- off range, good surface
quality and lower target density.

l
(Far): For large parts, fast and can scan from far away.

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size. Working volume settings can affect available
resolution options.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

1605
 l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
For details on the Finalize function, see the Finalize function section.

HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite

1606
Working volume: The recommended target density, available resolutions and available target size can
change with the chosen volume. See details here.

l
(Standard): Best for most situations: Low noise, wide stand- off range, good surface
quality and lower target density.

l
(Far): For large parts, fast and can scan from far away.

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size. Working volume settings can affect available
resolution options.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

1607
 If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
For details on the Finalize function, see the Finalize function section.

MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, and MetraSCAN 750

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.

1608
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on
areas with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Optimize scan surface: Reduces the impact of outliers on the surface.

MetraSCAN BLACK and MetraSCAN-R BLACK

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

1609
 l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
For details on the Finalize function, see the Finalize function section.

Positioning node
This node is added when positioning targets are detected or imported. It gives access to the selection
tools.

1610
Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Target details pane

This pane appears when a target is selected under the Positioning node.
Center: The coordinates of the selected target's center point. The values are displayed in the length unit
set in the configuration options.
Normal: The coordinates of the selected target's normal.
Type: The type of targets used.

Entities node
This node is added when an entity is created. Different entities are available. Each entity added is
available under this node. For details, see the Basic entities section.
Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Entities details pane

Entity count: Number of entity contained in the Entities node.
Name: Name of the selected entity.
Other Entities details will vary depending of the entity: Normal, Center, Standard deviation, etc.

Alignments node
This node is created when an alignment is added. Each alignment added is available under this node.
Different alignment methods are available. For details, see the Basic Alignments section.
Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Alignment details pane

Details
The alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment, Translation and
Rotation axis, etc.

Clipping objects node

A node is created when using the clipping object functions. Each object created is displayed under the
node according to the function used:

1611
 l A clipping plane is created when using Remove background or Add clipping plane.

l A 3D reference, derived from a scan, a mesh, or a CAD model, is created when using Use
clipping reference.

Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.
Resolution template node
A node is created when importing a scan containing manual resolution areas.
Texture node
A texture node is created when scanning with the Go!SCAN 3D, ACADEMIA 20, and ACADEMIA 50
scanners.
Texture refers to the visual surface of the object to scan. This node allows visualizing the object color or
finish.
The texture quality depends of several factors and can vary depending on the work environment. For
higher texture quality, follow these tips & tricks:

l Make sure to scan from the recommended scanning distance.

l In the case of blurriness, restart the acquisition and scan over the same area with the proper
scanning distance.

l The more polygons are scanned, the better the texture details are. Higher resolution provides
better texture quality.

Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Texture parameters pane

Available when Capture texture is selected under Scanner parameters in the system panel.
Apply texture: Available with the Go!SCAN 20, Go!SCAN 50, ACADEMIA 20, and ACADEMIA 50
scanners. This function turns on or off the texture on the 3D model. The texture data will be acquired
during the scan but will not be used during the surface computation. Select the Apply texture check box
while scanning or after the scan.

Customers without the Texture license will not have access to this option. The
texture data will be acquired for each scan but will not be used or visible (see the
Texture license section).

1612
Paint positioning targets: When selected, holes created by the positioning targets will be filled with
the same color surrounding.
Default color: Triangles, with no texture acquired, will be displayed in the selected color.
Contrast: Adjust the scan data using the slider or button. Default value is preset at 0. Values can range
between -1 and 1.
Brightness: Adjust the scan data using the slider or button. Default value is preset at 0. Values can range
between -1 and 1.
Projection: The Projection option displays the object texture to make things easier for the operator. Five
types of projections share the same principle: the object texture is projected on a geometric primitive
that can be displayed in a 2D image. It is ready for editing in third-party software.
Automatic (Express): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on speed and minimizes file size.
Automatic (High Quality): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on quality and can overwhelm systems
with insufficient resources to process very large textures.
None: The internal texture representation mode. While not easily editable in 2D, this texture display
mode is the most precise and guarantees that the set texture resolution is constant on the whole object.
This projection mode allows visualizing high quality textures with up to 4 GB memory space available for
the texture image.
Spherical: The texture is projected on a sphere and the editable parameters are the sphere radius and its
location in space (position and orientation).
Cylindrical: The texture is projected on a cylinder and the editable parameters are the cylinder length,
its radius and its location in space (position and orientation).
Cubic: The texture is projected on a cube and the editable parameters include the lengths of the edges
as well as the cube location in space (position and orientation).
Resolution: Number of dots per inch (DPI) of the texture image (with None projection type).
Size: The size of the bitmap image available for use by the software in pixels.
Projection primitive: According to the type of projection (spherical, cylindrical, or cubic), parameters
such as the sphere or cylinder radius or the cube edges length and the position of the primitive in space
can be edited using the text boxes or manually in the 3D viewer.

Finalize parameters pane (Go!SCAN SPARK, HandySCAN BLACK, HandySCAN MAX,

MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners only)
Finalize scan
Finalize texture

1613
Display toolbar
The Display toolbar is located at the bottom on the 3D viewer and provides various display options for
the 3D viewer.
See Display toolbar section.

3D viewer
The 3D viewer displays three-dimensional models and results in real-time. The manipulations of the
models are made through mouse controls.
Different tools are available in the mini toolbar located in the upper-left corner of the 3D viewer.

Elements may vary depending on the node selected.

Selection tools
The selection tool icons are displayed in a mini toolbar in the upper-left corner of the 3D viewer or
alternatively they can be accessed through the main menu, under Tools | Selection.
Select a type of selection to access different tools.

Icon Function Action

To select nominal surface(s) and/or edge(s) on the
CAD model selection
active CAD model.
To select measured triangles on a measurement
Mesh selection
mesh.

CAD model selection tools

Icon Function Action

Select all To select all CAD surfaces.

Clear selection To clear the current selection of CAD surfaces.

To invert the current CAD surface selection;

unselected CAD surfaces will be selected.
Invert selection
Conversely, selected CAD surfaces will no longer be
part of the selection.

1614
 Icon Function Action

To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold

Rectangle selection Ctrl+click, and release it when the selection is
completed.

To create a free-form selection (lasso).

l For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl+click.

l For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold

Free form selection
the mouse left button.

l Once the selection is completed, right-click

to end it or release the Ctrl key.

Use this mode to select a single surface or a single

edge with one click. Hold the Ctrl key and click the
CAD selection
CAD surface or edge that is highlighted in yellow to
select it.

Mesh selection tools

* The selection tools featuring the selection tolerance (i.e. interactive flood fill
selection) allow previewing and interactively adjusting the selection in the 3D
viewer.

Rectangle selection

Free form selection

Brush selection

Connect

Sudden change*

Similar curvature*

Similar normal*

Isolated patches

Curvature selection*

1615
Triangle picking

Select through

Select backface

Select all

Clear selection

Invert selection

Grow the selection

Shrink the selection

1616
Using VXscan
Launch scan process

Once the device is calibrated and configured, the scan can be launched.

1. Click the drop-down menu ▼ next to and select the scan mode.

2. Set Positioning parameters and Scanner parameters under the system panel.

3. Set Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters under the Navigation panel.

4. Click to start.

The scan process can also be started or stopped by pressing the

space bar or holding the scanner trigger button for 2 seconds.

5. Click to stop. A scan node will be created under VXscan node.

6. Remove unwanted data (optional) using Clipping objects and Selection tools.

7. Click or to finalize the scan.

Finalize parameters and processing apply only to HandySCAN BLACK, Go!SCAN

SPARK, and MetraSCAN BLACK.

Scan modes

The availability of modes or settings may depend on the currently active scanner.

Scan surface
This is the default scan mode in VXscan where acquired data is transferred as triangulated mesh that can
be exported in the most common formats.

Scan points
This mode outputs an organized point cloud from acquired scan data. The density of the calculated
points is higher than the triangles vertices.

1617
The output is a .txt file with the X, Y, Z coordinates of each point. A point cloud can be exported with the
value of the normal of each point (X, Y, Z, U, V, W format).

Scan positioning targets

In this mode VXscan will only acquire targets to create a positioning model. The model can be exported

by clicking and then imported in another session using .

Color Description

l Recorded, but not seen or used in the last image.

l Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

l The scanner position is too far. Move forward.*

l Recorded and seen.

l The scanner position is correct.*

l Recorded and seen or used in the last image.

l The scanner position is too close. Move backward.*

l Recorded.

l Not referenced to the origin or the other targets.

l Will be deleted after a stop scan if not linked to the other targets.

l Locked target due to:

l Export/import targets

l Export/import scan template

l Reset scan (Keep targets)

l Add scan and import targets

l Merged scans

l Recovery data

1618
* When the Project distance meter on scan function is enabled.
For details on the distance meter feature, see the scanner's respective Acquisition rules section.

Copy positioning targets

This feature allows the creation of an empty scan node from the selected scan node. Click the

positioning node comprising the desired targets and Tools | Copy positioning targets .

The Scan shortcut (keyboard or Smart Control) will activate Scan surface if targets
have been acquired. It will activate Scan targets if no targets have been acquired.

Scan mode can be selected using the drop-down menu ▼ next to , or through
the Smart Control for the Go!SCAN SPARK, HandySCAN 3D and MetraSCAN 3D.

System panel

The availability of modes or settings may depend on the currently active scanner.

Located at the right side of the 3D viewer, the system panel displays the status and the parameters of the
activated device. Set the parameters before starting to scan:
Positioning parameters

Target diameter: 3 mm, 6 mm, or 12 mm.

Target reflectivity: Normal or High.

Target diameter and reflectivity must be set prior scanning and cannot be changed
afterwards.

Targets only: Most accurate positioning method. At all times, there must remain at least 4 targets in the
positioning model.
Targets / Geometry: Hybrid mode primarily using geometry for positioning and improving tracking in
zones with less geometry using targets.
Targets / Geometry / Texture: Hybrid mode that can additionally use texture for positioning.
Semi-rigid object: Designed for scanning objects which perform micro-movements, such as body parts.

1619
Scanner parameters

Automatic shutter: Real- time adjustment of the cameras shutter speed according to the object
reflective properties. Recommended for mostly monochromatic and reflective objects when the light
pattern is entirely contained within the object.
Shutter: Adjust the configuration parameters using the slider for an optimal detection of the white light
pattern. Recommended with parts of different colors and/or reflection properties.Configuration
parameters can be accessed at all times, even without stopping the acquisition process. For details, see
the scanner's respective configuration section.
Capture texture: Select this check box to turn on the color camera and acquire the object's surface
texture.
Configuration preset: To select a preset previously created during Configuration.
HDR mode: To use 2 different shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts. The scanner will alternate
between the 2 shutter speeds.
Scanning area: Clear the Automatic scanning area check box and resize the acquisition volume of the
scanner in % with the slider.
Automatic scanning area: Automatically reduces the scanning volume if the acquisition frame rate is
low. This is useful when scanning at high resolution to maintain a better scanning fluidity.
Detection mode: Allows selecting a mode according to the surface finish (Uniform color/texture or
Textured for non-uniform color/texture) or Automatic mode.
High resolution multiplier:
2x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light blue first, then in dark blue as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.
4x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light purple first, then in dark purple as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.
8x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light fuchsia first, then in dark fuchsia as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.

Guided workflows
Launch a workflow to perform a step-by-step scanning process. Workflows can be accessed through the
software in the Home page or the toolbar.

The availability of modes or settings may depend on the currently active scanner.

Basic guided workflow

1620
Small part guided workflow

1621
 VXscan | Add Entity
Tools | Entities
The Entities menu provides tools for entity creation which are available through the menu bar or the
toolbar.

It is possible to create an entity by selecting a portion of mesh with the selection tools and then
selecting an entity through the menu bar or the toolbar.

Select CAD faces (with the Ctrl key) before launching an entity creation. This filters
the entity type that can be created, based on the selection. Then right-click in the
3D viewer to create the entity.
Double-clicking an entity will allow its values to be edited.

Point
Line
Circle
Slot
Rectangle
Plane
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Curve

Distance
Caliper
Angle

1622
Add a Point

Tools | Basic entities | Point

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a point by pressing and holding Ctrl and selecting mesh in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a point by pressing and holding Ctrl and clicking one vertex in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a point clicking at least 3 positioning targets.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Measurement method Constructed

1623
o
Two-line intersection: Create a point at the intersection of two lines.

l Select line 1: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Select line 2: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Three-plane intersection: Construct a point using three intersecting planes.

l Select plane 1: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select plane 2: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select plane 3: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Line-plane intersection: Create a point using a point and a line.

l Select line: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

1624
l Point projected on plane: Create a point on a plane by using another point as a projection
reference.

l Select point: Select an existing point or create a new point.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Point projected on line: Create a point on a line by using another point as a projection
reference.

l Select point: Select an existing point or create a new point.

l Select line: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Extract from existing entity: Create a point by extracting the corresponding feature from an
existing entity (example: extracting a point from a circle will get the center of the circle).

l Select point: Select an existing point or create a new point.

1625
 l Average point selection: Create a point by averaging the coordinates of 2 or more entities.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1626
Add a Line

Tools | Basic entities | Line

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a line by selecting a constraining plane and triangles.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a line by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by clicking at least 2 vertices in the 3D
viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a line clicking at least 3 positioning targets.

1627
 Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first line orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the line center.

l Inside: Method used for inner line.

l Outside: Method used for outer line.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction
Two-plane intersection: Create a line by intersecting 2 planes.

l Select plane 1: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select plane 2: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Line projected on plane: Create a line by projecting a line onto a plane.

1628
 l Select line: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Extract from existing entity: Create a line by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a line from a cylinder will get the axis of the cylinder).

l Select line: Select an existing line or create a new line.

Average point selection: Create a line by connecting 2 or more points by selecting existing entities.

l Selection: The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear
in this table.

Average line: Construct a line by averaging the location and the orientation of selected lines.

Middle line: Construct a bisector line at intersection of selected lines.

1629
 l Select line 1: Select an existing line or create a new line.

l Select line 2: Select an existing line or create a new line.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1630
Add a Circle

Tools | Basic entities | Circle

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a circle by selecting a constraining plane if needed and then by pressing and holding Ctrl and
selecting mesh in the 3D viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plan.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a circle by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D
viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or fit to vertices.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

1631
Create a circle by selecting at least two targets. Select the compensation method, the target type, and
the constraining plane.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first circle orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the circle center.

l Inside: Method used for inner circle.

l Outside: Method used for outer circle.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, or create a new plane.

Measurement method Constructed

Create a circle by selecting a constraining plane and triangles in a circular selection.

l Plane-cylinder intersection: Create a circle by selecting a plane and a cylinder.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select cylinder: Create a new cylinder.

1632
 l Plane-cone intersection: Create a circle by selecting a plane and a cone.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select cone: Create a new cone.

l Average point selection: Create a circle by selecting a constraining plane and at least 3 point
entities.

Measurement method Boundary

Create a circle by selecting a highlighted boundary from the 3D viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, or create a new plane.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1633
Add a Slot

Tools | Basic entities | Slot

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a slot by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by pressing and holding Ctrl and selecting
mesh in the 3D viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a slot by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D
viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or fit to vertices.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

1634
Create a slot by selecting at least two targets. Select the compensation method, the target type, and the
constraining plane.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first slot orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the slot center.

l Inside: Method used for inner slot.

l Outside: Method used for outer slot.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, or create a new plane.

Measurement method Boundary

Create a slot by selecting a constraining plane if needed and a highlighted boundary from the 3D viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, or create a new plane .

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1635
Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1636
Add a Rectangle

Tools | Basic entities | Rectangle

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a rectangle by selecting a constraining plane if needed and a mesh in the 3D viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a rectangle by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D
viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, or create a new plane.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

1637
Create a rectangle by selecting at least 3 targets. Select the compensation method, the target type, and
the constraining plane.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first rectangle orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the rectangle center.

l Inside: Method used for inner rectangle.

l Outside: Method used for outer rectangle.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, or create a new plane.

Measurement method Boundary

Create a rectangle by selecting a constraining plane if needed and a highlighted boundary from the 3D
viewer.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, or create a new plane.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1638
Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1639
Add a Plane

Tools | Basic entities | Plane

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a plane by selecting mesh in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a plane by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a plane clicking at least 3 positioning targets. Select the compensation method and target type.

Compensation method

1640
 l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first plane orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the plane center.

l Inside: Method used for inner plane.

l Outside: Method used for outer plane.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Measurement method Constructed

Select a construction method from the dropdown:
Plane offset: To create a plane by offsetting a specific distance from an existing plane.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Offset (mm): Set the distance from the selected plane and the new plane.

Plane offset through a point: To create a plane by offsetting through an existing point and
maintaining the orientation of the selected plane.

l Select plane: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select point: Select an existing point or create a new point.

1641
Point and normal line: To create a plane using a selected point and a normal line.

l Select point: Select an existing point or create a new point.

l Select line: Select an existing line or create a new line.

The plane is perpendicular to the selected line.

The plane is coincident with the point.

Average point selection: Create a plane using a series of points.

l Selection: Chosen points and alignments appear in this table along with their respective
deviations.

Average plane: To create a plane with average orientation at location using at least 2 planes.

1642
Middle plane: Create a plane between two existing planes.

l Select plane 1: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

l Select plane 2: Select an existing plane or create a new plane.

Measurement method Draw line

Create a perpendicular plane to the 3D view using a line drawn on the current view. Hold the Ctrl key to
draw the line.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1643
Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1644
Add a Cylinder

Tools | Basic entities | Cylinder

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a cylinder by selecting a mesh in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a cylinder by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a cylinder clicking at least 3 positioning targets. Select the compensation method and target
type.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first cylinder orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the cylinder center.

l Inside: Method used for inner cylinder.

1645
 l Outside: Method used for outer cylinder.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1646
Add a Sphere

Tools | Basic entities | Sphere

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a sphere by selecting mesh in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a sphere by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a sphere by clicking at least 3 positioning targets. Select the compensation method and target
type.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first sphere orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the sphere center.

l Inside: Method used for inner sphere.

1647
 l Outside: Method used for outer sphere.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1648
Add a Cone

Tools | Basic entities | Cone

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a cone by selecting mesh in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a cone by clicking at least 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Scan targets

Create a cone by clicking at least 3 positioning targets. Select the compensation method and target
type.

Compensation method

l Auto: To apply compensation based on the first cone orientation.

l None: It will not apply any compensation; it will use the cone center.

l Inside: Method used for inner cone.

1649
 l Outside: Method used for outer cone.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

1650
Add a Curve

Tools | Basic entities | Curve

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Exact boundary

Build a curve by selecting a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Free polyline

Build an entity by selecting a series of points on a surface in the 3D viewer.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1651
Measurement | Distance

Tools | Measurement | Distance

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Create a line by selecting a constraining plane if needed and by clicking at least 2 vertices in the 3D
viewer.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Constructed

Create a line by selecting 2 entities.

Construction
Entity 1: Select an existing entity, create a new point, create a new line, or create a new plane.
Entity 2: Select an existing entity, create a new point, create a new line, or create a new plane.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1652
Measurement | Caliper

Tools | Measurement | Caliper

Make sure to hold Ctrl key when clicking the mesh.

To delete a caliper point, hold Ctrl + click.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Constraining axis
Select the constraining axis applied to the entity:
Normal to first point: Set the caliper measurement axis based on the normal of the caliper zone of the
first point.
It is possible to select an existing axis using the filters.
Create a new line: To create a new line that will be used to determine the caliper axis measurement.

Point parameters
Radius: Set the size of the zone around the caliper point.
Max. distance: Set the search distance on each side of the caliper point for the triangle extraction.

The radius and the maximum distance remain the same for the first and the second
caliper points.

First point direction or Second point direction:

Normal: The max. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to calculate the caliper
distance. It is the behavior of a standard caliper.
Inverted: The min. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to calculate the caliper
distance. It is the inverted behavior of a standard caliper.

1653
To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

1654
Measurement | Angle

Tools | Measurement | Angle

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction
Select an Angle definition:

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Entity 1: Select an existing entity, create a new line, or create a new plane.
Entity 2: Select an existing entity, create a new line, or create a new plane.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

1655
VXscan | Add Alignment

Tools | Alignment
The Alignment menu provides alignment creation tools. Each tool is available through the menu bar or
toolbar.
Use these tools to align the measurements with the nominal values. It creates the transformation matrix,
bringing the measurements on the nominal values.
Manual alignment
Import alignment
Point selection
Entity based alignment
Surface best fit
Target best fit

To export the transformation matrix of an alignment as a text file (.txt), right-click

the alignment in the navigation tree and select Export selected alignment.

1656
Manual Alignment

Tools | Add alignment | Manual Alignment

The Manual Alignment function allows the alignment of the mesh to the world coordinate system XYZ.
Click Align to align the mesh to the origin. The alignment information will be displayed in the expanding
panel.

Name
Name the alignment.

Alignment by constraints
This function is flexible as it first allows an auto-alignment according to the mesh center of mass.
It is also possible to reach specific alignment using entities in the Constraint selection section. Degrees of
freedom lock each time a constraint is added. When there are no constraints, it is still possible to
manually modify the position by moving the 3D Manipulator or entering values manually in the
corresponding text box. When constraints are added, the deviation information is available (Details
deviation). As the first constraint created is always considered perfect, the constraints added later will fit
themselves in the best conditions. When all the degrees of freedom are locked, there is no manual
alignment.
To complete the operation and save changes, click Align. A new alignment will be created in the Entities
node. To reset manually entered values and get the auto-alignment back, click Reset. To cancel the
operation, click Close.

The active mesh will be displayed during the function.

Manual alignment
This function allows manually aligning the mesh from its current (active) alignment by entering values in
Text box or directly with the 3D Manipulator.

1657
Move object
Create an alignment by manipulating the arrows and rings in the 3D viewer. Click Reset to return to start
position and click OK to create the alignment.

1658
VXscan Import Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Import alignment

This function aligns the mesh from its current (active) alignment by entering values in Text boxes or
directly with the 3D manipulator.

To import alignment
1. Select the source for the alignment in the relevant drop-down list. To import an alignment
from File, click Import alignment from file and browse to open a previous saved alignment
(.txt file).

2. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

3. Select the required Destination alignment.

4. Click OK.

Select Invert pose option to invert the alignment. The alignment information will be updated in real time.

1659
VXscan Point Selection Alignment

Tools | Basic alignments | Point selection

This function allows using existing point entities to align onto a specific nominal coordinate system.
Using this method, a best fit alignment is performed meaning the deviation between point entities and
nominal points are minimized. A new coordinate system is created based on the values entered for each
point.

To perform this alignment method, at least 3 points are needed.

To align with Point selection method

1. Click .

2. Select Point selection .

3. Select a first point and enter its nominal position value in the Point selection pane.
Alternatively, use Import to use nominal points from a file (.csv or .txt).

4. Add at least 2 more points.

Click to add more points.

5. Click Ok.

Export: To export nominal points to a file (.csv or .txt).

1660
VXscan Entity Based Alignment

Name
Name the alignment.

Tools | Add alignment | Entity based

The Entity based function allows the alignment of 2 meshes using common entities.
Construction
Mobile: The mesh selected before launching the function is the mobile item.
Fixed: The fixed mesh must be selected from the Fixed entity source field.
This function will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh. Degrees of freedom
lock each time a constraint is added.

1661
VXscan Surface Best Fit Alignment

Tools | Add alignment | Surface Best fit

Click to align 2 or more meshes together or a 1 or more meshes with CAD model.

Item selection
Fixed: There can be multiple fixed items selected. This is the mesh that will not move during the
operation.
Mobile: All the session meshes can be selected but only 1 at a time.

Surface best fit

Maximum distance (mm): Maximum search distance between 2 surfaces to consider them as the same
surface.

Pre-alignment mode
Automatic: Automatic prealignment of the fixed and mobile item selection. Following the
prealignment, the surface best fit will automatically be calculated.
Manual: Select at least 3 points on the fixed model (left side of the 3D viewer). Then, select the same
points on the mobile model (right side of the 3D viewer) and click Best fit.
None: There is no prealignment and the surface best fit alignment can be launched directly.

Constraints
It is possible to apply constraints to the best fit method and to specify which entity or degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment.
None: No constraint is applied; a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh.
Unconstrained rotations and translations will be best fitted.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

1662
Global registration

Click to refine the alignment after the initial Best fit while considering all the meshes selected at
once. This function is only available when there are at least 3 meshes aligned.

Parameters
Maximum distance (mm): Maximum search distance between surfaces to perform the global
registration.
Best fit: To get a preview of the registration.
OK: To accept the registration.
Reset: To reset the registration.

1663
VXscan Target Best Fit Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Target best fit

Click to generate a best fit using positioning targets.

Target best fit

Fixed: Select fixed scan(s) for alignment.
Mobile: Select mobile scan for alignment.

Targets
After clicking Preview the targets to be used for alignment from the Fixed scan are place with a Mobile
scan counterpart in rows with information on their Deviation included in the row too. Un- tick the
selection box to not include a particular target pairing in the alignment calculation.

Parameters
Destination target count: Number of targets on the mobile scan.
Source target count: Number of targets on the fixed scan.
Minimum match points: Minimum number of targets (at least 4) to match within the accepted
alignment tolerance.
Matching tolerance: Maximum distance between the targets to consider them a match.

Pre-alignment mode
Automatic: Automatic prealignment of the fixed and mobile item selection. Following the
prealignment, the surface best fit will automatically be calculated.
Manual: Select at least 3 points on the fixed model (left side of the 3D viewer). Then, select the same
points on the mobile model (right side of the 3D viewer) and click Best fit.

Preview: To get a preview of the alignment.

Accept: Accepts the alignment and switches to the next scan to align.
Reset: Cancels the resulting alignment.

1664
Targets displayed in red color are the ones used for the alignment.

1665
Edit Scan
Several tools are available to edit the scan, depending on the connected device.

Selection tools
Selection tools allow selecting triangles, isolated patches, boundaries, and targets. A selection can also
be modified, cleared, or inverted.

Rectangle selection

Free form selection

Brush selection

Connect

Sudden change*

Similar curvature*

Similar normal*

Isolated patches

Curvature selection*

Triangle picking

Boundary selection

* These selection tools include a Selection tolerance (or Curvature threshold) slider
to change the selection instantaneously.

Selection modes
Select through

Select target with surface (VXscan only)

Select backface

Select all

Clear selection

1666
 Invert selection

Grow selection

Shrink selection

Select target with surface

Tools | Selection | Select target with surface

This tool allows deleting a selected target as well as the surface it lies upon.

Targets can be deleted while editing the scan (Scan node) instead of going to
Positioning node.

To delete the selected target and surface

1. In the Navigation panel, click the Scan node.

2. Select a target in the 3D viewer, using the Rectangle, Free-form or Brush selection tool.

3. Click in the mini toolbar.

4. Click .

Delete tools
Tools in the Delete toolbar allow deleting the selection permanently, depending on the connected
device.

Delete triangles

Delete isolated patches1

Keep only

Delete frames

Delete targets2

1667
 Delete all natural features

1 Use the Remove isolated patches slider under the Scan Parameters to select patches, then click .
2 At all times, there must remain at least 4 targets in the positioning model.

Clipping objects
The clipping objects allow selecting and deleting triangles using a clipping plane or a clipping reference.

Remove background

Add clipping plane

Use clipping reference

Data will be erased permanently after clipping object creation.

1668
Optimize Scan

Finalize function

This function is available with the HandySCAN BLACK, Go!SCAN SPARK, and
MetraSCAN BLACK scanners.

Finalize the scan to obtain a valid mesh for export to .stl format, VXmodel or VXinspect.

1. Set the parameters (Finalize scan parameters and/or Finalize texture parameters) according
to the connected device.

2. Click Finalize .

Using the Go!SCAN SPARK

The Finalize process can be applied to:

l
Geometry and texture or

l
Geometry only .

To save processing time, it is recommended to use Finalize geometry only until the
Finalize scan parameters are set and to use Finalize geometry and texture at the
very end.

When scanning multiple parts or a large one, session(s) can be saved without
finalizing the scan(s), and the Finalize process can be done afterwards.

Finalize scan parameters

Optimization modes
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.

1669
 Some settings can vary dependent on scanner in use.

Parame
Standard Mesh enhancement File size Express
ter
Optimiz
e
volume
tric
accurac
y1
Optimiz
e Off Quick Off Off
surface
Fill
position
ing
targets
Optimiz
e
accuracy
of
bounda
ries
Smooth
bounda Off Low Low Off
ries
Reduce
Low High Off Off
noise
Sharpen
Off Low Off Off
edges
Auto.
decimat
e

Exampl
e

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1670
 Parameters
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all
the scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts. Only available with the Targets
only positioning method.
Optimize surface: Rectifies alignment of misaligned frames to remove outliers such as laser crosses or
light stripes, can be deactivated or set to Quick or Full. Use the Quick setting for fast processing and
removal of most crosses or stripes. Use the Full setting to increase accuracy on local measurement
smaller than 15 cm (6 in) (Go!SCAN SPARK, MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners
only).
Watertight : Fills in any gaps or holes to create a watertight mesh.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

Using the Optimize volumetric accuracy parameter with a MaxSHOT Next and
HandySCAN BLACK
The targets acquired by photogrammetry using the MaxSHOT Next are always fixed when imported.
They are therefore not impacted by the Optimize volumetric accuracy parameter even if they are seen
by the HandySCAN 3D during scanning.

VXelements will only optimize the new targets detected by the HandySCAN 3D.
Always leave this check box selected for best accuracy results.

Finalize texture function

1671
 This function is available with the Go!SCAN SPARK scanner.

It must be applied to obtain a valid mesh for export. To save processing time, it is recommended to use
Finalize geometry only until the Finalize scan parameters are set and to use Finalize geometry and texture
at the very end.

Select the Acquire texture check box to set the Finalize texture parameters and click .
Finalize texture parameters
Paint positioning targets: When selected, holes created by the positioning targets will be filled with
the same color surrounding.
Default color: Triangles, with no texture acquired, will be displayed in the selected color.
Contrast: Adjust the scan data using the slider or button. Default value is preset at 0. Values can range
between -1 and 1.
Brightness: Adjust the scan data using the slider or button. Default value is preset at 0. Values can range
between -1 and 1.
Projection: The Projection option displays the object texture to make things easier for the operator. Five
types of projections share the same principle: the object texture is projected on a geometric primitive
that can be displayed in a 2D image. It is ready for editing in third-party software.
Automatic (Express): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on speed and minimizes file size.
Automatic (High Quality): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on quality and can overwhelm systems
with insufficient resources to process very large textures.
None: The internal texture representation mode. While not easily editable in 2D, this texture display
mode is the most precise and guarantees that the set texture resolution is constant on the whole object.
This projection mode allows visualizing high quality textures with up to 4 GB memory space available for
the texture image.
Spherical: The texture is projected on a sphere and the editable parameters are the sphere radius and its
location in space (position and orientation).
Cylindrical: The texture is projected on a cylinder and the editable parameters are the cylinder length,
its radius and its location in space (position and orientation).
Cubic: The texture is projected on a cube and the editable parameters include the lengths of the edges
as well as the cube location in space (position and orientation).
Resolution: Number of dots per inch (DPI) of the texture image (with None projection type).
Size: The size of the bitmap image available for use by the software in pixels.

1672
Projection primitive: According to the type of projection (spherical, cylindrical, or cubic), parameters
such as the sphere or cylinder radius or the cube edges length and the position of the primitive in space
can be edited using the text boxes or manually in the 3D viewer.

It is recommended to remove unwanted data around the part (i.e. background,

isolated patches, etc.) to reduce the texture image size before proceeding to
Finalize.
For details on projection types and maximum image size, see the Troubleshooting
section.

1673
Clipping Objects
The clipping objects select and delete triangles using a clipping plane or a clipping reference.
Remove background
Add clipping plane
Use clipping reference
Clip Cards

Data will be erased permanently after clipping object creation.

If texture is acquired, it will be removed when applying the clipping object. It can
be reapplied using the Finalize function when the mesh editing is completed
(Go!SCAN 3D scanners only).

1674
Remove Background

Tools | Remove background

This function creates a clipping plane.

Triangles, and optionally targets, located under the plane will be permanently
deleted after the plane creation.

l To reset a selection, click Cancel.

l An offset of the plane from the initial position can be numerically set or
the normal of the plane can be dragged.

l The normal direction can be changed by clicking Flip normal. The normal
of the plane (blue arrow) points to the data that will be kept.

l The plane can be rotated by clicking the middle points in the 3D viewer.

l Targets can be deleted by selecting the check box.

l Edit a previously created clipping plane by double-clicking the Clipping

plane node in the Navigation tree or by right-clicking the plane in the 3D
viewer and selecting Edit. Previously erased data cannot be recovered.

l When scanning after plane creation, data under the plane will not be
acquired.

l When creating a clipping plane with 3 targets, it is possible to deselect a

target by clicking it.

If texture is acquired, it will be removed when applying the clipping object. It can
be reapplied using the Finalize function when the mesh editing is completed
(Go!SCAN 3D scanners only).

1675
Add Clipping Plane

Tools | Add clipping plane

This function creates a clipping plane.

Triangles, and optionally targets, located under the plane will be permanently
deleted after the plane creation.

Creation methods

l Per draw a line:

l Hold the Ctrl key and click and drag to draw a side of the plane.

l Per selected 3 vertices

l Per selected 3 targets

l Background selection:

l Click a vertex on the background to select.

l To reset a selection, click Cancel.

l An offset of the plane from the initial position can be numerically set or
the normal of the plane can be dragged.

l The normal direction can be changed by clicking Flip normal. The normal
of the plane (blue arrow) points to the data that will be kept.

l The plane can be rotated by clicking the middle points in the 3D viewer.

l Targets can be deleted by selecting the check box.

1676
 l Edit a previously created clipping plane by double-clicking the Clipping
plane node in the Navigation tree or by right-clicking the plane in the 3D
viewer and selecting Edit. Previously erased data cannot be recovered.

l When scanning after plane creation, data under the plane will not be
acquired.

l When creating a clipping plane with 3 targets, it is possible to deselect a

target by clicking it.

If texture is acquired, it will be removed when applying the clipping object. It can
be reapplied using the Finalize function when the mesh editing is completed
(Go!SCAN 3D scanners only).

1677
Use Clipping Reference

This function uses a 3D reference such as a scan, a CAD model or a mesh to delete triangles outside a
defined range around the 3D reference.
To use a clipping reference

1. Click Use clipping reference .

2. In the drop-down menu, select a scan or import a file (mesh or CAD model) to create the
clipping reference.

3. Set the parameters in the Use clipping reference pane.

Name: Name the clipping reference.

Clipping range: Set the distance from the scan from which the data will be erased.
Prealignment mode (if the option is available):

l Automatic: Select to let the software position the scan, meshor CAD model before
the final alignment.

l Manual: Select to pick points on the scan and then the corresponding points on
the clipping reference.

l None: No prealignment is done. Select to let the software proceed to iterations for
the final alignment.

If a scan is used as its own clipping reference, select the None prealignment mode.

4. Click Create. The scan used as a clipping reference will be located under the Clipping
objects node of the added scan in the Navigation tree.

will appear besides the added scan name until the scan is aligned, meaning
the clipping reference is disabled.

If texture is acquired, it will be removed when applying the clipping object. It can
be reapplied using the Finalize function when the mesh editing is completed
(Go!SCAN 3D scanners only).

1678
Using Clip Cards
How to use clip cards

1. Place clip card(s) on the floor around the part. When using multiple clip cards, ensure they
are all on the same plane for best results.

2. Click Scan targets. Clip cards are not detected during Scan surface.

3. Scan the targets and clip cards. A preview of the clipping planes will be created.

4. The clipping planes will be created and appear in the Navigation panel on Stop scan.

Returning to Scan targets will re-detect any present clip cards and delete any clipping
planes created with clip cards (including any manual modifications to the clipping planes).

Clip card plane creation rules

1 clip card creates 1 clipping plane oriented and centered on the clip card with an offset of 2 mm.

2 or 3 clip cards create 1 clipping plane oriented and centered from the average of the detected cards
with an offset of 2 mm.

1679
4 or more clip cards create 1 clipping floor plane oriented and centered from the average of the
detected cards with an offset of 2 mm. Clipping planes around the perimeter, perpendicular to the floor
plane (walls).

Perimeter clipping planes are functionally infinite in height, but are only displayed
in the 3D viewer to the highest target in the targets model.

1680
Delete Frames

Using a Go!SCAN SPARK scanner

1. Click .

2. Use the selection tools to choose triangles of misaligned frame groups, or select check
boxes in the Delete frames expanding panel. Each frame group comprises 10 frames.

l Use the Shift key to select (or deselect) multiple frame groups.

l Frames to be deleted will be highlighted in red.

3. Click Delete.

Using a Go!SCAN 3D, a Health Care Partner 3D or a Creaform ACADEMIA 3D scanner

1. Click .

2. Using the mouse cursor , click a vertex on the scan displayed in the 3D viewer. It will
select frames which are included at the picked position.

l By default, all frames are selected to be deleted.

l In the Delete frames expanding panel, clear check boxes to keep frames.

l To see a particular frame, click the name of the frame under the list, it will be
highlighted in the 3D viewer.

3. Click Delete frames.

4. Click to exit the function.

1681
Smart Resolution
Available for specific scanners.
This function applies multiple resolution levels to the scan instead of a single resolution. It helps to use
the adequate resolution on a surface that has different geometries. For instance, high-curvature surfaces
require a higher resolution in order to represent better the details, opposed to a flat surface that may
require a coarser resolution. The smart resolution uses the raw images stored in the session to create
different resolution levels.
Four smart resolution processes are available:

l Automatic (from software intelligence)

l Scanner triggered (not available with MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners)

l Manual (from selection)

l Template

To use the function with a Go!SCAN SPARK

Scan resolution must be at least 0.5 mm unless the Targets only positioning
method is active.

The minimal scanning resolution must be 0.40 mm to use the Standard mode and
0.80 mm to use the High mode.

To use the automatic process

1. In the Scan parameters pane of the Navigation panel, select a mode in the Smart
resolution drop-down (High, Standard, Custom or Off).

2. Set the Resolution colors mode using the drop-down in the General display pane of the
Display panel.

3. Click Scan .

4. Click Stop scan or Finalize .

1682
To use the scanner triggered process

To generate a good mesh file after the Finalize process, it is important to have
enough data, especially for finer resolutions (e.g., 0.100 mm or 0.125 mm).

1. Activate the High resolution mode through a scanner button (Smart Control). (For details,
see the Multifunction buttons section of the connected device).

l A transparent high-resolution zone will be projected on the part.

l Acquired data in this circle will be reconstructed as per the High resolution
multiplier set in the system panel (under More details).

Based on the input (original) resolution, the High resolution multiplier allows
generating a surface using smaller triangles than the original ones. It can be
changed during the scanning process.

2. Zoom the high-resolution zone in and out to select the areas where the finer resolution
will be applied.

3. Click Scan .

4. Click Stop scan or Finalize .

High resolution multiplier:

2x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light blue first, then in dark blue as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.
4x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light purple first, then in dark purple as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.
8x multiplier: Acquired data will be displayed in light fuchsia first, then in dark fuchsia as more data is
reconstructed using the high-resolution zone.

To use the manual process

For details, see the Manual Resolution section.

To use the template process

1683
Manual resolution areas can be included in a scan to be used after Reset scan or Add scan. It is also
possible to export a scan template (.csp) containing multiple resolution levels to use it in another
session. For details, see the Scan template section.

After the scanning process

After scanning with the Smart resolution at Off, it is possible to change it to another mode (High,
Standard or Custom) and start a new scan to which the resulting resolution reconstruction factor
selected will be applied.

Shiny surface best practices

Shiny surfaces can increase noise in the scan data.
If there is too much noise in the data, some actions may help:

Setup

l If using targets, position the targets in a way that allows the scanner to see the targets while
scanning at the optimal angle relative to the object.

l If using C-Track, ensure C-Track can track positioning while scanning at the optimal angle
relative to the object.

During scan

l Scanning at more extreme angles will generate more sparse data because the lasers bounce off
the surface and are not read by the camera. It is better to follow the curvature of the object.

Better scan quality

1684
 Poorer scan quality

l The more data acquired, the less noise will be present as the raw data will be more consistent.

l Rotate the scanner occasionally during the scan to vary frame viewpoints.

l Ensure that the density indicator has turned from yellow to blue to ensure the project has
reached the proper data density.

l Confirm the object is completely immobile and free of vibrations.

l Scan slowly.

1685
Post scan

l Set Optimize surface to High in Finalize parameters. (Only available for MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite)

l Change the Smart resolution mode from High to Standard.

l Decrease the resolution in post-processing to reduce noise, if the project permits lower
resolution.

1686
Manual Resolution

Tools | Manual resolution

Available for specific scanners.
This function allows using multiple resolution levels to change the one applied on selected areas. The
resolution is based on the reconstruction factor set in the Manual resolution drop-down list (toolbar). It
can be increased up to 8 times (8X) or decreased up to 4 times (-4X).

The scan must be finalized to see the results.

Icon Description
To increase the selected triangles resolution. The triangle and + sign color vary according
to the chosen resolution factor (2x, 4x or 8x).
To decrease the selected triangles resolution. The triangle and - sign color vary according
to the chosen resolution factor (-2x or -4x).

To use the manual resolution function

This function can be performed after the scanning or the Finalize process.
After the scanning process

1. Use the selection tools to choose scanned areas on which to perform the Manual
resolution function.

2. Set the resolution reconstruction factor. If data is missing, click Scan to perform a new

scan and Stop scan when it is done.

The resolution colors are displayed on areas where a resolution reconstruction

factor was applied. For example, if yellow is seen through the reconstructed data
color, it means the data acquired is not sufficient to have a good reconstruction at
the set resolution. Another scan must be performed to gather enough
complementary data and increase the data density in that area.

3. Click Finalize to see the results.

1687
 To apply the manual resolution, 2 conditions must be met:

l A selection must be done.

l The final resolution must be higher than the scanner resolution limit.

After the Finalize process

It is possible to change the smart resolution parameters and to re-perform the Finalize process. The
resolution colors can be displayed after the Finalize process.

To clear manual resolution

1. Select the desired surface.

2. Click to clear the selection and prevent manual reconstruction.

1688
 Merge Scans
Tools | Merge scans

It is useful to scan a large area over multiple sessions and/or with multiple
scanners.

This function allows merging scans together, to output a single mesh for the whole surface. It is only
accessible when a session with either positioning targets or scanned surface is opened.

Prior to merge scans, scans must be imported using the Import scan toolbar button. The scans must
also be aligned together, using the Surface Best Fit or Target Best Fit alignment before being merged.
To merge scans

1. Click .

2. In the Merge panel, select the scan(s) to be merged. By default all the scans imported are
selected.

3. Keep original scan: Select this option to keep the original scan. Keeping the raw data allows
redoing a merge if a problem occurs that has not been seen while performing the
operation.

4. Set the Scan parameters.

5. Set the Finalize parameters.

6. Click Accept.

1689
Add scan

Tools | Add scan

Add additional scan(s) to the session to complete acquisition of a part, for example.
Scanning and post-scanning workflow (before finalization)

1. Click (Stop scan), to stop the current scan if a scan is in progress.

2. Click Add scan .

3. In the VXelements Scan Template dialog box, select the desired check boxes:

l Scan parameters

l Positioning targets (not available with HandySCAN BLACK, Go!, and MetraSCAN
BLACK)

l Clipping objects

l Resolution template

4. Click OK. A scan node (plus one for any components imported) will be added in the
navigation tree.

If a scan template is imported, there are some additional considerations:

1. The template's scan parameters will overwrite those of the current scan.

2. If the Positioning targets check box is selected from the VXelements Scan Template dialog
box, the imported scan template's positioning model will overwrite those of the current
scan, therefore deleting any related scan data from the current scan.

3. If the Clipping objects check box is selected from the VXelements Scan Template dialog
box, a best-fit alignment of the clipping references will be required between the current
scan and any imported scan templates.

4. If the Resolution template check box is selected from the from the VXelements Scan
Templatedialog box, a best-fit alignment of any manual resolution areas will be required
between the current scan and any imported scan templates.

1690
Scan Template
This feature allows uploading and saving session parameters, clipping objects, positioning targets, and
resolution template in the active alignment. To be able to import a resolution template, manual
resolution areas must have been selected in the scan to use as template.
It is useful when the same positioning model is always used on a rigid body where only the parts change
(for example, when scanning multiple similar objects with a jig).
Session parameters include:
Scan parameters
Finalize scan parameters (available with HandySCAN BLACK, Go!SCAN SPARK and MetraSCAN BLACK)
Finalize texture parameters (available with Go!SCAN SPARK)
Positioning parameters (available with HandySCAN BLACK, Go!SCAN SPARK, and the MetraSCAN
BLACK)
Scanner parameters

l For the HandySCAN BLACK, the Go!SCAN SPARK and the MetraSCAN BLACK, the
Positioning targets check box is available for the import of the scan template. If the
scan template contains targets but the Positioning targets check box is not selected,
the targets acquired during the session are not overwritten and the scan is not reset.

To create and save a scan template

1. Click File | New session.

2. Set the session parameters.

3. Click .

4. Click and select Scan template (or go to File | Export | Scan template) to save, in the
active alignment, settings made such as resolution, shutter speed, clipping objects, and
positioning parameters.

5. In the VXelements Export Scan Template dialog box, browse to find the location where to
save the *.csp file.

6. Click Open.

1691
New session workflow

1. Click File | New session.

2. Click and select Scan template (or go to File | Import | Scan template).

3. In the VXelements – Import Scan Template dialog box, browse to find the *.csp file to
import.

4. Click Open.

5. In the VXelements Scan Template dialog box, choose the components to include in the
current scan from the imported scan template. All check boxes that apply are selected by
default.

6. Click OK. New sub-nodes and items matching the components imported will be added
under the Scan node in the navigation tree.

7. Click .

8. Click .

9. Save the scan.

Existing session workflow

1. Click File | Open session.

2. Click and select Scan template (or go to File | Import | Scan template).

3. In the VXelements – Import Scan Template dialog box, browse to find the *.csp file to
import.

4. Click Open.

5. In the VXelements Scan Template dialog box, choose the components to include in the
current scan from the imported scan template. All check boxes that apply are selected by
default.

6. Click OK. New sub-nodes and items matching the components imported will be added
under the Scan node in the navigation tree.

7. Click .

1692
8. Click .

9. Save the scan.

1693
Scale Bar Mode

The scale bars are detected during the scan. A scale bar is equipped with 12 mm targets and has a QR
code with scale bar information. During the scan, both ends of the scale bar must be seen as well as the
QR code square.

QR code has not been read yet.

QR code has been read (no visible square).
The line on the scale represents the visibility state of the bar.

Missing viewpoints.
Scale bar properly seen.

To use Scale bar mode

1. Click . The Scale bar mode panel will open.

2. Click to acquire positioning targets and scale bar targets. Detected targets will be
listed in the Targets pane and Scale bar mode pane. These are displayed in the 3D viewer
along with the scale bars.
Verify that targets have been captured from sufficient viewpoints as indicated by the target
quality indicator.

Bad orientation of
viewpoint.

Good orientation
of viewpoint.

3. Click Optimize.

At least one scale bar must be fully detected for this option to be
available.

4. Click Clean.

5. Click OK.

1694
Basic Guided Workflow
Perform a step-by-step scan process using the basic guided workflow. Navigate through the workflow

steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Click Quit workflow at the top-right corner of the 3D viewer to leave the workflow at any time.
Scan parameters

C-Track calibration

Scanner calibration

Go!SCAN 3D
Go!SCAN SPARK
Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50

HandySCAN 3D
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN MAX
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 700
HandySCAN 300

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN 357
MetraSCAN 350
MetraSCAN 750

Creaform ACADEMIA 3D

1695
ACADEMIA 10
ACADEMIA 20
ACADEMIA 50

Health Care Partner 3D

Scanner configuration

Go!SCAN 3D
Go!SCAN SPARK
Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50

HandySCAN 3D
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN MAX
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 700
HandySCAN 300

MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN 357
MetraSCAN 350

Creaform ACADEMIA 3D
ACADEMIA 10
ACADEMIA 20
ACADEMIA 50

Health Care Partner 3D

1696
Scan

Final options

1697
Scan parameters
Before starting to scan, set the Scan parameters according to the connected device:
Go!SCAN SPARK
Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, and HandySCAN 300
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, and MetraSCAN 750
ACADEMIA 10, ACADEMIA 20, and ACADEMIA 50

1698
Scan parameters – Go!SCAN SPARK

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

1699
 Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Acquire texture: Captures the texture on the object, allowing to visualize it.
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.

This option is grayed out when the model only contains imported targets.

Optimize surface: Rectifies alignment of misaligned frames to remove outliers such as laser crosses or
light stripes, can be deactivated or set to Quick or Full. Use the Quick setting for fast processing and
removal of most crosses or stripes. Use the Full setting to increase accuracy on local measurement
smaller than 15 cm (6 in) (Go!SCAN SPARK, MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners only).
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1700
Scan parameters – Go!SCAN 20 and
Go!SCAN 50

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Apply texture: turns on or off the texture on the 3D model (can be selected while scanning or after the
scan). The texture data will be acquired during the scan but will not be used during the surface
computation.
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

1701
Scan parameters – HandySCAN 3D

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:

The availability of modes or settings may depend on the currently active scanner.

Working volume: Set preferred scan distance.

Recommended stand-off
Working volume* Targets
distance
Standard 200 mm to 450 mm 3 mm or 6 mm
Far 300 mm to 750 mm 6 mm

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.

Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

1702
 l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1703
Scan parameters – HandySCAN BLACK

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

1704
 Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1705
Scan parameters – MetraSCAN BLACK

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

1706
 Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Optimize surface: Rectifies alignment of misaligned frames to remove outliers such as laser crosses or
light stripes, can be deactivated or set to Quick or Full. Use the Quick setting for fast processing and
removal of most crosses or stripes. Use the Full setting to increase accuracy on local measurement
smaller than 15 cm (6 in) (Go!SCAN SPARK, MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners only).
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1707
Basic Wkflow - Scan param - MAX

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Working volume: Set the desired distance depending the size of the part.

Working volume* Recommended stand-off distance Targets

Near 400 mm to 600 mm 6 mm
Standard 600 mm to 1300 mm 6 mm or 12 mm
Far 1300 mm to 2200 mm 12 mm

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.

Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

1708
 l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1709
Scan parameters – MetraSCAN 357,
MetraSCAN 750, and MetraSCAN 350

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

1710
Scan parameters – Health Care Partner 3D

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object surface.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

1711
Scan parameters – ACADEMIA 3D

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:

ACADEMIA 10
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object surface.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

ACADEMIA 20
Apply texture: turns on or off the texture on the 3D model (can be selected while scanning or after the
scan). The texture data will be acquired during the scan but will not be used during the surface
computation.
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

1712
ACADEMIA 50
Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Fill positioning targets: Fills the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundaries' quality and accuracy.
Optimize scan mesh: Optimizes the mesh by cleaning the edges, increasing resolution on high
curvature areas and by minimizing scan noise.
Decimate scan mesh: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low detail and low curvature.
Auto. fill holes: Controls the size of the holes to be filled automatically. When increasing the value of
the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the holes to be filled.
Remove isolated patches: Controls the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.

1713
Detect Targets

The Manual detect targets method is selected by default. For information on other target detection
methods, see the C-Track Operating Principles section.

1. Choose a selection tool available through the mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
rectangle

l
free form

2. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl + click).

3. Select the target type in the drop-down list.

4. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1714
Scan
Start by setting the Positioning parameters and Scanner parameters in the system panel. Positioning

parameters can be accessed out of Scan mode (click Stop scanning ). For more details, click the
connected device name:

Go!SCAN SPARK

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 40 cm (~16 in).
Use the targets and the light stripes projected on the part as a distance meter and try to keep
them green while scanning.

l
If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l
Click to finalize the scan according to set Scan parameters and Texture parameters.

Go!SCAN 20 and Go!SCAN 50

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 38 cm (~15 in)
(Go!SCAN 20) or 40 cm (~16 in) (Go!SCAN 50).

l Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

l If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

1715
HandySCAN BLACK

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 30 cm (~12 in).
Use the targets and the laser lines projected on the part as a distance meter and try to keep
them green while scanning.

l
Click Start scanning . When the scan is done, click .

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l
Click to finalize the scan according to set Scan parameters.

l After finalizing the scan, it is possible to reset it to get more satisfying results.

HandySCAN MAX

1716
 l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l
The HandySCAN 3D MAX offers a large measurement volume. It allows fast
acquisition of large surface with a flexible stand-off distance.

HandySCAN 3D MAX HandySCAN MAX|Elite

l
Click Start scanning . When the scan is done, click .

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l
Click to finalize the scan according to set Scan parameters.

l After finalizing the scan, it is possible to reset it to get more satisfying results.

HandySCAN 307, HandySCAN 700, and HandySCAN 300

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 30 cm (~12 in).
Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

1717
 l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l Mesh triangle size can be changed using Increase resolution (reduces triangle size) or Decrease
resolution (increases triangle size).

MetraSCAN BLACK

l Set the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 30 cm (~12 in).
Use the laser lines projected on the part as a distance meter and try to keep them green while
scanning.

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l
Click to finalize the scan according to set Scan parameters.

1718
MetraSCAN 357, MetraSCAN 350, and MetraSCAN 750

l Set the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 30 cm (~12 in).
Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

l Mesh triangle size can be changed using Increase resolution (reduces triangle size) or Decrease
resolution (increases triangle size).

Health Care Partner 3D

l Set the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 40 cm (~16 in).
Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

l If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

l Background editing tools and Delete tools are available while scanning. After stopping the
scan, additional Selection tools are available to remove unwanted data.

ACADEMIA 10 and ACADEMIA 50

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l For better scan accuracy, make sure to follow the scanner's stand-off distance of 40 cm (~16 in).
Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

l If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

1719
l Background edition tools and Delete tools are available while scanning. After stopping the
scan, additional Selection tools are available to remove unwanted data.

1720
ACADEMIA 20

l Set the Positioning parameters and the Scanner parameters.

l Use the distance meter displayed on the left of the screen and try to keep it green while
scanning.

l If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to remove
unwanted data.

1721
Optimize Volumetric Accuracy
This operation optimizes the volumetric accuracy1 of the positioning model capture using the
integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the scanner's
points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function allows
maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1722
Final Options

Select an option and click .

Export mesh: Export the mesh in multiple file types.
Send to VXmodel: To open the software interface and create a mesh under the VXmodel node. Mesh
editing and alignment tools will be available.
Inspect mesh in VXinspect|Quality Control: To open VXinspect|Quality Control to create an inspection
program.
Inspect mesh in VXinspect|Analysis: To open VXinspect|Analysis to create an inspection program.
Save session: Save the session as a .csf file.
New workflow: To open a new workflow and create a new scan.
Exit workflow: To open the software interface and create a scan under the VXscan node.

1723
Small Part Guided Workflow
Available with the HandySCAN BLACK and the Go!SCAN SPARK.
Perform a step- by- step scan process of small parts in multiple setups using the guided workflow.

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

Click Quit workflow at the top-right corner of the 3D viewer to leave the workflow at any time.
Scan parameters
Scanner calibration

l HandySCAN BLACK

l Go!SCAN SPARK

Scanner configuration

l HandySCAN BLACK

l Go!SCAN SPARK

Scan target tips

Scan targets
Scan
Add scan
Align and merge scans

l Global registration (only available when there is at least 3 meshes)

Scan finalization
Final options

1724
Scan parameters – HandySCAN 3D and
Go!SCAN SPARK

Navigate through the workflow steps using the blue arrows ( ).

The availability of modes or settings may depend on the currently active scanner.

Working volume: Set preferred scan distance.

Recommended stand-off
Working volume* Targets
distance
Standard 200 mm to 450 mm 3 mm or 6 mm
Far 300 mm to 750 mm 6 mm

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:

Resolution: Determines the output triangle size.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels, including
input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of 2x

or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

1725
 If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Acquire texture: Captures the texture on the object, allowing to visualize it. (Go!SCAN SPARK only)
Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. Increase the
value of the slider to also increase the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Optimization mode

Optimization modes
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
Some settings can vary dependent on scanner in use.

Parame
Standard Mesh enhancement File size Express
ter
Optimiz
e
volume
tric
accurac
y1

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1726
 Parame
Standard Mesh enhancement File size Express
ter
Optimiz
e Off Quick Off Off
surface
Fill
position
ing
targets
Optimiz
e
accuracy
of
bounda
ries
Smooth
bounda Off Low Low Off
ries
Reduce
Low High Off Off
noise
Sharpen
Off Low Off Off
edges
Auto.
decimat
e

Exampl
e

Parameters
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts. Only available with the Targets only
positioning method.
Optimize surface: Rectifies alignment of misaligned frames to remove outliers such as laser crosses or
light stripes, can be deactivated or set to Quick or Full. Use the Quick setting for fast processing and
removal of most crosses or stripes. Use the Full setting to increase accuracy on local measurement
smaller than 15 cm (6 in) (Go!SCAN SPARK, MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R BLACK scanners only).

1727
Watertight : Fills in any gaps or holes to create a watertight mesh.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1728
Scan Targets Tips
Start by scanning targets to create a clipping plane under which no scan data will be acquired
afterwards.

1729
Scan Targets

When using a Go!SCAN SPARK, Targets only will be the default positioning
method.

1. Click Start scanning or the scanner trigger button to start scanning targets.

l
Click Reset scan if unwanted targets are acquired.

If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue scanning.

2. Click Stop scanning .

l A clipping plane will be created.

l Edit the plane offset and orientation by dragging the plane normal and the plane
handles.

3. Click Create clipping plane to accept the creation process. To continue scanning

targets, click Close .

1730
Scan
Steps for Scan 1 and Scan 2

1. Click Start scanning or the scanner trigger button to start scanning the part in a first
orientation (Scan 1). For details, see the Acquisition Rules section of the connected device
(HandySCAN BLACK) or Go!SCAN SPARK).

If position tracking is lost, use Resume scan to select an area to continue

scanning.

2. Click Stop scanning .

l After stopping the scan, the Selection tools and Delete tools are available to
remove unwanted data.

l
Reset scan will keep the targets and the clipping plane.

3. Click to scan the second side of the part.

4. Click or the scanner trigger button to start scanning the part in a second orientation
(Scan 2).

5. Click .

6. Click .

1731
Add Scan

If required, additional scans can be performed to complete the part acquisition.

Select the next action:

l
Add scan or

l
Align and merge scans

Add scan

1. Click to scan the part in another orientation.

The parameters of the first scan will be applied to the next scans created in the
session. They can be edited later.

2. Change the orientation of the part and perform the scan. For details, see the Acquisition
Rules section of the connected device (HandySCAN BLACK) or Go!SCAN SPARK).

3. When the part acquisition is completed, click .

Align and merge scans

For details, see the Align and merge scans section.

1732
Align and Merge Scans

Scans must be aligned before proceeding to the Merge operation.

The alignment is performed using common surfaces by Best fit. It is only accessible when a session with
scanned surface is opened.

Item selection
Fixed: There can be multiple fixed items selected. This is the mesh that will not move during the
operation.
Mobile: All the session meshes can be selected but only 1 at a time.

To align scans using the Surface best fit mode

This mode aligns 2 or more meshes together.

1. Set the parameters in the Surface best fit pane.

2. Click Best fit to perform the automatic or manual prealignment.

3. Click if the alignment is good. If not, click (Reset last for last alignment or Reset
all for all alignments).

Parameters
Maximum distance: Maximum search distance between 2 surfaces to consider them as the same
surface.
Prealignment mode
Automatic: Automatic prealignment of the fixed and mobile item selection. Following the prealignment,
the surface best fit will automatically be calculated.
Manual:

1. Select at least 3 points on the fixed item (left side of the 3D viewer).

2. Select the same points on the mobile item (right side of the 3D viewer).

To align scans using the Global registration function

1733
This function only available when there is at least 3 meshes to align. It allows finding the best solution for
the alignment while considering all the meshes selected at once.

1. Select a Fixed scan and at least two Mobile scans.

2. Set the parameters for Maximum distance.

3. Click to accept the registration.

4. Click if the alignment is good. If not, click (Best fit) to try again with different
parameters.

1734
Scan Finalization
To finalize a scan
1. Set the Finalize scan parameters.
2. Click Finalize .
3. Click .

The Selection and Delete tools remain available after finalization to remove
unwanted data.

Finalize scan parameters

Optimization mode
Select an Optimization mode in the drop-down list. The Finalize scan parameters are automatically set
according to the chosen mode. Opt for the Custom mode to modify parameters manually.
For details on the optimization modes, see the Finalize scan parameters section.
Optimize volumetric accuracy : Optimizes the volumetric accuracy of the positioning model capture
using the integrated photogrammetry algorithms. It refines the algorithms taking in consideration all the
scanner's points of view instead of considering only the path followed by the scanner. This function
allows maintaining the accuracy specifications even on larger parts.
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas with
low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the decimated
mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted in
orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

1735
Final Options

Select an option and click .

Export mesh: Export the mesh in multiple file types.
Send to VXmodel: To open the software interface and create a mesh under the VXmodel node. Mesh
editing and alignment tools will be available.
Inspect mesh in VXinspect|Quality Control: To open VXinspect|Quality Control to create an inspection
program.
Inspect mesh in VXinspect|Analysis: To open VXinspect|Analysis to create an inspection program.
Save session: Save the session as a .csf file.
New workflow: To open a new workflow and create a new scan.
Exit workflow: To open the software interface and create a scan under the VXscan node.

1736
VXscan-R Overview
VXscan-R is a robot offline programming (OLP) module integrated in VXelements. This module includes
a set of tools and functions allowing the development, simulation and transfer of robot programs and
trajectories to be used for scanning in the CUBE-R context or specific custom layouts.
A programmer can work on programs with or without connection to the robot, through the VXscan-R
Plan interface, whereas the VXscan- R Execute interface will allow the programs to be run without
supervision in the CUBE- R. The programs are loaded automatically by the software into the robot
controller.

Benefits

l Reduction of robot downtime

l Removal of programmer from potentially hazardous environments

l Simplification of complex tasks

l Verification of robot programs

Licenses
VXscan-R is available in 3 licenses:

l VXscan-R Plan

l VXscan-R Execute

l VXscan-R Bundle (combines the VXscan-R Plan and VXscan-R Execute licenses)

VXscan-R Plan main functions

Offline scanning trajectory programming: Allows programming scanner sweeps with the robot.
Scanning simulation: Makes it possible to check the sweeps and their results.
Robot program integration: Enables transferring the program to the robot for further execution.

VXscan-R Execute main functions

1737
Production interface: Allows launching the programs in a production context.
Send to inspection: Enables sending the data automatically to the inspection software for analysis after
each VXscan-R Execute scan. The feature can be tested in VXscan-R Plan with VXinspect|Quality Control
(Inspect mesh), with PolyWorks (Send to PolyWorks), or with Metrolog (Send to Metrolog).

Input and output formats

For details, see the VXelements file types section.

Technical requirements
VXscan-R has standard requirements for installation and usage.

1738
Home Page

Interface
Function / Section Icon Action

System calibrations Access the calibration functions.

Calibrate C-Track Start the C-Track calibration.

Calibrate scanner Start the scanner calibration.

Allows the commissioning of a CUBE-R cell (reserved to the

Calibrate CUBE-R
robot integrator).
Create a custom environment around the essential parts of the
Edit layout CUBE-R (Reserved to robot integrator. Requires a specific
license).
Group Manager – This section lists the groups created in VXscan-R.
Add and name a group. It is possible to rename or delete a
New group
group. Each group contains a New part option.

Unselected group An unselected group will be collapsed.

A selected group will be expanded to create new parts or

Selected group
display its existing parts and their images (if any).

New part Load a CAD model and begin a new inspection session.

Open in VXscan-R In VXscan-R Execute, run a fully ready program validated by a

Execute programmer.
Open a session in VXscan-R Plan to create and modify the robot
Open in VXscan-R Plan
scanning program.
Access these options: Rename, Delete, Move (to transfer a
session in another group) and Start VXscan- R Execute in
More options
simulation (to enable the VXscan- R Execute options in the
session).

An image or a screen shot of the project can be added in the Edit info. pane.

1739
 l Click OK to save it: it will then be displayed in the Home page.

l Right-click it to access the Full size option.

To import a CAD
Through a new group

1. Click New group.

2. Type a name for the group.

3. Click New part.

4. Select the CAD to be used. VXscan-R opens up automatically.

Through an existing group

1. Click (unselected group).

2. Click New part.

3. Select the CAD to be used. VXscan-R opens up automatically.

To manage the products used in a session

To update a session with the products activated on the computer

1. Copy the session file in a workspace folder.

2. Open the session through the Home page interface.

To use a session without loading the products activated on the computer

l Double click-the session file directly or

l Open through Open session in VXelements.

1740
VXscan-R Interface
In the OLP software, the robot cell is represented through a graphical 3D model in a simulator.
The interface varies depending on whether VXscan-R Plan or VXscan-R Execute is selected.

VXscan-R Plan

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar
Icon Function Action

Click the icon to show the active modules within the current
Module selector
session and select desired module to switch.

Undo To go back to the last action performed

Redo To redo the undone editing action

Edit info. To insert information about a part or a project

Align To position the part in the virtual environment

Add feature To create a feature to be scanned

To reorder the program to optimize cycle time and to finalize all

Reorder and finalize scanning sweeps and transitions to avoid collisions. Differs from
Finalize accessed by right-clicking a sweep in the timeline.

To finalize all scanning sweeps and transitions to avoid collisions.

Finalize path Differs from Finalize accessed by right-clicking a sweep in the
timeline.

Play sim.
To run the virtual program to test it
Pause sim.

1741
Icon Function Action
To reset the simulated scan and return to the home position (at
Reset sim.
the beginning of the timeline)

Locates, and allows modifying the robot trajectory to

Locate C-Track
accommodate a repositioned C-Track

Connect to robot To connect the computer to the robot controller and upload the
program on it
Disconnect
To disconnect the computer from the robot controller

Physical alignment To check the real location of the part.

Start To start the robot program on the controller from the beginning,
at its Home position, and start the scan process
Stop To stop the scan process when the robot program is paused

To run through the previous sweep or transition, in reverse,

Step backward
stopping at its first position

To halt the robot program at any point and resume it, when
Resume paused

It is also possible to press the space bar to

Pause pause or resume the program.

To run through the following sweep or transition, stopping at its

Step forward
last position

Go home To make the robot return to its Home position

Validate To confirm the program is ready to be used in VXscan-R Execute

Finalize scan To finalize the scan

To reset the current scan (parameters will not be reinitialized as

Reset scan
in New session)

Delete To delete the selected triangles.

Keep only To delete all unselected triangles.

1742
 Icon Function Action

Manual resolution To manually change the resolution on a selected area

Clear manual
To clear selection and prevent manual reconstruction
resolution

To send the mesh and part information to VXinspect for

Inspect mesh
inspection

Send to PolyWorks To inspect the mesh using PolyWorks|Inspector

Send to Metrolog To inspect the mesh using Metrolog X4

Functions only available from the menu bar

Icon Function Action

The Save session option saves the robot program and its
parameters. See Edit info. for additional saving options.

Save session The Save session option does not save the
scan data. To save it, go to File | Export |
Save scan.

To create a custom environment around the essential parts of

Edit layout
the CUBE-R (reserved to the robot integrator)
To load a positioning model file containing previously detected
– Import targets targets. To create a new positioning model, see the Target
acquisition section.

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item
in the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Import functions
C-Track positioning targets
Reference

1743
Fixture

1744
Export functions
C-Track positioning targets
Mesh
Save scan: The raw scan data will be saved to the selected location under VXscan as a session file.
Export to I/O Module
Allows exporting critical scan information to I/O Module if trajectories are free of collisions.

l Export scan trajectory:

1. Read the disclaimer. Click Accept.

2. Select robot configuration number. Click OK.

3. Enter a program name. Click OK.

4. (Optional) Enter a scan template name. Click OK to create. Click Cancel to

bypass.

5. Choose a location. Click Save.

6. Import into I/O Module. See Import from VXscan-R.

7. Import the robot program file into the robot controller.

l Export scanner calibration:

1. Choose a location and name the robot file. Click Save.

2. Import the robot file into the robot controller.

l Export C-Track calibration:

1. Choose a location and name the robot file. Click Save.

2. Import the robot file into the robot controller.

Navigation panel

Navigation pane

VXscan-R node

Robot sub-node

Click to display the robot in the 3D viewer.

1745
Scanner sub-node

Click to display the scanner in the 3D viewer.

Positioning model sub-node

This sub-node appears after clicking Import targets or performing an automated photogrammetry.

Click to show the C-Track positioning targets associated to the session in the 3D viewer and to
display the photogrammetry results in the Photogrammetry details pane.

Layout sub-node

Show or hide the items listed by clicking .

l Enclosure

l Robot module

l Table

l Fixture

l C-Track

l C-Track volume

Scan sub-node
Click to display the Scan details, Scan parameters and Finalize scan parameters panes. Select this
sub-node to see the final scan result with triangles structured as an .stl file in the 3D viewer.

1746
The scan status is displayed on the Scan sub-node:

Icon Scan status

Scanning

Empty

Not finalized

Finalized

Manual resolution sub-node

Click to display the active scan template in the session.

Right-click the sub-node to access the Contextual Menu functions.

Features sub-node
Different feature types can be found under this sub-node. For details, see the Add feature section.
Right-click the feature to access the Contextual Menu functions.

Scan sweeps sub-node

Different scan sweep types can be found under this sub-node. For details, see the Scan sweeps
section.
Right-click a scan sweep to access the Contextual Menu functions.

Referencesnode
Expand the node to see the CAD model(s) used as a reference for programming.
Click the CAD node to access several options. For details, see the CAD Model section.

1747
Scan details pane
The Scan details menu provides information on the selected scan in the Navigation tree.
Resolution: Resolution value set in the Scan parameters.
Estimated triangle count: Estimate of the number of triangles.
Triangle count: Total number of triangles in the scan.
Vertex count: Total number of vertices in the scan.
Target count: Total number of positioning targets detected in the scan.

Scan parameters pane

Set the Scan parameters before starting to scan:
Resolution: Indicate the output triangle size. When changing scan resolution in VXscan-R, a pop-up
message appears, asking if the speed of all features should be set to their recommended speed.
Smart resolution: Applies the smart resolution automatic method. Can be set to High, Standard,
Custom, or Off.
Smart resolution modes
Standard (default): Select this mode to apply, on areas that require it, a 2x finer resolution than the
original input resolution to generate a good mesh (.stl).

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 2

resolution levels: 2 mm and 1 mm.

High: Select this mode to automatically increase the resolution by up to four times (4x) on high
curvatures and sharp details. It keeps the input resolution on low curvature surfaces. It uses up to 3
resolution levels, 1x (input resolution), 2x or 4x.

A scan performed at a 2 mm input resolution will create a mesh made of 3

resolution levels: 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.500 mm.

Custom: Select this mode to set the parameters individually. A maximum of 3 resolution levels,
including input (original) resolution, can be applied.

l Finer level count: Set the number of finer resolution levels that will be applied. A finer level consists of

2x or 4x more resolution than the input resolution.

1748
 If the input resolution is 2 mm and Finer level count is 2, the output mesh will be
made of 2 mm, 1 mm, and 0.5 mm triangles.

l Coarser level count: Set the number of coarser resolution levels that will be applied. A coarser level

consists of 2x or 4x less resolution from the input resolution.

If the input resolution is 1 mm and Coarser level count is 2, the output mesh will
be made of 1 mm, 2 mm and 4 mm triangles.

Off: Select this mode to apply the same resolution on all areas to be scanned (single resolution).

Custom (1 level
Standard High finer and 1 level Off
coarser)

Examp
le

Remove isolated patches: Control the size of the patches to be removed automatically. When
increasing the value of the slider, it also increases the maximum size of the patches to be removed.
Use whole CAD for clipping: Set the range outside which triangles will be deleted on all CAD
surfaces defined as a 3D reference.
Increase scanner clearance: Select to increase clearance distances during transitions. If the robot
cannot reach the increased clearance distances, then the default values will be used.
Manual resolution range: Set the range inside which the manual reconstruction resolution factor
will be applied to triangles.

1749
Finalize scan parameters pane
Optimization modes
Select an Optimization mode. Parameters are automatically set according to the chosen mode. Select
the Custom mode to modify parameters individually.

Standard mode is recommended for quality control purposes.

Mesh
Parameter Standard File size Express
enhancement
Optimize
Off Quick Off Off
surface
Fill
positioning x x x x
targets
Optimize
accuracy of x
boundaries
Smooth
Off Low Low Off
boundaries
Reduce
Off High Off Off
noise
Sharpen
Off High Off Off
edges
Auto.
x
decimate

Example

Parameters

1750
Optimize surface: Rectifies alignment of misaligned frames to remove outliers such as laser crosses
or light stripes, can be deactivated or set to Quick or Full. Use the Quick setting for fast processing
and removal of most crosses or stripes. Use the Full setting to increase accuracy on local
measurement smaller than 15 cm (6 in) (Go!SCAN SPARK, MetraSCAN BLACK, and MetraSCAN-R
BLACK scanners only).
Fill positioning targets: Fills in the holes created by the positioning targets on the object's surface.
Optimize accuracy of boundaries: Improves the boundary quality and accuracy.
Smooth boundaries: Rebuilds the boundaries to flatten them.
Reduce noise: Removes outliers close to the mesh surface, can be deactivated or set to Low or High.
Should be set according to the surface finish and scan resolution, i.e. set to High for shiny surfaces or
when scanning at high resolution.
Sharpen edges: Reorganizes triangles along edges to enhance the edge shape.
Auto. decimate: Reduces the total number of triangles by increasing the size of triangles on areas
with low details and low curvature. The deviations between the original mesh's vertices and the
decimated mesh's triangles are taken into account when generating the final output.
Auto. fill holes: Sets the size of the holes to be filled automatically. Increasing the value of the slider
increases the maximum size of the hole to be filled. In the preview, holes to be filled are highlighted
in orange. This function may not be present when a legacy scanner (G2 or earlier) is connected.

Animation details pane

This pane shows information regarding the robot program simulation.
Total duration: The length of the robot program simulation.

This duration does not take into account the finalization of the scan.

Collision detected: The software confirms if there are any collisions in the program.
Simulation time speed multiplier slider: Increase or decrease the duration of the simulated scan.
This value is expressed in percentage.

The multiplier must be set at a maximum of 100% to have a simulated scan. If

the set value is higher, the simulation will only showcase the robot movements.

Photogrammetry details pane

1751
 This pane shows information regarding the automated photogrammetry results.
3D uncertainty: Mean uncertainty on the measured position of targets (standard deviation). Set in
mm.

3D viewer
The 3D viewer displays three-dimensional models and results in real-time. The manipulations of the
models are made through mouse controls.
Different tools are available in the mini toolbar located in the upper-left corner of the 3D viewer.

Elements may vary depending on the node selected.

Display toolbar
Located at the bottom of the 3D viewer. Depending on the devices or modules purchased,
different sections will be displayed. For details, see the Display toolbar section.

Selection tools
The selection tool icons are displayed in a mini toolbar in the upper-left corner of the 3D viewer or
alternatively they can be accessed through the main menu, under Tools | Selection.
Select a type of selection to access different tools.

Icon Function Action

To select nominal surface(s) and/or edge(s) on the
CAD model selection
active CAD model.
To select measured triangles on a measurement
Mesh selection
mesh.

CAD model selection tools

Icon Function Action

Select all To select all CAD surfaces.

Clear selection To clear the current selection of CAD surfaces.

1752
 Icon Function Action
To invert the current CAD surface selection;
unselected CAD surfaces will be selected.
Invert selection
Conversely, selected CAD surfaces will no longer
be part of the selection.

To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold

Rectangle selection Ctrl+click, and release it when the selection is
completed.

To create a free-form selection (lasso).

l For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl+click.

l For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and

Free form selection
hold the mouse left button.

l Once the selection is completed, right-

click to end it or release the Ctrl key.

Use this mode to select a single surface or a single

edge with one click. Hold the Ctrl key and click the
CAD selection
CAD surface or edge that is highlighted in yellow
to select it.

Mesh selection tools

* The selection tools featuring the selection tolerance (i.e. interactive flood fill
selection) allow to preview and interactively adjust the selection in the 3D viewer.

Rectangle selection

Free form selection

Brush selection

Connect

Sudden change*

Similar curvature*

Similar normal*

Isolated patches

1753
 Curvature selection*

Triangle picking

Select through

Select backface

Select all

Clear selection

Invert selection

Grow the selection

Shrink the selection

Timeline
The timeline displays the sequence of the sweeps in a scanning path.

System panel
Located at the right side of the 3D viewer, the system panel displays the status and the parameters of
the activated device. For details, see the System panel section.

VXscan-R Execute

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar

1754
 Icon Function Action

To start the robot program on the controller from the beginning, at

its Home position, and start the scan process.
Start
To stop the scan process when the robot program is paused.

Stop During the scan, the CAD will be semi-

transparent.

To halt the robot program at any point and resume it, when paused.
Resume

It is also possible to press the space bar to

Pause pause or resume the program.

To connect the computer to the robot controller and upload the

Connect to robot
program on it. Robot is automatically connected when opening a
session in VXscan-R Execute.
Disconnect
To disconnect the computer from the robot controller.

To acquire the target positions on the fixture and part while the
Photogrammetry
rotary table is turning 360 degrees.

Go home To make the robot return to its home position.

Home page To return to the startup screen.

Save session To save the session (.csf).

Save session as To save the session as a separate file from the original session.

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item
in the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Project properties
This section shows information on the project and on the outcome of inspections performed. The
data indicated varies according to the inspection software used.

1755
 Timeline
The timeline displays the sequence of the sweeps in a scanning path.

System panel
Located at the right side of the 3D viewer, the system panel displays the status and the parameters of
the activated device. For details, see the System panel section.

VXscan-R plug-in for cobots

For more information, see the VXscan-R plug-in for cobots section.

Icon Function Action

Displays plugin's connection status to VXscan-R (Connected
Robot connection status
or Not connected)
To refresh the plugin connection status and the plugin
Refresh
interface display.
To start the continuous point position recording (every
Record robot (Start)
50mm)

Record robot (Stop) To halt the continuous point position recording

1756
Icon Function Action

Record Point To record the individual point position

Laser To turn ON/OFF the laser (StartScan must be active)

Zoom To Zoom out or Zoom in

Shutter To decrease or increase shutter speed

Next sweep To create a new jog feature sweep

Start Scan To enter scan mode

Stop Scan To exit scan mode (Will turn off the laser if active)

Reset scan To reset the current scan

Message To accept or decline the displayed message

1757
Using VXscan-R

On VXelements Home page, select VXscan-R.

Typical workflow

VXscan-R Plan mode

Step Action Description
1 Import CAD Import a reference for the part and fixture.
2 Edit info Indicate various information about the project and the part.
Position the reference part on the rotary table according to the real
3 Align CAD
location of the part in the robot cell.
Create different types of movement (including sweeps) to be
4 Add feature
executed by the scanner mounted on the robot.
Calculation process that allows the software to find solutions and
5 Finalize path
optimize the paths of the sweeps.
6 Play the simulation Run the program virtually and check the anticipated results.
Connect the computer to the robot controller and upload the
7 Connect to robot
program to the real industrial robot for execution.
8 System preparation Perform a calibration and photogrammetry when needed.
Adjust the alignment of the CAD model to match the actual location
9 Physical alignment
of the part and fixture.
10 Play program Play the robot program created offline and navigate through it.
Confirm the program is ready to be run in VXscan-R Execute
11 Validate
(without supervision).
12 Finalize scan Finalize the scan to obtain the final mesh result.
Create a template for the application of the smart resolution (could
13 Manual resolution
also be done after step 6).
14 Send to inspection Set the inspection parameters and check the inspection results.

VXscan-R Execute mode

Step Action Description
Input project Indicate various information about the part (serial number, operator
1
properties name, etc.)
2 System preparation Perform a calibration and photogrammetry when needed.

1758
Step Action Description
3 Launch program Play the robot program created offline.
4 Send to inspection Set the inspection parameters and check the inspection results.

1759
Asset Protection
This function sends messages and performs checks to ensure the worker and equipment safety.
It is only available when:

l VXscan-R is connected to the robot

l A pneumatic tool changer is used

These checks can be blocking to the workflow, when the context requires it.

Context Check

l Air pressure.

C-Track calibration l Scanner serial number.

l No target seen.

l Robot signal (swing arm in place, scale bar in

rack).
Scanner calibration
l Scanner serial number.

l No target seen.

l Robot signal (swing arm in place, scale bar in

rack).

l Referential is empty (photogrammetry has not

Scan, Go home, Go to, Step
backward and Step forward been performed).

l The C-Track has not been referenced.

l C-Track position relating to the part (the part is in

the right location).

Before starting the automated

photogrammetry Robot signal (swing arm in place, scale bar in rack).

The model matches the current positioning model. This

After performing the automated
photogrammetry check is only performed if there is already a
photogrammetry model.

1760
VXscan-R Plan
This interface is used for project planning, simulation, and validation.

Functions are available for:

Offline programming
Online testing

1761
VXscan-R Plan – Offline
This interface allows working on programs without establishing a connection to the robot.

Functions or sections available for offline programming in VXscan-R Plan

Edit info.
Import fixture
Align
Add feature
Timeline functions
Reorder and finalize path
Play simulation
Finalize scan
Reset scan
Manual resolution
Inspection

l Inspect mesh

l Send to PolyWorks

l Send to Metrolog

1762
Edit Info

Tools | Edit info.

This pane allows displaying and modifying the information relevant to the project.

Parameters
Group: This field is automatically populated when the session is created through a group, in the Home
page. If a session is not linked to a group, the Add... button will be enabled to add it into one.
Project name: Type a name for the session.

If the session was already named in the Home page, or through or File | Save
session as, the previously given name will be displayed in the Project name field.

Description: Give a short description of the project.

Export instructions: After a scan in VXscan-R Execute, select how the data will be managed.
Export to:

l New session file (CSF): The raw scan data will be saved as a session file to the selected location
in the VXscan module.

l Path: Select an export destination.

l Finalize before export: Select to finalize the scan session before saving it.

l STL file: The scan data will be saved as a mesh file to the selected location.

l Path: Select an export destination.

l VXinspect|Quality Control: The scan data will be exported to VXinspect|Quality Control. For
details, see the Inspect mesh section.

l Add part: The part will be listed with the others already in the VXinspect|Quality
Control node.

1763
 l Replace part: The part will replace the one already in the VXinspect|Quality Control
node.

l Report path: Browse to indicate where the report should be saved on the computer.

l Report format: Choose the format in which the VXinspect|Quality Control report will
be generated. Can be set to PDF, XLS, HTML, or CSV.

l PolyWorks: The scan data will be exported to PolyWorks|Inspector. For details, see the Send to
PolyWorks section.

l Metrolog: The scan data will be exported to Metrolog X4. For details, see the Send to
Metrolog section.

Execute scan repetitions: Set the number of scans to be performed in loop in VXscan-R Execute. This is
mostly useful for test purposes.

This will not allow the operator to switch parts in between scans.

Allow overwriting session's positioning model in Execute: Selecting this allows Execute mode to
overwrite the positioning model in the Execute and Plan session files.
Project screen shots: Add images or screen shots to clarify the project's purpose.
Activate Environment compensation: Select to trigger the Environment compensation function upon
each Start scan, both in VXscan-R Plan and VXscan-R Execute. This will add a step at the beginning of the
robot program that will be visible in the session's timeline.

l Automatically recover Environment compensation: Select to allow the robot to

automatically recover (without human intervention or supervision) when the Environment
compensation function fails:

l Execute a Go home action (will avoid collision with the offline programming
environment);

l Return the rotary table to the position set in the Table position parameter, to allow
the scale bar to be seen by the C-Track;

l Wait for environment compensation to be recovered;

1764
 l Execute a Go to action to bring the robot to the beginning of the scan sweep that was
stopped by the loss of tracking.

l Table position: Using the slider or the spin box, set the angle up to which the rotary table
should turn to so that the C-Track sees the MaxSHOT 3D scale bar for a certain amount of time.
This requirement must be met for the Environment compensation function to be activated.

Test position: Click to test the position online:

Steps:

1. Connect to the robot.

2. Adjust table position to desired position.

3. Click "Test position". The table will rotate, the EC is activated, and the bar position is
validated for a short periods of time.

4. The robot position must be at home to test position.

To add an image or a screenshot

1. Click .

2. Select Import or Take a screenshot.

3. Click OK to accept the changes to the part information, or Cancel to exit the menu without
applying the changes.

The image will be displayed under the proper part in the Home page.

Options related to images or screen shots

Import: Browse to find an existing image or screen shot on the computer.
Take a screen shot: Set the 3D viewer to the desired position and click to capture an image.
Full size: Click the image to see it in full size in another window.
Delete: Right-click the image or screenshot to access this option.

To rename a program

1765
 1. Enter a name in the Project name field.

The Group field will be grayed out since the copy of the program will automatically
be saved in the same group the original program was opened in.

2. Click Ok. A pop-up window will appear, asking to choose between renaming the current
project (to update it) or creating a new project (to generate a copy).

3. Click Rename current project to update the project information. The new name will also
appear under the relevant group on the Home page.

To copy a program in a new part

1. Enter a name in the Project name field.

The Group field will be grayed out since the copy of the program will automatically
be saved in the same group the original program was opened in.

2. Click Ok. A pop-up window will appear, asking to choose between renaming the current
project (to update it) or creating a new project (to generate a copy).

3. Click Create new project to generate a copy of the existing program in a new part. It will
also appear under the relevant group on the Home page.

1766
Import Fixture

The fixture needs to be aligned with the part before importing the file.

This function is available by clicking , then selecting Fixture (or File | Import | Fixture).
It allows importing a fixture used to prevent a collision with the robot and simulate the scanning
program in a complete environment. This function also enables checking the visibility of the scanner and
laser lines.
A fixture can be added at any moment during offline programming. Its impact on the program and
visibility is added to the one from the CAD of the part, ensuring a double-check is performed to prevent
collisions.
Positional relation between the part and fixture need to be accounted for in the alignment of the fixture
file. No modification of the fixture is possible within VXscan-R.
If required, modifications have to be made in a separate CAD or mesh software, and the fixture must be
imported after the modifications.

To delete a fixture, right-click it in the navigation tree and select Delete.

After importing the fixture

If a collision is detected

l The Finalize path process must be performed again. The computer will try to find a different
path or simply disable sweeps.

If no collision is detected

l The Finalize path process does not need to be performed again.

1767
Align

Tools | Align
The Align menu provides alignment creation tools. Each tool is available through the menu bar or
toolbar.

Options available in the Align the CAD part pane

Select the option allowing to create the requested virtual alignment.

By default, the Reference option is selected when clicking Align.

These two alignment modes can be used jointly and it is possible to toggle between one and the other.

l Reference

l Manual

Options available in the Flip/Delete alignments pane

Plane/Plane: Click the flip icon to flip the alignment in the desired orientation or the delete icon to
delete it.
Line/Line: Click the flip icon to flip the alignment in the desired orientation or the delete icon to delete
it.
Point/Point: This alignment type cannot be flipped. Click the delete icon to delete it.

Auto. align
The Auto. align function will position the CAD in a logical position, measured by the software.

Check alignment
The software will validate, after a 360-degree turn by the rotary table, that the alignment does not cause
a collision between the part and the CUBE-R environment. It does not check for collisions with the rotary
table.

1768
If there is a collision, a message will pop-up, asking if the alignment should still be performed.

1769
Reference Alignment

For general information regarding alignments, see the Align section.

The Reference function allows the alignment of the CAD to the rotary table. It is possible to select a
plane, line or semicircle to align the 3D model to the environment.

To perform the alignment

1. In the 3D viewer, click matching features on the CAD and the rotary table.

For example, click the surface of the table, and then click the CAD surface that will
lay on the table. It is possible to repeat these steps for a total of 3 times.

2. Click Ok.

Once the part is aligned (by clicking Ok), no resetting is possible.

To modify the alignment

1. If the alignment is wrong or causes a collision, select the desired option in the Flip/Delete
alignments pane.

2. Click Ok.

1770
To undo the alignment

l Click Reset to undo the alignment and return the part to its previous position.

l Click Cancel to undo the alignment and return the part to its previous position without saving
the changes. The Align the part CAD pane will close.

1771
Manual Alignment

For general information regarding alignments, see the Align section.

The Manual function allows specifying an axis location and orientation to be used for the alignment by
setting offsets and angles.

To perform an alignment
Through the Offset pane

1. Set offsets and angles to move the part to the desired location and orientation.

2. Click Ok.

Through the 3D viewer

1. Click the 3D interactive coordinate system (gizmo) to move the part to the desired location
and orientation.

2. Click Ok.

To modify the alignment

1. If the alignment is wrong or causes a collision, select the desired option in the Flip/Delete
alignments pane.

The options of the Flip/Delete alignments pane are available only if they have been
activated in the Reference alignment mode.

2. Click Ok.

1772
To undo the alignment

l Click Reset to undo the alignment and return the part to its previous position.

l Click Cancel to undo the alignment and return the part to its previous position without saving
the changes. The Align the part CAD pane will close.

1773
Add Feature

Tools | Add feature

The Add feature function provides tools for feature creation that are available in the Feature type, Add
feature and Scanner parameters panes.
It allows selecting features, which are areas to be scanned, and create a scanning path from them, called
sweeps.
A blue wheel will also be available for the edge, surface and manual features, which allows changing the
angle of incidence of the scanner cameras, and white arrows will continue to display their original angle
(except for manual features).
A line will be created to display the scanner TCP path for each type of feature. The scanner will be
acquiring data around the line.

By default, the Surface option is selected when clicking Add feature.

Features and sweeps (except jog) are impacted by a change of the signature file.

Feature type pane

Icon Description

Surface feature

Edge feature

Manual feature

Jog feature

Options available in the Features sub-node of the Navigation pane

Right-click the sub-node to access the Contextual Menu functions. Double-click a feature to edit its
parameters.

Scan sweeps

1774
When selected through the Scan sweeps sub-node of the Navigation pane, the timeline or the 3D viewer,
enabled sweeps are displayed in dark orange, whereas they are displayed in pale yellow when
unselected. Hold Shift and click to pick several sweeps at a time in the 3D viewer or in the Scan sweeps
sub-node.

Multi-selection is not possible through the timeline. However, when several sweeps
are chosen at a time (3D viewer or sub-node), they are all automatically selected in
the timeline.

Selection is synchronized between:

l the timeline

l the Scan sweeps sub-node and

l the 3D viewer.

Sweeps that are unreachable or causing a collision will be displayed in red in the
expanded timeline.

All the sweeps generated will be added in the timeline.

It is possible to rearrange and optimize them before playing a simulation. For details on sweep
finalization, see the Reorder and Finalize Path section.

Statuses

Icon Status Description

The path has been optimized. The sweep will be displayed
Finalized
in the 3D viewer and in the timeline (in green).
The path is not optimal and needs to be fixed. The sweep
Not finalized will be displayed in the 3D viewer and in the timeline (in
orange).
The path is causing a collision, or is unreachable, and has
been disabled. The sweep is displayed in the 3D viewer (in
Disabled
orange) only when it is selected in the Scan sweeps sub-
node.

Options available in the Scan sweeps sub-node of the Navigation pane

Right-click the sub-node to access the Contextual Menu functions.

1775
Once connected to the robot, features and sweeps are no longer editable.
Disconnect from the robot to make any changes to them.

1776
Surface Feature

For general information regarding features and sweeps, see the Add feature
section.

The Surface function provides tools for the creation of a feature for which the data will be scanned by
following clusters of surfaces of the CAD model.

To create a surface feature

1. Click adjacent patches in the 3D viewer to create a cluster of surfaces. The software will
choose the optimal sweep direction according to the CAD surfaces selected. Yellow arrows
will appear, indicating the angle of incidence of the scanner cameras.

l Clicking selected surfaces allows changing the direction of the sweep(s). Clicking
again will combine both sweep directions.

l For patches to be considered as part of a cluster of surfaces, the normal angles must
be less than or equal to 135 degrees.

It is possible to deselect surfaces by holding down Shift and clicking them in the 3D
viewer.

2. Click non-adjacent surfaces to have the software consider them as separate clusters.

3. Hold down Ctrl and click a line to display the blue wheel that allows changing the angle of
incidence of the scanner cameras.

l The orientation of the wheel will depend on the orientation of the surface selected.

l It is only possible to use the wheel for 1 specific line at a time.

l The wheel will be active on a picked line until another line is selected.

1777
 4. Set the parameters in the Add feature and Scanner parameters panes.

5. Click OK.

6. A feature will be added in the Navigation pane of the Navigation panel, under the Features
sub-node of the VXscan-R node. Generated sweeps will present the same scanning
configuration as their associated feature. They will be added in the Scan sweeps sub-node
and in the timeline at the bottom of the interface.

Creating or modifying a feature will require a Finalize to be performed.

To set the parameters in the Add feature pane

Name: Enter the name of the surface feature.
Acquisition speed: This option offers 3 acquisition speed modes:

High speed

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of free-form
surfaces, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

High density

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of trimmed edges
and sheet metal entities, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be
edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

Custom

l The scan speed and laser mode are customizable.

Speed: Using the spin box or the slider, set the speed at which the sweep is to be performed. This value
is expressed in %. (only available with the Custom acquisition speed mode)

1778
Minimum visibility: Set the minimum amount of scanner positioning targets that have to be seen by
the C-Track during the sweep. Otherwise, the sweep will be disabled during the finalization process. This
value is expressed in %.
Overshoot value: Select the check box to indicate the extra distance the sweep has to cover on both
ends, beyond the feature path. This value is expressed in the length unit set in VXelements.
Clipping range: Limits the area included in the scan to the set distance from the sweep.
Scan overlap: For paths requiring multiple sweeps, indicate the percentage of scanning area coinciding
between a sweep and its 2 adjacent sweeps. A higher overlap value will create closer sweeps, with more
surface being scanned multiple times. This value is expressed in %.
Normal angle (°): This function allows setting the angle of incidence of the point normals. This value is
expressed in degrees. To display the normal angle, a sweep must be selected.

To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane

Available options can vary depending on scanner connected.
Laser mode: Select the laser mode used by the feature for scanning. Use Three orientations for better
results and only when scanning in the camera baseline direction at low speed, and Two orientations for
more flexibility.
HDR mode: Allows the use of 2 different shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts. The scanner will
alternate between the 2 shutter speeds.
Automatic shutter: Clear the check box to enable manual shutter adjustment.
Shutter: Adjust the configuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines during the scan
of the feature. Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times by pausing the acquisition process.
For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration section.
Automatic scanning area: Clear the check box to enable manual scanning area adjustment.
Scanning area: Resize the acquisition volume of the scanner. This value is expressed in %.

CAUTION: Scanning area show always be set to 100%. Failure to do so can

negatively affect scan quality.

Configuration preset: Select a preset previously created during configuration.

After the scanner configuration, a pop-up message will appear, asking if the new
configuration is to be applied to all features or only to the current one.

1779
High resolution multiplier: Based on the input (original) resolution, set a resolution which will be
applied to generate a surface using smaller triangles than the original ones. It can be changed during
the scanning process.

1780
Edge Feature

For general information regarding features and sweeps, see the Add feature
section.

The Edge function provides tools for the creation of a feature for which the data will be scanned by
following an edge of the CAD model.

To create an edge feature

1. Click a surface in the 3D viewer. On the closest edge of the surface, yellow arrows will
appear, indicating the angle of incidence of the scanner cameras, which can be adjusted by
the wheel.

l The orientation of the wheel will depend on the orientation of the edge selected.

l It is only possible to use the wheel for 1 specific edge at a time.

l The wheel will be active on the last picked edge, and may be changed by picking a
previously selected edge.

It is possible to deselect an edge by holding down Shift and clicking it in the 3D

viewer.

2. Set the parameters in the Add feature and Scanner parameters panes.

3. Click Ok.

4. A feature will be added in the Navigation pane of the Navigation panel, under the Features
sub-node of the VXscan-R node. Generated sweeps will present the same scanning
configuration as their associated feature. They will be added in the Scan sweeps sub-node
and in the timeline at the bottom of the interface.

Creating or modifying a feature will require a Finalize to be performed.

1781
To set the parameters in the Add feature pane
Name: Enter the name of the edge feature.
Acquisition speed: This option offers 3 acquisition speed modes:

High speed

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of free-form
surfaces, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

High density

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of trimmed edges
and sheet metal entities, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be
edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

Custom

l The scan speed and laser mode are customizable.

Speed: Using the spin box or the slider, set the speed at which the sweep is to be performed. This value
is expressed in %. (only available with the Custom acquisition speed mode)
Minimum visibility: Set the minimum amount of scanner positioning targets that have to be seen by
the C-Track during the sweep. Otherwise, the sweep will be disabled during the finalization process. This
value is expressed in %.
Overshoot value: Select the check box to indicate the extra distance the sweep has to cover on both
ends, beyond the feature path. This value is expressed in the length unit set in VXelements.
Clipping range: Limits the area included in the scan to the set distance from the sweep.
Merging range: Select to merge the closest edge sweeps together. Using the spin box, set a distance
threshold to avoid merging distant sweeps. This value is expressed in the length unit set in VXelements.
Normal angle (°): This function allows setting the angle of incidence of the point normals. This value is
expressed in degrees. To display the normal angle, a sweep must be selected.

1782
To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane
Available options can vary depending on scanner connected.
Laser mode: Select the laser mode used by the feature for scanning. Use Three orientations for better
results and only when scanning in the camera baseline direction at low speed, and Two orientations for
more flexibility.
HDR mode: Allows the use of 2 different shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts. The scanner will
alternate between the 2 shutter speeds.
Automatic shutter: Clear the check box to enable manual shutter adjustment.
Shutter: Adjust the configuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines during the scan
of the feature. Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times by pausing the acquisition process.
For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration section.
Automatic scanning area: Clear the check box to enable manual scanning area adjustment.
Scanning area: Resize the acquisition volume of the scanner. This value is expressed in %.

CAUTION: Scanning area show always be set to 100%. Failure to do so can

negatively affect scan quality.

Configuration preset: Select a preset previously created during configuration.

After the scanner configuration, a pop-up message will appear, asking if the new
configuration is to be applied to all features or only to the current one.

High resolution multiplier: Based on the input (original) resolution, set a resolution which will be
applied to generate a surface using smaller triangles than the original ones. It can be changed during
the scanning process.

1783
Manual Feature

For general information regarding features and sweeps, see the Add feature
section.

The Manual function provides tools for the creation of a feature for which the data will be scanned in an
area defined by segments created by clicking points.

To create a manual feature

1. Click at least two points on the surface in the 3D viewer to automatically create a segment.
This first segment will determine the orientation for the scanner for the rest of the feature.
Each point clicked after it will be linked, forming a polyline. The resulting is the path the
scanner will follow. Yellow arrows will appear on the line, indicating the angle of incidence
of the scanner's cameras.

It is possible to delete a point by holding down Shift and clicking it in the 3D

viewer. Adjust the position of the a point by clicking the point and then clicking
and dragging the colored arrows to adjust X, Y and Z position and the colored
wheels to adjust angles of incidence.

2. When the second point is clicked, the wheels and arrows move next to it, allowing changes
the angle of incidence of the scanner cameras from a certain point and position of the
point. The angle on the segment is a gradual shift from its start to its end.

l The orientation of the adjustment wheels and arrows will depend on the orientation
of the surface selected.

l It is possible to use the wheels and arrows for only 1 specific point at a time.

3. Set the parameters in the Add feature and Scanner parameters panes.

4. Click Ok.

1784
 5. A feature will be added in the Navigation pane of the Navigation panel, under the Features
sub-node of the VXscan-R node. Generated sweeps will present the same scanning
configuration as their associated feature. They will be added in the Scan sweeps sub-node
and in the timeline at the bottom of the interface.

Creating or modifying a feature will require a Finalize to be performed.

To set the parameters in the Add feature pane

Name: Enter the name of the manual feature.
Acquisition speed: This option offers 3 acquisition speed modes:

High speed

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of free-form
surfaces, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

High density

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of trimmed edges
and sheet metal entities, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be
edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

Custom

l The scan speed and laser mode are customizable.

Speed: Using the spin box or the slider, set the speed at which the sweep is to be performed. This value
is expressed in %. (only available with the Custom acquisition speed mode)
Minimum visibility: Set the minimum amount of scanner positioning targets that have to be seen by
the C-Track during the sweep. Otherwise, the sweep will be disabled during the finalization process. This
value is expressed in %.

1785
Overshoot value: Select the check box to indicate the extra distance the sweep has to cover on both
ends, beyond the feature path. This value is expressed in the length unit set in VXelements.
Clipping range: Limits the area included in the scan to the set distance from the sweep.
Normal angle (°): This function allows setting the angle of incidence of the point normals. This value is
expressed in degrees.

To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane

Available options can vary depending on scanner connected.
Laser mode: Select the laser mode used by the feature for scanning. Use Three orientations for better
results and only when scanning in the camera baseline direction at low speed, and Two orientations for
more flexibility.
HDR mode: Allows the use of 2 different shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts. The scanner will
alternate between the 2 shutter speeds.
Automatic shutter: Clear the check box to enable manual shutter adjustment.
Shutter: Adjust the configuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines during the scan
of the feature. Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times by pausing the acquisition process.
For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration section.
Automatic scanning area: Clear the check box to enable manual scanning area adjustment.
Scanning area: Resize the acquisition volume of the scanner. This value is expressed in %.

CAUTION: Scanning area show always be set to 100%. Failure to do so can

negatively affect scan quality.

Configuration preset: Select a preset previously created during configuration.

After the scanner configuration, a pop-up message will appear, asking if the new
configuration is to be applied to all features or only to the current one.

High resolution multiplier: Based on the input (original) resolution, set a resolution which will be
applied to generate a surface using smaller triangles than the original ones. It can be changed during
the scanning process.

1786
Jog Feature

For general information regarding features and sweeps, see the Add feature
section.

The Jog function provides tools for the creation of a feature by moving the scanner TCP to positions the
scanner has to pass by. Create a series of points that will be connected by joint movements following the
order of the Point # table.

The blue wheel is not available for this type of feature.

Jog sweeps are not optimized by the Finalize function. The points created will be
the exact positions programmed and will be located along the scanning path.
Transitions in between jog sweeps will need finalizing.

To create a jog feature

1. Move the TCP.

l Through the CAD: In the 3D viewer, click the CAD to indicate the desired position
of the TCP.

l Through the gizmo: In the 3D viewer, move the gizmo to indicate the desired
position of the TCP.

l Through the robot joint values: In the Robot joints pane, enter the joint values
required to reach the desired position of the TCP.

The scanner lasers will be displayed when the TCP is moved, allowing to preview
the surface to be scanned.

2. Click to create a point with the actual robot configuration.

1787
 It is also possible to create other points (after the first one) by pressing the space
bar.

3. Move to the next pose. Create all the points required (at least 2) to set the robot path.

4. Edit points, if necessary.

It is possible to delete a point by:

l holding down Shift and clicking it in the 3D viewer OR

l pressing Delete while it is being selected in the Point # table.

5. Set the parameters in the Add feature and Scanner parameters panes.

6. Click Ok.

7. A feature will be added in the Navigation pane of the Navigation panel, under the Features
sub-node of the VXscan-R node. Generated sweeps will present the same scanning
configuration as their associated feature. They will be added in the Scan sweeps sub-node
and in the timeline at the bottom of the interface.

Creating or modifying a feature will require a Finalize to be performed.

To set the parameters in the Add feature pane

Name: Enter the name of the jog feature.
Acquisition speed: This option offers 3 acquisition speed modes:

High speed

l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of free-form
surfaces, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

High density

1788
 l Scan speed is automatically set to a value allowing to get a good-quality scan of trimmed edges
and sheet metal entities, based on scan resolution and scanner model. Scan speed cannot be
edited.

l Laser mode is automatically set to Two orientations. Cannot be changed.

Custom

l The scan speed and laser mode are customizable.

Speed: Using the spin box or the slider, set the speed at which the sweep is to be performed. This value
is expressed in %. (only available with the Custom acquisition speed mode)
Point # table: Create points or modify and change the order of existing points.

Button Action

To create a point.

To delete the selected point.

Click to move the selected point up in the list.

Click to move the selected point down in the list.

To change the selected point with the actual robot configuration.

To set the parameters in the Robot joints pane

Lock table: Select the check box to lock the table. When locked, it will not be allowed to rotate when
clicking the CAD model but can still be rotated through this pane.
Table: Set the angular position of the rotary table.
Axis 1 to Axis 6: Set the angular position of each robotic joint.

To set the parameters in the Scanner parameters pane

Available options can vary depending on scanner connected.

1789
Laser mode: Select the laser mode used by the feature for scanning. Use Three orientations for better
results and only when scanning in the camera baseline direction at low speed, and Two orientations for
more flexibility.
HDR mode: Allows the use of 2 different shutter speeds to scan multi-shaded parts. The scanner will
alternate between the 2 shutter speeds.
Automatic shutter: Clear the check box to enable manual shutter adjustment.
Shutter: Adjust the configuration parameters for an optimal detection of the laser lines during the scan
of the feature. Configuration parameters can be accessed at all times by pausing the acquisition process.
For details, see the MetraSCAN-R BLACK Configuration section.
Automatic scanning area: Clear the check box to enable manual scanning area adjustment.
Scanning area: Resize the acquisition volume of the scanner. This value is expressed in %.

CAUTION: Scanning area show always be set to 100%. Failure to do so can

negatively affect scan quality.

Configuration preset: Select a preset previously created during configuration.

After the scanner configuration, a pop-up message will appear, asking if the new
configuration is to be applied to all features or only to the current one.

High resolution multiplier: Based on the input (original) resolution, set a resolution which will be
applied to generate a surface using smaller triangles than the original ones. It can be changed during
the scanning process.

1790
Timeline Functions
Overview
The timeline displays the sequence, from left to right, of all the enabled sweeps in a scanning path.
Selecting sweeps in the timeline allows customizing the path, by editing, deleting or moving them
around.
The timeline includes a cursor allowing to go directly to a desired sweep or any point in time along the
scanning path.
Everything that happens at a certain moment appears vertically in the timeline.
Paths can be previewed in real time to see what the robot will do and they can be saved in a session to
be edited later.
The timeline has a base time of 2 minutes and contains 10-second timestamps. If it is longer than 2
minutes, the timeline extends accordingly. It is possible to zoom in and out (by scrolling the middle
button on the mouse), up to the maximum duration of the program.

Timeline views

The timeline is always displayed and is, by default, in a collapsed state. Click in the right corner of

the header to expand it and to collapse it.

When the timeline is collapsed, only the Scanning sweeps section and the header buttons are visible.
When it is expanded, additional program information is shown.

Sweeps may be reordered manually when the timeline is expanded. Drag and drop
a sweep in any transition to reposition it.

1791
Header buttons

Icon Function Description

To finalize the path of the selected sweeps, removing potential
Finalize collisions. This differs from Reorder and finalize and Finalize
path accessed from the toolbar.
To rotate the orientation of the scanner cameras by 180
Flip
degrees around the optical vector (Rz).
To invert the scanning path by swapping the start and end
Reverse
point of the sweep.
To assemble 2 or more sweeps. The sweeps will be reordered
Merge
for an optimal merge.
To divide a sweep or a merged sweep into several segments
Split which can be moved around in the timeline to reorder the
scanning path.

1792
Program information

Icon Function Description

Indicates if the software has been able to find a solution to
perform a sweep or create a motion between 2 sweeps
(finalize).

l Green: The path has been finalized.

Robot path status l Yellow: The path has not been finalized. However, a
potential solution has been found.

l Red: The path has not been finalized. A point along the
path is unreachable or the path includes a collision.

Simulates the number of positioning targets the C-Track will

see on the MetraSCAN. It is expressed in % and is displayed in
MetraSCAN visibility
steps (from 53 to 100). The approximate percentage is shown at
any given point in time along the scanning path.
Simulates the quantity of positioning targets the C-Track will
see during the program. The approximate number of targets is
Target visibility
shown at any given point in time along the scanning path. If no
targets are applied, the timeline is empty.
Indicates the speed of the scanner TCP in the robot program. It
is expressed in % and is displayed in steps (from 0 to the
Scanning speed maximum speed set for the full program). The approximate
percentage is shown at each point in time along the scanning
path.
Displays the enabled sweeps in the order the program will run
Scanning sweeps
them. It is possible to move them around.

To disable a sweep
Through the timeline

1. Right-click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Disable. The sweep will disappear from the timeline and will appear next to the
sweep name in the Scan sweeps sub-node.

1793
To finalize a sweep
Through the timeline

1. Right-click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Finalize.

3. The software will try to find a way to reach a point.

Through the header buttons

1. Click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Finalize.

3. The software will try to find a way to reach a point.

To finalize a transition
Through the timeline

1. Click a transition (space between 2 sweeps).

2. Right-click and select Optimize transition (the software will try to find a solution for the
transition).

To flip a sweep
Through the timeline

1. Right-click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Flip.

Through the header buttons

1. Click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Flip.

1794
To reverse a sweep
Through the timeline

1. Right-click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Reverse.

Through the header buttons

1. Click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Reverse.

To merge a sweep
Through the VXscan-R node

1. Select the sweeps to be merged (at least 2).

2. Right-click the mouse button and select Merge or click in the header button toolbar.

Through the timeline

1. Place the cursor between 2 sweeps to be merged. If more than 2 sweeps need to be
merged, it has to be done 2 sweeps at a time.

2. Click the transition (space between 2 sweeps).

3. Right-click the mouse button and select Merge or click in the header button toolbar.

To split a sweep
Through the timeline

1. Right-click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Split. The sweep will be split at the location of the cursor.

Through the header buttons

1. Click the desired sweep in the timeline.

2. Click Split. The sweep will be split at the location of the cursor.

1795
Reorder and Finalize Path

Tools | Reorder and finalize

Tools | Finalize path
Finalization is a calculation process that allows the software to find solutions and optimize the paths of
the sweeps, as well as the paths in between the sweeps. Modifying a sweep will require to finalize the
program.
This process allows avoiding collisions along the robot path. A finalize of the path must be performed
before playing a program on the robot.

Some sweeps (unreachable or causing a collision) may be disabled during the path
planning process. If so, a warning will appear and the sweeps will be removed from
the timeline.

Modifying a feature parameter that does not impact the robot path will not
unfinalize the sweep.

To reorder sweeps

1. Click .

l The software will first finalize the sweeps in the timeline. Once a scan sweep is

finalized, is displayed next to it in the Scan sweeps sub-node and it turns

green in the timeline.

l The software will then reorder the sweeps in the timeline to improve the
transitions and shorten the cycle time.

A progress meter will appear for both steps.

2. Click to run the simulation of the sweeps. Use this to visualize the program and its
results. The software will start the simulated scanning process.

1796
 It is possible, at any time during the simulation, to pause it, causing the scanning
process to stop.

Once a path has been reordered and finalized, it is not possible to undo the
reordering process once completed.

To finalize path without reordering

1. Click (click the drop-down menu ▼ next to to access it). The Finalize path

function will replace as the main one in the tool bar. Once a scan sweep is finalized, is
displayed next to it in the Scan sweeps sub-node and it turns green in the timeline. A
progress meter will appear.

2. Click to run the simulation of the sweeps. Use this to visualize the program and its
results. The software will start the simulated scanning process.

It is possible, at any time during the simulation, to pause it, causing the scanning
process to stop.

Once a path has been finalized, it is not possible to undo the finalization process
once completed.

1797
Play a Simulation

The simulation process allows visualizing the robot program and the scanner output. Using the
3D model, it gives a preview of the data the scanner will acquire on the real part.
The simulation output will depend on the simulation data generation option.

This function is only available if a sweep is enabled in the Scan sweeps sub-node.
Otherwise, it will be grayed out.

To play a simulation

Click to run the simulation of the sweep(s). The software will start the scanning process.
At the beginning of the simulation, the software will indicate if there are invalid segments.
During the simulation, the distance between the scanner and the part will be displayed on the laser
lines.
The scanning process will automatically stop at the end of the robot path.

To pause a simulation

Click at any time during the simulation of the sweep(s) to halt it, causing the scanning process to

stop. The button only becomes available once is clicked.

Click Play sim. to resume the simulation.

To reset a simulation

Click to reinitialize the virtual scan. The scanning path will return to the robot home position and
the cursor will go to the beginning of the timeline.

1798
Manual Resolution in VXscan-R

Tools | Manual resolution

Available with select scanners. For details on smart resolution, see the Smart Resolution section.
This function changes the resolution of selected areas on the mesh, generated from raw data. It can be
used on actual and simulated scan data, and will store its information in a template saved in the VXscan-
R session. The scan template in the Manual resolution sub-node will have priority over the Smart
resolution feature.
The resolution is based on the reconstruction factor set in the Manual resolution drop- down list
(toolbar). It can be increased up to 8 times (8X) or decreased up to 4 times (-4X).

The scan must be finalized to see the results.

Icon Description
To increase the selected triangles resolution. The triangle and + sign color vary according
to the chosen resolution factor (2x, 4x or 8x).
To decrease the selected triangles resolution. The triangle and - sign color vary according
to the chosen resolution factor (-2x or -4x).

To use the manual resolution function

This function can be performed after the scanning or the Finalize process. Manual resolution can be
applied on simulated and real scans. Feature speeds must be adjusted accordingly.

The local modification of resolution has no impact on the Speed or Recommended

speed displayed for features. It is the user's responsibility to ensure the robot
program acquires enough data for the mesh's final resolution.

1799
After the scanning process

1. Hold Ctrl to activate the selection tools.

Selection tools are available when the Scan node is active in the tree view.

2. Choose scanned areas on which to perform the Manual resolution function on the mesh.

3. Set the resolution reconstruction factor. If data is missing, click Scan to perform a new

scan and Stop scan when it is done.

The resolution colors are displayed on areas where a resolution reconstruction

factor was applied. For example, if yellow is seen through the reconstructed data
color, it means the data acquired is not sufficient to have a good reconstruction at
the set resolution. A modification must be performed to the program to gather
enough complementary data and increase the data density in that area.

4. Click Finalize to see the results.

To apply the manual resolution, 2 conditions must be met:

l A selection must be done.

l The final resolution must be higher than the scanner resolution limit.

After the Finalize process

It is possible to change the smart resolution parameters and to re-perform the Finalize process. The
resolution colors can be displayed after the Finalize process.

To clear manual resolution

1. Select the desired surface.

2. Click to clear the selection and prevent manual reconstruction.

1800
Finalize Scan

Finalize processing is required to obtain a valid mesh that can be saved or exported to .stl format, to
VXinspect|Quality Control, to PolyWorks, or to Metrolog.

To finalize the scan

1. Set the Finalize scan parameters in the Navigation panel.

2. Click Finalize .

To reset the scan

Click to reset the current scan. If scan is started, scan will be stopped. Positioning targets are not
deleted.

1801
VXscan-R Plan – Online
This interface allows playing and navigating through the programs previously created offline after a
connection to the robot.

Functions or sections available for online testing in VXscan-R Plan

Edit info.
Connect to robot
System preparation

l C-Track calibration

l Scanner calibration

l Automated photogrammetry

Physical alignment
Play program
Timeline functions
Validate
Finalize scan
Inspection

l Inspect mesh

l Send to PolyWorks

l Send to Metrolog

1802
Connect to Robot

Connection to the robot allows communication between VXscan- R and the robot controller in
AUTO mode (refer to FANUC's manual: https://www.fanuc.com). The VXelements module will send
and start different robot programs, depending on the functions used in the software.
Upon connection to the robot, VXscan-R will:

l Update the robot programs on the controller (if needed).

l Download the signature file from the controller.

l Display warning level alarms.

l Check alignment.

l If a possible collision is detected between the part and the collision envelope of the
robot and the cell, an error message will appear.

DANGER: Validate the CAD model to make sure there are no discrepancies
between the CAD model and the actual mechanical assembly.

Stop the scan before disconnecting the robot.

Signature file
The robot controller contains a signature file which includes the information needed to create a digital
twin, namely the actual positional information of a specific CUBE-R installation. When connected to the
computer, the robot controller copies its signature file locally in the VXelements installation folder. It
does so every time a connection is established, and no other software interaction can replace the locally
copied file.

l If a new session is created in VXscan-R and a signature file has been saved on the
computer, the scene (C-Track position, rotary table position, and scanner TCP) will

1803
 be adjusted according to the CUBE-R that generated the signature file. Otherwise,
the nominal information is used.

l Contrary to the edge, surface and manual features and sweeps, the jog features and
sweeps are not impacted by a change of the signature file. If any modifications are
required, they must be done manually.

When an existing session is opened, the software always displays the information saved previously in the
session, regardless of the signature file saved locally on the computer. If the parameters used by the
session do not match the CUBE-R it will be connected to, the paths will be updated when a connection
to the robot is made.
After a modification of the signature file on the computer, features and sweeps in the session are
updated and another Finalize path has to be performed.

Active alarms and blocking faults

The CUBE-R is designed with the user's safety in mind. This means the robot cell can trigger faults that
VXscan-R commands cannot override.

It is recommended to contact Creaform Customer Support if a robotic alarm is

not familiar.

Alarm table
Code1 Severity2 FANUC Alarm VXscan-R Message
SRVO-002 Teach Teach pendant E-stop was
SRVO-002 STOP
pendant E-stop pressed.
SRVO-004 Fence
SRVO-004 STOP Fence open.
open
SRVO-007 External External emergency stop button
SRVO-007 STOP
emergency stops was pressed.
*Any other alarm with Unknown FANUC error + error
STOP N/A
a STOP severity description from controller.

1804
 Code1 Severity2 FANUC Alarm VXscan-R Message

The battery
voltage for
one of the
pulse coders
is too low.
Contact
SRVO-065 Creaform
SRVO-065 WARN
BLAL alarm Customer
Support for
assistance on
replacing
your
batteries
immediately.

INTP-213 (User Alarm) STOP INTP-213 UALM [x] Unknown FANUC user alarm.
FANUC user alarm 1: Tool rack
UALM1
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 2: Unlock
UALM2
request signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 3: Unlocked
UALM3
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 4: Locked signal
UALM4
mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 5: Tool rack
UALM5
signal mismatch..
FANUC user alarm 6: Arm stowed
UALM6
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 7: Arm
UALM7
deployed signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 8: Air pressure
UALM8
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 9:
UALM9 Communication port signal
mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 10: Robot joints
UALM10
mismatch.

1Code: The alarm code is received from the robot. It is a FANUC specific code that can be retraced to
understand the potential problem.
2 Severity:

1805
 l A STOP alarm will disable the robot from moving until the condition that triggers the alarm is
fixed and the fault is reset on the robot.

l A WARN alarm will only be displayed on a first connection to the robot to advise of a potentially
undesirable situation that does not affect the safety of the cell.

For details, see the FANUC Programs and FANUC Check IO sections.

1806
System Preparation

R-Series scanners
Devices need to be calibrated for the system to operate correctly.

1. In the Home page, click System calibrations.

2. Click Calibrate C-Track.

3. Click Calibrate scanner.

The devices can also be calibrated through the system panel available in VXscan-R
Plan and VXscan-R Execute.

For the system to be functional, a positioning model must be acquired through the automated
photogrammetry process. To create a proper positioning model, some basic guidelines must be
followed.

Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

1807
 The imported target model or the one acquired through photogrammetry will be
saved in the session.

Handheld scanners with Automation Kit

Calibration

Please refer to the Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit.
Targets

Refer to the scanner's Object preparation procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

1808
C-Track Calibration

The C-Track calibration process uses a known reference, the calibration bar. During the process, the bar
is brought to multiple positions in the C-Track field of view so that the sensor can detect its targets.
The calibration process can be started through the CUBE-R tab in the system panel. Select a scale bar
calibration file (.sbcf) through the Calibration bar drop-down in the CUBE-R tab of the System panel. The
file is kept in memory to be reused for future calibrations. Depending on the CUBE-R configuration, it
will start the appropriate calibration program.

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

A SBCF file is required for autocalibration. This file is available on the Customer
Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.

Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer

1. Start the C-Track calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process.

1809
 4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

Autocalibration with manual tool changer

Handle the calibration bar with care. Any shock or damage may render it useless
and have an impact on the system accuracy.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot comes down to an accessible position and pauses.

3. A message appears on the screen, asking to install the calibration bar. Upon entering the
work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance (door or light
curtain).

4. Lock the calibration bar holder in the tool changer and exit the work cell.

5. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

6. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume the calibration program.

7. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process.

8. A message appears on the screen, asking to remove the calibration bar. Upon entering the
work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance (door or light
curtain).

9. Unlock the calibration bar holder from the tool changer, store it and exit the work cell.

10. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

11. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume and finish the calibration program.

12. The robot goes back to its home position.

Purpose of calibration

1810
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

When to perform the calibration

The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results

1811
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

1812
Scanner Calibration
The calibration process uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the
scanner to multiple locations to measure the target positions on the reference.
The calibration process can be started through the CUBE-R tab in the system panel. Depending on the
CUBE-R configuration, the appropriate calibration program will be started.

Calibration with R-Series scanners

Two calibration modes are available in VXscan-R.

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer

1. Start the calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot moves the swing arm into calibration position, within view of the C-Track.

3. The scanner goes to multiple locations to measure the target positions on the reference.

4. Once the calibration is finished, the swing arm is stowed away by the robot.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

Autocalibration with manual tool changer

1. Start the calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot moves the rotary table into position (90-degree turn).

3. A message appears on the screen, asking to install the user calibration plate on the rotary
table mounting plate. Upon entering the work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault
generated by the entrance (door or light curtain).

4. Install the user calibration plate to fit its pins in the matching holes of the mounting plate.

5. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

6. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume the calibration program.

1813
 7. After calibration, the scanner moves away from the user calibration plate.

8. A message appears on the screen, asking to remove and store the user calibration plate.
Upon entering the work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance
(door or light curtain).

9. Remove the user calibration plate from the rotary table and store it beside the robot..

10. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

11. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume and finish the calibration program.

12. The robot (including the rotary table) returns to its home position.

When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Recommendations
The scanner should only see the calibration plate positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or
temperature variations, which could modify the mechanical configuration. The temperature variations
should not exceed ±2 degrees Celsius during calibration.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

1814
 l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

HandySCAN 3D scanners
Manual calibration:

1. Removed the scanner from the robot gripper.

2. Calibrate the scanner following the calibration procedure.

Automatic calibration:

1. Position the calibration plate appropriately in the layout.

(Automation Kit with CRX-5iA and HandySCAN 3D shown.)

2. Click Calibrate scanner to start the calibration process from the System panel or
Home page.

3. Click Resume. Wait for the calibration to complete.

1815
 For HandySCAN 3D, all calibration poses must be completed for the calibration to
be accepted.

MetraSCAN 3D handheld scanners

1. Removed the scanner from the robot gripper.

2. Calibrate the C-Track following the calibration procedure.

3. Calibrate the scanner following the calibration procedure.

When to perform the calibration

Refer to the scanner's calibration procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

Recommendations
The scanner should only see the calibration plate positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or
temperature variations, which could modify the mechanical configuration. The temperature variations
should not exceed ±2 degrees Celsius during calibration.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

1816
 l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

For additional information refer to the scanner's calibration procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

1817
Automated Photogrammetry

This function allows acquiring target positions on the fixture and part installed in the CUBE-R.

VXscan-R Plan: The photogrammetry generated in VXscan-R Plan will be used in both VXscan-R Plan
and VXscan-R Execute. Save the session with the photogrammetry while in VXscan-R Plan.

VXscan-R Execute: VXscan-R Execute generates a new working session using the photogrammetry
taken from the VXscan-R Plan session file. When performing photogrammetry in VXscan-R Execute, the
photogrammetry is kept until a new VXscan-R Execute session is created. To save photogrammetry

performed in VXscan-R Execute, click (Save as) and create a new session file or select the VXscan-
R Plan session file to overwrite the VXscan-R Plan session file (Warning: This cannot be undone.)

General operation
The acquisition principle is based entirely on the C-Track stereo acquisition of the model. The C-Track
acquires target positions while the model is rotating on 360 degrees.

Prerequisites, restrictions and rules

The C-Track must be calibrated prior to launching the photogrammetry.
Target model must contain enough targets distributed in the 3D volume to guarantee a good
overlap between pictures during acquisition.

l At least 10 to 12 targets must remain visible at any time during the acquisition phase.

l No static target (not part of the target model) is allowed.

l Any static target moving by more than 0.5mm and/or having its normal moved by
more than 5 degrees during the acquisition will be considered in the referential.
Targets that are static (outside the referential model), will be ignored automatically.

1818
 Any data from the session will be cleared and the previous targets will be cleared
upon launching automated photogrammetry.

During acquisition
Only targets seen by both cameras at the same time will be considered in the new model.
A bundle adjustment is performed at the end of the acquisition.

1819
When to perform the automated photogrammetry

l When the fixture was removed and reinstalled on the rotary table.

l When an event may have distorted the target model or the fixture:

l Temperature variation

l Heavy part payload

l Collision while loading the part

1820
Physical Alignment

Overview
Available whether connected to the robot or not, this function allows adjusting the position of the 3D
model to match the real part. The target or surface data used for the match, which must be present in
the session, should be well distributed and constrain all degrees of freedom.
When the physical alignment is performed, the features and sweeps will be updated, except for the ones
generated in the Jog mode, and a Finalize path will be required.
The target alignment option is selected by default. It is recommended to perform this type of alignment
first.

Avoid using swivel targets when possible.

To create a target physical alignment

During this process, the automatically selected targets are highlighted in yellow and unselected targets
are white. The target satellites are not taken into account since they are not reliable for the physical
alignment.

Targets must be on surfaces included on the CAD model.

1. Click Targets .

2. Deselect the targets that are not used for the part positioning.

3. Set a prealignment mode:

l None

l Manual

Prealignment: None

1821
 4. Click Target best fit to perform the adjustment.

5. Apply or Reset the alignment.

If the best- fit cannot be performed, a manual prealignment may allow to optimize the best fit
calculation.

Prealignment: Manual
The manual prealignment consists of approximately picking the position of specific targets on the CAD
model.

4. The 3D viewer splits in 2. In both sections, select a target and its matching CAD model
position.

5. Repeat for at least 3 targets.

6. Click Target best fit to perform the adjustment.

7. Apply or Reset the alignment.

To set the best fit parameters in the Physical alignment pane

Maximum distance: Enter the maximum distance that can separate the surface of the 3D model from
the targets on the real part and fixture.
Maximum angle: Enter the maximum angle between the surface of the 3D model and the targets on
the real part and fixture.
Maximum iterations: Enter the maximum number of best fit iterations the software will do before it
stops searching for the solution.
Target type: Choose or create the type of targets applied on the real part and fixture.

To create a surface physical alignment

Some scan acquisition must have been done prior to the surface physical alignment.

1. Click Surface .

2. Click Surface best fit to perform the adjustment.

3. Apply or Reset the alignment.

1822
To set the best fit parameters in the Physical alignment pane
Maximum distance: Enter the maximum distance that can separate the surface of the 3D model from
the scan surface on the real part and fixture.

1823
Play Program

Overview
Starting the scan program will play the full robot program from the beginning. For this to happen, it is
important that the robot be at its home position before launching the program. The robot program will
take care of moving the robot, as well as starting and stopping the lasers, and starting and stopping the
scan process.
Robotics best practices recommend always testing a program before running it without supervision or at
full speed. The Speed override, the Step forward and the Step backward functions allow to run through
the program safely, before going at full speed.
Once a program is confirmed safe, a validation will allow the session to be used in Execute mode, for
production purposes.

If using a HandySCAN 3D with Automation Kit, the HandySCAN 3D must be able to

see a minimum of 4 targets at the start of the scan. If less than 4 targets are
detected at the scan's start point, the scan will not start and an option to Go Home
or Cancel will be presented. After detecting the initial 4 targets, if the HandySCAN
3D cannot see sufficient targets for tracking during the scan program, the program
will continue, but the scanner will not collect scan data.

If any robotic action is required while the swing arm is deployed or the calibration
bar is on the tool changer, the software will warn the swing arm or the calibration
bar needs to be stowed away.

l The only situation where the software cannot manage the issue is when the swing
arm is not completely deployed. In that case, the swing arm needs to be moved to
the right position manually by entering the CUBE-R cell. The operator will need the
Teach pendant to release the swing arm from the scanner bracket.

l To prevent this situation, always let the swing arm opening motion complete before
canceling a calibration program.

l If this problem occurs, contact Customer Support.

1824
Interface
Icon Function Action

To start the robot program from the beginning, at its home position,
Start/Stop and start the scan process.
To stop the scan process when the robot program is paused.

To run through the previous sweep or transition, in reverse, stopping at

Step backward
its first position. The lasers are turned on and off during sweeps.

To halt the robot program at any point and resume it, when paused.
The lasers will turn on or off.

When calibrating with a manual tool changer,

Resume is useful to continue through the
Resume/Pause calibration programs after installing the
calibration artifact.

It is also possible to press the space bar to pause

or resume the program.

To run through the following sweep or transition, stopping at its last

Step forward
position. The lasers are turned on and off during sweeps.

Right-click a sweep in the timeline or under the Scan sweeps sub-

node in the Navigation pane to move the robot to its starting position.
– Go to
The movement is optimized to not collide with the CAD environment in
VXscan-R. Use this function with care.

To make the robot return to its home position. The movement is

optimized to not collide with the CAD environment in VXscan-R. Use
this function with care.

When the robot is asked to return to its home

position and a collision risk is detected, a message
Go home appears. It is possible to ignore it and to ask the
robot to go home anyway. In that case, no more
collision checks will be performed.

The Go home function is only available if the robot

is not moving.

1825
Speed override
The software speed override is a slider that overwrites the speed override of the robot controller. This is
a ratio applied to the speed programmed in the robot path.
Running through a robot program slowly increases the reaction time to a potentially risky situation.

Scanner acquisition speed table

MetraSCAN 3D-R

MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite MetraSCAN-R BLACK+|Elite HD

Scanner Model
Speed (mm/sec) Speed (mm/sec)

Resolution High Density High Speed High Density High Speed

≥ 1mm+ 50 96 68 120

≥ 0.5mm; < 1mm 50 96 68 102

≥ 0.25mm; < 0.5mm 30 68 30 46

≥ 0.1mm; < 0.25mm 30 30 30 30

HandySCAN BLACK

HandySCAN BLACK|Elite HandySCAN BLACK+|Elite

Scanner Model
Speed (mm/sec) Speed (mm/sec)

Resolution High Density High Speed High Density High Speed

≥ 1mm+ 30 96 50 96

≥ 0.5mm; < 1mm 30 68 50 96

≥ 0.25mm; < 0.5mm 30 50 30 68

≥ 0.1mm; < 0.25mm 30 30 30 30

HandySCAN SILVER

HandySCAN Silver HandySCAN Silver|Elite

Scanner Model
Speed (mm/sec) Speed (mm/sec)

Resolution High Density High Speed High Density High Speed

≥ 1mm+ 30 48 50 48

≥ 0.5mm; < 1mm 30 48 50 48

≥ 0.25mm; < 0.5mm 30 30 30 30

1826
 HandySCAN Silver HandySCAN Silver|Elite
Scanner Model
Speed (mm/sec) Speed (mm/sec)

≥ 0.1mm; < 0.25mm 30 30 30 30

MetraSCAN BLACK

MetraSCAN BLACK MetraSCAN BLACK+|Elite

Scanner Model
Speed (mm/sec) Speed (mm/sec)

Resolution High Density High Speed High Density High Speed

≥ 1mm+ 30 48 50 96

≥ 0.5mm; < 1mm 30 48 50 96

≥ 0.25mm; < 0.5mm 30 30 30 68

≥ 0.1mm; < 0.25mm 30 30 30 30

1827
Validate

Tools | Validate
This function allows opening a session in VXscan-R Execute. Validate is used when a program has been
verified in VXscan- R Plan and is final. It is meant to confirm the program can be run without any
supervision and any technical knowledge of the program or the VXscan-R Plan interface. Any action
modifying the robot programs will invalidate the session.

When clicking , a statement will appear, which must be accepted:

By selecting "Accept", you acknowledge that you have properly tested the robot trajectories prior to
activation and hereby waive and release Creaform Inc. from any liability whatsoever for damages of any
kind arising from use of this software.

Any modification to the robot program will invalidate the session. A new validation will be
required to open in VXscan-R Execute.

l For example, modifying the overshoot value of a feature will invalidate the whole
session.

1828
Finalize Scan

Finalize processing is required to obtain a valid mesh that can be saved or exported to .stl format, to
VXinspect|Quality Control, to PolyWorks, or to Metrolog.

To finalize the scan

1. Set the Finalize scan parameters in the Navigation panel.

2. Click Finalize .

To reset the scan

Click to reset the current scan. If scan is started, scan will be stopped. Positioning targets are not
deleted.

1829
Inspection
A scan has to be finalized before it can be sent for inspection.
Several options are available for the mesh output inspection:

l Inspect mesh

l Send to PolyWorks

l Send to Metrolog

It is also possible to save or export the scan.

In VXscan-R Execute, the scan will be processed according to the parameters set in Edit info.

1830
Inspect Mesh

Tools | Inspect mesh

This function is available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

To send a mesh for inspection

Click to send the mesh and part information to VXinspect|Quality Control.

Workflows

Workflow if a program is already in the inspection program table

In VXinspect|Quality Control:

1. The mesh is loaded in the inspection program. If a mesh is already present, the Add part
function is executed.

2. The part information set in VXscan-R Execute is carried forward in the software.

3. The inspection program is completed.

Workflow if the inspection program table is empty

In VXinspect|Quality Control:

1. The mesh is loaded in the inspection program.

2. The part information set in VXscan-R Execute is carried forward in the software.

3. A surface best-fit to the whole CAD is performed, with prealignment set to None .

4. A color map is created and its data are extracted.

5. The inspection program is completed.

No report will be generated after the inspection. The report, with all measured
parts, can be manually exported later.

1831
Send to PolyWorks

Tools | Send to PolyWorks

If the option selected for inspection in Edit info is PolyWorks|Inspector, the software will use these
parameters to perform the inspection.
Click Send to test the function behavior.

Compatible versions
PolyWorks|Inspector™ 2022

To set the PolyWorks parameters

The PolyWorks parameters pane provides information on the project:
PolyWorks Workspace path: Indicate the location of the workspace file (*.pwk).
Project name: Enter the name of the PolyWorks|Inspector project. The name must match the project
name in PolyWorks Metrology Suite Workspace Manager.
Report path: Indicate the location where all reports will be exported.
Macro path: Indicate the location of the macro script file. If empty, the auto-generated sequence will be
used to perform the inspection.
Use new piece: Select this option to create a new piece for the inspection.
Replace data on same piece: Select this option to use the same piece during inspection will overwrite
the data object (mesh) and all measurements associated to it.
Template name (optional): Enter the name of the piece template to be used to create the new piece. If
there is no template specified, the active piece will be used to generate the inspection of a new one. If
propagation is configured in the project, the new piece will be linked to the piece template.

PolyWorks DataLoop
Use DataLoop: Enables DataLoop functionality. DataLoop must already be configured in PolyWorks.
The PolyWork workspace must already be uploaded on the DataLoop server. See PolyWorks
documentation for more information.
Log in using: Shows DataLoop login method. Click Log in / Log out to log into DataLoop.

1832
DataLoop free up disk space frequency: Sets how often the free up disk space function runs.

1833
Send to Metrolog

Tools | Send to Metrolog

Click Send to Metrolog to send the mesh and part information to Metrolog X4.

To set up the inspection

The control over communication with Metrolog is done by Metrolog X4, and not by VXscan-R. It is
important to use the “deploy.bat” file to create the appropriate files and directories.
In the following directory “C:\Users\Public\Documents\Metrologic Group\Creaform_ VXscan -
R\Program\Sub_Project” :

1. Insert the MgProg that contains the inspection you want to trigger from VXscan-R.

2. Rename the MgProg file so it is identical to the part name indicated in the VXscan-R
session.

The name of the group, in which the part is, has no impact on the interaction with
Metrolog.

To trigger the inspection

When the inspection is triggered, in VXscan- R Plan or VXscan- R Execute, the STL file and the part
information are forwarded to a Metrolog program that will dispatch it to the appropriate inspection
program.
The result of the inspection will be exported here : “C:\Users\Public\Documents\Metrologic
Group\Creaform_VXscan-R\Data\Result”.
The timestamp for the result is the date and time at which the VXscan-R Plan interface of the session was
opened, or the date and time written in the part information of the VXscan-R Execute interface.

1834
VXscan-R Execute
This interface allows an operator to measure parts by playing programs created offline and tested online
in VXscan-R Plan.

No program modifications are possible, just execution.

Functions or sections available in VXscan-R Execute

Project properties
Connect to robot
System preparation

l C-Track calibration

l Scanner calibration

l Automated photogrammetry

Launch program
Timeline display
Inspection

1835
Project Properties
This pane indicates information relevant to the project.

Properties sent to the inspection software vary according to the option selected in
Edit info.

Information fields
Project name Device
Report title Organization
Part name Customer name
Part serial number Production order
Date Part number
Time Drawing number
Operator name Order number
Email address Piece name

Number of scans done

This section tracks the number of scans performed in loop as set in Edit info.

Inspection result table

The results of the inspection performed on the part or piece, depending on the software used, are
displayed (Success or Failed).

1836
Connect to Robot

Connection to the robot allows communication between VXscan- R and the robot controller in
AUTO mode (refer to FANUC's manual: https://www.fanuc.com). The VXelements module will send
and start different robot programs, depending on the functions used in the software.
Upon connection to the robot, VXscan-R will:

l Update the robot programs on the controller (if needed).

l Download the signature file from the controller.

l Display warning level alarms.

l Check alignment.

l If a possible collision is detected between the part and the collision envelope of the
robot and the cell, an error message will appear.

DANGER: Validate the CAD model to make sure there are no discrepancies
between the CAD model and the actual mechanical assembly.

Stop the scan before disconnecting the robot.

Signature file
The robot controller contains a signature file which includes the information needed to create a digital
twin, namely the actual positional information of a specific CUBE-R installation. When connected to the
computer, the robot controller copies its signature file locally in the VXelements installation folder. It
does so every time a connection is established, and no other software interaction can replace the locally
copied file.

l If a new session is created in VXscan-R and a signature file has been saved on the
computer, the scene (C-Track position, rotary table position, and scanner TCP) will

1837
 be adjusted according to the CUBE-R that generated the signature file. Otherwise,
the nominal information is used.

l Contrary to the edge, surface and manual features and sweeps, the jog features and
sweeps are not impacted by a change of the signature file. If any modifications are
required, they must be done manually.

When an existing session is opened, the software always displays the information saved previously in the
session, regardless of the signature file saved locally on the computer. If the parameters used by the
session do not match the CUBE-R it will be connected to, the paths will be updated when a connection
to the robot is made.
After a modification of the signature file on the computer, features and sweeps in the session are
updated and another Finalize path has to be performed.

Active alarms and blocking faults

The CUBE-R is designed with the user's safety in mind. This means the robot cell can trigger faults that
VXscan-R commands cannot override.

It is recommended to contact Creaform Customer Support if a robotic alarm is

not familiar.

Alarm table
Code1 Severity2 FANUC Alarm VXscan-R Message
SRVO-002 Teach Teach pendant E-stop was
SRVO-002 STOP
pendant E-stop pressed.
SRVO-004 Fence
SRVO-004 STOP Fence open.
open
SRVO-007 External External emergency stop button
SRVO-007 STOP
emergency stops was pressed.
*Any other alarm with Unknown FANUC error + error
STOP N/A
a STOP severity description from controller.

1838
 Code1 Severity2 FANUC Alarm VXscan-R Message

The battery
voltage for
one of the
pulse coders
is too low.
Contact
SRVO-065 Creaform
SRVO-065 WARN
BLAL alarm Customer
Support for
assistance on
replacing
your
batteries
immediately.

INTP-213 (User Alarm) STOP INTP-213 UALM [x] Unknown FANUC user alarm.
FANUC user alarm 1: Tool rack
UALM1
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 2: Unlock
UALM2
request signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 3: Unlocked
UALM3
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 4: Locked signal
UALM4
mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 5: Tool rack
UALM5
signal mismatch..
FANUC user alarm 6: Arm stowed
UALM6
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 7: Arm
UALM7
deployed signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 8: Air pressure
UALM8
signal mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 9:
UALM9 Communication port signal
mismatch.
FANUC user alarm 10: Robot joints
UALM10
mismatch.

1Code: The alarm code is received from the robot. It is a FANUC specific code that can be retraced to
understand the potential problem.
2 Severity:

1839
 l A STOP alarm will disable the robot from moving until the condition that triggers the alarm is
fixed and the fault is reset on the robot.

l A WARN alarm will only be displayed on a first connection to the robot to advise of a potentially
undesirable situation that does not affect the safety of the cell.

For details, see the FANUC Programs and FANUC Check IO sections.

1840
System Preparation

R-Series scanners
Devices need to be calibrated for the system to operate correctly.

1. In the Home page, click System calibrations.

2. Click Calibrate C-Track.

3. Click Calibrate scanner.

The devices can also be calibrated through the system panel available in VXscan-R
Plan and VXscan-R Execute.

For the system to be functional, a positioning model must be acquired through the automated
photogrammetry process. To create a proper positioning model, some basic guidelines must be
followed.

Number of targets

l The system needs 4 targets to track the positioning model. It is recommended that more than 8
targets be seen at all times during data acquisition.

l The targets should face the C-Track as perpendicular as possible.

l The maximum targets seen by the C-Track is set around 120.

l Angles up to 45 degrees are tolerated.

Target distribution
A good distribution of the targets is essential.

l Longer span leads to a more stable set-up.

l Cover the 3 axes of the C-Track.

1841
 The imported target model or the one acquired through photogrammetry will be
saved in the session.

Handheld scanners with Automation Kit

Calibration

Please refer to the Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit.
Targets

Refer to the scanner's Object preparation procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

1842
C-Track Calibration

The C-Track calibration process uses a known reference, the calibration bar. During the process, the bar
is brought to multiple positions in the C-Track field of view so that the sensor can detect its targets.
The calibration process can be started through the CUBE-R tab in the system panel. Select a scale bar
calibration file (.sbcf) through the Calibration bar drop-down in the CUBE-R tab of the System panel. The
file is kept in memory to be reused for future calibrations. Depending on the CUBE-R configuration, it
will start the appropriate calibration program.

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

A SBCF file is required for autocalibration. This file is available on the Customer
Portal under the Calibration Bar entry.

Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer

1. Start the C-Track calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot approaches the C-Track calibration bar stored in the tool rack and picks it up.

3. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process.

1843
 4. The robot brings back the C-Track calibration bar in the tool rack.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

6. The calibration optimization is automatically saved in the C-Track calibration file.

Autocalibration with manual tool changer

Handle the calibration bar with care. Any shock or damage may render it useless
and have an impact on the system accuracy.

1. Start the C-Track calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot comes down to an accessible position and pauses.

3. A message appears on the screen, asking to install the calibration bar. Upon entering the
work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance (door or light
curtain).

4. Lock the calibration bar holder in the tool changer and exit the work cell.

5. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

6. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume the calibration program.

7. The robot calibration program moves the bar to all the required positions to complete the
calibration process.

8. A message appears on the screen, asking to remove the calibration bar. Upon entering the
work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance (door or light
curtain).

9. Unlock the calibration bar holder from the tool changer, store it and exit the work cell.

10. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

11. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume and finish the calibration program.

12. The robot goes back to its home position.

Purpose of calibration

1844
Changes in the environment may affect the C-Track calibration, mostly due to pressure or temperature
variations, modifying the mechanical configuration. Performing the calibration allows getting back to
the optimal measuring characteristics. We recommend doing so whenever possible.

In addition to the regular calibration process performed, an annual factory

calibration is recommended to keep the sensor at its highest accuracy.

When to perform the calibration

The calibration must always be done:

l When the calibration is too old

l After a shock to the C-Track.

The calibration bar sticker indicates the calibration information, including the serial
number and the calibration due date.

Recommendations
The C-Track should only see the calibration bar positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Expected results

1845
The calibration value of the C-Track must remain constant over time. This value may differ from one C-
Track to another: this is a normal behavior. A sub-optimal calibration error value (0.035 or higher) will
trigger a software message indicating the calibration failed.

It is important to track the C-Track calibration values over time. In case of a drastic
change contact Creaform Support.

To review previous calibration results or view the last calibration date, go to

Configure | Calibration journal | Visualize.

If the calibration fails, some details need to be checked:

l Make sure all lens and glass protected targets are clean and not damaged.

l Make sure the C-Track and the calibration bar are not damaged.

l Make sure there are no reflective objects near the calibration bar.

l Make sure there was no change of temperature or pressure during the calibration.

l Make sure no change occurred in the sensor calibration parameters.

If all these steps fail, contact Creaform Customer Support for further assistance.

1846
Scanner Calibration
The calibration process uses a known reference, the user calibration plate, and consists in bringing the
scanner to multiple locations to measure the target positions on the reference.
The calibration process can be started through the CUBE-R tab in the system panel. Depending on the
CUBE-R configuration, the appropriate calibration program will be started.

Calibration with R-Series scanners

Two calibration modes are available in VXscan-R.

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

Autocalibration with pneumatic tool changer

1. Start the calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot moves the swing arm into calibration position, within view of the C-Track.

3. The scanner goes to multiple locations to measure the target positions on the reference.

4. Once the calibration is finished, the swing arm is stowed away by the robot.

5. The robot goes back to its home position.

Autocalibration with manual tool changer

1. Start the calibration process. The relevant program is automatically used.

2. The robot moves the rotary table into position (90-degree turn).

3. A message appears on the screen, asking to install the user calibration plate on the rotary
table mounting plate. Upon entering the work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault
generated by the entrance (door or light curtain).

4. Install the user calibration plate to fit its pins in the matching holes of the mounting plate.

5. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

6. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume the calibration program.

1847
 7. After calibration, the scanner moves away from the user calibration plate.

8. A message appears on the screen, asking to remove and store the user calibration plate.
Upon entering the work cell, the robot is stopped by the fault generated by the entrance
(door or light curtain).

9. Remove the user calibration plate from the rotary table and store it beside the robot..

10. Once out of the work cell, close the door (if any) and reset the fault by pressing the Reset
button on the CUBE-R panel.

11. Click Resume in VXscan-R to resume and finish the calibration program.

12. The robot (including the rotary table) returns to its home position.

When to perform the calibration

l After every C-Track calibration

l After a shock to the scanner

Recommendations
The scanner should only see the calibration plate positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or
temperature variations, which could modify the mechanical configuration. The temperature variations
should not exceed ±2 degrees Celsius during calibration.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

1848
 l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

Calibration with handheld scanners and Automation Kit

Make sure to remove any part or fixture located on the rotary table before starting
the calibration.

HandySCAN 3D scanners
Manual calibration:

1. Removed the scanner from the robot gripper.

2. Calibrate the scanner following the calibration procedure.

Automatic calibration:

1. Position the calibration plate appropriately in the layout.

(Automation Kit with CRX-5iA and HandySCAN 3D shown.)

2. Click Calibrate scanner to start the calibration process from the System panel or
Home page.

3. Click Resume. Wait for the calibration to complete.

1849
 For HandySCAN 3D, all calibration poses must be completed for the calibration to
be accepted.

MetraSCAN 3D handheld scanners

1. Removed the scanner from the robot gripper.

2. Calibrate the C-Track following the calibration procedure.

3. Calibrate the scanner following the calibration procedure.

When to perform the calibration

Refer to the scanner's calibration procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

Recommendations
The scanner should only see the calibration plate positioning targets. Limit and control parasitic points
(incandescent lamp, reflective surfaces, small or shiny metal parts).
Make sure that the work cell is empty and that all target satellites have been removed.
Changes in the environment may affect the scanner calibration, mostly due to air pressure or
temperature variations, which could modify the mechanical configuration. The temperature variations
should not exceed ±2 degrees Celsius during calibration.

Make sure to calibrate the C-Track before calibrating the scanner.

l If the temperature varies ± 2°C during the calibration process, a message will
appear, asking to restart the calibration process.

1850
 l If the temperature varies ± 10°C during a work session, a message will appear,
recommending to perform a new calibration.

l Do not move the C-Track during calibration.

For additional information refer to the scanner's calibration procedure:

l HandySCAN

l MetraSCAN

Expected results
The scanner calibration value must be constant from one time to another.

1851
Automated Photogrammetry

This function allows acquiring target positions on the fixture and part installed in the CUBE-R.

VXscan-R Plan: The photogrammetry generated in VXscan-R Plan will be used in both VXscan-R Plan
and VXscan-R Execute. Save the session with the photogrammetry while in VXscan-R Plan.

VXscan-R Execute: VXscan-R Execute generates a new working session using the photogrammetry
taken from the VXscan-R Plan session file. When performing photogrammetry in VXscan-R Execute, the
photogrammetry is kept until a new VXscan-R Execute session is created. To save photogrammetry

performed in VXscan-R Execute, click (Save as) and create a new session file or select the VXscan-
R Plan session file to overwrite the VXscan-R Plan session file (Warning: This cannot be undone.)

General operation
The acquisition principle is based entirely on the C-Track stereo acquisition of the model. The C-Track
acquires target positions while the model is rotating on 360 degrees.

Prerequisites, restrictions and rules

The C-Track must be calibrated prior to launching the photogrammetry.
Target model must contain enough targets distributed in the 3D volume to guarantee a good
overlap between pictures during acquisition.

l At least 10 to 12 targets must remain visible at any time during the acquisition phase.

l No static target (not part of the target model) is allowed.

l Any static target moving by more than 0.5mm and/or having its normal moved by
more than 5 degrees during the acquisition will be considered in the referential.
Targets that are static (outside the referential model), will be ignored automatically.

1852
 Any data from the session will be cleared and the previous targets will be cleared
upon launching automated photogrammetry.

During acquisition
Only targets seen by both cameras at the same time will be considered in the new model.
A bundle adjustment is performed at the end of the acquisition.

1853
When to perform the automated photogrammetry

l When the fixture was removed and reinstalled on the rotary table.

l When an event may have distorted the target model or the fixture:

l Temperature variation

l Heavy part payload

l Collision while loading the part

1854
Launch Program
Sessions opened in VXscan-R Execute have been created, tested and validated by a programmer in

VXscan-R Plan. The scan program is launched by in the interface. During the scan, the CAD will be

semi-transparent. Pressing the start button on the CUBE-R will launch the scan program.
Fixture and part installation is key to safe program execution. Make sure the part is installed as
instructed by the programmer or by what is seen in the 3D viewer.

At the end of the scanning program, a Finalize scan is automatically performed.

A CUBE-R with the asset protection function will have checks performed to
minimize collision risks, but it is the responsibility of the operator to install the part
and fixture like it is programmed in the software.

If using a HandySCAN 3D with Automation Kit, the HandySCAN 3D must be able to

see a minimum of 4 targets at the start of the scan. If less than 4 targets are
detected at the scan's start point, the scan will not start and an option to Go Home
or Cancel will be presented. After detecting the initial 4 targets, if the HandySCAN
3D cannot see sufficient targets for tracking during the scan program, the program
will continue, but the scanner will not collect scan data.

Interface
Icon Function Action

To start the robot program on the controller from the beginning, at

Start/Stop its home position, and start the scan process.
To stop the scan process when the robot program is paused.

To halt the robot program at any point and resume it, when paused.

Resume/Pause It is also possible to press the space bar to

pause or resume the program.

1855
Icon Function Action

To acquire the target positions on the fixture and part while the
Photogrammetry
rotary table is turning 360 degrees.

Go home To make the robot return to its Home position.

1856
Timeline Display
Overview
The timeline displays the sequence, from left to right, of all the enabled sweeps in a scanning path.
Everything that happens at a certain moment appears vertically in the timeline.
The timeline has a base time of 2 minutes and contains 10-second timestamps. If it is longer than 2
minutes, the timeline extends accordingly.
It is possible to zoom in and out (by scrolling the middle button on the mouse), up to the maximum
duration of the program.

Timeline views
The timeline is always displayed in the state saved by VXscan-R Plan.
When it is collapsed, only the sequence of sweeps is visible.
When it is expanded, additional program information is shown:

Icon Function Description

Indicates if the software has been able to find a solution to
perform a sweep or create a motion between 2 sweeps
(finalize).

l Green: The path has been finalized.

Robot path status l Yellow: The path has not been finalized. However, a
potential solution has been found.

l Red: The path has not been finalized. A point along the
path is unreachable or the path includes a collision.

Simulates the number of positioning targets the C-Track will

see on the MetraSCAN. It is expressed in % and is displayed in
MetraSCAN visibility
steps (from 53 to 100). The approximate percentage is shown at
any given point in time along the scanning path.
Simulates the quantity of positioning targets the C-Track will
see during the program. The approximate number of targets is
Target visibility
shown at any given point in time along the scanning path. If no
targets are applied, the timeline is empty.
Indicates the speed of the scanner TCP in the robot program. It
is expressed in % and is displayed in steps (from 0 to the
Scanning speed maximum speed set for the full program). The approximate
percentage is shown at each point in time along the scanning
path.

1857
Icon Function Description
Displays the enabled sweeps in the order the program will run
Scanning sweeps
them. It is possible to move them around.

1858
Inspection
A scan has to be finalized before it can be sent for inspection.
Several options are available for the mesh output inspection:

l Inspect mesh

l Send to PolyWorks

l Send to Metrolog

It is also possible to save or export the scan.

In VXscan-R Execute, the scan will be processed according to the parameters set in Edit info.

1859
Edit Layout

Available to those with a specific VXelements license.

This tool helps creating a custom environment around the essential parts of the layout:

l Robot

l C-Track

l MetraSCAN 3D-R

It is not available to regular users as this must be used prior to a cell being commissioned. For normal
usage, see the Select a layout drop-down in the VXscan-R tab of the VXelements - Options window
(Configure | Options).

To use the tool

To create a new layout
From an empty layout

1. In the Select a layout drop-down, choose New.

2. Enter a name for the layout.

From an existing layout

1. In the Select a layout drop-down, choose a layout to start from.

2. Click the Create a copy from this layout hyperlink.

3. Enter a name for the layout.

1860
To modify a layout

1. Set the parameters

2. Load the CAD model(s).

3. Use the Modify alignment tool or import a pose to position different layout components
with relation to the robot.

4. Modify the calibration trajectories if necessary.

The Pick tool, Place tool, Install plate, and Remove plate programs are managed by
robot programs that must be created by the integrator. They cannot be simulated
or programmed through VXscan-R.

Parameters

Edit layout pane

Select a layout
This drop-down allows selecting an existing layout or creating a new one.

l Existing layout: Choose from CUBER-V1, CUBE-R Curtain, CUBE-R Door, or CUBE-R Fence.

Existing layouts are unmodifiable, but can be copied using Create a copy from
this layout. Renaming is possible during creation.

l New: Create a layout from scratch.

CAUTION: Please note that , by default, the CUBE-R Curtain, CUBE-R

Door, and CUBE-R Fence layouts use the M-20iD/25 robot unlike the
CUBER-V1 layout which uses the M-20iA robot by default. Generic layouts
cannot be used to connect to the robot controller. A copy of the generic
layout must be done prior to connecting to the robot controller.

Layout name
Name the new layout (available when the Select a layout drop-down is set to New).
Robot type

1861
Supported robots:

l FANUC CRX-10iA

l FANUC CRX-10iA/L

l FANUC CRX-5iA

l FANUC CRX-25iA

l FANUC M-10iA

l FANUC M-10iD/8L

l FANUC M-10iD/10L

l FANUC M-10iD/12

l FANUC M-20iA

l FANUC M-20iD/12L

l FANUC M-20iD/25

l FANUC M-710iC/12L

l UR10

l UR10e

l UR5e

l KUKA KR 8 R1420 arc HW

l KUKA KR 8 R1440-2 arc HW

l KUKA KR 8 R1640-2

l KUKA KR 8 R2010

l KUKA KR 8 R2010-2

l KUKA KR 8 R2100 arc HW

l KUKA KR 8 R2100-2 arc HW

l KUKA KR 12 R1810

1862
 l KUKA KR 12 R1810-2

l KUKA KR 20 R3100

Only FANUC robots can connect directly to VXscan-R and execute and robot
trajectory in VXscan-R Plan and VXscan-R Execute. All other robots must use the
Export to I/O Module function to execute a robot trajectory.

Activate scalebar DCS

Check this box if the cell cannot detect the presence of the scalebar on the robot and the enclosure
cannot fully protect users on the exterior:

l For standard layout, this applies to a combination of the Manual Tool Changer and the wire
mesh enclosure.
l This decision requires a risk assessment.

When checked, the software will always assume the scalebar is connected to the scanner, and will
avoid positions that would collide the bar with the enclosure.

CAUTION: This does not avoid material collision with the table and part.

When not checked, the software only activates the collision envelope for C- Track calibrations,
assuming that the robot manages the presence of the bar.

l Refer to the Asset Protection Flag section of the Integrator Manual.

l Select the check box if the Asset protection option is not bought for the cell.

l Leave the check box cleared if the Asset protection option is bought for the cell.

Modify robot joints limits

How to set joint limits that will be used in trajectory generation:

1. Click Modify.

2. Set Min and Max values for Joint Limits.

3. Click OK.

Modify collision options

1863
The collision options must be reviewed if a dresspack or a custom MetraSCAN 3D-R adapter is used in
the layout to ensure no collisions will be caused by the additional components.

CAUTION: Add collision checks between the available elements for the
scanning and calibration trajectories when custom dresspacks and/or
custom MetraSCAN 3D-R adapters are installed.

How to set the collision options that will be used in trajectory generation:

1. Click Modify

2. Select the base, joint, table, or the MetraSCAN 3D-R adapter from the Element to create a
collision with menu and then select the base, joint, table, or MetraSCAN 3D-R adapter to
which a collision check should be added.

Current layout GUID: Displays the layout's current GUID.

Table pane
Use rotary table

l Select the check box if the cell contains a rotary table. When selected, the target detection
process will be automated photogrammetry.

l Clear the check box if the cell has a fixed table. When selected the target detection process
will be auto-detect target and Volume extension.

Model used for display

Reference model with the correct details to display in the offline programming interface.

1. Click .

2. Select the desired CAD or mesh file for the display model.

3. Click Open.

Model used for collision

Reference model simplified to accelerate the processing of collision checks while programming.

1864
 1. Click .

2. Select the desired CAD or mesh file for the display model.

3. Click Open.

Table pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the base of the robot in a text file (.txt)
under a specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

l The pose applies to both models. Ensure they share the same coordinate system

Alignment (for Table)

l Adjust Display, Collision or Both alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y
and Z axes.

l Manipulating the colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer will change values for the selected
model.

l When any change is made in the Both panel, all values contained in Display and Collision are
made the same.

Only Both is available when using a rotary table.

Max. rotation speed

Maximum speed at which VXscan-R can ask the rotary table to turn (degrees per second).

Scanner pane
Scanner model

1865
 l Select the model of scanner in use.

Calibration plate pose

Matrix of the position of the model used for the display of the calibration plate relative to the robot
base during calibration.

l This position is used by the Modify calibration trajectory of the scanner calibration.

Calibration plate collision model

Model of the tooling that holds / moves the calibration plate, in its deployed state (e.g., the swing
arm). Used only during scanner calibrations to avoid collisions.
Collision model pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the base of the robot in a text file (.txt)
under a specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

Rotary table angle during calibration

Position of the table during scanner calibration. The rotary table angle during calibration is reached
after the pick tool program is completed.
Alignment (for calibration plate)

l Adjust Display, Collision or Both alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y
and Z axes.

l Manipulating the colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer will change values for the selected
model.

l When any change is made in the Both panel, all values contained in Display and Collision are
made the same.

TCP pose

1866
Matrix of the position the TCP with relation to the flange of the robot in a text file (.txt) under a specific
format.

l First line is reserved for the alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

Alignment (for TCP pose)

Adjust alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y and Z axes or manipulate the
colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer.

Changes to the TCP alignment will affect the gripper position if one is present.

C-Track pane
C-Track Position mode

l Fixed - For fixed C-track setups.

l Mobile - For mobile C-track setups.

Automatic calibration is disabled with Mobile C-Track.

MetraSCAN 3D-R Minimum visibility (%) is not considered in the Finalize when
Mobile C-Track is chosen.

C-Track pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the base of the robot in a text file (.txt)
under a specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

1867
C-Track Calibration mode

l Automatic - Robot manipulates calibration bar during calibration process. Layout equipped
with auto-calibration kit uses automatic calibration mode.

l Manual - Operator manipulates calibration bar during calibration process. CRX-10iA and CRX-
10iA/L robots must use manual calibration due to payload limitations.

Robot fallback position

l Position of the robot with the scanner outside the C-Track's field of view. Used for automated
photogrammetry and auto-detect targets, but not volume extension.

Alignment (for C-Track)

Adjust alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y and Z axes or manipulate the
colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer.

Enclosure pane
The enclosure should contain the portion of the cell that stops people from coming in the cell when it
is operational (i.e., walls, doors, light curtains).
Model used for display
Reference model with the correct details to display in the offline programming interface.
Model used for collision
Reference model simplified to accelerate the processing of collision checks while programming.
Enclosure pose

1868
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the base of the robot in a text file (.txt)
under a specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

l The pose applies to both models. Ensure they share the same coordinate system.

Robot module pane

The robot module should contain the portion of the cell that hold the robotic components into place
(i.e., structure under the rotary table, robot controller, calibration plate swing arm)
Model used for display
Reference model with the correct details to display in the offline programming interface.
Model used for collision
Reference model simplified to accelerate the processing of collision checks while programming.
Robot module pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the base of the robot in a text file (.txt)
under a specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

l The pose applies to both models. Ensure they share the same coordinate system.

1869
Scanner adapter pane
The scanner adapter menu is available to import a model for a custom scanner adapter.
Model used for display
Reference model with the correct details to display in the offline programming interface.
Model used for collision
Reference model simplified to accelerate the processing of collision checks while programming.
Scanner adapter pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the robot flange in a text file (.txt) under a
specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

l The pose applies to both models. Ensure they share the same coordinate system.

Alignment

l Adjust Display, Collision or Both alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y
and Z axes.

l Manipulating the colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer will change values for the selected
model.

l When any change is made in the Both panel, all values contained in Display and Collision are
made the same.

Scanner gripper pane

The scanner gripper menu is available to import a model for a custom scanner gripper.
Model used for display

1870
Reference model with the correct details to display in the offline programming interface.
Model used for collision
Reference model simplified to accelerate the processing of collision checks while programming.
Scanner gripper pose
Matrix of the position of the CAD models with relation to the robot flange in a text file (.txt) under a
specific format:

l First line is reserved for alphanumerical title.

l Matrix values must be separated by a single space.

l The pose applies to both models. Ensure they share the same coordinate system.

Alignment

l Adjust Display, Collision or Both alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y
and Z axes.

l Manipulating the colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer will change values for the selected
model.

l When any change is made in the Both panel, all values contained in Display and Collision are
made the same.

Robot home pane

Position used to stop the robot after every single robot program (calibrations, photogrammetry, scans)

CAUTION: Must be included accordingly in the Pick tool, Place tool, Install
plate, and Remove plate programs

1871
Dresspack pane
This option activates dress pack. Collision avoidance will take the dress pack into account during
finalization if set accordingly in the collision options menu.
Joints

1. Click for the desired joint(s).

2. Select the desired CAD or mesh file for the dresspack. The import position for the model
is at the joint coordinate system of the selected joint.

3. Click Open.

Alignment (for Dresspack)

Adjust alignment by entering values for Offset and Angle for the X, Y and Z axes or manipulate the
colored rings and arrows in the 3D viewer.

Calibration trajectory pane

Modify calibration trajectory
This option allows generating custom robot trajectories for the cell (use this after creating the layout).

1. Select a calibration trajectory in the drop-down:

l Locate C-Track trajectory (used for commissioning)

l TCP calibration trajectory (used for commissioning)

l C-Track calibration trajectory

l Scanner calibration trajectory

l Locate table (used for commissioning)

2. Click Modify to change the calibration trajectory settings.

It is recommended to run modified trajectories at slower speed the first time, to

increase the reaction time to avoid any accidents.

Layout calibration pane

See To change the calibration trajectory settings.

1872
 Collision envelopes pane
Shows any imported collision envelopes (entities or mesh) from VXmodel or VXscan-R.

To change the calibration trajectory settings

Locate C-Track
The Locate C-Track calibration trajectory should have no fewer positions than the default program and
these positions should be as diverse as possible from a joint perspective.

CAUTION: All scanner positions must be seen by the C-Track to

successfully complete the Locate C-Track calibration trajectory.

Workflow

1. Set the parameters in the Automated trajectory and the Robot joints panes.

2. Click Create trajectory to finalize the path and add sweeps in the timeline. Click Reset to
delete the modifications made and return to the initial trajectory.

3. Click Play sim. to validate the trajectory.

Automated trajectory pane

Add points to the Point # table or modify and change the order of existing points if necessary.
Point # table
Button Action

To create a point.

To delete the selected point.

Click to move the selected point up in the list.

Click to move the selected point down in the list.

To change the selected point with the actual robot configuration.

To change the joint configuration in the Robot joints pane.

1873
Robot joints pane

Lock table: Select the check box to lock the table. When locked, it will not be allowed to rotate when
clicking the CAD model but can still be rotated through this pane.
Table: Set the angular position of the rotary table.
Axis 1 to Axis 6: Set the angular position of each robotic joint.

TCP calibration
Select a position from which a sequence of rotations around Axis 5 and Axis 6 will be generated. The
position's Axis 5 and Axis 6 must be set at zero degree.

CAUTION: All scanner positions must be seen by the C-Track to

successfully complete the TCP calibration.

Workflow
1. Set the parameters in the Automated trajectory and the Robot joints panes.

2. Click Create trajectory to generate the remaining points based on the initial one, to
finalize the path and to add sweeps in the timeline. Click Reset to delete the
modifications made and return to the initial trajectory.

3. Click Play sim. to validate the trajectory.

Automated trajectory pane

Modify the starting point of the TCP calibration in the Point # table if necessary. Make sure Axis 5 and
Axis 6 values are at zero degree.

It is also possible to edit or change the order of existing points in the Point #
table.

Point # table
Button Action

Click to move the selected point up in the list.

Click to move the selected point down in the list.

To change the selected point with the actual robot configuration.

1874
 Button Action

To change the joint configuration in the Robot joints pane.

Robot joints pane

Lock table: Select the check box to lock the table. When locked, it will not be allowed to rotate when
clicking the CAD model but can still be rotated through this pane.
Table: Set the angular position of the rotary table.
Axis 1 to Axis 6: Set the angular position of each robotic joint.

Scanner calibration
Create a robot trajectory that will enable a scanner calibration with a custom position of the calibration
plate.
Workflow
1. Set the parameters in the Automated trajectory and the Robot joints panes.

2. Click Generate points to create, in the 3D viewer and the Point # table, points that will
match the expected positions of the scanner over the calibration plate for a full
calibration. Unreachable points will be disabled. Click Clear to delete all the poses
created.

3. Click Create trajectory to finalize the path and add sweeps in the timeline. Click Clear to
delete the modifications made and return to the initial trajectory.

4. Click Play sim. to validate the trajectory.

Automated trajectory pane

Create points or modify and change the order of existing points in the Point # table. Skipping a pose or
poses impact their validity status.
Point # table
Button Action

Click to move the selected point up in the list.

Click to move the selected point down in the list.

To change the selected point with the actual robot configuration.

1875
Button Action

To change the joint configuration in the Robot joints pane.

To skip a pose in the trajectory. The robot program will not reach
skipped poses, but move on to the next point.

1876
 Pose validity status

l Valid: Percentage of good poses in the calibration trajectory.

l Not Optimal: Percentage of poses that could be enhanced in the calibration trajectory.

l Not Valid: Percentage of poses that are bad or the have been skipped in the calibration
trajectory.

When a pose is skipped, its row becomes highlighted in the Point # table.

Robot joints pane

Lock table: Select the check box to lock the table. When locked, it will not be allowed to rotate when
clicking the CAD model but can still be rotated through this pane.
Table: Set the angular position of the rotary table.
Axis 1 to Axis 6: Set the angular position of each robotic joint.

C-Track calibration
Create a robot trajectory that will enable a C-Track calibration with a custom position of the tracker.
Workflow
1. Set the parameters in the Automated trajectory and the Robot joints panes.

2. Click Generate points to create, in the 3D viewer and the Point # table, points that will
match the expected positions of the calibration bar1 in relation to the C-Track for a full
calibration. Unreachable points will be disabled. Click Clear to delete all the poses
created.

3. Click Create trajectory to finalize the path and add sweeps in the timeline. Click Clear to
delete the modifications made and return to the initial trajectory.

4. Click Play sim. to validate the trajectory.

Automated trajectory pane

Trajectory type: Select the trajectory to use to for this layout's C-Track calibration.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

1877
 l CUBERV1: Recommended when possible.

l 2600, 3100, and 3600: Identical trajectories, but at different distances from the center of the
tracker's calibration zone (Z offset).

Allow table motion

l Select the check box to allow the software to find solutions to reach the calibration points by
turning the rotary table.

l Clear to find a solution to reach the points where the table remains fixed.

Even if the check box is cleared, this parameter does not stop the user from
overwriting the points and generating table rotations.

Point #table
Create points or modify and change the order of existing points. Skipping a pose or poses impact their
validity status.

Button Action

Click to move the selected point up in the list.

Click to move the selected point down in the list.

To change the selected point with the actual robot configuration.

To change the joint configuration in the Robot joints pane.

To skip a pose in the trajectory. The robot will recalculate the most
optimal way to get to the next pose (without causing a collision).

Pose validity status

l Valid: Percentage of good poses in the calibration trajectory.

l Not optimal: Percentage of poses that could be enhanced in the calibration trajectory.

l Not valid: Percentage of poses that are bad or the have been skipped in the calibration
trajectory.

1878
 When a pose is skipped, its row becomes highlighted in the Point # table.

Robot joints pane

Lock table: Select the check box to lock the table. When locked, it will not be allowed to rotate when
clicking the CAD model but can still be rotated through this pane.
Table: Set the angular position of the rotary table.
Axis 1 to Axis 6: Set the angular position of each robotic joint.

Locate table
The trajectory uses the Robot fallback position defined in the C-Track pane, then rotates the table a
full turn in 4 90-degree steps.
Workflow

1. Set the parameters in the Automated trajectory pane.

2. Click Create trajectory to finalize the path and add sweeps in the timeline. Click Reset to
delete the modifications made and return to the initial trajectory.

3. Click Play sim. to validate the trajectory.

Automated trajectory pane

Locate table algorithm: Select the rotary table's position calculation algorithm:

l CUBER-V1: Recommended when using a standard CUBE-R Mounting Plate. It calculates the
position and orientation of the rotary table's center point and verifies the position of the
different corner targets that must be used by the process. Proprietary adapters must be used
on the corner targets.

l Generalized: Must be used with a custom Mounting Plate. It calculates the position and
orientation of the rotary table's center point. Yaw (Z-axis) rotation cannot be measured: the
nominal pose value is extracted.

Target offset: Set the distance between the top of the Mounting Plate and the targets' center. All
targets used must share the same offset. Default value applies to the proprietary adapters used with
the 45-degree swivel targets.

1879
To use the Locate table Generalized algorithm
The Generalized algorithm must make some assumptions to attain a usable value by VXscan- R. To
ensure good results, make sure the nominal Rotary table pose, in the Rotary Table pane of the Edit
Layout, is orientated correctly.
When acquiring targets for the first time, check in the 3D viewer that only targets placed on the table are
seen by the C-Track. If other targets are seen, they will be used in the calculation of the table position
and the calculation may fail if some targets do not rotate with the table.
Targets must be positioned to avoid any symmetry on the rotary axis. It is recommended to use at least
5 targets to ensure such criteria is easily achieved. More targets can be used if necessary.
Also, all targets used must be acquired at each table orientation for the process to be successful.

To manage layouts

Layouts are saved where indicated in the Workspace folder field of the VXscan-R
tab options (Configure | Options). They can be copied and sent to other users, as
they contain all the relevant information.

l Clicking OK or Save will always save the modifications made to a layout. Whenever a save is
made, a hidden identifier is generated and display next to Current layout GUID. This identifier
will allow VXscan-R to recognize the layout used by a session and the layouts available in the
Workspace folder.

l The final version of the layout file should be saved and used by the end-user. Making sure every
computer used to program in VXscan-R has the same layout file with the same identifier is
essential to ensure optimal compatibility between different computers and sessions.

l Opening a session created with a custom layout will display one of these layout names in the
VXscan-R tab options (Configure | Options) and in the Edit layout pane:

l From session if the layout does not exist in the workspace folder on the computer

l The name of the layout if it exists in the workspace folder on the computer

l Going in the VXscan-R tab options (Configure | Options) and changing the layout will apply
the modification to all future sessions.

1880
No verification can be made by the software that the layout it is using matches the
cell it is connecting to. It is the users' responsibility to ensure their computer is set
up appropriately for their layout or custom cell.

1881
Calibrate layout

Available to those with a specific registry key.

The Calibrate layout tool allows inputting all the information and setting all the parameters needed to
perform the layout calibration. The layout calibration is a necessary part of a layout commissioning
process, when used with VXscan-R. Whenever a step is finished in the Calibrate layout workflow, the
signature file stored in the robot controller is updated with the new information.
The tool is flexible enough to proceed through the steps in any order, but it is important to make the
final calibration by going through the steps in order (from first to last).

Prerequisite

l Pick tool, Place tool, Install plate, and Remove plate programs

l Safety flags must be managed by the robot controller

l See the Integrator Manual.

To use the tool

1. Connect to robot.

2. Set the parameters.

3. Verify the calibration trajectory.

4. Run the appropriate programs.

Parameters
Layout serial number
Enter the serial number associated with the layout.
Scanner serial number
Field is automatically filled with the active scanner. Ensure the correct system is input.

1882
Modify calibration trajectory
This option allows generating custom robot trajectories for the cell (use this after creating the layout).

1. Select a calibration trajectory in the drop-down:

l Locate C-Track trajectory (used for commissioning)

l TCP calibration trajectory (used for commissioning)

l C-Track calibration trajectory

l Scanner calibration trajectory

l Locate table (used for commissioning)

2. Click Modify to change the calibration trajectory settings.

Pick tool program

Enter the name of the program used to grab the C-Track calibration bar.
Place tool program
Enter the name of the program used to drop the C-Track calibration bar off.
Install plate program
Enter the name of the program used to move the calibration plate into position.
Remove plate program
Enter the name of the program used to move the calibration plate to its stored position.

Programs
1. Select the check boxes of the programs to execute.

2. Click Run.
Tracker calibration tool setup verification

l Run to verify if the picking and placing of the C-Track calibration bar is done correctly.

l This step runs the robot program located on the robot controller that has the exact string input
in the Pick tool and Place tool programs.

Scanner calibration plate setup verification

1883
l Run to verify if the picking and placing of the scanner calibration plate is done correctly.

l This step runs the robot program located on the robot controller that has the exact string input
in the Install plate and Remove plate programs.

1884
C-Track position adjustment

l Run to pick the calibration bar and position it to the first C-Track calibration pose. The step is
then paused to allow moving the C-Track until the bar is as close to the center of the boxes as
possible.

l Resume the program to place the calibration bar back and continue.

C-Track calibration

l Run to perform an automated C-Track calibration.

Initial TCP calibration

l Run the TCP calibration program.

Initial locate C-Track

l Run the Locate C-Track program.

Locate calibration plate

l Run to position the calibration plate for calibration and acquire the actual position of the plate,
then return the plate back in a stored position.

CAUTION: The scanner calibration trajectory must be regenerated if the

calibration plate's position changes during the Locate calibration plate step.

Scanner calibration

l Run to perform an automated scanner calibration. Must be done after a valid C-Track
calibration.

Final TCP calibration

l Run the TCP calibration program. Must be done after a valid scanner calibration.

Final locate C-Track

1885
 l Run the Locate C-Track program. Must be done after a valid final TCP calibration.

Locate table

l Run to bring the robot to the Fallback position and rotate the table to 4 different positions.

l Resume the program when all targets are facing the C-Track to acquire the target positions and
move on to the next table position. Must be done after a valid Final locate C-Track.

Content specific to Locate table CUBER-V1 calculation algorithm

For each position:

l 45-degree swivel target heads must be installed on 0.60 inch thick adapters in each corner hole
of the rotary table.

l At least 1 extra target must be installed on the table (swivel or satellite).

Offline location options

Allows locating the C-Track and Calibration plate without being connected to the robot.
To create the locale C-Track trajectory:

1. Create the Locate C-Track trajectory in Edit layout.

2. (Optional) Export the Locate C-Track trajectory:

i. Click File | Export | Export to I/O Module | Export locate C- Track
trajectory to export the Locate C-Track trajectory and then manually transfer
the robot program to the robot controller. (Only available in Calibrate
layout.)

3. Perform the offline locate C-Track:

i. Click C-Track.

ii. Move the robot to the Point 1 position either by:

a. Using the robot program exported from VXscan-R. Move the
robot carefully since it's the first time running it on the robot.

b. Jogging the robot manually.

iii. Click OK when the robot is at the same position as the one displayed.

iv. Repeat for all the positions.

1886
4. Validate the number of positions.
i. Validate the total number of points. If the number of points is less than the
number of points from the trajectory generated in Edit layout, some
MetraSCAN 3D- R positions were not seen by the C- Track. The trajectory
must be re-validated in Edit layout.

ii. Click OK.

5. Perform the offline Locate calibration plate: The offline Locate calibration plate will only be
available after performing the offline Locate C-Track.

i. Click Calibration plate.

ii. Install the calibration plate in the layout.

iii. Click OK.

6. Generate the calibration trajectories.

i. Click Exit.

ii. Click Yes to save the new poses in the current layout.

iii. Generate the C-Track and the MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration trajectories with
the actual poses of the C-Track and MetraSCAN 3D-R calibration plate.

1887
Multi-Layout Support
Allow multi-layout support lets a VXscan-R scanner session to be executed on more than one installation
without needing to re-finalize the session on the other installations.
"Layout" in multi-layout support refers to physical, A-QC robot setups (e.g. identical CUBE-R or custom
layouts) and shouldn't be confused with "layout" from the Edit layout function.
The layouts must have their components at the same locations and be as close as possible to identical. A
collision check is performed on every additional layout and discrepancies between the two layouts could
result in the need to edit sweeps generated from the first layout.
Each layout must have different GUID values for Allow multi-layout support to work properly.

How to use multi-layout:

Layout 1

The Allow multi-layout support option must be selected in Configure | Options before validating and saving the
session.

1. Validate the session using the Validate button.

2. Save the session.

Layout 2

3. Copy the session file from layout #1 to the computer for layout #2.

a. If the session (.CSF file) is opened directly from the folder the file was copied to and not
through VXscan-R, it will not override the information needed to allow a validated session
run on layout #2.

4. Open the session validated from layout #1 in VXscan-R Plan.

5. Connect to the robot using the Connect button.

6. This will open a dialog box reading: Skip regeneration? Collision will still be checked.. Click
Yes. All sweeps in the timeline should be green at this point.

7. Disconnect from the robot using the Disconnect button.

8. Save the session.

Do not validate the session on layout #2 (or any other layouts) using the Validate button.

A sweep can turn red after the skip regeneration if collision is detected. The sweet must be edited and the skip
regeneration must be done on every other layout including layout #1.

1888
If any modifications that require a Reorder and finalize are done on any of the layouts, the Skip regeneration step
must be done on all other layouts.

1889
VXscan-R Plugin for Cobots Workflows
For interface overview, see VXscan-R Interface.

Jog Feature
With the VXscan- R, points from the jog feature can be recorded from the current position of the
collaborative robot instead of generating them offline. The points can be recorded individually or
continually during the robot movement made by moving it manually.
Once they are recorded, the points will behave the same way as if they were generated offline and can
be edited or reordered if required.

To use the Jog feature

1. From VXscan-R:
i. Create a new VXscan-R session.

ii. Click (Add feature).

iii. Click (Jog) under Feature type.

iv. Click (Connect to robot).

2. From the teach pendant:

i. Start the VXscan-R plugin.

ii. Tap (StartScan).

iii. Tap (Laser (ON)).

iv. If required, adjust the shutter and the zoom.

v. Move the collaborative robot to the first position and press (Start)
Record robot.

a. If recording points continually, move the robot to the final

position and press (Stop) Record robot.

b. If recording points individually, repeat again with the next

position until the robot is at the final position.

1890
 vi. Press (Next sweep) to create a new Jog feature in VXscan-R. Repeat step
5 until all the sweeps are generated.

vii. Press (StopScan).

viii. Review the trajectory.

CAUTION: Pay attention to the environment and the part while generating
the trajectory. During the point recording, you must make sure the
collaborative robot, the MetraSCAN 3D-R and any other accessories won't
collide with the environment or the part since collision envelopes aren't
used with collaborative functions.

1891
Manual scan
With the VXscan-R plugin, you can perform a manual scan using the CRX collaborative robots in the
same way as you would with the handheld version of the MetraSCAN 3D-R.
This function can be use to evaluate the surface coverage of a new part or to perform a scan on a part
that you only need to scan once.

To use manual scan with VXscan-R plugin

1. From VXscan-R:
i. Create a new VXscan-R session.

ii. Click (Connect to robot).

2. From the teach pendant:

i. Start the VXscan-R plugin.

ii. Tap (StartScan).

iii. Tap (Laser (ON)).

iv. If required, adjust the shutter and the zoom.

v. Scan the part by moving the collaborative robot.

vi. Press (StopScan).

CAUTION: Pay attention to the environment and the part while performing
a manual scan. During the scan, you must make sure the collaborative
robot, the scanner and any other accessories won't collide with the
environment or the part since collision envelopes aren't used with
collaborative functions.

1892
VXshot Overview

VXshot is a data acquisition module used with the MaxSHOT Next system. This module provides every
step of the way throughout the process:

l Real-time visualization and validation of the positioning model making it possible to see the
rebuilt volume and all estimated points with the utmost accuracy.

l Clearly and immediately notifies if any additional pictures need to be taken to increase
measurement accuracy.

l Measures and recomputes all the identified points each time an image is taken.

Interface
Using VXshot
Creating a photogrammetry model
Editing a photogrammetry model
Model finalization

1893
VXshot Interface

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar
Icon Function Action
Module Click the icon to show the active modules within the current session and
selector select desired module to switch.

Allows picking a frame on the photogrammetry model for prealignment

Pick frame
purposes.
Pick coded Allows picking coded targets on the photogrammetry model for
target prealignment purposes.

Auto. align Automatically detects the CAD model targets in the scene.

Clear picked
Clears all targets picked on the CAD model.
targets

Start Starts and stops the image acquisition process. This function has to be
acquisition activated to enable the camera in order to take pictures.

Reset the photogrammetry model. Clears all targets and images initially
Reset model
taken with the camera.

Finalize
Launches the final adjustment calculation of the photogrammetric model.
model
Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by removing bad targets and
Clean model
bad images.

Clean targets Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by only removing bad targets.

Clean images Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by only removing bad images.

3D, image
and Allows navigating between the 3D view, the Image view and the Combined
combined view (image and 3D) modes.
views

1894
 Add scan Allows creating a scan with the photogrammetric model.

Launches an inspection program for the photogrammetric model, creates

Inspect model
a best-fit alignment and a color map.

Function only available from the menu bar

Icon Function Action
Add
photogrammetry Allows creating a new photogrammetric model in the navigation tree.
model

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or
an item in the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual
Menu section.

Navigation panel
Use the Navigation panel to switch between the components of a VXshot session and perform various
actions.

Navigation pane
Select a node, such as the Photogrammetry model node, to display its components in the navigation
tree and to get access to its details. Other nodes can include a VXscan session, a VXinspect session or a
CAD model.
Photogrammetry model node
This node is created when a session is opened (with an active MaxSHOT 3D). When this node is
selected, the Photogrammetry details, the Photogrammetry acquisition parameters, and the
Photogrammetry parameters panes appear.

Photogrammetry details pane

This pane provides information on the selected photogrammetry model in the navigation tree. It
summarizes the details of the photo session and the state of the results. For details, see the
Photogrammetry Details section.

1895
 Photogrammetry acquisition parameters pane
This pane allows changing the acquisition parameters (laser features, sound, and software feedback).
For details, see the Photogrammetry Acquisition Parameters section.

Photogrammetry parameters pane

This pane allows creating custom scale bars. For details, see the Photogrammetry Parameters
section.

Display bar
The Display toolbar is located at the bottom on the 3D viewer and provides various display options for
the 3D viewer.
It includes options for the General display, the Mesh display, the C-Track scene, and the VXshot
display.

Photogrammetry display mode

Select a type of view in the Display mode section of the toolbar or in the menu bar, under View
| Photogrammetry display mode:

3D view

The 3D view shows the project in real-time. The default view displays:

l Reference frame

l Detected scale bars

l Detected coded targets

l Position of the camera for the selected image

Coded targets appear either in green (good), yellow (poor) or red (bad) depending on the
quality of their position estimation.
If targets appear in white instead of green, make sure the right reference frame and scale bars
were added in the Photogrammetry parameters pane and that at least 3 images of the
reference frame were taken. The following actions can also be performed in the 3D viewer:

1896
 Action Item Example

Double-
All targets seen during the
clicking the
chosen photo, pointed out
camera
by lines.
icon

All points of view that allow

Double-
seeing the selected target,
clicking a
represented by gray camera
target
icons.

Image view

This view displays:

l Selected picture as it was taken.

l Detected coded and non- coded targets (green or red, depending of their measurement
quality).

l Detected reference frame and scale bars, when all coded targets of the part are visible (if not,
the coded targets of the reference frame and scale bars will appear as independent coded
targets).

Right-click the 3D viewer to access the contextual menu.

Default
Function Description
status

Fit image Brings the image back to its actual size (after zooming). -

1897
 Default
Function Description
status

Quick rendering while Reduces the image resolution to facilitate its translation in the
On
moving viewer (after zooming).

Shows associated identification number for all detected

Show target ID Off
targets.

Shows associated identification number for all detected coded

Show coded target ID On
targets.

Combined view
Select this option to display the Image view and the 3D view at the same time.

Target table
The Target table will list:

l
All detected coded targets

l All non-coded targets

l
All deleted targets

1. Select targets by clicking their respective row.

l Selected targets are visible in both the Image view and 3D viewer.

2. Right-click the table to get access to these options:

Delete selected targets: Targets that are not to be included in the model. This action will keep the
deleted targets in the table but marked as Deleted.
Restore selected targets: Targets that are to be restored in the model.
Permanently delete selected targets: Targets that are not to be included in the model. This action is
not reversible.
Show columns:

1898
 1. State: The target status provides information about the measurement quality of a position.

Row Number of valid Image

Status 3D uncertainty
color observations error

Good Green ≤ 0.1 mm >3 ≤ 0.2 pixel

> 0.1 and ≤ 0.2

Poor Yellow ≤3 > 0.2 pixel
mm

Bad Red > 0.2 mm ≤2 -

2. Position: Calculated position of the target center (x,y,z).

3. Normal: Calculated normal of the targets (x,y,z).

4. Std Dev - XYZ: Standard deviation of the calculated position along each XYZ axis.

5. Std Dev: Mean standard deviation (3D uncertainty).

6. Observation: Number of images in which the target has been detected.

7. Visibility (°) : The half angle between the 2 pictures with the highest angle between them.

Image browser
The Image browser allows viewing the images taken during the acquisition. Images can be selected (blue
highlight) to be visible in the Image view or can be deleted.
The quality of each image is represented by a colored frame and an icon. Quality is reevaluated each
time a new image is added to a model. The image quality is determined by the 3D uncertainty and by
the red or green laser feedback.
An image without contour and icon is considered as not measured and will not be taken into account in
the model. It usually happens if less than 2 coded targets are correctly detected in the image.

1899
For details, see the MaxSHOT Next Acquisition Rules and Editing a Photogrammetry Model
sections.

Photo acquisition viewer

The MaxSHOT 3D projects a visual feedback (laser frame) on the scene allowing to correct and adjust
rapidly the camera position:

l A green laser frame is an indicator of a good image and a red laser frame is an indicator of a
potentially bad or poor image.
l A red laser frame or a green blinking frame mean that one or many of the feedback icons is or
are not optimal (stand- off distance, spread, target count, overlap and point of view
distinctiveness).

Because of the complexity of the acquisition process, a red laser frame or a green blinking frame does
not automatically mean a bad image.

Only visible after clicking Start acquisition .

1900
1901
Laser feedback
Indicator Icon Status Description

Good distribution

Status of the distribution of targets in

the image. It will notify the user if the
Spread Poor distribution targets are too concentrated in a small
area of the image.
Incorrect
distribution

Sufficient # of targets

Number of coded and non-coded

Target count Poor # of targets targets required to get a good image in
the model.

Insufficient # of targets

Good target overlap

Targets overlapping with the rest of the

model. This indicator will inform if the
Overlap Poor target overlap image has enough shared targets
connected to the other previously
taken images.

Incorrect target overlap

Distinct image

Duplicated image When this indicator turns yellow, the

Point of view
laser will blink, warning that a similar
distinctiveness
image was previously taken.
*This indicator will never turn red
as it is not a problem to take
- similar images. However it should
not improve the photogrammetric
model.

1902
 Indicator Icon Status Description

Correct distance

The camera stand-off distance from the

scene.

Distance meter l Min distance: 1.500 m

Too close (step back)
l Max distance: 4.500 m

Too far (step forward)

For details, see the Photogrammetry Acquisition Parameters and MaxSHOT Next Acquisition Rules
sections.

1903
Photogrammetry Details

The Photogrammetry Details expanding panel provides information about the state and quality of a
model.

Finalization results
Once a model finalization has been attempted (successful or not), results are shown in a table:

Maximal
Detail Description
value
State of the model (success or fail), including any errors that could
State -
prevent the model from being completed.
Root mean difference between the calculated and measured position of
Image error 0.050 pixels
targets on each image.

3D 3D uncertainty: Mean uncertainty on the measured position of targets

0.050 mm
uncertainty (standard deviation).

Evaluation of the difference between the scaled measured lengths and

the reference lengths. The table shows the global scaling deviation and
Scaling all the scaling distances. The global scaling represents the highest
0.100 mm
deviation absolute value of all the scaling distances. If only 1 scaling distance is
used in the model, the scaling deviation will be null, since only 1
distance contributes to the model scaling.

Various states of a model

Model is
Notification Description Solution
usable?
Model not yet finalized
N/A No ---
(new or modified).
Model finalization
Interrupted No interrupted (Cancel ---
button).

1904
 Model is
Notification Description Solution
usable?

l Make sure the QR code was

detected.

l Is the custom scale bar activated in

the Photogrammetry parameters?

l Is the custom scale bar information

Not scaled No No scale bar is detected.
properly entered?

l Are there enough images of the

scale bar targets?

l Are targets on the scale bar dusty or

damaged?

l Custom scale bars are properly

created?

Missing scale At least 1 custom scale

l Enough images of the custom scale
No
bar bar is not detected.
bar targets?

l Targets on custom scale bars are

dusty or damaged?

l Verify the length entered for custom

scale bar.

l Are all scale bar targets properly

At least 1 scaling
distance has an invalid detected (green)?
Invalid scale
Yes measurement (for more
bar
than 2 scaling distances). l Are targets on the custom scale bar
dusty or damaged?

l Any displacement of the scale bar

during photo acquisition?

1905
 Model is
Notification Description Solution
usable?

l Verify the length entered for the

custom scale bar.
More than 1 scaling
Scaling l Are all scale bar targets properly
distance: at least 1
deviation Yes
scaling distance has a
too high detected (green)?
too large scaling error
l Any displacement of the scale bar
during acquisition?

l Verify that the camera is functioning

Image error is too high
Image error
Yes for a good quality correctly (LEDs, quality of the
too high
model.
photographs, etc.).

l Verify that the images have been

taken from various points of view.
3D 3D uncertainty is too l Verify that the scale bars are
uncertainty Yes high for a good quality
too high model. properly placed (for details, see the
Reference frames and Scale bars
sections).

l Use a 64-bit operating system.

l Reduce the amount of photographs
Photogrammetric model
Out of
No is bigger than available and targets.
memory
memory.
l Divide the measuring session (create
sub-sessions).

l Take more photographs to complete

the model.
Failed No Model finalization failed.
l Verify the quality of the photographs
and targets.

1906
 Model is
Notification Description Solution
usable?

l This photogrammetry model can

Model finalization
Success Yes now be used for scanning or probing
succeeded.
the part.

1907
Photogrammetry Acquisition Parameters
Found in the Navigation panel, the Photogrammetry acquisition parameters pane allows adjusting laser
features, shutter sound, and software feedback.
Laser projected frame: The MaxSHOT Next projects color-coded patterns for visual feedback onto the
scene allowing for fast correction and adjustment of the camera position.

l Feedback: The camera will either project a green laser square (good photo) or a red laser square
(bad or poor-quality photo).

l Green only: The camera will only project a green laser square.

l Off: Disables both the red and green lasers on the camera.

Laser power: Using the slider, adjust the intensity of the laser square.
Shutter sound volume: Using the slider, adjust the volume for the camera shutter.
Show software feedback: Select to turn the visual feedback of VXshot on or off.

1908
Photogrammetry Parameters
Found in the Navigation panel, the Photogrammetry parameters pane allows creating custom scale bars
for the inspection of larger parts.

To pick a manual scaling distance

This function creates a scale bar from 2 targets for which the distance is known.

1. Click Pick manual scaling distance .

2. Pick 2 simple targets.

3. Input the nominal distance between them for model scaling.

To build a custom scale bar

This function defines the length of the different accessories of the Invar long-scale bar extension kit.

1. Click Build custom scale bar.

2. Input the required information in the VXelements - Custom scale bar dialog box:

Name: Enter the name of the custom scale bar.

Targets: Enter the name and length of the targets that will be affixed on the scale bar.
Target mounts: Enter the name and length of the target mounts that will be fixed on the scale bar.
Extension rods: Enter the name and length of the extension rods that will be used on the scale bar.
Coded target ID: Select the identification number for the coded targets which will be used on the scale
bar. Preselected numbers range from 15 to 18.
Export lists to a file: Allows exporting a .csbl file containing all the custom scale bar's information.
Import lists from a file: Allows importing a .csbl file containing all the custom scale bar's information.

3. Click OK.

Invar long-scale bar

1909
 1. Extension rod

2. Coded target clip

3. Target mount

4. Swivel target

For details, see the To assemble a custom 5-m Invar scale bar section.

To delete a scale bar

Function is available when a scale bar is chosen in the scale bar table.

This function allows deleting the selected custom scale bar.

1. Choose a custom scale bar in the table.

2. Click Delete scale bar.

To load an artifact

Available if the Show "Load artifact" button check box is selected in the VXshot tab
of the VXelements - Options dialog box (Configure | Options).

This function allows loading a reference frame or a scale bar for which the QR code is not detected.

1910
1. Click Load artifact.

2. In the VXelements - Import Artifact window, choose the photogrammetry artifact file (.caf)
to import.

1911
Using VXshot
Using the VXshot module with the MaxSHOT Next
When used with the MaxSHOT Next, the VXshot module gathers all the essential elements and tools into
a uniform, user-friendly and intuitive working environment. The workflow is simple:

1. Place a few coded and non-coded targets, the scale bars and the reference frame either on
or near the object to be measured.

2. Take several convergent photographs.

3. Launch the bundle adjustment process (Finalize model).

Once the calculation is completed, a Creaform scanner (HandySCAN 3D, MetraSCAN 3D, MetraSCAN
3D-R or HandyPROBE) will use this high accuracy positioning model to determine its position in the
measurement volume. The MaxSHOT Next can also simply be used for optical probing measurements.

1912
Creating a Photogrammetry Model

Target setup
The MaxSHOT Next is provided with coded targets and non-coded targets. The coded targets allow using
photogrammetry model creation and the non-coded targets allow using different Creaform products
(HandyPROBE Next, MetraSCAN 3D and HandySCAN 3D) with the photogrammetry model.

l Add 1 coded target every 2 or 3 feet (60-90 cm).

l For each picture that will be taken, make sure that a minimum of 4 coded targets are always
visible.

l Ensure proper triangulation by avoiding the placement of coded targets in straight horizontal or
vertical lines.

l Make sure the coded targets are laid out in a way that will create a target overlap between
pictures.

l If needed, place the coded targets in the surrounding environment around the object.

l Coded targets should rest on flat surfaces to prevent the magnetic holders from bending.

Once the recording session has started, targets should never be touched or moved
until the model is finalized.

Reference frame installation

For the starting point to build a photogrammetric model, adding a reference frame is essential. The
reference frame specifies the XYZ origin of the model and is imported as the origin of the scan in
VXscan.

l Use 1 reference frame per photogrammetry model.

l The frame can be placed anywhere on the part.

l The reference frame is used as a starting point for picture acquisition.

1913
 l It will provide the XYZ origin orientation and position in the model.

l The QR code provides technical information for the reference frame.

Scale bar installation

Scale bars should be positioned on or near the object. They specify the scale of the photogrammetry
model and allow an absolute distance measurement. A unique quick response code (QR code) is read by
the camera which automatically detects the Creaform scale bars.

l Install the scale bars in the scene, near or on the object:

Object with a length between 2-5 meters; install 1 or 2 Creaform scale bars.

Object with a length between 5-10 meters; install the 5-meter long scale bar (Invar Long Scale
Bars Extension Kit - optional).

If using Invar Long Scale Bars, it is strongly recommended to use the

Creaform scale bars too. This allows comparing the scaling results of all
scale bars and verifies no errors were introduced during the Invar Scale
Bar's definition step.

l Make sure that scale bars are stable and affixed securely.

l The scale bars must be handled carefully to avoid any shocks.

l Make sure scale bars are part of the photogrammetry model and are not isolated far away from
the scene.

l The QR code provides technical information on the scale bars.

Taking photographs
The ideal stand-off distance from the scene is 1.5-4.5 meters. Integrated green and red lasers in the
MaxSHOT Next project a light frame on the scene, providing instantaneous visual feedback on the
accuracy and validity of each photo taken.

The VXshot Photo Acquisition Viewer will only appear when launching the Start acquisition process
in the Toolbar. Here are the definitions for the camera statuses:

1914
 Indicator Icon Status Description

Good distribution

Status of the distribution of targets in

the image. It will notify the user if the
Spread Poor distribution targets are too concentrated in a small
area of the image.
Incorrect
distribution

Sufficient # of targets

Number of coded and non-coded

Target count Poor # of targets targets required to get a good image in
the model.

Insufficient # of targets

Good target overlap

Targets overlapping with the rest of the

model. This indicator will inform if the
Overlap Poor target overlap image has enough shared targets
connected to the other previously
taken images.

Incorrect target overlap

Distinct image

Duplicated image When this indicator turns yellow, the

Point of view
laser will blink, warning that a similar
distinctiveness
image was previously taken.
*This indicator will never turn red
as it is not a problem to take
- similar images. However it should
not improve the photogrammetric
model.

1915
 Indicator Icon Status Description

Correct distance

The camera stand-off distance from the

scene.

Distance meter l Min distance: 1.500 m

Too close (step back)
l Max distance: 4.500 m

Too far (step forward)

Tips for a successful photo session

l Prioritize overlap in picture acquisition over quantity. At least 4 common targets should be in
successive images.

l Capture the image from various angles (cone of 60°) from the same location during the whole
acquisition process.

l Each target should be captured with a minimum of 6 points of view.

l Use tooling to put coded targets over thin areas of the part, to create a bridge between the
2 sides of the part.

For details, see the Editing a Photogrammetric Model section.

1916
Editing a Photogrammetry Model

To finalize a model

l When all photographs have been correctly taken, launch the positioning model algorithm by

clicking .

l Once the adjustment has been made, the model is displayed in the 3D viewer where the
photogrammetry model can be manipulated.

l Statistics about the current model are displayed in the Photogrammetry details and the
Targets table.

At all times, it is possible to click to add more photographs. It will be then

necessary to relaunch the Finalize model algorithm.

To clean a photogrammetry model

After the finalization of the photogrammetry model, bad images and bad targets can be automatically
removed by selecting in the Toolbar 1 of these 3 functions:

Toolbar Function Menu Action

icons
Tools | Clean
Clean Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by
photogrammetry
model removing bad targets and bad images.
model
Clean Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by
Tools | Clean targets
targets only removing bad targets.
Clean Allows cleaning the photogrammetric model by
Tools | Clean images
images only removing bad images.

After using any of these options, do another Finalize model .

To add a scan

1917
Click to start creating a scan using the MetraSCAN 3D or the HandySCAN 3D.

MaxSHOT Next targets VS Optimize volumetric accuracy1

The targets acquired by photogrammetry using the MaxSHOT Next are always fixed when imported.
They are therefore not impacted by the Optimize volumetric accuracy parameter even if they are seen by
the HandySCAN 3D during scanning.

VXelements will only optimize the new targets detected by the HandySCAN 3D.
Always leave this check box selected for best accuracy results.

To inspect a model

To launch an inspection program, in the Toolbar, click . This function will create an inspection
program node in the Navigation panel and direct the user in VXinspect.

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

1918
Model Finalization

In the Toolbar, the Finalize model function launches the final adjustment calculation for the
photogrammetric model. This operation is mandatory to import the model into the main interface of
VXelements.
It needs to be performed every time new images are added to or deleted from a previously finalized
model.

Conditions for a successful model finalization

The model finalization will only be possible if:

l The right reference frame file has been uploaded in the Photogrammetry Parameters table.

l The right coded target ID and length have been entered in the Photogrammetry Parameters
table.

l The reference frame and scale bars have been properly detected.

l Enough photos have been taken to build the model (with varied points of view).

l The model does not exceed the available memory.

The state of the model, visible in the Photogrammetry Details expanding panel, will indicate if any
conditions have not been met.

Finalizing a model with a MaxSHOT Next for the first time

If a message advises that the camera parameters are estimated upon opening the VXshot module,
another message will later appear during model finalization giving the option to use the current model
to optimize those parameters. This message will only appear if the model is good enough for the
parameters optimization of the camera. For details, see the VXshot Interface section.
A model that satisfies the following conditions is more likely to be admissible for the parameter
optimization of the camera:

l At least 100 targets have been used (regular and coded ones, for a maximal amount of
500 targets).

l The size of the object is at least 1.5 m2.

1919
 l A closed object has been used (rather than a flat plane, for example).

l At least 40 photographs have been taken from different points of view.

l Enough targets have been detected on each image (observation) for a total of at least
40 000 observations.

l Detected targets cover an area representing at least 90 % of each photograph.

Delete lower-quality photographs and targets to improve the quality of the model. For details, see the
Photogrammetry Details section.

1920
VXinspect Overview
The VXinspect module is the inspection software integrated in VXelements. This module provides tools
for dimensional inspection using Creaform metrology and measuring devices (HandyPROBE,
MetraSCAN 3D, HandySCAN 3D, MaxSHOT Next and Go!SCAN 3D) or a mesh file.

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

VXinspect|Analysis and VXinspect|Quality Control feature comparison

Feature VXinspect|Analysis VXinspect|Quality Control

Inspection using connected measuring

devices (excluding MaxSHOT Next)

Multiple mesh import

Multiple parts per session inspection

Mesh / CAD inspection

Mesh / Mesh inspection

Entity creation
(excluding pattern)

Color map creation

Different alignment for each entity

Alignment creation
(except target best fit)

DRF creation

GD&T creation

1921
 Feature VXinspect|Analysis VXinspect|Quality Control

Offline programming

Entity tools (filter, edit, group)

(excluding filter)

Export entity nominals, measurements

and color map

Report creation

NIST certification

VXinspect|Analysis main features

Intuitive creation of the inspection program

VXinspect|Analysis allows creating an inspection sequence by adding geometric entities, alignments,
and more. The inspection sequence must be created in the Navigation panel with the use of a mesh file.

Inspection process
VXinspect|Analysis is designed to create one inspection sequence per mesh.

Basic dimension
VXinspect|Analysis allows processing of basic dimensions.

Report creation
VXinspect|Analysis allows users to produce professional reporting in Excel output format (.xls).

VXinspect|Quality Control main features

Intuitive creation of the inspection program

VXinspect|Quality Control allows creating an inspection program by adding geometric entities, reference
frames, acquisition sequences, and more. The inspection program can be built entirely offline without a
measuring device connected, or built as the part is measured.

1922
Fully integrated scanning and probing processes
VXinspect|Quality Control is designed to work seamlessly with the Creaform technologies. All processes
are optimized to simplify the use of both probing and scanning Creaform measuring devices.

Multiple part inspection process

VXinspect|Quality Control is designed to ensure multiple part measurement in a single program. The
simple workflow creates and measures new parts with created inspection program.

Basic dimension and GD&T

VXinspect|Quality Control allows processing basic dimension and geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing (GD&T) following the ASME Y14.5-2009 standard.

Report creation
VXinspect|Quality Control produces professional reporting in Excel output format (.xls).

Input and output formats

See the File Types section.

Technical requirements
VXinspect has standard requirements for installation and usage.

1923
 Home Page

VXinspect|Analysis

Select VXinspect|Analysis in the Home page to import a mesh and or import a reference (CAD
or mesh).

VXinspect|Quality Control

Select VXinspect|Quality Control in the Home page to define the measurement method and
import a reference (mesh or CAD).
Alternatively, skip both options and go directly to the VXinspect|Quality Control interface by selecting

Icon Default measurement method

Mesh

Probing

Optical Probing

1924
VXinspect Interface

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar
Icon Function Action
Click the icon to show the active modules within the
Module selector
current session and select desired module to switch.

To create reference frames to align measurements to

Alignment
a reference.

DRF - Entities To create reference frames to align measurements to

DRF - Targets and a reference using datum features and/or targets.
Entities Reference frames are created based on the geometric
DRF - Targets counterpart concept.

To create entities in the inspection program and

Entities create dimensions from which entities can be added
to the report.

To create a color map to compare a mesh to a

Color map
reference.
To create entity annotations. When it is activated, click
Entity annotations
an entity in the 3D viewer to create an annotation.
To create deviation annotations. When it is activated,
Deviation
click scan data or probed points in the 3D viewer to
annotations
create a deviation annotation.

1925
Icon Function Action
To display the minimum and the maximum
Add min. max.
annotations of the entity or the color map selected in
annotations
the inspection program.

Close all annotations To close all created annotations in the 3D viewer.

To activate a grid of 3D deviation points with

annotations. Adjust the grid by zooming in or out or
Toggle color map
by enlarging or reducing the font of the values. To
grid
modify the font, go to Display | General Display |
Viewer font size.
Add a note that appears with the entities in the
Note
inspection program.
To copy annotations of the active part and active
Copy annotations
entity to all parts.

To create a snapshot item in the inspection program.

The captured image of the scene in the 3D viewer will
be displayed in the report.
Select Show in frontpage to display the snapshot on
the front page of the report.

The viewer alignment is used at

the moment of creation of the
snapshot. Changing the
Snapshot alignment of an entity will
update the measurements.

To adjust the dimension of an existing snapshot to

the actual viewer dimension, select the Fit to viewer
window check box.

The Fit to viewer window action

cannot be undone.

Report To generate an inspection report.

To create a new part to be measured by creating an

Add part
unmeasured copy of the inspection program.
When clicking this option, the changes made are
Update all parts automatically propagated to all parts in the active
session.
To launch the measurement of all the unmeasured
Measure all
items of the inspection program.

1926
 Icon Function Action
To launch the measurement of the selected items in
the inspection program. The selected items that were
previously measured are remeasured. If a mesh,
Measure selected
options including Import (a new) mesh,
Start (a new) scan or selecting an existing mesh in the
session will appear in the Navigation panel for
updating the mesh.
To clear the measurement of all the items in the
Clear all
inspection program.
To clear the measurement of the selected items in the
Clear selected
inspection program.

Accept To accept the measurement of the current item.

To accept the current item and to stop the

Stop
measurement.
Creates a new mesh in the inspection program.
Double-click the new mesh to access options
Add mesh
including: Import (a new) mesh, Start (a
new) scan or select an existing mesh in the session.

Delete To delete selected triangles from the active mesh.

Copy To copy selected triangles from the active mesh.

Cut To remove selected triangles from the active mesh.

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item in
the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Import functions

Click and select an option:

l C-Track positioning targets

l Mesh in VXmodel

1927
 l Mesh in VXinspect

l Optical measurement

l Tracking model

l Reference

l Inspection

l Probe database

Import features

To import a mesh in VXinspect|Quality Control

1. Click in the top menu.

2. Select Mesh in VXinspect|Quality Control.

3. Browse through the VXelements - Import Mesh dialog and select the files to import.

4. For multiple meshes, a dialog box will appear, "Do you want to create new parts to
inspect meshes?". Select either Inspect meshes in new parts or Keep meshes in unassigned
data.

5. Click Open.

The new mesh(es) will be available in the Navigation panel.

To import a mesh in VXinspect|Analysis

1. Click in the top menu.

2. Select Mesh in VXinspect|Analysis.

3. Browse through the VXelements - Import Mesh dialog and select the file(s) to import.

4. Click Open.

The new mesh(es) will be available in the Navigation panel.

1928
Export functions

Click and select an option:

l Scan positioning targets

l C-Track positioning targets

l Scan template

l Mesh

l Tracking model

l Tracking sequence

l Report

l Probe database

Export features

To export an alignment

1. Right-click the alignment under the Alignments node of the Navigation tree to export the
transformation matrix of an alignment as a text file (.txt).

2. Select Export selected alignment.

To export nominals and measurements of geometric entities

Right-click one or multiple entities in the Navigation tree and select Export selected nominals or Export
selected measurements.
Refer to VXelements file types for a list of export formats.

To export probed points

To export all the probed points of a part as a text file (.txt), right-click the part in the Parts node of the
Navigation tree and select Export probed points. All probed points of a part are exported in the same
file and are categorized by entity type. The text file generated contains:
Name: Name of the entity.

1929
 X, Y, Z: Position of the center ball tip of the probe.
I, J, K: Orientation of the probe.
Unit factor: Value allowing to determine in which unit the measurements were performed (Configure
| Options | VXelements
Tip radius: Radius of the probe tip.

To set the alignment used to export an entity

Specify the alignment to export the measurement in Inspection display | Viewer alignment.

Measurement entity type (counterpart or best fit)

l A measurement is saved as a counterpart entity if it is exported from a Datum Reference

Frame alignment.

l A measurement is saved as a best fit entity if it is not exported from a Datum Reference Frame
alignment (best fit, entities selection, etc).

l A measurement that is a datum, i.e. with a datum entity label, will be saved as a counterpart
entity when exported from any type of alignment.

To set the alignment used to export probed points

Specify the alignment to export the probed points in Inspection display | Viewer alignment.

Navigation panel
Use the Navigation panel to navigate between the components of a VXinspect session and perform
various actions.
Select a node to display its components and to get access to its details.

1930
 To show only the selected items in the 3D viewer

1. Select one or more items (entity, group, mesh, reference) in the tree
view of the Navigation panel.

2. Right-click and select Show only selected.

To show or hide expanding panels

1. Click X next to the panel you wish to hide.

2. Right-click the Navigation panel and click the name of the panel you
wish to hide or show.

3. Right-click in the Navigation panel or 3D viewer and click Show all

hidden panels.

4. Click View | Show all hidden panels in the Toolbar.

Alignment: This node contains alignment(s) which are used to define the part coordinate system.
Inspection program: This node contains the project information for every part to measure. Generate
the inspection report using the Report function. The contents of the program is also displayed in the
inspection program table.
Parts: Use this node to navigate between all parts of the project. Each part has its own detailed
information including its specific measured values.
Unassigned data: This node contains scanned data or optical measurement data which has not been
linked to an item or an alignment within the inspection program.
CAD model: This node shows the CAD model used for the inspection and performs various functions. It
is located under References.

Inspection program table

The inspection program table is located below the 3D viewer and is divided in 2 panes:
Program pane: Contains all items of the inspection program in the order of creation.
Dimension pane: Displays measurement values.

3D viewer

1931
The 3D viewer displays three-dimensional models and results in real-time. The manipulation of the
models are made through mouse controls.
Different tools are available in the mini-toolbar located in the upper-left corner of the viewer.

Contextual menu
The Contextual menu is available using right-click in the viewer.

Right-clicking an entity in the 3D viewer opens options for the entity. See
Navigation panel for list.

Shift key
The Shift key can be used to select more than one entities.

1. Holding the Shift key.

2. Move the mouse cursor in the 3D viewer. A + sign is displayed next to

the cursor meaning it is enabled.

+ click will add more than one entity to the current selection.

+ click a selected entity will deselect the entity.

A click will deselect any previous selection made to select an entity.

Elements displayed may vary depending on the node selected.

2D view

Click an entity in the navigation tree and click 2D view in the toolbar. The viewer will be oriented at
the normal of the entity. A grid is shown in the viewer.
Click the Display panel and access the viewer options under the Inspection display.
Use the Deviation vector multiplier to apply a scaling factor to the deviation vectors for better
visualization.

1932
Selection tools
The selection tool icons are displayed in the upper-left corner of the 3D viewer or alternatively they can
be accessed through the menu bar, under Tools | Selection.
Select a type of selection to access different tools.

Icon Function Action

To select nominal surface(s) and/or edge(s) on the
CAD model selection
active CAD model.
To select measured triangles on a measurement
Mesh selection
mesh.

CAD model selection tools

Icon Function Action

Select all To select all CAD surfaces.

Clear selection To clear the current selection of CAD surfaces.

To invert the current CAD surface selection;

unselected CAD surfaces will be selected.
Invert selection
Conversely, selected CAD surfaces will no longer be
part of the selection.

To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold

Rectangle selection Ctrl+click, and release it when the selection is
completed.

To create a free-form selection (lasso).

l For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl+click.

l For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold

Free form selection
the mouse left button.

l Once the selection is completed, right-click

to end it or release the Ctrl key.

Use this mode to select a single surface or a single

edge with one click. Hold the Ctrl key and click the
CAD selection
CAD surface or edge that is highlighted in yellow to
select it.

Mesh selection tools

1933
 * The selection tools featuring the selection tolerance (i.e. interactive flood fill
selection) allow to preview and interactively adjust the selection in the 3D viewer.

Rectangle selection

Free form selection

Brush selection

Connect

Sudden change*

Similar curvature*

Similar normal*

Isolated patches

Curvature selection*

Triangle picking

Select through

Select backface

Select all

Clear selection

Invert selection

Grow the selection

Shrink the selection

Display toolbar
The Display toolbar is located at the bottom on the 3D viewer and provides various display options for
the 3D viewer.
It includes options for the General display, the Mesh display, and the Inspection display.

1934
GD&T

Click to create GD&T controls and edit them by clicking .

Select the check box (es) in the first column to display the corresponding GD&T information in the
inspection report.

GD&T controls in VXinspect|Quality Control

Geometric characteristic Icon
Form
Straightness

Flatness

Circularity/Roundess

Cylindricity

Profile

Line profile

Surface profile

Orientation

Perpendicularity

Angularity

Parallelism

Location

Position1

Concentricity

Runout

Total runout

Concentricity control details

1Total permissible variation that a feature can have from its nominal position.

1935
When the Concentricity control is selected, the Straightness fit option is available.
Possible concentricities:

l Standard concentricity (the Straightness fit check box is cleared): as per the ASME standard.

l Straightness fit (the Straightness fit check box is selected): the smallest zone that includes the
datum and the controlled axes.

Concentricity example
Datum axis Controlled axis

Section view (measured axes are in red)

Datum axis Controlled axis

1936
Standard concentricity (the Straightness fit check box is cleared)

Straightness fit (the Straightness fit check box is selected)

1937
Modifiers

LMC

Least material condition (symbol: ) is a feature of size that describes a dimensional or size condition
where the least amount of material exists within its dimensional tolerance.

l For a hole or internal feature: LMC =Largest hole size (least material in
part).

l For a pin or external feature: LMC = Smallest size of the pin.

MMC

Maximum material condition (symbol: ) is a feature of size that describes a dimensional or size
condition where the maximum amount of material exists within its dimensional tolerance.

l For a hole or internal feature: MMC =Smallest hole size (maximum

material in part).

l For a pin or external feature: MMC = Largest size of the pin.

Translation

Use a translation modifier (TM, symbol: ) when it is necessary to indicate that the related
counterpart is unlocked. Its distance from the higher precedence counterpart therefore becomes
adjustable, so the related counterpart can translate to fully engage and make the maximum possible
contact with the datum feature surface.
TM in VXelements 7.0.3 and older
In previous VXelements versions, adjustable counterpart was applied, but not shown as the triangle
symbol in the feature control frame.
If importing a session created in VXelements 7.0.3 and older in VXelements 8.0.0, the deviation result
will not change.

1938
Session Feature control frame in Feature control frame in
Behavior
version VXelements 7.0.3 and older VXelements 8.0.0
7.0.3 and Adjustable
older counterpart

8.0.0 N/A Fixed counterpart

8.0.0 and Adjustable

N/A
above counterpart

When creating a new GD&T control, recent datum reference frames are displayed
for quick selection.

1939
Using VXinspect

VXinspect|Analysis

Probing and optical probing measurement methods are available only with
VXinspect|Quality Control.

Inspect using the mesh measurement method

1. On VXelements Home page, select VXinspect|Analysis.

2. Import a measurement mesh.

Import a reference CAD model or mesh (optional).

3. Create an inspection program:

1. Add a best fit alignment.

2. Add entities.

3. Add an alignment (optional).

4. Select measurements to be added to the report including distances, angles,

tolerances, and GD&T controls.

5. Add annotations ( and ).

6. Add snapshots ( ).

4. Export a report.

1. Edit the Project and Part Information.

2. Export the report.

VXinspect|Quality Control

To import inspection programs (.csf)

1940
With Creaform products attached

1. Go to File | Open session or, on VXelementsHome page, select Open session.

2. Double-click a recently opened file to open it.

Without any Creaform products attached

1. Go to File | Import | Inspection or click

2. Select Inspection .

Using the measurement method - Mesh

1. On VXelementsHome page, select VXinspect|Quality Control.

2. Select Mesh as the default measurement method.

3. Import a measurement mesh.

Import a reference CAD model or mesh (optional).

4. Create an inspection program.

1. Add a best fit alignment.

2. Add entities.

3. Add an alignment (if needed).

4. Select measurements to be added to the report including distances, angles,

tolerances, and GD&T controls.

5. Add annotations ( and ).

6. Add snapshots ( ).

1941
 5. Export a report.

1. Edit the Project and Part Information.

2. Export the report.

6. Click Add a part , if there are more than 1 part to measure.

Using measurement method - Probing

1. On VXelementsHome page, select VXinspect|Quality Control.

2. Select Probing as the default measurement method.

Import a reference CAD model or mesh (optional).

3. Create an inspection program.

1. Add entities.

2. Add an Alignment.

3. Select measurements to be added to the report including distances, angles,

tolerances, and GD&T controls.

4. Add annotations ( and ).

5. Add snapshots ( ).

4. Measure (e.g. Part 1).

1. Probe entities.

5. Export a report.

1. Edit the Project and Part Information.

2. Export the report.

6. Click Add a part , if there are more than 1 part to measure.

1942
Using measurement method - Optical probing

1. On VXelements Home page, select VXinspect|Quality Control.

2. Select Optical probing as the default measurement method.

3. Import an optical probing targets file.

Import a reference CAD model or mesh (optional).

4. Create an inspection program.

1. Add a target best fit alignment.

2. Add entities.

3. Add an alignment (optional).

4. Select measurements to be added to the report including distances, angles,

tolerances, and GD&T controls.

5. Add annotations ( and ).

6. Add snapshots ( ).

5. Export a report.

1. Edit the Project and Part Information.

2. Export the report.

6. Click Add a part , if there are more than 1 part to measure.

Quick add option: VXinspect provides automatic detection of the part nominal.
Once the physical part and the CAD model are aligned together, it is possible to
select the entity nominal with the HandyPROBE Next probe. Upon selection, it will
create the nominal component and launch the measure. This mode is enabled at all
times. For details, see the VXinspect Smart Control section.

1943
VXinspect Inspection Program Table

The inspection program table is available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

The inspection program table is located below the 3D viewer. To show the table in a different window,
click at the top right of the table.
The program table provides information on inspection items in their order of creation and is divided in 2
panes:

l Program pane, at the left of the table.

l Dimension pane, at the right. Content in this pane appears when clicking an entity in the
inspection program.

Program table features

Active part
Use the drop-down list at the top left of the table to select the active part (multiple part inspection).

Toolbar
Use the filters located at the top of the table to organize the inspection items.

Icon Action

To filter by measurement state.

To filter by entity type.

To filter by alignment.

To filter by measurement method.

To filter by visibility.

To reset all filters.

Use the tools located at the top of the table to edit, group, or delete the inspection items.

1944
 Icon Action

To edit the selected item(s).

To create a group containing the selected item(s).

To delete the selected item(s).

Alignments
The alignments are listed in their order of creation.

l Right-click an alignment to Edit, Duplicate, Export, Rename or Delete the alignment.

l Right-click an alignment to Assign the alignment to all entities.

The measurement state of the alignments is displayed at the left of the alignment icon.

Inspection program
If used, mesh data or scan data is displayed at the top of the inspection program.
The inspection program contains the information related to the created items, from left to right:

Measurement state
Indicator State

Measured and reported dimensions inside tolerances or no reported dimensions.

Measured and reported dimensions out of tolerance.

Measured and reported dimensions without nominal.

Unmeasured.

Measured with invalid reference frame.

Unmeasured because it contains an error.

1945
Created items
The created items added to the inspection program are represented by an icon. The items are listed in
their order of creation.

Click an item and hold to move it up or down in the inspection program.

Icon Item type

Entities

Color map

Snapshot

Mesh

Scan acquisition

Group of entities

Assigned alignment
The alignment assigned to each item is displayed next to the corresponding item.

Measurement method

1946
 Icon Method

Probe

Mesh

Edges

Constructed

Manual

Cross-section

Optical probing

Item visibility
Icon Visibility

The item is visible.

The item is not visible.

The item is not visible but an item related to this item (child) is visible.

Contextual menu features

Right-click items in the Inspection program table to access the Contextual Menu.

Dimension pane features

Click an entity in the Program pane to display its measurement values in the Dimension pane.

Show in report

Under column, select items to be included in the report.

1947
Measurement state
See the Measurement state section.

Dimension
Name of the control. Includes orientation (I, J, K), position (X, Y, Z), ±, and GD&T in accordance with the
type of entity.

Tolerance
Range of variation defining the limits permitted in maintaining the nominal dimension.

Nominal
Target value of the dimension set by the reference CAD or mesh, or set manually.

Measured
Value of the dimension calculated using least squares or counterpart methods.

Deviation
Calculated difference between measured and nominal values.

Tendency
The tendency bar is a visual representation of the deviation within the tolerance range.

Example:

Tolerance +0/+0.100 mm

Nominal 10.000 mm

Measured 10.025 mm

1948
 Tendency bar

Out of tolerance
Value exceeding the given tolerance limits.

1949
References
It is possible to import a CAD or mesh for a reference into VXelements in .igs, .iges, .stp, .stl, .obj, or .cs

file format by clicking . After importing a reference, a References node appears in the Navigation
tree.

In VXinspect, references can also be imported from a saved session. Choosing .csf
files from the Import reference dialog box will load the references from the selected
session into the active session.

CAD reference
Mesh reference

1950
CAD Reference

It is possible to import CAD models into VXelements in .igs, .iges or .stp file format by clicking .
After importing a reference, a References node appears in the Navigation tree.

In VXinspect, references can also be imported from a saved session. Choosing .csf
files from the Import reference dialog box will load the references from the selected
session into the active session.

Toolbar available functions

Icon Function Description

Relocate CAD (s) coordinate system by clicking and dragging the

rings (for Angle) and arrows (for Offset) in the 3D viewer or by
manually inputting values in the Details pane. Click OK to finalize

the CAD's new position. Set constraints or flip its orientation ( )

Move CAD
from the Constraint dropdown. Reset to initial position moves the
CAD(s) back to the original position. If a CAD has been previously
moved using the Move CAD function, the CAD's coordinate system
will start where the previous Move CAD moved it previously, not the
initial position.

This allows inverting the selected surface orientation on a

CAD surface.
Flip CAD surface
Dark gray surfaces represent back face.

This allows deleting surfaces selected with the selection tools. Once
Delete
CAD surfaces a surface is deleted, a new node (Deleted CAD Entities) is created
under the CAD node. This surface goes under the new node.

This allows restoring deleted CAD surfaces. Expanding the CAD

node in the Navigation tree will give access to the deleted surfaces.
Restore Once selected, appears in the main toolbar. By selecting

surfaces in the 3D viewer and clicking , the selected surfaces will

be restored to the CAD.

This makes ensuring continuity between the normals of the CAD

Repair CAD
surfaces possible.

1951
 Icon Function Description

Pick target This function allows picking virtual targets on the CAD model where
Pick swivel target they are placed on the physical part.

Clear picked targets This function clears all the targets from the CAD model.

This performs a pre-alignment using the targets picked on CAD and

targets seen by the C-Track. It positions the CAD model and the C-
Auto. align Track in the 3D viewer in the same relative position they are
physically. It also launches the Detect targets mode and the C-Track
mode.

Selection tools

Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar displayed in the 3D viewer. For details, see the
Selection Tools section.

1952
Mesh Reference
It is possible to import a mesh for a reference into VXelements in .stl, .obj, or .cs file format by clicking

. After importing a reference, a References node appears in the Navigation tree.

In VXinspect, references can also be imported from a saved session. Choosing .csf
files from the Import reference dialog box will load the references from the selected
session into the active session.

Toolbar available functions

Icon Function Description

To delete the triangles of a selected area. First, select the mesh under
Delete the VXmodel node and select the triangles to be deleted. For details,
see the Selection Tools section.
To copy selected triangles from the active mesh and create a new
Copy mesh out of the selection. First, select the area of the mesh that
needs to be copied and click the icon.
To remove selected triangles from the active mesh and create a new
Cut mesh out of the selection. First, select the area of the mesh that
needs to be cut and click the icon.

Selection tools

Selection tools are available through the mini toolbar displayed in the 3D viewer. For details, see the
Selection Tools section.

1953
Inspection Alignment
Tools | Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

The Alignment menu provides alignment creation tools. Each tool is available through the menu bar or
toolbar.
Use these tools to align the measurements with the nominal values. It creates the transformation matrix,
bringing the measurements on the nominal values.
Surface best fit
Point selection
Entity selection
Target best fit
RPS alignment
Manual alignment
Import alignment

To export the transformation matrix of an alignment as a text file (.txt), right-click

the alignment in the navigation tree and select Export selected alignment.

1954
Surface Best Fit Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Surface best fit

This alignment generates a best fit between the scanned data and either CAD data or another scanned
data.

Mobile
Select a mesh to align on the nominal:

l Use the mesh available in the project tree, if there is.

l Create a new scan, if you want to scan into VXinspect.

l Create a new unselected scan, if you want to add a mesh later during the inspection.

Fixed
Select the reference data on which the mobile scan data will be aligned:
Whole CAD: All the CAD surfaces will be used to calculate the best fit alignment.
Pick on CAD*: Only some CAD surfaces will be used to calculate the best fit alignment. Click CAD
surfaces to select them.

* To allow the best fit calculations, the selected surfaces must ideally have different
orientations.

Pre-alignment mode
None: No pre- alignment used. This method is used when the scan is initially pre- aligned with the
reference at the moment of import. It is useful when scanning two meshes using the same positioning
targets.

1955
Manual: Pre-alignment using points pair. Click at least 3 similar positions on the mesh and on the
nominal object.
Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing alignment to pre-align the reference and the mesh.
Automatic: Default mode. Automatic pre-alignment of the mesh and CAD model. Following the pre-
alignment, the surface best-fit will automatically be calculated.

If the surface best fit calculated during an automatic pre-alignment is not

satisfying, click Measure selected. Click Reset in the Calculation Filter Parameters
section of the Navigation panel, proceed to a manual pre-alignment, then click
Accept.

Calculation filter parameters

To set the mesh data selection considered in the algorithm. After the initial alignment, the mesh data
with a deviation higher than these values will be discarded for the final alignment:
Maximum distance: Maximum distance from the triangles to the nominal surface of the entity.
Maximum angle: Maximum angle (°) from the triangle normal to the closest nominal normal surface of
the entity.
Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of iterations for the algorithm to compute the best
solution possible.

Constraints
It is possible to apply constraints to the best fit method and to specify which entity or degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment.
None: No constraint is applied; a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh.
Unconstrained rotations and translations will be best fitted.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

Best fit measurement method

If using the Manual Pre-alignment mode, the 3D viewer will split in two. The left side will show the
scan data from the scan source and the right side will show the reference. Once at least 1 point has been
selected on both the scan data and the reference, a preview of the pre-alignment will be displayed on
the left side. If less than 3 points are selected, both the data and the CAD 3D viewer orientation are taken

1956
in consideration to perform the pre-alignment.
The left pane displays the Surface best fit Calculation filter parameters.

To perform a surface best fit with manual pre-alignment

1. Launch the Surface best fit measurement function.

2. Orient the data and CAD the same direction in the 3D viewer (orientation is used for pre-
alignment when less than 3 corresponding points are selected).

3. Select (Ctrl + click) at least 1 point on scan data (left side).

4. Select the corresponding point(s) (Ctrl + click) on the CAD (right side).

To clear the points, click Reset.

5. Click Align to perform the alignment.

6. Verify that the alignment is acceptable.

l Select Reset or Clear to go back in the point selection mode.

l Select Accept to accept the alignment and move to the next entity to measure (if
applicable).

l Select Stop to accept the alignment and stop the measurements.

Toolbar display
Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

1957
Point Selection Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Point selection

This function allows an alignment based on point entities.
A best fit of the selected points is performed. At least 3 points must be selected.

Construction
Select the point entities from the list.

Selection
Display the XYZ position and deviation for every point selected.
Select Show points in report to display the alignment in the report.

Constraints
It is possible to apply constraints to the best-fit method and to specify which entity and degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment:
None: No constraint is applied, a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will prioritize the selected entities during the alignment.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart

1958
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

1959
Entity Selection Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Entity selection

This function uses existing entities to align the measurements following the priority concept.
Translations and rotations must be fully constrained for the reference frame to be created.

Use nominal coordinate system

Check box selected: To use the native CAD coordinate system origin.
Check box cleared: To define a new CAD coordinate system origin using entities and constraints.

The new coordinate system will then be available into alignments and entities as
well as in the GD&T pane of every entity.

Construction
This section allows selecting items available to construct the alignment.
Entity: Select the entities to use to build the reference frame.
Constraint: This section displays a live preview of unconstrained rotations and translations (which are
not constrained by the selected entities).

1960
Target Best Fit Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Target best fit

This function generates a best fit to a CAD model using an optical measurement such as positioning
targets or optical reflectors.
If the alignment fails, an error message will be displayed, "Max. number of iterations reached..." Try using
a different configuration or settings to achieved an effective alignment.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or optical
reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added in
the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target best
fit alignment.

Pre-alignment mode
Select the pre-alignment method:
None: No pre-alignment.
Manual: Pre-alignment using point pair.
Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing reference frame.

Calculation filter parameters

1961
Maximum distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal target point to the triangles mesh
data.
Maximum angle: Maximum search angle from the nominal target point to the triangles mesh data.
Maximum number of iterations: Set the maximum number of iterations for the algorithm to compute
the best solution possible. Max. distance and max. angle will be recalculated at each iteration.

1962
RPS Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | RPS alignment

This function aligns the mesh using entity center points and specific constraints and weight. It is typically
used for alignment using tooling balls on an inspection jig.

To add a RPS alignment

1. Select entities in the RPS Alignment pane using the check boxes.

2. In the constraints table, select the coordinates (X, Y, Z) to constrain each center point using
the check boxes.

3. Set the entity weight under the weight column.

Entity weight ratio =

The point errors are shown under the Point errors pane. The 6 DOFs must be fully
constrained for the point errors table to appear. Select the Show in report check
box to display this information in the inspection report.

4. Click OK.

1963
Manual Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Manual alignment

This function aligns the mesh from its current (active) alignment by entering values in Text boxes or
directly with the 3D manipulator.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

To add a manual alignment

Method 1

1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Create and apply constraint(s) (optional).1

3. Use the 3D manipulator to modify mesh translations or rotations to the X, Y and Z

coordinate system.

4. Click OK.

Method 2

1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Create and apply constraint(s) (optional).1

3. Set numerical values for mesh translations and/or rotations.

4. Click OK.

1 Constraint(s) and displacement(s) are apply to measured data only.

Use Reset to set the values to zero.

1964
Import alignment

Tools | Alignment | Import alignment

Aligns the selected mesh(es) from either a (.txt) file or an alignment in another open session.

To import alignment
1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Click Import alignment from file.

3. Browse and open a previous saved alignment (.txt file).

4. Select Invert pose option to invert the alignment. The alignment information will be
updated in real time.

5. Click OK.

1965
Datum Reference Frame - Entities

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

The Datum Reference Frame (DRF) function aligns the measurements to a reference using the geometric
counterpart concept when using the ASME Y14.5 standard and the least squares concept when
ISO GPS is in use.
The alignment will be performed using existing entities only. The selection order for entities is very
important because it affects the alignment calculation order.

Before creating a datum reference frame using entities, they must have been
created previously.

To create a DRF using entities

1. Click DRF.

2. Select Entities.

3. Select the Results coordinate system using the drop-down list (if applicable). This refers to
the position of the origin after the alignment. By default, the final position of the origin is
the one from the nominal part (CAD model or other scanned data). The coordinate system
can, beforehand, be repositioned through the alignment entity selection.

4. Assign datum entities to Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary datums using the corresponding
drop-down lists. Add a modifier using the drop-down list next to the corresponding datum
entity (if applicable).

Use a translation modifier (TM, symbol: ) when it is necessary to indicate that the related
counterpart is unlocked. Its distance from the higher precedence counterpart therefore
becomes adjustable, so the related counterpart can translate to fully engage and make the
maximum possible contact with the datum feature surface.
When creating a DRF using entities and adding a TM to the DRF, the TM is applied to the
constructed entities and cannot be removed. Since there is no measured data for a
constructed entity, the fixed counterpart cannot be calculated, therefore the TM is applied to
the entity and cannot be removed.

1966
Datum Reference Frame - Targets and
Entities

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

The Datum Reference Frame (DRF) function aligns the measurements to a reference using the geometric
counterpart concept.
The alignment will be performed using existing entities and datum targets directly picked on the
nominal part. The selection order for entities and targets is very important because it affects the
alignment calculation order.

Before creating a datum reference frame using entities, they must have been
created previously.

To create a DRF using targets and entities

1. Click DRF.

2. Select Targets and Entities.

3. Select the Target measurement method.

4. Select the Measurement mesh.

5. Select the Pre-alignment mode:

l None: No pre-alignment used.

l Manual: Pre-alignment using point pair. Default mode.

l Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing reference frame.

l Automatic: Automatic pre-alignment of the reference.

6. Select the Results coordinate system using the drop-down list.

7. Set the Calculation filter parameters which set up the parameters of the points considered
in the algorithms. After the initial alignment, all the points with a deviation higher than
these values will be discarded from the final alignment.

1967
 l Target radius: Diameter within which the target points will be considered close
enough to the nominal values when creating the alignment.

l Maximum distance: Maximum distance from the triangles to the nominal surface
of the entity.

l Maximum angle: Maximum angle (°) from the triangles to the normal of the
closest nominal surface of the entity.

l Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of iterations for the

algorithm to compute the best solution possible.

8. Assign datum entities to Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary datums or create datum targets.
To create datum targets, hold Ctrl key and click the part surfaces. As soon as the normal
orientation between the targets significantly changes, the targets are associated to a new
datum letter.

Pick constraints on CAD surface

The default behavior of the target points is to find out the closest CAD surface for calculation.
If the CAD surface solution does not meet expectations, it is possible to restraint the CAD surface
solutions by assigning surfaces to an individual datum target points. The selected surfaces will be used
for the alignment of each datum target.
To do so, the datum targets must be done previously.

1. Click of a datum target in the table.

2. In the 3D viewer, select the CAD surface(s) to be assigned to it.

3. Click again to apply the selection.

To export the measured values of the datum target points in the inspection report,
select Show in report in the Selection pane.

When measuring datum targets with the probe, the interface will change, the 3D
viewer will be in a split screen mode:

l The right side will show the CAD and the nominal points.

l The left side will show the probe and the probed points.

1968
 Once the first 3 points are probed, the 3D viewer will go back to single screen
mode with the probe and the CAD overlaying each other.

When measuring datum targets with the mesh method and manual pre-aligment
mode, the 3D viewer will show a split screen mode:

l The right side will show the reference datum targets previously defined.

l On the left side, pick to match the measured area with reference targets
that are displayed on the right side.

Once at least 1 point has been picked on both the scan data and the reference, a
preview of the pre-alignment will be displayed on the left side. If less than 3 points
are picked, both the data and the CAD 3D viewer orientation are taken in
consideration to perform the pre-alignment.

To perform a datum reference frame measurement with datum targets:

1. Select an existing alignment to be measured.

2. Click Measure selected to launch the measurement process.

3. Probe again the points out of the target radius defined in the calculation filter parameters
pane. The points to measure will be automatically detected when the probe tip is at
proximity.

4. Verify if the alignment is acceptable and perform the next action using the appropriate
measurement functions button.

Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

1969
Datum Reference Frame - Targets

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

This Datum Reference Frame (DRF) function aligns the measurements to a reference using the geometric
counterpart concept.
The alignment will be performed using only datum targets directly picked on the nominal part. The
selection order for the targets is very important because it affects the alignment calculation order.

To create a DRF using targets

1. Click DRF.

2. Select Targets.

3. Select the Target measurement method.

4. Select the Measurement mesh.

5. Select the Pre-alignment mode.

l None: No pre-alignment is used.

l Manual: Pre-alignment using point pair. Default mode.

l Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing reference frame.

l Automatic: Automatic pre-alignment of the reference model.

6. Select the Results coordinate system using the drop-down list.

7. Set the Calculation filter parameters which set up the parameters of the points considered
in the algorithms. After the initial alignment, all the points with a deviation higher than
these values will be discarded from the final alignment.

l Target radius: Diameter within which the target points will be considered close
enough to the nominal values when creating the alignment.

l Maximum distance: Maximum distance from the triangles to the nominal surface
of the entity.

1970
 l Maximum angle: Maximum angle (°) from the triangles to the normal of the
closest nominal surface of the entity.

l Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of iterations for the

algorithm to compute the best solution possible.

8. Assign datum entities to Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary datums or create datum targets.
To create datum targets, hold Ctrl key and click the part surfaces. As soon as the normal
orientation between the targets significantly changes, the targets are associated to a new
datum letter.

Pick constraints on CAD surface

The default behavior of the target points is to find out the closest CAD surface for calculation.
If the CAD surface solution does not meet expectations, it is possible to restraint the CAD surface
solutions by assigning surfaces to an individual datum target points. The selected surfaces will be used
for the alignment of each datum target.
To do so, the datum targets must be done previously.

1. Click of a datum target in the table.

2. In the 3D viewer, select the CAD surface(s) to be assigned to it.

3. Click again to apply the selection.

To export the measured values of the datum target points in the inspection report,
select Show in report in the Selection pane.

When measuring datum targets with the probe, the interface will change, the 3D
viewer will be in a split screen mode:

l The right side will show the CAD and the nominal points.

l The left side will show the probe and the probed points.

Once the first 3 points are probed, the 3D viewer will go back to single screen
mode with the probe and the CAD overlaying each other.

When measuring datum targets with the mesh method and manual pre-aligment
mode, the 3D viewer will show a split screen mode:

1971
 l The right side will show the reference datum targets previously defined.

l On the left side, pick to match the measured area with reference targets
that are displayed on the right side.

Once at least 1 point has been picked on both the scan data and the reference, a
preview of the pre-alignment will be displayed on the left side. If less than 3 points
are picked, both the data and the CAD 3D viewer orientation are taken in
consideration to perform the pre-alignment.

To perform a datum reference frame measurement with datum targets:

1. Select an existing alignment to be measured.

2. Click Measure selected to launch the measurement process.

3. Probe again the points out of the target radius defined in the calculation filter parameters
pane. The points to measure will be automatically detected when the probe tip is at
proximity.

4. Verify if the alignment is acceptable and perform the next action using the appropriate
measurement functions button.

Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

1972
 Inspection Entities

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities
The Entities menu provides tools for entity creation which are available through the menu bar or the
toolbar.

It is possible to create an entity by selecting a portion of mesh with the selection tools and then
selecting an entity through the menu bar or the toolbar.

Select CAD faces (with the Ctrl key) before launching an entity creation. This filters
the entity type that can be created, based on the selection. Then right-click in the
3D viewer to create the entity.
Double-clicking an entity will allow its values to be edited.

Point
Plane
Line
Cylinder
Circle
Sphere
Slot
Cone
Rectangle

Surface
Slab
2D curve
3D curve
Cross-section

Pattern
Quick entities
Comparison points

1973
Distance
Caliper
Angle

1974
Inspection Entities | Point

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Point

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

1975
 Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Compensation direction
Set the probe direction compensation:

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Measurement method Edges

This method is available when having a CAD reference.

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

1976
 (Edges): Hold Ctrl and click to select an edge in the 3D viewer.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Data availability on 1 or 2 faces does not change the automatic selection parameters, but has an
impact on the calculation filter parameters.
Mesh data from 2 faces

Mesh data from 1 face

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

1977
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Edge length [2]: Maximum search distance along the edge of the nominal reference of the entity to
the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

Mesh data from 2 faces

The adjacent surface selection to the constraining surface will be projected onto the constraining
surface. An edge (polyline) will be calculated.

Mesh data from 1 face

Since there is no adjacent surface to project onto the constraining surface, mesh vertices on the edges
will be used to calculate the edge (polyline).

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

1978
 Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

1979
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

1980
 Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Radius [3]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh data.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

1981
Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Nominal mesh
Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

1982
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Construction

Construction method
Two-line intersection: Create a point using 2 intersecting lines.

Three-plane intersection: Create a point using 3 intersecting planes.

1983
Line-plane intersection: Create a point by intersecting a line with a plane. Example: the axis of a
cylinder intersecting with its top plane provides the center of the cylinder top circle.

Point projected on plane: Create a point by projecting a point onto a plane.

Point projected on line: Create a point by projecting a point onto a line.

Extract from existing entity: Create a point by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a point from a circle will get the center of the circle).

Line-circle intersection

1984
: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a circle's perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select circle: Select an existing circle or Create a new circle.

Line-cylinder intersection
: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a cylinder's perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select cylinder: Select an existing cylinder or Create a new cylinder.

Average point selection: Create a point by averaging the coordinates of 2 or more points.

1985
Measurement method Cross-section
Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

1986
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Edges: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding edge(s) features on the CAD displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Compensation direction
Set the probe direction compensation:

1987
 l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l CAD surface at nominal point: The compensation direction is opposite to the direction of the
normal CAD surface at nominal position.

l CAD surface at measured point: The compensation direction is opposite to the direction of the
normal CAD surface at measured point position.

l From existing axis

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

1988
Dimensions
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.

1989
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

1990
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

1991
Inspection Entities | Plane

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Plane

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

1992
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting Orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation Axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Probing parameters

1993
 Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

1994
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

: Allows extracting values from existing entities.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting Orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation Axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.

1995
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.

1996
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

1997
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment

1998
 In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the
report. To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

1999
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

allows extracting values from existing entities.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: set the center of the plane.
Starting orientation: select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation axis: select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Construction

2000
Construction method

Plane offset: Create a plane by offsetting a specific distance from an existing plane. The plane is offset
in the direction of the plane normal.

Plane offset through a point: Create a plane by offsetting a plane through an existing point and
maintaining the orientation of the point.

Point and normal line: Create a plane centered on a point, using a line as the plane normal.

l The plane is perpendicular to the line.

l Offset the constructed plane through the point.

Average point selection: Create a best-fit plane using at least 3 points.

Average plane: Create a plane by averaging the centroid position and the normal vector orientation
of the reference planes.

2001
 Middle plane: Create a plane at the middle angle of 2 planes.

Point and coplanar line: Create a plane using a selected point and a line. The resulting plane is
coincident with the line and the point.

The line can also be either be a cone or cylinder axis or a plane normal.

Measurement method Optical probing

Optical probing: Use positioning targets acquired by the C- Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the
HandySCAN 3D to measure an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2002
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2003
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

2004
 l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane

Nominal

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

If only a part of the mesh is symmetric, it is important to make the selection in

order to extract the best symmetry plane.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2005
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

If only a part of the mesh is symmetric, it is important to make the selection in

order to extract the best symmetry plane.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Construction
Select plane: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, or Draw (a) line.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.

2006
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured normal of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal normal of the entity.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the

2007
 ± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2008
Inspection Entities | Line

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Line

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2009
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2010
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

2011
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2012
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2013
 Legend

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraining plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2014
 Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: To set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the
calculated entities.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2015
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.

2016
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.

2017
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

2018
 Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the fitted entity than the set value.

2019
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

2020
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2021
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2022
Construction

Construction method
Two-plane intersection: Create a line by intersecting 2 planes.

Line projected on plane: Create a line by projecting a line onto a plane.

Extract from existing entity: Create a line by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a line from a cylinder will get the axis of the cylinder).

Average point selection: Create a line by connecting 2 or more points.

Average line: Construct a line by averaging the location and the orientation of selected lines.

Middle line: Construct a bisector line at intersection of selected lines.

2023
 Point and orientation: Starting from a selected point, construct a line parallel to a selected plane
normal.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2024
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

2025
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2026
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

2027
 Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to

2028
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.

2029
 Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2030
Inspection Entities | Cylinder

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Cylinder

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

2031
Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points

2032
 Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2033
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2034
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2035
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2036
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

2037
Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2038
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2039
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Construction
Line: Create a cylinder centered and oriented on the selected line with a specified diameter and height.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2040
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2041
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

2042
 Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

The X1, Y1, and Z1 refer to the tail of the nominal or measured axis of the entity
and the X2, Y2, and Z2 refer to the head of the nominal or measured axis of the
entity.

2043
Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2044
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2045
Inspection Entities | Circle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Circle

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2046
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Calculation filter parameters

2047
Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2048
 l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2049
Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2050
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2051
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2052
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2053
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

2054
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

2055
 Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2056
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Adjust the coordinates of the nominal center.
Diameter: Select to manually enter the circle nominal diameter.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2057
 A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Selection
Shows coordinates of selected points.
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal

2058
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Orient the circle in the direction of a chosen coordinate point. allows extracting
values from existing entities.

2059
Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Construction

Construction method
Center and orientation: Construct a circle from a point or an entity center. The circle normal is
defined from the orientation of a line or a normal. The diameter value is set manually.

Plane-cylinder intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cylinder.

Plane-sphere intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a sphere.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D viewer,
or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select sphere: Select a preexisting sphere or Create (a) new sphere.

2060
 Plane-cone intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cone.

Average point selection: Construct a circle using selected points to create a best-fit circle. Need at
least three points.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2061
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the cross-section. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

2062
 Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

2063
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.

2064
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

2065
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

2066
 If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2067
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2068
Inspection Entities | Sphere

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Sphere

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2069
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere.

: Allows extracting values from existing entities.

Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.

2070
 Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

2071
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2072
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2073
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2074
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2075
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2076
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Point: Create a sphere centered on the selected point with a set diameter.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:

2077
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Probing parameters

2078
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error Distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart

2079
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2080
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2081
Inspection Entities | Slot

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Slot

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2082
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.

2083
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Two points: Select the check box to choose the 2 points to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

2084
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

2085
 None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

2086
Automatic selection parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2087
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

2088
 If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2089
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2090
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

2091
 Calculation filter parameters
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2092
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2093
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2094
Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction

2095
 1. Center: Select an entity to set the XYZ coordinates origin.

2. Normal: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the normal direction.

3. Starting orientation: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the starting
orientation.

4. Angle: Set the rotation angle value of the main axis against the starting orientation
around the normal axis defined.

5. Length: Set the length value of the entity.

6. Width: Set the width value of the entity.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2096
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

2097
Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

2098
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.

2099
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.

2100
 Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Two points: Select the check box to choose only 2 points to probe.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Enter manually the length of the slot.
Width: Enter manually the width of the slot.

2101
Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

2102
 Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.

When adding a true position GD&T control, set the Directional zone: Length or

Width . The corresponding symbol(s) will appear in the GD&T pane and the
Dimension pane of the inspection program table.

For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

2103
Apply parameters to all parts
Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2104
Inspection Entities | Cone

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Cone

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2105
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

2106
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2107
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2108
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2109
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2110
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions

2111
 Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2112
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction - Construction method

Base and height

Create a cone using the base entity diameter (circle) and the cone height values.
Angle definition: Select between Half angle or Top diameter option and set the values.

l Half angle

1. Base: Base entity with diameter (circle)

2. Height: Cone height

3. Half angle: Cone half angle

2113
 l Top diameter

1. Base: Base entity with diameter (circle)

2. Height: Cone height

3. Top diameter: Cone top diameter

Two points and base diameter

Create a cone using two points and base diameter values.
Angle definition: Select between Half angle or Top diameter option and set the values.

l Half angle

1. Base point: Base entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

2. Base diameter: Cone diameter at base point

3. Top point: Top entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

4. Half angle: Cone half angle

l Top diameter

2114
 1. Base point: Base entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

2. Base diameter: Cone diameter at base point

3. Top point: Top entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

4. Top diameter: Cone top diameter

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2115
Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2116
 Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

The X1, Y1 and Z1 refer to the tail of the nominal or measured axis of the entity and
the X2, Y2 and Z2 refer to the head of the nominal or measured axis of the entity.

2117
Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2118
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2119
Inspection Entities | Rectangle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Rectangle

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2120
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

2121
Calculation filter parameters
Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2122
 l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2123
Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2124
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2125
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2126
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2127
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

2128
 Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2129
 Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2130
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2131
 Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

2132
 Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity
nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2133
 Construction

1. Center: Select an entity to set the XYZ coordinates origin.

2. Normal: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the normal direction.

3. Starting orientation: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the starting
orientation.

4. Angle: Set the rotation angle value of the main axis against the starting orientation
around the normal axis defined.

5. Length: Set the length value of the entity.

6. Width: Set the width value of the entity.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2134
 Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

2135
 Calculation filter parameters
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.

2136
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

2137
Automatic selection parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.

2138
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Enter manually the length of the rectangle.
Width: Enter manually the width of the rectangle.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named

2139
 Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

2140
 Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.

When adding a true position GD&T control, set the Directional zone: Length or

Width . The corresponding symbol(s) will appear in the GD&T pane and the
Dimension pane of the inspection program table.

For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

2141
Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2142
Inspection Entities | Surface

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Surface

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2143
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
probed data points..

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from
which the triangles will be extracted.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

2144
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2145
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

2146
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Point selection: Measure a surface by selecting existing surface points.

Calculation filter parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.

Selection
Show (selected check box) or hide (cleared check box) each measured point with the entity in the
report.

2147
Measurement method Optical probing
Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2148
 Max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangles mesh data.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the surface.
Max: Maximum deviation of the surface.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in

2149
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.

2150
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2151
Add a Slab

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Slab

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Alignment
Select an alignment from the drop-down list.

Plane entities - How to create a slab

Lists all planes from which a slab can be created.
To create a slab:

1. Select desired planes from the list of existing planes. Hovering over the plane on the list
highlights it in the 3D viewer. Selecting the plane creates a preview of the slab in the 3D
viewer.

2. Adjust dimensions and GD&T values if desired.

3. Click OK.

Hovering over particular sections of a CAD in the 3D viewer will highlight an

area where a new Plane can be created to form the basis of a new slab.
Clicking a highlighted portion of mesh will open the Plane panel. Adjust
values for the new plane if desired, and then click OK. This new plane will
automatically be chosen in the Slab panel.

2152
Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

2153
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

2154
Inspection Entities | 2D curve

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | 2D curve

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraint plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Curve max. distance: Sets the maximum distance from the probed points to the nominal curve.
Constraining plane

2155
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:
Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus orientation on
the first point probed.
None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2156
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.
Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the
triangles will be extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2157
 Legend

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2158
 Calculated entity

Curve max. distance [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge thickness [4]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [5]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [6]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the calculated entities.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ based
on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2159
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.

2160
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

2161
 Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:
Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus orientation on
the first point probed.
None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the 2D curve.
Max: Maximum deviation of the 2D curve.

2162
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.

2163
 Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2164
Inspection Entities | 3D curve

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | 3D curve

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.
Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the
triangles will be extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2165
 Legend

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

2166
 Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Curve max. distance [2]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. deviation [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [4]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the calculated entities.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the 3D curve.
Max: Maximum deviation of the 3D curve.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The checked values will be displayed in the inspection report generation.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…

2167
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control
in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect
the Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the
colored boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will
adjust accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of
the ± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the
boundaries will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.

2168
 Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new
alignment is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity
creation and color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2169
Inspection Entities | Cross-section

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Cross-section

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Nominal

(Whole CAD): When a CAD is available, all the surfaces will be used.

(Whole mesh): All the triangles of the nominal mesh will be used.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

CAD models

2170
Select CAD models from the list.

Creation parameters

Building mode

Linear
Select or create a plane to create cross-section(s) along a direction set by the orientation of the plane.
Use Offset to apply a linear spacing from the existing plane to the first section plane.

l
Type: (Single) , (Multiple), or (Whole mesh).

l Initial plane: Defines cross-section location and orientation from the plane. Select an existing
plane, create a new plane, draw a line in the 3D viewer (Ctrl + click + drag), or pick 3 vertices
(Ctrl + click).

l
Offset (mm): The value that offsets the selected cross-section (with (Single) or

(Multiple) types).

l
Count: Number of cross-sections required (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

l
Spacing (mm): Distance between 2 cross-sections (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh)

types).

Deviation vector max. distance: Maximum search distance from the reference to the mesh data on
which deviation will be calculated.

Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center
by clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

2171
Radial
Select or create a rotation axis and an initial plane through which cross-section(s) are created. Use
Offset to apply angular spacing from the initial plane to the first section plane.
Type

l
Type: (Single), (Multiple), or (Whole mesh).

l Rotation axis: Defines cross-section location and orientation from an existing axis. Select
from a list of existing entities, create a new line or create line from 2 vertices (Ctrl + click in 3D
viewer).

l Initial plane: Allows selecting the starting location of the first cross-section. Select an existing
plane, create a new plane, draw a line in the 3D viewer (Ctrl + click + drag), or Create a plane
by rotation axis and vertex (adjust plane in the 3D viewer).

l
Offset (°): The angle value that offsets the selected cross-section (with (Single) or

(Multiple) types).

l
Count: Number of cross-sections required (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

l
Spacing (°): Angle between 2 cross-sections (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

Deviation vector max. distance: Maximum search distance from the reference to the mesh data on
which deviation will be calculated.

2172
 Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center
by clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

Multiple planes
Create a cross-section using any existing planes whether they are parallel or not in one step.
Existing planes: Select the planes to use for the entity creation.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the cross-section.
Max: Maximum deviation of the cross-section.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

2173
 If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

To display the 2D view of a cross-section, click it and click in the toolbar.

2174
To create a 2D entity on a particular cross-section, select the desired cross section
in the Navigation panel then selected the 2D entity from the toolbar.

2175
VXinspect Entities | Pattern

Patterns are not available in VXinspect|Analysis.

Tools | Entities | Pattern

This tool allows clustering entities (circles, cylinders, spheres or slots) of the same type affected by the
same GD&T callout. Creating a pattern is the unique method to make a composite GD&T callout.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Alignment
Choose an alignment from the dropdown list.

Entities
Choose the desired entities with which to create a pattern form the list. Valid entities that were
highlighted in the Navigation panel will already be selected.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.

2176
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
Composite: To create a composite GD&T callout.

l Tolerance: Set the tolerance value of the second part of the composite callout.

l DRF: Set the DRF of the Composite second part.

When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

2177
Quick Entities

Tools | Entities | Quick entities

Automatically creates entities by clicking particular areas of a CAD reference.

Quick entities will not create cross-sections, patterns, slabs, or points.

To create quick entities:

1. Click (Quick entities). Any mesh in the 3D viewer will not be visible while creating
entities with Quick entities leaving only CAD references visible.

2. Hovering over particular areas of the CAD reference will show a preview of an entity.

3. Click to create the entity. Clicking again will create additional entities. All entities will
appear in the inspection program.

4. Click (Quick entities) again to exit Quick entities creation mode.

Quick entities automatically creates a constraining plane for 2D entities.

Select multiple sections of the CAD reference with + click. Quick entities will attempt to create a
geometric entity if it recognizes the selections conforming to one. If no geometric entity is recognized,
Quick entities will create a surface entity from the selections. If multiple line entities are selected, Quick
entities will create a 3D curve.

2178
Add Comparison Points

Tools | Entities | Comparison Points

Select a group of specific points on a CAD model to include in the inspection program.

Name
Give the set of comparison points a name.

To create comparison points

1. Click (Comparison points)

2. Select either Mesh comparison points or Edges comparison points. Selecting

Edges comparison points will highlight detected edges on the CAD in the 3D viewer on
which valid comparison points can be created.

3. Click the desired points in the 3D viewer. The selected points will appear under the Points
pane. Holding Ctrl will removed the mesh from the 3D viewer and can make visualization
of the CAD easier.

4. Click OK.

5. Creating comparison points will generate a group called Comparison points to the
Inspection program. Each comparison point (CP #) under the group cannot be individually
modified, as they are handled as a whole group.

6. Extraction parameters and tolerances are set in the group panel and are similar to a point
entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

2179
Nominal numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Import nominal points

Click to import comparison points previously saved as a .csv or .txt file. The software will utilize the
coordinates of the point first and then, if available, use the vector. In cases where a vector is
unavailable, it will utilize the normal of the closest CAD surface.

l Purple box: Ignored information. Software will use the name closest to the coordinates.

l Red box: (Required) Name, X, Y, Z coordinates.

l Green box: (Optional) Vector of the point. If not present, the software will use the normal of
the closest CAD surface.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2180
Automatic selection parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

2181
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Radius [3]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh data.

Measurement method Edges

This method is available when having a CAD reference.

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

(Edges): Hold Ctrl and click to select an edge in the 3D viewer.

2182
Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Data availability on 1 or 2 faces does not change the automatic selection parameters, but has an
impact on the calculation filter parameters.
Mesh data from 2 faces

Mesh data from 1 face

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Edge length [2]: Maximum search distance along the edge of the nominal reference of the entity to
the triangles mesh data.

2183
Calculation filter parameters
Mesh data from 2 faces

The adjacent surface selection to the constraining surface will be projected onto the constraining
surface. An edge (polyline) will be calculated.

Mesh data from 1 face

Since there is no adjacent surface to project onto the constraining surface, mesh vertices on the edges
will be used to calculate the edge (polyline).

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.

2184
 Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.

Points
Shows a list of the points with their X,Y,Z coordinates and deviation. Select a point and click Delete
selected points to delete points.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting the corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of all comparison points in the group.
Max: Maximum deviation of all comparison points in the group.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
SD: The standard deviation centered on the average deviation at ±1 σ (±34.1 %).
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection program table and in the report.

Comparison points can only be extracted on a mesh.

2185
Inspection Entities | Distance

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Distance

It is also possible to create a distance by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Distance in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh

2186
 Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

When the Numerical values is selected as the Nominal, it is possible to set a manual value under the
Nominal numerical values tab.
Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2187
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Construction
Select two entities to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal

2188
 Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Cross-section
Select a cross-section from the dropdown.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Select or create two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2189
 Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

When the Numerical values is selected as the Nominal, it is possible to set a manual value under the
Nominal numerical values tab.
Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Dimensions
Select the 3D, X, Y or Z distance(s) and set the tolerances (Tol+ and Tol-). The distance is displayed in the
3D viewer for each selected dimension. These values will also be displayed in the inspection report.

Select Signed check box to set a positive or negative value to the distance
components depending on the direction from the first to the second entity. Clear
the check box to display the absolute distance.

To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2190
Inspection Entities | Caliper

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Caliper

To use, hold Ctrl and click two points on the mesh in the 3D viewer.
To delete a caliper point, hold Ctrl + click the point.

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining axis
Select the constraining axis applied to the entity:
Normal to first point: Set the caliper measurement axis based on the normal of the caliper zone of the
first point.

2191
It is possible to select an existing axis using the filters.
Create a new line: To create a new line that will be used to determine the caliper axis measurement.

Nominal numerical values

When the Numerical values is selected as the Nominal, it is possible to set a manual value under the
Nominal numerical values tab.
Length: Enter the nominal value of the 3D distance.

Point parameters
Radius: Set the size of the zone around the caliper point.
Max. distance: Set the search distance on each side of the caliper point for the triangle extraction.

The radius and the maximum distance remain the same for the first and the second
caliper points.

First point direction or Second point direction:

Normal: The max. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to calculate the caliper
distance. It is the behavior of a standard caliper.
Inverted: The min. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to calculate the caliper
distance. It is the inverted behavior of a standard caliper.

Dimensions
Set the corresponding tolerances (Tol+ and Tol-) next to the selected 3D check box. These values will be
displayed in the inspection report.

To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2192
Inspection Entities | Angle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Angle

This tool measures the angle between 2 planes, 2 lines, or a plane and a line.

It is also possible to create an angle by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Angle in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2193
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of angle to be created:

l XYZ: XYZ decomposition of the angle.

l 3D: 3D angle.

Enter the nominal values of the angle.

Construction
Angle definition

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Entities

Choose two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the angle between them.
Line - line: Construct an angle between 2 selected lines.

Plane-plane: Construct an angle between 2 selected planes.

2194
 Plane - line: Construct an angle between selected plane and line.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Cross-section
Select a cross-section from the dropdown.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction

2195
 Angle definition

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Entities

Select or create two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of angle to be created:

l XYZ: XYZ decomposition of the angle.

l 3D: 3D angle.

Enter the nominal values of the angle.

2196
Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). These values will be displayed in the inspection report.

To adjust the placement of the angle's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2197
Inspection Color map

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Color map

In VXinspect, it is possible to create and customize different color maps for each entity.

The color map is only applied to the mesh. It is then recommended to hide the
CAD model to completely see the color map.

Name
Specific name given to the color map. This text box can be edited by user.

Measurement method - Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from
which the triangles will be extracted.

Nominal
Select the color map nominal creation method:
Color map mesh to CAD

l Whole CAD: All the surfaces of the CAD will be used.

l Pick on CAD: Select the color map nominal by clicking surfaces on the CAD displayed in the
3D viewer.

Color map mesh to mesh

2198
 l Whole mesh: All the triangles of the nominal mesh will be used.

l Triangle selection: Select the color map nominal by selecting triangles on the nominal
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Alignment
The alignment assigned to the color map. The color map deviations are calculated from this alignment.

Automatic selection parameters

Defines the automatic selection of the triangles on the mesh.
Alignment: Alignment used for the automatic selection parameters. By default, the extraction will be
associated to the first alignment created in the inspection program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the triangles to the nominal surface of the entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the triangles normal to the normal of the closest nominal surface
of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance value when comparing triangles to the CAD
surface. This value represents the limit from which points are no longer computed.

Measurement method - Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for the color map or create a new type of
targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset: Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

2199
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program.

Nominal
Select the color map nominal creation method:
Whole CAD: When a CAD is available, all the surfaces will be used.
Pick on CAD: Select the color map nominal by clicking wanted surfaces on the CAD displayed in the
3D viewer.

Alignment
The alignment assigned to the color map. The color map deviations are calculated from this alignment.

Automatic selection parameters

Defines the automatic selection of the triangles on the mesh.
Alignment: Alignment used for the automatic selection parameters. By default, the extraction will be
associated to the first alignment created in the inspection program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum distance from the measured data points to the reference surface
normal of the entity.
Max. angle: Set the maximum angle (°) from the measured data points to the reference surface
normal of the closest nominal surface of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance value when comparing triangles to the CAD
surface. This value represents the limit from which points are no longer computed.

Probed points
Show (by selecting the Show points in report check box) or hide (by clearing the Show points in report
check box) each probed point with the entity in the report.

2200
Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting the corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of all color map data.
Max: Maximum deviation of all color map data.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
SD: The standard deviation centered on the average deviation at ±1 σ (±34.1 %).
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection program table and in the report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the nominal reference (mesh or CAD).
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the
Automatic values check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box enabling to select a number of
options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

2201
 l Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of
the ± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the
boundaries will clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2202
VXinspect Nominal Creation Methods

Pick on CAD
Quickly create a nominal entity by clicking directly the corresponding feature on the CAD displayed in
the 3D viewer. Only the surfaces corresponding to the entity type will be highlighted in the 3D viewer
(e.g., when creating a plane, only the planar surfaces of the CAD will be highlighted).

Fit on points
Create a nominal entity on a best fit of points by holding Ctrl and clicking points on the CAD displayed in
the 3D viewer.
Point display in the 3D viewer

Surface point Edge point

On a surface feature of the CAD model, the point will On an edge of the CAD model, the point
be shown as a cross. will be shown as a point.

The nominal entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Fit on CAD model

Create a nominal entity on multiple surface or edges of the CAD by clicking the corresponding feature
on the CAD displayed in the 3D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Numerical values
Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

2203
Triangle or Vertex selection
Create a nominal entity by selecting triangles or vertexes on a reference mesh. When chosen, a nominal
mesh parameter will appear to enter the reference mesh on which the nominal triangles (or vertexes)
must be selected.
To select the triangles

1. Click (next to the nominal mesh).

2. Using a selection tool, select the triangles (or vertexes) in the 3D viewer.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.
l Angle: Exclude the triangles with a higher angle to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

VXmodel transfer
Create a nominal entity by using the entities created in VXmodel.
To transfer VXmodel entities to VXinspect

1. Right-click entities in VXmodel.

2. Select Transfer selected entities to VXinspect.

Cross-section
Create 2D entities on an existing cross-section. Select the entity using Ctrl + click in the 2D viewview for
viewer
. An average of the selected area will be computed.

2204
None
When selected, no nominal is assigned to the entity. The nominal values will remain empty and no
deviation will be computed.
For circle, slot, rectangle, sphere and cylinder entities, select the check box and set diameter, length or
width values in Nominal dimensions parameters.

2205
VXinspect Measurement Methods

Probe
When measuring with the probe, the information of the entity being measured will be displayed on the
left pane of the interface :

l Dimension

l Probed points

l Error distribution

l GD&T

The toolbar is reduced to 3 buttons:

Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

Before the alignment

Before the alignment is computed, the 3D viewer will be in a split screen mode:

l The left side is focused on the HandyPROBE Next stylus and will show the probed points and
the measured primitive of the entity.

l The right side will show the CAD and the nominal primitive of the entity.

2206
After the alignment
After the alignment is computed, the 3D viewer will go back to a single screen mode:

l It will show both the nominal value and the measured primitive of the entity overlying each
other.

The probing methods for entities created with VXinspect module are specific to measures made with
Creaform devices.

Entity Method

Probe at least 3 points on the plane.

Probe at least 2 points on the line. The points will be projected on the constraint
plane.

2207
 Probe at least 3 points on the circle. The points will be projected on the constraint
plane.

1. Probe at least 7 points on the cylinder.

2. Spread the points as much as possible along the height and the
circumference of the cylinder for the fit to work properly.

1. Probe at least 4 points on the sphere.

2. Spread the points as much as possible around the sphere for the fit
to work properly.

1. Probe at least 8 points on the cone.

2. Spread the points as much as possible along the height and the
circumference of the cone for the fit to work properly.

1. Probe at least 6 points around the slot. The points will be projected
on the constraint plane.

2. Spread the points as much as possible around the slot for the fit to
work properly.

Probe at least 8 points around the rectangle (2 points on each side).

Probe points on the surface:

l The points will be compensated toward the closest CAD surface.

Measure with the Probe Emulator

To use the Probe emulator, activate it through Menu | Configure | Probe Emulator or press Ctrl + Shift
+ P. To acquire points with the Probe emulator, hold Ctrl and click the CAD surfaces.

Edges and mesh

When measuring while using scanned data, the information of the entity being measured will be
displayed on the left pane of the interface :

l Dimensions

l Error distribution

l GD&T

2208
The 3D viewer will be in a split screen mode:

l The left side shows the scan data from the Scan source, the triangle selection, the color map and
the measured primitive of the entity.

l The right side will show the CAD and the nominal primitive of the entity.

The toolbar will be reduced to 3 buttons:

Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

Before the alignment

Before the alignment is computed, the triangle selection has to be done manually using the Selection
Tools. The left and the right side of the split view in the 3D viewer will be independent.
After the alignment
After the alignment is computed, an automatic triangle selection will be done using the Automatic
triangles selection parameters. The selection can be modified by changing the parameters or by using
the Selection Tools. The left and the right side of the split view in the 3D viewer will now move together.

2209
Scan sources: add scan
The Add scan feature will create a scan acquisition sequence in the program. When played, the sequence
will launch the scanner for the user to live scan the part. The sequence results can be used as a scan
source to measure the entities.
Scan sources: mesh
The mesh can come from VXelements scan node, if the part was scanned before the inspection or from
the mesh node if it was created or imported. If the mesh is modified in the project, the mesh will be
modified in VXinspect as well. The measurements using the mesh will also be deleted so the entities
have to be remeasured.

Manual
Use to enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin
gauges. Once activated, the user will be asked to enter the numerical value in the dimension table.

Constructed
The entities using the constructed measurement method will be automatically measured as soon as the
entities used for its creation are measured.

Cross-section
Use to create an entity on an existing cross-section. Once selected, the cross-section is displayed in the
2D viewer. The entity will be automatically measured from the cross-section.

Optical probing
Select to use an optical measurement, such as positioning targets, to extract the measured value for an
entity. When measuring an entity, the 3D viewer allows the use of the Selection tools to choose which
positioning targets to include in the measurement.
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added in
the Inspection program.

2210
 This option is only available with the Optical Probing measurement method or the
Target Best-Fit alignment.

When creating a new optical measurement, it will create a new item in the Inspection program table
(Unselected optical measurement).
When measuring this item, you can choose between an existing optical measurement, a dynamic
referential or optical probing:
Dynamic referential: Use the C-Track dynamic referential as an optical measurement.
Optical probing: The 3D viewer will show all visible targets seen by the C-Track. Using the Selection
tools, choose which target to include in the optical measurement.

Vertex selection
Select manually vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to measure the entity.

Mesh symmetry plane

Extract a symmetry plane from the whole mesh data.

2211
VXinspect Annotations

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

VXinspect module allows adding annotations to be displayed in the 3D viewer.

An annotation is a tool used to display nominal and/or measured values of specific entities in the 3D
viewer.

To create annotations

Entity annotations (used for geometric entities)

1. Click Entity annotations in the Toolbar or go to the menu bar: Tools | Annotations |
Entity annotations.

2. Click a visible entity in the 3D viewer to add an annotation.

To choose which dimensions and GD&T to display in the annotation box, select or clear the
corresponding check boxes in the Dimensions pane of the inspection program table.

It is possible to add an annotation by right-clicking to access the Contextual

menu.

2212
Deviation annotations (used for data display deviation such as probed points, color maps or
2D sections)

1. Click Deviation annotations in the Toolbar or go to Tools | Annotations | Deviation

annotations.

2. Click a visible measurement in the 3D viewer.

To display measurements, such as probed points, color maps or 2D sections, see the Contextual menu
section.

Right-click any annotation to access the Delete option.

Multiple part annotations

When creating a new part with Add part , the annotations of the previous part are automatically
copied to the next part.

Example: While adding the part 6, it is the annotations of part 5 that will be used
to create the annotations of the part 6.

Click , then click Copy annotations in the Toolbar or go to Tools | Annotations | Copy
annotations to create the exact same annotations of the active part and active entity to all the parts.
This operation will then add or delete annotations to reproduce the same annotations of the active part
and active entity as well as their layout in the 3D viewer. This operation cannot be undone.

3D annotations are grayed out when there are no triangles at the annotation
location.

2213
Annotation functions
Icon Function Action
To add annotation labels to any entity and display the
Entity annotations assigned dimensions and GD&T. For details, see the Entity
annotations section.
To add measurement annotations. For details, see the
Deviation annotations
Deviation annotations section.
To display the location and value of the minimum and the
Add min. max. annotations maximum annotations of the entity or the color map
selected in the inspection program.
To close all created annotations in the 3D viewer. To close
Close all annotations a single annotation, right-click it and Delete or middle-
click it.
To activate a grid of 3D deviation points with annotations.
Adjust the grid by zooming in or out or by enlarging or
Toggle color map grid
reducing the font of the values. To modify the font, go to
Display | General Display | Viewer font size.

Copy annotations For details, see the Multiple part annotations section.

To move an annotation in the 3D viewer, click the

- Move annotations
annotation and drag it to desired location.

2214
VXinspect Probe Emulator
Select the Probe emulator to demonstrate probing operations without having to use a HandyPROBE
device.
This tool can also be useful for trainings or for inspection program validation.

Probe emulator panel

The probe emulator panel is available through the Configure | Probe emulator menu or press Ctrl +
Shift + P. In the interface, the probe emulator panel will appear on the right side of the 3D viewer.

Probe emulator configuration

Options - Probe diameter (mm): Set the probe tip diameter of the emulator.
Noise: A random noise is added to the emulator to simulate the noise generated by a real probing
device:

l Position: Set the amplitude of the position noise.

l Angle: Set the amplitude of the orientation noise (°).

Using the probe emulator

See the Measure with the Probe Emulator section.

Probe position
The Probe position panel is the digital read out (DRO) displaying the current cartesian position of the
probe (X, Y, Z) along with the probe deviation from the closest CAD point (Dev X, Dev Y, Dev Z, Dev 3D).

2215
Add a Note

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Note

Title
Give the note a name.

Description
Add any additional information.

Note screenshots
Add up to 4 images (1 larger and 3 smaller) to the note. Select Import to select a file or Take a screenshot
to use the current 3D viewer image. Right-click an image to Delete the image. Click an image to view the
Full size image or replace the current image with a screenshot or import another image.

Press the Arrow Up/Down or the Accept button from a HandyPROBEor

another scanning device to change the pictures shown or accept and close
the note.

Show note during measure

Selecting this causes the note to pop up during measurements.

Show note in report

Select this and the note will appear in the report.

2216
VXinspect Report Generation

To generate an inspection report

1. Click Report in the Toolbar or select File | Export | Report in the Menu. A preview of
the entire report is displayed.

2. Set the Project information and Part information.

3. Select Export active part only (optional).

4. Set the Report options.

5. Click Export to export the report.

6. In the Save as dialog, in the folder pane, choose the location and folder to save the file.

7. In the File name field, type a name for the file. By default, the file name is the report title.

8. In the Save as type list, select the required file type.

9. Click Save.

The elements' order in the Navigation panel or the Inspection program table will be
the same in the report. To change the order, click one or more items and drag and
drop to reorder.

At any time, click OK to save the settings and exit or Cancel to discard changes and exit the Report menu.

Snapshots must be created prior to launching the report generation. To add

snapshots, refer to the toolbar section.

Project information
The information entered in this section will appear on the front page of the report and is specific to all
project parts.
To enter information, select Click to edit in a text field.

2217
 It is possible to add one or more personalized information items in the last row.
Each time a new item is added, a new line appears. If a field is left empty (not
edited), the information name row will still be displayed in the report.

Click to delete the information row.

Click to move the selected information up one row.

Click to move the selected information down one row.

Part/Mesh information
To enter the specific information for each part/mesh inspected in the project.
Active part/mesh: Select the Active part/mesh using the drop-down list to display the preview and edit
the part/mesh information.

To modify the part/mesh name

1. Click the editable field of the Part/Mesh name information.

2. Enter the new name. The part/mesh name will also be changed in the navigation panel and
the program table.

Date and time

Date and Time information is automatically filled using the current system information at the moment of
the creation of the part.
Both fields are editable.

It is possible to add one or more personalized information items in the last row.
Each time a new item is added, a new line appears. If a field is left empty (not
edited), the information name row will still be displayed in the report.

Click to delete the information row.

2218
 Click to move the selected information up one row.

Click to move the selected information down one row.

Restore default
Click to restore the project and all part information to the default settings.

Previously done settings will be lost.

Report options
In this section, a sample preview of the printed report is displayed as this option is used to customize the
layout.

Menu

To import a report template.

To export as a report template.

To restore the report template to the default settings.

Front page
Customize the front page information using drop-down lists.
Image: To add an image under the part information section.
Header: To select the information that will appear in the header section of the front page.
Footer: To select the information that will appear in the footer section of the front page.

2219
Report pages
Use front page options: Select to use the settings from the front page for all report pages.
Header: To select the information that will appear in the header section of each page of the report.
Footer: To select the information that will appear in the footer section of each page of the report.

Disclaimer page
Include disclaimer page in report: Select to include the disclaimer in the report.
Additional disclaimer text: To add personalized text in the disclaimer section.
Header: To select the information that will appear in the header section of the disclaimer page.
Footer: To select the information that will appear in the footer section of the disclaimer page.

Table options
Show entity alignment: Select to display the alignment set with the entity.
Entity table: Select the column name to be displayed in the entity table.
Measured points table: Select the column name to be displayed in the measured points table.

This table is available when the Show points in report option is selected (available
using the Probe or Vertex selection measurement methods).

Font
Font: To select the font face.
Font size: To select the font size used in report sections.

Print settings
Orientation: To select the print orientation of the report.
Paper size: To select the paper size used to print the report.
Margins: To select a preset margin setting.

2220
Export active part only
Select to export only the inspection report of the part selected in the Active part drop-down list in the
Part information section.

2221
VXmodel Overview
VXmodel is a post-treatment module integrated in VXelements. This module includes a set of tools and
features that allow the extraction of information needed in CAD software. It also includes the tools to
create a ready-to-print mesh.

Main features
Alignment
Allows aligning the scan with the coordinate system.

Mesh improvement
Allows improving the 3D scan mesh and making it suitable for the CAD or 3D printing process. The main
improvements consist of healing the mesh, filling holes, enhancing surface smoothness, optimizing file
size with a decimation tool, etc.

Geometrical entities and cross-sections

Allows creating geometrical entities, curves, cross- sections, and patches to extract the required
information from the mesh.

NURBS surface
Allows generating Non- Uniform Rational Basis Splines (NURBS) surfaces to characterize freeform
surfaces for later use in a CAD software.

Mesh comparison
Allows comparing 2 or more meshes or an edited mesh and itself before the modification.

Input and output formats

See the File Types section.

Technical requirements
Requirements for installation and usage.

2222
VXmodel Interface

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item in
the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Toolbar
Click the icon to show the active modules within the current
Module navigation
session and select desired module to switch.

Undo To go back to the last action performed on the mesh.

Redo To redo the undone editing action on the mesh.

Align To create an alignment.

Add entity To create entities.

To create a surface using the Auto surface, Manual surface,

Add surface
or the Single patch functions.
To delete the triangles of a selected area. First, select the mesh
Delete under the VXmodel node and select the triangles to be
deleted. For details, see the Selection Tools section.

2223
 To remove selected triangles from the active mesh and create
Cut a new mesh out of the selection. First, select the area of the
mesh that needs to be cut and click the icon.
To copy selected triangles from the active mesh and create a
Copy new mesh out of the selection. First, select the area of the
mesh that needs to be copied and click the icon.

Keep only To delete all unselected triangles.

To detect abnormal triangles and automatically repair the

Clean mesh1
mesh.

Improve To edit mesh on triangles.

Edit To edit the size and shape of meshes.

These functions are available when using the texture

Texture
functionality.

To compare elements with the adjustable color map. It is

possible to compare: 2 meshes together, a mesh with a CAD
Compare
model, a mesh with a surface, and an edited mesh with itself,
before the modification.

Combine To combine 2 or more meshes into a single mesh.

Merge To merge 2 or more meshes.

Inspect mesh To inspect the mesh using VXinspect.

Transfer to To transfer the mesh to SOLIDWORKS, Inventor, Fusion 360,

SOLIDWORKS ▼ or Solid Edge software.

Navigation panel

1Iterative function allowing users to detect and select the irregularities in the mesh such as intersecting triangles and small holes.

2224
Mesh node
Hover over a mesh either in the Mesh node or the 3D viewer to highlight a specific mesh in the 3D
viewer. Click to select.

To select multiple meshes, hold the Ctrl or key and click desired meshes in the Mesh node or

hold and click desired meshes in the 3D viewer.

Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

Mesh details
Triangle count: Number of triangles counted within the active mesh.
Vertex count: Number of vertices counted within the active mesh.
Selected triangles: Number of triangles selected using a selection tool.

Entities node
The added entities become available through this sub- node. Once created, the entities can be
exported in different formats (see Output formats section). Double-clicking an entity will allow its
values to be edited.
Right-click the node or item(s) contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.
To select an entity, click the entity under the Entities node or directly on the highlighted entity in the
3D viewer. Multiple entity selection is possible under the Entities node by pressing and holding the Ctrl
key and clicking.

Entities details
The entities details are displayed in the expanding panel: Entity count, Name, Center and Normal
coordinates, Standard and Min/Max deviations, etc.

After the creation of any type of cross-section, click the cross-section entity under
the Entities node to visualize the area and the length of each curve in a table
under Entity Details.

2225
 Show color map
The Color map shows the error distribution between the selection done and the entity created.

Alignments node
A new alignment node is created upon adding an entity. Each alignment added is available
under this node. Different alignment methods are also available. For details, see the Add
Alignment section.
Right-click the alignment to:

l Activate the selected alignment

l Export alignment

l Rename the alignment

Alignments details

Details
The alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment, Translation
and Rotation axis, etc.

Display bar
The Display toolbar is located at the bottom on the 3D viewer and provides various display options for
the 3D viewer.
It includes options for the General display, and the Mesh display.

2226
Using VXmodel
VXmodel is fully integrated in VXelements.
It is possible to import a mesh from a .csf file or to create one from a scan using Send to VXmodel. Post-

treatment functionalities will become available after clicking .

Mesh editing typical workflow

1. Send to VXmodel

2. Clean the mesh

3. Align to origin

4. Edit the mesh

5. Improve the mesh

6. Create entities

Send to VXmodel
To add a mesh in the Navigation tree, VXmodel license (hardware or software) must be activated or
plugged into the USB port.

1. Click the Scan node.

2. Click Send to VXmodel through the toolbar or the menu bar (Tools | Send to
VXmodel). A new mesh will be created under the VXmodel node.

3. Once created, click the mesh (e.g. Mesh 1) in the VXmodel node. Editing tools and other
functions of VXmodel will become available.

It is possible to create a mesh by directly importing an .stl file.

The mesh is a real-time .stl file copy. If the original scan is modified, the
corresponding mesh will not be updated. A new mesh must be created.

Clean the mesh

2227
Several options are available to clean a mesh. For details, see the Clean Mesh1 section.

Align to origin
It is possible to align the mesh to the origin. For details, see the Align to Origin section.

Edit the mesh

Several tools are available to edit a mesh. For details, see the editing tools section.

Improve the mesh

It is possible to improve the mesh using several tools. For details, see the Improve section.

Create entities
Several types of entities are available. See Add Entity for further details.

Functions are applied to the selected mesh. Make sure to select the proper mesh
before each operation.

1Iterative function allowing users to detect and select the irregularities in the mesh such as intersecting triangles and small holes.

2228
Add Entity
Tools | Entities
The Entities menu provides tools for entity creation which are available through the menu bar or the
toolbar.
Create the requested entity using the entity panel options.

It is possible to create an entity by selecting a portion of mesh with the selection tools and then
selecting an entity through the menu bar or the toolbar.

Point
Line
Circle
Slot
Rectangle
Curve
Pipe centerline
Plane
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Cross-section
Silhouette

Distance
Caliper
Angle

2229
VXmodel Entities | Point

Tools | Entities | Point

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a point.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2230
 Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Radius [3]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh data.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Vertex selection: Hold Ctrl and click to select a vertex in the 3D viewer to create point.

Measurement method Constructed

l Two-line intersection: Create a point at the intersection of two lines.

l Select line 1: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Select line 2: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Three-plane intersection: Construct a point using three intersecting plane.

2231
l Line-plane intersection: Create a plane using a point and a line.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Point projected on plane: Create a point on a plane by using another point as a projection
reference.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Point projected on line: Create a point on a line by using another point as a projection
reference.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

2232
l Extract from existing entity: Create a point by extracting the corresponding feature from an
existing entity (example: extracting a point from a circle will get the center of the circle).

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Line-circle intersection: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a circle's perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select circle: Select an existing circle or Create a new circle.

l Line-cylinder intersection: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a cylinder's
perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

2233
 l Select cylinder: Select an existing cylinder or Create a new cylinder.

l Average point selection: Create a point by averaging the coordinates of 2 or more entities.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the point from a given cross-section.

Cross-section
Select an existing cross section and it will be displayed in the 3D viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-
section to create the point.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius (mm): Set the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Measurement method Numerical values

Add a point entity by using specific numerical values entered in the Numerical parameters pane.

Numerical parameters

2234
 Set XYZ coordinate values. Click to set a point position derived from an existing entity.

Entity Details
After selecting a point in the 3D viewer, Details provides coordinate information about the point.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in

2235
 the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2236
VXmodel Entities | Line

Tools | Entities | Line

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

2237
 Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
Set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the calculated entities.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Create a line by selecting a portion of the mesh with the Selection tools.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

2238
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, pick 3 vertices, or select none.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction method
Point and orientation: Starting from a selected point, construct a line parallel to a selected plane
normal.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

Two-plane intersection: Create a line by intersecting 2 planes.

l Select plane 1: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line, or Pick 3 vertices.

l Select plane 2: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line, or Pick 3 vertices.

2239
Line projected on plane: Create a line by projecting a line onto a plane.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D viewer,
or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

Extract from existing entity: Create a line by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a line from a cylinder will get the axis of the cylinder).

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

Average point selection: Create a line by connecting 2 or more points by selecting existing entities.

l Selection: The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear
in this table.

2240
 Average line: Construct a line by averaging the location and the orientation of selected lines.

Middle line: Construct a bisector line at intersection of selected lines.

l Select line 1: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Select line 2: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Cross section
Select an existing cross section and it will be displayed in the 3D viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross
section to create the line.

Calculation filter parameters

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

2241
 l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Measurement method Numerical values

Create a line by setting a XZY coordinates for start and ends points.

Numerical parameters
Set a Start point (mm) and an End point (mm) by entering values for XZY coordinates.

Parameters
Length (mm): Set the length of the entity.
Flip normal: Flip the direction of the entity.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

2242
l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2243
VXmodel Entities | Circle

Tools | Entities | Circle

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

2244
 Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
Set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the calculated entities.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Constraints
Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a circle.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

2245
 l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints
Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints
Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction method

l Center and orientation: Construct a circle at the intersection of a line and a point with
defined diameter.

l Center: Select a preexisting entity, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Normal: Select a preexisting entity, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Diameter (mm): Set the diameter value.

2246
l Plane-cylinder intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cylinder.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select cylinder: Select a preexisting cylinder or Create (a) new cylinder.

l Plane-sphere intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a sphere.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select sphere: Select a preexisting sphere or Create (a) new sphere.

2247
 l Plane-cone intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cone.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select cone: Select a preexisting cone or Create (a) new cone.

l Average point selection: Construct a circle using selected points to create a best-fit circle.
Need at least three points.

l Selection: The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer
appear in this table.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the circle from a given cross-section.

Cross-section
Select an existing cross section and it will be displayed in the 3D viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-
section to create the circle.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2248
 None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Constraints
Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Boundary

Select a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer to create a circle.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints
Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution

2249
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2250
VXmodel Entities | Slot

Tools | Entities | Slot

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

2251
 Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
Set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the calculated entities.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the slot.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a slot.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

2252
 Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the slot.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the slot.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

2253
 l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Constructed

Input values to create a slot.

Construction

l Center: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Normal: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Starting orientation: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

l Length (mm): Set the length.

l Width (mm): Set the width.

Measurement method Cross-section

Select an existing cross-section and it will be displayed in the 3D viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-
section to create the slot.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints

2254
 l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the slot.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Boundary

Select a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer to create a slot.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the slot.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

2255
Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2256
VXmodel Entities | Rectangle

Tools | Entities | Rectangle

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

2257
 Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: To set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the
calculated entities.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the rectangle.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a rectangle.

Constraining plane

2258
 Select an existing plane, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the rectangle.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit to vertices, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints

2259
 l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the rectangle.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Constructed

Input values to create a rectangle.

Construction

l Center: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Normal: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Starting orientation: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or Pick 2 vertices.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

l Length (mm): Set the length.

l Width (mm): Set the width.

Measurement method Cross-section

Select an existing cross-section from the Cross-section dropdown and it will be displayed in the 3D
viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-section to create the rectangle.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

2260
 Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the rectangle.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Measurement method Boundary

Select a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer to create a rectangle.

Constraining plane
Select an existing plane, fit plane to boundary, create a new plane, or pick 3 vertices.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average
distribution.

Constraints

l Length axis: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Position: Select an entity to set to position the rectangle.

l Length (mm): Set a value for the length.

l Width (mm): Set a value for the width.

Entity Details

2261
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

2262
l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2263
VXmodel Entities | Curve

Tools | Entities | Curve

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Exact boundary

Build a curve by selecting a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer.

Curve parameters
Boundary selection mode:

l
Whole: Select the entire boundary by clicking any point of the boundary in the 3D viewer.
The boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

l
Partial: Select a portion of a boundary by clicking two points in the boundary and then
selecting one of the sections that the previously chosen points created. The portions of the

2264
 boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

Output type: For an exact boundary, only Polyline is available.

Measurement method Free curve

Build a curve by selecting a series of points on a surface in the 3D viewer.

Curve parameters - Output type

l Spline: Select points in the 3D viewer to form a curve from a set of curved lines.

l Polyline: Select points in the 3D viewer to form a curve from a set of straight lines.

Measurement method Free polyline

Build an entity by selecting a series of points on a surface in the 3D viewer.

Measurement method Fit on mesh

Build a curve by selecting points on a surface in the 3D viewer.

Curve parameters
Output type:

2265
 l Spline: Select points in the 3D viewer to form a curve from a set of curved lines.

l Polyline: Select points in the 3D viewer to form a curve from a set of straight lines.

Criteria: Deviation or Control points.

l Maximum deviation (mm): Represents the deviation allowed between the curve and the
boundary.

l Number of control points: The fewer control points, the smoother the curve is.

Measurement method Fit on boundary

Build a curve by selecting a highlighted boundary in the 3D viewer and setting a maximum deviation.

Curve parameters
Boundary selection mode:

l
Whole: Select the entire boundary by clicking any point of the boundary in the 3D viewer.
The boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

l
Partial: Select a portion of a boundary by clicking two points in the boundary and then
selecting one of the sections that the previously chosen points created. The portions of the

2266
 boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

Output type: Choose to output as either a Spline or Polyline.

Criteria: Deviation or Control points.

l Maximum deviation (mm): Represents the deviation allowed between the curve and the
boundary.

l Number of control points: The fewer control points, the smoother the curve is.

Curve edition
It is possible to edit the curve while it is being created.

To move a curve point:

l Click a point and drag it to a new position.

2267
To edit the curve 3 options are available:

l Create curve: Right-click anywhere on the curve to confirm its creation. Using this option, it is
possible to create several curves one after the other. Another way to create a curve is to use the
Create button, available in the Entity expanding panel.
l Delete point: Mouse over an existing point, right-click it and select this option to delete a point.

l Flip curve: Mouse over the curve, right-click it and select this option to flip the curve. Then, it will
be possible to add points from the other side of the curve.
l Close curve: Mouse over the curve, right-click it and select this option to close the curve. To
reopen the curve, right-click it and select Open curve option.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

2268
VXmodel Entities | Pipe centerline

Tools | Entities | Pipe centerline

Purpose

l Recreate missing data of a S cylindrical body (reverse engineering of piping).

l Visualize the dimensions or envelope of a piping network.

l Provide a curve for creation of cross-sections along the curve afterwards.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

To add a pipe centerline

Select the guiding curve checkbox for complex pipe shape and/or a closed loop
pipe shape.

Using triangles

1. Hold Ctrl and click the mesh to select triangles.

2. Set the curve tension using the slider.

3. If desired, increase the length of the pipe centerline by setting the Extension length (mm).

4. If desired, set the pipe diameter.

5. Click Preview.

6. Set the output type.

l Spline: arc segments passing tangent at points.

l Polyline: short straight segments between points.

7. Click OK.

2269
 Select the Display color map check box to visualize the deviation between a virtual
pipe created from the centerline and pipe diameter, and the mesh.

Using a guiding curve

1. Select the Use guiding curve check box.

2. Click the mesh to create points. Use the single click to create points and double click to
end the curve.

3. Hold Ctrl and click the mesh to select triangles.

4. Click Preview.

5. Set the curve tension using the slider.

6. If desired, increase the length of the pipe centerline by setting the Extension length (mm).

7. If desired, set the pipe diameter.

8. Click Preview.

9. Set the output type.

l Spline: arc segments passing tangent at points.

l Polyline: short straight segments between points.

10. Click OK.

Select the Display color map check box to visualize the deviation between a virtual
pipe created from the centerline and pipe diameter, and the mesh.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.

2270
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2271
VXmodel Entities | Plane

Tools | Entities | Plane

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

2272
 Calculated normal

l None: No filter is applied.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance and angle: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance and/or angle
from the average distribution.

l Distance: Set the distance.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Constraints
Set limits for the plane by choosing an entity for Normal or Perpendicular axis.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints
Set limits for the plane by choosing an entity for Normal or Perpendicular axis.

Measurement method Constructed

Set parameters to build a plane.

Construction method

2273
l Plane offset: Create a plane using another plane as a reference.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Offset (mm): Set the distance from the selected plane and the new plane.

l Plane offset through a point: Create a plane using another plane and a point as references.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Point and normal line: Create a plane using a point and a line.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

2274
l Average point selection: Create a plane using a series of points.

l Selection: Chosen points and alignments appear in this table along with their
respective deviations.

l Average plane: Create a plane using a existing planes and alignments.

l Middle plane: Create a plane between two existing planes.

l Select plane 1: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line, or Pick 3
vertices.

l Select plane 2: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line, or Pick 3
vertices.

2275
 l Point and coplanar line: Create a plane between using a point and a line.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Perpendicular plane: Create a plane perpendicular to a another plane or alignment.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D
viewer, or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select point: Select an existing point, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) vertex.

Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane

Construction
Select an existing plane, create a new plane, draw a line, or pick 3 vertices.

Measurement method Draw line

Hold Ctrl, click and drag in the 3D viewer.

2276
Parameters
Length (mm): Set the length of the entity.
Width (mm): Set the width of the entity.
Rotation: To change the orientation of the plane.
Flip normal: Select this box to change the orientation of the plane.

Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center by
clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

2277
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2278
VXmodel Entities | Cylinder

Tools | Entities | Cylinder

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a cylinder.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance and angle: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance and/or angle
from the average distribution.

l Distance: Set the distance.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

Constraints

l Axis: Select this check box to share the same central axis of the selected entity.

l Orientation: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

2279
Measurement method Vertex selection
Select vertices in the 3D viewer to create a cylinder.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints

l Axis: Select this check box to share the same central axis of the selected entity.

l Orientation: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Constructed

Select a line and set dimensions to create a cylinder.

Construction

l Select line: Select an existing line, create a new line, or pick 2 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Length (mm): Set the length for the cylinder.

l Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Parameters

l Length (mm): Set the cylinder's length.

l Flip normal: Flip the direction of the cylinder.

Adjust the cylinder's length by clicking and dragging the blue arrows in the 3D
viewer.

2280
Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

2281
l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2282
VXmodel Entities | Sphere

Tools | Entities | Sphere

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a sphere.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance and angle: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance and/or angle
from the average distribution.

l Distance: Set the distance.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

Constraints

l Position: Select this check box to share the same position of the selected entity.

l Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

2283
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints

l Position: Select this check box to share the same position of the selected entity.

l Diameter (mm): Select this check box to set a specific diameter.

Measurement method Constructed

Input values to create a sphere.

Construction

l Select point: Select an existing point, create a new point, or pick a vertex in the 3D viewer.

l Diameter (mm): Set the sphere's diameter.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.

2284
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2285
VXmodel Entities | Cone

Tools | Entities | Cone

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Mesh

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a cone.

Calculation filter parameters - Outlier filter

l None: No filter is applied.

l Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

l Distance and angle: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance and/or angle
from the average distribution.

l Distance: Set the distance.

l Angle (°): Set the angle.

Constraints

l Axis: Select this check box to share the same central axis of the selected entity.

l Orientation: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Half-angle (°): Check this box to set the half-angle of the cone.

2286
Measurement method Vertex selection
Select a series of points in the 3D viewer to create a cone.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Constraints

l Axis: Select this check box to share the same central axis of the selected entity.

l Orientation: Select this check box to only have the axis orientation of the selected entity.

l Half-angle (°): Check this box to set the half-angle of the cone.

Measurement method Constructed

Select a portion on the mesh in the 3D viewer to create a cone.

Construction method

l Base and height: Construct a cone using a circle entity as a base.

l
Base : Select an existing circle or Create a new circle. Click to flip normal of the

base.

l Height (mm): Set the distance from the center of the base to the tip of the cone.

l Angle definition: Choose either Half angle, or Top diameter and then set the angle
or diameter in the box directly below.

l Half-angle (°): Set the half-angle of the cone.

l Two points and base diameter: Create a cone by choosing a bottom and top point and then
defining a base diameter.

2287
 l Base point: Select an existing point entity, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) Vertex in
the 3D viewer.

l Base diameter (mm): Set the diameter for the base of the cone.

l Top point: Select an existing point entity, Create (a) new point, or Pick (a) Vertex in
the 3D viewer.

l Angle definition: Choose either Half angle, or Top diameter and then set the angle
or diameter in the box directly below.

l Half-angle (°): Set the half-angle of the cone.

Parameters
View and adjust the created cone's properties.

l Distance from apex (mm): Select this check box to discard data from the specified distance
from the best-fitted entity.

l Height (mm): Set the height of the cone.

l Flip normal: Select this box to change the orientation of the cone.

Adjust the cone's length by clicking and dragging the blue arrows in the 3D viewer.

2288
Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the color
scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in the Dimensions
table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the Automatic values
check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values to set the
color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will
clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

2289
l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

2290
VXmodel Entities | Cross-section

Tools | Entities | Cross-section

This tool creates entities which can later be used as a basis for alignments or for specific measurements
on the scan data.

After the creation of any type of cross-section, click the cross-section entity under
the Entities node to visualize the area and the length of each curve in a table under
Entity Details.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Creation parameters - Building modes

Linear
This building mode allows creating Single, Multiple, or Whole mesh cross-sections along a line.

l
Type: (Single) , (Multiple), or (Whole mesh).

l Initial plane: Defines cross-section location and orientation from the plane. Select an existing
plane, create a new plane, draw a line in the 3D viewer (Ctrl + click + drag), or pick 3 vertices
(Ctrl + click).

l
Offset (mm): The value that offsets the selected cross-section (with (Single) or

(Multiple) types).

l
Count: Number of cross-sections required (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

l
Spacing (mm): Distance between 2 cross-sections (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh)

types).

2291
 Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center
by clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

Radial
This building mode allows creating cross-sections through an axis.

l
Type: (Single), (Multiple), or (Whole mesh).

l Rotation axis: Defines cross-section location and orientation from an existing axis. Select
from a list of existing entities, create a new line or create line from 2 vertices (Ctrl + click in 3D
viewer).

l Initial plane: Allows selecting the starting location of the first cross-section. Select an existing
plane, create a new plane, draw a line in the 3D viewer (Ctrl + click + drag), or create a plane
by rotation axis and vertex (adjust plane in the 3D viewer).

l
Offset (°): The angle value that offsets the selected cross-section (with (Single) or

(Multiple) types).

l
Count: Number of cross-sections required (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

l
Spacing (°): Angle between 2 cross-sections (with (Multiple) or (Whole mesh) types).

2292
 Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center
by clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

Along Curve
This building mode allows creating single or multiple cross-sections along the curve.

l
Type: (Multiple), (Whole curve), or (Pick points).

l Existing curve: Select and existing entity, create a new curve, or create (a) new pipe
centerline.

l
Offset (mm): The value that offsets the cross-section from the curve starting point (with

(Multiple) type).

l
Count: Number of cross-sections required (with (Multiple) or (Whole curve) types).

l
Spacing (mm): Distance between 2 cross-sections (with (Multiple) or (Whole curve)

types).

Adjust the plane's size and dimensions by clicking and dragging the blue dots on
the perimeter of the plane displayed in the 3D viewer. Adjust the plane's center

2293
 by clicking and dragging the red, green or blue arrows in the center of the plane.
Rotate the plane by clicking and dragging the blue circle which surrounds the
colored arrows.

Multiple planes
This building mode allows creating multiple cross-sections from existing planes.

l Existing planes: Select the planes from the drop-down menu. Those planes do not need to
be parallel.

Curve parameters
Adjusts the curve parameters as required.

l Output type: Defines the cross-section output as Spline or Polyline.

l Criteria: Deviation or Control points.

l Maximum deviation (mm): Represents the deviation allowed between the curve and the
boundary.

l Number of control points: The fewer control points, the smoother the curve is.

Entity Details

2294
Displays the Curve count, Plane count, and lists the cross- section's curves. Click to select a curve.

Ctrl+click to select multiple curves. Right-click curve(s) from the list and click Delete to remove curve
(s) from the cross-section.

To display the 2D view of a cross-section, click it and click in the toolbar.

To create a 2D entity on a particular cross-section, select the desired cross section

in the Navigation panel then selected the 2D entity from the toolbar.

You can create entities directly in the 2D viewer for quick measurements.

2295
VXmodel Entities | Silhouette

Tools | Entities | Silhouette

This function creates the outline of the mesh projected on a plane. This plane defines from which point
of view the silhouette is computed.

Purpose

l Provide an outline for laser cutting.

l Prepare for foam die cutting in packaging applications.

l Provide external shape of part to estimate overall volume.

l Extract profile for reverse engineering.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

To add a silhouette

1. Select a plane to output the cross-section.

2. Use the slider to select the desired silhouette(s).

Selected silhouette(s) will be highlighted. The slider goes from short

to longer curve length.

Select the Keep external silhouette only check box to create the
outside cross-section silhouettes only.

3. Select the output type.

l Polyline: short straight segments between points.

l Spline: arc segments passing tangent at points.

2296
 Curve parameters
Criteria: Control points or Deviation

l Number of control points: The fewer control points, the smoother the curve is.

l Maximum deviation: Deviation allowed between the curve and the boundary.

4. Click OK.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

After the creation of any type of cross-section, click the cross-section entity under
the Entities node to visualize the area and the length of each curve in a table under
Entity Details.

2297
VXmodel Measurement | Distance

Tools | Measurement | Distance

It is also possible to create a distance by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Distance in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Selection
The XYZ coordinates and deviation for the selected points in the 3D viewer appear in this table.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction

l Point, point: Construct the shortest distance between 2 selected points.

2298
 l Point, plane: Construct the shortest distance between selected point and plane.

l Point, line: Construct the shortest distance between selected point and line.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Select an existing cross-section from the Cross-section dropdown and it will be displayed in the 3D
viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-section to create the distance.

Construction

l Entity 1: Select entity from the dropdown.

l Entity 2: Select entity from the dropdown.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2299
VXmodel Measurement | Angle

Tools | Measurement | Angle

This tool measures the angle between 2 planes, 2 lines, or a plane and a line.

It is also possible to create an angle by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Angle in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Measurement method Constructed

Construction
Select an Angle definition:

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Select an entity in the Entity 1 and Entity 2 drop downs.

Line - line: Construct an angle by selecting 2 lines.

Plane-plane: Construct an angle by selecting 2 planes.

2300
 Plane - line: Construct an angle by selecting a plane and a line.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Select an existing cross-section from the Cross-section dropdown and it will be displayed in the 3D
viewer. Hold Ctrl and click the cross-section to create the rectangle.

Construction

l Angle definition

Acute: Less than 90°

Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

l Entity 1: Select entity from the dropdown.

l Entity 2: Select entity from the dropdown.

Line - line: Construct an angle by selecting 2 lines.

Plane-plane: Construct an angle by selecting 2 planes.

2301
 Plane - line: Construct an angle by selecting a plane and a line.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

To adjust the placement of the angle's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2302
VXmodel Measurement | Caliper

Tools | Measurement | Caliper

To use, hold Ctrl and click two points on the mesh in the 3D viewer.
To delete a caliper point, hold Ctrl + click the point.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

Constraining axis
Select the constraining axis applied to the entity:

l Normal to first point: Set the caliper measurement axis based on the normal of the caliper
zone of the first point.

l Create a new line: To create a new line that will be used to determine the caliper axis
measurement.

l Pick 2 vertices: Hold Ctrl and select two points on the mesh in the 3D viewer.

Point parameters

l Radius: Set the size of the zone around the caliper point.

l Max. distance: Set the search distance on each side of the caliper point for the triangle
extraction.

The radius and the maximum distance remain the same for the first and the second
caliper points.

2303
l First point direction or Second point direction:

l Normal: The max. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to
calculate the caliper distance. It is the behavior of a standard caliper.
l Inverted: The min. point of the caliper zone (shown by a golden sphere) is used to
calculate the caliper distance. It is the inverted behavior of a standard caliper.

To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2304
Add Surface
New surfaces can be created with several tools according to the mesh shape and application:
Auto surface
Manual surface
Single patch

2305
Auto surface

Tools | Add surface | Auto surface

This function allows creating an organized patch layout surface (NURBS model) with minimal user
interaction.

Purpose

l Create a NURBS model from a mesh that is hard to be modeled due to its complexity.

l Create an automatic NURBS model from an entire mesh or from selected triangles.

l Export surface to CAD software.

To create an auto surface

1. Select triangles onto which the patch will be fitted using the selection tools.

When no area of the mesh is selected, the Auto surface will be applied on the
entire mesh.

2. Set the Approximate number of patches using the slider.

3. If needed, adjust control points to fit the patch to the mesh.

The greater the number of control points:

l The closer the patch will fit the mesh.

l The heavier the file size will be.

4. Select the Align to boundaries check box to align the patches with the opened boundaries.

5. Select Fill small holes check box to automatically fill small holes in the mesh.

6. Click Preview and adjust the parameters if needed.

7. Click OK.

2306
 This function is more efficient on a clean mesh.

Small holes (highlighted boundaries in the 3D viewer) will be filled when they are
smaller than the patch created.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

2307
Manual surface

Tools | Add surface | Manual surface

This function allows generating a patch network (NURBS model) with manual curve creation from the
selected area. For complex organic shapes, it is recommended to use Auto surface.

Purpose

l Create a NURBS model from a mesh that is easy to be modeled.

l Create a manual NURBS model where patch network is entirely designed by the user.

l Export surface to CAD software.

Entity Details
After an entity is ready to be created, Details provides additional information for the entity.

Mouse controls
Create a curve:

l Click (intermediate point )

l Double-click (corner )

l Hold Ctrl + click + drag (curve by section)

Edit network:

l Drag points

Cancel curve creation:

l Esc key

Delete highlighted item1:

2308
 l Middle-click (shortcut)

l Right-click (drop-down menu)

Table 107-1 1 Deleting a corner will remove all connecting curves up to the next corner. Deleting an
intermediate point will refit the curve.

To create a patch network

Only patches having 4 sides are allowed, otherwise the patch will not be created. A side is defined
between 2 corners.

1. Create a patch (4 sides) network.

l Drag points to edit the network (boundaries or cross-section points can't be

moved).

l Outline of patch will turn green when valid or red if the creation basic
requirements are not met.

2. Preview the resulting patches.

3. If needed, adjust control points to fit the patch to the mesh.

l The greater the number of control points:

l The closer the patch will fit the mesh.

l The heavier the file size will be.

4. Click OK to finish the patch network and start a new one.

5. Click Cancel to exit.

To edit the surface, right- click and Edit or double- click the previously created surface
under the Entity node in the Navigation tree.

It is possible to reuse the resulting patch network on multiple similar objects by

right-clicking the Surface node and Send to the desired Mesh.

2309
Tips
1
Best practice suggests using Clean mesh prior creating a patch network from a mesh. Other basic
recommendations include:

l
Clean boundaries using Edit boundary .

l Improve mesh (use for example Fill holes, Smooth mesh, Remove spike, Refine, and Decimate)
to obtain a better resulting surface.

l Delete unwanted boundaries (automatically created when launching Manual surface).

l Using Restore boundaries will reactivate the boundaries for further use in surface
creation.

l
A color map between the mesh and the resulting surface can be created using Compare .

How to resolve a 3-sided patch

1Iterative function allowing users to detect and select the irregularities in the mesh such as intersecting triangles and small holes.

2310
2311
How to resolve a 5-sided patch

2312
2313
Single patch

Tools | Add surface | Single patch

This function allows creating a patch from a single selection of triangles and with contours that can be
extended.

Purpose

l Create a single patch from a portion of a mesh that is easy to be created.

l Export a single surface to CAD software.

l Single patch (if extended) is often used to cut a portion of a CAD model in CAD software.

To create a single patch

1. Select triangles onto which the patch will be fitted using the selection tools.

2. Set the surface extension beyond the selected mesh part or on specific selected triangles
using the Padding spin box.

3. Set the Maximum deviation allowed between the surface and the mesh.

4. Select the Closed check box to create a closed surface.

5. If needed, adjust control points to fit the patch to the mesh.

l The greater the number of control points:

l The closer the patch will fit the mesh.

l The heavier the file size will be.

6. Click Preview and adjust the parameters if needed.

7. Click OK.

2314
2315
Add Alignment
Tools | Add alignment
The Add alignment menu provides tools for alignment creation which are available through the menu
bar or the toolbar.
Manual Alignment
Import alignment
Point selection
Entity based
Best fit

After creating an alignment, the alignment details are displayed in the Navigation
panel.

To export the transformation matrix of an alignment as a text file (.txt), right-click

the alignment in the navigation tree and select Export alignment.

2316
Manual Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Manual Alignment

The Manual Alignment function allows the alignment of the mesh to the world coordinate system XYZ.
Click OK to align the mesh to the origin. The alignment information will be displayed in the expanding
panel.

Name
Specific name given to the alignment.

Alignment by constraint
This function is flexible as it first allows an auto-alignment according to the mesh center of mass.
It is also possible to reach specific alignment using entities in the Constraint selection section. Degrees of
freedom lock each time a constraint is added. When there are no constraints, it is still possible to
manually modify the position by moving the 3D Manipulator or entering values manually in the
corresponding text box. When constraints are added, the deviation information is available (Details
deviation). As the first constraint created is always considered perfect, the constraints added later will fit
themselves in the best conditions. When all the degrees of freedom are locked, there is no manual
alignment.
To complete the operation and save changes, click OK. A new alignment will be created in the Entities
node. To reset manually entered values and get the auto-alignment back, click Reset. To cancel the
operation, click OK.

The active mesh will be displayed during the function.

Manual alignment
This function allows manually aligning the mesh from its current (active) alignment by entering values in
Text box or directly with the 3D Manipulator.

2317
Move object
Create an alignment by manipulating the arrows and rings in the 3D viewer. Click Reset to return to start
position and click OK to create the alignment.

Details
The alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment, Translation and
Rotation axis, etc.

2318
Import Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Import alignment

Aligns the selected mesh(es) from either a (.txt) file or an alignment in another open session.

Name
Specific name given to the alignment.

To import alignment
1. Select the source for the alignment in the relevant drop-down list. To import an alignment
from File, click Import alignment from file and browse to open a previous saved alignment
(.txt file).

2. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

3. Select the required Destination alignment.

4. Click OK.

Select Invert pose option to invert the alignment. The alignment information will be updated in real time.

Details
The alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment, Translation and
Rotation axis, etc.

2319
Point Selection

Tools | Alignment | Point selection

Name
Specific name given to the alignment.

Nominal
This allows aligning existing entity points with a specific nominal coordinate. At least 3 points must be
selected. Those points will be best-fitted with the nominal coordinates to create a new alignment frame.

l Import: To import nominal points from a file (.csv or .txt)

l Export: To export nominal points entered to a file (.csv or .txt)

Manual
This tool aligns the selected meshes in the list using the common points selected by the user.

1. Select points on the fixed model on the left side of the screen.

2. Select the same points on the mobile model on the right side of the screen.

3. Click Ok.

Details
The alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment, Translation and
Rotation axis, etc.

2320
Entity Based

Tools | Alignment | Entity based

The Entity based function allows the alignment of 2 meshes using common entities.

Name
Specific name given to the alignment.

Construction
Mobile: The mesh selected before launching the function is the mobile item.
Fixed: The fixed mesh must be selected from the Fixed entity source field.
This function will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh. Degrees of freedom
lock each time a constraint is added.

Details
DetailsThe alignments' details are displayed in the expanding panel: Name, Mode of alignment,
Translation and Rotation axis, etc.

2321
Best Fit

Tools | Alignment | Best fit

Name
Specific name given to the alignment.

Surface best fit

Click to align 2 or more meshes together or a 1 or more meshes with CAD model.

Item selection
Fixed: There can be multiple fixed items selected. This is the mesh that will not move during the
operation.
Mobile: All the session meshes can be selected but only 1 at a time.

Parameters
Maximum distance (mm): Maximum search distance between 2 surfaces to consider them as the
same surface.

Pre-alignment mode
Automatic: Automatic prealignment of the fixed and mobile item selection. Following the
prealignment, the surface best fit will automatically be calculated.
Manual: Select at least 3 points on the fixed model (left side of the 3D viewer). Then, select the same
points on the mobile model (right side of the 3D viewer) and click Best fit.
None: There is no prealignment and the surface best fit alignment can be launched directly.

Constraints

2322
 It is possible to apply constraints to the best fit method and to specify which entity or degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment.
None: No constraint is applied; a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh.
Unconstrained rotations and translations will be best fitted.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

Global registration

Click to refine the alignment after the initial Best fit while considering all the meshes selected at
once. This function is only available when there are at least 3 meshes aligned.

Parameters
Maximum distance (mm): Maximum search distance between surfaces to perform the global
registration.
Best fit: To get a preview of the registration.
OK: To accept the registration.
Reset: To reset the registration.

2323
Clean Mesh

Tools | Clean mesh

This function detects abnormal triangles and automatically repairs 1 or more meshes
according to set cleaning parameters.

Purpose

l Repair triangle irregularities to prepare mesh for 3D printing.

l Heal the mesh for subsequent entity creation.

To clean mesh(es)

1. Set the cleaning options using the check boxes. A count of each element found on the
mesh(es) will be displayed.

2. Adjust Parameters using sliders and spin boxes.

3. Click Apply, then OK.

Cleaning options

Isolated patches
To select isolated triangle patches. The desired threshold can be adjusted using the slider in the
Parameters. Isolated patches are small sections of meshes which are isolated. They are considered as
such if the ratio between its size and the size of the largest section is less than the defined threshold
value (default 1%).

2324
Self-intersections
To remove self-intersecting triangles. Self-intersections are found when a triangle is intersected by 1 (or
more) other triangles. Then, both triangles are removed.

Spikes
To remove spikes. It is possible to adjust the level in the Parameters. A spike is detected on a mesh
when there is at least 1 triangle from a vertex with a very different normal, compared to a fixed threshold
of 60 degrees.

2325
In addition, this detection method can also detect small tunnels.

Small holes
To fill small holes. It is possible to adjust the Max hole size threshold in the Parameters.

Singular vertices

2326
To remove singular vertices. Singular vertices are found when:

l Two pyramids touch each other at 1 point.

l More than 2 border edges are in contact with it.

Creased edges
To remove creased edges according to the required angle set in the Parameters.

2327
Narrow triangles
To remove narrow triangles (degenerated, compressed or slim).

Outcropping triangles
Select this check box option to remove outcropping triangles. An outcropping triangle has 2 edges on
the mesh boundary.

Narrow bridges
To remove small bridges between meshes. Threshold of the bridge width can be set in the Parameters.

Non-manifold triangles

2328
Count of non-manifold triangles detected in the mesh. This occurs when an edge is associated with
more than 2 triangles.

Parameters
Isolated patches threshold: By increasing the threshold value, smallest isolated patches can be
automatically removed.
Spike level: To adjust the required level. If the threshold value is set to 100, a maximum of spikes will be
removed.
Angle bet. creases (°): To adjust the minimum angle allowed between 2 triangles.
Narrow bridges width (edges): To adjust the minimum width of narrow bridges.
Max. hole size (edges): To adjust the maximum hole size to be filled. The size of the hole is determined
by the amount of edges.

2329
Selection Tools
Tools | Selection
To have access to the selection tools, first click a mesh in the Navigation panel under the node. The mini
toolbar will appear in the upper left corner of the 3D viewer. It can either be displayed in Compact or
Expanded mode. Click the drop-down arrow to select a mode.

To make a selection

1. In the mini toolbar, click one of the selection tool icons.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click simultaneously. Then, if using , , or , make a
selection moving the mouse around.

To clear selected data, hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys and right-click after selection.

Selection tools
Rectangle selection

Free form selection

Brush selection

Connect

Sudden change*

Similar curvature*

Similar normal*

Isolated patches

Curvature selection*

Triangle picking

Boundary selection

2330
 * The selection tools featuring the selection tolerance (i.e. interactive flood fill
selection) allows previewing and interactively adjusting the selection in the 3D
viewer.

Selection modes
Select through

Select target with surface (VXscan only)

Select backface

Select all

Clear selection

Invert selection

Grow selection

Shrink selection

2331
Rectangle

Tools | Selection | Rectangle

To create a rectangular shape selection. Hold Ctrl+click, and release it when the selection is completed.

2332
Free Form

Tools | Selection | Free-form

To create a free-form selection (lasso).

l For a straight line contour, hold Ctrl+click.

l For a free curve contour, hold Ctrl and hold the mouse left button.

l Once the selection is completed, right-click to end it or release the Ctrl key.

2333
Brush

Tools | Selection | Brush

This tool allows to choose a specific section of the 3D model by highlighting over the desired area for
selection.

l For a straight line, press Ctrl and click left button.

l For a free curve, press Ctrl and hold the mouse left button.

l Once the selection is completed, right click to end it or release CTRL key.

The Brush size slider allows adjusting the thickness.

2334
Connect

Tools | Selection | Connect

This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to a given triangle.

2335
Sudden Change

Tools | Selection | Sudden change

This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to others until sudden curvature change appears in the
mesh using Ctrl+click.
Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

2336
Similar Curvature

Tools | Selection | Similar curvature

This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with same curvature using Ctrl + click.
Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

2337
Similar Normal

Tools | Selection | Similar normal

This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with a similar normal using Ctrl +
click.
Use the Selection tolerance slider to adjust the selection sensitivity.

2338
Isolated Patches

Tools | Selection | Isolated patches

This tool allows selecting all triangles connected to other triangles with a similar normal using Ctrl +
click.
By increasing the threshold value, smallest isolated patches can be automatically removed. The result is
shown instantly in the 3D view. If the threshold value is set to 100, only the largest patch will be kept.

2339
Curvature Selection

Tools | Selection | Curvature selection

This tool allows selecting high curvature areas. The slider allows adjusting the curve radius. The higher
the value is, the larger the selection.

2340
Triangle Picking

Tools | Selection | Triangle picking

This tool allows selecting a single triangle using Ctrl + click.

2341
Boundary Selection

Tools | Selection | Boundary selection

This tool allows selecting all the boundary triangles. Upon clicking this icon, all the boundaries appear in
pink.

2342
Select through

Tools | Selection | Select through

This tool allows selecting all the triangles within an area, even those on a different layer.

2343
Select Backface

Tools | Selection | Select backface

When active, this function allows selecting in the negative normal of the mesh in addition to the positive
normal. Then, the surface is selected without regard to the normal. The model negative normal is shown
in dark gray in the 3D viewer, while the positive normal appears in blue.

If the Select through function is active, the Backface function has no effect.

2344
Selection Modes

Select all

Tools | Selection | Select all

To select all triangles of the mesh.

Clear selection

Tools | Selection | Clear selection

To clear the current selection of triangles.

Invert selection
Tools | Selection | Invert selection
To invert the current triangle selection; unselected triangles will be selected. In opposition, selected
triangles will no longer be part of the selection.

2345
Grow Selection

Tools | Selection | Grow selection

This tool increases the current selection size by adding a layer of triangles for each mouse click (1
triangle in every direction).

2346
Shrink Selection

Tools | Selection | Shrink selection

This tool decreases the current selection size by removing a layer of triangles for each mouse click (1
triangle in every direction).

2347
Improve
Tools | Improve mesh
The Improve menu provides the following tools to edit the mesh:
Fill holes
Decimate
Remesh
Edit boundary
Smooth mesh
Defeature
Remove spike
Sandpaper

2348
Improve | Fill Holes | Whole

Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes

Whole mode
This function adds triangles within a closed boundary.

Purpose

l Make the mesh watertight for 3D printing.

l Build missing portions of scanned part.

l Prepare the mesh for surfacing.

To fill holes

1. Select the filling method.

2. Set the number of layers (rows of triangles) around the boundary to be smoothed after
filling.

3. To fill holes:

l Click the boundary, or

l Use the Selected boundaries slider to select multiple boundaries, then click Apply.
The arrows can be used to navigate between boundaries.

4. Click Apply, then OK to exit the function.

Selected boundaries will be highlighted. The slider goes from short to longer
boundary length.

2349
The Delete function can be used along with selection tools to clean the mesh
around the hole before filling.

2350
Improve | Fill Holes | Partial

Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes

Partial mode
This function adds triangles within a region defined by a portion of a boundary.

Purpose

l Build missing portions of scanned part.

l Prepare the mesh for surfacing.

To fill holes

1. Select the filling method.

2. Set the number of layers (rows of triangles) around the boundary to be smoothed after
filling.

3. Click 3 points: the first and the second points define the limit of the partial fill hole and the
third point determines the filling side.

4. Click Apply, then OK to exit the function.

Reset selection or Esc key can be used to deselect the boundary.

2351
The Delete function can be used along with selection tools to clean the mesh
around the hole before filling.

2352
Improve | Fill Holes | Bridge

Tools | Improve mesh | Fill holes

Bridge mode
This function adds triangles to connect 2 edges.

Purpose

l Build missing portions of scanned part.

l Prepare the mesh for surfacing.

To fill holes

1. Select the filling method.

2. Set the number of layers (rows of triangles) around the boundary to be smoothed after
filling.

3. Click 6 points, 3 points on either side of the hole to bridge:

4. Click Apply, then OK to exit the function.

Reset selection or Esc key can be used to deselect the boundary.

2353
The Delete function can be used along with selection tools to clean the mesh
around the hole before filling.

2354
Improve | Decimate

Tools | Improve mesh | Decimate

This function reduces the number of triangles by merging them while preserving the original shape of
geometric features. It increases the size of triangles in flat areas while maintaining details in high
curvature areas.

Purpose

l Reduce file size.

l Facilitate export to CAD software.

To decimate

1. Click desired mesh(es) to select in either the Navigation panel or the 3D viewer. It is also
possible to select just a portion of mesh to decimate using the Selection tools.

2. Use the Reduction (%) slider or the Estimated triangle count box to set the estimated final
number of triangles.

3. Set the Max. deviation (mm) value allowed between the decimated and the original
meshes.

4. Select the Fix vertices check box if the decimated mesh vertices should be a subset of the
original vertices.

5. Select the Preserve boundary check box to keep the current boundaries.

6. Click Apply, then OK.

2355
Improve | Remesh

Tools | Improve mesh | Remesh

This function resizes the triangles according to a set resolution (triangle length), in a selection or to the
whole mesh.

Purpose

l Change resolution of selected triangles.

l Uniformize the resolution of a mesh resulting from a merge operation.

l Provide more triangles for a subsequent finer triangle selection for further mesh edition.

l Prepare for creation of surfaces or entities.

To remesh

1. Select the area to remesh using the selection tools. If no triangle is selected, the function
will be applied to the whole mesh.

2. Set the Mean edge length.

3. Click Apply, then OK.

To visualize the triangle size, click (Mesh display) from the Display toolbar in
the 3D viewer and then Triangles and wire frame.

2356
Improve | Edit Boundary

Tools | Improve mesh | Edit boundary

This function modifies the shape of triangles along the boundaries to follow a set geometric shape. It
also reduces the effect of noise and smooths rough edges.

Purpose

l Straighten boundaries for subsequent Extrude boundary operation.

l Modify the shape of holes for extraction of entities and CAD transfer.

l Prepare mesh for 3D printing.

Boundary selection modes

l
Multiple : Allows rebuilding the entire boundary selected. It is possible to select more than

1 boundary at a time (No preview available for more than 1 boundary).

l
Partial : Allows rebuilding a portion of the boundary.

l
Fit to entity : Allows rebuilding a boundary in the shape of circle, rectangle or slot.

To edit using Multiple and Partial mode

1. Adjust the Curve tension using the slider. The higher the value, the smoother the curve is.

2. Set the number of triangle layers around the boundary to be taken in consideration during
the operation using the Analysis layers box.

3. Use the Selected boundaries slider to select multiple boundaries to be smoothed

simultaneously from small to large boundaries.

2357
 Selected boundaries will be highlighted. The slider goes from short to
longer boundary length.

Reset selection or Esc key can be used to deselect the boundary.

4. Click Apply, then OK.

The Delete function can be used along with selection tools to clean the mesh
before rebuilding boundaries.

To edit using Fit to entity mode

1. Set the number of triangle layers around the boundary to be taken in consideration during
the operation using the Analysis layers box.

2. Select the Entity mode between an existing entity or best-fit the boundary to a circle, a
rectangle or a slot.

Reset selection or Esc key can be used to deselect the boundary.

3. Click Apply, then OK.

The Delete function can be used along with selection tools to clean the mesh
before rebuilding boundaries.

2358
Improve | Smooth Mesh

Tools | Improve mesh | Smooth mesh

This function reduces the effect of noise and roughness on a mesh. It can be applied to the entire model
or partially to selected triangles.

Purpose

l Improve the mesh quality for 3D printing.

l Prepare for creation of surfaces or entities.

To smooth the mesh

1. Select the predefined level of smoothing applied on the mesh from the drop-down menu.

2. The number of mesh smoothing attempts in the Iterations and Preserve details boxes is
automatically adjusted to match the predefined level selected.

3. If a predefined level is not selected, the number of mesh smoothing attempts can be
manually set and customized.

4. To keep the current mesh boundaries, select the Preserve boundary check box.

5. To sharpen the geometry based on the curvature found on the mesh, select the Sharpen
check box. This is achieved by pushing the points on the mesh towards the higher
curvature regions, thereby "sharpening" those regions.

6. Click Apply, then OK.

2359
Improve | Defeature

Tools | Improve mesh | Defeature

This function deletes and recreates triangles on selected area(s) of the mesh.

Purpose

l Quickly remove unwanted feature shapes.

l Prepare for creation of surfaces or entities.

To remove features

1. Select the feature to remove using the selection tools. Defeature can be applied on
multiple areas simultaneously.

2. Click .

2360
Improve | Remove Spike

Tools | Improve mesh | Remove spike

This function detects and flattens each spike separately on the mesh.

Purpose

l Quickly remove unwanted spikes.

l Improve the mesh quality for 3D printing.

l Prepare for creation of surfaces or entities.

To remove spikes

1. Adjust the amount of spikes to be removed with the slider. To remove a maximum of
spikes, set the level to 100.

2. Click Apply, then OK.

2361
Improve | Sandpaper

Tools | Improve mesh | Sandpaper

This function reduces the effect of noise and roughness on a mesh in selected region(s) using a circular
brush.

Purpose

l Improve the mesh quality locally for 3D printing.

l Prepare for creation of surfaces or entities.

To use sandpaper

1. Set the level of smoothing using the Smoothing strength slider.

2. Set the brush diameter with the Brush size slider.

3. Hold Ctrl and move over the triangles to be smoothed.

4. To keep the overall shape of existing features, select the Preserve features check box.

5. To keep the current mesh boundaries, select the Preserve boundary check box.

6. Click OK to exit the function.

Use Ctrl + Z to cancel a smoothing operation.

2362
Edit
Tools | Edit mesh
The Tools menu provides tools which allow editing the size and shape of meshes:
Shell/Offset mesh
Extend boundary
Cut mesh
Mirror mesh
Flip/Fix normals
Flatten
Scale
Extrude boundary
Cut mesh by curve
Watertight remesh
Sculpt
Boolean operation

2363
Tools | Shell Offset Mesh

Tools | Edit mesh | Shell/Offset mesh

Shell
This function creates a closed mesh at a constant distance from the original mesh.
Purpose

l Create a constant wall thickness.

l Increase or decrease the volume of a mesh.

l Create a watertight model for 3D printing.

Offset mesh
This function creates a mesh surface at a constant distance from the original mesh.
Purpose

l Create a constant wall thickness.

l Increase or decrease the volume of a mesh.

To create a shell or offset a mesh

1. Select the Shell or Offset option.

2. Choose the shell or offset direction depending on the mesh positive normal direction.

l Inside: In opposite direction of triangles normal direction.

l Outside: In the same direction as the mesh normal direction.

3. If required, select the Smooth boundaries check box.

4. To create another mesh which includes the operation results in the Meshes node, select the
Keep the original mesh check box.

2364
5. Set the distance of the offset or shell from the active mesh in the Distance spin box.

6. Click Apply, then OK.

2365
Tools | Extend Boundary

Tools | Edit mesh | Extend boundary

This function creates a mesh surface from the mesh boundary to a set distance.

To extend a boundary

1. Whole: Select the entire boundary by clicking any point of the boundary in the 3D
viewer. The boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

2. Partial: Select a portion of a boundary by clicking two points in the boundary and
then selecting one of the sections that the previously chosen points created. The portions
of the boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

3. Set the Length value.

4. Set the Smooth boundary layers value which modifies mesh triangles near the original
boundary for a smoother transition to the new boundary. A higher value increases the
rows of modified mesh triangles.

5. Click Apply, then OK.

2366
Length (mm): Set the Length of the extension of the boundary.
Smooth boundary layers: Modifies mesh triangles near the original boundary for a smoother transition
to the new, extended boundary. A higher value increases the rows of modified mesh triangles.

2367
Tools | Cut Mesh

Tools | Edit mesh | Cut mesh

This function separates a mesh into 2 meshes using a plane. All islands of the mesh intersected by the
cutting plane will be affected. The cut plane’s size can be visually adjusted using the anchors to
subdivide local areas of the overall mesh.

Purpose

l Eliminate unwanted data.

l Create clean boundaries at the same level plane.

l Prepare for subsequent operations such as Extrude boundary, Extend boundary, or Mirror mesh..

To cut a mesh

1. Select an existing plane to cut the mesh or create a new one using Draw line (hold Ctrl key)
or Pick 3 vertices. The plane can be resized using the control points.

2. To change the orientation of the normal of the plane, select the Flip normal check box.

3. If required, set the Plane offset. The plane can be dragged along the arrows.

4. To keep both portions of the mesh, select the check box.

5. To fill the hole(s) created when cutting the mesh, select the Fill cut plane check box.

6. To keep small unconnected patches, select the Keep all isolated patches check box.

7. Click Preview, then OK.

2368
Tools | Mirror Mesh

Tools | Edit mesh | Mirror mesh

This function copies the mesh, or a portion of it, symmetrically.

Purpose

l Compensate for missing scan data.

l Recreate an object that is missing a portion.

l Invert a selected feature from the mesh.

To mirror a mesh

1. Select an existing plane as the mirror plane or create one using Draw line (hold Ctrl key) or
Pick 3 vertices.

2. If required, select the Flip normal check box to change the orientation of the normal of the
plane.

3. If required, set the Plane offset. The plane can be dragged along the arrows.

4. Select the Transformation:

l Flip only creates an inverted mesh.

l Mirror and sew creates a symmetrical mesh.

5. If required, select the Keep original mesh check box.

6. Click Apply, then OK.

2369
Tools | Flip Fix Normals

Tools | Edit mesh | Flip/Fix normals

This function modifies the normal orientation of the triangles of the mesh by selecting a point on the
surface of the mesh.

Purpose

l Facilitate file export to CAD software.

l Repair triangle normal irregularities.

l Prepare mesh for 3D printing.

To flip or fix normals

1. Select an option:

l Flip normals inverts the normal of all triangles connected with the root vertex.

l Fix normals harmonizes the normal of all triangles connected with the root
vertex.

2. Click the mesh to select a vertex.

3. Click OK.

2370
Tools Flatten

Tools | Edit mesh | Flatten

This function creates a 2D mesh from selected mesh.

Purpose

l Useful when applying 2D surfaces to 3D objects (e.g. stickers).

To flatten a mesh

1. Select desired mesh using the selection tools in the 3D viewer.

2. Click or select Tools | Edit mesh | Flatten in the menu bar.

3. Click Apply, then OK.

4. The produced 2D mesh will appear centered on the XY plane.

2371
Tools | Scale

Tools | Edit mesh | Scale

This function allows resizing the mesh while maintaining its initial proportions.

Purpose

l Prepare for prototyping of miniature replicas.

To scale a mesh

1. Select the reference for scaling:

l Centroid scales the mesh from its geometric center.

l Origin scales the mesh from the origin point (0,0,0).

2. If required, select the Non uniform check box to set different scaling factors for X, Y, and Z
directions.

3. Set the dimensions of the final mesh bounding box size in X, Y, and Z direction.

Useful to fit a mesh to a specified 3D printer build size. The Scale

factor will adjust automatically.

4. Set the Scale factor. It is set at 1 by default and means no scaling. A value lesser than 1
results in a reduction, while a value greater than 1 results in an increase in size.

5. Select the Keep original mesh check box to create another mesh which includes the
operation results in the Meshes node.

6. Click OK.

2372
Tools | Extrude Boundary

Tools | Edit mesh | Extrude boundary

This function creates a mesh surface from a boundary to an existing plane or a plane extracted from a
boundary.

Purpose

l Add triangle layers up to a plane for 3D printing.

l Create new feature shape where data is missing.

To extrude a boundary

1. Whole: Select the entire boundary by clicking any point of the boundary in the 3D
viewer. The boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

2. Partial: Select a portion of a boundary by clicking two points in the boundary and
then selecting one of the sections that the previously chosen points created. The portions
of the boundary will change color when hovered over and also when selected.

2373
3. Select the extrusion plane between an existing plane or fit a plane to the selected
boundary.

4. Set the Curve tension with the slider. Changes to the Curve tension are immediately visible
in the 3D viewer.

5. Set the Plane offset.

6. If required, select the Flip normal check box to change the orientation of the normal of the
plane.

7. Set the Smooth boundary layers value which modifies mesh triangles near the original
boundary for a smoother transition to the new boundary. A higher value increases the
rows of modified mesh triangles.

8. When extruding a whole boundary, close the mesh after extending the boundary by
selecting the Fill boundary check box.

9. Click Apply, then OK.

2374
Edit | Cut Mesh by Curve

Tools | Edit mesh | Cut mesh by curve

This function separates a mesh in multiple mesh sections using curve(s) projected on the mesh. The
original mesh is kept.

Purpose

l Produce digital patterns for the textile industry (e.g. furniture, transportation seating).

l Eliminate unwanted data.

l Create clean boundaries on the mesh at a specified location.

l Prepare for subsequent operations such as Extrude boundary, Extend boundary, or Mirror mesh.

Mouse controls
To create a curve

l Click (intermediate point )

l Double-click (corner )

To edit network

l Drag points

To cancel curve creation

l Esc key

To delete highlighted item1

l Middle-click (shortcut)

l Right-click (drop-down menu)

2375
1Deleting a corner will remove all connecting curves up to the next corner. Deleting an intermediate
point will refit the curve.

To cut the mesh

Curves must form closed sections, otherwise curves are considered invalid and will turn red.

1. Create curves to outline the shape to be cut.

l Drag points to edit the curves.

2. Click Apply to preview the resulting mesh sections.

Edit curves by moving points and click Apply to update the preview
of the sections.

Name of the section(s) can be changed in the table.

3. If needed, clear the selection check boxes to unselect sections.

4. Click OK to exit the function.

2376
Tools | Watertight Remesh

Tools | Edit mesh | Watertight remesh

This function generates a new global triangulation and smooths the mesh.

Purpose

l Make a sealed mesh for 3D printing.

To remesh

1. Click desired mesh(es) to select in either the Navigation panel or the 3D viewer. It is also
possible to select just a portion of mesh to watertight remesh using the Selection tools.

2. Click (Watertight remesh).

3. Select the Keep original mesh check box to create another mesh which includes the
operation results in the Meshes node.

4. Click Apply, then OK.

2377
Tools | Sculpt

Tools | Edit mesh | Sculpt

This function engraves or embosses features at a single point or along a path.

Purpose

l Add information to a part to be 3D printed.

l Partially deform the mesh.

l Add free-form mesh modification for artistic purposes.

To add features

1. Set the mode: Engrave or Emboss.

2. Set the tip shape: Sharp, Round, or Flat.

3. Set the Deviation. Deviation represents the height of the embossed feature or the depth of
the engraved feature.

4. Hold Ctrl, click and move along the desired path.

5. Click OK to exit the function.

Use the Remesh function to uniformize the mesh triangles after the sculpt
operations.

2378
Boolean operation

Tools | Edit mesh | Boolean operation

How to create a mesh from a Boolean operation between two meshes:

1. Click - Boolean operation.

2. Select a Mode:

- Unite: Combines selected meshes to create a single main body mesh.

- Subtract: Removes overlapped meshes from the main body mesh.

- Intersect: Retains only intersected meshes within the main body mesh.

3. Select a target mesh to choose the main mesh body to keep.

4. Select a tool mesh to cut out from the body of the main mesh.

5. Click Preview to see the result in the 3D viewer.

6. Click OK.

2379
Compare

Tools | Compare
This function compares: 2 or more meshes together, 1 or more meshes with a 1 or more CAD models, or
the current mesh with the original mesh after any changes were made.

Click to launch the adjustable color map comparison between 2 or more elements (CAD entity vs
mesh, mesh vs mesh, or surface entity vs mesh).

Deviation annotations

Once a comparison is selected under the Compare icon, the Deviation annotations and Min.

max. annotations boxes appears in the toolbar. This allows adding or deleting deviation
annotations on the selected mesh.
To add an annotation, click a vertex of the mesh. To move the annotation, click and drag it in the 3D
viewer. To delete an annotation, right-click the annotation and Close.

It is possible to interchange the measured object and the reference using the option button .

Error distribution
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will clear the
Automatic values check box.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or clicking+dragging one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options:

2380
 l Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

l Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

l Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is
only available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not
selected.

l Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog
box is disabled.

l Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of
the ± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the
boundaries will clear the Automatic values check box.

l Reset divisions: Adjust all the divisions evenly.

l Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to original.

l Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color
Map.

Export color mesh and color scale: To visualize the color map in 3D Manufacturing Format. The color
mesh is saved as a .3mf file and the color scale is saved as a .png file.
Compare options: Input values in the number fields or click the up or down arrows to filter out
deviations that exceed the set values to reduce calculation time or remove unneeded data.
Maximum distance: All measurements that deviate by more than the set distance are not included in the
comparison.
Maximum angle: Normals at an angle greater than the set value when compared to the reference
normal will be excluded from the comparison.

2381
Data point
Data point normal vector
Maximum distance: Distance between reference and data point

Maximum angle: Angle between data point normal vector and reference normal vector

2382
Combine

Tools | Combine
This function creates a mesh object from multiple meshes without merging them. Overlapping surfaces
will be kept.

To combine meshes

1. Click 1 or more Mesh(es) under the Meshes node.

2. Click .

3. In the expanding panel, select meshes to combine using the check boxes.

4. Click Apply, then OK.

Parameters available for meshes with texture

Apply texture: Select this check box to apply the texture on the mesh.
Default color: Triangles, with no texture acquired, will be displayed in the selected color.
Projection: The Projection option displays the object texture to make things easier for the operator. Five
types of projections share the same principle: the object texture is projected on a geometric primitive
that can be displayed in a 2D image. It is ready for editing in third-party software.
Automatic (Express): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on speed and minimizes file size.
Automatic (High Quality): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on quality and can overwhelm systems
with insufficient resources to process very large textures.
None: The internal texture representation mode. While not easily editable in 2D, this texture display
mode is the most precise and guarantees that the set texture resolution is constant on the whole object.
This projection mode allows visualizing high quality textures with up to 4 GB memory space available for
the texture image.
Spherical: The texture is projected on a sphere and the editable parameters are the sphere radius and its
location in space (position and orientation).
Cylindrical: The texture is projected on a cylinder and the editable parameters are the cylinder length,
its radius and its location in space (position and orientation).

2383
Cubic: The texture is projected on a cube and the editable parameters include the lengths of the edges
as well as the cube location in space (position and orientation).
Size (px): Total amount of pixels of the texture map.

2384
Merge

Tools | Merge
This function creates a mesh object from multiple meshes. Overlapping surfaces will be converted into a
single surface.

To merge meshes

1. Select 1 or more Mesh(es) under the Meshes node.

2. Click .

3. In the expanding panel, select meshes to merge using the check boxes.

A priority can be applied to keep the quality of one mesh in particular

(High, Normal, Low).

4. Set the Max. distance allowed between 2 overlapping vertices.

5. Set the Smoothing layers. It represents the amount of triangle rows that will be smoothed
during the merge in the overlap sections.

6. If required, select the Keep watertight check box. It will be available when one of the
meshes to merge is already watertight.

7. Click Apply, then OK.

Parameters available for meshes with texture

Apply texture: Select this check box to apply the texture on the mesh.
Default color: Triangles, with no texture acquired, will be displayed in the selected color.
Projection: The Projection option displays the object texture to make things easier for the operator. Five
types of projections share the same principle: the object texture is projected on a geometric primitive
that can be displayed in a 2D image. It is ready for editing in third-party software.
Automatic (Express): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on speed and minimizes file size.

2385
Automatic (High Quality): The texture is projected by several planar projections in different directions
depending on the geometry of the object. This mode focuses on quality and can overwhelm systems
with insufficient resources to process very large textures.
None: The internal texture representation mode. While not easily editable in 2D, this texture display
mode is the most precise and guarantees that the set texture resolution is constant on the whole object.
This projection mode allows visualizing high quality textures with up to 4 GB memory space available for
the texture image.
Spherical: The texture is projected on a sphere and the editable parameters are the sphere radius and its
location in space (position and orientation).
Cylindrical: The texture is projected on a cylinder and the editable parameters are the cylinder length,
its radius and its location in space (position and orientation).
Cubic: The texture is projected on a cube and the editable parameters include the lengths of the edges
as well as the cube location in space (position and orientation).
Size (px): Total amount of pixels of the texture map.

2386
 Texture
The texture icons will become available in the toolbar when importing a session containing texture data.
If you Clean, Improve, or Edit a mesh, the texture will temporarily be removed. To reapply the texture, use
the Apply texture function.
The texture display is available through the display panel.

Icon Menu Action

File | Import texture To import texture data.

To reimport the modified

File | Import snapshot
projections in VXelements.

File | Export texture To export data.

To export a planar
projection of the current
File | Export snapshot viewpoint. This function also
allows editing it in the
image edition software.
To reapply the texture
Tools | Apply texture recorded during the
acquisition on the mesh.

2387
Icon Menu Action
To display the 2D texture
file as a bitmap in the
specified projection:

l %: Digital zoom
percentage

l Size: Total amount

of pixels
Tools | View texture
l RGB: RGB color
model (Red, Green,
Blue)

l Position: Position of
the pointed pixel
with mouse

Right- click the 2D texture

file to:

l Zoom in (50, 100 or

200 %).

l Display the Whole

image in the 2D
display.

l Select Quick
rendering while
moving to lighten
file.

l Choose Show
triangles on texture
to visualize
triangles.

2388
Properties

This function provides information on the mesh's properties.

Right- click the mesh, then Properties to display information. It is possible to Copy the Properties
information or Export it as a .csv file.
Triangle count: Number of triangles counted within the active mesh.
Vertex count: Number of vertices counted within the active mesh.
Mean edge length (mm): Mean length of all triangles.
Watertight: Indicates whether the mesh is watertight or not. Watertight: No means there are holes on
the active mesh.
Volume (mm3): Volume of the mesh.

l Watertight: Yes: The volume is accurate.

l Watertight: No: The volume is only approximate.

Area (mm2): Sum of all the triangle areas.

Boundary count: Number of boundaries counted within the active mesh.
Boundary perimeter (mm): Sum of all the boundary lengths.
Center of mass (mm): Position where all of the mass is concentrated on the mesh following the X, Y
and Z axis.
Bounding box size (mm): Dimension of the smallest box that can be fit to the mesh following the X, Y
and Z axis.

2389
VXprobe Overview
VXprobe is the probing data acquisition module integrated in VXelements. It is designed to be used with
a HandyPROBE and it includes several features.

Input and output formats

See the File Types section.

Technical requirements
VXprobe has standard requirements for installation and usage.

Using VXprobe
VXprobe interface
Add entities
Add alignments
Using VXelements with metrology software

2390
VXprobe Interface

The HandyPROBE does not apply to the R-Series product line.

As a module of VXelements software, VXprobe's interface is similar to other modules.

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Configure menu
The Configure menu contains functionalities which allow configuring and calibrating devices.
C-Track: Option related to the C-Track and HandyPROBE Next stylus.
Probes: Option related to the probe tip.
Calibrate HandyPROBE with cone: To launch the stylus calibration using the cone artifact.
Calibrate HandyPROBE with sphere: To launch the stylus calibration using the sphere artifact.
Calibration journal: Option related to the calibration journal history.

Toolbar
Icon Function Action
Click the icon to show the active modules within the
Module selector
current session and select desired module to switch.

To create reference frames to align measurements to a

Alignment
reference.

2391
Icon Function Action

To create entities in the inspection program and

Entities create dimensions from which entities can be added
to the report.

To create a color map to compare a mesh to a

Color map
reference.
To create entity annotations. When it is activated, click
Entity annotations
an entity in the 3D viewer to create an annotation.
To create deviation annotations. When it is activated,
Deviation
click scan data or probed points in the 3D viewer to
annotations
create a deviation annotation.
To display the minimum and the maximum
Add min. max.
annotations of the entity or the color map selected in
annotations
the inspection program.

Close all annotations To close all created annotations in the 3D viewer.

Add a note that appears with the entities in the

Note
inspection program.

2392
 Icon Function Action
To create a snapshot item in the inspection program.
The captured image of the scene in the 3D viewer will
be displayed in the report.
Select Show in frontpage to display the snapshot on
the front page of the report.

The viewer alignment is used at

the moment of creation of the
snapshot. Changing the
Snapshot alignment of an entity will
update the measurements.

To adjust the dimension of an existing snapshot to the

actual viewer dimension, select the Fit to viewer
window check box.

The Fit to viewer window action

cannot be undone.

Report To generate an inspection report.

To launch the measurement of all the unmeasured

Measure all
items of the inspection program.
To launch the measurement of the selected items in
Measure selected the inspection program. The selected items that were
previously measured are remeasured.
To clear the measurement of all the items in the
Clear all
inspection program.
To clear the measurement of the selected items in the
Clear selected
inspection program.

Accept To accept the measurement of the current item.

To accept the current item and to stop the

Stop
measurement.

Delete To delete selected triangles from the active mesh.

Delete selected
To delete the selected targets.
targets

Contextual menu

2393
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item in
the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Import functions

Click and select an option:

l C-Track positioning targets

l Mesh in VXmodel

l Mesh in VXinspect

l Optical measurement

l Tracking model

l Reference

l Inspection

l Probe database

VXinspect does not support texture. Only the mesh will be imported.

System panel
Located at the right side of the 3D viewer, the system panel displays the status and the parameters of the
activated device. For details, see the System panel section.

Stylus communication signal quality

The communication signal quality shows the quality of the communication between the HandyPROBE
Next stylus and the controller. The signal can be affected by Wi-Fi signal, radio, mobile phone, electrical
equipment, etc.

If there is some interference, the behavior of the probe can be affected.

2394
Signal quality status
Good

Low

Bad

Battery level status

Full

Medium

Low

Very low *

Empty *

* Stylus sound will be stopped to preserve battery.

For details on how to replace the stylus batteries, see the HandyPROBE Hardware and Components
section.

Connected device information

For details, see the C- Track Operating Principles and HandyPROBE Next Operating Principles
sections.

2395
Using VXprobe
VXprobe is a fully integrated module in VXelements software. Using this module it is possible to:

l Add probe tips

l Configure C-Track and probe tips.

l Calibrate probe tips

l Configure devices

l See the status of activated devices.

l Set multiple parameters

l Create entities and alignments.

See VXprobe Interface for more information.

2396
VXprobe | Add Entity

Tools | Entities
The Entities menu provides tools for entity creation which are available through the menu bar or the
toolbar.

It is possible to create an entity by selecting a portion of mesh with the selection tools and then
selecting an entity through the menu bar or the toolbar.

Select CAD faces (with the Ctrl key) before launching an entity creation. This filters
the entity type that can be created, based on the selection. Then right-click in the
3D viewer to create the entity.
Double-clicking an entity will allow its values to be edited.

Some Measurement methods for entities are not applicable to VXprobe.

Point
Plane
Line
Cylinder
Circle
Sphere
Slot
Cone
Rectangle
Surface
Slab
Curve
Quick entities

Distance
Angle

2397
Inspection Entities | Point

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Point

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2398
 Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Compensation direction
Set the probe direction compensation:

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Measurement method Edges

This method is available when having a CAD reference.

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2399
 (Edges): Hold Ctrl and click to select an edge in the 3D viewer.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Data availability on 1 or 2 faces does not change the automatic selection parameters, but has an
impact on the calculation filter parameters.
Mesh data from 2 faces

Mesh data from 1 face

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2400
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Edge length [2]: Maximum search distance along the edge of the nominal reference of the entity to
the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

Mesh data from 2 faces

The adjacent surface selection to the constraining surface will be projected onto the constraining
surface. An edge (polyline) will be calculated.

Mesh data from 1 face

Since there is no adjacent surface to project onto the constraining surface, mesh vertices on the edges
will be used to calculate the edge (polyline).

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2401
 Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2402
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2403
 Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Radius [3]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh data.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2404
Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Nominal mesh
Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

2405
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Vertex selection: Select the nominal point by selecting a vertex on the reference mesh displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Construction

Construction method
Two-line intersection: Create a point using 2 intersecting lines.

Three-plane intersection: Create a point using 3 intersecting planes.

2406
Line-plane intersection: Create a point by intersecting a line with a plane. Example: the axis of a
cylinder intersecting with its top plane provides the center of the cylinder top circle.

Point projected on plane: Create a point by projecting a point onto a plane.

Point projected on line: Create a point by projecting a point onto a line.

Extract from existing entity: Create a point by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a point from a circle will get the center of the circle).

Line-circle intersection

2407
: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a circle's perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select circle: Select an existing circle or Create a new circle.

Line-cylinder intersection
: Create a point at the exit or entry point of a line at a cylinder's perimeter.

l Point selection: Choose the Entry Point or Exit Point for the point.

l Select line: Select an existing line, Create (a) new line, or create a Line by 2 vertices.

l Select cylinder: Select an existing cylinder or Create a new cylinder.

Average point selection: Create a point by averaging the coordinates of 2 or more points.

2408
Measurement method Cross-section
Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2409
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Edges: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding edge(s) features on the CAD displayed
in the 3D viewer.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Compensation direction
Set the probe direction compensation:

2410
 l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l CAD surface at nominal point: The compensation direction is opposite to the direction of the
normal CAD surface at nominal position.

l CAD surface at measured point: The compensation direction is opposite to the direction of the
normal CAD surface at measured point position.

l From existing axis

Nominal numerical values

Point: Set the XYZ position of the point. allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Radius: Size of the acceptance zone around the nominal point.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2411
Dimensions
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.

2412
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2413
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2414
Inspection Entities | Plane

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Plane

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2415
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting Orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation Axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Probing parameters

2416
 Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

2417
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

: Allows extracting values from existing entities.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting Orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation Axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.

2418
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.

2419
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

2420
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment

2421
 In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the
report. To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2422
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

allows extracting values from existing entities.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: set the center of the plane.
Starting orientation: select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation axis: select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Construction

2423
Construction method

Plane offset: Create a plane by offsetting a specific distance from an existing plane. The plane is offset
in the direction of the plane normal.

Plane offset through a point: Create a plane by offsetting a plane through an existing point and
maintaining the orientation of the point.

Point and normal line: Create a plane centered on a point, using a line as the plane normal.

l The plane is perpendicular to the line.

l Offset the constructed plane through the point.

Average point selection: Create a best-fit plane using at least 3 points.

Average plane: Create a plane by averaging the centroid position and the normal vector orientation
of the reference planes.

2424
 Middle plane: Create a plane at the middle angle of 2 planes.

Point and coplanar line: Create a plane using a selected point and a line. The resulting plane is
coincident with the line and the point.

The line can also be either be a cone or cylinder axis or a plane normal.

Measurement method Optical probing

Optical probing: Use positioning targets acquired by the C- Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the
HandySCAN 3D to measure an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2425
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2426
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Normal: Set the orientation of the plane normal.
Center: Set the center of the plane.

allows extracting values from existing entities.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Nominal numerical values

Position XYZ: Set the center of the plane.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the plane.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the plane will rotate.
Angle (°): Set the angle of rotation that the plane (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

2427
 l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh symmetry plane

Nominal

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

If only a part of the mesh is symmetric, it is important to make the selection in

order to extract the best symmetry plane.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2428
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

If only a part of the mesh is symmetric, it is important to make the selection in

order to extract the best symmetry plane.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Construction
Select plane: Select an existing plane, Create (a) new plane, or Draw (a) line.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.

2429
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured normal of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal normal of the entity.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the

2430
 ± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2431
Inspection Entities | Line

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Line

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2432
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2433
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

2434
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2435
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2436
 Legend

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraining plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2437
 Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: To set the maximum percentage of rejected triangles mesh data from the
calculated entities.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2438
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.

2439
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.

2440
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

2441
 Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the fitted entity than the set value.

2442
Measurement method Vertex selection
Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

2443
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2444
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2445
Construction

Construction method
Two-plane intersection: Create a line by intersecting 2 planes.

Line projected on plane: Create a line by projecting a line onto a plane.

Extract from existing entity: Create a line by extracting the corresponding feature from an existing
entity (example: extracting a line from a cylinder will get the axis of the cylinder).

Average point selection: Create a line by connecting 2 or more points.

Average line: Construct a line by averaging the location and the orientation of selected lines.

Middle line: Construct a bisector line at intersection of selected lines.

2446
 Point and orientation: Starting from a selected point, construct a line parallel to a selected plane
normal.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2447
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

2448
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2449
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Origin: At the starting point of the line. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the line. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation where the line (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the line.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

2450
 Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Negative: Compensation applied in the opposite normal direction of the part surface.

l Positive: Compensation applied in the normal direction of the part surface.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to

2451
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.

2452
 Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2453
Inspection Entities | Cylinder

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Cylinder

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

2454
Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points

2455
 Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2456
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2457
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2458
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2459
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

2460
Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2461
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2462
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Construction
Line: Create a cylinder centered and oriented on the selected line with a specified diameter and height.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2463
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

(Orientation and Center): Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2464
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal orientation and center

Orientation: Set the IJK orientation of the cylinder. The rotation center point is located at the mid-

length of the cylinder axis. Click and select an entity to extract its values.
Center: Set the center points XYZ of the cylinder.
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Nominal numerical values

Position: Set the center of the cylinder.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the cylinder.
Rotation axis: Select an axis around which the cylinder will rotate.
Angle: Set the angle of rotation that the cylinder (Starting orientation) will rotate around the axis
(Rotation axis).
Length: Set the length of the cylinder.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

2465
 Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

The X1, Y1, and Z1 refer to the tail of the nominal or measured axis of the entity
and the X2, Y2, and Z2 refer to the head of the nominal or measured axis of the
entity.

2466
Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2467
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2468
Inspection Entities | Circle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Circle

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2469
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Calculation filter parameters

2470
Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2471
 l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2472
Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2473
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2474
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2475
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2476
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

2477
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

2478
 Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2479
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Adjust the coordinates of the nominal center.
Diameter: Select to manually enter the circle nominal diameter.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2480
 A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Selection
Shows coordinates of selected points.
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal

2481
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Orient the circle in the direction of a chosen coordinate point. allows extracting
values from existing entities.

2482
Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Construction

Construction method
Center and orientation: Construct a circle from a point or an entity center. The circle normal is
defined from the orientation of a line or a normal. The diameter value is set manually.

Plane-cylinder intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cylinder.

Plane-sphere intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a sphere.

l Select plane: Select a preexisting plane, Create (a) new plane, Draw (a) line in the 3D viewer,
or Pick 3 vertices in the 3D viewer.

l Select sphere: Select a preexisting sphere or Create (a) new sphere.

2483
 Plane-cone intersection: Construct a circle by intersecting a plane and a cone.

Average point selection: Construct a circle using selected points to create a best-fit circle. Need at
least three points.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2484
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the cross-section. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

2485
 Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

2486
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the center of the circle. The point will be projected on the constraint plane. allows
extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the circle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.

2487
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

2488
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

2489
 If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2490
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2491
Inspection Entities | Sphere

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Sphere

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2492
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere.

: Allows extracting values from existing entities.

Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.

2493
 Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

2494
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2495
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2496
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2497
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2498
Measurement method Constructed
Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2499
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Point: Create a sphere centered on the selected point with a set diameter.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:

2500
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ position of the sphere. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Diameter: Set the diameter of the sphere.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Probing parameters

2501
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error Distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart

2502
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2503
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2504
Inspection Entities | Slot

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Slot

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.
Setting a datum entity label may change the information displayed in the Error distribution and/or
Dimensions panel depending on settings.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

2505
 Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.

2506
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Two points: Select the check box to choose the 2 points to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

2507
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

2508
 None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

2509
Automatic selection parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2510
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

2511
 If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

2512
Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2513
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

2514
 Calculation filter parameters
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2515
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2516
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

2517
Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction

2518
 1. Center: Select an entity to set the XYZ coordinates origin.

2. Normal: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the normal direction.

3. Starting orientation: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the starting
orientation.

4. Angle: Set the rotation angle value of the main axis against the starting orientation
around the normal axis defined.

5. Length: Set the length value of the entity.

6. Width: Set the width value of the entity.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2519
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

2520
Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

2521
Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the slot.

2522
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the slot. The axis will be

projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the slot (Starting Orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the slot.
Width: Set the width of the slot.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.

2523
 Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Two points: Select the check box to choose only 2 points to probe.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Enter manually the length of the slot.
Width: Enter manually the width of the slot.

2524
Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named
Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.

2525
 Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.

When adding a true position GD&T control, set the Directional zone: Length or

Width . The corresponding symbol(s) will appear in the GD&T pane and the
Dimension pane of the inspection program table.

For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

2526
Apply parameters to all parts
Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2527
Inspection Entities | Cone

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Cone

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2528
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Probing parameters
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

2529
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2530
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2531
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2532
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.

Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [3] and angle [4]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance and angle to the calculated
entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

2533
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions

2534
 Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2535
 When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction - Construction method

Base and height

Create a cone using the base entity diameter (circle) and the cone height values.
Angle definition: Select between Half angle or Top diameter option and set the values.

l Half angle

1. Base: Base entity with diameter (circle)

2. Height: Cone height

3. Half angle: Cone half angle

2536
 l Top diameter

1. Base: Base entity with diameter (circle)

2. Height: Cone height

3. Top diameter: Cone top diameter

Two points and base diameter

Create a cone using two points and base diameter values.
Angle definition: Select between Half angle or Top diameter option and set the values.

l Half angle

1. Base point: Base entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

2. Base diameter: Cone diameter at base point

3. Top point: Top entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

4. Half angle: Cone half angle

l Top diameter

2537
 1. Base point: Base entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

2. Base diameter: Cone diameter at base point

3. Top point: Top entity point (point, circle, sphere, etc.)

4. Top diameter: Cone top diameter

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2538
Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Orientation: Set the orientation of the cone.

Apex: Set the position of the apex of the cone. allows extracting values from existing entities.
Half angle: Set the value of the half angle of the cone.
Distance from the apex: Set the distance from the apex at which the cone starts (for truncated cone).
Height: Set the height of the cone.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2539
 Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Probing parameters
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell
in the Nominal column with a small triangle in the upper-right corner.
Two other options are available:
Flip measurement: To flip the direction of the measured axis of the entity.
Flip nominal: To flip the direction of the nominal axis of the entity.

The X1, Y1 and Z1 refer to the tail of the nominal or measured axis of the entity and
the X2, Y2 and Z2 refer to the head of the nominal or measured axis of the entity.

2540
Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2541
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2542
Inspection Entities | Rectangle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Rectangle

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

2543
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

2544
Calculation filter parameters
Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2545
 l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2546
Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2547
 Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected..

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

2548
 Legend

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Calculated entity

Calculated normal

Constraining surface

Edge thickness [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [4]: Maximum search distance from the fitted entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [5]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the fitted entities.
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

l Percentage [6]: The set percentage of triangles with the highest distance to the fitted entity
are excluded.

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

If the check box next to Outlier filter (%) is not selected, no filter will be applied.

Measurement method Mesh

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2549
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2550
Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

Legend

Constraining surface

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

2551
 Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.
Constraining plane

Min. distance [3]: Select the check box to set the minimum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Max. distance [4]: Select the check box to set the maximum search distance from the nominal
constraint plane of the entity to the triangles mesh data.
Flip: Invert the search direction for the min/max distance values set by flipping the nominal constraint
plane normal.
Symmetric: Apply the min/max distances in a symmetrical manner in relation to the nominal
constraint plane.

Calculation filter parameters

Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.

2552
 Legend

Constraining surface

Selection zone

Mesh data

Calculated entity

Constraining surface [CS]: Surface onto which points will be projected.

None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance [5]: Exclude the triangles with a higher distance to the calculated entity than the set value.

Excluded triangles will be displayed in pink.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2553
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Constraining plane

2554
 Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

2555
 Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity
nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

2556
 Construction

1. Center: Select an entity to set the XYZ coordinates origin.

2. Normal: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the normal direction.

3. Starting orientation: Select a line, an axis or a normal of an entity to set the starting
orientation.

4. Angle: Set the rotation angle value of the main axis against the starting orientation
around the normal axis defined.

5. Length: Set the length value of the entity.

6. Width: Set the width value of the entity.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Enter manually the diameter of the circle.

Measurement method Cross-section

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

2557
 Cross-section: Select the entity nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the cross-
section displayed in the 2D viewer. An average of the selected entities will be computed.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Automatic selection parameters

Max. distance: Set the maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangle mesh data.
Max. angle: Set the maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the closest nominal reference of the entity.

2558
 Calculation filter parameters
Outlier filter: Exclude triangles of a calculated entity (measurement) using different parameters. The
fitted entity is calculated either from the best fit or the counterpart of the remaining triangles.
None: No filter is applied to the calculated entity.
Percentage: Calculates the entity after excluding a set percentage of outliers.
Distance: Calculates the entity after excluding outliers a set distance from the average distribution.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Fit on CAD model: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer and an average of the selected entities will be computed.

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

When None is chosen as Nominal, the selection tools are accessible to directly
measure the entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.

2559
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

Nominal numerical values

Center: Set the XYZ coordinates for the center of the rectangle.
Starting orientation: Select an axis, which will be the starting orientation of the rectangle. The axis will

be projected on the constraint plane. flips the orientation of the selected axis.
Rotation: Set the angle of rotation that the rectangle (Starting orientation) will rotate on the constraint
plane.
Length: Set the length of the rectangle.
Width: Set the width of the rectangle.

2560
Automatic selection parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
One point: Select the check box to choose only 1 point to probe.

2561
 Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:

l Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus
orientation on the first point probed.

l None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

l Inside: Compensation is forced to an internal feature (hole).

l Outside: Compensation is forced to an external feature (pin).

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Length: Enter manually the length of the rectangle.
Width: Enter manually the width of the rectangle.

Dimensions

If a datum label is assigned to the entity with GD&T ASME Y14.5 standard or if
the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the Dimensions pane is named

2562
 Counterpart dimensions.

Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.

2563
 Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.

When adding a true position GD&T control, set the Directional zone: Length or

Width . The corresponding symbol(s) will appear in the GD&T pane and the
Dimension pane of the inspection program table.

For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

2564
Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2565
Inspection Entities | Surface

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Surface

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2566
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
probed data points..

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Mesh

Extract triangles from a scanned surface.

Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from
which the triangles will be extracted.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

2567
 Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle [2]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity.

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2568
 Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ
based on the options set.

Nominal dimensions
Diameter: Set the diameter of the cylinder.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Construct the entity using existing features.

Even if the Constructed measurement method is selected, all the entity

nominal creation methods are available in the Nominal menu.

2569
Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Triangle selection: Select the entity's nominal by selecting triangles on the reference mesh
displayed in the 3D viewer.

l Nominal mesh: Select the mesh from which the triangles extraction is done.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Point selection: Measure a surface by selecting existing surface points.

Calculation filter parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.

Selection
Show (selected check box) or hide (cleared check box) each measured point with the entity in the
report.

2570
Measurement method Optical probing
Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Nominal

Pick on CAD: Select the entity's nominal by clicking the corresponding feature on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2571
 Max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. angle: Maximum search angle (°) from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of the
closest nominal reference of the entity

Calculation filter parameters

Surface max. distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the
triangles mesh data.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the surface.
Max: Maximum deviation of the surface.
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in

2572
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.

2573
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2574
Add a Slab

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Slab

This tool creates entities which can later be used for measurements, alignments and can be included in
the inspection program.

Name and Datum entity label

Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.
Choose a datum letter to associate with the entity from the dropdown adjacent the entity's name for
GD&T controls.

Alignment
Select an alignment from the drop-down list.

Plane entities - How to create a slab

Lists all planes from which a slab can be created.
To create a slab:

1. Select desired planes from the list of existing planes. Hovering over the plane on the list
highlights it in the 3D viewer. Selecting the plane creates a preview of the slab in the 3D
viewer.

2. Adjust dimensions and GD&T values if desired.

3. Click OK.

Hovering over particular sections of a CAD in the 3D viewer will highlight an

area where a new Plane can be created to form the basis of a new slab.
Clicking a highlighted portion of mesh will open the Plane panel. Adjust
values for the new plane if desired, and then click OK. This new plane will
automatically be chosen in the Slab panel.

2575
Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report. The symbol ± represents
the range of deviation, i.e. the difference between the Min and Max of the measured data compared to
the calculated entity (best fit or counterpart).
Manually edit the nominal values by double-clicking a cell in the Nominal column with a small triangle in
the upper-right corner.
Symmetric tolerances: Select to replicate the highest absolute value set in the tolerance min/tolerance
max in a symmetry manner for each control.

2576
GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

2577
Inspection Entities | 2D curve

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | 2D curve

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Probe

Probe points using a HandyPROBE device or the probe emulator.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraint plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Curve max. distance: Sets the maximum distance from the probed points to the nominal curve.
Constraining plane

2578
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Min. number of points: Minimum number of points to probe to measure the entity.
Max. number of points: Select this check box to set the maximum number of points to probe to
measure the entity. Once the maximum number of points is reached, the entity will automatically be
accepted and the program will move on to the next entity.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:
Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus orientation on
the first point probed.
None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

2579
 Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Measurement method Edges

Extract using an algorithm especially designed for sheet metal or end of part.
Measurement mesh: Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the
triangles will be extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.

2580
 Legend

Nominal reference

Selection zone

Mesh data

Max. distance [1]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of the entity to the triangles
mesh data.
Max. distance from constraint plane [2]: Maximum search distance from the nominal reference of
the entity to the triangles mesh data.

Calculation filter parameters

Legend

Nominal reference

Nominal normal

Selection zone

Mesh data

Mesh normal

2581
 Calculated entity

Curve max. distance [3]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge thickness [4]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh data.
Edge max. deviation [5]: Maximum search distance from the calculated entities to the triangles mesh
data.
Edge max. angle [6]: Maximum search angle from the triangles mesh data normal to the normal of
the calculated entities.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Measurement mesh
Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed. If the assigned alignment is a
DRF alignment, information displayed into the error distribution and Dimension panel may differ based
on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Calculation filter parameters

Constraining plane

2582
A: Constraining plane.
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Measured points
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select measured point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Optical probing

Use positioning targets acquired by the C-Track, the MaxSHOT Next, or the HandySCAN 3D to measure
an entity.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or
optical reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.

2583
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added
in the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target
best fit alignment.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Constraining plane
Select or create a plane onto which the points will be projected.

Automatic selection parameters

Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Max. distance: Maximum distance from the measured target center to the nominal reference of the
entity.
Max. angle: Maximum angle (°) from the measured target normal to the closest nominal reference of
the entity.

Constraint plane
Min. distance [1]: Select the check box to set the minimum distance at which the points must be from
the constraint plane to be accepted.
Max. distance [2]: Select the check box to set the maximum distance at which the points must be
from the constraint plane to be accepted.

2584
 Flip: Invert the direction of the minimum and/or maximum distance in relation to the constraint plane.
Symmetric: Apply the minimum and/or maximum distance in a symmetrical manner in relation to the
constraint plane.

Probing parameters
Alignment: The automatic extraction of the data to be selected will be made from this assigned
alignment. By default, the extraction will be associated to the first alignment created in the inspection
program.
Probing compensation: Set the required probing compensation:
Auto: Option by default. The compensation is done using the HandyPROBE Next stylus orientation on
the first point probed.
None: No compensation applied on the probed points.

Probed points
Select to show each probed point with the entity in the report.

Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-):
Min: Minimum deviation of the 2D curve.
Max: Maximum deviation of the 2D curve.

2585
±: The range of deviation between the Min and the Max.
The selected values will be displayed in the inspection report.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.

2586
 Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

GD&T (VXinspect|Quality Control only)

Create GD&T controls by clicking and edit them by clicking .

Select the corresponding check box to display GD&T information in the report.
Symbol: Select the symbol corresponding to the GD&T control to create.
Tolerance: Set the shape modifier (if applicable), the tolerance value, and the material condition (if
applicable) of the GD&T control.
Datum reference frame: Select the datum reference frame (Primary, Secondary and/or Tertiary) from
the list of created datum.
When creating a new datum alignment in the GD&T pane of any entity that allows it, this new alignment
is automatically added into the inspection sequence. It also becomes available for all entity creation and
color maps.
For details on GD&T, see the VXinspect Interface section.

Apply parameters to all parts

Available when values in Automatic selection parameters or Calculation filter parameters have been
changed and there are multiple parts in the inspection program.
Select to replicate the parameters for the entity for all parts in which the entity is measured.

2587
Quick Entities

Tools | Entities | Quick entities

Automatically creates entities by clicking particular areas of a CAD reference.

Quick entities will not create cross-sections, patterns, slabs, or points.

To create quick entities:

1. Click (Quick entities). Any mesh in the 3D viewer will not be visible while creating
entities with Quick entities leaving only CAD references visible.

2. Hovering over particular areas of the CAD reference will show a preview of an entity.

3. Click to create the entity. Clicking again will create additional entities. All entities will
appear in the inspection program.

4. Click (Quick entities) again to exit Quick entities creation mode.

Quick entities automatically creates a constraining plane for 2D entities.

Select multiple sections of the CAD reference with + click. Quick entities will attempt to create a
geometric entity if it recognizes the selections conforming to one. If no geometric entity is recognized,
Quick entities will create a surface entity from the selections. If multiple line entities are selected, Quick
entities will create a 3D curve.

2588
Inspection Entities | Distance

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Distance

It is also possible to create a distance by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Distance in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Vertex selection

Manually select vertices on the mesh to create measured points that will be used to calculate the entity.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Fit on points: Select the entity's nominal by holding Ctrl key and clicking points on the CAD
displayed in the 3D viewer. The entity will be created using the best-fit on selected points.

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Measurement mesh

2589
 Select a mesh, create a new scan or create a new unselected mesh from which the triangles will be
extracted.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

When the Numerical values is selected as the Nominal, it is possible to set a manual value under the
Nominal numerical values tab.
Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Selection
Show points in report: Select to show the point table used for the measurement in the report.
To delete points, select point(s) in the list and click Delete selected points.

Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

2590
 Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Construction
Select two entities to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal

2591
 Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Cross-section
Select a cross-section from the dropdown.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction
Select or create two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

2592
 Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

When the Numerical values is selected as the Nominal, it is possible to set a manual value under the
Nominal numerical values tab.
Type: Select the type of distance to be created:

l XYZ: Refers to the XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l 3D

Length: Enter the nominal values relating to:

l The XYZ decomposition of the distance.

l The 3D distance.

Dimensions
Select the 3D, X, Y or Z distance(s) and set the tolerances (Tol+ and Tol-). The distance is displayed in the
3D viewer for each selected dimension. These values will also be displayed in the inspection report.

Select Signed check box to set a positive or negative value to the distance
components depending on the direction from the first to the second entity. Clear
the check box to display the absolute distance.

To adjust the placement of the distance's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2593
Inspection Entities | Angle

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Entities | Angle

This tool measures the angle between 2 planes, 2 lines, or a plane and a line.

It is also possible to create an angle by selecting two existing entities in the Navigation panel and then

clicking Angle in the toolbar.

Name
Specific name given to the entity. This text box can be edited and will appear in the inspection report.

Selecting various measurement methods will change the information displayed in the navigation panel. Please view
the corresponding measurement method below for the correct information. Available measurement methods can
be affected by the module currently in use.

Measurement method Constructed

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

2594
 If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of angle to be created:

l XYZ: XYZ decomposition of the angle.

l 3D: 3D angle.

Enter the nominal values of the angle.

Construction
Angle definition

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Entities

Choose two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the angle between them.
Line - line: Construct an angle between 2 selected lines.

Plane-plane: Construct an angle between 2 selected planes.

2595
 Plane - line: Construct an angle between selected plane and line.

Measurement method (Constructed on a cross-section)

Extract the entity from a given cross-section.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Constructed: Construct using existing features.

Cross-section
Select a cross-section from the dropdown.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Construction

2596
 Angle definition

l Acute: Less than 90°

l Obtuse: Between 90° and 180°

l Reflex acute and reflex obtuse: More than 180°

Entities

Select or create two entities from the dropdown menus to measure the distance between them.

Measurement method Manual

Enter and report measured values taken with a manual measuring device such as calipers or pin gauges.

Nominal
Entity nominal creation method:

Numerical values: Enter the numerical values manually to define the nominal entity.

None: No nominal values defined.

Alignment
In the list, select an alignment in which the dimensions will be expressed.

If the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, information displayed into the error
distribution and Dimension panel may differ based on the options set.

Nominal numerical values

Type: Select the type of angle to be created:

l XYZ: XYZ decomposition of the angle.

l 3D: 3D angle.

Enter the nominal values of the angle.

2597
Dimensions
Choose the entity dimensions by selecting their check box and setting their corresponding tolerances
(Tol+ and Tol-). These values will be displayed in the inspection report.

To adjust the placement of the angle's value in the 3D viewer:

1. Click the value in the 3D viewer.

2. Drag it to the desired location.

2598
Inspection Alignment
Tools | Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

The Alignment menu provides alignment creation tools. Each tool is available through the menu bar or
toolbar.
Use these tools to align the measurements with the nominal values. It creates the transformation matrix,
bringing the measurements on the nominal values.
Surface best fit
Point selection
Entity selection
Target best fit
RPS alignment
Manual alignment
Import alignment

To export the transformation matrix of an alignment as a text file (.txt), right-click

the alignment in the navigation tree and select Export selected alignment.

2599
Surface Best Fit Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Surface best fit

This alignment generates a best fit between the scanned data and either CAD data or another scanned
data.

Mobile
Select a mesh to align on the nominal:

l Use the mesh available in the project tree, if there is.

l Create a new scan, if you want to scan into VXinspect.

l Create a new unselected scan, if you want to add a mesh later during the inspection.

Fixed
Select the reference data on which the mobile scan data will be aligned:
Whole CAD: All the CAD surfaces will be used to calculate the best fit alignment.
Pick on CAD*: Only some CAD surfaces will be used to calculate the best fit alignment. Click CAD
surfaces to select them.

* To allow the best fit calculations, the selected surfaces must ideally have different
orientations.

Pre-alignment mode
None: No pre- alignment used. This method is used when the scan is initially pre- aligned with the
reference at the moment of import. It is useful when scanning two meshes using the same positioning
targets.

2600
Manual: Pre-alignment using points pair. Click at least 3 similar positions on the mesh and on the
nominal object.
Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing alignment to pre-align the reference and the mesh.
Automatic: Default mode. Automatic pre-alignment of the mesh and CAD model. Following the pre-
alignment, the surface best-fit will automatically be calculated.

If the surface best fit calculated during an automatic pre-alignment is not

satisfying, click Measure selected. Click Reset in the Calculation Filter Parameters
section of the Navigation panel, proceed to a manual pre-alignment, then click
Accept.

Calculation filter parameters

To set the mesh data selection considered in the algorithm. After the initial alignment, the mesh data
with a deviation higher than these values will be discarded for the final alignment:
Maximum distance: Maximum distance from the triangles to the nominal surface of the entity.
Maximum angle: Maximum angle (°) from the triangle normal to the closest nominal normal surface of
the entity.
Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of iterations for the algorithm to compute the best
solution possible.

Constraints
It is possible to apply constraints to the best fit method and to specify which entity or degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment.
None: No constraint is applied; a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will pair entities from the mobile mesh with entities of the fixed mesh.
Unconstrained rotations and translations will be best fitted.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

Best fit measurement method

If using the Manual Pre-alignment mode, the 3D viewer will split in two. The left side will show the
scan data from the scan source and the right side will show the reference. Once at least 1 point has been
selected on both the scan data and the reference, a preview of the pre-alignment will be displayed on
the left side. If less than 3 points are selected, both the data and the CAD 3D viewer orientation are taken

2601
in consideration to perform the pre-alignment.
The left pane displays the Surface best fit Calculation filter parameters.

To perform a surface best fit with manual pre-alignment

1. Launch the Surface best fit measurement function.

2. Orient the data and CAD the same direction in the 3D viewer (orientation is used for pre-
alignment when less than 3 corresponding points are selected).

3. Select (Ctrl + click) at least 1 point on scan data (left side).

4. Select the corresponding point(s) (Ctrl + click) on the CAD (right side).

To clear the points, click Reset.

5. Click Align to perform the alignment.

6. Verify that the alignment is acceptable.

l Select Reset or Clear to go back in the point selection mode.

l Select Accept to accept the alignment and move to the next entity to measure (if
applicable).

l Select Stop to accept the alignment and stop the measurements.

Toolbar display
Icon Action

To accept the measured points. If more entities were asked to be measured it goes to the
next entity to measure.

To accept the measured points and stop the inspection.

To clear the measured points of all entities.

To clear the measured points from the active entity.

2602
Point Selection Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Point selection

This function allows an alignment based on point entities.
A best fit of the selected points is performed. At least 3 points must be selected.

Construction
Select the point entities from the list.

Selection
Display the XYZ position and deviation for every point selected.
Select Show points in report to display the alignment in the report.

Constraints
It is possible to apply constraints to the best-fit method and to specify which entity and degrees of
freedom will be used during the alignment:
None: No constraint is applied, a standard surface best fit is computed.
Entities: The alignment will prioritize the selected entities during the alignment.
Degrees of freedom: Specify which degrees of freedom are available to move during the alignment.

Error distribution
The distribution error chart of the measured points against the calculated entity.

If a datum label is set and/or the assigned alignment is a DRF alignment, the
Dimensions pane (representing best fit calculation) will be updated to Counterpart

2603
dimensions (representing counterpart calculation). This only applied to GD&T
ASME Y14.5 standard set in VXinspect options.

Words in parenthesis can appear with the mouse hover on Dimensions and counterpart dimension…
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum values
to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the ± control in
the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries will deselect the
Automatic values check box.
Adjusting boundaries: Manually adjust the boundaries by either inputting values adjacent the colored
boxes or click+drag one of the two whiskers on the graph (the displayed percentage will adjust
accordingly while moving the whiskers).
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box is
disabled.
Edit color map: Click the Edit color map hyperlink to open a dialog box which enables selecting a
number of options.
Color scale type: Set the color scale type to Discrete or to Continuous.
Positive divisions: Set the number of positive divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected.
Negative divisions: Set the number of negative divisions outside of tolerance. This option is only
available when the Discrete color scale is selected and the Symmetric check box is not selected.
Symmetric: This option forces symmetrical upper and lower limits in the color map. When the
Symmetric check box is selected, the Negative divisions menu found in the Edit color map dialog box
is disabled.
Automatic values: This mode uses the probed points or mesh triangles' minimum or maximum
values to set the color scale upper and lower limits. The green zone is set using the tolerance of the
± control in the Dimensions table. It only allows a Symmetric color scale and moving the boundaries
will clear the Automatic values check box.
Reset divisions: Adjusts all the divisions evenly.
Reset color: Reset the modified division color(s) to their original one.
Reset to defaults: Reset to color map default settings from Configure | Options | Color Map.

2604
Entity Selection Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Entity selection

This function uses existing entities to align the measurements following the priority concept.
Translations and rotations must be fully constrained for the reference frame to be created.

Use nominal coordinate system

Check box selected: To use the native CAD coordinate system origin.
Check box cleared: To define a new CAD coordinate system origin using entities and constraints.

The new coordinate system will then be available into alignments and entities as
well as in the GD&T pane of every entity.

Construction
This section allows selecting items available to construct the alignment.
Entity: Select the entities to use to build the reference frame.
Constraint: This section displays a live preview of unconstrained rotations and translations (which are
not constrained by the selected entities).

2605
Target Best Fit Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | Target best fit

This function generates a best fit to a CAD model using an optical measurement such as positioning
targets or optical reflectors.
If the alignment fails, an error message will be displayed, "Max. number of iterations reached..." Try using
a different configuration or settings to achieved an effective alignment.

Target type
When performing an optical measurement, an offset thickness of the target must be set:
Create new target type: Select the type of targets used for measurement (positioning targets or optical
reflectors) or create a new type of targets by specifying its name and thickness.
No offset (0 mm/in): Targets are assumed to have no thickness.

Optical measurement
Choose from which optical measurements the extraction will be performed. A new entry will be added in
the inspection program. This option is only available with the Optical probing method or the Target best
fit alignment.

Pre-alignment mode
Select the pre-alignment method:
None: No pre-alignment.
Manual: Pre-alignment using point pair.
Existing alignment: Pre-alignment using an existing reference frame.

Calculation filter parameters

2606
Maximum distance: Maximum search distance from the nominal target point to the triangles mesh
data.
Maximum angle: Maximum search angle from the nominal target point to the triangles mesh data.
Maximum number of iterations: Set the maximum number of iterations for the algorithm to compute
the best solution possible. Max. distance and max. angle will be recalculated at each iteration.

2607
RPS Alignment

Some features are available only with VXinspect|Quality Control.

Tools | Alignment | RPS alignment

This function aligns the mesh using entity center points and specific constraints and weight. It is typically
used for alignment using tooling balls on an inspection jig.

To add a RPS alignment

1. Select entities in the RPS Alignment pane using the check boxes.

2. In the constraints table, select the coordinates (X, Y, Z) to constrain each center point using
the check boxes.

3. Set the entity weight under the weight column.

Entity weight ratio =

The point errors are shown under the Point errors pane. The 6 DOFs must be fully
constrained for the point errors table to appear. Select the Show in report check
box to display this information in the inspection report.

4. Click OK.

2608
Manual Alignment

Tools | Alignment | Manual alignment

This function aligns the mesh from its current (active) alignment by entering values in Text boxes or
directly with the 3D manipulator.

Name
Specific name given to the entity.

To add a manual alignment

Method 1

1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Create and apply constraint(s) (optional).1

3. Use the 3D manipulator to modify mesh translations or rotations to the X, Y and Z

coordinate system.

4. Click OK.

Method 2

1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Create and apply constraint(s) (optional).1

3. Set numerical values for mesh translations and/or rotations.

4. Click OK.

1 Constraint(s) and displacement(s) are apply to measured data only.

Use Reset to set the values to zero.

2609
Import alignment

Tools | Alignment | Import alignment

Aligns the selected mesh(es) from either a (.txt) file or an alignment in another open session.

To import alignment
1. Select the Starting alignment in the drop-down list.

2. Click Import alignment from file.

3. Browse and open a previous saved alignment (.txt file).

4. Select Invert pose option to invert the alignment. The alignment information will be
updated in real time.

5. Click OK.

2610
VXprobe | Using VXelements with a
Metrology Software
To use the HandyPROBE with metrology software:
1. Launch the third-party metrology software.

2. In the metrology software, connect the HandyPROBE by using the relevant VXelements
API connection function (the API is connected when the system panel is displayed).

3. All the VXelements options are available in the system panel, but some are also available
by right-clicking the VXelements plug-in window.

See the metrology software user manual for further information.

2611
VXtrack Overview
VXtrack software module exposes the dynamic tracking of the C- Track stereo camera sensor to a
generalized tracking application. It can record high- frequency information over the position and
orientation of multiple optical reflectors in the tracker field of view. Such applications include:

l Tracking a robotic arm

l Tracking assembly operations

l Tracking machine tool paths

l Low-frequency vibration analysis

l Capturing movement

l Non-rigid body deformation, large strain measurement

l Analysis of assembly kinematics

This module offers a graphical user interface to manage tracked models, configure the data acquisition
sequence, visualize live tracking data and export the results.
Interface
Using VXtrack
Positioning model
Tracking models
Tracking sequences
Data acquisition

2612
VXtrack Interface

Menu bar
The menu bar and the toolbar are complementary to each other. The toolbar offers the main
functions, while some advanced functions are only available in the menu bar.

Toolbar
Icon Function Action

Click the icon to show the active modules within the

Module selector
current session and select desired module to switch.

To start and stop data acquisition mode and activate the C-

Start tracking
Track so that new models can be created.
To enter and exit the mode used for detecting the targets
Detect model available in the 3D viewer and selecting 1 or more to create
a new tracking model.

Add tracking sequence To add a tracking sequence to the navigation tree.

To create a new tracking sequence in the navigation tree by

Copy tracking sequence
copying the currently selected sequence.

Contextual menu
Frequently used functions are accessible in the contextual menu. Right-click the 3D viewer or an item in
the interface to display this menu. For details, see the VXelements Contextual Menu section.

Navigation panel
Use the Navigation panel to navigate between the components of a VXtrack session and perform
various actions.
Select a node to display its components and to get access to its details. Right-click the node or item(s)
contained in the node to access Contextual Menu functions.

2613
 To show only the selected items in the 3D viewer

1. Select one or more items (entity, group, mesh, reference) in the tree
view of the Navigation panel.

2. Right-click and select Show only selected.

Tracking models : Use this node to navigate between all models of the project. Each model has its
own detailed information. Right-click the sub-node to access the Contextual Menu functions.

Tracking sequences : Use this node to navigate between all sequences of the project. Each
sequence has its own detailed information. Right-click the sub-node to access the Contextual Menu
functions.

Using VXtrack
VXtrack is fully integrated into VXelements and requires the use of a C-Track.
VXtrack is a standalone module that must be purchased separately.

It is possible to select VXtrack in the Home page if a C-Track with a proper VXtrack
enabled license file is active in the Product Manager. Updated license files can be obtained on
the Creaform Customer Portal.
It is recommended to have the C-Track connected before starting the module to have access
to all features.

Setup
Connect the C-Track
Calibrate the C-Track
To create a positioning model

Tracking model
To detect a tracking model
To add a tracking model
To view a tracking model

2614
To edit a tracking model
To edit the tracking model parameters
To save a tracking model
To view model positions

Tracking sequence
To create a tracking sequence
To configure the tracking sequence parameters
To copy a tracking sequence
To edit a tracking sequence
To track a model in a sequence
To track a model relatively to another one (add relation)

Data acquisition
Unmatched targets
To view a tracking sequence
To record a tracking sequence
To export a tracking sequence

2615
Positioning Model
The C-Track positioning targets are part of a positioning model used to measure different tracking
models. Measurements taken during tracking sequences will be expressed in the coordinate system of
the positioning model, unless otherwise specified by adding model relations.

To create a positioning model

1. Click to enable the visualization of the C-Track working volume.

2. Make sure that the C-Track and part are well positioned.

3. Set up the C-Track viewpoint using toolbar buttons:

Top viewpoint: Show C-Track top view position in the 3D viewer (-Y).

Back viewpoint: Show C-Track back view position in the 3D viewer (-Z).

Side viewpoint: Show C-Track side view position in the 3D viewer (+X).

Isometric viewpoint: Show C-Track isometric view position in the 3D viewer (-X, -Y, -Z).
Lock/unlock C-Track viewpoint: To make the C-Track External Viewpoint fixed in the 3D
viewer.

4. Proceed to the target acquisition.

Target acquisition
To acquire targets, select a method through the Reference section of the system panel.

2616
 The last action performed sets the default action.

Click to automatically detect and acquire all visible targets in

Auto-detect targets
the C-Track volume to create the reference model.

1. Click to manually detect visible targets in the C-

Track volume.

2. Choose a selection tool available through the

mini toolbar in the 3D viewer:

l
rectangle
Manual detect targets
l
free form

3. Select the targets in the 3D viewer (hold Ctrl +

click).

4. Select the target type through the dropdown list.

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

1. Click to automatically match what is detected by

the C-Track with the target template file.

2. Select an existing target model file (.txt).

Detect targets from
template 3. Click Open.

4. Change the target selection (if applicable).

5. Click Accept to finalize the detection.

Clear C-Track positioning To clear all targets from the positioning model.

Reference positioning target statuses

The target is seen by the C-Track and is part of the active model (Part Reference).
The target is detected, but has a possible issue (e.g. damaged, dirty or at too high of an
incident angle).
The target is seen by the C-Track but is not part of the active model.
The target is not seen by the C-Track but is part of the active model.

2617
After the detection process, the number of targets seen by the C-Track is displayed
in the Visibility pane of the system panel.

2618
Tracking Models
Tracking models are entities that can be tracked in all degrees of freedom (translations and rotations)
using various accessories such as coded targets and groups of optical reflectors or positioning targets.
Models can be rigid or non-rigid:
Rigid

l Model does not allow its targets to move individually.

l Must include either:

l a minimum of 4 targets reflectors. This can be a combination of the targets and coded
targets.

l OR a single coded target.

l Model must be stable during the acquisition of targets according to the active referential.

l The position and orientation can be outputted.

Non-rigid

l Model allows relative movement in between its targets.

l Must include at least 1 optical reflector and/or coded target.

To detect a tracking model

1. Click (toolbar or menu bar). Once the detection mode is activated, a window appears
with available options and the 3D viewer displays all the targets currently seen by the C-
Track.

2. Using VXelements selection tools, choose the targets (at least 1) to include in the
reference system. Blue unselected targets turn red in the 3D viewer once chosen. As they
are selected, the targets appear in the Detected targets box of the VXtrack tab in the
System panel.

3. Select the right type of target for each item through the drop-down menu.

4. Click Accept to create a model and exit the detection mode. To clear the selection, click
Clear All.

2619
To add a tracking model
Import a model from a positioning target file (allows combinations of targets and coded
targets)

1. Click , then choose Tracking model (or go to File | Import | Tracking model).

2. Select a TXT file (.txt) that contains the desired targets.

This file may have been created after performing a photogrammetry (MaxSHOT
Next) or a Detect targets (C-Track).

Create a single coded target model (allows only 1 coded target per model)

1. Right-click the Tracking models node.

2. Select Add coded target.

3. Enter the target ID of a coded target in the field under the Detected targets box or choose
a target in the Detected targets box.

4. Click the right-pointing or left-pointing arrow to add or remove a target in or from the
Selected targets box.

5. Click OK.

6. The model is added under the Tracking models node.

To view a tracking model

1. Choose the tracking model in the Navigation tree under the Tracking models node.

2. Selected targets will be highlighted in yellow in the 3D viewer.

Choosing a model will enable 2 expanding panes, located under the Navigation tree:
Tracking model details: Provides information about the selected model.
Tracking model parameters: Allows viewing and changing the model parameters.

To edit a tracking model

2620
l Edit the model parameters.

l To rename a tracking model, use the contextual menu function or click it once to enable name
editing. Press Enter on the keyboard or click anywhere else to confirm the changes.

l Right-click a model to access the option to remove it.

l
Click the visibility icon next to a model to show or hide it.

l Double-click the name of a model or click > next to it to see all included targets.

2621
To edit the tracking model parameters

1. Select the tracking model in the navigation tree.

2. Set the parameters (vary whether the model type is Rigid or Non-rigid).

3. Click Apply to confirm and activate the parameters or Cancel to come back and undo any
change.

Selecting a target from a rigid model in the Navigation tree will enable 2 expanding panes:
Positioning target details: Provides information about the target with its Type and Center coordinates.
Positioning target parameters: Allows making target detection mandatory to the detection of the
model.

Rigid tracking model

Parameter Description
Select the minimum number of targets that need to be detected for the
Minimum targets
acquisition to work. The default value is 4 if at least 4 targets are included or 3 if
to detect
only 3 targets are included in the model.
Select which offset to apply (None, Center on targets, Manual, or any of the
listed references available in the Navigation tree).

l None: No offset is made. On a detected model the original reference

will be the origin of the C-Track. On an imported model, the origin will
Origin offset
be the one previously defined.

l Center on targets: Origin centered on the targets model's barycenter.

l Manual: Origin position and orientation are manually set.

Manually input the X, Y and Z positions for the required offset when Origin
Position
offset is set to Manual.
Manually input the X, Y, and Z extrinsic rotations from origin when Origin offset
Angle
is set to Manual.

Non-rigid tracking model

Parameter Description
Set the maximum displacement between 2 detected frames for a specific target
Maximum
to keep its tracking. If the target has moved over the maximum displacement
displacement
between those 2 frames, the tracking of this target is lost.

2622
 Parameter Description
Set the maximum occulted frames for a specific target to keep its tracking. If a
Maximum
target is not seen for that number of frames, the tracking is lost and cannot be
occluded frames
recovered.

Select the check box to update the model target positions in real time. When
tracking is stopped, the target positions will be the ones from the last seen
Update target
position while frame.
tracking
Clear the check box to keep the target positions from the detection (original
model).

To save a tracking model

1. Select the tracking model in the Navigation tree.

2. Go to File | Export | Tracking model.

3. A dialog box will open, allowing the model to be saved in a text (.txt) file format to the
desired location.

The file contains each target position according to the applied Origin offset.

To view model positions

During tracking, click a tracking sequence to display the position of its different tracking models in the
VXtrack tab of the system panel.
After tracking, click a line in the Table view to display the position of the tracking models at that
specific time (also in the VXtrack tab).

2623
Tracking Sequences
Tracking sequences are recordings created to track the positions of partial or complete models.
Selecting Tracking sequences in the Navigation tree enables buttons in the toolbar and in the Tools menu
as well as a tab in the System panel.

To create a tracking sequence

1. Click in the toolbar or in the Tools menu; or

1. Click in the toolbar or in the Tools menu to start tracking without any sequence
selected. Click the same button to stop the sequence at any time.

l Create a new sequence to add all the models in the Tracking models node.

l If the Limit acquisition number and Stop after limit is reached options are activated,
the number of selected measurements will be taken and the recording will stop
automatically.

To configure the tracking sequence parameters

1. In the Navigation tree, select the Tracking sequences node to configure the tracking
sequence parameters.

2. The Tracking parameters expanding pane appears, displaying the parameters that can be
configured.

Limit acquisition number

Select the Limit acquisition number check box to set the number of frames recorded and displayed
during the tracking of a sequence.

Stop after limit is reached (only available if the Limit acquisition number check box is
selected)
Select to automatically stop the tracking when the number of frames indicated in the Limit acquisition
number field is reached.

2624
Clear the option so that the sequence only contains a rolling history of the last number of frames
defined in Limit acquisition number.

Trigger
Set the trigger to C-Track trigger (internal) or External trigger.

l C-Track trigger: The C-Track will control and trigger the remote device. A sync out exists.

l External trigger: The C-Track will be triggered by the external device.

This function is grayed out if the C- Track model does not support triggering. Contact Customer
Support for details.

Polarity
The acquisition of a single measurement is triggered at the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger
signal.

l High: Acquisition is done at the rising edge of the signal.

l Low: Acquisition is done at the falling edge of the signal.

Contact Creaform Customer Support for technical specifications for external

trigger inputs.

Acquisition rate
Set the frequency of the internal trigger at which the C-Track will acquire measurements during the
tracking sequence.
The frequency is expressed in Hertz (Hz), which is the number of measurements taken per second of
measuring. The C-Track maximum acquisition rate is 58 Hz.

40 Hz is 40 measurements recorded per second.

Filtering
Set the specific amount of time during which expected measurements are accumulated instead of
outputting them directly. After accumulating the measurements received, the filtering will make an
average and output only the averaged result. This is equivalent to a moving average calculation.
The expected amount of measurements can be calculated by multiplying the acquisition rate (Hz) by the
filtering (sec).

2625
 This function allows a reduction of unwanted vibrations due to the equipment
uncertainty.

Sampling rate*

Set the speed at which recorded data is outputted. Increase or decrease the number of measurements
outputted by software compared to the number of measurements taken by the C-Track.
Having a lower sampling rate than the acquisition rate is called subsampling, while the opposite is called
oversampling. VXtrack offers only the subsampling option, not the oversampling one.

* Only available with the C-Track 780 and the C-Track 1480. This function is grayed
out if the C-Track model does not support triggering.

To copy a tracking sequence

1. Select the sequence you want to copy from the list in the Navigation tree.

2. Click in the toolbar.

To edit a tracking sequence

l Edit the sequence parameters.

l To rename a tracking sequence, right-click it to access the Rename option or click it once to
enable name edition. Press Enter on the keyboard or click anywhere else to confirm the
changes.

l
Click the visibility icon (show or hide ) to choose the model(s) to track.

l Right-click a sequence to access the option to remove it.

l Right-click a model to access the option to remove it from a sequence.

To track a model in a sequence

The tracking models are automatically assigned to a tracking sequence when created.

2626
To manage manually

1. Right-click the sequence.

2. Select Add model.

3. Choose the model you want to associate with the sequence.

4. Click to use the selected sequence for data acquisition.

To track a model relatively to another one (add relation)

The position of a model can be monitored relative to another model.
To add a model relation

1. Right-click the sequence you want to create the relation with.

2. Select Add model relation or Add model relation in active reference frame.

3. Select the model to track.

4. Select the model the tracking will be referenced to.

5. When done, a new model will be inserted to the sequence and will automatically be
selected.

Difference between Add model relation and Add model relation in active reference frame
functions
Add model relation: Returns the difference in the position of the model to track compared to the model
the tracking will be referenced to, using the coordinate system of the model the tracking will be
referenced to.
Add model relation in active reference frame: Returns the difference of position of the model to track
compared to the model the tracking will be referenced to, but using the C-Track coordinate system.

2627
Data Acquisition
Once tracking models and tracking sequences are set up, start the tracking through the defined trigger.
Click Start tracking to activate the C-Track trigger.
Results are seen in real-time during tracking, and the acquired data appears in the interface afterwards.

Unmatched targets
In each frame, the C-Track gets the single target positions that are not included in any declared model
and add it to the Unmatched targets node.
An unmatched target could be a target for a non-rigid model in which tracking has been lost because of
a major displacement.
The order of the detected targets is random.
Unmatched coded targets appear in the Unmatched targets table.

To view a tracking sequence

While the tracking is stopped, the recordings will be displayed when a sequence is selected in the
Navigation tree:

l For Non-Rigid models, each target can be selected.

l For Rigid models, each target can be selected and the model itself can also be selected to get its
position and/or orientation.

For Rigid models, results can be reviewed in a Graph view (timeline graphs), Table view or Projection
view.
The timeline graphs can be edited with a right-click within the tracked entity window.

Graph view
Displays the position of the models in the tracking sequence, in relation to the time of acquisition, in 2D
graph format.
The active curves can be selected from the Translation and Rotation sub-menus:
Translation

2628
 l Group curves: Groups X, Y, Z curves in the same graph.

l X, Y, Z: Shows or hides the specified coordinate.

Rotation

l Group curves: Groups rX, rY, rZ curves in the same graph.

l rX, rY, rZ: Shows or hides the specified rotation axis.

Euler convention is used and rotation order is ZYX.

l Click the timeline graph to see the model positions at the time indicated by a cursor
(in the 3D viewer).

l Numerical values can be seen in the System panel (Model positions pane under the
VXtrack tab).

The lower scroll bar can be used to reduce the duration of the displayed recording.
The recordings will not be modified.

Table view
Displays the measured positions of the targets or models in the tracking sequence, in table format. Each
measurable component has its own column and all measurements are displayed next to their acquisition
time stamp.
The active columns can be selected from the Translation and Rotation sub-menus:
Translation

l X, Y, Z: Shows or hides the specified coordinate.

Rotation

l rX, rY, rZ: Shows or hides the specified rotation axis.

Projection view

2629
Displays the 2D position of the models in the tracking sequence, from starting to ending position, in 2D
graph format.
The only 2D planes of view available are from projections from the axes of the C-Track positioning target
coordinate system.

l XY projection: Shows or hides the projected trajectory.

l ZY projection: Shows or hides the projected trajectory.

l XZ projection: Shows or hides the projected trajectory.

For Non-rigid models, only the Table view option is available.

To record a tracking sequence

1. Select the sequence to record.

2. Click in the toolbar or in the Tools menu to start the tracking.

To export a tracking sequence

1. Select the sequence to export.

2. Go to File | Export | Tracking sequence.

3. A dialog box will open, allowing the sequence to be saved in the CSV (Comma-Separated
Values) format at the desired location.

Once exported, the CSV file can be imported in any compatible text editor like Microsoft Excel. Refer to
the reader documentation to see how to import CSV files.

The CSV file is formatted to the computer local settings. The Windows settings will
apply (e.g. list separator and digit grouping settings). Contact Creaform Customer
Support for details and assistance.

2630
Smart Control
The Smart Control allows control of the software with:
VXelements
VXinspect
Multifunction buttons
3D display control

2631
VXelements Smart Control
Options

Availability depends on the active module.

Icon Name Description Available when using:

Allows setting the desired
Predefined views views (X+, X-, Y+, Y-, Z+, All devices
Z- and isometric)
Centers the 3D model in
Fit to screen All devices
the 3D viewer
Launches the hardware
Calibration All devices
calibration

Launches the laser MetraSCAN 3D

Configuration
configuration mode MetraSCAN 3D-R
Launches the
Auto. adjust configuration mode in All devices
auto. adjust

HandySCAN BLACK
Activate HDR mode
(while in Configuration Activates the HDR mode MetraSCAN 3D
mode)
MetraSCAN 3D-R
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN 3D
Opens scan mode menu
Scan mode
(surface, targets, points) MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN 3D-R
MetraSCAN 3D
Launches the C-Track MetraSCAN 3D-R
C-Track setup
setup mode
HandyPROBE
MetraSCAN 3D
Top view Provides a top view of the MetraSCAN 3D-R
(if C-Track setup is scene
activated) HandyPROBE
MetraSCAN 3D
Provides a back view of MetraSCAN 3D-R
Back view
the scene
HandyPROBE

2632
 Icon Name Description Available when using:
MetraSCAN 3D
Provides a side view of the MetraSCAN 3D-R
Side view
scene
HandyPROBE
MetraSCAN 3D
Isometric view Provides an isometric view MetraSCAN 3D-R
HandyPROBE
Makes the C-Track
Lock C-Track viewpoint external viewpoint fixed in All devices
the 3D viewer
Go!SCAN SPARK
Applies the Scan HandySCAN BLACK
Finalize
parameters
MetraSCAN BLACK
Optimize volumetric Optimizes position of
HandySCAN 3D
accuracy1 positioning targets
Uses a 3D reference to
delete triangles outside a Go!SCAN SPARK
Use clipping reference
defined range around the HandySCAN 3D
reference

Send scan: To see available export destinations for the current scan session.

Launches HandySCAN 3D
Inspect mesh in
VXinspect|Analysis;
VXinspect|Analysis MetraSCAN 3D
performs best fit
(if Scan and CAD nodes
alignment, creates a color
in the Navigation panel) MetraSCAN 3D-R
map
Inspect mesh in Launches HandySCAN 3D
VXinspect|Quality VXinspect|Quality Control;
Control performs best fit MetraSCAN 3D
(if Scan and CAD nodes alignment, creates a color
in the Navigation panel) map MetraSCAN 3D-R

To send the mesh to

Send to VXmodel All devices
VXmodel.
To send the scan to
different Creaform
Send to different
software (e.g. VXintegrity) All devices
software.
or another version of
VXelements.

Create inspection Launches VXinspect All devices

1The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device working volume.

2633
Icon Name Description Available when using:

Save session Saves the current session All devices

Go!SCAN 3D
Deletes the scan data from
the selected scan node HandySCAN 3D
Reset scan
with the option of keeping
the targets MetraSCAN 3D
MetraSCAN 3D-R

Full screen Toggles full screen mode All devices

Exit Exits the Smart Control All devices

Launches the C-Track

Calibrate C-Track HandyPROBE
calibration

Launches the active probe

Calibrate probe HandyPROBE
calibration

2634
VXinspect Smart Control
General options

Icon Function Action

Show/Hide inspection
To toggle between each item of the inspection program table.
items

Add part To add a new part in the inspection.

To launch the measurement of all the unmeasured entities of the

Measure all
inspection program table.
To launch the measurement of the selected entities in the
Measure selected inspection program table. The selected entities, previously
measured are remeasured.
To clear the measurement of all the entities in the inspection
Clear all
program table.
To clear the measurement of the selected entities in the inspection
Clear selected
program table.

Accept (while
To accept the measurement of the current entity.
measuring)

Specific to HandyPROBE Next

Quick measure
This feature launches the measurement of the entity. Multiple entities are available for creation with the
HandyPROBE Next.

2635
 Icon Action

To create a DRF alignment where the datums are chosen by the probe requirements: needs a
CAD model and pre alignment (optical alignment)

1. Select the primary datum using the HandyPROBE Next. Put the probe on the
physical part near the wanted datum. In the 3D viewer, the highlighted surface
(plane, cylinder, circle, etc) will be selected as the nominal by pressing the
trigger button. Then the measurement is launched.

2. Select the secondary datum using the HandyPROBE Next. Repeat manipulations
with probe.

3. Select the tertiary datum using the HandyPROBE Next. Repeat manipulation
with probe.

To launch the measurement of 2 planes; add a new angle between them.

To launch the measurement of 2 points; add a new distance between them.

To add a plane.

To add a circle.

To add a cylinder.

To add a cone.

To add a surface; the closest surface from the probed points will be the nominal.

To add a surface where the whole CAD is the surface nominal.

To add a slot.

Quick add entity mode

VXinspect provides automatic detection of the part nominal. Once the physical part and the CAD model
are aligned together, it is possible to select the entity nominal with the HandyPROBE Next probe. Upon
selection, it will create the nominal component and launch the measure. This mode is enabled at all
times.
Go to Configure | Options | Inspection to change values of the maximum search distance.

2636
Icon Description

Surfaces and edges are available for selection in the quick add mode.

Only surfaces are available for selection in the quick add mode.

Only edges are available for selection in the quick add mode.

2637
Multifunction Buttons
Some devices are designed with multifunction buttons which allow optimal control. Each control button
has multiple functions assigned depending on what is active in the software.
Go!SCAN SPARK
HandySCAN 3D MAX
HandySCAN BLACK
HandySCAN 307
HandySCAN 700
MetraSCAN BLACK
MetraSCAN 357
HandyPROBE Next
MaxSHOT Next

2638
Go!SCAN SPARK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has a set of 3 buttons on each side. Either set can be used to access functions in scan mode
and out of scan mode. Buttons 1 and 2 are used to adjust zoom and to navigate in the Smart Control.
Button 3 (trigger) is used to accept a function or message.

Scanner status light colors

Color Scanner status

Recording
Ready for acquisition
Connected

Go!SCAN SPARK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in Toggle Fit to screen / Reset viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Start or Exit scan
3 Trigger - Open or Close Smart Control mode
mode

2639
Go!SCAN SPARK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Fit to screen / Reset
1 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
viewpoint
2 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out Toggle Lock / Unlock viewpoint
Enable/disable
1+2 - - -
high resolution
Start or Stop
3 Trigger Stop scan mode Open or Close Smart Control mode
projector

Smart Control

Smart Control remotely accesses key functions during scanning such as Calibration, Configuration, and
Reset scan.

Button Function
1 Navigate up
2 Navigate down
3 Select

2640
HandySCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has 6 buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is the central button used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to start,
pause, or stop the acquisition process. Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to
navigate in the Smart Control.

Trigger button [1] light colors

Color Scanner status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

2641
HandySCAN BLACK
Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed Decrease shutter speed -
decrease
Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed Increase shutter speed -
increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6* Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

HandySCAN BLACK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Fast shutter speed
4 Shutter speed Decrease shutter speed -
decrease
Fast shutter speed
5 Shutter speed Increase shutter speed -
increase
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control Toggle High resolution
6 Smart Control
mode mode enabled / disabled

2642
Smart Control
Smart Control is available during the whole scan process and is designed to remotely access key
functions such as Calibration, Configuration and Reset scan.

Scan mode Out of Scan mode

Button Scan mode Out of Scan mode More ...

1 More ... More ... Select

2 Navigate up
Finalize Increase resolution

3 Navigate down
Reset scan Decrease resolution

4 Full screen -
Calibration
*
5 -
Scanning area Auto. adjust
Enable / Disable high
6 Exit Exit
resolution

* This feature allows toggling between the full laser grid and a 15% size grid.

2643
HandySCAN 307 Multifunction Buttons

HandySCAN 307|Elite and HandySCAN 307

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Open or Exit scan
4 Trigger - -
mode

2644
HandySCAN 307|Elite and HandySCAN 307 during acquisition
Button Function Click Click and hold Double click
Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross /
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode Single line (HandySCAN
307|Elite only)

2645
HandySCAN 700|Elite Multifunction
Buttons

HandySCAN 700|Elite

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Open or Exit scan
4 Trigger - -
mode

2646
HandySCAN 700|Elite during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double click

Toggle Shutter
1 Menu - -
speed / Zoom
Exit Smart Control Open Smart Control
1 Smart Control -
mode mode
Shutter speed Increase shutter Fast shutter speed
2 -
mode (+) speed increase
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom mode (+) Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Shutter speed Decrease shutter Fast shutter speed
3 -
mode (-) speed decrease
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom mode (-) Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
Toggle Laser cross /
4 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line

2647
MetraSCAN BLACK Multifunction Buttons
The scanner comprises 6 buttons having different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The
trigger button is located in the front of the scanner handle. It is mainly used to Start, Pause, or Stop the
acquisition process. It is also used to toggle between the single laser line mode and laser cross mode
(option only available with MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite). Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter
and to navigate in the Smart Control.

Located below the arrow down button [6], a light indicates the scanner status.

Scanner status light colors

Color Status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

MetraSCAN BLACK

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Open or Exit scan mode -
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
Toggle Zoom / Shutter Enable / disable high
3 Toggle -
mode resolution
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed

2648
 Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

MetraSCAN BLACK during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Toggle Laser cross /
1 Trigger Start or Stop lasers Exit scan mode
Single line*
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
Toggle Zoom / Shutter Enable / disable high
3 Toggle -
mode resolution
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6* Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

* This feature is available only with MetraSCAN BLACK|Elite.

VXinspect

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Measure all Measure selected
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - Start 3D display control
mode
3 Toggle - Measure all Measure selected
4 Cancel - Clear all Clear selected
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter speed increase shutter speed
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter speed decrease shutter speed

2649
Smart Control

Smart Control is a tool designed to remotely access key functions during the whole scan process such as
Calibration, Configuration, and Reset scan.

Button Function
2 Select
3 Enable / disable high resolution
5 Navigate up
6 Navigate down

2650
MetraSCAN 3D Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has 6 buttons that have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode. The trigger
button is located in the front of the scanner handle. It is mainly used to Start, Pause, or Stop the
acquisition process. Buttons 2 to 6 are used to adjust zoom and shutter and to navigate in the Smart
Control.

Located below the arrow down button [6], a light indicates the scanner status.
Scanner status light colors

Color Status
Recording
Connected
Ready for acquisition

MetraSCAN 3D

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Start scan mode -
Toggle between zoom
2 Toggle - -
and shutter mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

2651
MetraSCAN 3D during acquisition

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Change laser mode (7
Start, stop scan
1 Trigger Stop scan mode laser cross /1 single
acquisition
line)*
Toggle Zoom / Shutter
2 Toggle - -
mode
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - - -
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

* This feature is available only with MetraSCAN 750.

VXinspect

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Measure all Measure selected
2 Toggle - Measure all Measure selected
Open Smart Control
3 Validate - Start 3D display control
window
4 Cancel - Clear all Clear selected
Zoom in and increase Fast zoom in and
5 Arrow up -
shutter increase shutter
Zoom out and decrease Fast zoom out and
6 Arrow down -
shutter decrease shutter

Smart Control

Smart Control is a tool designed to remotely access key functions during the entire scan process.

Button Function
3 Select
5 Navigate up
6 Navigate down

2652
HandyPROBE Next Multifunction Buttons

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

Open Smart Control Start 3D display
1 Validate Accept feature*
window control
2 Up arrow Zoom in Fast zoom in -
3 Down arrow Zoom out Fast zoom out -
Measure all
4 Trigger Take measurement* Measure selected
Start multishot mode*

Delete the last probed Accept and stop the

5 Cancel -
point measurement
Right pen
6
button Can emulate the behavior of any of the 5 multifunction buttons located on
Left pen the stylus handle.
7
button

* While probing.

2653
MaxSHOT Next Multifunction buttons

Located under the Validate [2] and Cancel [3] buttons, a LED indicator shows the device status.
LED indicator
Color Status

Camera is on stand-by and the cables are properly connected.

Camera is recording (during the photo acquisition).
Camera ready, once the Start photo acquisition has been launched.

Smart Control

VXshot

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

1 Trigger - Start photo acquisition -
Open Smart Control
2 Validate - -
window
3 Cancel - Clean bad targets/pictures -

2654
 Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click
4 Toggle - - -

5 Arrow up Zoom in Fast zoom in -

6 Arrow down Zoom out Fast zoom out -

VXshot during measurements

Button Function Single click Click and hold Double-click

Trigger/
1 Bluetooth Take picture -
shutter*

2 Validate - Open Smart Control -

3 Cancel Delete last picture Stop photo acquisition -

Show faulty status (by
4 Toggle - -
importance)
5 Arrow up Zoom in Fast zoom in -

6 Arrow down Zoom out Fast zoom out -

*Tapping Play/Pause, Next track, Previous track, Volume up and/or Volume down
on a computer keyboard (or any key bound to these functions) also emulates the
shutter button.

2655
HandySCAN MAX Multifunction Buttons
The scanner has buttons which have different functions in scan mode and out of scan mode.
The trigger button is the central button (1) used to accept a function or message. Its main function is to
start, pause, or stop the acquisition process.

Button Function Click Click and hold Double-click

Start / Pause Start / Exit scan
1 Scan -
acquisition mode
Toggle Fit to screen /
2 Zoom Zoom in Fast zoom in
Reset viewpoint
Toggle Lock / Unlock
3 Zoom Zoom out Fast zoom out
viewpoint
4 Smart control Enter smart control - Exit smart control
Enable / Disable high
5 High resolution - Touchscreen mode (F10)
resolution mode

Smart control options available

Use the Up (2) and Down (3) arrows to navigate the Smart Control options, and Trigger (1) to accept.

2656
 Before scanning While scanning After scanning
Predefined view
Fit to screen
Show / hide inspection items
Predefined view Finalize
Fit to screen Send to
Working Volume (Near / Fit to screen (
Standard /Far) Show / hide inspection items VXinspect|Analysis
Show / hide inspection items Auto . Adjust
Reset Scan VXinspect|Quality Control,
HandySCAN 3D MAX Touchscreen (F10) VXmodel)
calibration Full screen mode (F11) HandySCAN 3D MAX calibration
Auto . Adjust Reset Viewpoint Scan mode (Targets / Surface)
Scan mode (Targets / Surface) Exit Use clipping reference
Touchscreen (F10) Save session
Full screen mode (F11) Exit Reset scan
Touchscreen (F10)
Full screen mode (F11)
Exit

2657
3D Display Control
To activate the mouse behavior

Double-click the HandyPROBE Next or MetraSCAN 3D Validate button to activate the mouse.

HandyPROBE Next 3D display control

MetraSCAN 3D 3D display control

Icon Button Single click Click and hold Double click

Exit 3D display
Validate - Rotation mode
control

Trigger - Camera mode -

Up arrow Zoom in Fast zoom in -

Down arrow Zoom out Fast zoom out -

Cancel - Translation mode -

HandyPROBE Next pen

Can emulate the behavior of any of the 5 multifunction buttons.
buttons

2658
Accessories
Some accessories are needed to use a device or are suitable for optimizing its performance.
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand
Creaform Portable Workstation
Positioning targets and reflectors
Clip cards
Batteries
Automation Kit

2659
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

This product has been designed for companies looking for greater flexibility, mobility and improved
results in their shop-floor activities. This dedicated accessory package features a C-Track Shop-Floor
Stand1 and a C-Track Self-Power Kit. This aims to improve Creaform systems' reliability and efficiency
across the plant while in operation.

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2660
Main features

The C-Track Shop-Floor Stand simplifies the use of the HandyPROBE Next system and MetraSCAN 3D. It
can be adjusted from 0.5 m to 1.9 m (20 to 75 in). The Shop-Floor Stand makes it possible to move or roll
the C-Track in any direction.

1. Permanent connection between the C-Track and the controller.

2. Storage for the controller.

3. Storage for the HandyPROBE stylus.

4. Storage for the C-Track calibration bar1.

5. Storage for the MetraSCAN 3D.

6. Storage for the MetraSCAN 3D cable.

7. Storage for the C-Track Self-Power Kit.

8. Velcro loops (2) for excess cable.

1Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

2661
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Installation
To set up the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand1
The C-Track Shop-Floor Stand post can be installed using the 3 quick-release levers.
Post installation target result

Do not unscrew the quick-release levers since they are preadjusted to a specific
torque. Typical use is flipping the quick-release levers.

1. Flip the quick-release levers backwards

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2662
2. Slide the post on the base of the stand.

3. Flip the quick-release levers forward so that they are all parallel.

The C-Track quick-connect plate allows the C-Track head to rotate around 2 axes.

2663
4. Use the C-Track quick-connect plate to attach the C-Track to the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand
post.

5. Place the equipment on the stand.

6. Connect the cables to the C-Track.

7. If necessary, secure excess cable with provided Velcro loops located at base of C-Track
quick-connect plate.

8. Connect the cables to the controller.

2664
C-Track Self-Power Kit Setup and Use

The C-Track Self-Power Kit allows to maintain the system active while moving the C-Track around. It
avoids having to worry about the C-Track temperature stabilization and having to shut down and restart
the controller each time the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand1 needs to be moved.

Components

1. Battery slots

2. Power switch

3. Enclosure

To use the C-Track Self-Power Kit

Preinstalled on the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand, the C-Track Self-Power Kit allows to operate the C-Track
without a power cord. Three battery slots are available (2 batteries are included, a third one can be
purchased separately).

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2665
 1. Connect the C-Track power supply to the C-Track Self-Power Kit.

2. Connect the power cable from the C-Track Self-Power Kit to the C-Track controller.

3. Insert at least 2 batteries in the designated slots.

4. Power up the controller.

When used for scanning*, the C-Track Self-Power Kit battery life is:

l Up to 2.5 hours (2 batteries);

l Up to 4 hours (3 batteries)

* Estimated time based on scanning operation. The battery can last longer if the device is used for
probing only.

l To charge the batteries, turn on the power switch located on the C-Track
Self-Power Kit enclosure.

l The system will automatically switch power to batteries or power outlets

to supply energy to the C-Track controller if electricity is lost (voluntarily or
not) or resumed.

l All batteries inserted in the enclosure are drained at the same time.

To charge batteries from 0 to 100%, it takes about 3 hours for 2 batteries and 4.5 hours for 3 batteries.

An external (optional) charger can be bought if customer wants to charge a battery

outside of the C-Track Self-Power Kit.

To swap the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries

LEDs are located on each battery showing remaining power level.

At least 2 charged batteries must remain connected in the enclosure to prevent

controller shutdown (if not connected to power outlet).

2666
1. Pull the battery tab to remove the drained batteries.

2. Insert new charged ones. Make sure to push the batteries so that they lock in place.

2667
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation
Overview

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

This product has been designed for companies looking for greater flexibility, mobility and improved
results in their shop floor activities. This dedicated accessory package features a C-Track Shop-Floor
Stand1, a C- Track Self- Power Kit (can be purchased as an option) and a Creaform Shop- Floor
Workstation. This aims to improve Creaform systems' reliability and efficiency across the plant while in
operation.

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2668
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand
Front Rear

1. Adjustable clamping handles 1. Handle

2. C-Track Self-Power Kit and power 2. C-Track Self-Power Kit protection
supply protection cover cover and battery indicator
3. Front static feet 3. Docking pedal
4. Height-adjustable post 4. Rear static foot

Hardware included with Creaform's C-Track Shop-Floor Stand1

l 1 X 4 mm Allen key (metric).

l 1 X 5 mm Allen key (metric).

l 1 X 7/64 Allen key (imperial).

l 14 X No. 6-32 1/4 screws.

l 14 X No. 6 washers.

l 2 X controller brackets.

l 3 X 12'' X 0.75'' hook-and-loop straps.

l 2 X M5 X 16 screws

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2669
l 2 X M5 washers

l Connection cable

2670
 The C-Track Self-Power Kit solution (battery) is an option and can be purchased
separately.

Hardware included with the C-Track Self-Power Kit

Contents may differ from the pictures.

l 1 X external battery

l 1 X switch

l 3 X 15'' X 1'' hook-and-loop straps.

Two straps hold the battery and the other one is sold as a spare

2671
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Installation
Controller

1. Install the 2 brackets (1) on each side of the

controller and fasten the 8 bolts (2) provided.

2. Install the controller on the C-Track Shop-Floor

Stand1 and tighten the 6 screws using the Allen
key.

C-Track

1. Unscrew the M5 screws and remove the quick

release plate under the C-Track using the Allen
Key 4 mm.

Put the screws aside.

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2672
 2. Install the C-Track on the C-TrackShop-Floor
Stand and tighten the 2 M5 x 16 screws
provided.

To facilitate installation, make sure the

C-Track is in the same position as shown
in the image.

3. Connect the cables to the C-Track.

4. Connect the cables to the controller.

5. Install the power supply using the 3 hook-and-
loop straps to fasten it to the stand.
6. Connect the power supply to the controller.

C-Track Self-Power Kit

1. Remove the 2 M5 screws and washers on the

stand and keep them aside.
2. Install the switch on the stand and tighten the
2 washers and the 2 M5 screws from the previous
step.
3. Insert the battery in the protection cover and
fasten it using the 3 hook-and-loop straps
provided.
4. Plug the controller power supply into the back
of the switch.
5. Plug the appropriate cable of the switch into
the battery and plug the other cable into the
controller.

2673
Using the C-Track Self-Power Kit
The C-Track Self-Power Kit allows to maintain the system active while moving the C-Track around. It
avoids having to worry about the C-Track temperature stabilization and having to shut down and restart
the controller each time the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand1 needs to be moved.
The C-Track Self-Power Kit battery life is approximately 30 minutes.

Do not use the battery while operating the system (probing or scanning). The Self-
Power Kit must only be used to move the system.

To use the C-Track Self-Power Kit

1. Make sure the battery is fully charged.

2. Make sure to safely secure the battery in the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand protection cover
using the 2 hook-and-loop straps.

3. Connect the switch and the battery.

4. Press on the button on the battery to turn it on.

5. Then, turn the switch to ON.

6. Turn the switch OFF once the operation is completed.

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2674
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation
Front Rear

1. Lockable front access door.

2. Handle.
3. Scale bar drawer. 1. Wide double lockable doors.
4. HandyPROBE and MaxSHOT 3D 2. Wire management access.
drawer. 3. Lockable swivel casters.
5. Free space drawer. 4. Pre-drilled desktop support
6. Docking station. mounting holes.
7. MetraSCAN 3D drawer.
8. Foot rest.

2675
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation
Accessories Installation
TV support

The Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation also includes TV screen adjustable brackets suitable for several
screen sizes.

1 Monitors are not included and must be purchased separately.

2 LED TVs are recommended due to their light weight, while plasma TVs may be
too heavy for the support.

TVs larger than 40'' will not pass through standard door frames while mounted on
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation.

2676
 1. Take the TV rack stored in the drawer compartments.
2. Remove the bolts and the washers on each bracket and put them aside.
3. Depending on the screen size, adjust the brackets to the required length and insert the
welded screws in the extrusion.
4. Tightly screw the washers and the bolts back.
Available bolt patterns

l Vesa MIS-E, C

l Vesa MIS-F 200

l Vesa MIS-F 300

l Vesa MIS-F 400

Recommended TV mount types

Desktop CPU bracket

It is possible to install a desktop on either side of Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation as the mounting
hole patterns and plates are identical on both sides. The docking station can be replaced with the
desktop CPU bracket. However, the docking station cannot be installed on the other side of the cart.
Side plates can be removed to connect the computer cables inside the cart.

Creaform does not provide the bracket, but recommends purchasing Kendall
Howard model # 1915-1-400-00 Desktop CPU bracket as the mounting holes
pattern is pre-drilled for this model.

2677
2678
Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation Cable
Management

1. TV power

2. HDMI

3. Laptop power supply

4. Power Bar

5. Ethernet 1

6. Ethernet 2

7. P-Clamps

8. C-Track cord wraps

2679
P-Clamps instructions

1. Remove the bolts using the screwdriver provided.

2. Insert the cable in the P-Clamp.

3. Tighten the bolt back using the same screwdriver as for the previous step.

Make sure the cable is long enough before inserting it in the P-Clamp.

Power bar installation

Creaform recommends installing a power bar inside the workstation, on the same side of the front
access door.

The power bar is not provided by Creaform.

2680
Illustration of the recommended installation:

Front access door

If your system is connected with a C-Link :

2681
 1. Install the D-Link box on the back of the front access door using 1 of the hook-and-loop
straps provided.

2. Connect the power supply and the Ethernet cables to the D-Link box.

3. Roll up exceeding wire.

4. Connect the power supply to the power bar.

If your system is connected without a C-Link :

1. Install the USB adapter on the back of the front access door using 1 of the hook-and-loop
straps provided.

2. Connect the Ethernet cable and the USB extension to the USB adapter.

3. Roll up any excess wire.

2682
C-Track Shop-Floor Stand Storage
Instructions

To store inside Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation

Up to 2 C- Track Shop- Floor Stands can be stored simultaneously inside the Creaform Shop- Floor
Workstation:

2683
Storage steps
Follow the steps to adjust the C-Track in storage position:

1. Place the C-Track in storage position:

a. Tilt the C-Track in vertical position.

b. Turn the post counterclockwise until the groove is in line with the stopper.

c. Slide the C-Track all the way down.

2684
 2. Make sure Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation rear swivel casters are locked before
storing the C-Track.

3. Make sure the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand1 rear swivel casters are locked not to rotate.

4. Press on the pedal and lean the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand towards yourself by pulling
on the handle.

Make sure to hold the C-TrackShop-Floor Stand as it will become unstable once
standing on the rear casters.

1Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part to be inspected.

2685
5. Align and insert both front casters with the rail inside the Creaform Shop-Floor
Workstation.

2686
 6. Lift the back of the C-TrackShop-Floor Stand and push it forward inside Creaform Shop-
Floor Workstation.

Make sure to push the C-TrackShop-Floor Stand forward until you hear a click,
indicating it has been safely secured.

Removal steps
Follow the next few steps to remove the C- Track Shop- Floor Stand from Creaform Shop- Floor
Workstation:

1. Press on the pedal to unlock the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand.

2. Pull the handle towards yourself.

3. Let the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand slide down until the rear casters safely touch the floor.

4. Using the handle and putting a foot on the pedal, carefully put the C-Track Shop-Floor
Stand on its 4 casters.

Make sure to hold the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand so it does not hit the floor.

Do not pull on the C-Track to carry it around.

To install on the docking station

It is possible to install the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand on Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation docking
station to perform inspections.

Be careful as the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand can hit the workstation when not set to
the proper position.

2687
To prepare the docking station

1. Unhook the rubber straps by pulling on them.

2. Lower the shelf.

The shelf features dampers to avoid falling off if dropped.

To place the C-TrackShop-Floor Stand on the docking station

1. Make sure to lock the Creaform Shop-Floor Workstation rear casters.

2. Make sure the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand rear swivel casters are locked in rotation.

3. Press on the pedal and lean the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand towards yourself by pulling on
the handle.

2688
 Make sure to hold the stand as it will become unstable once standing on the rear
casters.

4. Align both front casters in the rail on the docking station.

5. Lift the back of the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand and push it forward inside the cart.

6. Make sure to push the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand forward until you hear a click indicating it
has been safely secured.

To remove from the docking station

Follow the next few steps to remove safely the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand from the docking station to
perform inspections or to move from a place to another.

1. Press on the pedal to unlock the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand.

2. Pull the handle towards yourself.

3. Let the stand slide down until the rear casters touch the floor.

4. Using the handle and putting a foot on the pedal, carefully put the stand on its 4 casters.

Make sure to hold the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand so it does not hit the floor.
Do not pull on the C-Track to carry it around.

2689
Creaform Portable Workstation

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The Creaform Portable Workstation is designed to provide flexibility and mobility to users. This
workstation conveniently places all required equipment in 1 carrying case. Two solutions are available
according to the scanner used.
Solution for HandySCAN 3D and Go!SCAN 3D Solution for MetraSCAN 3D

Component

2690
Solution for HandySCAN 3D and Go!SCAN 3D

1. Carrying handle

2. Desk unit

3. Storage space: cables

4. Storage space

5. Stabilizer leg

6. Side shelves (left and right)

7. Calibration plate storage drawer: additional storage space behind

8. Computer storage space

9. Scanner storage space

2691
 10. Storage space

11. Storage space

Solution for MetraSCAN 3D

1. Carrying handle

2. Desk unit

3. Scanner storage space

4. Computer storage space

5. Stabilizer leg

6. Side shelves (left and right)

7. Storage space: cables

2692
 8. Calibration plate drawer

9. Calibration plate storage space

Weight and dimensions

Compatibility Weight Dimensions

l 32 kg (70 lbs) fully loaded with equipment (computer,

HandySCAN 3D and scanner, calibration plate, scanner stand, etc.)
Go!SCAN 3D 864 mm (34")
x 458 mm
l 27 kg (60 lbs) empty (18") x 610
mm (24")

MetraSCAN 3D l 29 kg (64 lbs) empty

Set-up

1. Pull the carrying handle (1)* to move the Creaform Portable Workstation.

2. Lay down the carrying case and unfold the bottom door hinge.

3. Rotate the stabilizer leg (5)* to make the Creaform Portable Workstation stable once it
stands upright.

4. Carefully tilt the workstation upright.

5. Unfold the 4 other door hinges to open the carrying case door (1 on top and 3 on the door
side).

6. Pull out the desk unit using the drawer handle (blue) and lift it off.

2693
7. Align the desk unit with the carrying handle (1)*, and drop it on the top of the carrying
case.

8. Lower the desk unit until the latches stick to the brackets and snap into place.

9. Open the side shelves (6)* of the desk unit using the openings provided for this purpose.
Magnets ensure they are securely fastened.

* For details, see the Components section.

2694
 The side shelves are designed to hold the mouse or lightweight objects; do not
lean on them or put heavy objects on them.
Be careful if placing the scanner on top of the shelves; the scanner could fall if the
Creaform Portable Workstation is hit and/or the cables are pulled. It is not
recommended to put the scanner on the shelves on unstable ground.

Connection

2695
 1. Remove the top of the desk unit using the press button to access the storage space.

2. Install the scanner power supply adapter and wrap cables using the cord wraps (A).

3. Place the computer power supply adapter and wrap cables using the cord wraps (B).

4. Pull out cables through the desk unit opening for this purpose (C).

5. Connect the power cables (scanner and computer) using the opening for this purpose (D).

6. Replace the top of the desk unit. Make sure that no cables obstruct the side shelves and
that the spring plunger clicks into place.

7. Insert the scanner repeater in its holder located at the back of the desk unit (E).

The power supply adapters installed in the desk unit(steps 2 and 3) can be left
permanently in place.

Scanner calibration

2696
1. Gently pull out the Calibration plate storage drawer (A).

2. Open the calibration plate cover (B).

3. Calibrate the scanner (for details, see the corresponding scanner calibration section).

The calibration plate is held in place with Velcro tape. Therefore, it is possible to
change its orientation to ease the calibration process. It needs to be put back in its
storage orientation before closing the drawer.

4. Once the calibration is finished, put the calibration plate back in place and close the
carrying case door.

5. Scan.

2697
Legacy Field Pack

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

Components

1. Workstation

l Protective case

2. Tripod

l Dolly for Tripod (optional)

3. Computer and accessories

l Certified laptop computer

l Wireless mouse

2698
 l Certified wireless tablet

l Tablet magnetic support

l Tablet charger

4. Scanner accessories

l USB 3.0 cable

l Scanner magnetic stand

5. Power source

l AC power cable

l Creaform battery pack with charger (AC power cable) and battery cable

l Booster cable (optional)

2699
 1. Scanner USB 3.0 cable

2. Tablet charger

3. AC power cable (2x)

4. Battery cable

5. Booster cable (purchased separately)

Set up
Connect the scanner following these steps to avoid any damage:

Workstation

1. Install the tripod by deeply pushing all 3 feet into the ground. If installed
on a floor, use the strap to prevent the legs from spreading out.
2. Place the protective case on the tripod; use the circular extrusion under
the casing to center the latter on the tripod.
3. Use the threaded knob located below the head of the tripod to firmly fix
the casing on it.
4. Open the protective case.
5. Open up the trays and lift up the panel that holds the computer, using the
handle, and remove the items from the protective case.

2700
Protective case contents

l Cables
l Magnetic wireless
tablet support
l Wireless mouse
l Magnetic scanner
support

Connection

1. AC POWER IN
2. AC/DC power source switch
3. DC POWER IN
4. Safety fuse
5. Scanner power source
6. Scanner cable holder

Orient the power switch towards your computer and scanner power source.

2701
AC power

1. Plug the power cable into the AC POWER IN connector.

2. Plug the other end into an AC power source (100-240VAC 50/60Hz 3A) like a wall
power outlet or a power generator.
3. Turn the AC/DC power source switch towards the AC POWER IN connector on the
Field Pack panel.

DC power

1. Plug the battery cable into the DC POWER IN connector on the Field Pack board.
2. Plug the other end into the Creaform battery POWER OUT connector (12VDC-
12A).
3. Turn the AC/DC power source switch towards the DC POWER IN connector on the
Field Pack panel.
4. Turn the battery switch towards POWER OUT connector.

Creaform battery

The battery fuse is unscrewed prior to shipping and covered with tape.
Remove the tape and push down the fuse with a slotted screwdriver, and turn it clockwise. One of the
battery watch LEDs should light up indicating the battery's remaining capacity. At this point, it is
recommended to charge the battery.
The battery life is approximately 8 hours.
To charge it from an AC power source:

2702
 1. Plug the power cable into the CHARGER POWER IN connector and orient the power switch
towards it

2. While charging, the 3 LEDs for the battery will light up in sequence

l Slow sequence: battery is charging under normal conditions

l Fast sequence with a beep sound: the battery is fully charged

Status of LEDs and buzzer

Description State
Green Full charge
Green + Yellow Slight undercharge
Yellow Half charge
Yellow+Red Minimal charge
Red Discharged

To lengthen the battery lifetime (± 5 years):

l The battery should be charged at least every 2 months to prevent permanent damage from fully
discharging.

l Best practice is to leave the battery plugged in when it is not in use. There is no danger in
overcharging the battery leaving it plugged in.

l As the lifespan of a battery is about 5 years, it is normal to replace it after this period.

Car battery
As a backup option, any 12V car battery can power up the Field Pack. This option requires purchase of
the available booster cables.

1. Connect the Creaform battery cable to the field pack DC POWER IN connector and
make sure the power switch is in the appropriate position.
2. Join the booster cable to the other end of the battery cable to be able to reach an
appropriate 12V power source.
3. Fix the red clamp to the car battery's red port (+).
4. Position the black clamp to the car battery's black port (-).

2703
Scanner

1. Connect the 8 m USB 3.0 cable to the USB 3.0 port on the right of the computer.

2. Connect the cable to the scanner power source on the Field pack panel.

3. Connect the other ends to the scanner.

Charging the wireless tablet

Use the tablet charger and plug it into an AC power source.

Mounting and unmounting the computer to the protective case

The computer is permanently fixed on a removable plate with heavy-duty Velcro strips. It can be
removed in an out of the protective case’s shelf.

2704
Mounting

1. Put the computer on the plate

2. Hold the pin, slide the computer and the plate at the back of the Field Pack to ensure the 4
screws are completely inserted on the slots

3. Insert the pin located behind the computer

4. Plug all cables into the computer, including the power supply

Unmounting

1. Unplug all the cables connected to the computer, including the power supply

2. Pull the pin located behind the computer

3. While holding the pin, slide the computer and the plate toward the front of the Field Pack
until the 4 screws' heads are out of the slots and in the larger hole.

4. Lift the computer and the plate out

2705
Computer installation
The Field Pack is designed to fit with a Creaform certified computer - HP Zbook and its predecessor HP
Elitebook 8570w.
If you plan to use your own computer with the Field Pack, follow the steps below to fix it in the
protective case.
The installation of the computer is PERMANENT and involves a rugged clamping system with heavy-
duty Velcro strips attached to an detachable plate. Contact Creaform Customer Support if it has to be
removed.

2706
1. Open the Field Pack casing lid and both side panels.

2. Place the computer on the 2 Velcro strips of the center shelf which will hold it in place once
in the Field Pack.

3. Remove the protective film off the Velcro strips. Do not place your computer on the shelf.

4. While holding the computer, connect it to the power supply.

5. Keeping the power supply connected, align the computer on the detachable plate and
place it on the shelf.

6. Push firmly to fix the Velcro strips together.

2707
Positioning Targets and Reflectors
Several accessories are available, some are optional, others mandatory depending on the technology.
Contact the Sales Support for more information.

Positioning targets
Size Description

3 mm black contour

6 mm black contour

8 mm black contour

10 mm black contour

12 mm black contour (the only target type applicable to the

R-Series product line)

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

2708
 Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Super Adhesive

Magnetic

Light adhesive targets are recommended for parts that should not be damaged since they do not leave
glue on the surface.

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

l High reflectivity targets are meant to reflect light-emitting diodes (LED) on a longer distance
and are mostly used in photogrammetry.

Coded targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Magnetic coded targets are designed to build a tracking model while using the module. In
photogrammetry, they can also be used to create a positioning model with the system.

2709
 Size Description

6 mm reflector

8 mm reflector

10 mm reflector

12 mm reflector

Type Description

Adhesive

Light Adhesive

Magnetic

Reflectivity Description

High reflectivity

2710
Magnetic glass protected targets

Does not apply to the R-Series product line.

Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces.

Size Description

12 mm diameter

Type

Magnetic

Reflectivity

High reflective

Optical reflectors
Easy to remove, these magnetic and reusable reflectors are designed for metallic surfaces. They allow a
360° rotation when their reflector shaft is fixed on a magnetic support (0°, 45° and 90° shafts are
available).

2711
Reflector type Description

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 0 ° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 20 mm - Ø 10 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 45° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

2712
 Reflector type Description

l 90° shaft (Ø 6 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 8 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 0.25 in.

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 10 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

l 90° shaft (Ø 12 mm reflector - height 12 mm - Ø 6 mm

pin)

Magnetic base for swivel optical reflectors, available for Ø 6 mm,

Ø 0.25 in. or Ø 10 mm pins

Recommended for R-Series products.

l Octagonal glass-protected target accessory kit

designed for automated photogrammetry and manual
C-Track movement around the part. Designed to be
mounted on fixtures.

l 12 mm, glass protected, 360° magnetic targets are

reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy
attachment to ferromagnetic surfaces.

360° magnetic targets

These dodecahedron target bases are reusable and are magnetic on one side for easy attachment to
ferromagnetic surfaces.

2713
Type Description

6 mm

12 mm, glass protected

2714
Clip Cards
6 Clip cards are included with the HandySCAN MAX.
Clip cards help automatically create clipping planes in the software. Each has 12 mm, high reflectivity,
positioning targets arranged in a pattern recognized by the software. For more details, see Using Clip
Cards section.

2715
Batteries

The battery connection and recharging process vary depending on the device.

Battery requirements
HandySCAN
BLACK and
HandySCAN Go!SCAN HandyPROBE C-Track Shop-Floor
SILVER and SPARK Next Stand
MaxSHOT 3D
(2nd gen.)

Type

Lithium-ion battery (docking AA alkaline

Self-Power Kit (includes a
system available 1)
docking station)
Voltage 14.4 V 1.2 V - 1.5 V 14.4 V
Amperage 6.8 Ah 2.8 Ah 6.8 Ah
Number of
batteries 1 1 2 At least 2 (up to 33)
required

Up to 2.5 hours (2
Autonomy2 8 hours 4 hours 4 hours batteries)
Up to 4 hours (3 batteries)
Connection Power cable Power cable Enclosure slots

1 A 24 V docking system with lithium-ion battery can be purchased.

2Estimated battery autonomy of uninterrupted scan. The battery autonomy time may vary depending
on the state of the battery.
3 An extra battery can be purchased separately.

2716
To connect the battery

1. Connect the longer cable for the battery to the USB 3.0 cable.

2. Connect the USB 3.0 cable to the computer.

3. Connect the other extremity of the 3.0 USB cable to the scanner.

4. Connect the power cable to the scanner.

To connect the C-Track Self-Power Kit to the C-Track Shop-Floor Stand

For details, see the C-Track Self-Power Kit Setup and Use section.

To replace the HandyPROBE Next batteries

1. Open the battery door and remove the batteries.

2. Put in the new batteries, making sure they are inserted in the right direction. Put batteries
in negative end first against the spring, then push the positive end in.

3. Put the battery door back in place.

To swap the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries

For details, see the C-Track Self-Power Kit Setup and Use section.

To recharge the battery

1. Plug the charger power supply cable into an electrical source.

2. Connect the battery cable (female connector) to the charger cable (male connector).

2717
Charger indicators
Indicator Meaning
Flashing green light The battery is charging.
Solid green light The battery has completed its charge.
Error condition(s):

l The charger microprocessor cannot communicate with the

Solid red light battery, or

l The charger microprocessor cannot communicate with the

internal battery charger engine.

The battery has a charge meter to indicate its relative state of charge. The battery LCD flashes to indicate
charging.

Battery charge time

The charge time of the battery is about 3 hours.

The recharge time may vary depending on the state of the battery.

To recharge the C-Track Self-Power Kit batteries

For details, see the C-Track Self-Power Kit Setup and Use section.

2718
Automation Kit

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in injury, malfunction of

or damage to the equipment. Read all the instructions carefully before using this
product.

The Automation Kit is a turnkey solution for using handheld Creaform scanners in automated workflows.
HandySCAN 3D with Fanuc CRX-5iA MetraSCAN 3D with Fanuc CRX-
10iA/L

2719
Using the Automation Kit

Please refer to the System Preparation section of the R-Series user manual.

Automation Kit Components

Robots

The automation kit includes a Fanuc CRX- 5iA for HandySCAN 3D and a Fanuc CRX- 10iA/L for
MetraSCAN 3D.
Grippers

Grippers allow attaching select HandySCAN 3D or MetraSCAN 3D scanners to a robot arm. One is
included in an Automation Kit or they can be sold separately for custom applications.
HandySCAN 3D Gripper MetraSCAN 3D Gripper

Dresspacks

To protect and secure cables, a dresspack is included with the Automation Kit. These dresspack also be
purchased separately for custom applications.

2720
2721
Glossary

Accuracy
The degree of agreement between the result of a measurement and a true value.

Acute
An angle between 0 and 90 degrees.

Alignment
Adjustment of an object in relation with other objects, or a static orientation of some object or set of
objects in relation to others.

Angular scanner bracket

A 90-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

Auto assign
Assign the alignment to the inspection program entities.

Auto. align
Alignment of the CAD with a target pick on targets seen by the C-Track.

Boundary
Lines that indicate where the surface of the 3D model ends.

Bundle adjustment
Algorithm that refines camera position estimates by finding parameters that most accurately predict the
location of the observed points in a set of different redundant viewpoints.

C-Track autocalibration mode

A fully automated calibration sequence of operations with the C-Track calibration bar made by the robot.

2722
C-Track compensation
Process that will allow the C-Track to adjust internal parameters based on the temperature and
orientation.

C-Track scene
Option which allows displaying different elements in the 3D viewer depending on the device connected.

C-Track Shop-Floor Stand

Stand designed by Creaform to facilitate the mobility of the C-Track dual-camera sensors around the part
to be inspected.

Calibration bar
Bar provided with reflectors which is used for the device calibration.

Calibration bar holder

The link between the Tool plate and the C-Track calibration bar.

Caliper
A software tool used to take measurements directly on a mesh (similar to the physical device).

Clean mesh
Iterative function allowing users to detect and select the irregularities in the mesh such as intersecting
triangles and small holes.

Color map
Set of color values used to illustrate the deviation between measured data and a reference.

Composite tolerance
Tolerance which specifies two tolerances for the same geometric characteristic of a feature or for features
that have different datum requirements.

Continuous Termination (CNT)

A motion type that causes the robot to decelerate as it approaches the destination position but it does
not stop there. After, robot accelerates toward the next position.

Control box
Safety interlocks that serve the protection and safety of equipment. The control box allows preventing the
unlock command to release the C-Track calibration bar when it is not in the tool rack.

Coupling
Physical action of locking the master and tool plates together during the calibration process.

2723
Cross-section
A section formed by a plane cutting through an object, usually at right angles to an axis.

Datum
A theoretically exact point, axis, or plane derived from the true geometric counterpart of a specified
datum feature. A datum is the origin from which the location or geometric characteristics of features of a
part are established.

Datum plane view

View of the datum plane in the 3D viewer.

DCS
Dual Check Safety is a tool used to create zones around a robot to avoid collisions.

Degrees of freedom
The six directions of movement for an object in X-Y-Z coordinates. There are three translations in the X, Y
and Z directions and three rotations around the X, Y and Z axes.

Design factor
Safety factor based on the ratio of the ultimate load to maximum permissible load that can be safely
placed on a structure.

Digital twin
A digital replica of physical assets (physical twin), systems and devices that can be used for various
purposes.

DRF
The Datum Reference Frame is used to align the measurements with the nominal values. It creates the
transformation matrix bringing the measurements on the nominal values.

EC
Environment Compensation is a function related to the C-Track. When this function is activated, the
system continuously performs the compensation process.

Edges
Method to measure an entity requiring a triangle model (e.g. to inspect sheet metal and end pieces).

2724
Enabling device
Also called dead-man switch. A 3-position switch that enables or disables robot motion to safeguard the
robot operator during the integration phase.

Entity weight
Numerical importance of the entity deviation along the selected axis.

Feature
An area to be scanned on the part.

Field of view
The area that is visible.

Fine termination
A motion type that causes the robot to stop at the destination position before moving to the next
position.

Fit on points
Method to define a nominal entity constructed by the users when choosing points on CAD model and on
the best fit model.

Fixture
Device to guide a tool or hold an object in place.

Flange
A flat piece of material placed on a robot that holds the MetraSCAN in place and prevents it from moving.

Flatness
A GD&T callout in which the tolerance defines a zone between two parallel planes within which a surface
must lie. The degree to which a surface of a flat product approaches a plane.

GD&T
Acronym for Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing.

Geometric counterpart
The theoretically perfect boundary (actual mating envelope) or fitted tangent plane of a specified datum
feature.

2725
Geometric tolerance
The category of tolerances to control form, profile, orientation, location, and runout.

Home position
A joint position that is used as reference on a robot.

IGES Files
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) is a file format which defines a vendor neutral data format
that allows the digital exchange of information among Computer-aided design (CAD) systems.

Jig
Device which guides a tool or holds an object in place (synonym of fixture).

Jog frame
It is the frame used while moving the robot. Can be related to a part within the work envelope of a robot.

Jog speed
Speed at which a robot will move towards a part within its work envelope.

Laser tracker
Length measuring device for quick and precise 3D measurements in aeronautics, automotive, robotics,
mechanical engineering of large parts.

Leapfrog
Movement in which supporting elements are moved successively through or by one another along the
axis of movement.

Linear scanner bracket

A 0-degree angle bracket used for mounting the MetraSCAN 750-R on the robot flange.

LMC
Least material condition is a feature of size that describes a dimensional or size condition where the least
amount of material exists within its dimensional tolerance.

2726
Lock state
The lock air pressure provided to the master plate locking mechanism, forcing the piston to lock the
master and tool plates together.

Locked
An output signal provided by a proximity sensor indicating that the coupling mechanism is in the locked
position.

Master plate
The active half of the tool changer that grabs the tool plate.

Master plate adapter

The link between the master plate and the robot mounting bracket.

Maximum jog speed

Maximum robot speed measured at the tool center point (TCP). Robot is limited to move below 250
mm/sec in manual mode (T1).

Mean edge length

Average value of the length of the sides (edges) of the triangles.

Mesh triangles
A network of triangles that are made from a collection of vertices, edges and faces to form a 3D surface.

MMC
Maximum material condition is a feature of size that describes a dimensional or size condition where the
maximum amount of material exists within its dimensional tolerance.

Nominal Mesh
Scanned data used as a reference.

Nominal value
Rounded or approximate value of a characteristic of a measuring instrument that provides a guide to its
use. This is normally the value indicated by the manufacturer.

2727
Normal (noun)
A vector that is perpendicular to a surface at the point where it intersects with a plane tangent to the
surface.

NURBS
Non-Uniform Rational Basis Splines (NURBS) is a mathematical model commonly used in computer
graphics for generating and representing curves and surfaces.

Obtuse
An angle between 90 and 180 degrees.

Offset
A specified distance from a known location.

OLP
Offline programming is a method allowing the programming of robot trajectories independently from the
actual robot cell.

Orientation and center

Define numerically the starting orientation and the nominal center of an entity.

Outliers
Observation that is numerically distant from the rest of the data.

Photogrammetry
Science of making measurements from photographs. The input is photographs, and the output is typically
a 3D representation of a real-world object or scene.

Physical alignment
A step that will best-fit the position of a CAD model in the simulated environment on a selection of targets
or scan data.

Pick on CAD
Select the nominal value on the CAD model.

Point cloud
A collection of raw data points.

2728
Position (GD&T)
Total permissible variation that a feature can have from its nominal position.

Positioning targets
Markers used by the scanner as reference to position itself in the 3d space. They can either be stickers or
magnetic pieces.

Powder
Light color powder used to ease the readings of the laser lines reflection. Using powder on the surface to
scan can also improve the readings of small details or sharp edges.

Power Distribution Unit

A device fitted with multiple outputs designed to convert and distribute electric power, especially to racks
of computers and networking equipment located within a data center. It converts tension from 200-240v
to 110-120 volts.

Probe emulator
A feature of the VXinspect software that makes it possible to run the program with a probe simulator.

Probe tip tool

The tool used to lock in place the probe tip, the probe extension and the Smartconnect probe adapter
together.

Probing compensation
Process that will automatically make up for the probe tip radius according to the stylus orientation.

Product Manager
The reference tool for managing configuration and license files for Creaform products.

Profile tolerance
Defines a uniform boundary around a surface where the elements of the surface must lie.

Project tree
Structure that branches out different elements from a central point in VXelements interface.

Proximity sensor
A sensor that detects the presence of a metallic object approaching the sensing face without mechanical
contact.

2729
Q

Quick add entity mode

A mode to quickly add entities using a HandyPROBE device.

Quick measure
An option that can add and measure entities using the HandyPROBE device.

R-Series Autocalibration Kit

Assembly of all necessary components for C-Track automatic calibration.

R-Series I/O Module

Input/output communication interface allowing communication between VXelements and robot
controllers.

R-Series I/O Module (EtherNet/IP)

Input/output communication interface allowing communication between VXelements and robot
controllers through an EtherNet/IP connection.

R-Series I/O Module Hardware

Hardware input/output communication box allowing communication between VXelements, robot
controllers and other components throught physical I/O component.

R-Series Industrial Computer

Rugged rackmounted industrial computer.

R-Series Productivity Station

Network of industrial computers made up of a rackmount main computer and 2 rackmount unit
computers.

R-Series Productivity Station Plus

Network of industrial computers made up of a rackmount main computer and 3 rackmount unit
computers.

Reflex angle (acute)

An angle between 180 and 360 degrees, forming a complete circle with the acute angle.

2730
Reflex angle (obtuse)
An angle between 180 and 360 degrees, forming a complete circle with the obtuse angle.

Resolution
The smallest quantity that can be measured.

Robot configuration
A particular set of joint positions on the robot.

Robot programmed speed

The robot speed specified in the program.

RPS
Acronym of Reference Point System. Best fits entity center points using constraints and weight.

Scanning speed
Speed of the TCP when moving the robot.

Shutter speed
Unit of measurement which determines how long the shutter remains open.

Smooth mesh
Function to smooth the surface noise of the mesh.

Speed override
Applies a scaling, from 100% to 1%, to the speed of the movements that are sent to the robot.

Stand-off distance
Optimal distance to observe when scanning an object.

Starting orientation
Starting point when manually adding a rotation to a nominal entity.

Surface best fit

Best fit is one of several different types of alignment. Global datums/features/surfaces alignment with all
or selected data. Best fit can be used when no other information is available for alignment.

2731
Surfaces (mode)
A mode to quickly add entities, allowing the research of primitives including only CAD surfaces.

Surfaces and edges (mode)

A mode to quickly add entities, allowing the research of primitives including surfaces and CAD edges.

Sweep
A trajectory of the scanner TCP.

Symmetry
A condition in which a feature is symmetrically disposed on the center plane of a datum feature.

TCP
The tool center point (TCP) refers to a coordinate system located on the tool (where it interacts with parts)
and used to control the robot.

Tessellation
Pattern made of identical shapes that fit together without any gaps.

Texture
Color data acquired by scanners that support color acquisition.

Timeline
A graphical, sequential representation of the sweeps forming the robot path.

Tolerance
The permitted deviation between the declared value of a quantity and the measured value. The tolerance
is the difference between the maximum and minimum limits.

Tool changer
A device made up of multiple sections: the master plate adapter, the master plate, the tool plate and the
tool plate holder.

Tool frame
Origin of the frame is the TCP. Transformed frame of the flange.

Tool plate
The passive half of the tool changer which is grabbed by the master plate.

2732
Tool rack
A fixture that holds the C-Track calibration bar when not in use.

Translation modifier
Modifier indicating that the basic location of the datum feature simulator is unlocked, and can translate
within the specified geometric tolerance to fully engage the feature.

Triangulation
Process of determining the location of a point by measuring angles to it from known points at either end
of a fixed baseline.

True position
The theoretically exact location of a feature established by basic dimensions.

Uncoupling
Physical action of unlocking the master and tool plates during the calibration process.

Unlock state
The unlock air pressure provided to the master plate locking mechanism, forcing the piston to release the
master and tool plates to be separated.

Unlocked
An output signal provided by a proximity sensor indicating that the coupling mechanism is in the
unlocked position.

VE
The Volume Extension is a function which allows continuously acquiring targets while moving the C-Track.

Virtual alignment
A step that allows positioning the part and the fixture in the simulated environment.

Volumetric accuracy
The degree of agreement between the result of measurements and a true value repeated in the device
working volume.

2733
W

Wheel
A wheel-like control to adjust the scanning angle of different sweeps.

Wizard
A form of help that guides the users through each step of the software analysis process.

Work cell
A complete system that includes the robot, controller, and other peripherals such as a positioner and
safety environment.

World coordinate system

Term used to describe the original XYZ coordinate system position.

World frame (robot)

Default frame which cannot be changed. It is the robot coordinate system origin.

2734